JP2023075306A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.

SOLUTION: Winning hole state transition means for switching a state of a winning hole between a ball entry state and a ball non-entry state includes means for switching the winning hole to the ball entry state after completion of a game round concerned in a first case where establishment of a predetermined condition is determined by determination means, and for switching the winning hole to the ball entry state after completion of a game round concerned in a second case where it is determined that special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy a predetermined condition and a predetermined, specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. Performance execution means executes a performance for promoting shooting of game balls during a period from a point of time when a game round in the first case is completed to a point of time when a state transition mode is determined in the first case, and executes a performance for promoting shooting of game balls during a period from a point of time when a game round in the second case is completed and a point of time after determination of the state transition mode to first transition of the winning hole to a ball entry state in the second case.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 306

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines are designed to improve the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and simplify the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and providing more sound games. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player;
a prize winning opening which is a ball entry part into which a game ball can enter and which gives a player a prize ball which is a game ball as a privilege when a game ball enters the ball entry part; ,
The winning hole is divided into a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the above state. Winning hole state transition means for making a state transition between a ball entering state and
State transition mode determining means for determining a state transition mode in which the winning hole state transition means causes the state transition of the winning hole;
production execution means for executing production;
with
The winning entrance state transition means
In a first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the state of the winning hole is changed from the non-ball entering state to the ball entering state after the game round ends. transition to
In the second case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, after the game round ends, the above-mentioned comprising means for transitioning the state of the winning hole from the non-ball-entering state to the ball-entering state;
The performance execution means is
In the first case, the state transition mode determination means determines the state transition mode from the point in time when the game round in the first case is completed, with an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined mode. a means for performing a period up to the point in time
In the second case, the state transition mode determining means determines the state transition mode at the point in time when the game round in the second case is completed, and the effect prompting the shooting of the game ball in a predetermined mode is performed. means for executing from the time point after the determination to the time when the winning hole state transition means first transitions the state of the winning hole from the non-ball-entering state to the ball-entering state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main controller and the structure of an inspection machine in detail. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the content of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of an input port provided in a main MPU; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining ball-entering detection processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing entering ball determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the presence/absence of a hit ball is detected; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a CPU of a game history management chip; It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main-control apparatus and the structure of an inspection machine with which the pachinko machine of aspect 6 of 1st Embodiment is provided. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the content of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main-control apparatus and the structure of an inspection machine with which the pachinko machine of aspect 7 of 1st Embodiment is provided. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 11 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an overview of processing in a main MPU in aspect 11 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 12 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing entering ball detection processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing game history processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 37 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 46 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment performs. It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of a comparative example performs. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through gates. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment performs. 4 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing executed in the MPU of the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of modification 2 of a 2nd embodiment performs. It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of modification 3 of a 2nd embodiment performs. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. It is an explanatory view explaining a variable prize winning mechanism. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the first big winning hole. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the non-V winning area of the second big winning hole. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the V winning area of the second big winning hole. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening and closing pattern of the first opening and closing door and the second opening and closing door in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot and the opening and closing pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening-and-closing pattern of the 1st opening-and-closing door and the 2nd opening-and-closing door in the opening-and-closing execution mode performed with the second kind jackpot as a trigger, and the opening-and-closing pattern concerned. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is an explanatory view for explaining a variable winning mechanism in Modification 1 of the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a variable winning mechanism in Modification 2 of the third embodiment. As a modification 3 of the third embodiment, an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door and the second opening/closing door in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern will be described. It is an explanatory diagram for. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variable winning mechanism as a modification 4 of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening-and-closing pattern of an opening-and-closing door, and the said opening-and-closing pattern as the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variable winning mechanism in Modification 7 of the third embodiment. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success or failure table (success table for electric role product open lottery) used when executing the electric role product open lottery. It is a time chart explaining the point giving effect (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision production|presentation X1 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision production|presentation X2 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision production|presentation X3 is performed. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer effect and a button pressing effect. It is a time chart explaining the point giving effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining colors of stages; It is explanatory drawing explaining production|presentation during waiting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in which points are not given; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer effect and a button pressing effect that are executed in game rounds. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a game cycle setting information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows production information setting processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot production scenario table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ready-to-win effect scenario table; As an example, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining a production scenario corresponding to the provisional change time T=t4 of the production scenario table for big win. It is an explanatory view explaining a point grant scenario table for jackpot/ready-to-win. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision scenario for jackpot and reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a non-reach effect scenario table; As an example, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining a production scenario corresponding to the provisional change time T=t24 of the production scenario table for non-reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a non-reach point grant scenario table; It is an explanatory view explaining each point grant scenario for non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. FIG. 10 is an image diagram of an effect pattern generated based on the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario set for the game turn to be processed; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point-giving effect effect pattern table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point-giving effect effect pattern recorded in a point-giving effect effect pattern table; It is a flow chart which shows point grant production execution processing. 4 is a flowchart showing point accumulation processing; 10 is a flowchart showing control processing during point filling. It is a flowchart which shows button press production|presentation processing. 4 is a flowchart showing point reset processing; 9 is a flowchart showing stage display control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an effect scenario and a point award scenario of the final game round of continuous effect in Modification 8; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modification 9; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in Modification 10; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modified Example 13; It is an explanatory view explaining a grant history area. It is an explanatory view explaining a grant history area. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point giving effect in Modified Example 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in a multiplication mode; It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of the image of a pearl when a mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point provision production|presentation. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points; It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode which does not display the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point as a display mode of the accumulated point. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how the display mode of accumulated points is changed; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point giving effect in which the number of points to be given is displayed at the start; It is an explanatory view explaining an example of threshold reaching production. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of carry-over change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a timer time extension production|presentation. It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine in a fifth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a win-win table stored in a win-win table storage area; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a suggestive effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine in a standby state. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied after the volume of background music has become zero and before display of a demonstration moving image is started; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met while the volume of background music is being reduced; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows a game state transition process. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows condition judging processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending time setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; 10 is a flow chart showing start-up command handling processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows opening production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a standby state transition process. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the modified example 1 of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the pattern display device is displaying the background moving image; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the symbol display device is displaying the demonstration moving image; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a transition condition is met while the symbol display device is displaying the RTC effect moving image; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is met while the symbol display device is displaying the RTC effect moving image; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing RTC effect processing executed in the sound and light side MPU of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing standby state transition processing executed in the sound and light side MPU of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the display-side MPU of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success or failure table (success table for electric role product open lottery) used when executing the electric role product open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in an audio data ROM; It is a timing chart which shows an example of the processing which a pachinko machine performs. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through gates. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing BGM processing; 10 is a flowchart showing BGM initial setting processing; 4 is a flowchart showing BGM change processing; 4 is a flowchart showing BGM continuous reproduction processing; 4 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for game round production. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for game round production|presentation execution. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening and closing execution mode production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for customer waiting. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which the pachinko machine of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment performs. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing continuous BGM reproduction processing in Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing in modification 1 of the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which the pachinko machine of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment performs. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing in modification 2 of the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which the pachinko machine of the modification 3 of 6th Embodiment performs. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing continuous BGM reproduction processing in Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing in modification 3 of the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which the pachinko machine of the modification 4 of 6th Embodiment performs. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing continuous BGM reproduction processing in modification 4 of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing in Modification 4 of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a data structure of data stored in an audio data ROM in Modification 6 of the sixth embodiment; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the V winning mechanism. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success or failure table (success table for electric role product open lottery) used when executing the electric role product open lottery. 10 is a time chart for explaining a case 1 in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole as Case 1. FIG. It is a time chart for explaining a case where a small winning is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole as Case 2. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for type determination gates. It is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for the big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for croons. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 8 is a flow chart showing a specific process execution determination process; 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows type decision processing. 9 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening/closing scenario according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows waiting period production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening period production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing processing period production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st chance production|presentation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows a non-storage time second chance effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a V winning effect setting process; It is a flow chart showing a second chance effect setting process at the time of V non-winning. It is a flow chart which shows ending period production setting processing. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device;

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth embodiment:
G. Seventh embodiment:
H. Applies to other configurations:
I. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to the first embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. The substrate box is configured to leave a trace of opening and closing (also referred to as a trace of opening or a trace of unsealing). For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In this embodiment, as the general prize winning opening 32, three general prize winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as the first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b as the second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning port 32a, the second winning port 32b, the third winning port 32c, the big winning port 36a, and the game in which the ball enters the out port 43 The balls are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game balls. As will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 by detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8. As shown in FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the first result display section 37a or the second result is displayed for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when the CPU 62x executes the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and an input/output port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65 .

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information to be described later, based on the information of the game ball entering the start hole, the prize winning hole, and the gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "ball entry hole"). do. The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to a later-described inspection machine. Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element.

An input side of the MPU 62 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor 87, and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power failure occurs or the power switch is turned off.

Also, the input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a ball entry detection sensor provided at each ball entrance. Specifically, a large winning opening detection sensor 44a that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 36a, a first starting opening detection sensor 44b that detects a gaming ball that has entered the first starting opening 33, A second starting hole detection sensor 44c for detecting a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, a first winning hole detecting sensor 44d for detecting a game ball entering the first winning hole 32a, and a second winning hole 32b. A second winning hole detection sensor 44e that detects a game ball that has entered a game ball, a third winning hole detection sensor 44f that detects a game ball that has entered the third winning hole 32c, and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35. A through gate detection sensor 44g for detection and a discharge passage detection sensor 44h for detecting game balls passing through the discharge passage are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the starting opening or the winning opening, and whether the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. or not. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34, and a main display. 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63 . Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 made of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and controls the operation of the speaker 46. , and controls the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. Various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display section 45, the design display of the design display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63, resulting in a jackpot. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. A variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), five values of 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the big win lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8( a ), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary item open lottery.

FIG. 9(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that becomes the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The MPU 62, CPU 62x, ROM 63 and RAM 64 are hereinafter also referred to as main MPU 62, main CPU 62x, main ROM 63 and main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and an arithmetic execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (prize ball number data) when the game balls enter each ball entering portion is stored. In this embodiment, the following number of prize balls data is stored in the number of prize balls data storage area.
· Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the first start hole 33 (first start hole prize ball number P ₁ ): 3
- The number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second start hole 34 (second start hole prize ball number P ₂ ): 3
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the first prize hole 32a (number of prize balls in the first prize hole P _N1 ): 10
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the second winning hole 32b (second winning hole prize ball number P _N2 ): 10
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the third prize opening 32c (number of prize balls in the third prize opening P _N3 ): 10
- The number of game balls paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big winning hole 36a (large winning hole prize ball number P _S ): 15

By referring to the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, the main side MPU 62 pays out game balls as prize balls when the game balls enter each ball entering section. Determine the number of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The computation execution condition storage area stores computation execution conditions that are conditions for the game history management chip 300 to start computation for calculating game history information. In this embodiment, it is stored as a calculation execution condition that the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. The arithmetic execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various kinds of game history information based on the information on the game balls entering each ball entrance and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entry hole, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole, and a main side ROM 63. Winning ball number data storage memory 306 for storing the winning ball number data obtained from the main ROM 63, calculation execution condition storage memory 307 for storing calculation execution conditions obtained from the main ROM 63, and overall control of the game history management chip 300 and calculating game history information based on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance and the number of winning balls set in each ball entrance, triggered by the establishment of the calculation execution condition; and a calculation result storage memory 309 for storing the game history information obtained.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 .

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a game history management chip 300. A display unit 328 for displaying the received game history information and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320. As shown in FIG.

The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and acquires ball entry information at each ball entrance from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 is provided with a plurality of bits corresponding to each ball entrance, and the CPU 62x turns ON ("1 ”). For example, when the CPU 62x determines that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33, the bit corresponding to the first starting hole 33 in the buffer 302 is turned ON (“1”).

The buffer 302 is also provided with bits for grasping the game mode and the state of the pachinko machine 10 when a game ball enters each ball entrance (hereinafter also referred to as the game state). In this embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not the normal mode is in progress (not in the high probability mode, not in the high frequency support mode, and not in the opening/closing execution mode), and whether or not the high probability mode is on. a bit for determining whether it is in the high-frequency support mode; a bit for determining whether it is in the open/close execution mode; A bit for determining whether it is during the period of value, a bit for determining whether it is during the period when the second reserved number is the upper limit value, and the front door frame 14 is open A bit for judging whether or not there is, and a bit for judging whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error, such as a trouble such as a failure, are provided. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the normal mode is in effect at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, the CPU 62x turns ON (“1 ”).

The register 304 stores the number of game balls entering each ball entrance. Specifically, the register 304 is composed of a plurality of counters corresponding to each ball entry port. ), 1 is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the bit determined to have the entry information. Note that, in this embodiment, the register 304 is configured by a non-volatile register capable of retaining memory even when the power supply is cut off.

In this embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by each counter corresponding to each entrance.
・The number of game balls entering the big winning hole 36a = the number of balls entering the big winning hole _NS
・ Number of game balls entering the first starting hole 33 = Number of balls entering the first starting hole N ₁
· The number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 = the number of balls entering the second starting port N ₂
・The number of game balls entering the first winning hole 32a = Number of balls entering the first winning hole N _N1
・The number of game balls entering the second winning hole 32b = the number of balls entering the second winning hole N _N2
・The number of game balls entering the third winning hole 32c = the number of balls entering the third winning hole N _N3
・The number of game balls that passed through the through gate 35 = the number of through gate passing N _G
・The number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage = the number of balls that have passed through the discharge passage N _OUT
Incidentally, as described above, the discharge passage passage number N _OUT coincides with the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls entering each ball entrance for each game state.
・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during normal mode ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during high probability mode ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during high frequency support mode The number of game balls ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during the open/close execution mode ・The game balls that entered the first start opening 33 during the period when the first reserved number is the upper limit value during the normal mode・The number of game balls that entered the second starting port 34 during the period in which the second reservation number is the upper limit during the normal mode ・The game that entered each ball entrance while the front door frame 14 was open Number of balls ・Number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during the error

For example, it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first starting port 33 of the buffer 302 has ball entry information (the bit is ON), and the information is in the bit that determines whether or not the normal mode is in progress. If it is determined that there is (the bit is ON), the value of the first start opening number counter, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 33, is set to 1. is added, and 1 is added to the value of the number counter of the number of balls entering the first starting hole during the normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls entered into the first starting hole 33 during the normal mode. be.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 .

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 . The calculation execution condition is a condition for starting the calculation for calculating the game history information, as described above. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is set to start calculation for calculating the game history information each time the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 . Therefore, the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is the same as the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 . In addition, as a calculation execution condition, the number of game balls that have passed through or entered a passage other than the discharge passage may be stored as a reference, or a number other than 500 may be stored as a reference.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied, and when it is determined that the computation execution condition is satisfied, the CPU 308 stores the number of prize balls data in the memory 306. and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304, various game history information is calculated. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following values as the game history information each time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500.

・Accessory ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by activation of role (number of award balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
=( _N2 * _P2 + _NS * _PS )/( _NN1 * _PN1 + _NN2 * _PN2 + _NN3 * _PN3 + _N1 * _P1 + _N2 * _P2 + _NS * _PS )
・ Continuous role ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous role operation (number of consecutive role prize balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= (N _S ×P _S )/(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ +NS ×P _{S )}
・Ball output rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls) / Number of game balls launched to the game board 30 = (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )/N _OUT

The basis for calculating the above values is as follows.
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the action of the accessory (the number of prize balls)
=The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the electric accessory 34a as the normal electric accessory and the variable winning device 36 as the special electric accessory =To the second start port 34 and the big winning port 36a The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the number of game balls entered = N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to continuous bonus action (number of consecutive bonus balls)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the variable prize winning device 36 as a special electric accessory = The game paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the big prize winning port 36a Number of spheres = N _S × P _S
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c =N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3
・Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, and the big winning opening 36a = _NN1 x _PN1 + _NN2 x _PN2 + _NN3 x _PN3 + _N1 x _P1 + N2 x _P2 + _{NS x PS}

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls entered into each ball entry portion counted for each game state.

・ Payout ratio (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during the normal mode / Based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during the normal mode The number of game balls paid out as prize balls + the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode. Ball rate (during normal mode)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode/Number of game balls fired to game board 30 during normal mode/ball output rate (during high-frequency support mode)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during high-frequency support mode/number of game balls fired to game board 30 during high-frequency support mode · BY (during normal mode)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c during the normal mode + the first reserved number during the normal mode is the upper limit. The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 during the period + the second start port during the period when the second reserved number is the upper limit value during the normal mode Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering 34 / Number of game balls shot to game board 30 during normal mode · BY _MIN (during normal mode)
= the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c during the normal mode/the number of game balls launched to the game board 30 during the normal mode・Ball entry rate while the front door frame is open = Number of game balls entering each ball entrance while the front door frame 14 is open/Number of game balls launched to the game board 30 Ball entry rate during errors = Number of game balls entered into each ball entrance during error/Number of game balls launched to game board 30 Note that the above-mentioned game history information is an example, and configuration for calculating game history information other than these may be

After calculating the various game history information, the CPU 308 stores the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the values of the counters of the register 304 to "0". In addition, hereinafter, various types of game history information calculated each time 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 are collectively referred to as a "short-term game history information group".

The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory for storing the game history information calculated by the CPU 308, and in this embodiment, it is composed of a non-volatile memory capable of retaining the memory even if the power supply is cut off. It is The calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information about the order in which the short-term gaming history information group was written. The short-term game history information group thus written is stored in an area in which the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in/first-out method), and the most recent short-term game history information group is always stored. be in a state where

In this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term game history information groups calculated each time 500 game balls are shot onto the game board 30. are doing. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It will be stored in the result storage memory 309 . Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 can store short-term game history information groups for the most recent ten days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , it transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the game history information to the game history management chip 300 . Upon receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 transmits the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 . As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and causes the display unit 328 to display the acquired game history information.

Thus, in this embodiment, each time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, that is, each time 500 game balls are shot onto the game board 30, the game such as the role product ratio History information is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 . Then, the calculated game history information is displayed on the display section 328 of the inspection machine 320 .

A3. Details of various processes executed in gaming machines:
Next, each process performed by MPU62 (this embodiment CPU62x) is demonstrated. The processing of the MPU 62 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. In step S10101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, it executes initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process of transmitting calculation data to the game history management chip 300 is executed in the initial setting process. Specifically, the calculation data (the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 . As will be described later, the game history management chip 300 that has received the calculation data stores the prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively. is sent to the main side MPU 62. After executing step S10101, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether or not a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process advances to step S10103 to set interrupt permission to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. In other words, the process does not proceed to step S10103 until the setting completion command is received, and interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing is not performed.

After executing step S10103, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 is performed. In other words, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as will be described later, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S10105, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S10106, variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S10107, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment) will be described.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific cycle (4 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, random number update process for lottery is executed in step S10201. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information , overwrites the read source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, the process proceeds to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the flow advances to step S10203 to update the variation type counter CS in the variation type counter update process. After that, the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S10205.

In step S10205, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, signals received from each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. The processing contents of the ball-entering detection processing will be described in detail later. After that, the process proceeds to step S10207.

In step S 10207 , the ball entry detection information is output to the bit of the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300 . Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entrance determined to have entered the game ball in the ball entry detection process of step S10206 is turned ON (“1”), and the bit corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. is turned ON (“1”). After that, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. Then, it progresses to step S10209 and performs the output setting process of a prize ball command. After that, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball to the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the electronic device of the RAM 64. Store in reservation area 64d. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the processing results of the various processing executed in this timer interrupt processing. After executing step S10216, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the ball entry detection process, a process of confirming the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is executed. Here, before describing the entering ball detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main side MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 62b, in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 62b depends on the driver IC. Switched through switching control. In the ball-entering detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 62b is set to each of the ball-entering detection sensors 44a to 44h.

In this setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the 1st bit D1 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first start opening detection sensor 44b. Corresponding information is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start hole detection sensor 44c, and the third bit D3 is stored to the ball entry signal from the first winning hole detection sensor 44d. Corresponding information is stored, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second winning hole detection sensor 44e, and the fifth bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the third winning hole detection sensor 44f. Corresponding information is stored, the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Stored.

In this case, each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a HI level signal indicating non-detection as a ball entry signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and the passage of the game ball is output. is detected, a LOW level signal indicating that the ball is being detected is output as an incoming ball signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the state of the signal is inverted before each detection signal is input to the input port 62b. When the input port 62b receives a LOW level signal through the inverting circuit, it stores "0" information (data 0 or no information) in the corresponding bit, and receives a HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If the data is present, "1" information (data 1 or presence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

In other words, in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, "0" information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the state where detection is in progress, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored in the corresponding bit.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while not detecting the passage of a game ball, and outputs a HIGH level signal as an entry ball signal while the passage of a game ball is detected. It may be configured to output a level signal. In this case, the inverting circuit should be considered defective.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ball-entering detection process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. FIG. 15(a) is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. FIG. 15(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the ball entry detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process of shifting to the one-ball determination area WA1 is executed. The first ball entry determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. It is a data capacity that can be used. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence. The information of D0 is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first ball entry determination area WA1.

In the subsequent step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. In the wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In the pachinko machine 10, the wait time is set to 10 μsec, but it does not impede the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and furthermore, by setting the wait process, it is possible to fully achieve the effects described later. Although the specific wait time is arbitrary as long as it is possible, it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

Incidentally, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the processing of one step. Therefore, even if the processing of step S10302 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec will occur between steps S10301 and S10303. In this regard, in step S10302, in addition to the minimum time required to execute the process, an additional wait time is set between the process of step S10301 and the process of step S10303.

In the following step S10303, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the second entering ball determination area WA2 in the register of the main side MPU 62. FIG. Incidentally, since the information in the input port 62b is updated at intervals shorter than the time from the completion of step S10301 to the start of step S10303, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are updated in step S10303. The information migrated from may be different than in step S10301.

Like the first ball entry determination area WA1, the second ball entry determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15(b-2). It has a data capacity that can store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second entering ball determination area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence. The relationship between the bit and the bit of the storage destination is the same as in the case of the first ball entry determination area WA1.

After that, in step S10304, after executing the ball entry determination process, the main ball entry detection process is terminated. The entering ball determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. In the entering ball determination process, first, in step S10401, 8 is set in the entering ball determination counter provided in the main RAM 64 . It should be noted that the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry holes. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the numerical value information "8" of the entry determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the big winning opening 36a, "7" is the first bit D1 of the first start opening 33, and "6". is the second bit D2 of the second starting hole 34, "5" is the third bit D3 of the first winning hole 32a, "4" is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning hole 32b, "3" is the third winning hole The fifth bit D5 of 32c, "2" corresponds to the sixth bit D6 of the through gate 35, and "1" corresponds to the seventh bit D7 of the discharge passage. In the following step S10402, each bit information corresponding to the current numerical value information of the entering ball determination counter in the first entering ball determination area WA1 and the second entering ball determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit at the input port 62b.

In subsequent step S10403, the AND processing of each information grasped in step S10402 is executed, and the result of the AND processing is stored in a register. Of these, the result of the AND processing is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing was stored in the incoming ball detection processing in the processing of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 15(b-3) and 15(b-4). The data capacity is such that it is possible to store all information of the result of AND processing between each bit and each bit of the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, the order of the bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 that are subject to AND processing, and the order of the bits in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4. is uniquely defined.

After that, in step S10405, in the side of the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 in which the information of the result of the AND process was stored in the entering ball determination process in the previous timer interrupt process, Then, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is read. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process is executed to invert the read information between "0" and "1".

After that, in step S10407, AND processing is executed between the information of the AND processing result in step S10403 and the information of the reversing processing result in step S10406. It is determined whether or not it is "1" corresponding to . If it is determined in step S10408 that the AND processing result is "1", the process proceeds to step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port . If it corresponds to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, in step S10410, the starting port entrance flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", and step S10411 , 1 is added to the numerical information of the 3 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 64 .

The starting port entry ball flag specifies the entry of the game ball to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 by the main side MPU 62, and the game ball to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that it is a process corresponding to the entering ball and is in a state where a process other than the execution of the winning ball should be executed. Incidentally, since the ball detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided for the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34, respectively, the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 may be grasped at the same time within the range of one timer interrupt process. Therefore, in order to correspond to this, the starting ball entry flags are provided corresponding to the number of the starting ports 33 and 34, specifically, two flags are provided. Also, the 3 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main side MPU 62 should output a 3 prize ball command instructing execution of 3 prize balls.

When a negative determination is made in step S10409, in step S10412, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the big winning opening 36a (variable winning device 36). judge. When the variable winning device 36 is supported, at step S10413, "1" is set to the big winning opening ball flag provided in the main side RAM64, and at step S10414, the main side RAM64 is provided. 1 is added to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counter.

The main MPU 62 specifies the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 36, and the big winning opening ball flag is processing corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 36, This flag is used by the main MPU 62 to specify that a process other than execution should be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main MPU 62 should output the 15 prize ball command instructing the execution of 15 prize balls.

If a negative determination is made in step S10412, it is determined in step S10415 whether or not the current numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the through gate 35. FIG. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, the through passage flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S10416.

The through passage flag specifies that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 in the main side MPU 62, and indicates that the main side MPU 62 is in a state in which processing corresponding to the game ball entering the through gate 35 should be executed. It is a flag for specifying in MPU62.

When a negative determination is made in step S10415, in step S10417, the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter corresponds to any of the first winning opening 32a, second winning opening 32b and third winning opening 32c. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a bit. If it corresponds to any one of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b and the third winning opening 32c, in step S10418, the general winning opening ball flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". ” is set, and in step S10419, 1 is added to the numerical value information of the 3 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 64 .

The general winning hole entry ball flag is a flag for specifying the entry of the game ball to the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b or the third winning hole 32c in the main side MPU62. Incidentally, the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, and the third winning hole 32c are provided with the ball detection sensors 44d, 44e, and 44f, respectively. A ball entering the winning hole 32b and a ball entering the third winning hole may be grasped at the same time within the range of one process of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, in order to correspond to this, the general winning opening ball flags are provided corresponding to the number of the general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c, specifically, three. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main MPU 62 should output the 3 prize ball command instructing the execution of 10 prize balls.

If a negative determination is made in step S10417, it means that the current entry corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". to set. The discharge passage passage flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative determination is made in step S10408, or after executing any one of steps S10411, S10414, S10416, S10419, and S10420, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the entry determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether or not the entry determination counter is "0".

If the entry determination counter is not "0", the processing of steps S10402 to S10420 is executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter updated in step S10421. When the processes of steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the numerical information set in step S10401, an affirmative determination is made in step S10422, and this entering ball determination process ends.

Next, by executing the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 15), the general winning port 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage The manner in which the presence or absence of a hit ball is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the presence/absence of a hit ball is detected. First, with reference to FIG. 17(A), the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as "entering ball information") of the entering ball detecting sensors 44a to 44h will be described. FIG. 17A is a timing chart for explaining the timing of monitoring each piece of incoming ball information.

As shown in FIG. 17(A), in a configuration in which timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) is activated at T1 (specifically, 4 msec) intervals, processing for monitoring incoming ball information is performed at each processing time of timer interrupt processing. This is performed twice (steps S10301 and S10303). The processing for monitoring each set of entering ball information is executed so that the timing is delayed. is executed when the time has passed.

In this case, the timing at which the ball-entering detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the processes whose processing time is likely to fluctuate, such as the game turn control process and the electric support process. The processing that is executed prior to the detection processing is processing whose processing time is relatively less likely to fluctuate. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process of each process, the period until the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side is started is the same, substantially the same, or the same as T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of entering-ball information included in each processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the preceding-side entering-ball information is periodically executed.

Further, among the processes for monitoring each set of ball entry information, between the process for monitoring the front side entry information (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the rear side entry information (step S10303), A wait process for ball-entering detection (step S10302) is executed, but this wait process does not execute any process and only waits until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of ball entry information included in each processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the rear ball entry information is periodically executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(B), the contents of the calculation executed when the entering ball determination is performed will be described. FIG. 17(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the calculation executed when the entering ball determination is performed. Although various operations are actually performed in 1-bit units, in the following explanation, the contents of the operations will be explained in 1-byte units. However, the configuration may be such that the operation is actually performed in 1-byte units as described below.

In the case of FIG. 17(B), first, in the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side in the n-th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17(B1), "00100000" ” is set. In this case, the ball entry information of the third winning hole detection sensor 44f among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is information indicating that a game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as information that a game ball has been entered). The entering ball information of other sensors is information indicating that the game ball is not detected (hereinafter also referred to as no entering ball information).

Further, in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process, "10100000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17(B2). In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge path detection sensor 44h and the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f each provide ball entry information, and the other sensors provide ball entry information. .

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "00100000" as shown in FIG. Information is set in the first post-computation area WA3 as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt process of the n-th process. If the monitoring result of the entering ball information is set in the post-first calculation area WA3 in the n-1th timer interrupt process, the monitoring result of the entering ball information in the n-th timer interrupt process is set to the second calculation. It is set in the rear area WA4. Also, the ball entry determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the n-1th ball entry information and the monitoring result of the nth ball entry information, but the details of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17(B4), "10100110" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1 in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f, the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b each have entry information. It is set and other sensors have no ball entry information.

In addition, in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process, "10100010" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17(B5). In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f, and the first starting opening detection sensor 44b each provide ball entry information, and the other sensors It is information that there is no entry.

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "10100010" as shown in FIG. Information is set in the second post-calculation area WA4 as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt processing of the (n+1)th processing.

After that, in the entering ball determination process (FIG. 16) in the n+1th timer interrupt process, the result of monitoring the entering ball information in the nth timer interrupt process is first read from the first post-computation area WA3 and read out. Inversion processing is performed on the information of the monitoring result obtained. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B7, it becomes "11011111". Then, the result of the reversing process is ANDed with the monitoring result of the entering ball information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. This results in "10000010" as shown in FIG. 17(B8). In this case, in the ball entry determination process, it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the discharge path detection sensor 44h, and that the entry of the game ball is detected by the first start hole detection sensor 44b. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 17(B4), the second starting hole detection sensor 44c has entered ball presence information in the process of monitoring the leading ball entering information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from information with no ball entry to information with ball entry, it is not determined immediately that a ball has been entered. It is the configuration that identifies the occurrence. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the ball entering information on the rear side in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process, the second starting hole detection sensor 44c is the no ball entering information, and the electrical The occurrence of noise is not treated as the entry of a game ball.

In addition, in the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, input is performed in each of the process of monitoring one set of entering ball information in the nth timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of entering ball information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. Although it is the ball presence information, this indicates a state in which a game ball whose entry has already been grasped is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of a ball entry is specified on the condition that the result of monitoring the ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process is "0", one game ball is counted as a plurality of ball entries. Do not treat it as an incoming ball.

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are monitored, and when a ball entry corresponding to the application of the gaming ball occurs. 3, addition processing to the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter and 15 prize ball counter is executed according to the ball entry position. If any of these counters is "1" or more, the award command is set in the award command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). The awarded ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In this case, the output setting of the prize command is performed only once in one processing of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is "2" or more, the 15 prize ball command is transmitted only once in one process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined plurality of (for example, two or three) prize ball commands are transmitted in one processing.

It is also conceivable that each of the 3 prize ball counter, the 10 prize ball counter, and the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or more. have priority. That is, the output of the 15 ball command has priority over the output of the 10 ball command and the output of the 3 ball command, and the output of the 10 ball command is prioritized over the output of the 3 ball command. .

When the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 15 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 15 prize ball counter. Further, when the 10 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 10 prize ball command is set as an output target, the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by one. Further, when the 3 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 3 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 3 prize ball counter.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300. As shown in FIG.

In step S10501, it is determined whether or not calculation data including the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions has been received. If it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that the calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. That is, the infinite loop continues without proceeding to the next step S10502 until the calculation data is received.

In step S10502, the received number-of-balls data is stored in memory 306 for storing number-of-balls-winning data. After that, the process advances to step S10503 to store the received calculation execution condition in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command indicating that the storage of the number of prize balls data in the number of prize balls data storage memory 306 is completed and the storage of the calculation execution condition to the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is completed. is transmitted to the main side CPU 62x. After that, the process proceeds to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether or not the bit of the buffer 302 contains the ball entry information received from the main side CPU 62x ("1" is stored in the bit). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 contains the incoming ball information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process advances to step S10506 to set the counter of the register corresponding to the bit of the buffer 302 to 1. to add. Specifically, for example, when the bit corresponding to the first starting hole entry information in the buffer 302 is "1" and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is "1", the big win in the register 304 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the entrance _NS , and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the normal mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 does not contain the ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is established. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge passage passage number _NOUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether or not the number of game balls shot to the game board 30 has reached 500. judge. If it is determined in step S10507 that the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, based on the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304, various game history information Arithmetic processing for calculating is executed. After that, the process advances to step S10509 to store the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10510, and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 is cleared to zero. After that, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage memory 307 is not established (S10507: NO), step S10511 is executed without executing steps S10508 to S10510. proceed to

In step S10511, it is determined whether or not a transmission request command for game history information has been received from the inspection machine 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512. , the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . The inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505 to repeat the processes from step S10505 onward. On the other hand, in step S10511, when it is determined that the game history information transmission request command has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the processing of step S10512, and step The processing after S10505 is repeated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate the game history information, which is information correlated with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game. If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled by checking the game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes the calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information in a non-volatile manner. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information differs for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique to the pachinko machine 10 . That is, the game history information is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 . According to this embodiment, the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, is stored in the calculation result memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. do. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, information about the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be obtained from the hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, there are cases where it is placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. Can not do it. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the memory 309 for storing the calculation result of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. Since the information is stored, even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer, the game history information can be obtained from the main body of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment always maintains a one-to-one relationship between the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state of being installed in a game hall or the state of circulation). , and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62, and are configured to operate with the same power source. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by the hall computer, a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer. game history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, even if there is a problem in the processing of the hall computer. If the main side CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the game history management chip 300, the pachinko machine 10 is still playing games. Regardless, there arises a problem that the game history information cannot be calculated. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power source, the game history information can be calculated whenever the game is executable. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game history information.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, which is a space in which traces of opening and closing (also referred to as traces of opening and traces of opening) remain. Therefore, when the memory 309 for storing calculation results is physically touched, a trace of opening the board box remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is altered through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, the fact that the information has been altered can be grasped from the traces on the board box. It becomes possible to Therefore, unauthorized modification of the game history information can be prevented. Since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but the operation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box where the traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the game history information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the games that have been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the game history information that reflects the game-related characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63. can be calculated. Furthermore, even if different prize ball number data is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 can be used to play a correct game using the prize ball number data set for each type of pachinko machine 10. Historical information can be calculated. If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled by confirming the correct game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300, thereby enabling game history management. A configuration in which the chip 300 cannot access the number-of-balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63, and a storage position of the number-of-balls data stored in the number-of-balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63 by the game history management chip 300. Even in a configuration where (memory address) cannot be grasped, the game history management chip 300 can acquire the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63 .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the main processing of the main CPU 62x, the interruption of the timer interruption processing is not permitted until the setting completion command is received, and the game ball launch control processing included in the timer interruption processing is not executed. It is configured. That is, since the game ball is not shot until the memory 306 for storing the number of prize balls data is completely stored, the game ball is not included in the calculation target of the game history information by the game history management chip 300. - 特許庁can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge path detection sensor 44h is calculated and stored, each pachinko machine 10 detects 500 game balls. Even if there is variation in the time until is detected, it is possible to calculate and store game history information that does not affect the variation in time. That is, even if there is a height difference in the frequency with which game balls are shot, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. In addition, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which the ball-entering information to each ball-entering hole is stored as it is.

If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 as the operation execution conditions. According to this embodiment, since the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution conditions stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, the operation set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 An operation for calculating game history information can be executed when an execution condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 Since the (counter value) is erased, it becomes possible to store the information on the number of game balls entered in the register 304 again. Therefore, the storage capacity required for register 304 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 , the inspection machine 320 can display the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 . Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320. - 特許庁

A4. Other aspects of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it was set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reached 500 pieces. A configuration in which a time interval for executing the calculation is set as an execution condition may be employed. For example, one hour is set as the time interval for executing calculations, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate the game history information each time one hour elapses. An inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately judge whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled. Become. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Note that if the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the game characteristics are also different, so the optimal conditions (time intervals) for executing calculations for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 as the operation execution conditions. Therefore, in this aspect 1 as well, the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that the operation execution condition is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. An operation can be executed when the operation execution condition is satisfied.

Further, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 measures the elapsed time after the calculation is executed, determines whether or not the player is playing a game, and determines that the game is not being played. The measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted during the period of time. Specifically, for example, when there is no winning ball information in the bit of the buffer 302 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes), it is determined that the game is not being played, and measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the game has been restarted and measurement of the elapsed time is restarted when the winning ball information is confirmed in the bit 302 . According to this configuration, the game history information can be calculated only for the period in which the game is actually played.

The elapsed time may be measured by using a timer counter, or by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and using date and time information of the RTC. Further, the configuration may be such that the game history information is calculated at each predetermined time.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it was set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reached 500 pieces. As an execution condition, the configuration may be such that the occurrence of power shutdown is set. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects that the power has been cut off, it outputs a signal indicating that the power has been cut off to the game history management chip 300 . The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that has received the signal determines that the power has been cut off, and calculates the game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of a volatile memory, and the entered ball number information is erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the game history information based on the number of game balls detected during the period from when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is started to when the power is cut off. can. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start of the operation of the game hall to the end of the operation, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not there has been a change in the characteristics of the game history information over the business days of the game hall. It is possible to appropriately judge whether or not As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, if the configuration is provided with a capacitor 87 that supplies power to the game history management chip 300 even after power interruption occurs, a memory 309 for calculating the game history information by the CPU 308 and storing the calculation result of the game history information. can be reliably completed.

<Aspect 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, the main side CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and may be configured to display the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 on the symbol display device 41. . According to this configuration, since the game history information is displayed on the pattern display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 uses a dedicated device (such as the inspection machine 320) to check the game history information. The game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed without using it. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, or the like.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and notifies that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition. An LED lamp for this purpose may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a predetermined portion of the main display section 45). For example, when a specific value included in the game history information (for example, character ratio, continuous character ratio, payout ratio (during normal mode)) is no longer within a predetermined range, the LED lamp may be configured to emit light. good. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. By checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting port 33 and the general winning ports (first to third winning ports 32a to 32c) are tampered with, the aforementioned payout ratio (during the normal mode) will be the design of the pachinko machine. It will sometimes deviate from the assumed predetermined range (eg, 0.60 to 0.70). Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to emit light when the payout ratio (during normal mode) is no longer included in a predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70), the first start port 33 and general winning It can be appropriately determined whether or not the nails near the openings (first to third winning openings 32a to 32c) have been tampered with.

Furthermore, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp is determined according to the degree of deviation from a predetermined range of specific values (for example, character ratio, continuous character ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode)) included in the game history information. may be configured to determine the For example, when the character ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), the first LED lamp emits blue light, and when the character ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, the first LED lamp may emit purple light, and the first LED lamp may emit red light when the character ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp emits blue light when the continuous character ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), and the second LED lamp when the continuous character ratio is 0.61 to 0.70. may emit purple light, and the second LED lamp may emit red light when the continuous character ratio is 0.71 to 1.00. Also, when the payout ratio (during normal mode) is within a predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), the third LED lamp emits blue light, and the payout ratio (during normal mode) is 0.71. ∼0.80, the third LED lamp emits purple light, and when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is between 0.81 and 1.00, the third LED lamp may emit red light. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how much the specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, or the like.

<Aspect 5>
In the above-described first embodiment, the calculation data (the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x). However, the game history management chip 300 is configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 immediately after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A configuration in which the main ROM 63 is accessed to acquire calculation data (ball number data and calculation execution conditions), and the acquired calculation data is stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. may be According to such a configuration, the processing load on the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role ratio. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. With such a configuration, the processing load on the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of mode 6 will be described below, centering on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (ball number data) when the game balls enter each ball entering portion is stored. there is Also, as in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The storage execution condition storage area stores a storage execution condition that is a condition for the game history management chip 300 to execute storage processing described later. In mode 6, it is stored as a storage execution condition that the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. The stored execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entry hole, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole, and a main side ROM 63. A winning ball data storage memory 306 that stores the winning ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a storage execution condition storage memory 307a that stores the storage execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the overall control of the game history management chip 300 and a memory 309a for storing the number of game balls stored in the register 304 and sequentially storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance. The above-described storage processing is processing for storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 in the entered ball number storage memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In mode 6, the winning ball number information stored in the winning ball number storage memory 309a and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. be done.

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A portion 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the number of entered balls information and the number of winning balls data to the game history management chip 300. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 receives the entered ball number information stored in the entered ball number storage memory 309a via the inspection terminal 65, and the winning ball number data storage memory 309a. The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received ball number information and winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 of mode 6 of the first embodiment.

The contents of the processing in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so the description is omitted.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 6, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main side ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 .

The storage execution condition storage memory 307 a is a memory for storing the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 . When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the stored execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the contents of the stored execution condition stored in the stored execution condition storage memory 307 a are the same as the contents of the stored execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 .

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a is met. Information on the number of game balls entering the ball opening is stored in the memory 309a for storing the number of entering balls, and the values of the counters of the register 304 are reset to "0". In this mode 6, every time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500, the CPU 308 determines the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304. The information is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage memory 309a. In addition, hereinafter, the information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance that is counted while 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 is also referred to as "short-term entered ball number information group".

The number-of-entered-balls storage memory 309a is a memory for sequentially storing information (short-term number-of-entered-balls information group) related to the number of entered-balls stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, the information is stored even when the power supply is cut off. is configured by a non-volatile memory capable of holding The memory 309a for storing the number of entered balls also stores information on the order in which the group of information on the number of short-term entered balls is written. The short-term entry number information group is stored in an area in which the short-term entry number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the memory 309a for storing the number of entered balls is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term entered-ball number information group (first-in/first-out method), and the latest short-term entered-ball number information group is always stored. It will be stored.

In this mode 6, the memory 309a for storing the number of game balls entered is short-term entry, which is information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 ball number information groups. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage memory 309a. Therefore, the entering ball number storage memory 309a can store the short-term entering ball number information group for the last ten days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , it transmits a transmission request command to the game history management chip 300 . Upon receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 transmits the short-term entered ball number information group and winning ball number data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information such as a role ratio based on the short-term entered ball number information group and prize ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320 can calculate one short-term game history information group for one short-term entered ball number information group, like the CPU 308 of the first embodiment. In addition, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in each of a plurality of short-term entered ball number information groups is added, and long-term game history information is obtained using the added number of entered balls. (long-term game history information group) can be calculated. That is, the inspection machine 320 of aspect 6 not only stores the short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot, but also, for example, 600,000 (approximately It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a long period of time when game balls were shot for 10 days.

In addition, in this aspect 6, the following configuration may be employed.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received short-term entered ball count information group on the display unit 328 . Also, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display each received counter value on the display unit 328 .

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x The configuration may be such that the ball number data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing data on the number of winning balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a time interval for executing the storage process is set as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 . For example, one hour is set as the time interval for executing the memory processing, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the memory processing each time one hour elapses.

Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which occurrence of power cutoff is detected as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 . Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 is configured to output to the game history management chip 300 a signal indicating that the power supply has been cut off when it detects the occurrence of the power cutoff. The CPU 308 of 300 may be configured to determine that a power cutoff has occurred and execute storage processing.

Further, in aspect 6, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation The game history information, which is the result of , may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 7>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role ratio. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. With such a configuration, the processing load on the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of mode 7 will be described below, centering on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

In mode 7, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the game history management chip 300 . The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

A main-side ROM 63 of the main-side MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area. Note that, in mode 7, no calculation start condition storage area is provided.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (ball number data) when the game balls enter each ball entering portion is stored. there is Also, as in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entrance, and a prize ball number data storage memory 306 that stores the prize ball number data acquired from the main side ROM 63. , a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300, and a ball entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores the entry information of a game ball into each ball entrance stored in the buffer 302. .

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information memory 309b and the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number data memory 306 are stored. The data is sent to inspection machine 320 .

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A portion 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the winning ball information and the winning ball number data to the game history management chip 300. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, and the winning ball number data storage memory 309b. The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received ball entry information and the winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 of mode 7 of the first embodiment.

The contents of the processing in the buffer 302 are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

The ball entry information storage memory 309b is a memory for sequentially storing the ball entry information stored in the buffer 302 and the information regarding the game state when the game ball is entered. It is composed of a non-volatile memory that can hold memory even if the Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the ball entry information and the information about the game state are stored, information on the date and time when the game ball enters each ball entrance is added and stored. The memory 309b for storing information on entering a ball also stores information on the order in which information such as entering a ball is written. Information and the like are stored in an area in which the entry information and the like with the oldest written order are stored. That is, the memory 309b for storing ball entry information is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest entry information (first-in/first-out method), and the latest entry information and the like are always stored. state.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 7, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main side ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 . Furthermore, in this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , the prize number data stored in the prize number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 sends the game history management chip 300 a transmission request command requesting the transmission of the information on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the testing machine 320, the CPU 308 receives the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, the information on the game status, and the date and time information. , and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received information, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of aspect 7 calculates game history information (short-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot. In addition to calculating, for example, game history information (long-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entering each ball entrance in a long period of time when 600000 game balls (for about 10 days) were shot It is possible to That is, it is possible to calculate the game history information for any period.

Furthermore, in this aspect 7, since the date and time information (date information and time information) is added to the ball entry information and the like, the inspection machine 320 can detect the range of date and time information added to the received ball entry information and the like. It is also possible to calculate the game history information by designating the range of dates and times for which the game history information is calculated. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can carry out a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range.

In addition, in this aspect 7, the following configuration may be employed.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received ball entry information and the like on the display unit 328 . According to such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also grasp the date and time when the game ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x The configuration may be such that the ball number data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing data on the number of winning balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, in mode 7, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation The game history information, which is the result of , may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 8>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes, the main ROM 63 stores the calculation execution conditions or the memory execution conditions, and the game history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. , the game history management chip 300 may store these conditions in a non-volatile memory from the beginning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which inappropriate calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63, and the game history information or the number-of-balls information cannot be stored appropriately. can. For example, an extremely short period (for example, the number N _OUT =5 of passing through the discharge passage) is stored as the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition, and the calculation result storage memory 309 or the entering ball number storage memory 309a It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only game history information or ball-in number information for an extremely short period (for example, about one hour) is stored.

<Aspect 9>
In the above-described first embodiment and the above-described other aspects, the function of storing the number of game balls entering each ball entrance, the function of calculating game history information such as the role ratio, and the function of calculating the calculated game history information Although the game history management chip 300 has the function of storing, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have some of these functions. Alternatively, the game history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main side CPU 62x (the main side MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary to separately provide the game history management chip 300, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, according to the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 is provided, the processing load on the main side CPU 62x can be reduced.

<Aspect 10>
In the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 includes some or all of the functions provided by the functional units other than the game history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 and the main CPU 62x). Alternatively, some or all of the functions provided by the game history management chip 300 may be provided by functional units other than the game history management chip 300 . For example, if the game history management chip 300 is configured to include some of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced. If the inspection machine 320 has a configuration in which a part thereof is provided, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role item ratio. good too. In the following, details of aspect 11 will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. This mode 11 is different from the above-described first embodiment (FIG. 5) in that the game history management chip 300 is not provided and that the main side RAM 64 is provided with a winning ball number storage area and a calculation result storage area. different.

The main side CPU 62x updates the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the entered ball number storage area of the main side RAM 64 based on the game ball entry information received from the input/output port 62a. do. Then, when the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is established, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 Calculation is executed based on the number of game balls entered in each ball entry section stored in the entry number storage area of , and the game history information is calculated, and the game history information is stored in the main side RAM 64 as a calculation result. store in the area. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the outline of the processing in the main MPU 62 of aspect 11 of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied. Information on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance stored in the cache is stored in the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64.例文帳に追加In this mode 11, the main side CPU 62x, every time the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the cache of the main side CPU 62x reaches 500, updates information on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance. , is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage area of the main side RAM 64 . As described above, the information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance counted while the 500 game balls were shot to the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entered ball number information group". .

The number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 is an area for sequentially storing information on the number of entered-balls (short-term number-of-entered-balls information group). Information on the order in which the short-term entry number information group is written is also stored in the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64, and the main side CPU 62x does not have an empty area for writing the short-term entry entry number information group. In this case, the short-term entering number information group to be newly written is stored in the area in which the short-term entering number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64 is configured so that the oldest short-term entry number information group is overwritten in order (first-in/first-out method), and the most recent short-term entry number information is always stored. The group is stored.

In this mode 11, the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 is information relating to the number of game balls entered into each ball-entering opening counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 pieces of information on the number of short-term entered balls. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It will be stored in the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main side RAM 64 . Therefore, the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 can store short-term number-of-entered-balls information groups for the most recent ten days.

Then, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term entered ball number information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. Furthermore, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main side CPU 62x executes a game to each entrance stored in each of the plurality of short-term entrance-ball number information groups including the newly stored short-term entrance-ball number information group. The number of hit balls is added, and long-term game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated using the added number of hit balls. That is, the main side CPU 62x of this aspect 11 not only stores the short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot, but also, for example, 600000 (about It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a long period of time when game balls were shot for 10 days. Then, the calculated game history information is stored in the calculation result storage area of the main side RAM 64 .

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area for sequentially storing short-term game history information groups and an area for storing long-term game history information groups. Information about the order in which the short-term gaming history information group was written is also stored in the area for sequentially storing the short-term gaming history information group. (2) stores the newly calculated short-term game history information group in an area in which the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term gaming history information group of the main side RAM 64 is configured so that the oldest short-term gaming history information group is overwritten in order (first-in first-out method), and the most recent short-term gaming history information group is always overwritten. The game history information group is stored. The area for storing the long-term game history information group is overwritten with the newly calculated long-term game history information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. That is, in the area for storing the long-term game history information group, the latest long-term game history information group calculated based on a plurality of short-term entered ball number information groups including the latest short-term entered ball number information group is stored. become.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command to the main side CPU 62x. When receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the main CPU 62 x transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information.

Further, in this aspect 11, when the predetermined operation for displaying the game history information on the pattern display device 41 is executed, the game history information stored in the main side RAM 64 is transmitted via the input/output port 62x to the sound emission control. It is output to the device 90 and displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

Further, in this aspect 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power supply supplied from the capacitor 87 keeps the short-term entry number information group and the game history information stored in the main side RAM 64 counted. Configured to be retained for days.

According to such a configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes the processing for progressing the game such as the jackpot lottery processing and the processing for calculating and storing the game history information. Since there is no need to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing history information, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, a short-term ball entry number information group, which is information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30, is stored in the main side RAM 64. 22, the configuration stores the game ball entry information in the same format (for example, the configuration stores the entry information in the format stored in the entry information storage memory 309b in FIG. 22), and In comparison, it is possible to calculate the most recent short-term game history information group and long-term game history information group while greatly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64 .

Note that the main CPU 62x is not limited to calculating both the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group as the game history information, and may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. The difference from mode 11 (FIG. 23) described above is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x which is a rewritable non-volatile memory capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. The point is that In this flash memory 64x, the number-of-entered-balls storage area for storing the short-term number-of-entered-balls information group in the above-described mode 11, and the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-described mode 11 are stored. and a calculation result storage area are provided.

The main side CPU 62x of mode 12 is configured to store the short-term entered ball count information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced compared to the configuration having the game history management chip 300 . Furthermore, even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, the short-term entered ball count information group and the game history information are retained, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be kept in any state (for example, the pachinko machine can be operated for a long period of time). 10, the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information are always linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are managed. , can be inspected.

In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the short-term entry number information group and the game history information in the main side RAM 64, the storage capacity of the main side RAM 64 can be suppressed, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can do.

<Aspect 13>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the main controller 60 sends the game mode, which is a mode in which the game progress process, which is the process for progressing the game, and the game history information to the inspection machine 320. It is also possible to switch between the inspection mode, which is the output mode, and execute it. The game progress process is a process that is executed based on the detection of game balls by the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, and includes a jackpot lottery process, an electronic role opening lottery process, a prize ball payout process, and a main display section. 45, the process of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, and the like are included.

Then, in the inspection mode, even when the game ball passes through the area detected by the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, the game progress processing may not be executed.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection mode is entered, the inspection mode flag for determining whether or not the inspection mode is set in the main controller 60 is turned ON. Then, main controller 60 determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and when it is determined that the inspection mode flag is ON, does not proceed to the processing flow for executing normal game progress processing. , proceed to the processing flow for inspection mode. As a result, even when the main controller 60 receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected from the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, the main controller 60 performs processing based on the reception of the signal (for example, a random number Processing for acquiring the value of the counter C1, processing for paying out prize balls, processing for transmitting a command to the sound emission control device 90, etc.) are not executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute in the inspection mode a process that is not preferable to be executed in parallel with the game progress process, or a process that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress process. . Further, according to such a configuration, since the game progress processing is not executed in the inspection mode, when developing the program for the processing to be executed in the inspection mode, countermeasures for the case where the game progress processing is executed in parallel are taken. Since there is no need to consider it, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the inspection mode can be greatly improved.

The game history information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, while the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game history information, The content of the game history information may change as the game progress process is executed, and it may become difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the configuration of aspect 13, even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output in the inspection mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the game history information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the game history information from changing while the game is being played. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can smoothly perform the inspection.

The mode of outputting the game history information in the inspection mode is not limited to the mode of outputting the game history information to the inspection machine 320 and displaying it, and other modes may be used. For example, the game history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

Also, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to the game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the detection of game balls by the game ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, such as game ball entry information and entry ball number information.

<Aspect 14>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in a configuration in which the main controller 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, during execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the inspection mode is changed from the game mode to the inspection mode. When a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as a "mode switching operation") for shifting to is executed by the inspector, at the timing when the game progress process being executed has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the game The mode may be changed to the inspection mode.

Specifically, for example, when the mode switching operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed during execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, each game progress processing being executed ( Jackpot lottery process, electric role open lottery process, award ball payout process, symbol variation display process on the main display unit 45, opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.) Allow the process to complete. Then, when the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the processing after the processing stage is not executed and the game enters a standby state. Then, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing when all of the game progress processes being executed have been completed up to a predetermined process stage.

According to such a configuration, the game mode is switched from the game mode to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether the game progressing process being executed has been completed up to the predetermined processing stage. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to the inspection mode, as compared with the configuration that shifts.

For example, provisionally, regardless of whether or not the game progress processing being executed has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed. In this case, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process on the main display part 45 is executed as the game progress process in the game mode, the symbol on the main display part 45 is changed. It is difficult to control the pattern stop timing and the pattern fluctuation time, etc., because the game shifts to the inspection mode in the middle of the variable display. On the other hand, according to the configuration of aspect 14, for example, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing is being performed in the game mode, the symbol variation display processing is performed. At the timing when the processing is completed up to the processing stage where the pattern is stopped after the completion, the inspection mode is entered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

In addition, when shifting (returning) from the inspection mode to the game mode, it may be configured such that the game progress processing of the remaining processing stages scheduled to be executed before shifting to the inspection mode is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the expected game progress process ends in an incomplete state.

In addition, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, at the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode. may be According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when restarting the game progress processing.

Further, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, the game execution processing is interrupted, and information enabling the restart of the interrupted game progress processing is stored in the main side RAM 64. It may be configured such that the game mode is changed to the inspection mode at the timing when the data is stored and the storage is completed. According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, so that many pachinko machines 10 can be inspected in a short period of time.

Further, the mode switching operation for shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing a mode switching button. Further, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be performed.

<Aspect 15>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, during the inspection mode, 10 minutes from the time of transition to the inspection mode If the automatic return condition that has passed is established, a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not performed However, it may be configured to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode.

According to such a configuration, when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not executed, the inspection mode Since it is configured to shift to the game mode from , it is possible to reliably prevent the game mode from returning to the game mode without execution of a predetermined operation. For example, even if the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 forgets to execute a predetermined operation after inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game history information output in the inspection mode, the inspector enters the inspection mode. Since the game mode is restored after 10 minutes have passed since the shift, a situation occurs in which the pachinko machine 10 does not return to the game mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play the game with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

Note that the automatic return condition is not limited to the condition that 10 minutes have elapsed from the time of transition to the inspection mode, and may be another aspect. For example, the condition may be that 5 minutes have passed since the inspection mode was entered, or that 10 minutes have passed since the inspection terminal 65 was removed from the inspection device 320 .

Further, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another aspect. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing a mode switching button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a RAM clear button for initializing the main side RAM 64 is provided in the main controller 60, and an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button (below, The information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized) when an "erase operation" is executed.

Furthermore, the main control device 60 may switch between the game mode and the test mode to execute. Then, in a state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, for example, in a state during the inspection mode or in a state where the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode, while pressing the RAM clear button The information stored in the main RAM 64 may be configured not to be erased even when the erasing operation of pressing the power button is executed.

According to such a configuration, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main side RAM 64 is executed. However, since the information stored in the main side RAM 64 is not erased, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, an erasing operation is mistakenly executed to shift to the game mode. Even if the information is stored in the storage, it is possible to prevent the information from being deleted by mistake.

For example, an erasing operation for erasing information stored in the main RAM 64 is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the mode is shifted between the game mode and the inspection mode. In a configuration in which the operation for this is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, the intention of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button to switch from the inspection mode to the game mode is incorrect. There is a risk that the power button will be pressed while pressing the RAM clear button. However, according to the configuration of aspect 16, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, an erasing operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button by mistake is executed. Even if the information is accidentally deleted, it is possible to prevent the information from being deleted by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, the game progress processing being executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress processing is returned to the inspection mode. In the case of adopting a configuration in which information for restarting later is stored in the main RAM 64, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but the RAM clear button is accidentally pressed. If the power button is pressed while pressing , the information for restarting the game progress processing is erased, and the game progress processing cannot be restarted after returning to the inspection mode. There is a risk that it will be disadvantageous to On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, the power button is pushed while pushing the RAM clear button by mistake to shift to the game mode. Even if is pressed, the information stored in the main side RAM 64 can be prevented from being erroneously erased, so that the player is prevented from being disadvantaged. can be done.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which memorize|stores game history information in main side RAM64. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated memory for storing the game history information, so the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when the erasing operation is executed, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power ON/OFF state, game mode or inspection mode), the game history stored in the main side RAM 64 Information may not be erased, and only information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (such as information stored for restarting the game progress process) may be erased (initialized). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress intentional deletion of game history information that deviates from a predetermined defined range.

Note that the erasing operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be performed in another manner. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in a configuration in which the main controller 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, when the main controller 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode , a game stop command, which is a command indicating that the game progress processing is temporarily stopped by shifting to the inspection mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the game progress processing that was being executed is stopped in the inspection mode. It is good also as a structure which stops temporarily. Specifically, for example, when the mode is shifted to the inspection mode while the pattern variation display on the main display section 45 is being executed, the display on the main display section 45 is extinguished, and the pattern variation time on the main display section 45 is counted. to stop. Further, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, it transmits to the sound emission control device 90 a game restart command, which is a command indicating that the game mode is shifted to restart the game progress processing. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

Then, when the game stop command is received, the sound emission control device 90 temporarily stops the effect being executed, and after that, when the game restart command is received, the effect that has been temporarily stopped is configured to restart. According to such a configuration, even when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game progress processing executed by the main control device 60 (for example, the pattern display on the main display unit 45 is displayed). variable display process) and the effect controlled by the sound emission control device 90 (for example, the variable display process of the pattern in the pattern display device 41) can be synchronized, and the player feels uncomfortable after the transition to the game mode. can be suppressed.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the effect being executed even when the game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when the game stop command is received during the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41, the layer of the variable display of the symbols is continued while the control of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is continued. A layer of another image (for example, a black image) is displayed on top of the . However, since the pattern display device 41 continues to control the variable display of the pattern, the variable display of the pattern continues under the layer of the black image. Then, when the pattern fluctuation time in the pattern display device 41 has passed, the pattern fluctuation display ends under the layer of the black image, but the pattern does not stop but sways slightly.

Then, when a game restart command is received from the main controller 60, the black image layer displayed above the pattern variable display layer is removed, and the pattern layer is displayed again. At this time, the main controller 60 shifts (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and restarts the stopped game progress process (variation display of symbols on the main display section 45).

Then, the main controller 60 resumes the variable display of the symbols on the main display section 45, which had stopped counting the variable time, and when the remaining variable time elapses, that is, the variation of the symbols on the main display section 45 is resumed. When it is time to stop, a symbol stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The sound emission control device 90 that has received the pattern stop command transmits the pattern stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 stops the pattern that was displayed in a slightly swaying manner on the pattern display device 41. stop completely.

According to such a configuration, when the main controller 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display section 45 is turned off, and the display on the pattern display device 41 is a black image. Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 45, which had stopped counting the variable time, is resumed, and the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are displayed variably. It becomes a mode or a display mode that sways slightly. At the timing when the symbols on the main display portion 45 stop, the symbols on the symbol display device 41 also stop. That is, it is possible to synchronize the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 45 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 . Also, even when a game stop command is received, the control of the effect being executed is not stopped, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble caused by temporarily stopping the control of the effect being executed. As a problem, for example, when the control of the production is resumed from the state where the control of the production is temporarily stopped, the timing of the plurality of productions is shifted when the plurality of productions are being executed. For example, there may be a discrepancy between the moving image displayed on the screen 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46 .

In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the main control device 60 does not transmit the symbol stop command to the sound emission control device 90 even when it is time to stop the variation of the symbols on the main display unit 45, the symbol The variable display of the pattern on the display device 41 continues in a slightly swaying mode, and the variable command transmitted from the main control device 60 after that, or the standby command transmitted when no hold information is stored. is received, the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are stopped.

<Aspect 18>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined time has come. Specifically, for example, at 11:10 pm, the game mode may be shifted to the inspection mode, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 . According to such a configuration, since the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at around 11:10 pm after the game hall closes, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected. A person can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the game hall is closed without taking time to shift each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Further, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer. According to such a configuration, for example, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall are shifted to the inspection mode all at once, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on each pattern display device 41. Therefore, an inspector of the pachinko machines 10 can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without taking the time and effort to shift each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode. becomes.

<Aspect 19>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the game history information may be always displayed on the symbol display device 41 . According to such a configuration, the player or the inspector can always check the game history information. It is possible to notice anomalies. As a result, it is possible to quickly ensure the soundness of the game.

<Aspect 20>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, a 7-segment display composed of seven light-emitting diodes is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and games stored in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the 7-segment display. It may be configured to display information related to history information. For example, when the main controller 60 shifts from the above-described game mode to the inspection mode, whether or not the accessory ratio and payout ratio (in normal mode) stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range. or may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

More specifically, for example, when the main controller 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, the 7-segment display displays "1" indicating that the character ratio is to be displayed, and then the character ratio is displayed. is within a predetermined range (specifically, when the character ratio is 0.700 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while the character ratio is not within a predetermined range, an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After displaying the character ratio, "2" indicating that the continuous character ratio is to be displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and if the continuous character ratio is within a predetermined range (specifically is 0.600 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while if the continuous character ratio is not within the predetermined range , an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "2" indicating that the payout ratio (in normal mode) is to be displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a predetermined range. (Specifically, when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the range of 0.60 to 0.70), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, On the other hand, if the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not within the predetermined range, an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the accessory ratio. In addition, since the 7-segment display consumes less power, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the game history information can be inspected using only a small amount of power, such as the capacitors and batteries provided inside the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to

Also, the information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be always displayed on the 7-segment display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the role item ratio without switching from the game mode to the inspection mode. Also, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have an inspection mode, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the character ratio. Furthermore, if the 7-segment display is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the 7-segment display does not come into the player's field of vision, so the player does not like the display of the 7-segment display. It can be suppressed that it becomes impossible to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, when an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine main body 12 supported by the hinge 15 is rotated forward, and the pachinko machine main body 12 is provided on the back side. Since it is only necessary to check the display of the 7-segment display, it is possible to easily and quickly check the game history information such as the character ratio. Instead of the 7-segment display, another display capable of displaying the game history information in a recognizable manner, such as a segment display composed of light-emitting diodes other than seven, may be employed.

<Aspect 21>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the configuration may be such that the sound emission control device 90 calculates the game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main controller 60 transmits a signal including the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the sound emission control device 90 in the initial setting process. , the sound emission control device 90 calculates game history information based on the obtained winning ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and calculates the calculated game history information may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

According to such a configuration, the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, and the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63. Even if the storage position (memory address) of the stored number of prize balls data cannot be grasped, the sound emission control device 90 can detect the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main side ROM 63. It becomes possible to acquire number data, and to calculate game history information. Further, since the sound emission control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be greatly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above are applicable not only to the pachinko machine 10 capable of shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, but also to a gaming machine capable of shifting from the game mode to another mode. . For example, it can be applied to a game machine having a game state display mode that can display the state of processing related to the game, such as the state of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the contents of the stored reservation information. can.

<Aspect 23>
FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the above-described game history information is calculated by the main side CPU 62x. The main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area). The second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for deploying a program for executing processing for calculating and displaying game history information (hereinafter also referred to as game history processing). Then, the main CPU 62x writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64 when executing the processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than the processing for game history), and when executing the processing for game history , writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64 .

The first area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit entry detection information storage area, a stack area, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the second area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit buffer area, winning ball tally buffer, calculation buffer, calculation result buffer, stack area, etc., which will be described later. Details of these will be described later.

A game history information display unit 45z is connected to the input/output port 62a. The game history information display section 45z is composed of four 7-segment displays, and is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As will be described later, the game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x is displayed on the game history information display section 45z.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. Also in this aspect, the timer interrupt process is started at a 4 msec cycle, as in the first embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above is that the content of the ball entry detection process shown in step S10606 is different, and that the game history information is used to calculate and display the game history information. Processing is added as the final processing (step S10616) of this timer interrupt processing, and ball entry detection information output processing (step S10207 in FIG. 13) is processing for outputting ball entry detection information to the game history management chip. processing) is omitted, and other processing is the same as the processing described in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment. The ball entry detection process in step S10606 shown in FIG. 27 and the game history process in step S10616 will be described below.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the ball-entering detection process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In the entering ball detection process of aspect 23, it is determined that there is no information (“0”) in the bit of the input port 62b in the previous (one time before) timer interrupt process, and the bit of the input port 62b is determined in the current timer interrupt process. is determined to have information ("1"), and when it is determined that the bit has information ("1") again in the timer interrupt process, the game is played at the entrance corresponding to the bit. It is determined that the ball has entered the ball. An example of the ball-entering detection process will be described below.

In step S10701, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 (FIG. 14) of the input port 62b (hereinafter also referred to as ball entry determination information) is read. The information for ball entry determination is stored in the first buffer, which is an 8-bit buffer. That is, the first buffer is a buffer for storing the entering ball determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt processing. The second buffer, which will be described later, is an 8-bit buffer that stores the entering ball determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the previous timer interrupt process. Moreover, in this aspect, the first buffer and the second buffer are provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 . After executing step S10702, the process advances to step S10703.

In step S10703, 8 is set in the ball entry determination counter provided in the main side RAM 64 . Then proceed to 10704 . Note that the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is the same as the ball entry determination counter (step S10401) used in the above-described ball entry determination process (FIG. 16) of the eight ball entrances. bits. Specifically, in this aspect, the numerical information "8" of the entering ball determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the big winning opening 36a, "7" is the first bit D1 of the first start opening 33, and "6" is The second bit D2 of the second starting hole 34, "5" is the third bit D3 of the first winning hole 32a, "4" is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning hole 32b, and "3" is the third winning hole 32c. , "2" corresponds to the sixth bit D6 of the through gate 35, and "1" corresponds to the seventh bit D7 of the exhaust passage, respectively.

In step S10704, it is determined whether or not there is information for ball entry judgment in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the counter for entry judgment in the second buffer, that is, the information for ball entry judgment stored in the bit is "1". Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S10704 that the information for determination of entering ball is not "1" (S10704: NO), the process proceeds to step S10705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10704 that the entry determination information is "1" (S10704: YES), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processing from steps S10705 to S10709 described later. .

In step S10705, it is determined whether or not there is ball entry judgment information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry judgment counter in the first buffer, that is, the entry judgment information stored in the bit is "1". Determine whether or not If it is determined in step S10705 that the information for determination of entering ball is "1" (S10705: YES), the process proceeds to step S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10705 that the entry determination information is not "1" (S10705: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processing from steps S10706 to S10709 described later. .

In step S10706, it is checked whether or not the bit corresponding to the numerical value information of the entry judgment counter in the current input port 62b is the entry judgment information, that is, the entry judgment information stored in the bit is "1". It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S10706 that the information for determination of entering ball is "1" (S10706: YES), the process proceeds to step S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10706 that the entry determination information is not "1" (S10706: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processing from steps S10707 to S10709 described later. .

In step S10707, it is determined whether the current numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to which type of ball entrance, and the game ball entered the ball entrance corresponding to the bit. Turn ON the entering ball flag indicating . Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the large winning opening 36a, it is determined that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a. Turn ON the big winning entrance ball flag shown. Also, for example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the second starting port 34, it indicates that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Turn on the second start port entrance flag. After executing step S10707, the process advances to step S10708.

At step S10708, 1 is added to the value information of the winning ball counter corresponding to the ball entrance where the ball entry flag was turned ON at step S10707, that is, the game ball was judged to have entered. Specifically, for example, when the big winning opening ball entry flag is turned on, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counter, and when the second starting opening ball entry flag is turned on, 3 prize balls are added. Add 1 to the counter. After executing step S10708, the process advances to step S10709.

In step S10709, the entry determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10710, it is determined whether or not the entry determination counter is "0".

If it is determined in step S10710 that the entry determination counter is not "0" (S10710: NO), the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter updated in step S10709 are processed in steps S10704 to S10708. Execute the process. When the processing of steps S10704 to S10708 is executed for the amount of numerical information set in step S10703, the ball entry determination counter becomes "0", and an affirmative determination is made in step S10710 (S10710: YES). Proceed to S10711.

In step S10711, the 8-bit entry determination information stored in the first buffer is stored (copied) in the second buffer. As a result, the entering ball determination information acquired from the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process is referred to in the entering ball detection process in the next timer interrupt process. After executing step S10711, the process proceeds to step S10712.

In step S10712, the ball entry detection information indicating that the game ball entry has been detected in the ball entry detection processing of the timer interrupt processing this time is stored in the ball entry detection information storage area capable of storing 8-bit information. . Specifically, the ball entry detection information storage area stores "1" when the ball entry flag is ON for each bit corresponding to each of the above-described eight ball entry holes. If the flag is OFF, "0" is stored as the ball entry detection information. For example, as a result of executing the ball entry detection process in the timer interrupt process this time, the big winning hole entry flag and the second starting hole entry flag are ON, and the entry flags corresponding to the other ball entry holes are OFF. In some cases, the 8-bit entry detection information "00000101" is stored in the entry detection information storage area. The 8-bit entry detection information stored in this entry detection information storage area is referred to in game history processing, which will be described later. After executing step S10712, the main ball entry detection process ends.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing game history processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 23 of the first embodiment. In this game history process, a process for calculating the role ratio and the continuous role ratio and displaying them on the game history information display section 45z is executed. Specifically, the character ratio is calculated, and the calculated character ratio is displayed on the game history information display section 45z for 5 seconds. After that, the continuous role material ratio is calculated, and the calculated continuous role material ratio is displayed on the game history information display section 45z for 5 seconds. After that, the character ratio is calculated again, and the calculated character ratio is displayed on the game history information display section 45z for 5 seconds. In this way, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are alternately displayed on the game history information display section 45z. An example of specific processing will be described below.

In step S10801, save processing is executed to save the information stored in the register in the main CPU 62x (hereinafter also referred to as register information) to the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. FIG. In this aspect 23, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), before the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed, the game progress process (FIG. 27), which is a process other than the game history process (steps S10601 to 10615) are executed, the register information relating to the progress of the game is saved to the stack area of the second area of the main side RAM 64 in the saving process. Specifically, the value of the stack pointer in the main CPU 62x (the address value indicating the top of the stack area of the first area) is saved (pushed) to the bottom of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 . Then, an address value indicating the top of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. After that, the register information stored in the registers in the main CPU 62x is sequentially saved in the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the uppermost stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64). Push. By executing this saving process, the address value of the stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, so that the main CPU 62x stores the game history information described below. The processing of calculating and displaying can be executed using the second area of the main RAM 64 . After executing step S10801, the process proceeds to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is ON. The abnormal flag is a flag that is turned ON when the prize ball total value, which will be described later, is an abnormal value. In step S10802, when it is determined that the abnormality flag is ON (S10802: YES), the process proceeds to step S10803, and the prize ball total value is cleared to zero. After that, the process advances to step S10804 to turn off the abnormality flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is not ON (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to step S10805 without executing the processes of steps S10803 and S10804.

In step S10805, OR processing is performed for each corresponding bit in the entering detection information storage area and the buffer area, and the result of each OR processing (logical sum) is stored (overwritten) in the corresponding bit in the buffer area. The details of this processing will be described later. The buffer area is an area capable of storing the same 8-bit information as the entering detection information storage area, and is provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64 . After executing step S10805, the process advances to step S10806.

In step S10806, it is determined whether or not at least one bit of the eight bits in the buffer area has ball entry detection information (whether or not "1" is stored in one or more bits). . If it is determined in step S10806 that at least one bit of the buffer area contains ball entry detection information (S10806: YES), the process proceeds to step S10807.

In step S10807, a target setting process is executed for setting a bit to be the target of the prize ball tallying process, which will be described later, among the eight bits of the buffer area. In this aspect, in one target setting process, two consecutive bits are set as the target of the prize ball tallying process. Also, as will be described later, when the target setting process is executed in the next or subsequent timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits located next to the two bits set in the previous target setting process is set as the target of the prize ball tallying process. In this way, the two bits targeted for the winning ball tallying process are sequentially shifted next to each other. It should be noted that after the last two bits of the eight bits are set as the target of the prize ball counting process, the first two bits are set to the prize ball counting process in the next target setting process. Set as target again. As described above, in this aspect, the order of two bits to be set as the processing targets of the prize ball tallying process among the eight bits of the buffer area is determined in advance. After executing step S10807, the process advances to step S10808 to execute prize ball counting processing corresponding to the set bit. A specific example of the processing from step S10805 to step S10808 will now be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. As described above, the ball entry detection information storage area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the first area of the main side RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each ball entrance. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the ball entry detection information storage area is the big winning opening 36a, the 1st bit D1 is the first starting opening 33, the 2nd bit D2 is the second starting opening 34, the third The bit D3 corresponds to the first prize winning port 32a, the fourth bit D4 corresponds to the second prize winning port 32b, the fifth bit D5 corresponds to the third prize winning port 32c, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. are doing.

The buffer area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each entrance. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the buffer area is the big prize winning port 36a, the 1st bit D1 is the first start port 33, the 2nd bit D2 is the second start port 34, and the 3rd bit D3 is the 1st start port 34. The 1st winning port 32a, the 4th bit D4 correspond to the 2nd winning port 32b, the 5th bit D5 corresponds to the 3rd winning port 32c, the 6th bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the 7th bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. That is, each bit of the buffer area corresponds to each bit of the entering detection information storage area.

In the above-described ball entry detection process (FIG. 28), when it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entry opening such as the big winning opening 36a, the game ball A bit corresponding to the ball entrance determined to have entered the ball is turned ON (“1”).

FIG. 30A1 shows an example of processing when the n-th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n-th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that the game ball has entered the second start hole 34 and the first winning hole 32a, and eight bits of the ball entry detection information storage area is "00001100". Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "00000000". Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "00001100". As a result, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed, is set as a processing target of the winning ball tallying process, which will be described later, and is stored in the buffer area until the process is executed. will be held in

In the n-th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits, the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1, out of the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed, are subjected to the prize ball counting process. set as the processing target of

In the prize ball counting process, if the 0th bit D0 (the bit corresponding to the big winning hole 36a) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", the winning ball is stored in the prize ball counting buffer. Add "15" to the total number of prize balls and the number of consecutive prize balls. On the other hand, when the 0th bit D0 is "0", the addition is not performed. It should be noted that, in this aspect, the winning ball tallying buffer is configured as a ring buffer, and configured to store the number of winning balls paid out in the most recent predetermined period. Further, the number of consecutive bonus balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous bonus action, and is paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big winning opening 36a. It means the number of game balls.

Furthermore, in the prize ball counting process, when the first bit D1 (the bit corresponding to the first start port 33) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", Add "3" to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the first bit D1 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30A1, the 0th bit D0 is "0" and the 1st bit D1 is also "0", so the addition described above is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1) set as objects of the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

FIG. 30A2 shows an example of processing when the (n+1)th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+1th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 32b, and the value of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area is "00010000". ”. Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "00001100", which is the same as the buffer area after the winning balls tallying process in the above-described n-th timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "00011100".

In the (n+1)-th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits, the second bit D2 and the third bit D3, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed, are subjected to the prize ball counting process. set as the processing target of

In the prize ball counting process, when the second bit D2 (the bit corresponding to the second starting port 34) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", the value is stored in the prize ball counting buffer. Add "3" to the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when the second bit D2 is "0", the addition is not performed. In addition, the number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the prize, and the number of prize balls is determined based on the number of game balls entering the second start hole 34 and the big winning hole 36a. It means the number of game balls paid out.

Furthermore, in the prize ball counting process, when the third bit D3 (the bit corresponding to the first winning hole 32a) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", Add "10" to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the third bit D3 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30(A2), since the second bit D2 is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls. Also, since the third bit D3 is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (the second bit D2 and the third bit D3) set as targets of the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

FIG. 30A3 shows an example of processing when the n+2th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+2th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the 8-bit value of the ball entry detection information storage area is " 01000000". Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "00010000", which is the same as the buffer area after the winning balls tallying process in the above-mentioned n+1 timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "01010000".

In the (n+2)th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits of the 4th bit D4 and the 5th bit D5 out of the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed are counted. set as the processing target of

In the prize ball counting process, when the fourth bit D4 (the bit corresponding to the second winning hole 32b) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", it is stored in the prize ball counting buffer. Add “10” to the total number of prize balls in the game. On the other hand, when the fourth bit D4 is "0", the addition is not performed.

Furthermore, in the prize ball counting process, when the fifth bit D5 (the bit corresponding to the third winning hole 32c) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the fifth bit D5 is "0", the addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30(A3), since the fourth bit D4 is "1", "10" is added to the total number of winning balls. Also, since the fifth bit D5 is "0", the addition described above is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (the fourth bit D4 and the fifth bit D5) set as objects of the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

FIG. 30A4 shows an example of processing when the (n+3)th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+3-th timer interrupt process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a, and the value of the eight bits of the ball entry detection information storage area is "00100001". It has become. Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before executing the OR process is "01000000", which is the same as the buffer area after the winning balls tallying process in the above-mentioned n+2 timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is "01100001".

In the (n+3)th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits, 6th bit D6 and 7th bit D7, out of the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed, are counted. set as the processing target of

However, in this embodiment, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. No prize balls are set in the through gate 35 and the discharge passage. Therefore, in this aspect, when the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7 are set as targets for the prize ball counting process, addition to the total number of prize balls and the like is not performed in the prize ball counting process. After that, the two bits (6th bit D6 and 7th bit D7) that are set as objects of prize ball totalization processing in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

After that, in the (n+4)th timer interrupt process, the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1 are again set as objects to be processed in the prize ball tallying process. Thereafter, similar processing is repeatedly executed. However, as will be described later, if there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), the target setting process (step S10807) and prize ball tallying process (step S10808) ) is not executed. Further, in this aspect, the state in which there is no entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") is changed again to the presence of entry detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area. state, and when the target setting process is executed, the two bits set as the processing targets of the prize ball counting process in the previous target setting process are stored and positioned next to the two bits. Two consecutive bits are set as objects to be processed in the winning ball tallying process. In addition, when the two bits set as the processing targets of the prize ball counting processing in the previous target setting processing are the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, the two bits of the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1 consecutive bits are set as objects to be processed in the winning ball tallying process.

As described above, in this aspect, in one timer interrupt process, two bits out of eight bits in the buffer area are set as targets for the winning ball counting process, so at least one bit in the buffer area If there is ball-entering detection information, timer interrupt processing is executed four times, and winning ball tally processing is executed for all eight bits of the buffer area.

Returning to the description of FIG. After executing the prize ball tallying process in step S10808, the process proceeds to step S10809.

In step S10809, calculation result display control processing is executed. Specifically, it executes control to display the value (the calculated character ratio or the continuous character ratio that is the calculated game history information) stored in the calculation result buffer, which will be described later, on the game history information display section 45z. After executing step S10809, the process advances to step S10810.

In step S10810, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. Specifically, when a predetermined time (30 minutes in this aspect) has passed since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, or when 5 seconds have passed since the previous execution of the calculation process, at the timing of executing the calculation process Determine that there is. If it is determined in step S10810 that it is time to execute arithmetic processing (S10810: YES), the process proceeds to step S10811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10810 that it is not the timing to execute the arithmetic processing (S10810: NO), the process proceeds to step S10813 without executing the processing of steps S10811 and S10812 described later.

In step S10811, the type of game history information calculated in arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 to be described later) is set. In this aspect, as the types of game history information to be calculated, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are alternately set. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10812 to designate task 1 as the next task to be executed in task processing (step S10814) described later. After executing step S10812, the process proceeds to step S10813.

In step S10813, the process of returning the register information saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 in the saving process described above to the register of the main CPU 62x is executed. Specifically, the saved register information is sequentially transferred from the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the uppermost stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64) to the main CPU 62x. return (pop) to the internal register. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer (the address value indicating the top of the stack area of the first area) saved to the bottom of the stack area of the second area is returned (popped) to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. By executing this return processing, the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x is set to the address value of the stack area in the first area of the main RAM 64, so that the main CPU 62x returns to the first area of the main RAM 64 again. It is possible to execute processing related to the progress of the game using the area. After that, the game history processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S10806. If it is determined in step S10806 that there is no entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") (S10806: NO), the process proceeds to step S10814.

In step S10814, one of the following three tasks is executed. If no task is specified, task 3 is executed. That is, instead of sequentially executing three tasks in one timer interrupt process, only one of the specified three tasks is executed in one timer interrupt process.

[Task 1]
The dividend and divisor necessary for calculating the game history information set as the calculation target are stored in the calculation buffer. Specifically, for example, when the setting is made so as to calculate the role ratio, the number of award balls as the dividend and the total number of award balls as the divisor are stored in the calculation buffer. Further, for example, when the continuous role product ratio is set to be calculated, the number of consecutive role product prize balls is stored as the dividend, and the total number of prize balls as the divisor is stored in the calculation buffer. After that, task 2 is specified as the next task to be executed when proceeding to the processing of step S10806 in the timer interrupt processing from the next time onward.

[Task 2]
An operation of dividing the dividend stored in the operation buffer by the divisor is executed, and the operation result (quotient) is stored in the operation result buffer. After that, task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when proceeding to the processing of step S10806 in the timer interrupt processing after the next time.

[Task 3]
It is determined whether or not the aggregate value of prize balls (the number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls, and the total number of prize balls) is valid, and if it is determined that it is not valid, the abnormality flag is turned on, and then , task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the timer interrupt process after the next time. On the other hand, if it is determined that the total prize value is valid, the abnormality flag is not turned ON, and task 3 is specified as the next task. Here, the case where the total number of prize balls is not valid means that the number of prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, or the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls. This is the case where there is a contradiction in the total value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls.

After executing the designated task out of the three tasks described above, the process proceeds to step S10809 described above, and the value (character ratio or continuous character ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer is displayed in the game history information display unit. 45z is displayed. In this mode, the information indicating the type of the game history information is displayed on the first 7-segment display which constitutes the game history information display section 45z, and the value of the game history information is displayed on the remaining three 7-segment displays. do.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect described above, the processing related to the progress of the game included in the timer interrupt processing (processing other than the processing for game history) is the time until the next timer interrupt processing is started (4 msec in this aspect). ) is programmed to finish in a shorter time than ), but the time required to finish the processing related to the progress of the game changes according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the game history process is a process unrelated to the progress of the game, in one timer interrupt process, the process related to the progress of the game is executed rather than the time for executing the game history process. It is preferable to prioritize the time for In addition, even if it is not configured to continuously execute various processes included in the game history process (for example, prize ball counting process and arithmetic process for each bit, etc.) in one timer interrupt process, the game can be completed. Progression is not affected. Therefore, in this aspect, even if the execution time of the processing related to the progress of the game reaches the maximum according to the progress of the game, the execution time of the timer interrupt processing once (execution of the processing related to the progress of the game) Various processes included in the game history process are divided into a plurality of processes so that the time + the execution time of the game history process) is shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt process is started. In one timer interrupt process, the divided processes are executed, and various processes are completed by executing the timer interrupt process a plurality of times. As a result, according to this aspect, it is possible to execute the game history process while securing the time required to execute the process related to the progress of the game in one timer interrupt process.

Specifically, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of the two tasks (task 1 and task 2) constituting the arithmetic process that is the process of calculating the game history information can be executed, and by executing timer interrupt processing twice, all of the two tasks that make up the arithmetic processing are executed, so both tasks are executed in one execution of timer interrupt processing. The time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to the configuration that does. As a result, the time required for one execution of timer interrupt processing becomes longer than 4 msec, which is the interval at which the execution of timer interrupt processing is started (hereinafter also referred to as the interrupt interval), and the timer interrupt processing is reduced to 4 msec. It is possible to suppress the fact that execution becomes impossible at intervals.

Further, according to this aspect, the series of processes whose execution order is determined is divided into a plurality of tasks, and in one execution of the timer interrupt process, after executing one of the plurality of tasks, , the task to be executed next to the one task in question is specified, so when incorporated into timer interrupt processing, the time required to execute the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt processing. Even processing can be incorporated into timer interrupt processing and executed. Specifically, according to this aspect, when the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes longer than 4 msec. Also in the gaming machine with the configuration, the arithmetic processing can be executed by incorporating it into the timer interrupt processing which is executed at intervals of 4 msec. In addition, the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all tasks are not executed in one execution of the timer interrupt processing. The required time can be allocated to the execution time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as targets for the processing of the prize ball tallying process. It is possible to execute the prize ball counting process for the bit to be processed, and by executing the timer interrupt process multiple times, the prize ball counting process is executed for all the eight bits D0 to D7 of the buffer area. do. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to the configuration in which the prize ball counting process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in one execution of the timer interrupt process. can be done. As a result, the time required to execute timer interrupt processing becomes longer than 4 msec, which is the interval at which timer interrupt processing is started, and timer interrupt processing cannot be executed at intervals of 4 msec. can be suppressed.

Further, according to this aspect, when setting two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area as objects to be processed in the prize ball tallying process, they are set in a predetermined order. It is possible to simplify the processing without executing the determination processing of which bit is set as the processing target of the sphere totalization processing, and as a result, it is possible to improve the processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for executing the determination process.

In addition, according to this aspect, the main side CPU 62x detects two game balls continuously entering one ball entrance in a time shorter than the shortest interval (about 18 msec in this aspect). Since the timer interrupt process can be executed four times, the prize ball tally process (the Step S10808) can be executed. Therefore, even if two game balls enter the same ball entrance in succession, the entrance of the first game ball is detected at the ball entrance. The updated ball entry detection information is set as a processing target, and prize ball counting processing is executed, and then the remaining ball entry detection information corresponding to other ball entrances is set as a processing target, and prize ball counting processing is performed. is executed, it is possible to end the winning ball tallying process for all these ball entry detection information before the next second game ball entry is detected in the ball entry section. can. That is, at the time when the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entry at the ball entrance is set as the processing target and the winning ball tallying process is executed, The winning ball tallying process for the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the entry of the first game ball at the ball entrance has already been completed. Effects of this configuration will be described below.

As in this aspect, in a configuration that adopts binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether or not a game ball has entered as the ball entry detection information, if a second ball enters a certain ball entrance, Ball entry detection updated from "0" to "1" based on the entry of the first game ball into the ball entrance until the entry of the game ball is detected at the ball entrance If the winning ball totaling process is not executed for the information, when the entry of the second game ball is detected at the entrance, the entrance detection information corresponding to the entrance is still " 1”, and the entry of the second game ball cannot be recorded. That is, in spite of the fact that two game balls have entered the ball entrance in succession, the ball entry detection information corresponding to the ball entrance indicates that one game ball has entered the ball entrance. It cannot be distinguished from the situation in which only balls have entered, and in the winning ball counting process, it is treated as a situation in which one game ball has entered the ball entrance. As a result, it may not be possible to record the correct number of prize balls in the prize ball counting process.

On the other hand, according to this aspect, when the entry of the second game ball is detected in the entry hole, the update is already made by the entry of the first game ball into the entry hole. Prize ball tallying processing is executed for the entered ball detection information, and since the entered ball detection information is "0", the entry of the second game ball can be recorded. . As a result, it is possible to accurately record the number of prize balls in the prize ball counting process. As a result, it is possible to adopt binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether or not a game ball has entered as the ball entry detection information while ensuring accuracy in the winning ball tallying process. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the entering ball detection information and improve the processing speed of the winning ball tallying process.

In addition, according to this aspect, the game history processing (FIG. 29) stores the information held by the register in the main side CPU 62x, which is information for executing the processing related to the progress of the game, in the second area of the main side RAM 64. (step S10801 in FIG. 29) of writing to the stack area of , when the main CPU 62x starts the game history process, the register in the main CPU 62x registers the game that was being executed immediately before the start of the game history process. When holding information for executing processing related to the progress of , the information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 . Therefore, the information for executing the processing related to the progress of the game held in the register in the main CPU 62x is erased, and when the game history processing is executed by the main CPU 62x, the register for the game history is stored in the register in the main CPU 62x. Information for execution of processing can be held.

Further, according to this aspect, the game history processing (FIG. 29) is a return processing (FIG. 29 , step S10813), when the game history process is terminated, the information for executing the process relating to the progress of the game is held again in the register of the main side CPU 62x, and executed before the start of the game history process. It is possible to re-execute the processing related to the progress of the game from the state immediately before the start of the processing for game history.

Further, according to this aspect, since the saving process and the returning process are included in the game history process, even if only the program for executing the game history process is deleted, the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process can be performed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which is executed without problems. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history process without altering the program for executing the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so that the game history process is not executed, or when developing a new game machine that does not execute the game history process based on the game machine, the design change can be minimized. It is possible to limit

Further, according to this aspect, the main CPU 62x writes information in the game history process only to the second area of the main RAM 64, so that the information is written to the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to prevent the information from being rewritten due to the execution of the game history process. Therefore, in the configuration in which the processing related to the progress of the game is executed using the first area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to suppress the influence of the processing related to the progress of the game by the processing for the game history. .

In addition, according to this aspect, the main CPU 62x writes information in the processing related to the progress of the game only to the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the game from being rewritten due to the execution of the processing related to the progress of the game. Therefore, in the configuration in which the game history process is executed using the second area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from affecting the game history process.

Further, according to this aspect, since the 8-bit buffer area capable of storing the ball entry detection information is provided, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed is It can be held until it is set as a processing target of the prize ball tallying process and the process is executed.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when executing the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) in one timer interrupt process, arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 of step S10814) is executed. do not. That is, in one timer interrupt process, both the prize ball tallying process and the arithmetic process are not executed, so the time required for executing one timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process becomes longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process, preventing the timer interrupt process from being executed at the interrupt interval. be able to. Furthermore, according to this aspect, the winning ball tallying process in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are correlated is executed with priority over the calculation process in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are not correlated. , suppresses the interval between the execution of the prize ball counting process from increasing, and as a result, the prize ball total value, which is the processing result of the prize ball counting process, cannot accurately reflect the ball entry state of the game ball. can be suppressed. Specifically, for example, the next game ball enters the ball entrance corresponding to the bit before the winning ball tallying process is executed for the bit in the buffer area, resulting in two It is possible to suppress the handling of the entry of game balls as the entry of one game ball.

Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing (step S10810: YES) when the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) is not executed, Since the arithmetic processing (task 1 and task 2 of step S10814) is executed, neither the prize ball totalization processing nor the arithmetic processing is executed in one timer interrupt processing. In addition, it is possible to execute other processing independent of these processing (in this aspect, the processing of determining the validity of the total value of prize balls (task 3 of step S10814)). Furthermore, in this aspect, when either the prize ball tallying process or the arithmetic process is executed in one timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is configured to be shorter than the interrupt interval. Therefore, in a situation where neither the prize ball counting process nor the calculation process is executed, by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the prize ball counting process and the calculation process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process becomes longer than the interrupt interval.

Further, according to this aspect, although it is possible to calculate two types of game history information, namely, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, in the arithmetic processing in one timer interrupt process, the role ratio Alternatively, since processing for calculating either one of the continuous accessory ratios is executed, compared to a configuration that executes processing for calculating two types of game history information in arithmetic processing in one timer interrupt processing , the time required for one execution of timer interrupt processing can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval and the timer interrupt process not being able to be executed at the predetermined interrupt interval. . In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main side RAM 64 for temporarily storing the calculated game history information.

Further, according to this aspect, in the ball entry detection process, when the ball entry determination information of the bit corresponding to each ball entrance becomes "0"→"1"→"1", Since it is determined that the game ball has entered the ball entrance, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of erroneous detection due to electrical noise, as in the first embodiment described above.

<Aspect 24>
In the above aspect 23, as the game history information, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are calculated. It can be configured to calculate. For example, it may be configured to calculate the ball-out rate, the payout rate, and the like shown in the first embodiment. In this case, the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been shot onto the game board 30) is also totaled in the same manner as the above-described prize ball counting process (step S10808 in FIG. 29). do it.

<Aspect 25>
In the game history processing of aspect 23 (FIG. 29), when it is determined that the abnormality flag is ON in step S10802, the total prize ball value is cleared (step S10803), and the abnormality flag is turned OFF (step S10804) However, when the abnormality flag is turned ON for a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred may be displayed on the game history information display section 45z.

<Aspect 26>
In the above aspect 23, the arithmetic processing, which is the processing for calculating the game history information, is divided into a plurality of tasks and executed. The processing can be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed. For example, in a configuration in which the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 sets the content of the effect to be executed, the processing for setting the content of the effect may be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed.

<Aspect 27>
In Aspect 23 above, two of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as processing targets for the prize ball tallying process, but the number of bits to be processed is two. is not limited to, and other numbers may be used. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which five bits are set as objects to be processed in one timer interrupt process. Also, in one timer interrupt process, a configuration may be adopted in which all eight bits are set as targets to be processed. In addition, it is possible to set only predetermined bits (for example, 6 bits from 0th bit D0 to 5th bit D5 in which prize balls are set) out of the 8 bits to be processed. In timer interrupt processing, a configuration may be adopted in which two bits are set as objects to be processed.

<Aspect 28>
In the above aspect 23, the first area of the main RAM 64 is assigned as the storage area for executing the processing related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is assigned as the storage area for executing the game history processing. However, the second area of the main RAM 64 may be allocated as a storage area for executing other processes than the game history process.

Also, the main RAM 64 may be divided into three or more areas. Then, for example, the third area, which is the third area of the main RAM 64, may be allocated as a storage area for executing processing for outputting the game history information to the outside.

<Aspect 29>
In the above aspect 23, the game history process includes the save process and the return process, but the process other than the game history process may include the save process and the return process. For example, the processing that is scheduled to be deleted when the design of the game machine is changed may include the save processing and the return processing.

<Aspect 30>
In the above aspect 23, the game history process is incorporated in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), but the game history process may be incorporated in the main process (FIG. 12). Further, in the above aspect 23, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) incorporates the game history process as a process different from the process related to the progress of the game. Alternatively, processing other than the game history processing may be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing. For example, a configuration in which transmission processing for transmitting information regarding the state of a game to a hall computer installed in a game hall at a predetermined timing is incorporated in timer interrupt processing as processing different from processing regarding the progress of the game. may be Also, various processes different from the processes related to the progress of the game may be incorporated into the main process.

<Aspect 31>
In the above aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the game history processing (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. 300, the main CPU 62x may execute the game history process (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, since the game history information can be calculated in two systems, it is possible to calculate the game history information even if a problem occurs in one system. In addition, if the game history information calculated from the two systems is compared and it is configured to notify (display) whether or not these values match, the reliability and accuracy of the calculated game history information can be confirmed. It becomes possible to

Further, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate the game history information by executing the game history processing (FIG. 29) described in the above aspect 23. FIG.

<Aspect 32>
In step S10805 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area (FIG. 30) provided in the first area of the main side RAM 64 is ORed. Although it is configured to read out in the processing, instead of this configuration, an 8-bit storage area (hereinafter also referred to as a second entrance detection information storage area) corresponding to the entrance detection information storage area is stored in the second storage area of the main side RAM 64. The information stored in each bit of the entering ball detection information storage area provided in the first area of the main side RAM 64 is provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64. A configuration may be adopted in which the data is duplicated (copied) to the second ball entry detection information storage area, and the duplicated information of each bit is read out in the OR processing of step S10805.

Also, the entering detection information storage area may be provided in the second area of the main side RAM 64 .

<Aspect 33>
In step S10814 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, if the arithmetic processing (task 1 or task 2) for calculating game history information is not executed, the total value of prize balls included in task 3 is valid. Although the processing for determining the validity is always executed, the processing for determining the validity of the total value of prize balls may be executed only once each time the game history information is newly calculated. Specifically, for example, after judging the effectiveness of the total value of prize balls in task 3, the judged flag indicating that the judgment has been completed is turned ON, and next time task 3 is executed, the judged flag is ON, the processing for determining the validity of the prize ball total value is not executed. Then, in task 1 that is executed again, the determined flag may be turned OFF. According to such a configuration, the validity of the total value of prize balls, which is the basis for calculating the game history information, is determined to ensure the validity of the game history information, and one game history process is completed. It is possible to further shorten the processing time required to.

<Aspect 34>
In step S10810 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) has passed since the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, or when 5 seconds have passed since the previous execution of the arithmetic processing In this case, it is determined that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing, and the game history information is calculated. It is also possible to determine that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing, and thereafter determine that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing each time five seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the arithmetic processing. In this configuration, until the total number of prize balls in the total value of prize balls reaches 60,000, the calculated game history information is displayed on the game history information display section 45z with blinking display, and the total number of prize balls reaches 60,000. After reaching it, it may be configured such that it is illuminated when the calculated game history information is displayed on the game history information display section 45z. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not a sufficient amount of statistical data has been accumulated as the prize ball total value that is the basis for calculating the displayed game history information. Instead of the total number of prize balls, the total number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been shot to the game board 30) may be used as a reference, and the flashing display may be switched to the lighting display. .

<Aspect 35>
In step S10807 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of aspect 23, the plurality of processing target candidates for the prize ball counting processing are fixed in advance as 8 bits in the buffer area. 8 bits are divided into 2 groups of 4 each, one of the 2 groups is selected as a plurality of processing target candidates for prize ball counting processing, and 4 bits belonging to the selected group are selected. It is also possible to set two bits out of the above as objects to be processed in the winning ball tallying process. However, as in the above aspect 23, if a plurality of processing target candidates for the prize ball tallying process are fixed in advance as 8 bits in the buffer area, one of the two groups is selected. Since there is no need to execute the processing to be performed, the processing can be simplified, and as a result, the processing speed can be improved. Furthermore, the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting one of the two groups can be reduced.

<Aspect 36>
In the game history processing of mode 23 (FIG. 29), the task (various types of processing) to be executed in the game history processing in the current timer interrupt processing is determined based on the remaining time until the next timer interrupt processing is started. It is good also as a structure which determines a number or a classification. According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started to execute the task.

<Aspect 37>
FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 37 of the first embodiment. In this mode 37, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main side CPU 62x is configured to execute the process for calculating and displaying the above-described game history information (game history process). In addition, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area) in the same manner as in the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26). It is used as an area for storing programs for executing processing, various flags (high-probability mode flag, high-frequency support mode flag, etc.), etc. The second area of the main side RAM 64 is used for calculating and displaying game history information. It is used as an area for storing the program for executing the processing (game history processing) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned total value of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, and the ratio of accessories), etc. . Then, the main CPU 62x writes information to the first area of the main RAM 64 when executing the processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than the game history processing), as in the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26). When the game history processing is executed, the information is written only to the second area of the main side RAM 64.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31, the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment includes a flash memory which is a non-volatile memory that is rewritable and capable of retaining memory even when the power supply is cut off. A memory 64x is provided. In this embodiment, a NAND type flash memory is used as the flash memory 64x, but a NOR type flash memory may be used. In the game history processing, the main CPU 62x of this aspect executes processing of writing various numerical information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 into the flash memory 64x at a predetermined timing. Specifically, for example, each time the total number of prize balls in the total prize ball value reaches 500, the main CPU 62x executes a process of writing various prize ball total values and the like into the flash memory 64x. In other words, the flash memory 64x stores various types of numerical information (game history information such as prize ball total value, number of entered balls information, and accessory ratio) acquired based on the execution of the game.

As described above, according to the configuration of this aspect, various numerical information (game history information such as total value of winning balls, information on the number of balls entered, and ratio of accessories) obtained based on the execution of the game is stored in the flash memory 64x. Since it is stored, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, these various numerical information can be retained. For example, even if power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 for a long period of time during the distribution process, the pachinko machine 10 is normally playing games based on various numerical information stored in the flash memory 64x. It is possible to check whether or not

<Aspect 38>
In the above aspect 37, a depressible flash memory clear button is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and when the flash memory clear button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the flash memory 64x stores It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information (game history information such as total value of winning balls, information on the number of entered balls, and the ratio of accessories, etc.) is erased.

Specifically, for example, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and during the period when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the erasing processing IC chip is provided. A Hi level signal is input to the input terminal of the IC chip. The erasure processing IC chip is configured to execute erasure processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the high level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. . According to such a configuration, compared to a configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by the processing of the main CPU 62x, the processing related to the execution of the game of the main CPU 62x and the operation of the main RAM 64 are affected. can be suppressed while erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x.

Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space where traces of opening remain. Specifically, for example, the flash memory clear button is stored inside the board box to which a sealing seal that leaves traces of opening is affixed, and cannot be pressed unless the sealing seal is peeled off to open the board box. It is good also as a structure which cannot be performed.

According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. The board box of the pachinko machine 10 is left with traces of opening. That is, based on whether or not there remains a trace of opening the board box of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the board box of the pachinko machine 10 was opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x was erased. It is possible to grasp whether or not

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x, thereby checking the pachinko machine 10. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "unauthorized person") who desires to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been unauthorizedly modified by erasing the relevant information. may exist.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. Then, since a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the information is erased to cover up the illegality. It leaves a trail of possibilities. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal remodeling of the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation to illegally remodel the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game. can be improved.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only a person who has a legitimate reason for wanting to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as a "legitimate person") can erase the traces of the opening of the board box. By constructing a distribution system that allows the pachinko machine 10 to be distributed smoothly, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by constructing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can affix a new seal, the soundness of the game can be secured and the pachinko machine It is possible to promote smooth distribution of 10.

The configuration for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the operation of the flash memory clear button is not limited to the configuration described above, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (eg, 5 times) within a predetermined time (eg, 10 seconds), the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased. In addition, for example, in a configuration without an IC chip for erasing processing, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the flash memory clear button is pressed, and the flash memory clear button continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). may be configured to execute an erase program for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x to erase the information when the button is pressed.

In addition, the flash memory clear button is not limited to being stored inside the board box to which the sealing seal is attached, but is stored inside a space where traces of opening (also called traces of opening or opening and closing) remain. Other configurations may be used as long as the configuration is such that the For example, the flash memory clear button is housed inside the space covered by the lid member, and the flash memory clear button cannot be operated unless at least part of the lid member is destroyed to open the space. It is good also as a structure which cannot do. According to such a configuration, since the lid member must be destroyed to open the space in order to operate the flash memory clear button, the flash memory is stored when the flash memory clear button is pressed. The destroyed lid member remains as a trace of the opening of the closed space. Further, for example, the flash memory clear button is connected to a plurality of case bodies (for example, a box-shaped case body and a lid-shaped case body capable of sealing the open portion of the box-shaped case body) at a connecting portion (crimped portion). When separating the plurality of case bodies that make up the board box, a predetermined part of the joint (crimped part) is required to be destroyed. good too. According to such a configuration, in order to operate the flash memory clear button, it is necessary to break a predetermined portion of the connecting portion (crimped portion) to separate the plurality of case bodies to open the circuit board box. When the flash memory clear button is pressed, a joint portion (crimped portion) where a predetermined portion is destroyed remains as a trace that the base box was opened. Furthermore, after the flash memory clear button is configured to be housed inside the board box that is joined by the above-described joining portion (crimped portion), the adhesive layer remains on the adhesive object when it is peeled off, so that it is peeled off. A configuration may also be adopted in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the event is affixed so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. According to such a configuration, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, in addition to the traces of the opening of the substrate box, that is, the joint portion (crimped portion) where the predetermined portion is destroyed, the sealing seal is peeled off or The opening of the board box leaves traces such as the sealing seal being cut at the boundary between the case bodies.

<Aspect 39>
In the thirty-seventh aspect, the inspection terminal 65 provided in the main MPU 62 is connected to the inspection machine 320 (FIG. 10) for inspecting whether or not the various game history information is within a normal range. , when a predetermined signal (for example, an erasure command) is received from the inspection machine 320, information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as prize ball count, number of balls entered, and role ratio) ) may be deleted.

Specifically, for example, similarly to the above-described mode 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided and connected to the inspection terminal 65. When an erasure command is transmitted from the inspection machine 320, the erasure command is input to the input terminal of the IC chip for erasure processing. Then, the erasing IC chip executes an erasing process for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the erasure instruction command received from the input terminal.

According to the configuration of this aspect, the erasing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the erasure instruction command received from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. , the person who has the inspection machine 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320 .

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 connects, for example, the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checks the information stored in the flash memory 64x. By confirming with 320, it is possible to discover illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 concerned. Therefore, there is a possibility that there is a person (illegal person) who desires to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegitimately modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. If the person who can have the inspection machine 320 is restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. It is possible to suppress the generation of the motivation to perform a remodeling, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. There may be a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for legitimate reasons (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the inspector mentioned above have the inspection machine 320. By constructing a distribution system that allows this, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game.

Furthermore, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. It is good also as a structure.

Specifically, for example, the erasing IC chip described above receives a transmission start signal indicating that transmission of information stored in the flash memory 64x is to be started based on reception of an erasing instruction command from the input terminal. Send the command to the inspection machine 320 . Upon receiving the transmission start command, the inspection device 320 shifts to a receivable mode in which information can be received, and transmits a receivable command indicating the receivable mode to the erasing IC chip. The erasing IC chip that has received the receivable command starts transmitting the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Then, when the transmission of the information is completed, the erasing IC chip transmits a transmission completion command to the inspection machine 320 . Upon receiving the transmission completion command, the inspection device 320 checks whether or not there is an error such as data loss in the received information, and if there is no error, transmits the reception completion command to the IC chip for erasing processing. The erasure processing IC chip executes erasure processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the receipt of the reception completion command.

According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the person who has the inspection machine 320, the information is erased from the flash memory 64x. Since the information that has been deleted remains in the inspection machine 320 , the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320 .

The configuration for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 is not limited to the configuration described above, and various other configurations may be employed. can. For example, in a configuration without an erase processing IC chip, the main side CPU 62x monitors whether or not an erase instruction command is received from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and receives the erase instruction command. Alternatively, the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased by executing an erase program for erasing the information. Further, when receiving an erasure command from the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x transmits information stored in the flash memory 64x to the inspection machine 320, and then executes an erasure program for erasing the information. may be configured to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

In this embodiment, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased using the inspection machine 320 for inspecting whether or not the various game history information is within a normal range. The configuration is not limited to the configuration using the device 320, and the configuration may be such that a dedicated terminal for deleting information stored in the flash memory 64x is used to delete the information.

<Aspect 40>
In the above aspect 37, the flash memory clear button stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 Information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as prize ball count, number of balls entered, and role ratio) is erased when a signal (for example, an erase command) is received. good too.

Specifically, for example, similarly to the above-described aspect 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed, A Hi level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasing IC chip during the period. The erasing IC chip is capable of erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the high level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. Switch to execution standby mode. When the erasure processing IC chip receives an erasure instruction command from the inspection machine 320 in this erasure processing standby mode, it executes erasure processing for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this aspect, since the flash memory clear button is stored inside the board box where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, When the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the flash memory clear button is operated, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 leaves a trace of opening. Further, the erasing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, so it has the inspection machine 320. A person can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Therefore, there is a possibility that the board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x has been erased based on whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 remains open. In addition, it is possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320 .

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 connects, for example, the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checks the information stored in the flash memory 64x. By confirming with 320, it is possible to discover illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 concerned. Therefore, there is a possibility that there is a person (illegal person) who desires to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegitimately modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. By limiting who can own the inspection machine 320, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person possesses the inspection machine 320, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 can be opened and the flash memory You have to press the clear button. Then, since a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. It will leave traces. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to further suppress the generation of the motivation to illegally modify the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. There may be a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only those who want to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for legitimate reasons (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the inspector mentioned above have the inspection machine 320. In addition, if a distribution system is constructed in which only legitimate persons can erase the traces of opening of the board box, smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted while ensuring soundness of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, as a configuration for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the flash memory clear button receiving a predetermined operation and receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320, the above configuration is used. Without being limited thereto, various other configurations can be employed. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the erase processing IC chip may shift to the above-described erase processing execution standby mode. Further, for example, when an erasure instruction command is received from the inspection machine 320, the erasure processing IC chip shifts to the erasure processing execution standby mode described above, and in the erasure processing execution standby mode, the flash memory clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the configuration may be such that when the button is continuously pressed, an erasing process of erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the erasing IC chip is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes a function equivalent to that of the erasing IC chip to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

Further, as in the case 39 above, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. It may be configured to be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 that has been processed. According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the person who has the inspection machine 320, the information is erased from the flash memory 64x. Since the information that has been deleted remains in the inspection machine 320 , the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 41>
In the above aspect 37, an operation panel for accepting input operation of authentication information (for example, a password) and a display for displaying the input authentication information are provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and authentication information input by the operation panel and Information stored in the flash memory 64x when the authentication information individually set for the pachinko machine 10 matches (game history information such as prize ball total value, number of balls entered, and role ratio) may be deleted.

Specifically, for example, similarly to the above-described mode 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing erasing processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and input via the operation panel Authentication information is configured to be input to an input terminal of an IC chip for erasing processing. Then, the erasing IC chip determines whether or not the authentication information input from the operation panel matches the authentication information stored in the ROM of the erasing IC chip. If so, an erasing process is executed to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this aspect, the IC chip for erasing processing is stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the authentication information accepted by the accepting means matches the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10. Since the information is erased, the person who has the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the person who knows the password set in the pachinko machine 10) is stored in the flash memory 64x. Information can be erased. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 .

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 checks the information stored in the flash memory 64x to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. can be discovered. Therefore, there is a possibility that there is a person (illegal person) who desires to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegitimately modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 concerned. By limiting who can have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. There may be a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the memory 64x before distributing it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for legitimate reasons (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) are set in the pachinko machine 10. If a distribution system capable of having authentication information is constructed, it becomes possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game.

The authentication information input to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x is not limited to the personal identification number, and various authentication information can be adopted. For example, as authentication information, authentication characters (passwords, passphrases) that are combinations of multiple character strings, barcodes with specific patterns, passwords generated according to predetermined rules (for example, one-time passwords), specific people biometric authentication information (fingerprint, iris, vein pattern, etc.), etc., can be adopted.

<Aspect 42>
In the above aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the information stored in the main side RAM 64 Among them, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is erased and stored in the second area. (Information acquired based on the executed game, such as the total number of winning balls, information on the number of entered balls, and game history information such as the ratio of accessories) may not be deleted.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed, and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined that it is, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area is not erased. Configuration.

According to such a configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to erase information (information used to control game execution). Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of game execution, or at the start or end of the operation of the game hall, the information used to control the execution of the game is erased and the control of the game machine is stopped. There is a desire to perform initialization, but not to erase information obtained based on the played game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased while the information acquired based on the executed game is left, and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Control initialization can be performed.

Furthermore, in addition to the RAM clear button described above, a second RAM clear button for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 may be deleted when an operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) is performed during this state. .

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the second RAM clear button has been pressed, and the state in which the second RAM clear button has been pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that the information has been stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is deleted.

According to such a configuration, the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 that cannot be erased by operating the RAM clear button (information acquired based on the executed game) is It can be erased by operating the second clear button.

Furthermore, the second RAM clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space where traces of opening remain. Specifically, for example, the second RAM clear button is stored inside the board box to which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of unsealing is attached, and cannot be pressed unless the sealing seal is peeled off to open the board box. It is good also as a structure which cannot be performed.

According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. There is a trace of opening in the board box of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 is erased by opening the board box of the pachinko machine 10 based on whether the board box of the pachinko machine 10 remains open. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nail is illegally modified), the executed game will be affected by the illegal modification, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 The information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (for example, the character ratio, etc.) may be affected by the unauthorized remodeling. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the pachinko machine 10 confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x and the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64. By doing so, it is possible to discover illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, there is a possibility that there is a person (illegal person) who desires to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegitimately modified by erasing the information. .

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. . Then, since a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64, the information can be used for unauthorized concealment. It leaves traces that it may have been erased because of Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal remodeling of the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation to illegally remodel the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game. can be improved.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the second area of the RAM 64 before distributing it. Therefore, only a person (legitimate person) who desires to erase the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 for a legitimate reason can erase the traces of the opening of the board box. By constructing a distribution system, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by constructing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can affix a new seal, the soundness of the game can be secured and the pachinko machine It is possible to promote the smooth distribution of 10.

As the configuration of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening and closing) remains, various configurations described in the above aspect 38 can be adopted.

<Aspect 43>
In the above aspect 37, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is not erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed, and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear button is pressed, it is monitored whether or not the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that the RAM clear button has not been pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. However, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear button has been pressed down for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. First, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to select information to be erased from among the information stored in the main RAM 64 by performing different operations on the RAM clear button. That is, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified because the information to be erased can be selected without providing another operation unit (such as a button) for selecting the information to be erased. can be achieved.

Specifically, for example, information used for controlling game execution (stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64 information) is erased and the control of the game machine is to be initialized, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed and a predetermined time (for example, 10 Seconds), the RAM clear button is not pressed, and information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64) is erased and the game is played. If you want to circulate a new machine, perform an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and keep the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). ) should be continued. In this way, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select information to be erased from among the information stored in the main RAM 64 .

It should be noted that during execution of the erasing process of the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the above-described game history process cannot be executed, so the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance, There is a possibility that an error may occur in the total value of prize balls. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that does not start playing the game until the erasing process is completed (for example, a configuration that suppresses the shooting of the game ball), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the error.

Further, in this aspect, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If not, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and it is determined whether or not the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. If it is determined that the information is valid, the information may not be deleted, and if it is determined that the information is not valid, the information may be deleted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid. The information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid, for example, when the number of prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls. This is the case where there is a contradiction in the total value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize balls is exceeded, or when the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls.

<Aspect 44>
In the above aspect 37, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In addition to erasing the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed, and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If so, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased. Further, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and determines whether the RAM clear button has been pressed within the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that there is no such state, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x also erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. .

According to such a configuration, as in the above-described mode 43, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, the information to be erased is selected from among the information stored in the main RAM 64. It becomes possible to Furthermore, by performing an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and keeping the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main side RAM 64 It is possible to erase both the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area.

It should be noted that during execution of the erasing process of the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the above-described game history process cannot be executed, so the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance, There is a possibility that an error may occur in the total value of prize balls. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that does not start playing the game until the erasing process is completed (for example, a configuration that suppresses the shooting of the game ball), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the error.

<Aspect 45>
In the above aspect 37, when the operation of pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is executed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. , the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be deleted.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and determines that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If determined, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 among the information stored in the main RAM 64 is deleted.

According to such a configuration, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 can be stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 without providing a separate operation unit (for example, a button, etc.) for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 . It is possible to erase existing information. During the erasing process of the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the game history process described above cannot be executed temporarily. There is a possibility that errors may occur in the number of entered balls and the total value of awarded balls. Therefore, if the game execution is temporarily stopped during the period from the start to the end of the execution of the erasing process (for example, the game ball is temporarily prevented from being shot), the occurrence of the error can be suppressed. can do.

<Aspect 46>
In each of the above aspects, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (the total number of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of accessories, etc., acquired based on the executed game) information) is always erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag) is always erased. may be configured. That is, when a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed, or when a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed. When a signal is received from another device (for example, the inspection machine 320), not only is the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 erased, but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is deleted. The information may also be always erased.

According to such a configuration, even though the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64) is erased, it is still used to control the execution of the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the information stored in the main RAM 64 (the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is not erased and is maintained as it is. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the played game is collateral information for judging the fairness of the game played in the pachinko machine 10, so the collateral information is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag indicating the game state) is erased and the pachinko machine 10 is preferably initialized. According to the configuration of this aspect, when erasing the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64), the information used for controlling the execution of the game ( Information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64) is erased, so that the information used to control the execution of the game is erased even though the information that serves as collateral for judging the fairness of the game is erased. (Information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64) is not erased, so that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is.

Also, for example, even if the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased, the information used to control the execution of the game. (Information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is maintained as it is without being erased. ) is erased, the pachinko machine 10 may maintain the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode as they are. In this case, when a game is executed on the pachinko machine 10, the game is started in the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode in a state in which the amount of information acquired based on the executed game is not sufficient as statistical data. , there is a high possibility that the game history information such as the role ratio will be calculated as a biased value. Therefore, as in this aspect, based on the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 (the total number of prize balls, the number of balls entered, the game history information such as the ratio of accessories, etc.) acquired information) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag) is always erased. By adopting a configuration in which the information is deleted, it is possible to prevent the game history information such as the role product ratio from being calculated as a biased value.

Various operation modes can be adopted as the operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 . For example, while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). An operation, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the second RAM clear button separately provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko game while pressing both the RAM clear button and the second RAM clear button An operation such as turning on the power of the machine 10 can be employed.

Furthermore, for example, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (including the high-probability mode flag, the high-frequency support mode flag, etc.) is used to control the execution of the game. information stored in the second area) is erased, and the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as game history information such as total value of winning balls, information on the number of entered balls, and the ratio of accessories). may be configured not to be erased.

According to such a configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to erase information (information used to control game execution). Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of game execution, or at the start or end of the operation of the game hall, the information used to control the execution of the game is erased and the control of the game machine is stopped. There is a desire to perform initialization, but not to erase information obtained based on the played game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is erased while the information acquired based on the executed game is left, and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Control initialization can be performed.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of this aspect. The main CPU 62x executes this main process when the power is turned on.

In step S10901, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is being pressed. If it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S10901: YES), the process advances to step S10903 to determine whether the RAM clear button continues to be pressed. judge.

If it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed down, that is, if it is determined that the RAM clear button has not been pressed (step S10903: NO), step S10904 , erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, and executes the initial setting process for the first area. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button has been pressed down (step S10903: YES), the flow advances to step S10905 to keep the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). ) to determine whether it continues.

If it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (step S10905: NO), the process returns to step S10903, and the RAM clear button continues to be pressed. determine whether or not On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (step S10905: YES), the process proceeds to step S10906. That is, if the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10904, and if the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), a Then, the process proceeds to step S10906.

In step S10906, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process of the first area is executed. After that, the process advances to step S10907 to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 and execute the initialization process of the second area. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, for example, whether the total number of prize balls (the number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls, the total number of prize balls), which is the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, is valid. determine whether or not Here, the case where the total number of prize balls is not valid means that the number of prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, or the number of consecutive prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls. This is the case where there is a contradiction in the total value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize balls exceeds the number of prize balls. If it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid (step S10902: NO), the process proceeds to steps S10906 and S10907 described above, and the first The information stored in the area and the information stored in the second area are erased. After that, the process proceeds to step S10908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid (step S10902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S10908.

In step S10908, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. After executing step S10908, the remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912 is performed. Since the residual processing in steps S10909 to S10912 is the same as the residual processing in steps S10104 to S10107 in FIG. 12 described above, description thereof will be omitted.

According to the processing flow described above, based on the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (total prize value, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of accessories, etc.) When executing the process (process of step S10906) to erase the information (information acquired by the above), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is always executed. Information used to control the execution of the game) is deleted (processing of step S10907).

<Aspect 47>
In each of the above modes, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (the information obtained based on the executed game, such as the total number of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, and game history information such as the ratio of accessories) is erased. The information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) may be erased when the game is played. . That is, when an operation for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed, or when a predetermined signal for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is sent to another device (for example, the inspection machine 320). ), not only the information stored in the flash memory 64x but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

According to such a configuration, although the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the flash memory 64x) is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game (main The information stored in the first area of the side RAM 64 can be prevented from being maintained as it is without being erased. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the played game is collateral information for judging the fairness of the game played in the pachinko machine 10, so the collateral information is erased, the information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag indicating the game state) is erased and the pachinko machine 10 is preferably initialized. According to this configuration, when erasing the information (information stored in the flash memory 64x) acquired based on the executed game, the information used for controlling the execution of the game (the first information stored in the main RAM 64) is erased. 1 area) is not erased, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is.

Furthermore, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main side RAM 64 (high-probability mode In addition to information used to control the execution of games such as flags and high-frequency support mode flags), information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) It may be configured to be erased.

<Aspect 48>
In some of the aspects described above, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is used for executing processes related to game progress. It is used as an area for storing programs and various flags (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.). processing) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned tally value of winning balls, information on the number of balls entered, and the ratio of accessories). Instead of the configuration, a RAM that functions as the first area of the main RAM 64 (RAM used for game progress processing) and a RAM that functions as the second area of the main RAM 64 (RAM used for game history processing). and may be provided separately.

<Aspect 49>
Among the above aspects, in the aspect including the flash memory 64x, the flash memory 64x may be stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (for example, a substrate box with a sealing seal attached). . According to such a configuration, in order to illegally alter the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 must be opened. A trace of opening will remain in the box. That is, based on whether the board box of the pachinko machine 10 remains open or not, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x is illegally altered. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to the information stored in the flash memory 64x, and furthermore, the motivation to make unauthorized alterations to the information stored in the flash memory 64x is generated. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

As the configuration of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening and closing) remains, various configurations described in the above aspect 38 can be adopted.

<Aspect 50>
Various functions explained in each of the above aspects (for example, a function of storing the number of game balls entering each ball entrance, and payout as prize balls based on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance) A function of calculating the number of game balls that have been played, a function of storing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, a function of calculating game history information such as the role ratio, a function of storing the calculated game history information, function of displaying stored game history information, function of erasing various information stored in various storage means such as RAM and flash memory, etc.). may be implemented by the main CPU 62 x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300 ), or by the inspection machine 320 . Also, the game history management chip 300, the main side CPU 62x (the main side MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), and the inspection machine 320 share or cooperate to realize at least part of these various functions. may be

<Aspect 51>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above are not limited to the pachinko machine 10, and can be applied to other types of gaming machines. For example, it can also be applied to reel-type gaming machines such as pachinko-type slot machines. Specifically, for example, the number of game medals obtained by winning during the bonus, the number of game medals obtained by the child role drawn during the normal section, and the number of game medals obtained during the advantageous section (AT, ART) other than the bonus For a configuration that calculates the ratio with the number of game medals to be obtained and displays the ratio on a liquid crystal display device, or a configuration that outputs the ratio to the inspection machine and displays the ratio on the display part of the inspection machine can be applied.

<Aspect 52>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes, part or all of the functions realized by software (by CPU executing a program) may be realized by hardware. For example, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information, and prevent the occurrence of fraud such as incorrect calculation of the game history information due to unauthorized tampering of the arithmetic program. can be suppressed. Note that the hardware may be configured by a digital circuit or may be configured by an analog circuit. If it is configured with an analog circuit, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing more than with a digital circuit.

<Aspect 53>
A configuration obtained by appropriately replacing or combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the above-described first embodiment and aspects 1 to 52 may be adopted. In addition, one or a plurality of configurations included in the above-described first embodiment and aspects 1 to 52 may be combined with one or a plurality of configurations included in embodiments other than the first embodiment. In addition, among the configurations included in the above-described first embodiment and aspects 1 to 52, configurations that are not essential can be omitted as appropriate without departing from the spirit thereof.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

34 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, entry of a game ball into the general winning hole 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 is also expressed as winning.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

35A and 35B are explanatory diagrams showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 35(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A pattern for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 35(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 35(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big win lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 35(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and regarding special information acquired based on winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It refers to a game round that has not started to be displayed. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning to the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, it is possible to display suspension displays corresponding to four suspension game rounds in the first suspension display area Ds1. Also, the number of pending games that can be held based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs the blinking display and the lighting display synchronized with the second design variable display and stop display displayed on the second design display unit 37b of the special design unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal normal map display area NA, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which the surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

B2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entrances and through gates such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , an opening/closing door driving portion 48b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display portion 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for checking with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. In the case of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 38(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 38(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 39(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 39(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the big win lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 39(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first start port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 39(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (a success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 40(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 40( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 40(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 40(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

B3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 41 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode when winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode includes an opening period that is a period until the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is started, an opening/closing processing period that is a period during which the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b is executed, and an ending period which is a period after the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b is completed. In this embodiment, the first opening of the opening/closing door 36b is started immediately after the start of the opening/closing processing period.

First, the process when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 41(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 41, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 10 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right hitting notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set to That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. The opening effect is a effect that suggests to the player that the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 will start due to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The right-handed informing effect is an effect that suggests to the player that "right-handed" is recommended. A player who recognizes the right-handed informing effect can understand that it is better to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed".

Here, "right-handed" means that a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a speed (shooting strength, momentum) of a predetermined speed or more by setting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 to a predetermined amount or more. This is a method of distributing the game ball that has been moved to the area on the right side of the game area PA. On the other hand, "left-handed" means that a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a speed (shooting strength, momentum) below a predetermined speed by setting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 to less than a predetermined amount. This is a method of distributing the game balls that have been drawn to the area on the left side of the game area PA.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a variable winning device 36 is provided in the area on the right side of the game area PA. During the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 opens and closes, so that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 36a provided inside the variable winning device 36.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, it is recommended to hit "right", which is a method of circulating game balls in the area on the right side of the game area PA. Therefore, the right-handed informing effect is executed after the opening effect.

After the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect opening effect command. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, regardless of the state (game state) of the support mode of the main control device 60, the display control device 100 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and a right-hand hitting notification effect for 3 seconds. set to run. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 . In this way, the opening effect is executed by the cooperation of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 . Other effects such as a right-handed informing effect and a round effect, which will be described below, are similarly executed by the cooperation of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 .

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed informing effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. The round effect is a effect that suggests to the player that the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is being executed.

After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. The ending effect is a effect that suggests to the player that the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 has ended.

After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

Note that in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In this embodiment, a through gate 35, an electric accessory 34a, and a second starting port 34 are provided in the area on the right side of the game area PA. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role open lottery is won with high probability and the electric accessory 34a is opened, so the game ball is entered into the second start port 34.例文帳に追加becomes easier. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 34a is in the open state with a high probability, "right-handed hitting", which is a way of hitting the game ball in the area on the right side of the game area PA, is used. Recommended. In the present embodiment, since the hitting to the right notification effect is executed in the opening/closing execution mode, many players will recognize the hitting to the right notification effect and execute the "beat to the right". Then, the player who has executed the "right hit" in the opening/closing execution mode continues to "right hit" in the high frequency support mode even after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 41(B), a description will be given of the processing when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main difference from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 6.95 seconds and transmits the opening start command. In the case of (A) in FIG. 41, the execution is performed 6.95 seconds after the transmission of the opening command, and the sound emission control device 90 that receives the opening command is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect ( In spite of executing the same processing as (when winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode), the opening start command is received before the execution of the right-handed notification effect is started while the opening effect is being executed. It is a point that the round effect is executed without executing the hitting to the right notification effect. Specific processing will be described below.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 41, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 7 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right hitting notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set to That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect opening effect command. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, regardless of the state (game state) of the support mode of the main control device 60, the display control device 100 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and a right-hand hitting notification effect for 3 seconds. set to run. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

As described above, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. is configured to Similarly, the display control device 100 is configured to start control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends. ing. However, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 starts opening/closing when the opening period set to 6.95 seconds ends. Along with starting the processing period, an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . As a result, the sound emission control device 90 is executing the control corresponding to the opening effect and receives the opening start command from the main control device 60 before starting the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the opening start command ends the control corresponding to the opening effect being executed and sets to execute the round effect. That is, the start of control of the right-handed informing effect by the sound emission control device 90 is canceled although the right-handed informing effect was set to be executed.

After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

The display control device 100 is executing control corresponding to the opening effect and receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 before starting control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. The display control device 100 that has received the round effect command ends the control corresponding to the opening effect being executed and sets to execute the round effect. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect. In other words, the start of control of the hitting-to-the-right notification effect by the display control device 100 is canceled despite the setting to execute the hitting-to-the-right notification effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the player wins a jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode in which the player is playing "left-handed", the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed. It is possible to suggest to the player that it has moved to the run mode and to recommend "right hitting", and to win a big win in the jackpot lottery during the high frequency support mode in which the player has already performed "right hitting". Since the right-handed informing effect is not executed when the player wins the prize, the game can be given a sense of speed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the open/close execution mode is not in effect and the high-frequency support mode is not in effect, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is not opened, and the electric accessory 34a is hardly opened. A “left-handed” shot that allows the ball to enter the starting hole 33 is recommended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is recommended to change from "right-handed" to "left-handed" when the opening/closing execution mode ends and then the high-frequency support mode ends and transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Execute the left-handed notification effect.

Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example will be described.

FIG. 42 is a timing chart explaining an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example. The main difference from the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment is that when the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command, only the opening effect is set to be executed, and the sound emission control device 90 The main controller 60 transmits a right-handed notification command to the sound emission control device 90 when the right-handed notification effect is to be executed. A specific description will be given below.

First, the process when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 42(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 42, when the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example shifts to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode, , the length of the opening period is set to 10 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it is set to execute an opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting to execute the opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening effect command for setting to execute the opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When receiving the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds, and starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 informs the sound emission control device 90 of hitting right at the timing when 7 seconds have passed since the opening period started. A right-handed notification command is transmitted to indicate that it is time to execute the effect. As will be described later, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, main controller 60 does not transmit the right-handed notification command.

When the sound emission control device 90 receives a right-handed informing command from the main control device 60 after completing the control corresponding to the opening performance for 7 seconds, it is set to execute the right-handed informing performance for 3 seconds. The sound emission control device 90, after setting to execute the hitting to the right notification effect, transmits to the display control device 100 a hitting to the right notification effect command for setting to execute the hitting to the right notification effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed informing effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light.

When the display control device 100 receives the right hitting notification effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds, the display control device 100 sets to execute the right hitting notification effect for 3 seconds. , start the control corresponding to the right hitting notification effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 42(B), a description will be given of the processing when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main difference from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode is that main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds, and main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds. The point is that the strike notification command is not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the transmission of the opening start command is executed seven seconds after the transmission of the opening command. Specific processing will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 42(B), when the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example shifts to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, , the length of the opening period is set to 7 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it is set to execute an opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting to execute the opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening effect command for setting to execute the opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When receiving the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds, and starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. . In addition, since the main controller 60 wins the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, unlike the case shown in FIG. Do not send the right stroke notification command. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 42(B), the hitting to the right notification effect is not executed.

The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after completing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect, and performs control corresponding to the round effect. to start. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this comparative example, as shown in FIG. Two commands, a command and an opening start command, may be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. When executing three effects, the main controller 60 needs to transmit three commands to the sound emission control device 90: an opening command, a right-handed notification command, and an opening start command. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example, the main controller 60 needs to transmit a right-handed notification command when executing a right-handed notification effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. Also, as shown in FIG. 41(B), even if two effects, the opening effect and the round effect, are executed without executing the right-handed informing effect, the main controller 60 controls the opening effect. It suffices to send two commands, a command and an opening start command, to the sound emission control device 90 . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the main controller 60 does not need to transmit the right-handed notification command whether the right-handed notification effect is executed or not. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the command transmission frequency of the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the processing load of the main controller 60 can be reduced. According to the present embodiment, the right-handed notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 42 is unnecessary, so the data capacity required for storing the right-handed notification command is reduced from the data ROM of the main ROM 63. can do. Further, the main control device 60 determines the state of the support mode (game state) when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and the process of determining whether or not to transmit the right-handed notification command based on the determination result is unnecessary. Therefore, the processing time of the main controller 60 can be shortened, and the program for the processing becomes unnecessary. Required capacity can be reduced.

B4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game round, the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S20104.

In step S20104, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the process advances to step S20105.

In step S20105, ball entry processing for the through gate accompanying the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the ball entry processing for the through gate in step S20105 will be described later. After executing step S20105, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 43: S20104).

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step S20201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step S20201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20203.

In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, in step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S20207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S20209: NO), that is, if the start suspension number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S20211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 43) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S20210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 43) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. Also, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 43) is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the reservation information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the big winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S20213, the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred, and the determination result by the previous determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 47 : step S20503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to an increase in the number of pending items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 44: S20213) of the winning process for the starter.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is based on the reservation information, and the judgment results such as the judgment of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the judgment of the type of the jackpot, and the judgment of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S20301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read by entering the game ball into the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 44). After that, the process advances to step S20302 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the first judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the jackpot lottery due to the ball entry this time. is determined, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S20302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (S20302: YES), the process proceeds to step S20303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S20302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current ball entry is executed as a game round (S20302: NO), the process proceeds to step S20304, and the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S20305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20305: YES), the process proceeds to step S20306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the flow advances to step S20307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table , and if it is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34, the distribution table for the second starting hole is referred to. After executing step S20307, the process proceeds to step S20308.

In step S20308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S20308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S20308: YES), the process proceeds to step S20309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (S20308: NO), the process proceeds to step S20310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S20305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20305: NO), the process proceeds to step S20311, and the entry to the starting port this time causes the storage area to be stored. Read out the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S20312 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S20313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S20313: YES), the process proceeds to step S20314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S20313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Ball entry processing for through gate>
Next, the ball entry processing for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 43: S20105).

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a through gate. In step S20401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 or not. In step S20401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S20401: YES), the process proceeds to step S20402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S20401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step S20402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20404.

In step S20404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 43) is stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S20402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the through ball entry processing is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S20502.

In step S20502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step S20503.

In step S20503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step S20502 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S20503, the process advances to step S20504.

In step S20504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20505.

In step S20505, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20506. In step S20506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S20506, the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20508.

In step S20508, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20509.

In step S20509, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the process advances to step S20510.

In step S20510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S20503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S20510, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S20510: NO), in steps S20511 and S20512, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20511, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step S20512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing (S20510: YES), the process returns to step S20503, and each process from step S20503 to step S20508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S20503 to step S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 47: S20506).

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S20601, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S20601: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game round is executed without executing any of the processes after step S20602. End the control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S20601: NO), the process proceeds to step S20602.

In step S20602, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S20602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to the game cycle start processing of steps S20603 to S20605. In step S20603, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S20603, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (S20603: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S20603: NO), the process proceeds to step S20604.

In step S20604, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S20605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20606.

In step S20606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S20606, the process advances to step S20607.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20602 that the main display section 45 is performing variable display (S20602: YES), the process proceeds to step S20607.

In step S20607, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20607, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 51), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the variable time has not elapsed (S20607: NO), the process advances to step S20608 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S20608, this game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the variation time has elapsed (S20607: YES), the process advances to step S20609 to execute variation end processing. In the fluctuation end process, the stop symbol determined in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 50), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step S20609, the process advances to step S20610.

In step S20610, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 50) to be described later. In step S20610, when it is determined that any of the jackpot flags are ON (S20610: YES), the process proceeds to step S20611, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20610, when it is determined that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S20610: NO), this game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting processing>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 48: S20604).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S20701, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 37) (hold information stored in the first area information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 37) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 37) in time series than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information stored in time series in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 37) When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20701, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S20701, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S20701: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S20702 to S20707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S20701, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S20701: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S20708 to S20713 is executed.

In step S20702, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20703 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20704. In step S20704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20705, the process advances to step S20706.

In step S20706, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S20707.

In step S20707, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift time command set in step S20707 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 47). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S20701, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S20701: NO), The process advances to step S20708.

In step S20708, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S20709. In step S20709, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step S20710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20711.

In step S20711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20711, the process proceeds to step S20712.

In step S20712, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S20713.

In step S20713, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step S20713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 47). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 48: S20605).

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S20801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S20801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S20801:YES), it progresses to step S20802.

In step S20802, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 38(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S20804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20803.

In step S20803, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S20804.

In step S20804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S20802 or step S20803 is a big hit. In step S20804, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S20804: YES), in steps S20805 to S20812, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S20805, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S20805, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S20805: NO), proceed to step S20806 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 39(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step S20805, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S20805: YES), the process proceeds to step S20807, and a distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 39(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S20806 or step S20807. The process advances to step S20808.

In step S20808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S20806 or step S20807 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S20808, when it is determined that the game result is a variable probability jackpot (S20808: YES), the process proceeds to step S20809.

In step S20809, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is changed in a state where any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20809, the process advances to step S20810.

In step S20810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20808, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is not a probability variable jackpot (S20808: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, to step S20811 move on.

In step S20811, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S20814.

At step S20804, if the result of the jackpot lottery at step S20802 or step S20803 is not jackpot winning (S20804: NO), the process proceeds to step S20813 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the change display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20813, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20814, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S20814, the process proceeds to step S20815.

In step S20815, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20815 that the second pattern display flag of RAM 64 is not ON (S20815: NO), the process proceeds to step S20816 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S20814. On the other hand, in step S20815, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S20815: YES), the process proceeds to step S20817 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S20814. After executing step S20816 or step S20817, the process proceeds to step S20818.

In step S20818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S20816 to S20818 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 47). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S20818, the process proceeds to step S20819.

In step S20819, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S20819, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 50: S20814).

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S20901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S20902.

In step S20902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S20902: YES), the process proceeds to step S20903.

In step S20903, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S20904 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S20902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S20902: NO), the process proceeds to step S20905 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this processing (S20905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S20902, in the step S20905, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S20905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S20906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S20906, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S20904 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S20905, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S20905: NO), the process proceeds to step S20907, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S20904 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 47: S20507).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the start of the ending period and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21001: NO), the process advances to step S21002 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing process period, and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing process period.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S21002: NO), the process advances to step S21003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S21003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S21003: NO), the process proceeds to step S21004, timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is completed. It is determined whether or not. In step S21004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S21004: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S21004, if it is determined that the time has come to end the variable display (S21004: YES), the process proceeds to step S21005, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether or not there is Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21005, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21006, and the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S21007. If the high-probability mode flag is OFF in step S21006, the process proceeds directly to step S21007.

In step S21007, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21007, the process advances to step S21008.

In step S21008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal processing (FIG. 47). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute an opening effect and a right-handed informing effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step S21008, the process advances to step S21009 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is ON (S21003: YES), the process proceeds to step S21010.

In step S21010, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S21010 that the opening period has ended (S21010: YES), the process advances to step S21011 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S21012, the process proceeds to step S21013.

In step S21013, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is set. Specifically, while checking the jackpot type flag (16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64, the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in . The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened. After executing step 13913, the process advances to step S21014.

In step S21014, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the flow advances to step S21015 to set an opening start command. The set opening start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal processing (FIG. 47). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the set content of the round effect is executed. Start. After executing step S21015, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21002, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S21002: YES), the process proceeds to step S21016 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driven state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 36a or that the game balls of the opening limit number have entered. The driving state of the variable winning drive section 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21016: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21017: YES), the process advances to step S21018 to turn off the open/close processing period flag. After executing step S21018, the process proceeds to step S21019.

In step S21019, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal processing (FIG. 47). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step S21021, the process proceeds to step S21022.

In step S21022, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is ON (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21023.

In step S21023, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21019), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step S21023, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S21023: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S21023: YES), the process proceeds to step S21024.

In step S21024, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S21025 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21025, the process advances to step S21026 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 52: S21007).

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the opening time setting process. In step S21101, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S21101, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode (S21101: NO ), the process advances to step S21102 to set (set) a value of "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and terminate this opening time setting process.

On the other hand, in step S21101, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, if the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is entered (S21101 : YES), the process advances to step S21103 to set a value of "3475" corresponding to 6.95 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and the present opening time setting process ends.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 52: S21016).

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S21201, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step S21201 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S21201: NO), the process proceeds to step S21202 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S21202, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21202: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21202: NO), the process proceeds to step S21203.

In step S21203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21203: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S21203, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21203: YES), the process proceeds to step S21204, in order to open the big winning opening 36a variable winning driving section 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S21205.

In step S21205, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S21205, the process advances to step S21206.

In step S21206, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 47: step S20503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S21201, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21207, in which it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21207: NO), the process proceeds to step S21208.

In step S21208, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21208 that no ball has entered (S21208: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21208 that a ball has entered (S21208: YES), the process proceeds to step S21209, and 1 is subtracted from the winning counter area PC. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21210.

In step S21210, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S21210 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S21210: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21207: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S21210 In (S21210: YES), the process proceeds to step S21211 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S21212.

In step S21212, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21213 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S21213, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21213: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21213: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S21214, the process advances to step S21215 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. command output processing ( FIG. 47 : step S20503), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 52: S21024).

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S21301, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S21301, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S21301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21302 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S21302, the process advances to step S21303.

In step S21303, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S21304 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S21305.

In step S21305, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S21309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21301 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S21301: NO), the process advances to step S21306 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process advances to step S21308 to set 100 to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21309.

In step S21309, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 47: S20508).

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. In step S21401, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S21401 that the supported flag is not ON (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21402.

In step S21402, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S21402 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21402: NO), the process proceeds to step S21403.

In step S21403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S21403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21403: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21403: YES), the process proceeds to step S21404.

In step S21404, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general unit . If it is determined in step S21404 that it is time to end the variable display (S21404: YES), the process advances to step S21405 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S21404: NO), the process proceeds to step S21406.

In step S21406, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S21406, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S21406: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21406 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S21406: YES), the process proceeds to step S21407.

In step S21407, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S21408 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S21407 (S21407: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S21408 (S21408: YES), the process advances to step S21409 to perform the electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21410.

In step S21410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21409 is support winning. In step S21410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S21410: YES), the process proceeds to step S21411, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S21412. On the other hand, in step S21410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S21410: NO), the process proceeds to step S21412 without executing the processing of step S21411.

In step S21412, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21412 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S21412: YES), the process proceeds to step S21413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21412 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S21412: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S21413, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S21413, if it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S21413: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21413 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S21414 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21415.

In step S21415, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S21415 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 47: step S20503). Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S21407 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S21407: YES), or if it is determined in step S21418 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S21408: NO), the process proceeds to step S21416, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S21417.

In step S21417, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21416 is support winning. In step S21417, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S21417: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S21417, if it is determined that the support is won (S21417: YES), the process advances to step S21418 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S21402 that the support winning flag is ON (S21402: YES), the process advances to step S21419 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S21419, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21419: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21419: YES), the process proceeds to step S21420.

In step S21420, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S21421 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S21401, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (S21401: YES), the process advances to step S21422 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 56: S21422).

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21502.

In step S21502, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21502: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process ends. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S21502, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21502: YES), the process proceeds to step S21503 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S21503, the process advances to step S21504.

In step S21504, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the flow advances to step S21505 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S21505: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S21505: YES), the process advances to step S21506 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S21501, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21507 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21507 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21507: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21507: YES), the process advances to step S21508 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S21509.

In step S21509, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S21509: NO), the process advances to step S21510 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S21510 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S21510: YES), the flow advances to step S21511 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21509 that the opening/closing execution mode is set (S21509: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S21510 (S21510: NO), the process advances to step S21512 to perform the second operation. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

B5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

B6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. As shown in FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S21601, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S21601, the process advances to step S21602.

In step S21602, command handling processing is executed. Command correspondence processing is processing executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62 . The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S21602, the process advances to step S21603.

In step S21603, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S21602. After executing step S21603, the process advances to step S21604.

In step S21604, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S21602. After executing step S21604, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 59: S21602).

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 . In step S21701, it is determined whether a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S21701 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received (S21701: YES), the process advances to step S21702 to turn on the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to The sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to grasp the state of the support mode type in the main controller 60 . After executing step S21702, the process advances to step S21703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21701 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received (S21701: NO), the process proceeds to step S21703 without executing the process of step S21702.

In step S21703, it is determined whether or not a low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S21703 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (S21703: YES), the process advances to step S21704 to turn off the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to Then, it progresses to step S21705 and sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start the output control and the light emission control of the sound corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21706, and a left-handed information effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting the left-handed information effect to be executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21703 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S21703: NO), the processing proceeds to step S21707 without executing the processing of steps S21704 to S21706.

In step S21707, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU62. In step S21707, when it is determined that an opening command has been received (S21707: YES), the process proceeds to step S21708, and setting is made to execute an opening effect for 7 seconds and a hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. Specifically, it is set to start the output control and light emission control of the sound corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the output of the sound corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. Set to start control and lighting control. After that, the process proceeds to step S21709, and an opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21710.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21707 that the opening command has not been received (S21707: NO), the processing proceeds to step S21710 without executing the processing of steps S21708 and S21709.

In step S21710, it is determined whether or not an opening start command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S21710, when it determines with having received the opening start command (S21710:YES), it progresses to step S21711 and sets so that a round production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the round effect. At this time, the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed, and if it has already been set to execute the right-handed informing effect, the control corresponding to the opening effect is terminated, and the right-handed informing effect is executed. Cancel the setting and set to start the control corresponding to the round production. Therefore, when the opening start command is received 6.95 seconds after the opening command is received, the right-handed informing effect is not executed, and on the other hand, the opening start command is received 10 seconds after the opening command is received. When it does, the hitting to the right information production will be executed. After executing step S21711, the process advances to step S21712 to transmit a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute a round effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21713.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21710 that the opening start command has not been received (S21710: NO), the processing proceeds to step S21713 without executing the processing of steps S21711 and S21712.

In step S21713, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step S21713, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S21713: YES), the process proceeds to step S21714, and setting is made to execute the ending effect. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the ending effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21715, and an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect is transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S21716.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21713 that the ending command has not been received (S21713: NO), the processing proceeds to step S21716 without executing the processing of steps S21714 and S21715.

In step S21716, if another command has been received, the process corresponding to that command is executed. For example, when a variation command and a type command are received, the type of effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S21801, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S21802.

In step S21802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S21901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S22001, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 62) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In the command processing (S22001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step S22002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S22001), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . Then, it progresses to step S22003.

In step S22003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S22002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S22004.

In step S22004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S22003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S22005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command correspondence processing is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of V interrupt processing (FIG. 63: S22001).

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 . In step S22101, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22101, when it determines with the left-handed information production command being memorize|stored (S22101:YES), it progresses to step S22102 and sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After executing step S22102, the process advances to step S22103. On the other hand, in step S22101, when it determines with the left-handed information production|presentation command not memorize|stored (S22101:NO), it progresses to step S22103, without performing the process of step S22102.

In step S22103, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22103, when it is determined that the opening effect command is stored (S22103: YES), the process advances to step S22104 to set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. Specifically, it is set to start drawing and display control of an image corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the drawing of the image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is performed. and set to start controlling the display. After executing step S22104, the process advances to step S22105. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22103 that the opening effect command is not stored (S22103: NO), the process proceeds to step S22105 without executing the process of step S22104.

In step S22105, it is determined whether or not a round effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92 . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a round effect command. In step S22105, when it determines with the round production|presentation command being memorize|stored (S22105:YES), it progresses to step S22106 and sets so that a round production|presentation may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start controlling the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the round effect. At this time, the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed, and if it has already been set to execute the right-handed informing effect, the control corresponding to the opening effect is terminated, and the right-handed informing effect is executed. Cancel the setting and set to start the control corresponding to the round production. Therefore, when the round effect command is received 6.95 seconds after the opening effect command is received, the right-handed informing effect is not executed. is received, the hitting to the right notification effect is executed. After executing step S22106, the process advances to step S22107. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22105 that the round effect command is not stored (S22105: NO), the process proceeds to step S22107 without executing the process of step S22106.

In step S22107, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22107, when it determines with the ending production|presentation command being memorize|stored (S22107:YES), it progresses to step S22108 and sets so that an ending production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the ending effect. After executing step S22108, the process advances to step S22109. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22107 that the ending effect command is not stored (S22107: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109 without executing the process of step S22108.

In step S22109, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

According to this embodiment described above, the following effects are obtained.

In the ordinary pachinko machine 10, when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to sequentially execute a plurality of effects, the main controller 60 issues a command to the sound emission control device 90 to execute each effect. 90 respectively. Therefore, as the number of effects to be executed by the sound emission control device 90 increases, the number of times the main controller 60 transmits commands to the sound emission control device 90 increases.

Specifically, as shown in the comparative example of FIG. 42, when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, then the right-handed notification effect is executed, and then the round effect is executed, After transmitting the opening command to the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 transmits a right-handed notification command, and further transmits an opening start command. In this case, main control device 60 will transmit the command to sound emission control device 90 three times. Further, when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect and then the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed informing effect, the main control device 60 transmits an opening command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the release start command is transmitted without transmitting the right-handed information command. In this case, main control device 60 will transmit the command to sound emission control device 90 twice. That is, in the ordinary pachinko machine 10, when the sound emission control device 90 is not caused to execute the right-handed informing effect, the main control device 60 may transmit the command to the sound emission control device 90 twice. When causing the control device 90 to execute the right-handed informing effect, the main control device 60 transmits the command to the sound emission control device 90 three times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening start command while sequentially executing a plurality of effects set by receiving the opening command, the effect being executed is finished and the round effect is executed. Even if the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the round effect without executing some of the effects, the main control device 60 may transmit the opening command and the opening start command to the sound emission control device 90. . That is, in either case, main controller 60 only has to transmit the command to sound emission control device 90 twice.

Specifically, according to the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 sets such that when an opening command is received, the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect are sequentially executed. Then, when the opening performance is being executed and the opening start command is received at the timing before the right-handed informing performance is executed, the opening performance being executed is ended, and is set to be executed after the opening performance. A round performance is executed without executing the right-handed informing performance. That is, the sound emission control device 90 of the present embodiment executes overwrite processing, not parallel processing, standby processing, or invalidation processing, when receiving an opening start command during execution of the opening effect. Overwrite processing means that when a new command to set another effect to be executed is received while the effect is being executed, the effect being executed is terminated, and the effect is executed after the effect being executed. If there is an effect that is set to be executed, the setting is erased, and the setting is overwritten so that the effect corresponding to the newly received command is executed, and the set effect is executed. be. Parallel processing means that when a command for setting another effect to be executed is newly received while an effect is being executed, the effect being executed and the effect corresponding to the received command are received. These are processes that are executed in parallel at the same time. Standby processing means that when a command for setting another effect to be executed is newly received while the effect is being executed, the effect is set to be executed after the effect being executed and the effect being executed. It is a process of waiting until the given effects are completed, and executing the effects corresponding to the received command after these effects are completed. Invalidation processing means that when a new command to set another effect to be executed is received while the effect is being executed, the received command is invalidated and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. processing.

According to the present embodiment, even if the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the round effect after the opening effect and the right-handed informing effect are executed, the right-handed informing effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Even in the case where the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the round effect without executing , the main control device 60 may transmit the opening command and the opening start command to the sound emission control device 90 . That is, the main controller 60 only needs to send the command to the sound emission control device 90 twice, regardless of whether the sound emission control device 90 is to execute the right-handed informing effect or not. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the frequency of command transmission from main controller 60 can be reduced, and the processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced. Further, according to the present embodiment, since the right-handed notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 42 is not required, the right-handed notification command need not be stored in the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63. . Therefore, of the storage capacity of the main ROM 63, the storage capacity required for storing the right-handed informing command can be effectively utilized for other purposes.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the opening start command is transmitted after the main control device 60 transmits the opening command, the intervals between the transmissions are different, so that the effects executed by the sound emission control device 90 are different. Compared with the configuration in which the main control device 60 transmits commands of various contents to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects of various contents, the main The processing load on the control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Specifically, according to the present embodiment, main controller 60 transmits the opening start command 10 seconds after transmitting the opening command, in the first transmission mode ((A) in FIG. 41), and , and the second transmission mode ((B) in FIG. 41) in which the opening start command is transmitted 6.95 seconds after the opening command is transmitted. Then, when the main controller 60 executes the first transmission mode, the sound emission control device 90 becomes the performance mode in which the right-handed informing performance is executed after the opening performance is executed. When the transmission mode of (1) is executed, the performance mode is such that the right-handed informing performance is not executed after the opening performance is executed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect is executed, the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect. Even if the right-handed informing effect is not executed, the main controller 60 only needs to transmit the opening start command after transmitting the opening command. In addition to transmitting the opening command, if the right hitting notification effect is to be executed after the opening effect is executed, the right hitting notification command for executing the right hitting notification effect is transmitted, and after the opening effect is executed, the right hitting notification effect is executed. Compared to the configuration (configuration of the comparative example shown in FIG. 42) that executes control such as not transmitting a right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification effect when not executing the hitting notification effect, the main control The processing load of the device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 executes the first transmission mode ((A) in FIG. 41), the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect. When the main controller 60 executes the second transmission mode ((B) in FIG. 41), the right-handed informing effect is not executed after the opening effect is executed. It becomes the production mode which performs a round production to. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, the right-handed informing effect is executed, and then the round effect is executed, the sound emission control device 90 can be operated. Even if the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed notification effect after the opening effect is executed, the main controller 60 only needs to transmit the opening start command after transmitting the opening command. For example, when transmitting an opening command for executing the opening effect to the sound emission control device 90, and executing the hitting right notification effect after executing the opening effect, the right hitting notification effect is executed. If the hitting right notification effect is not executed after the hitting notification command is transmitted and the opening effect is executed, the hitting right notification command for executing the hitting right notification effect is not transmitted, and the opening effect or the hitting right notification effect is performed. In the case of executing the round effect after executing, compared to the configuration (comparative example configuration shown in FIG. 42) for executing control such as transmitting an opening start command for executing the round effect, the main The processing load on the control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60 sequentially transmits the opening command and the opening start command based on the state of the support mode when the jackpot lottery in which the jackpot has been won is executed. After determining the interval and receiving the opening command and the opening start command, the sound emission control device 90 enters the support mode state when the big winning lottery is executed based on the fact that the intervals at which these commands are received are different. Execute the corresponding performance. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the main controller 60 transmits various commands with different contents to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute an effect corresponding to the state of the support mode, the main control device 60, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the recommended shooting mode (hitting method) of the game ball changes from "left hitting" to "right hitting" due to the start of the opening/closing processing period of the opening/closing execution mode ("left hitting" When a jackpot is won during the middle low frequency support mode), the right-handed notification effect is executed, and the recommended shooting mode (how to hit) of the game ball is " In the case where "Right-handed" remains unchanged (when a jackpot is won during the high-frequency support mode during "Right-handed"), the right-handed informing effect is not executed. Therefore, while reducing the processing load of the main controller 60, it is possible to execute an appropriate form of presentation corresponding to the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main controller 60 determines the length of the opening period based on the state of the support mode, and the sound emission control device 90 controls the opening effect and the right-handed stroke regardless of the state of the support mode. Although the same process of setting to execute the notification effect is executed, the contents of the effect to be executed in the opening period are configured to differ according to the state of the support mode. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 can execute an effect suitable for the length of the opening period without executing different processing according to the state of the support mode. That is, even if the sound emission control device 90 does not grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 and executes processing according to the state of the support mode, the opening period that changes according to the state of the support mode Since it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the length, the processing load of the sound emission control device 90 can be reduced.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the opening command is received, the sound emission control device 90 sequentially executes a plurality of effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) regardless of the state of the support mode. When the opening start command is received during the sequential execution of the multiple processes set by receiving the opening command, the effect being executed is terminated and the round effect is executed. . In this embodiment, the interval from when the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command to when it receives the opening start command varies depending on the state of the support mode, so it is set by receiving the opening command. Of the plurality of effects that have been performed, the number of effects that are actually executed decreases as the interval becomes shorter, and the number of effects that are actually executed increases as the interval becomes longer. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command, by executing a simple process of setting to sequentially execute a plurality of effects regardless of the state of the support mode, It is possible to make the content of the presentation executed in the opening period different according to the state of the support mode.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when an opening command is received, the sound emission control device 90 sequentially performs an opening effect and a right-handed notification effect as a plurality of effects regardless of the state of the support mode. When the opening command is set to be executed and the opening start command is received before executing the right-handed informing performance after receiving the opening command, the round performance is executed without executing the right-handed informing performance. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the interval from when the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command to when it receives the opening start command varies according to the state of the support mode, so that the right-handed notification effect is executed. It may or may not. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command, a simple process of setting to sequentially execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect regardless of the state of the support mode is performed. By executing it, it becomes possible to make it different according to the state of the support mode whether or not the hitting to the right notification effect is executed in the opening period.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to the right-handed notification effect after the opening effect starts. is set to a time shorter than 7 seconds (6.95 seconds in this embodiment), which is the time until the start of the opening effect (time for the opening effect), so if the main controller 60 is under a high load, the transmission of the opening start command Even if is delayed, it is possible to suppress the reception of the opening start command by the sound emission control device 90 after the execution of the right-handed informing effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress execution of the right-handed informing effect even though the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode ((B) in FIG. 41).

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the sound emission control device 90 fails to receive the opening start command, the right-handed informing effect is only executed after the opening effect. Since the player only has to hit "right" during the opening/closing processing period, even if the right hitting notification performance is executed in an unintended situation in terms of control, the player will not be put in a disadvantageous situation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that executes control so that the player is not disadvantaged even if a problem occurs.

B7. Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

B7-1. Variant 1:
FIG. 65 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 1 of the second embodiment. The main difference from the second embodiment described above is that when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds, and the voice The light emission control device 90 grasps the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed information effect for 3 seconds, or is it set to execute? The point is that it is determined based on the type of the support mode whether or not to set to execute a short opening effect that is completed (finished) in a short time (4 seconds in this modified example). Specific processing will be described below.

First, the process when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 65(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 65, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 10 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode. As will be described later, when the main control device 60 shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 sends a high-frequency support mode command to the sound emission control device 90 indicating that the mode has shifted to the high-frequency support mode. , and upon receiving the high frequency support mode command from the main controller 60 , the audio emission control device 90 turns on the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . When the main control device 60 shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 transmits a low-frequency support mode command indicating that the mode has shifted to the low-frequency support mode to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the low frequency support mode command from the main controller 60 , the sound emission control device 90 turns off the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . Therefore, the sound emission control device 90 can always grasp the type of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound and light side support mode flag. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is not the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and an opening effect for 3 seconds. Set to execute the right hitting notification effect. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect opening effect command. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed informing effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period, and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

It should be noted that, also in the present modified example 1, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Also in this modified example 1, during the high-frequency support mode, "right-handed hitting" is recommended, which is a hitting method in which game balls are distributed to the area on the right side of the game area PA. In the present modification 1 as well, since the hitting to the right notification effect is executed in the open/close execution mode, many players recognize the hitting to the right notification effect and execute the "beat to the right". Then, the player who has executed the "right hit" in the opening/closing execution mode continues to "right hit" in the high frequency support mode even after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the process when a big win is won in the big win lottery in the high-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 65(B). The main difference from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds, and the transmission of the opening start command is the opening command. 4 seconds after the transmission of the opening command, and the audio light emission control device 90 that received the opening command determines that it is not in the high frequency support mode, sets to execute the short opening effect, and executes the right hitting notification effect. The point is that the round production is executed without A specific description will be given below.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 65, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 4 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode. Then, when the sound emission control device 90 determines that the type of the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, it sets to execute a short opening effect for 4 seconds. After setting to execute the short opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a short opening effect command for setting to execute the short opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the short opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the short opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are illuminated in a light emission pattern corresponding to the short opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so as to emit light.

When receiving the short opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the short opening effect for 4 seconds and starts control corresponding to the short opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the short opening effect.

When the opening period set to 4 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when an opening start command is received from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the short opening effect for 4 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after completing the control corresponding to the four-second short opening effect, the display control device 100 sets so as to execute the round effect and responds to the round effect. Start controlling. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

Thus, in this modification, when the player wins the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode in which the player is executing "left-handed", the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed. It is possible to suggest to the player that it has moved to the run mode and to recommend "right hitting", and to win a big win in the jackpot lottery during the high frequency support mode in which the player has already performed "right hitting". When winning, the short opening performance shorter than the opening performance is executed and the right-handed informing performance is not executed, so that the game can be given a sense of speed more than the above-described second embodiment, and the amusement of the game is improved. can be achieved.

<Various processing executed in the main controller of Modification 1>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 of Modification 1 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Opening time setting processing>
The opening time setting process in Modification 1 will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 52: S21007). The main difference from the opening time setting process in the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening time is set to 4 seconds when the high frequency support mode flag is ON. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the opening time setting process executed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In step S22201, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S22201, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode (S22201: NO ), the process advances to step S22202 to set (set) a value of "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and this opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step S22201, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, if the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode is entered (S22201 : YES), the process advances to step S22203 to set (set) a value of "2000" corresponding to 4 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and this opening time setting process ends.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device of Modification 1>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 1 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command response processing>
Command handling processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 1 will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 59: S21602). The main difference from the command correspondence processing (FIG. 60) in the second embodiment described above is that when the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON, a setting is made to execute a short opening effect. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In step S22301, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S22301 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received (S22301: YES), the process advances to step S22302 to turn on the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to The sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to grasp the state of the support mode type in the main controller 60 . After executing step S22302, the process advances to step S22303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22301 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received (S22301: NO), the process proceeds to step S22303 without executing the process of step S22302.

In step S22303, it is determined whether or not a low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S22303 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (S22303: YES), the process advances to step S22304 to turn off the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to Then, it progresses to step S22305 and it sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start the output control and the light emission control of the sound corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22306, and an opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the left-handed information effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22303 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S22303: NO), the processing proceeds to step S22307 without executing the processing of steps S22304 to S22306.

In step S22307, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S22307 that the opening command has not been received (S22307: NO), the process proceeds to step S22313 without executing the processes from step S22308 to step S22312 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22307 that an opening command has been received (S22307: YES), the process advances to step S22308 to determine whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S22308, if it is determined that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (S22308: NO), the process proceeds to step S22309 to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds. set to Specifically, it is set to start the output control and light emission control of the sound corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the output of the sound corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. Set to start control and lighting control. After that, the process proceeds to step S22310, and an opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22308 that the sound/light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S22308: YES), the process proceeds to step S22311, and setting is made to execute a four-second short opening effect. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the short opening effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22310, and a short opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the short opening effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22313.

In step S22313, it is determined whether or not an opening start command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S22313, when it determines with having received the opening start command (S22313: YES), it progresses to step S22314 and it sets so that a round production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the round effect. Here, in the present modified example 1, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 transmits the opening start command 10 seconds after transmitting the opening command. Then, when the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, upon receiving the opening command, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the opening effect is executed for 7 seconds, then the right-hand hitting notification effect is executed for 3 seconds, and then the round effect is executed. Become. On the other hand, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 transmits the opening start command four seconds after transmitting the opening command. Then, when the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode during the high-frequency support mode, upon receiving the opening command, it is set to execute a four-second short opening effect. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered during the high-frequency support mode, the round production is executed after the short opening production for 4 seconds is executed. After executing step S22314, the process advances to step S22315 to transmit a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute a round effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that the opening start command has not been received (S22313: NO), the process proceeds to step S22316 without executing the processes of steps S22314 and S22315.

In step S22316, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step S22316, when it determines with having received the ending command (S22316: YES), it progresses to step S22317 and sets so that ending production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the ending effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22318, and an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect is transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S22319.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22316 that the ending command has not been received (S22316: NO), the process advances to step S22319 without executing the processes of steps S22317 and S22318.

In step S22319, if another command has been received, the process corresponding to that command is executed. For example, when a variation command and a type command are received, the type of effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device of Modification 1>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command response processing>
Command handling processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1 will be described. The command correspondence processing is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of V interrupt processing (FIG. 63: S22001). The main difference from the command correspondence processing (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment described above is that the short opening effect is set to be executed when the short opening effect command is received. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In step S22401, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22401, when it determines with the left-handed information production command being memorize|stored (S22401:YES), it progresses to step S22402 and sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After executing step S22402, the process advances to step S22403. On the other hand, in step S22401, when it determines with the left-handed information production|presentation command not memorize|stored (S22401:NO), it progresses to step S22403, without performing the process of step S22402.

In step S22403, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22403, when it is determined that the opening effect command is stored (S22403: YES), the process proceeds to step S22404, and setting is made to execute the opening effect and the right-handed informing effect. Specifically, it is set to start drawing and display control of an image corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is drawn. and set to start controlling the display. After executing step S22404, the process advances to step S22405. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22403 that the opening effect command is not stored (S22403: NO), the process proceeds to step S22405 without executing the process of step S22404.

In step S22405, it is determined whether or not a short opening effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a short opening effect command. If it is determined in step S22405 that the short opening effect command is stored (S22405: YES), the process advances to step S22406 to set the short opening effect to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start controlling the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the short opening effect. After executing step S22406, the process advances to step S22407. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22405 that the short opening effect command is not stored (S22405: NO), the process proceeds to step S22407 without executing the process of step S22406.

In step S22407, it is determined whether or not a round effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a round effect command. In step S22407, when it determines with the round production|presentation command being memorize|stored (S22407:YES), it progresses to step S22408 and sets so that a round production|presentation may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start controlling the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the round effect. Here, in the present modified example 1, when shifting to the open/close execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 transmits the round effect command 10 seconds after transmitting the opening effect command. do. Then, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, upon receiving the opening effect command, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the opening effect is executed for 7 seconds, then the right-hand hitting notification effect is executed for 3 seconds, and then the round effect is executed. Become. On the other hand, when shifting to the open/close execution mode during the high frequency support mode, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 transmits the round effect command 4 seconds after transmitting the short opening effect command. Then, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the short opening effect command in the case of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the high frequency support mode, it sets to execute the short opening effect for 4 seconds. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered during the high-frequency support mode, the round production is executed after the short opening production for 4 seconds is executed. After executing step S22408, the process advances to step S22409. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22407 that the round effect command is not stored (S22407: NO), the process proceeds to step S22409 without executing the process of step S22408.

In step S22409, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22409, when it is determined that the ending effect command is stored (S22409: YES), the process advances to step S22410 to set the ending effect to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the ending effect. After executing step S22410, the process advances to step S22411. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22409 that the ending effect command is not stored (S22409: NO), the process proceeds to step S22411 without executing the process of step S22410.

In step S22411, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

According to Modification 1 described above, in addition to the effects of the second embodiment described above, the following effects are obtained.

According to the present modification 1, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and even if it receives a command with the same content from the main control device 60, However, since effects with different contents are executed according to the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 issues commands with various contents in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects with various contents. to the sound emission control device 90, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. .

Specifically, according to the present modified example 1, the sound emission control device 90 executes an opening effect when receiving an opening command during the low-frequency support mode, and receives an opening command during the high-frequency support mode. If so, a short opening effect is executed. Therefore, even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, and even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the short opening effect, the main control device 60 controls the opening effect of the same content. Since it is only necessary to transmit a command, for example, when causing the sound emission control device 90 to execute an opening effect, a command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 is short-circuited. In the case of executing the opening effect, the processing load of the main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration in which a command for executing the short opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the main side The storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the first modification, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect. The control device 60 transmits an opening command for causing the sound emission control device 90 to execute an opening effect, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing a right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 42) configuration), the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to Modification 1, main controller 60 transmits a high-frequency support mode command or low-frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and audio emission control device 90 transmits high-frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and when a low frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag. Therefore, main controller 60 does not need to include information about the state of the support mode in the opening command in order to let sound emission control device 90 grasp the state of the support mode, so main controller 60 transmits the opening command. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of processing.

Furthermore, according to the present modification 1, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during the low frequency support mode, the opening for 10 seconds after the game round (fluctuation of the pattern) that resulted in the jackpot ends. After the period has elapsed, the opening and closing processing period starts, and if the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot during the high-frequency support mode, 4 seconds after the end of the game round (symbol fluctuation) that resulted in the jackpot Since the opening/closing processing period is started after the opening period has elapsed, it is possible to impart a sense of speed to the game during the high-frequency support mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Specifically, during the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous to the player, since the jackpot lottery is frequently executed, the expectation that the jackpot lottery will be won and the opening/closing processing period will start. becomes higher. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the opening/closing processing period will start earlier than the opening/closing processing period itself. That is, during the high-frequency support mode, the player seeks a sense of speed in the game. According to Modification 1, during the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing processing period starts in a shorter time after the end of the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, compared to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, a sense of speed can be imparted to the game during the high-frequency support mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present modification 1, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds are executed in the opening period of 10 seconds, and the high-frequency When an opening command is received during the support mode, a 4-second short opening effect is executed in the 4-second opening period, so the length of the effect is suitable for each of the 10-second opening period and the 4-second opening period. can be executed.

B7-2. Modification 2:
FIG. 69 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 2 of the second embodiment. The main difference from the modified example 1 of the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening period is set to 10 seconds by the main controller 60 regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Then, the sound emission control device 90 grasps the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, or is the opening The point is that it is determined based on the type of support mode whether to set to execute a long opening effect that completes (ends) in a longer time (10 seconds in this modified example) than the effect. In the present embodiment, the content of the 7-second long opening effect from the start to 7 seconds in the 10-second long opening effect is the same as the content of the 7-second opening effect, and the 3-second long opening effect from 7 to 10 seconds is the same. The contents of the production are productions of different contents that are newly added (for example, productions in which a different character that does not appear in the opening production for 7 seconds appears). Specific processing will be described below.

First, the process when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 69(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 69, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 refers to the sound and light side support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is the high-frequency support mode. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is not the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and an opening effect for 3 seconds. Set to execute the right hitting notification effect. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect opening effect command. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, it is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed information effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed information effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

Next, the process when a big win is won in the big win lottery in the high-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 69(B). The main difference from the processing in the case of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode is that the sound emission control device 90 that received the opening command determines that it is not in the high frequency support mode and performs a long opening effect. The point is to set it to run. A specific description will be given below.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 69, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 refers to the sound and light side support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is the high-frequency support mode. Then, when the sound emission control device 90 determines that the type of the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it sets to execute the long opening effect for 10 seconds. After setting to execute the long opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a long opening effect command for setting to execute the long opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the long opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the long opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are illuminated in a light emission pattern corresponding to the long opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so as to emit light.

When receiving the long opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the long opening effect for 10 seconds and starts control corresponding to the long opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the long opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period, and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when an opening start command is received from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the long opening effect of 10 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the long opening effect of 10 seconds, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. Start controlling. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

According to Modification 2 described above, in addition to the effects of the embodiment and Modification 1 described above, the following effects are obtained.

According to the present modified example 2, the sound emission control device 90 is capable of grasping the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and even if it receives a command with the same content from the main control device 60. However, since effects with different contents are executed according to the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 issues commands with various contents in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects with various contents. to the sound emission control device 90, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main side ROM 63 can be reduced. .

Specifically, according to Modification 2, the sound emission control device 90 executes an opening effect when receiving an opening command during the low-frequency support mode, and receives an opening command during the high-frequency support mode. If so, a long opening effect is executed. Therefore, even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, and even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the long opening effect, the main control device 60 controls the opening effect with the same content. Since it is only necessary to send a command, for example, when the sound emission control device 90 is to execute an opening effect, a command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 is long. In the case of executing the opening effect, the processing load of the main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration in which a command for executing the long opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the main side The storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the second modification, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect. The control device 60 transmits an opening command for executing an opening effect to the sound emission control device 90, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing a right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 42). configuration), the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to Modification 2, main controller 60 transmits a high-frequency support mode command or a low-frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and audio emission control device 90 transmits a high-frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and when a low frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag. Therefore, main controller 60 does not need to include information about the state of the support mode in the opening command in order to let sound emission control device 90 grasp the state of the support mode, so main controller 60 transmits the opening command. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of processing.

Furthermore, according to Modification 2, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and based on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, the opening command Since the content of the effect to be executed is determined in the opening period, which is the period from receiving the opening command to receiving the opening start command It is possible to transmit the opening command and the opening start command in the same transmission manner each time without changing the manner of transmitting the opening command and the opening start command. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the transmission mode in which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode, and reduce the processing load of the main controller 60. can be reduced. Also, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Further, according to the present modified example 2, the main controller 60 sends various commands to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute various effects corresponding to the state of the support mode. The processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration for transmission.

Furthermore, according to the second modification, the main controller 60 determines whether the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. Set the length of the to 10 seconds. That is, the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the release start command at the same interval even if the state of the support mode when winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to the second modification, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the interval at which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode. The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced. Also, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present modified example 2, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs the opening effect in the front part of the opening period. Executes, and executes a right-handed informing effect in the latter part of the opening period. When the state of the support mode at the time of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is the high-frequency support mode, the long opening performance having the same contents as the opening performance is performed for 0 to 7 seconds in the front part of the opening period. In the latter part of the opening period, the part from 7 seconds to 10 seconds of the long opening effect is executed. Therefore, according to the present modified example 2, the performance of the same content is executed in the front part of the opening period regardless of the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, and in the latter part of the opening period, the performance of the main controller 60 is executed. Since an effect with different content is executed according to the state of the support mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to how the content of the effect will change from the front part to the rear part of the opening period. . Further, according to the second modification, it is possible to execute an effect including contents suitable for the state of the support mode of main controller 60 in the latter part of the opening period.

B7-1. Variant 3:
FIG. 70 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 of the second embodiment. The main difference from the modified example 1 of the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening period is set to 10 seconds by the main controller 60 regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Then, the sound emission control device 90 grasps the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds? The point is that it is determined based on the type of the support mode whether to set to execute the second opening effect and the round effect. Specific processing will be described below.

First, the processing in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 70(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 70, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 refers to the sound and light side support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is the high-frequency support mode. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is not the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and an opening effect for 3 seconds. Set to execute the right hitting notification effect. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After setting the sound emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect and the hitting right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting right notification effect. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, it is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed informing effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period, and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds, whether or not the control corresponding to the round effect is already being executed. is determined, and when it is determined that the control corresponding to the round performance is not being executed, the round performance is set to be executed. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70(B), a description will be given of the processing when a big win is won in the big win lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main difference from the processing in the case of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode is that the sound emission control device 90 that received the opening command determines that it is not in the high frequency support mode, and the opening effect and the round are performed. It is a point to set so that production may be performed. A specific description will be given below.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 70, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 refers to the sound and light side support mode flag to determine whether the current support mode type is the high-frequency support mode. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect and a round effect for 7 seconds. set to run. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After setting to execute the opening effect and the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening-round effect command for setting to execute the opening effect and the round effect. do. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening-round effect command from the sound emission control device 90, it is set to execute the opening effect and the round effect for 7 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the round effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period, and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

When receiving the opening start command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the control corresponding to the round effect is already being executed, and determines that the control corresponding to the round effect is being executed. When determined, the opening start command is discarded, and the control corresponding to the round effect which is already being executed is continued. Therefore, in this case, the round effect command for setting to execute the round effect is not transmitted to the display control device 100 . However, the display control device 100 continues the control corresponding to the round effect that is already being executed.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

According to Modification 3 described above, in addition to the effects of the above-described embodiment, Modification 1, and Modification 2, the following effects are obtained.

According to the present modified example 3, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and even if the command of the same content is received from the main control device 60, However, since effects with different contents are executed according to the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 issues commands with various contents in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects with various contents. to the sound emission control device 90, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. .

Specifically, according to the present modified example 3, the sound emission control device 90 executes an opening effect when receiving an opening command during the low-frequency support mode, and receives an opening command during the high-frequency support mode. If so, the round effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, even if the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, or even if the round effect is executed after the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, the main controller 60 , it is sufficient to transmit an opening command having the same content. For example, when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute an opening effect, a command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound is transmitted. In the case of causing the light emission control device 90 to execute the round effect after executing the opening effect, it is compared with a configuration in which a command for executing the round effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 after executing the opening effect. Thus, the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the third modification, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect. The control device 60 transmits an opening command for executing an opening effect to the sound emission control device 90, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing a right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 42). configuration), the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present modified example 3, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and based on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, the opening command Since the content of the effect to be executed is determined in the opening period, which is the period from receiving the opening command to receiving the opening start command It is possible to transmit the opening command and the opening start command in the same transmission manner each time without changing the manner of transmitting the opening command and the opening start command. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the transmission mode in which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode, and reduce the processing load of the main controller 60. can be reduced. Also, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Further, according to the third modification, the main controller 60 sends commands of various contents to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute various effects corresponding to the state of the support mode. The processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration for transmission.

Furthermore, according to the present modification 3, the main controller 60 determines whether the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. Set the length of the to 10 seconds. That is, the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the release start command at the same interval even if the state of the support mode when winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to the third modification, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the interval at which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode. The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced. Also, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present modification 3, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs the opening effect in the front part of the opening period. Executes, and executes a right-handed informing effect in the latter part of the opening period. When the state of the support mode at the time of winning the big prize in the jackpot lottery is the high frequency support mode, the opening performance is executed in the front part of the opening period, and the round performance is executed in the rear part of the opening period. Therefore, according to the present modified example 3, in the front part of the opening period, regardless of the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, the effect of the same contents is executed, and in the latter part of the opening period, the performance of the main controller 60 is executed. Since an effect with different content is executed according to the state of the support mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to how the content of the effect will change from the front part to the rear part of the opening period. . Further, according to the present modified example 3, in the latter part of the opening period, it is possible to execute an effect including content suitable for the state of the support mode of main controller 60 .

B7-4. Variant 4:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to sequentially execute two effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) when an opening command is received. A configuration may be adopted in which one or more effects are set to be executed sequentially. According to this configuration, the number of effects actually executed among the set three or more effects changes by changing the timing at which the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening start command. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the main controller 60 transmits the opening start command, the number of effects to be executed by the sound emission control device 90 can be changed.

B7-5. Variant 5:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the main controller 60 is configured to transmit the opening start command to the sound emission control device 90 with the start of the opening/closing processing period as a trigger. A configuration may be adopted in which an opening start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 when the opening/closing door 36b of the winning device 36 is actually opened.

B7-6. Modification 6:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are configured to execute the hitting right notification effect after the opening effect ends when executing the hitting right notification effect. Alternatively, the display of the opening effect and the output of the sound may be superimposed while the display of the right-hand hitting notification effect and the output of the sound are superimposed. For example, while continuing the display of the opening effect, a character such as "Right hit!"

B7-7. Variant 7:
In the above-described embodiment and modified example 1, the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode. Although it is configured to be shorter than the length, the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is set to the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode. It may be configured to be set to be shorter than the length of the period.

B7-8. Modification 8:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above modifications, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a plurality of commands from the main control device 60, it measures the reception intervals of the plurality of commands, and based on the measured reception intervals may be configured to determine the type of effect to be executed. According to such a configuration, main controller 60 does not have to transmit various commands corresponding to each effect, so the processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced.

B7-9. Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above modifications, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 receive a command to execute another effect during execution of the effect. may be terminated and an effect corresponding to the received command may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a plurality of irrelevant effects from being performed in duplicate, making it difficult for the player to recognize each effect.

B7-10. Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, the configuration is such that the high-frequency support mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends. good too. Moreover, it is good also as a structure containing the jackpot classification which shifts to high frequency support mode after opening-and-closing execution mode is complete|finished, and the jackpot classification which does not shift to high frequency support mode.

B7-11. Modification 11:
The configurations of the above embodiment and each of the modifications can also be applied to other configurations in which commands are transmitted and received between two devices.

For example, the main control device 60 transmits a variation command (variation pattern command) including information on the variation time to the sound emission control device 90, and then transmits a confirmation command for stopping (confirming) the pattern. It can also be applied to a configuration that Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the command for variation is set to sequentially execute a plurality of effects such as a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a super ready-to-win effect, and sequentially executes the plurality of effects. When a confirmation command is received during execution, the effect being executed may be terminated and the confirmation effect of stopping the symbol may be executed.

Also, for example, the main control device 60 transmits an open command indicating the start of a round (for example, the first round open command) to the sound emission control device 90, and then an open command indicating the start of the next round ( For example, it can be applied to a configuration that transmits a second round open command). Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the first round open command is set to execute the first round effect corresponding to the first round, and during the execution of the first round effect, two When the round opening command is received, the first round effect being executed may be ended and the second round effect may be executed. Note that the first round effect, the second round effect, and the like are realized by the sound emission control device 90 sequentially executing a plurality of processes.

Further, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an effect command for instructing execution of a predetermined effect, and then effect operation indicating that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed by the player. It can also be applied to a configuration that transmits commands. Specifically, for example, the display control device 100 that has received the panel selection effect command generates a panel selection effect for selecting one panel from among a plurality of panels (for example, a effect in which a plurality of panels rotates, moves, etc.). , effect of moving the frame of the panel) is set to be executed, and if a effect operation command is received while the panel selection effect is being executed, the panel selection effect being executed is terminated, and the plurality of panels It may be configured to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined panel included in the . Note that the panel selection effect is realized by the display control device 100 sequentially executing a plurality of processes.

In addition, for example, the main control device 60 transmits to the sound emission control device 90 a variation command (variation pattern command) including information on variation time and a type command including information on the result of the jackpot lottery. It can also be applied to configurations. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game round and the content of the effect to be executed in the opening period based on the interval at which the variation command and the type command are received. may be configured.

B7-12. Variant 12:
In the above embodiment, the reception interval of the opening command and the opening start command is different, so that the sound emission control device 90 may or may not execute the right-handed notification effect. Depending on the content of the information received, the sound emission control device 90 may or may not execute the right-handed informing effect.

C. Third embodiment:
C1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the game machine in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

72 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

73 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning mechanism KH. As illustrated, the variable winning mechanism KH is a mechanism including a first variable winning device 57 and a second variable winning device 58 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The first variable prize winning device 57 includes a first big prize winning port 57a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 57b for opening and closing the first big prize winning port 57a. The first opening/closing door 57b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big winning hole 57a. When a big win is won in a big win lottery, which will be described later, the first opening/closing door 57b is opened, and a game ball can enter the first big winning hole 57a.

The second variable prize winning device 58 includes a second big prize winning port 58a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a second open/close door 58b that opens and closes the second big prize winning port 58a. The second opening/closing door 58b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second big winning opening 58a. When the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the second open/close door 58b is opened, and a game ball can enter the second jackpot 58a.

The second big winning opening 58a of the second variable winning device 58 has a V winning area FV and a non-V winning area FNV. The V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV will be described later.

The second variable winning device 58 is arranged downstream of the first variable winning device 57 . The game ball reaching the first variable winning device 57 at the timing when the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is closed reaches the second variable winning device 58 after passing over the first opening/closing door 57b. do. At this time, when the second open/close door 58b is in the open state, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a.

Hereinafter, the first variable winning device 57 and the second variable winning device 58 are also simply referred to as "variable winning devices". Further, the first big prize winning opening 57a and the second big winning prize opening 58a are also simply called "big prize winning openings", and the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are also called simply "opening/closing doors".

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is performed. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b shift to the opening/closing execution mode, a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a and the second big winning hole 58a in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a predetermined condition is satisfied while transitioning to the possible open state, it transitions again to the closed state. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls. The number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout device 71 when the game balls enter the first big prize winning port 57a and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout device 71 when the game balls enter the second big prize winning port 58a A configuration in which the number of prize balls is different may be adopted.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 32, the first variable winning device 57, the second variable winning device 58, the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is also expressed as winning. .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the first variable winning device 57 or the second variable winning device 58. It is a game in which the open state of the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is continued until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

74A and 74B are explanatory diagrams showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 74(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A symbol for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 74(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 74(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row is cyclically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 74(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big win lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 74(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and regarding special information acquired based on winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It refers to a game round that has not started to be displayed. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning to the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, it is possible to display suspension displays corresponding to four suspension game rounds in the first suspension display area Ds1. Also, the number of pending games that can be held based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs the blinking display and the lighting display synchronized with the second design variable display and stop display displayed on the second design display unit 37b of the special design unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal normal map display area NA, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which the surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

C2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58). ) and other various detection sensors provided at various entrances and through gates are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are the electric accessory drive section 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and the first controller that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57. The variable winning driving section 57c, the second variable winning driving section 58c for opening and closing the second door 58b of the second variable winning device 58, and the main display section 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls driving of the first variable prize winning driving section 57c and the second variable winning driving section 58c so that the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are opened and closed. to run. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33. The success/failure table and the success/failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the first start port. FIG. 77(a) shows the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 77(b) shows the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 77(a), in the success/failure table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high-probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the second start port. FIG. 78(a) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 78(b) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a trigger to shift to an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is executed, but both the lottery mode and the support mode This is a right or wrong result that does not serve as an opportunity for transition. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device in the above-mentioned (2) opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 ( Hereinafter, a plurality of types of opening/closing patterns may be provided, and one type of opening/closing pattern may be set corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this embodiment, one type of opening/closing pattern is set corresponding to each type of jackpot, and the opening/closing mode of the first opening/closing door 57b and the opening/closing mode of the second opening/closing door 58b are set for each opening/closing pattern. different. The opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in this embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as an aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the occurrence frequency of game balls entering (winning a prize) is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 7. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds pass or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 7. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening and closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second 2 variable winning device 58), if the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing doors (first opening and closing door 57b, second opening and closing door 58b) The open mode is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening and closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which no prize is won. In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 79(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 79(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the big win lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 79( a ), the distribution table for the first start port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33 , An 8R first-class jackpot and an 8R second-class jackpot are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" correspond to the 8R first type jackpot, and "28 to 39" correspond to the 8R second type jackpot. is set to

The 8R type 1 jackpot is eight times (8 Round), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 8R type 1 jackpot is controlled by variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. Then, when the game ball enters the V prize area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

In this embodiment, in the 8R type 1 jackpot, the number of openings of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening of the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 The total number of times is 8 times (8 rounds), that is, either the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is opened once during one round. A mode in which the opening/closing door (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) is opened multiple times during one round may be adopted. In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is controlled by decrementing a numerical value set in a round counter area (to be described later) by 1 each time one round is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, either the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is controlled to open once before the numerical value set in the round counter area is decremented once. . As another aspect, the opening/closing door (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) may be opened multiple times before the numerical value set in the round counter area is decremented once.

The 8R type 2 jackpot is eight times (8 Round), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 8R type 2 jackpot is controlled by the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) so that the game ball does not easily enter the V winning area FV of the big winning hole 58a. ) (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b). However, if a game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the big win lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

Thus, in the first type jackpot, game balls are more likely to enter the V prize area FV during the round game than in the second type jackpot, so the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode is high. Probability of stochastic mode is high. On the other hand, in the second type jackpot, since it is difficult for game balls to enter the V winning area FV during the round game compared to the first type jackpot, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode is the high probability mode. is unlikely to occur.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 79(b), the distribution table for the second start port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34, A 16R first-class jackpot and an 8R second-class jackpot are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" correspond to the 16R first type jackpot, and "27 to 39" correspond to the 8R second type jackpot. is set to

In the 16R first type jackpot, the total number of openings of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the number of openings of the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 Round), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 16R type 1 jackpot is controlled by variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. Then, when the game ball enters the V prize area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

As described above, the 8R type 2 jackpot is the sum of the number of times the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is opened and the number of openings of the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 in the opening/closing execution mode. is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 8R type 2 jackpot is controlled by variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. However, if a game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the big win lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 80(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for the low frequency support mode), there are two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 80(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 for winning the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

C3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH. As described above, the variable winning mechanism KH has the first variable winning device 57 and the second variable winning device 58 . FIG. 81(a) shows a perspective view of the variable winning mechanism KH when the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are closed. For convenience of explanation, as shown in the figure, the point where the game ball launched to the right side of the game board 30 first reaches the variable winning mechanism KH is called a reference point P0, and a plane on the variable winning mechanism KH including the reference point P0 is called a plane portion SF.

A plane including the first opening/closing door 57b, the second opening/closing door 58b, and the plane portion SF is inclined downward from the right side of the game board 30 toward the center. A game ball shot rightward from the game board 30 from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 flows down the right side of the game board 30 and reaches the reference point P0 of the plane portion SF. When the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are closed, the game ball that reaches the reference point P0 flows down in the order of the reference point P0→the first opening/closing door 57b→the second opening/closing door 58b. As shown in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the direction in which the game ball flows down from the reference point P0 is defined as the X direction. As illustrated, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the closed first opening/closing door 57b in the X direction in about 0.4 seconds.

Six columnar projections 59 are arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. The projection 59 is arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b such that its longitudinal direction is substantially perpendicular to the X direction. The convex portion 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b adjusts the speed of the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Adjust the time required to pass through the upper surface of 58b (passage time).

Two protrusions 59 are arranged in a region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. In addition, four convex portions 59 are arranged in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. By arranging the convex portion 59 in this way, the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second open/close door 58b in the closed state in about 2 seconds. It passes through the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 58b in about 4 seconds.

FIG. 81(b) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the first door 57b is open. FIG. 81(c) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the second door 58b is open. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b transition between the open state and the closed state according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Note that the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are not opened at the same time while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. 81(a), the state shown in FIG. 81(b), or the state shown in FIG. 81(c). That is, the case where the first door 57b is opened and the case where the second door 58b is opened are mutually exclusive.

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a. FIG. 82(a) shows a game ball GB1 circulating on the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens, and a game ball GB1 flowing upstream from the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens. Circulating game balls GB2 are shown.

FIG. 82(b) shows the state immediately after the first opening/closing door 57b is opened. When the first opening/closing door 57b is opened, the game ball GB1 that has been circulating on the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b immediately before opening the first opening/closing door 57b enters the first big winning hole 57a. After that, as shown in FIG. 82(c), the game ball GB2 that has been circulating upstream from the first opening/closing door 57b immediately before the opening of the first opening/closing door 57b flows down and enters the first big winning hole 57a. do.

Thus, a game ball circulating on the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens, and a game ball circulating upstream from the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens , the ball enters the first big winning hole 57a after the first opening/closing door 57b is opened.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. FIG. 83(a) shows a game ball GB3 circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, and the second opening/closing door 58b opens. A game ball GB4 circulating upstream from the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before is shown.

FIG. 83(b) shows the state immediately after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB3 that has been circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b is the second big winning hole 58a. The ball enters the non-V winning area FNV. After that, as shown in FIG. 83(c), just before the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB4 that has been circulating upstream from the second opening/closing door 58b flows down, and the non-V ball of the second big winning opening 58a The ball enters the winning area FNV.

In this way, just before the second opening and closing door 58b opens, the game balls circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b and the second A game ball circulating upstream from the opening/closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened.

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the V winning area FV of the second big winning hole 58a. FIG. 84(a) shows a game ball GB5 circulating in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, and the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening. shows a game ball GB6 that circulates in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b.

FIG. 84(b) shows the state immediately after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB5 that has been circulating in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b is the second big winning hole 58a. The ball enters the V winning area FV. On the other hand, the game ball GB6 that had been circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b entered the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. Enter the ball and do not enter the V winning area FV.

In this way, the game ball circulating in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b is the second big winning after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. The ball enters the V winning area FV of the mouth 58a, but the game ball that circulates in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening/closing door 58b After the opening/closing door 58b is opened, the ball does not enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a.

FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. be. The lower part of FIG. 85 shows a time chart showing the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 85 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 85 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 85, in the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot, the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 57b is performed once as the first round of the round game. After that, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 58b is performed until the number of rounds of the big win is reached. For example, in the case of the 8R type 1 jackpot, the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 57b is performed once as the first round, and the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing door 58b is performed seven times as the second to eighth rounds. be. In addition, in the case of the 16R type 1 jackpot, after the opening and closing operation of the first opening and closing door 57b is performed once in the first round, the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing door 58b is performed 15 times in the 2nd to 16th rounds. be done. For convenience of illustration, FIG. 86 shows the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 58b up to the fourth time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot and the second type jackpot, the opening and closing doors (first opening and closing door 57b, second opening and closing door 58b) shift from the open state to the closed state. The conditions for closing (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") are as follows.
・When 7 game balls enter the big winning slot corresponding to the open/close door ・10 seconds have passed with the open/close door open The opening/closing door (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Furthermore, the opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is performed in addition to the above-described closing conditions. is controlled by an open scenario, which is a program in which the conditions for transitioning to the open state are recorded. The opening scenario is prepared for each type of jackpot, and in this embodiment, there are three programs: a 16R first-class jackpot opening scenario, an 8R first-class jackpot opening scenario, and an 8R second-class jackpot opening scenario. are provided. In addition, for each opening scenario prepared for each type of jackpot, the time required for the opening/closing door to shift from the closed state to the open state, and the opening/closing door to be opened (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) is recorded for each round in the open/close execution mode. For example, in the opening and closing execution mode in the 8R type 1 jackpot, the first opening and closing door 57b shifts from the open state to the closed state to end the first round, and then the second opening and closing door 58b is in the open state as the second round. However, the time from when the first opening/closing door 57b shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b shifts to the open state is set to the 8R first class jackpot open scenario.

When a big win is won in a big win lottery, the main side CPU 62 reads an opening scenario corresponding to the type of the big win, and whether or not to open the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b according to the read opening scenario. make a judgment as to whether In this way, the main CPU 62 executes opening/closing control of the opening/closing door based on the closing conditions and the opening scenario.

As described above, when the first type jackpot is won, the variable winning device (first variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 57 and the second variable winning device 58) is performed. In this embodiment, by controlling the timing of shifting the opening/closing door to the open state based on the opening scenario, game balls are made to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a.

Specifically, the period from the closing of the second opening/closing door 58b to the next opening of the second opening/closing door 58b (hereinafter also referred to as “second opening/closing door closed period CLT”) is The time required for the game ball to pass through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface (2 seconds in this embodiment) or more, and the entire upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b (area corresponding to the V winning area FV and area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV) is set to less than the time (6 seconds in this embodiment) until the game ball passes through, during the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot , the game ball is controlled to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning hole 58a. Hereinafter, the time until the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is also referred to as "non-V winning area passing time NVT". Further, the time until the game ball passes through the entire upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is also called "entire passage time ALT". That is, in the present embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is defined as non-V winning area passing time NVT≤second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT. By setting such that, the game ball is controlled to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. The principle will be described below.

By setting the non-V winning area passage time NVT≦the second opening/closing door closing period CLT, the game ball that reaches the uppermost upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed is It can pass through the area corresponding to the V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 58b and flow down to the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reaches the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds, and the uppermost upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. is passed at an interval of 0.6 seconds, by setting the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦second opening/closing door closing period CLT, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the most upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b The game ball that reaches the part first is passed through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b, and distributed to the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. can be made In other words, at least one game ball exists in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b while the second opening/closing door 58b is closed. Therefore, by setting the second opening/closing door closing period CLT to a value equal to or longer than the non-V winning area passing time NVT and shifting the second opening/closing door 58b to the open state, the game ball can easily enter the V winning area FV. can do.

Further, by setting the second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT, the second opening/closing door 58b is opened before the game ball passes through the most downstream part of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. , the game ball can enter the V winning area FV. That is, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the second opening/closing door 58b first can enter the second big winning hole 58a (V winning area FV). As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable prize winning mechanism KH is reached during the period from when the opening/closing door starts to open in the second round until the opening/closing door in the open state shifts to the closed state in the last round. It is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the out hole 43 by passing through the variable winning mechanism KH without entering either the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. . In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning mechanism KH is distributed during the period from the time when the opening/closing door starts to open in the second round until the opening/closing door in the open state shifts to the closed state in the last round. Almost all game balls to be played can enter the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. Therefore, when the player hits to the right during a round game corresponding to the first-class jackpot (8R first-class jackpot, 16R first-class jackpot), the game ball that reaches the variable prize winning mechanism KH is almost never missed. A ball can be entered into the winning hole (first big winning hole 57a or second big winning hole 58a). Therefore, the player can efficiently obtain benefits (prize balls) during the round game.

In this embodiment, as the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT that satisfies the above conditions, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT=3 seconds is set in the open scenario. Also, the period from when the first door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state until the second door 58b shifts to the open state is also set to 3 seconds according to the opening scenario. After the first open/close door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state, the game ball that reaches the top surface of the first open/close door 57b first passes through the most downstream of the top surface of the second open/close door 58b. By shifting the second opening/closing door 58b to the open state, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b from the end of the first round to the start of the second round also enters the second big winning hole 58a. can be made As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning mechanism KH is circulated during the period from when the opening/closing door starts to open in the first round until the opening/closing door in the open state shifts to the closed state in the last round. Almost all game balls can enter the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the period from when the first opening/closing door 57b opened in the first round transitions to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b transitions to the open state is the opening scenario. is set to 3 seconds by

In addition, the reason for opening the first opening and closing door 57b in the first round of the round game in the type 1 jackpot is the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door in the opening and closing execution mode of the type 2 jackpot described later, and the type 1 jackpot described above. This is to make the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door similar to that in the opening/closing execution mode of (1) and make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first-class jackpot and the second-class jackpot from the behavior of the opening/closing door. The reason for opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round of the round game in the second type jackpot will be described later.

Next, the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode of the first type jackpot is executed will be described. As described above, the upper part of FIG. 85 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode for the first kind jackpot is executed. The vertical axis of the graph indicates the distance in the X direction with the reference point P0 (see FIG. 81(a)) of the variable winning mechanism KH as the origin. The vertical axis represents the area corresponding to the first big prize winning opening 57a (upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b) and the area corresponding to the second big winning opening 58a (upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b) in the X direction. Indicated.

As mentioned above, the horizontal axis of the graph is time (seconds). A solid line and a broken line shown in the graph indicate the behavior of one game ball. That is, the solid line and broken line show the behavior of the game ball flowing down in the X direction from the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH over time. The graph shown in this description shows that the game ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reaches the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds, and the variable winning mechanism KH The behavior of the game ball when it circulates in the X direction is shown.

The thick solid-line rectangular area shown in the graph corresponds to the open state of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b for the first type jackpot. 1 shows an area (hereinafter, also referred to as an open area) that is open. When the solid line indicating the behavior of the game ball overlaps the open area, the game ball has entered the big winning hole (first big winning hole 57a or second big winning hole 58a) corresponding to the open area. indicates A dashed line indicating the behavior of the game ball indicates the behavior of the game ball in the X direction when the game ball does not enter the big winning hole.

In addition, the point "·" shown at the intersection of the solid line indicating the behavior of the game ball and the open area indicates that the game ball enters the big winning hole (first big winning hole 57a or second big winning hole 58a). showing. That is, the number of points "·" in contact with one open area is increased by opening and closing the opening/closing door (first opening/closing door 57b or second opening/closing door 58b) corresponding to the open area. Or, it is the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 58a). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the closing condition, the opening/closing door is shifted from the open state to the closed state when seven game balls enter the big winning opening corresponding to the opening/closing door in the open state. Therefore, the open area corresponding to one opening of the first opening/closing door 57b and the open area corresponding to one opening of the second opening/closing door 58b are each in contact with seven points "·".

In addition, among the points "·" contacting each open area, the points "•" contacting the vertical side of the rectangle indicating the open area are already circulating on the upper surface of the open door before the opening/closing door is opened. Simultaneously with the opening of the opening/closing door, it indicates that the ball entered the big winning opening (or winning area) corresponding to the opening/closing door. That is, it corresponds to the behavior of the game ball GB1 shown in FIG. 82, the game ball GB3 shown in FIG. 83, the game ball GB5 and the game ball GB6 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, among the points "·" contacting each open area, the points "•" contacting the horizontal side of the rectangle indicating the open area flow upstream from each open/close door before the open/close door is opened. After opening the opening/closing door, it indicates that the ball has reached the big winning opening (or winning area) corresponding to the opening/closing door and entered the big winning opening (or winning area). That is, it corresponds to the behavior of the game ball GB2 shown in FIG. 82 and the behavior of the game ball GB4 shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, in the open scenario for the first-class jackpot (16R first-class jackpot, 8R first-class jackpot), the closing period CLT of the second open/close door is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, the above-mentioned condition of "non-V winning area passing time NVT (2 seconds) ≤ second open/close door closing period CLT (3 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, at least one game ball enters the V winning area FV area of the second big winning opening 58a in each round after the second round.

In addition, the above-described condition of "second opening/closing door closing period CLT (3 seconds)<entire passage time ALT (6 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, for convenience of illustration, only up to the fifth round can be shown, but after the start of the second round, almost all game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH are either the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. It can be seen that the ball is entering the ball.

In this embodiment, in the opening scenario for the first type jackpot (for 16R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 1 jackpot), the second opening and closing door closing period CLT was set to 3 seconds, but the second opening and closing door closed By further lengthening the value of the period CLT, in each round after the second round, more game balls can be controlled to enter the V winning area FV area of the second big winning opening 58a. For example, a value such as 4 seconds or 5 seconds can be set as the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT that satisfies the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT. .

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. be. The lower part of FIG. 86 shows a time chart showing the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 86 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 86 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 86, the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the type 2 jackpot is the same as the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the above-described type 1 jackpot. As a second, the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 57b is performed once. After that, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 58b is performed until the number of rounds of the big win is reached.

In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second type jackpot, the closing condition, which is a condition for shifting from the open state to the closed state of the opening and closing doors (first opening and closing door 57b, second opening and closing door 58b), is applied. . In addition, as an opening scenario, an opening scenario for 8R second type jackpot is applied.

As described above, during the opening and closing execution mode, the second type jackpot is controlled by the variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 57, the second The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning device 58) is performed. In this embodiment, by controlling the timing of shifting the opening/closing door to the open state based on the opening scenario, it is made difficult for game balls to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a.

First, the opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 58b in the second and subsequent rounds will be described. After the second round, while opening and closing the second opening and closing door 58b multiple times, in order to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a, the closing period CLT of the second opening and closing door <non- It is set to V winning area passing time NVT. With this setting, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the game ball that has reached the uppermost upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is an area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. , the second opening/closing door 58b opens. Furthermore, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV. During the period in which the second opening/closing door 58b is open, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV. Then, when the second opening and closing door 58b is closed again, the game ball that has reached the most upstream part of the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b moves the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b. However, since the second opening/closing door 58b opens before the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV, the game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV. Therefore, after the second round, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV by setting the second opening/closing door closing period CLT<non-V winning area passing time NVT. In this embodiment, as the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT that satisfies the above conditions, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT=1.8 seconds is set in the open scenario.

Next, the reason for opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round will be described. As described above, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, while opening and closing the second opening and closing door 58b a plurality of times, control is performed so that game balls are less likely to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. do. At this time, if the player hits right before the opening/closing execution mode is started, if the second opening/closing door 58b is opened from the first round, the opening of the second opening/closing door 58b in the first round At the time of opening, there is a possibility that a game ball exists in the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b. The ball enters the winning area FV. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, when the second opening/closing door 58b is first opened, a state in which no game balls are present in the V prize area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is ensured. Therefore, the first opening/closing door 57b is opened in the first round.

After the first opening and closing door 57b moves to the closed state, the game ball that reaches the most upstream part of the upper surface of the first opening and closing door 57b passes through the upper surface of the first opening and closing door 57b, and the second opening and closing door 58b By opening the second opening and closing door 58b as the second round before passing through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the game ball to the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a You can enter the ball. That is, the time from the transition of the first opening/closing door 57b to the closed state to the transition of the second opening/closing door 58b to the open state in the second round is the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b. In a time shorter than the time (less than 2.6 seconds in the present embodiment) required for the reached game ball to enter the most downstream portion of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b There must be

Also, before opening the first opening and closing door 57b in the first round, the game ball that passed the most downstream of the upper surface of the first opening and closing door 57b (for example, before opening the first opening and closing door 57b in the first round, the game ball A game ball circulating at the position of the game ball GB4 shown in (a)) is an area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b at the time when the first round ends and the second round starts. is distributed, if the second opening/closing door 58b is opened in the second round, the game ball enters the V winning area FV. Therefore, the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b is moved to the open state as the first round to when the second opening and closing door 58b is moved to the open state as the second round is the game ball It is required that the time (6.2 seconds or more in this embodiment) is longer than the time required for the water to flow through the most downstream of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b.

In this embodiment, the period from when the first opening/closing door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b opens in the second round is 2.5 seconds in the open scenario. have set. With this setting, the time from when the first door 57b is closed to when the second door 58b is opened in the second round is 2.5 seconds. It takes less time (less than 2.6 seconds in this embodiment) than the time required to pass the upper surface of 57b. In addition, the time from shifting the first opening and closing door 57b to the open state as the first round to shifting the second opening and closing door 58b to the open state as the second round is 6.2 seconds or more, and the game ball is the second. This time is longer than the time required to flow through the most downstream of the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b and pass through the most downstream of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, when the second opening/closing door 58b is first opened, there is no game ball in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. can be ensured.

Next, the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the second type jackpot opening/closing execution mode is executed will be described. As described above, the upper portion of FIG. 86 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode for the second type jackpot is executed. Similar to FIG. 85, the graph shown in this description shows that the game balls fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reach the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds. , the behavior of the game ball when flowing through the variable winning mechanism KH in the X direction.

In the present embodiment, in the open scenario for the second type jackpot (for the 8R second type jackpot), the second open/close door closing period CLT is set to 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the above-described condition of "second opening/closing door closing period CLT (1.8 seconds)<non-V winning area passage time NVT (2 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, even though the second opening/closing door 58b is opened and closed multiple times after the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball enters the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. not. Also, for convenience of illustration, only up to the fifth round can be shown, but after the start of the first round, almost all game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH are either the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. It can be seen that the ball is entering the ball.

In this embodiment, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is set to 1.8 seconds in the second type jackpot opening scenario, but the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT in the second type jackpot is Since it suffices if the second opening/closing door closing period CLT<non-V winning area passing time NVT, the value of the second opening/closing door closed period CLT can be further shortened. The outline of the processing by the gaming machine has been described above.

C4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S30101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S30102.

In step S30102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30103.

In step S30103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S30104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 93) described later.

In step S30104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the prize winning process for the start opening in step S30104 will be described later. After executing step S30104, the process advances to step S30105.

In step S30105, winning processing for through accompanying winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through winning process in step S30105 will be described later. After executing step S30105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. Winning processing for the starting port is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 87: S30104).

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the winning process for the starting gate. In step S30201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (start winning). In step S30201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S30201: YES), the process proceeds to step S30202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S30203.

In step S30203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30204.

In step S30204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30209.

In step S30201, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start hole 33 (S30201: NO), the process proceeds to step S30205, and whether or not the game ball has won the second start hole 34 is determined. 2 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34 .

In step S30205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S30205: YES), the process proceeds to step S30206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S30207. On the other hand, in step S30205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S30205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S30207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30208.

In step S30208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30209.

In step S30209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S30204 or step S30208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S30209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S30209: NO), the winning process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S30209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S30209: YES), the process proceeds to step S30210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S30211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S30212.

In step S30212, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S30103 (Fig. 87), the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and each value of the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (Fig. 93), It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations incremented by 1 in step S30210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S30210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step S30103 (FIG. 87) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S30210. After executing step S30212, the process proceeds to step S30213.

In step S30213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (holding information). type, presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, variation time of the game round, etc. are executed before the reservation information becomes a target of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S30213, the process proceeds to step S30214.

In step S30214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (first determination information ) as a pending command.

The hold command is a judgment result (first judgment information) based on the holding information acquired based on the occurrence of the winning to the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 and the holding information. This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 93 : step S30703) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S30214, the main MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the start opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 88: S30213) of the winning process for the starter.

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the reservation information, determines whether the jackpot lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs, determines the variation time of the game round, etc. The reservation information is the main This is a process to be executed before becoming a target of the jackpot lottery by the control device 60 .

In step S30301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of judging whether or not a jackpot lottery is successful, judging the type of jackpot, and judging whether or not a reach has occurred. The details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S30301, the process proceeds to step S30302.

In step S30302, fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the variation time of game rounds. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S30302, the current destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 89: S30301).

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S30401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning to the starting opening in the winning process for starting opening (FIG. 88) is read. After that, the process advances to step S30402 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning prize is executed as a game round. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed for the winning prize before this winning prize is read from the corresponding storage area, and the lottery result of the big winning lottery executed before the big winning lottery due to this winning prize is read. By judging, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the winning of this time is executed as a game round is judged.

In step S30402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round, (S30402: YES), the process proceeds to step S30403, and the success/failure table storage area The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S30402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round (S30402: NO), the process proceeds to step S30404, and for the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S30405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S30405: YES), the process proceeds to step S30406, and is stored in the storage area due to the winning of the start gate this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S30407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the winning in the first start port 33, the distribution table for the first start port is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S30407, the process advances to step S30408.

In step S30408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the first jackpot. In step S30408, when it is determined that the game corresponds to the first type jackpot (S30408: YES), the process proceeds to step S30409, and the first type jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30408 that the first type jackpot is not supported (S30408: NO), the process proceeds to step S30410 to store the second type jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S30405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S30405: NO), the process proceeds to step S30411, and is stored in the storage area by winning the starting port this time. read out the value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S30412 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S30413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S30413, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S30413: YES), the process advances to step S30414 to store reach occurrence information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30413 that the reach generation is not supported (S30413: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the preceding determination process (FIG. 89: S30302).

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. In step S30501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area is obtained by winning the starting opening in the winning process for starting opening (FIG. 88). After that, the process proceeds to step S30502.

In step S30502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the lottery result of the big win lottery determined by the big win/reach information acquisition process.

In step S30503, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S30503, the process advances to step S30507.

In step S30507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S30502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S30502: NO), the process advances to step S30504 to determine whether reach occurs. If it is determined in step S30504 that reach occurs (S30504: YES), the process proceeds to step S30505.

In step S30505, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S30507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In step S30504, if it is determined that the reach does not occur in this game round (step S30504: NO), the process proceeds to step S30506, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d By referring to it, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After that, the process advances to step S30507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set such that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the shorter the variable time. there is That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different. At the time of executing the variable time acquisition process as one process of the previous determination process, that is, at the time of acquiring the variable time of the pending game round that is the target of the previous determination process, the pending game that is the target of the process The pending number at the time the round is executed as a game round is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is acquired when it is assumed that the first suspended start number RaN=0 (and the second suspended start number RbN=0). Therefore, the variable time acquired by the variable time acquisition process may have a different value from the actual variable time when the pending game round that is the target of the previous determination process is executed as a game round. In the present embodiment, the variation time acquired in the variation time acquisition process executed as one process of the previous determination process is also called "provisional variation time Th".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for the first type jackpot, the variable time table for the second type jackpot, the variable time table for the losing reach, and the variable time table for the complete losing may be set individually.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing ( FIG. 87 : step S30105).

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing winning processing for through. In step S30601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S30601, if it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S30601: YES), proceed to step S30602, whether or not the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step S30601, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S30601: NO), the winning process for this through is terminated.

In step S30602, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role item number SN (S30602: YES), the process proceeds to step S30603, and 1 is added to the reserved role item number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S30604.

In step S30604, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S30103 (FIG. 87) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the win-win process for through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S30602, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S30602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is the upper limit, Winning processing for through is ended without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S30701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S30702.

In step S30702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S30703.

In step S30703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S30702 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S30703, the process advances to step S30704.

In step S30704, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30705.

In step S30705, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S30706. In step S30706, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S30706, the process advances to step S30707.

In step S30707, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S30708.

In step S30708, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S30709.

In step S30709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S30703). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S30709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S30709: NO), in steps S30710 and S30711, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S30710, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S30711, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S30709: YES), the process returns to step S30703, and each process from step S30703 to step S30708 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S30703 to step S30708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 93: S30706).

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S30801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing execution mode and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON in step S30801 (S30801: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game round control is performed without executing any of the processes after step S30802. End the process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has won a prize. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30801 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S30801: NO), the process proceeds to step S30802.

In step S30802, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S30802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S30802: NO), the process proceeds to steps S30803 to S30806 for game round start processing. In step S30803, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S30803, when it is determined that the total number of reserved coins CRN is "0" (S30803: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30803 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S30803: NO), the process proceeds to step S30804.

In step S30804, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S30805, variation start processing for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S30806.

In step S30806, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S30806, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30802 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S30802: YES), processing for progressing game rounds in steps S30807 to S30811 is executed.

In step S30807, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S30807, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 97), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the variable time has not elapsed (S30807: NO), the process advances to step S30808 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step S30808, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S30807: YES), the flow advances to step S30809 to execute fluctuation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the pattern display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 96) to be described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game round. display control. After executing step S30809, the process advances to step S30810.

In step S30810, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R second-class jackpot flag) is ON. In step S30810, when any jackpot flag is ON (S30810: YES), the process proceeds to step S30811.

In step S30811, the opening/closing execution flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S30810, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (S30810: NO), this game round control process is terminated without executing step S30811.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 94: S30804).

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S30901, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be subjected to the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 76) (hold information stored in the first information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (Fig. 76). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S30901, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step S30901 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S30901: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S30902 to S30907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S30901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S30901: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S30908 to S30913 is executed.

In step S30902, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the flow advances to step S30903 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S30904. In step S30904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S30905.

In step S30905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S30905, the process advances to step S30906.

In step S30906, when the second pattern display flag of the various big hit flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S30907.

In step S30907, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S30907 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30703 of the normal process (FIG. 93). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S30901, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S30901: NO), The process advances to step S30908.

In step S30908, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S30909. In step S30909, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the flow advances to step S30910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S30911.

In step S30911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S30911, the process advances to step S30912.

In step S30912, when the second symbol display flag of the various big hit flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S30913.

In step S30913, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S30913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30703 of the normal process (FIG. 93). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 94: S30805).

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S31001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned on at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to winning the first type jackpot. After that, it is turned OFF when the second type jackpot is won. In step S31001, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S31001:YES), it progresses to step S31002.

In step S31002, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, when the variation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in 77(b). In addition, when the variation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is ) matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in ). After that, the process proceeds to step S31004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S31001: NO), the process proceeds to step S31003.

In step S31003, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, when the variation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in 77(a). In addition, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is changed to that shown in FIG. ) matches the value set as a big hit in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in ). After that, the process proceeds to step S31004.

In step S31004, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S31002 or step S31003 is a big hit. In step S31004, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S31004: YES), in steps S31005 to S31012, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S31005, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S31005, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S31005: NO), proceed to step S31006 and refer to the distribution table for the first start opening (see FIG. 79(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 8R first-class jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R second-class jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S31005, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S31005: YES), the process proceeds to step S31007, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 79(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R first-class jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R second-class jackpot. After executing the process of step S31006 or step S31007. The process advances to step S31008.

In step S31008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is the first type jackpot. In step S31008, when it is determined that the game result is the first type jackpot (S31008: YES), the process proceeds to step S31009.

In step S31009, stop result setting processing for the first type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the first type jackpot means that either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round in which the first type jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 Information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31009, the process advances to step S31010.

In step S31010, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. Specifically, in the case of a 16R first class jackpot, the 16R first class jackpot flag is turned ON, and in the case of an 8R first class jackpot, the 8R first class jackpot flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S31016.

On the other hand, in step S31008, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is not the first type jackpot (S31008: NO), that is, when the type of the distributed jackpot is the second type jackpot , the process proceeds to step S31011.

In step S31011, stop result setting processing for the second type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the second type jackpot means that either the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round in which the second kind jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 Information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31011, the process proceeds to step S31012.

In step S31012, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. In this embodiment, the type of the second type jackpot is only the 8R second type jackpot, so the 8R second type jackpot flag is turned ON. When a plurality of second type jackpot types are set, the corresponding second type jackpot flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S31016.

At step S31004, if the result of the jackpot lottery at step S31002 or step S31003 is not jackpot winning (S31004: NO), the process proceeds to step S31013 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not they match.

In step S31013, when it is determined that reach occurs in the game round (S31013: YES), the process proceeds to step S31014.

In step S31014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game turn as the stop result for reach, and to end the variable display. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31014, the process advances to step S31016.

In step S31013, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (S31013: NO), the process proceeds to step S31015.

In step S31015, stop result setting processing for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the change display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31015, the process advances to step S31016.

In step S31016, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S31016, the process advances to step S31017.

In step S31017, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S31017, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S31017: NO), the process proceeds to step S31018 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S31016.

On the other hand, in step S31017, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S31017: YES), the process proceeds to step S31019 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S31016. After executing step S31018 or step S31019, the process advances to step S31020.

In step S31020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. That is, in the type command, as information on the type of jackpot, information on 16R first-class jackpot, information on 8R first-class jackpot, information on 8R second-class jackpot, or information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and out result Contains information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S31018 to S31020 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 93). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S31020, the process proceeds to step S31021.

In step S31021, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S31021, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 96: S31016).

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process. In step S31101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S31102.

In step S31102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R first class jackpot flag, 8R first class jackpot flag, 8R second class jackpot flag) of the RAM 64 is ON. is ON (S31102: YES), the process proceeds to step S31103.

In step S31103, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S31107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S31102, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S31102: NO), the process proceeds to step S31104 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this processing (S31104) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S31102, in the step S31104, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S31104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S31105. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S31105, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S31107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S31104, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game round (S31104: NO), the process proceeds to step S31106, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S31107 to set the acquired fluctuating time information in the fluctuating time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table indicates that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the greater the variable time. set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for the first type jackpot, the variable time table for the second type jackpot, the variable time table for the losing reach, and the variable time table for the complete losing may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 93: S30707).

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S31201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S31201: NO), the flow advances to step S31202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag indicates the period during which the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is performed. is turned on at the timing when the big winning opening opening/closing processing period is started, and is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are completed.

If it is determined in step S31202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (S31202: NO), the flow advances to step S31203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S31203, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S31203: NO), the process proceeds to step S31204, timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is completed. It is determined whether or not. In step S31204, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S31204: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S31204 that it is time to end the variable display (S31204: YES), the flow advances to step S31205 to determine whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S31205 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S31205: YES), the process proceeds to step S31205. On the other hand, in step S31205, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (S31205: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S31206, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S31207.

In step S31207, an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, in the case of a 16R first-class jackpot, an open scenario for the 16R first-class jackpot is set, and in the case of an 8R first-class jackpot, an open scenario for the 8R first-class jackpot is set. If it is an 8R second-class jackpot, an opening scenario for the 8R second-class jackpot is set. After executing step S31207, the process advances to step S31208.

In step S31208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S31208, the process advances to step S31209.

In step S31209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 93). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S31209, the process advances to step S31210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31203 that the opening period flag is ON (S31203: YES), the process proceeds to step S31211.

In step S31211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S31211 that the opening period has ended (S31211: YES), the process advances to step S31212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S31213.

In step S31213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S31213, the process proceeds to step S31214.

In step S31214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S31202, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S31202: YES), the process proceeds to step S31215 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S31215, the process advances to step S31216.

In step S31216, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening/closing process has been completed. If it is determined that the large winning opening opening/closing process has been completed (S31216: YES), the process proceeds to step S31217. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S31216 that the large winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (S31216: NO), the large winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step S31217, the open/close processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S31218.

In step S31218, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S31218, the process advances to step S31219.

In step S31219, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S31219, the process proceeds to step S31220.

In step S31220, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30603 in the normal processing (FIG. 93). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S31220, the process advances to step S31221.

In step S31221, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is ON (S31201: YES), the process proceeds to step S31222.

In step S31222, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S31219), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S31222 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S31222: YES), the process proceeds to step S31223.

In step S31223, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the flow advances to step S31224 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S31224, the process advances to step S31225 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S31222, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S31222: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 98: S31215).

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S31301, it is determined whether or not the door is open. That is, it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is open. If it is determined in step S31301 that the door is not open (S31301: NO), the process proceeds to step S31302.

In step S31302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening scenario is satisfied. Specifically, in addition to counting the number of rounds to be executed, a timer counter counts whether the time to maintain the closed state of the opening and closing door in the round being executed has passed and the timing to open is reached. It is determined whether or not the conditions for shifting the doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) to the open state are established. In step S31302, when it is determined that the opening condition of the opening scenario is not satisfied (S31302: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31302 that the opening condition of the opening scenario is satisfied (S31302: YES), the process proceeds to step S31303.

In step S31303, the opening doors ((first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) determined to satisfy the opening condition are opened. After executing step S31303, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31301 that the opening/closing door is open (S31301: YES), the process proceeds to step S31304. In step S31304, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a has been detected. In step S31304, when the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a is detected (S31304: YES), the process proceeds to step S31305.

In step S31305, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V prize flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V prize area FV, and the lottery mode in the normal game round executed after the end of the round game is set to either a high probability mode or a low probability mode. It is used to determine whether to set to After executing step S31305, the process advances to step S31306.

In step S31306, a V winning command is set. The V prize command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 93: step S30703) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that receives the V winning command executes settings for executing the V winning effect. The V winning effect is an effect for informing the player that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31306, the process advances to step S31307. On the other hand, in step S31304, if the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a is not detected (S31304: NO), the process proceeds to step S31307 without executing steps S31305 and S31306. move on.

In step S31307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition is met. As described above, the closing condition is that either "seven game balls have been placed in the big winning opening corresponding to the opening/closing door in the open state" or "10 seconds have passed in the open state". That is. In step S31307, when it is determined that the closing condition is not established (S31307: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31307 that the closing condition is satisfied (S31307: YES), the process proceeds to step S31308.

In step S31308, the opening/closing door is shifted to the closed state. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 98: S31226).

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S31401, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

In step S31401, when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (S31401: YES), the process proceeds to step S31402 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R second-class jackpot flag, and high-frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, maintain that state. Also, the V winning flag is turned OFF. After executing step S31402, the process advances to step S31403.

In step S31403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S31404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process advances to step S31405.

In step S31405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S31406.

In step S31406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S31410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31401 that the V winning flag is not ON (S31401: NO), the process advances to step S31407 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R second-class jackpot flag, and high-frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, maintain that state. After that, the process proceeds to step S31408.

At step S31408, after the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, the process advances to step S31409 to set 100 to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. Thereafter, the process advances to step S31410.

In step S31410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 93: S30708).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S31501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flags in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S31501 that the supported flag is not ON (S31501: NO), the process proceeds to step S31502.

In step S31502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S31502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S31502: NO), the process proceeds to step S31503.

In step S31503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S31503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31503: YES), the process proceeds to step S31504.

In step S31504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S31504 that it is time to end the variable display (S31504: YES), the process advances to step S31505 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S31504: NO), the process proceeds to step S31506.

In step S31506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S31506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S31506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S31506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S31506: YES), the process proceeds to step S31507.

In step S31507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S31508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S31507 (S31507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S31508 (S31508: YES), the process proceeds to step S31509, and an electric accessary item opening lottery is performed. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery Winning (see FIG. 80(b)). Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S31510.

In step S31510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S31509 is support winning. In step S31510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S31510: YES), the process proceeds to step S31511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S31512. On the other hand, in step S31510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S31510: NO), the process proceeds to step S31512 without executing the processing of step S31511.

In step S31512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S31512 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S31512: YES), the process proceeds to step S31513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S31512: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S31513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S31513, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S31513: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S31514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S31515.

In step S31515, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S31515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 93 : step S30703) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S31507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S31507: YES), or if it is determined in step S31518 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S31508: NO), the process proceeds to step S31516, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S31517.

In step S31517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S31516 is support winning. In step S31517, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S31517: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S31517, if it is determined that the support is won (S31517: YES), the process advances to step S31518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S31502 that the support winning flag is ON (S31502: YES), the process advances to step S31519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S31519, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31519: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general-purpose unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31519: YES), the process proceeds to step S31520.

In step S31520, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S31521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S31501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S31501: YES), the process advances to step S31522 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 101: S31522).

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S31601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S31601: YES), the process proceeds to step S31602.

In step S31602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S31602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S31602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31602: YES), the process proceeds to step S31603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S31603, the process advances to step S31604.

In step S31604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S31605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S31605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S31605: YES), the process advances to step S31606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S31601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S31601: NO), the process advances to step S31607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S31607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31607: YES), the process advances to step S31608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S31609.

In step S31609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S31609: NO), the process advances to step S31610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S31610 that the high-frequency support mode is on (S31610: YES), the flow advances to step S31611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31609 that the open/close execution mode is set (S31609: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S31610 (S31610: NO), the process proceeds to step S31612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.
C5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 103 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

C6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S31701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S31701, the process advances to step S31702.

In step S31702, command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S31702, the process advances to step S31703.

In step S31703, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S31702. After executing step S31703, the process advances to step S31704.

In step S31704, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S31702. After executing step S31704, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 104: S31702).

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S31801, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main CPU 62 or not. The opening command is a command sent from the main side CPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 92 at the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (FIG. 98: S31209) which is executed when the jackpot lottery is won. If it is determined in step S31801 that an opening command has been received from the main CPU 62 (S31801: YES), the process proceeds to step S31802.

In step S31802, setting is made to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. Specifically, the setting of light emission data of various lamps for the effect of opening and the notification of hitting to the right and the setting of sound output data are performed. The opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect are effects executed during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, as the opening effect, an effect for informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has started is executed. In addition, as a right-handed notification effect, an effect prompting a game ball to be shot to the right side of the game board 30 and an effect prompting a game ball to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning hole 58a are executed. do. After executing step S31802, the process advances to step S31703.

In step S31703, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the opening effect command, it sets image data for the opening effect and for informing of hitting to the right, and causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image based on the image data. After executing step S31803, the process advances to step S31804.

In step S31804, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main CPU 62. The V winning command is a command sent from the main side CPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 92 when the game ball enters the V winning area FV during execution of the large winning opening opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S31804, the process advances to step S31805.

In step S31805, it is set to execute the V winning effect. Specifically, the setting of light emission data of various lamps for the V winning effect and the setting of sound output data are performed. This is an effect for informing the player that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31805, the process advances to step S31806.

In step S31806, a V winning effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. When receiving the V winning effect command, the display side MPU 102 sets image data for the V winning effect, and causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image based on the image data. After executing step S31806, the process advances to step S31807.

In step S31807, processing for responding to other commands received from the main CPU 62 is executed. After executing step S31807, this command handling process ends.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S31901, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S31902.

In step S31902, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S32001, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S32101, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 107) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S32101), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the liquid crystal pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and to generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S32102, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S32101), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S32103.

In step S32103, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S32102), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S32104.

In step S32104, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S32103), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S32105, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, the second big prize winning opening 58a is configured so that the V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV are adjacent to each other, and the second big winning opening 58a is opened and closed by the second opening/closing door 58b. , V winning area FV and non-V winning area FNV can be controlled by opening and closing one opening/closing door (second big winning opening 58a).

In the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot, the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is set such that the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is satisfied. A game ball can enter the V winning area FV area of the winning opening 58a. Furthermore, by setting the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT so that the second opening/closing door closing period CLT < full passage time ALT, after the start of the second round, almost all A game ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 58a.

In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, by setting the value of the second opening and closing door closing period CLT so that the second opening and closing door closing period CLT < non-V winning area passing time NVT It is possible to prevent game balls from entering the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a even though the second open/close door 58b is opened and closed multiple times.

In this way, by controlling the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT, it is possible to control the entry of game balls into the V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV.

Here, when compared with a general gaming machine, in the general gaming machine, in order to execute control for entering the game ball into the V winning area, a guide lever for guiding the game ball to the V winning area , and by controlling the operation of the guide lever, entry of the game ball into the V winning area is controlled. Therefore, it is necessary to control the operation of the guide lever separately from the control of the operation of the opening and closing door of the big prize opening, which complicates the control.

On the other hand, the game machine in this embodiment can control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV by controlling the operation of the second opening/closing door 58b, so that the control can be simplified. As a result, since the control program can be simplified, the storage capacity for recording the program can also be reduced.

In addition, in the case of a general gaming machine having a large winning opening (V winning opening) having a large winning opening on the upstream side of the flow path and a V winning area FV on the downstream side, the game ball enters the V winning area FV. When executing the difficult opening/closing execution mode, in order to prevent game balls from entering the V winning area FV, the opening/closing door of the V winning opening is controlled so as not to transition to an open state (or at all). It is necessary to set the open state time to an extremely short time. In addition, it is necessary to provide a guide valve for controlling whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter the V winning area FV inside the V winning opening on the downstream side. In the case of such a game machine, the operation control for changing the state of the opening and closing door between the open state and the closed state becomes complicated, and besides the operation control, it is necessary to control the operation of the induction valve described above. Therefore, the control becomes more complicated, and it is necessary to secure a storage area for storing the program for executing the control. Furthermore, when the opening/closing door of the V winning port is hardly (or not) changed to the open state, or when the open state time is extremely short, even from the player's point of view, the expectation in the opening execution mode is reduced. Resulting in.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a large winning opening (first large winning opening 57a) is provided on the upstream side of the flow path, and a large winning opening (second large winning opening 58a) having a V winning area FV is provided on the downstream side. Although it has a configuration similar to that of the above general gaming machine, in the case of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the non-V winning area FNV is provided upstream of the V winning area FV. and V winning area FV to which the game ball is to enter can be realized by controlling the operation of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, as compared with the above-described general gaming machine, the control can be simplified, and the storage area required for storing the program for executing the operation control of the induction valve can be reduced. Further, even in the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball is hard to enter the V winning area FV, the second opening/closing door 58b can be opened for a certain period of time. It can give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a protrusion 59 as adjusting means for adjusting the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, by adjusting the number of protrusions 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b, it is possible to adjust the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV, in the opening/closing execution mode in the type 1 jackpot, the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦second opening/closing It is necessary to perform control so as to satisfy the following conditions: door closing period CLT and second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT. By doing so, the non-V winning area passing time NVT and the overall passing time ALT can be adjusted. Therefore, in addition to adjusting the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT, it is also possible to adjust the number of protrusions 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. It is possible to widen the setting range of the value of the two opening/closing door closing period CLT.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first big prize winning opening 57a is provided on the upstream side of the second big winning opening 58a. Then, by opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round in the opening/closing execution mode, when the second opening/closing door 58b is first opened, a game ball is placed in the V prize area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. can ensure the absence of As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV in spite of the open/close execution mode corresponding to the type 2 jackpot.

C7. Modifications The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible.

C7-1. Variant 1:
FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 1 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(a), the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 1 includes a plate-like member MD1 above the second big winning opening 58a. Further, the variable winning mechanism KH is provided with a magnetic member MD2 on the distribution surface through which game balls flow and upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b.

Functions of the plate member MD1 and the magnetic member MD2 will be described with reference to FIG. 109(b). When the game ball reaches the upstream side of the second big winning opening 58a, the plate-like member MD1 is such that the second opening/closing door 58b is in an open state, and the game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. Despite being able to enter, the game ball progressing along the flow path floats from the flow path on the upstream side of the second big winning opening 58a for some reason, and enters the non-V winning area FNV. It has a function to suppress passing through without doing it. As shown in FIG. 109(b), even if the game ball floats from the flow path on the upstream side of the second big winning hole 58a, the game ball is made to collide with the plate-like member MD1, and the game is played. The course direction of the ball can be changed to the direction of the non-V winning area FNV, and the game ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering the non-V winning area FNV even though the ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a.

As the plate member MD1, a rubber material, a resin, a cushioning member having a cushioning property, or the like may be employed. Also, instead of the plate-like member MD1, a plurality of nails may be arranged at the position of the plate-like member MD1. Further, the shape of the plate-like member MD1 may be such that the surface that collides with the game ball may be corrugated, concave, or uneven.

As with the plate member MD1, the magnetic member MD2 has the second door 58b opened when the game ball reaches the upstream side of the second big prize opening 58a, and the game ball reaches the second big prize. Although the ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the opening 58a, the game ball advancing along the flow path floats from the flow path upstream of the second big winning opening 58a for some reason, It has a function to prevent the ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering. The magnetic member MD2 is a member made of a magnetic material, and draws the game ball toward the magnetic member MD2 by its magnetic force. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from floating from the flow channel surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering the non-V winning area FNV even though the ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. .

Instead of the magnetic member MD2, a cushioning member such as resin or rubber may be arranged at the position of the magnetic member MD2 to cushion the impact between the game ball and the flow path. To reduce the force in the direction in which a game ball floats from a flow path by buffering the impact between the game ball and the flow path when a buffer member is arranged, thereby suppressing the game ball from floating from the flow path. can be done.

C7-2. Modification 2:
FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 2 of the third embodiment. In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the first big winning opening 57a and the second big winning opening 58a are provided on the side of the flow path through which the game balls flow. Also, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are provided on the flow path surface of the flow path through which the game balls circulate. The first opening/closing door 57b includes a first ball entry preventing member 57d for preventing game balls from entering the first big winning opening 57a when the first opening/closing door 57b is in a closed state. In addition, the second opening/closing door 58b is provided with a second ball entry prevention member 58d for preventing the game ball from entering the second big winning opening 58a when the second opening/closing door 58b is in the closed state.

The first ball entry prevention member 57d has a function of narrowing the opening of the first big winning opening 57a to a size that prevents game balls from entering the opening when the first opening/closing door 57b is closed. In addition, the second ball entry prevention member 58d has a function of narrowing the opening of the second big prize opening 58a to a size that does not allow game balls to enter the opening when the second opening/closing door 58b is closed. .

As shown in FIG. 110(b), the first opening/closing door 57b transitions from the closed state to the open state by tilting in the direction of the first big prize winning opening 57a. By tilting the first opening/closing door 57b in the direction of the first big winning hole 57a, the opening of the first big winning hole 57a becomes large enough for a game ball to enter. In addition, by tilting the first opening/closing door 57b in the direction of the first big winning hole 57a, the game balls flowing through the open first opening/closing door 57b are guided in the direction of the first big winning hole 57a, The ball enters the 1st prize-winning opening 57a.

Furthermore, the tilting of the first opening/closing door 57b causes a step D1 between the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b and the flow path surface, so that the game ball circulates through the first opening/closing door 57b at a relatively high speed. However, by impacting the step, it is possible to reduce the speed and guide it in the direction of the first big winning hole 57a, and as a result, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a in the open state. It is possible to suppress passing through without

As shown in FIG. 110(c), the second opening/closing door 58b transitions from the closed state to the open state by tilting in the direction of the second big prize winning opening 58a. By tilting the second opening/closing door 58b in the direction of the second big winning opening 58a, the opening of the second big winning opening 58a (non-V winning area FNV and V winning area FV) is opened for the game ball to enter. be large enough. In addition, by tilting the second opening/closing door 58b in the direction of the second large winning opening 58a, the game balls flowing through the second opening/closing door 58b in the open state are guided in the direction of the second large winning opening 58a. The ball enters the second prize-winning opening 58a.

Further, when the second opening/closing door 58b is tilted, the area between the area corresponding to the V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b and the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. The intervening wall member W is not inclined like the second opening/closing door 58b. It has the function of a wall that separates the area corresponding to the V prize area FV. Therefore, when the second opening/closing door 58b is inclined, even if the game ball circulates in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b at a relatively high speed, the wall member By impacting W, it is possible to reduce the speed and guide it in the direction of the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a, and as a result, the game ball does not enter the non-V winning area FNV. You can prevent it from passing through.

Further, when the second opening/closing door 58b is inclined, a step D2 is generated between the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the inclined second opening/closing door 58b and the flow path surface. Even a game ball that circulates in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the open/close door 58b is impacted on the step D2 to reduce its speed and move in the direction of the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the V winning area FV without entering the ball.

Furthermore, the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 2 includes a magnetic member on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b as an adjusting means for adjusting the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. 59a are arranged. The magnetic member 59a decelerates the speed of the game ball by its magnetic force. can adjust the time required for the to pass through. In addition, the action of the magnetic force exerted on the game ball by the magnetic member 59a makes the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b move peculiarly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

C7-3. Variant 3:
The opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the opening/closing pattern shown in the third embodiment, and various opening/closing patterns can be employed.

FIG. 111 shows, as a modification 3, an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. It is an explanatory view explaining. The lower part of FIG. 111 shows a time chart representing the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. 111 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 111 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 111 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As illustrated, in the opening/closing pattern of Modification 3, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are alternately opened/closed. In the case of this opening/closing pattern, by controlling the time from when the first opening/closing door 57b shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b opens, a game ball is placed in the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. It is possible to control whether or not to enter the ball. The time from when the first opening/closing door 57b shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b opens can be set in the opening scenario.

For example, the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b moves to the closed state to when the second opening and closing door 58b opens is the second opening and closing door 58b after the game ball enters the uppermost upstream part of the first opening and closing door 57b. If the time is set to be shorter than the time required to enter the most downstream part of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the upper surface of the , as shown in the opening of the second opening and closing door 58b in the second round of FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV. On the other hand, the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b moves to the closed state until the second opening and closing door 58b opens is the second opening and closing door 58b after the game ball enters the most upstream part of the first opening and closing door 57b. If the time is set to be longer than the time required to enter the most downstream part of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the , as shown in the opening of the second opening and closing door 58b in the fourth round of FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV.

In this way, it is possible to variously combine the opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b within a series of opening patterns. Furthermore, it is possible to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV by setting the timing of opening the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b to the opening scenario and controlling it.

In addition, as an opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door, an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 57b is opened or closed, or an opening/closing pattern in which only the second opening/closing door 58b is opened/closed may be set in the opening scenario.

In addition, in the above-described third embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball easily enters the V winning area FV and an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball hardly enters the V winning area FV are set as the opening scenarios. , an opening/closing pattern in which the probability that a game ball enters the V winning area FV during execution of the opening/closing mode and the probability that the game ball does not enter the V winning area FV are substantially equal, An opening/closing pattern in which the probability of a game ball entering is about 70% may be set as the opening scenario. In the case of such an opening/closing pattern, depending on the behavior of the game ball, there are cases where the ball enters the V winning area FV and cases where the ball does not enter the V winning area FV, so that the player is given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. be able to.

C7-4. Variant 4:
In the above-described third embodiment, the two ball entry areas, the V non-winning area FNV and the V winning area FV, are controlled to be opened and closed by one opening/closing door (second opening/closing door 58b), but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. By adopting a configuration that controls the opening and closing of an arbitrary number of ball entry areas with one opening/closing door, and controlling the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door, it is possible to control the entry of a game ball into each ball entry area. . In addition, the area into which the game ball enters is not limited to the large winning opening, and various ball entry openings may be applied. In this modified example, the description will be generalized as a ball-entering area in which a game ball can enter.

FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH as Modification 4. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH has three adjacent ball entry areas (a ball entry area U1, a ball entry area U2, has a ball entry area U3). In addition, the variable winning mechanism KH includes an opening/closing door R that controls opening/closing of the three ball entry areas. That is, by opening and closing the opening and closing door R, the three ball entry areas are changed into a non-enterable state in which entry of a game ball is impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball is possible or easy. , and transitions synchronously with Note that the operation of the opening/closing door R is controlled by the main controller 60 in the same manner as the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the third embodiment.

FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door R and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern as Modification 4 of the third embodiment. The lower part of FIG. 113 shows a time chart showing the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door R, and the upper part of FIG. 113 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 113 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 113 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

In the case of the opening/closing pattern shown in FIG. 113, by controlling the time from when the opening/closing door R shifts to the closed state to when the opening/closing door R opens next time, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering each ball entry area. can be controlled. It should be noted that the time from when the opening/closing door R shifts to the closed state to when the opening/closing door R is next opened can be set in the opening scenario.

As shown in the figure, in this modification, control is performed so that the game ball enters only the ball entry area U1 when the opening/closing door R is opened for the first time, and the ball entry area U1 is controlled when the opening/closing door R is opened for the second time. and the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U2, and when the opening/closing door R is opened for the third time, the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U1, the ball entry area U2, and the ball entry area U3. Then, when the opening/closing door R is opened for the fourth time, similarly to the opening for the first time, control is performed so that the game ball enters only the ball entry area U1, and when the opening/closing door R is opened for the fifth time, the opening is performed for the second time. Similarly, the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U1 and the ball entry area U2.

In this way, by adopting a configuration that controls the opening and closing of an arbitrary number of ball entry areas with one opening and closing door, and controlling the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door, the entry of game balls into each ball entry area is controlled. can do. Furthermore, since the state transitions of a plurality of ball-entering areas are synchronously executed, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the state transition is controlled for each ball-entering area.

In addition, the ball entry area U1, the ball entry area U2, and the ball entry area U3 are arranged adjacent to each other from upstream to downstream of the flow path, so that a plurality of ball entry areas correspond to the behavior of the game balls flowing through the flow path. When the transition of the state of the entering ball area is executed synchronously, it becomes possible to execute control corresponding to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order to synchronously execute the transition of the states of a plurality of ball-entering areas corresponding to the behavior of a game ball circulating in the flow path, a game ball circulating in the surrounding area of each ball-entering area is required. It is necessary to understand the behavior of For example, as a comparative example, when a plurality of ball entry areas are arranged at positions separated from each other, the state transition of the plurality of ball entry areas is synchronously executed in response to the behavior of the circulating game ball. In this case, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to the behavior of the game balls circulating in the peripheral areas of the respective ball entry areas that are located apart from each other, which complicates the control. That is, the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry area is relatively large, and the number of game balls circulating in the entire area is relatively large, so the number of game balls whose behavior is to be grasped is large. The number increases and the control becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the multiple ball entry areas in this modification are arranged adjacent to each other, the overall area including the peripheral areas of each ball entry area is smaller than in the above comparative example, and the ball circulates in the entire area. Since the number of game balls is also reduced, the number of game balls whose behavior is to be grasped is reduced, and the control can be simplified. Furthermore, in this modified example, the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, so that it is easy to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and control is further simplified. can do. Specifically, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, the direction of the game ball reaching each ball entry area is somewhat constant, and each ball entry area Variation in the behavior of each game ball reaching each ball entering area can be reduced, such as small variations in the speed of each game ball reaching the area. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and the control can be further simplified.

C7-5. Variant 5:
A configuration may be adopted in which an ejection delay means is provided to delay the ejection of the game ball entering the second big winning hole 58a from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a. A specific description will be given below.

Inside the second big winning hole 58a, there is provided a detection sensor for determining whether or not all the game balls entering the second big winning hole 58a have been discharged from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a. ing. Then, when the second big winning port 58a transitions to the closed state after the transition to the open state as one round, it is detected whether or not all the game balls have been discharged from the inside of the second big winning port 58a. Determined using a sensor. After that, the next round is executed on the condition that all the game balls are discharged from the second big winning hole 58a. Usually, the period until all the game balls are discharged from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a is longer than the period from after the second big winning hole 58a transitions to the closed state to the next open state. Since the length is shorter, it is possible to transition the second big winning port 58a to the open state at the opening timing set in the opening scenario.

In this modification, an ejection delay means is provided inside the second big winning hole 58a for delaying the ejection of the game ball from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a. As the discharge delay means, a circular croon having a concave upper surface, a detour channel provided in front of the discharge port of the second big prize winning port 58a, or the like can be adopted. In addition, any configuration may be employed as long as it is configured to delay the discharge of game balls from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a.

Due to the functioning of the discharge delay means, the timing at which all the game balls are discharged from the inside of the second large prize winning port 58a is higher than the timing at which the second large prize winning port 58a set in the open scenario transitions to the open state. In the latter case, 58a may transition to the open state at a timing later than the timing set in the open scenario. That is, depending on the amount of time that the discharge delay means delays the discharge of the game ball, the second big winning port 58a may transition to the open state at the timing set in the open scenario, or may be delayed from the timing set in the open scenario. may transition to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to change the timing of transitioning the second big winning hole 58a to the open state to a timing different from the preset timing.

As a result, for example, the second type jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and in the open/close execution mode, the first big prize opening 57a and the second big prize opening 58a are opened and closed at the timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV. Even if the opening scenario is set such that the action is executed, the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and The opening and closing operation of the second big winning opening 58a may be executed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension. That is, by providing the discharge delay means, even when the opening/closing execution mode is started with any type of big win (or small win) as a trigger, the player is given a sense of expectation and tension. can do.

In this modified example, the discharge delay means is provided inside the second big winning hole 58a, but it may be provided in the first big winning hole 57a, or the first big winning hole It may be provided in both the 57a and the second big winning opening 58a.

C7-6. Modification 6:
In the above-described third embodiment, the V winning area FV is a ball entry area set as a condition for executing the high probability mode for the entry of a game ball, but other configurations may be adopted. . For example, the V winning area FV may be a ball entry area set as a condition for winning a jackpot by entering a game ball. For example, a game machine that wins a predetermined small win by a big win lottery and wins a big win when a game ball enters the V winning area FV in an opening and closing execution mode that is executed with the small win as a trigger (so-called It may be adopted as a V winning area in a 1 type 2 type mixer).

C7-7. Variant 7:
FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 7 of the third embodiment. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 7 includes a jump promoting member JP having a function of making the circulating game ball jump upstream from the second opening/closing door 58b on the circulation surface through which the game ball circulates. Prepare.

When the game ball circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH circulates through the jump promotion member JP at a predetermined speed or higher, the game ball floats, and when the second open/close door 58b is in an open state, a non-V winning area. It is possible to jump over the FNV and enter the V winning area FV. Therefore, even if an opening/closing pattern in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning area FV is set as an opening scenario in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV due to the function of the jump promotion member JP. As a result, no matter what kind of big win (or small win) triggers the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension. can.

Furthermore, the gaming machine in Modification 7 includes a speed reduction mechanism LT that slows down the speed of the game ball on the distribution path until the game ball reaches the variable winning mechanism KH. The game ball that has passed through the speed reduction mechanism LT has a slower speed when circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH than the game ball that circulates through the variable winning mechanism KH without circulating through the speed reduction mechanism LT, and circulates through the jump promotion member JP. Even if it floats up, it cannot jump over the non-V winning area FNV and enters the non-V winning area FNV.

Thus, by providing the speed reduction mechanism LT, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game ball circulates through the speed reduction mechanism LT. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

D. Fourth embodiment:
D1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the game machine in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

116 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display part 37b causes the segment display device to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 117(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A pattern for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 117(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 117(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big win lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 117(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and regarding special information acquired based on winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It refers to a game round that has not started to be displayed. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning to the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game round display). Also, the number of pending games that can be held based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display the pending display corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as the second pending game round display).

Further, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the first executed game times display area J1, the second executed game times display area J2, and the stage St are displayed. The first execution game round display region J1 and the second execution game round display region J2 indicate whether the game round to be executed (the game round being executed) is the game round based on the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start game round. It indicates whether the game round is based on the winning to the mouth 34 . A game cycle based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is displayed in the first execution game cycle display region J1, and a game cycle based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed in the second execution game cycle display region J2. be done. Further, when the reserved game round displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 is executed as the game round, the image showing the reserved game round displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 is displayed as the first executed game round. Move to the display area J1. When the reserved game round displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 is executed as a game round, the image indicating the reserved game round displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 is displayed in the second executed game round display area. Move to J2. Hereinafter, the display shown in the first executed game times display area J1 is also called the first executed game times display, and the display shown in the second executed game times display area J2 is also called the second executed game times display.

The stage St is used for a point giving effect, which will be described later. How the point-giving effect and the stage St are used will be described later in detail.

Further, as shown in FIG. 117(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs the blinking display and the lighting display synchronized with the second design variable display and stop display displayed on the second design display unit 37b of the special design unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a includes a main display area MA, a first executed game display area J1, a second executed game display area J2, a stage St, a first synchronization display section Sync1, and a second Although the synchronous display section Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

D2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 118 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entrances and through gates such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , an opening/closing door driving portion 48b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display portion 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33. The success/failure table and the success/failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. FIG. 120(a) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for low probability mode), and FIG. 120(b) shows the success/failure table for the first starting point (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 120(a), in the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the second start port. FIG. 121(a) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 121(b) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 121(a), in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 122(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 122(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the big win lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 122(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 8R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33. ing.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is finished. This is a jackpot in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is ended. This is a jackpot in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 24" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "25 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 122(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 24" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "25 to 39" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 123(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 123(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 123(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 123(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

D3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 124 is a time chart for explaining the point giving effect (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. The point giving effect is an effect of giving points at a predetermined timing during execution of a game round. Then, every time the awarded points accumulate 10 points, the button pressing effect is executed. The button pressing effect is an effect prompting the player to press the effect operation button 24 . Then, when the player presses the performance operation button 24 during the period during which the button-pressing effect is executed, or after the period during which the button-pressing effect is executed, a big win is won in the big winning lottery related to the game round. An effect that suggests the possibility of winning (expectation) is executed. Note that only when the player presses the effect operation button 24 during the period in which the button-pressing effect is being executed, the effect suggests the possibility (expectation) of winning the big win in the big win lottery related to the game round. may be executed. The point-giving effect (Case 1) will be specifically described below with reference to the time chart.

FIG. 124 shows, as a time chart, the point-giving effect and the button-pressing effect which are executed in one game round. In the game cycle shown in FIG. 124, the effect a1 is executed at the same time as the pattern variation is started. By executing the effect a1, an image showing the variation of the liquid crystal pattern is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. In addition, along with the display of these images, audio output and lamp lighting are also performed. After the start of the variation, as shown in the figure, the point giving effect X1 is executed at a predetermined timing. The illustrated [+4P] indicates that 4 points are given in the point giving effect.

FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point giving effect X1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 125(a), an image corresponding to the effect a1 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. After that, during execution of the effect a1, the turtle character passes over the display surface 41a from right to left. As shown in FIG. 125(b), at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(c), the images corresponding to the dropped pearls are displayed at the timing when they reach the stage St at the center of the lower part of the display surface 41a. changes to and accumulates. That is, the number of pearls displayed on the stage St corresponds to the accumulated points. At this time, the color of the stage St changes from white to red. The change in color of the stage St will be described later in detail.

The number of points to be awarded in the point giving effect is first notified to the player at the timing when the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a and the image of the pearl indicating the number of points to be awarded is displayed. be. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the number of points to be awarded during the period from when the point giving effect is started until the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a. As a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given is not displayed in the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character. By doing so, the player has an expectation for the number of points during the period until the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given is displayed after the dropped pearls reach the stage St. can be given. Also, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a point giving effect is executed in which points are not given (see FIG. 132). In this case, the turtle character passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a without dropping pearls, which means giving points. Therefore, when adopting a configuration in which the number of points to be given is not displayed in the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character as in this modification, the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a as the first step. At the point of time, the player can be made to recognize that the point giving performance will be executed, and a sense of anticipation can be given. As a second step, when the turtle character drops the pearl, the player can be made to recognize that the executed point giving effect is not a point giving effect in which points are not given. It can give you a sense of expectation. After that, when the pearls dropped by the turtle reach the stage St and the images of the pearls corresponding to the number of points given are displayed, the player who recognizes the number of points given has a sense of anticipation and excitement. It can give a sense of elation. That is, when this modified example is adopted, the timing at which the turtle character appears, the timing at which the turtle character drops a pearl meaning that points are given, and the dropped pearl reaches the stage St and is given. Expectations can be given to the player step by step at three timings when the images of pearls corresponding to the number of points obtained are displayed.

The description returns to FIG. In FIG. 124, the number of points accumulated by executing the point giving effect is shown as "accumulated points". Since 4 points are accumulated by executing the point giving effect X1 for giving 4 points, <4P> is shown as accumulated points.

After the point giving effect X1 is executed, the point giving effect X2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in FIG. 124, 3 points are given in the point giving effect.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point giving effect X2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 126(a), in the point giving effect X2, the turtle character passes from right to left over the upper part of the display surface 41a while the effect a1 is being executed in the same way as in the point giving effect X1. do. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped. After that, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the images corresponding to the dropped pearls are changed to the images of the pearls corresponding to the number of points given at the timing of reaching the stage St and accumulated. By executing the point giving effect X2, 3 points are given, the accumulated points become 7 points, and 7 pearls corresponding to the number of accumulated points are displayed on the stage St.

As shown in FIG. 124, after the point giving effect X2 is executed, the point giving effect X3 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 5 points are given in the point giving effect.

FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point giving effect X3 is executed. As shown in FIG. 127(a), in the point giving effect X3, similarly to the point giving effect X1 and the point giving effect X2, during the execution of the effect a1, the turtle character moves from the right to the top of the display surface 41a. pass to the left. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(c), the image on the stage St is the image of one shellfish and two images indicating two points at the timing when the image corresponding to the dropped pearl reaches the stage St. will change to the image of pearls. The total accumulated points is 12 points, but since the accumulated points are 10 points or more, in this embodiment, the accumulated points for 10 points are displayed as one shellfish image. A timer indicating the time until the button-pressing effect is executed is displayed below the image of the shellfish. An effect in which a shellfish and a timer are displayed is also called a timer effect.

FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timer effect and the button pressing effect. FIG. 128(a) shows how the timer effect is executed. As shown in the figure, an image of a shell representing 10 accumulated points is displayed near the stage St. The image of the shell indicates that the button pressing effect will be executed later. Under the image of the shellfish, a timer indicating the time until the button-pressing effect is executed is displayed. The timer counts down as time elapses. In addition, of the 12 accumulated points resulting from the execution of the point giving effect X3, the remaining 2 points other than the 10 points corresponding to the 10 pearls that have changed into shells are used as 2 points in the stage St. Displayed as pearls.

Even while the timer effect is being executed, the effect a1 is executed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Then, when the remaining time of the timer indicated by the timer effect becomes 0 (zero), the button pressing effect is executed.

FIG. 128(b) shows how the button pressing effect is executed. The button pressing effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24 . Specifically, an image of an open shell that has been displayed in the timer effect is displayed, and a character saying "Push!" is displayed.

Further, in this example, immediately before the button-pressing effect is started, that is, immediately before the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 due to the timer effect, the liquid crystal pattern variably displayed in the main display area MA is simulated as the effect a1. It will be in a state in which the motor is physically stopped (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-stop state). Then, when the liquid crystal symbols are in the pseudo stop state, the button pressing effect is executed, and when the player presses the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 128(c), the effect a2 is started. , the liquid crystal pattern starts to change again.

In the pseudo-stop state, the liquid crystal symbols are not completely stopped, but slightly fluctuate. The pseudo stop state of the liquid crystal symbols is a display state for allowing the player to perceive the liquid crystal symbols as if they had shifted to the stop display in terms of presentation. In this way, by performing the pseudo stop of the pattern and the start of fluctuation again in one game round, the player is made to recognize as if the advance notice performance is continuously executed across the game rounds. The effect for the purpose is also called a pseudo-continuous advance notice effect in the present embodiment.

That is, in this description, the button-pressing effect is used as a trigger for switching from the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect to the execution of the effect a2. By using the button-pressing effect in this way, the player who temporarily recognizes that he/she has lost the big win lottery by visually recognizing the pseudo-stopped liquid crystal pattern is notified during the execution of the button-pressing effect. By pressing the performance operation button 24 by himself/herself, it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she could temporarily avoid the result of losing the jackpot lottery, and to provide the player with a sense of relief and expectation.

Further, when the point giving effect is executed during execution of the game round, points are given and the points are accumulated. A timer effect is started every time 10 points are accumulated, and a button pressing effect is executed at the timing when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the point giving effect is executed in the game round. Further, when 10 points are accumulated, a button-pressing effect is executed, and the player presses the button at the timing when the button-pressing effect is executed. Since various effects such as a variable effect and an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the game round are executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

After the button-pressing effect is executed, the display of the shell image corresponding to the timer effect and the button effect disappears, and two pearl images indicating the remaining two accumulated points are displayed. becomes.

In spite of the fact that the point giving effect is executed and the points are accumulated, if the game cycle ends without accumulating 10 points or more, the accumulated points are reset (accumulated points: 0). There are cases where it is carried over to the next game round. Whether the accumulated points are reset or carried over at the end of the game cycle is determined by a predetermined process by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加The processing will be described later in detail.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the point giving effect in all game times, but executes the point giving effect in some game times. In particular, it is executed at a high frequency in a game round that is a reach ("lost" in a jackpot lottery) or a game round that is a jackpot.

FIG. 129 is a time chart for explaining the point giving effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In this description, a case will be described where accumulated points given in the point giving effect are accumulated across game rounds.

As shown in the figure, in the game round U1, a variation is started and an effect b1 is executed. In the effect b1, an image showing the variation of the liquid crystal pattern is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. After that, at a predetermined timing, the point giving effect Y1 is executed. As illustrated, 5 points are given in the point giving effect. Therefore, the accumulated points are 5 points. After that, the variation of the game round U1 ends. At this time, in the point giving effect (Case 2), when the variation of the game round U1 ends, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round U2 without being reset.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the column of "color of stage St" in FIG. The color of the stage St is controlled as follows.
(1) If no points have been accumulated, the stage St is set to white.
(2) When points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried over, the stage St is set to yellow.
(3) When points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over, the stage St is set to orange.
The color of the stage St is controlled as described in (1) to (3) above.

As shown in the column of "color of stage St" in FIG. 129, in the case of the point award effect (case 2), the stage St changes from white to yellow when points are accumulated for the first time in the game turn U1. . Thereafter, in the game round U2 as well, the accumulated points are carried over to the game round U3, so that the color of the stage St remains yellow. Then, when the game round U3 is started, the accumulated points are not carried over to the next game round in the game round U3, so the color of the stage St changes from yellow to orange. After that, in the game round U3, since the points are accumulated until the end, the color of the stage St remains orange while the game round U3 is being executed.

FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the colors of the stage St. FIG. 130(a) shows the stage St when points are not accumulated. The color of the stage St is set to white. FIG. 130(b) shows the stage St when points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried over. The color of the stage St is set to yellow. FIG. 130(c) shows the stage St when points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over. The color of the stage St is set to orange. In this way, the color of the stage St is used to recognizably suggest to the player whether the accumulated points are to be carried over or not.

By suggesting to the player whether the accumulated points are carried over or not, for example, if the color of the stage St is yellow, which indicates that the accumulated points are carried over, the accumulated points are not accumulated in the game round being executed. Even if the accumulated points are not 10 points or more, the accumulated points carried over from the relevant game round and the points granted in the next game round increase the possibility that the accumulated points will be 10 points or more in the next game round. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation by making the player guess.

Returning to FIG. 129 for explanation. When the game round U1 ends and the game round U2 starts, the effect b2 is executed. After that, the point giving effect Y2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As illustrated, 6 points are given in the point giving effect. Therefore, the accumulated points are 11 points. At this time, since the accumulated points have reached 10 points or more, the image of 10 pearls is changed to the image of a shellfish, but a timer indicating the time until the button pressing effect is displayed during the execution of the game round U2. "Waiting" is displayed instead. Hereinafter, the effect in which the characters "waiting" are displayed is also referred to as a waiting effect.

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the waiting effect. As shown in the figure, when the waiting effect is executed, the characters "waiting" are displayed below the image of the shellfish. The standby effect indicates that the button pressing effect is not executed in the current game round, and the button pressing effect corresponding to the accumulated points corresponding to the ten points is executed in the next and subsequent game rounds. Then, at the time of shifting to the game cycle in which the button pressing performance corresponding to the accumulated points for 10 points is executed, the timer performance is executed instead of the standby performance, and the button corresponding to the accumulated points for 10 points is pressed. A countdown of the time until the performance is executed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 129, after the point giving effect Y2 ends, the point giving effect Y3 is executed at a predetermined timing. 0 points are given in the point giving effect. In other words, points are not awarded even though the point-giving effect is executed. Therefore, the accumulated points remain at 11 points.

FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point award effect in which points are not awarded. FIG. 132 shows the point giving effect Y3 executed in the game round U2.

When the point awarding effect is started, a turtle character appears from the upper right end of the display surface 41a and advances toward the center in the same manner as in the normal point awarding effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 132(b), even when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, the turtle character does nothing, and as shown in FIG. 132(c), It advances to the left as it is and advances to the upper left end of the display surface 41a. By executing the point giving effect [0P] in this way, it is possible to add an intonation to the player's sense of expectation. After that, the symbols stop and the game round U2 ends. Note that the accumulated points in the game round U2 are set to be carried over to the next game round (game round U3).

When the game round U3 is started, the effect b3 is executed, and the timer effect is executed instead of the waiting effect executed in the game round U2. In FIG. 129, it is written as timer effect 1 to distinguish it from another timer effect to be executed later. The timer effect 1 is a effect corresponding to the button pressing effect 1 executed most recently. That is, the time displayed on the timer in the timer effect 1 is the time until the button pressing effect 1 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 129, the point giving effect Y4 [+3P] and the point giving effect Y5 [+7P] are executed at a predetermined timing after the game round U3 is started. A total of 10 points are given by the two point giving effects. Therefore, the accumulated points are 21 points. As described above, since the button pressing effect is executed once for every 10 accumulated points, the button pressing effect 2 is executed in addition to the button pressing effect 1 in the game round U3. Therefore, when the point giving effect Y5 is executed and 21 accumulated points are accumulated, the timer effect 2 corresponding to the button pressing effect 2 is executed.

FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timer effect and the button pressing effect which are executed in the game round U3. FIG. 133(a) shows how timer effects 1 and 2 are executed. As shown, the shellfish image and timer corresponding to timer effect 2 are displayed to the left of the shellfish image and timer corresponding to timer effect 1 . As described above, in the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1, the time until the button pressing effect 1 is executed is counted down and displayed. In the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2, the time until the button pressing effect 2 is executed is counted down and displayed. Therefore, the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1 and the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2 are different. In this way, by displaying a plurality of images corresponding to the timer effect, it is possible to show the player that the button pressing effect will be executed twice, and to give the player a greater sense of expectation. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 129, button pressing effect 1 is executed. FIG. 133(b) shows how the button pressing effect 1 is executed. When the button pressing effect 1 is started, the image of the open shell that was displayed in the timer effect 1 is displayed, and the characters "Press!" are displayed. Note that the image corresponding to the timer effect 2 is displayed as it is.

As shown in FIG. 129, after the button pressing effect 1 ends, the effect b4 is executed. Even during execution of the performance b4, the timer performance 2 counts down and displays the time until the button pressing performance 2 is executed. After that, when the countdown time is displayed as 0 in the timer effect 2, the button pressing effect 2 is executed. FIG. 133(c) shows how the button pressing effect 2 is executed. When the button pressing effect 2 is executed, the image of the open shell that was displayed in the timer effect 2 is displayed, and the characters "Press!" are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 129, after the button pressing effect 2 is executed, the effect b5 is executed, after which the symbols stop and the game round U3 ends. The point giving effect (case 2) has been described above.

In this embodiment, it is set so that the probability of executing the button pressing effect in the game round is higher when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a big win than when it is not a big win. there is

As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the button-pressing effect, the result of the jackpot lottery becomes "big win" or "loss (reaching occurrence)" when the button-pressing effect is executed. A sense of expectation can be given to the player by making the player guess that the probability is high. Further, by executing the point giving performance, the player who recognizes that the button pressing performance will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more is given a sense of expectation each time the point giving performance is executed. can be given.

Further, in the present embodiment, accumulated points accumulated in a game round may be reset at the end of the game round, or may be carried over to the next game round without being reset. The accumulated points may be reset at the end of the game cycle, so that the player desires to accumulate 10 or more accumulated points by the end of the game cycle, and the player's expectations for the point giving performance. The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, when a game round is started, the player who recognizes that the points have been accumulated by executing the point giving effect is conscious of the end time of the game round that may reset the accumulated points. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the manner in which accumulated points are accumulated, that is, the manner in which the point-giving effect is executed.

In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game round, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate 10 points or more in the current game round, if the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round, the corresponding game round Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectations for not accumulating 10 points or more.

D4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S40101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S40102.

In step S40102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S40103.

In step S40103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S40104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 140) described later.

In step S40104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the prize winning process for the start opening in step S40104 will be described later. After executing step S40104, the process advances to step S40105.

In step S40105, winning processing for through accompanying winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through prize winning process in step S40105 will be described later. After executing step S40105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. Winning processing for the starting port is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134: S40104).

FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the winning process for the starting gate. In step S40201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start hole 33 (start win). In step S40201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S40201: YES), the process proceeds to step S40202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S40203.

In step S40203, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S40204.

In step S40204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S40209.

In step S40201, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start hole 33 (S40201: NO), the process proceeds to step S40205, and it is determined whether the game ball has won the second start hole 34 2 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34 .

In step S40205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S40205: YES), the process proceeds to step S40206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S40207. On the other hand, in step S40205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S40205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S40207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S40208.

In step S40208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S40209.

In step S40209, it is determined whether or not the start suspension number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S40204 or step S40208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S40209, if the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (S40209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S40209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (S40209: YES), the process proceeds to step S40210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S40211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S40212.

In step S40212, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S40103 (Fig. 134), the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and each value of the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (Fig. 140), It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations incremented by 1 in step S40210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S40210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step S40103 (FIG. 134) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN incremented by 1 in step S40210. After executing step S40212, the process proceeds to step S40213.

In step S40213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (holding information). type, presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, variation time of the game round, etc. are executed before the reservation information becomes a target of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S40213, the process proceeds to step S40214.

In step S40214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (first determination information ) as a pending command.

The hold command is a judgment result (first judgment information) based on the holding information acquired based on the occurrence of the winning to the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 and the holding information. This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 140 : step S40703) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S40214, the main MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the start opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S40213) of the winning process for the starter.

FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the reservation information, determines whether the jackpot lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs, determines the variation time of the game round, etc. The reservation information is the main This is a process to be executed before becoming a target of the jackpot lottery by the control device 60 .

In step S40301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of judging whether or not a jackpot lottery is successful, judging the type of jackpot, and judging whether or not a reach has occurred. The details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S40301, the process proceeds to step S40302.

In step S40302, fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the variation time of game rounds. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S40302, the current destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 136: S40301).

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S40401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning to the starting opening in the winning process for starting opening (FIG. 135) is read. After that, the process advances to step S40402 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery based on this winning prize is executed as a game round. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the winning prior to this winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot occurring before the jackpot lottery due to this winning. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the big win lottery due to the winning of this time is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S40402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round, (S40402: YES), the process proceeds to step S40403, and the success/failure table storage area The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S40405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S40402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round (S40402: NO), the process proceeds to step S40404, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S40405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S40405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S40405: YES), the process proceeds to step S40406, and is stored in the storage area due to the winning to the start gate this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S40407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the winning in the first start port 33, the distribution table for the first start port is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S40407, the process advances to step S40408.

In step S40408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S40408, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S40408: YES), the process proceeds to step S40409, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S40408, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (S40408: NO), the process proceeds to step S40410, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S40405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S40405: NO), the process proceeds to step S40411, and is stored in the storage area by winning the starting port this time. read out the value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S40412 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S40413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S40413, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S40413: YES), the process proceeds to step S40414, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40413 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S40413: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the preceding determination process (FIG. 136: S40302).

FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. In step S40501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area is obtained by winning the starting opening in the winning process for starting opening (FIG. 135). After that, the process proceeds to step S40502.

In step S40502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the lottery result of the big win lottery determined by the big win/reach information acquisition process.

In step S40503, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S40503, the process advances to step S40507.

In step S40507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S40502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S40502: NO), the process advances to step S40504 to determine whether or not reach occurs. If it is determined in step S40504 that reach occurs (S40504: YES), the process proceeds to step S40505.

In step S40505, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S40507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In step S40504, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step S40504: NO), the process proceeds to step S40506, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is stored. By referring to it, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S40507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set such that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the shorter the variable time. there is That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different. At the time of executing the variable time acquisition process as one process of the previous determination process, that is, at the time of acquiring the variable time of the pending game round that is the target of the previous determination process, the pending game that is the target of the process The pending number at the time the round is executed as a game round is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is acquired when it is assumed that the first suspended start number RaN=0 (and the second suspended start number RbN=0). Therefore, the variable time acquired by this variable time acquisition process is the actual variable time (variation time) may be different. In the present embodiment, the variation time acquired in the variation time acquisition process executed as one process of the previous determination process is also referred to as "provisional variation time". In the present embodiment, the value of the provisional variation time is used in the processing that is performed when executing the point giving effect. Processing using the temporary fluctuation time will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134: step S40105).

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing winning processing for through. In step S40601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S40601, when it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S40601: YES), the process proceeds to step S40602, whether or not the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step S40601, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S40601: NO), this through winning process is terminated.

In step S40602, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S40602: YES), the process proceeds to step S40603, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S40604.

In step S40604, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S40103 (FIG. 134) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the win-win process for through is ended.

On the other hand, in step S40602, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S40602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is the upper limit, Winning processing for through is ended without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S40701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S40702.

In step S40702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S40703.

In step S40703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S40702 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S40703, the process advances to step S40704.

In step S40704, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S40705.

In step S40705, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S40706. In step S40706, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S40706, the process advances to step S40707.

In step S40707, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S40708.

In step S40708, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S40709.

In step S40709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S40703). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S40709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S40709: NO), in steps S40710 and S40711, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S40710, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step S40711, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S40709: YES), the process returns to step S40703, and each process from step S40703 to step S40708 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S40703 to step S40708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 140: S40706).

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S40801, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S40801 that any one of the opening period flag, the opening/closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S40801: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and the processing after step S40802 is performed. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of them. That is, when the game is in the special game state, no game round is started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is won. On the other hand, in step S40801, when it determines that it is not in a special game state (S40801:NO), it progresses to step S40802.

In step S40802, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

In step S40802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S40802: NO), the process proceeds to steps S40803 to S40805 for game round start. In step S40803, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S40803, when it is determined that the total number of pending CRN is "0" (S40803: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40803 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S40803: NO), the process proceeds to step S40804.

In step S40804, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S40805, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S40806.

In step S40806, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S40806, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S40802 that the main display section 45 is performing variable display (S40802: YES), processing for progressing game rounds in steps S40807 to S40809 is executed.

In step S40807, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S40807, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 144) described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S40807 that the variable time has not elapsed (S40807: NO), the process advances to step S40808 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S40808, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S40807 that the variation time has elapsed (S40807: YES), the process advances to step S40809 to execute variation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the result display section so that the form of the symbol to be displayed on the result display section determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 143) to be described later is displayed on the result display section related to the current game round. display control. After executing step S40809, this game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting processing>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 141: S40804).

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S40901, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 119) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S40901, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S40901, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S40901: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S40902 to S40907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S40901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S40901: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S40908 to S40913 is executed.

In step S40902, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the flow advances to step S40903 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S40904. In step S40904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step S40905.

In step S40905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S40905, the process advances to step S40906.

In step S40906, if the second result display flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S40907.

In step S40907, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S40907 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S40703 of the normal process (FIG. 140). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S40901, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S40901: NO), The process advances to step S40908.

In step S40908, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S40909. In step S40909, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the flow advances to step S40910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S40911.

In step S40911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S40911, the process advances to step S40912.

In step S40912, if the second result display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S40913.

In step S40913, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S40913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S40703 of the normal process (FIG. 140). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 141: S40805).

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step S41001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S41001, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S41001:YES), it progresses to step S41002.

In step S41002, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 120(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S41004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S41001: NO), the process proceeds to step S41003.

In step S41003, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 120(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S41004.

At step S41004, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (big hit lottery) at step S41002 or step S41003 is a big hit. In step S41004, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S41004: YES), in steps S41005 to S41012, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S41005, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S41005 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S41005: NO), the process advances to step S41006 to refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 122(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41005 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S41005: YES), the flow advances to step S41007 to enter the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 122(b)). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step S41006 or step S41007. The process advances to step S41008.

In step S41008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S41006 or step S41007 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S41008, when it is determined that the game result is a probability variable jackpot (S41008: YES), the process proceeds to step S41009.

In step S41009, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S41006 or step S41007. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S41009, the process advances to step S41010.

In step S41010, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S41006 or step S41007 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S41016.

On the other hand, in step S41008, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S41006 or step S41007 is not a probability variable jackpot (S41008: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to S41011.

In step S41011, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S41006 or step S41007 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S41011, the process proceeds to step S41012.

In step S41012, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S41006 or step S41007 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S41016.

At step S41004, if the result of the jackpot lottery at step S41002 or step S41003 is not jackpot winning (S41004: NO), the process proceeds to step S41013 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not they match.

In step S41013, when it is determined that reach occurs in the game round (S41013: YES), the process proceeds to step S41014.

In step S41014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is to be displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn that is the stop result for reach. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S41014, the process advances to step S41016.

In step S41013, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (S41013: NO), the process proceeds to step S41015.

In step S41015, stop result setting processing for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of loss is to end the variable display in a state in which either the stop result is displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn in which the result is a loss. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S41015, the process advances to step S41016.

In step S41016, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game turn in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S41016, the process advances to step S41017.

In step S41017, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S41017 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S41017: NO), the process advances to step S41018 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S41016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41017 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S41017: YES), the flow advances to step S41019 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S41016. After executing step S41018 or step S41019, the process advances to step S41020.

In step S41020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and off result Contains information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S41018 to S41020 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S40703 in the normal process (FIG. 140). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S41020, the process proceeds to step S41021.

In step S41021, of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second result display section flag is ON, the second result display section 37b is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S41021, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 143: S41016).

FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S41101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S41102.

In step S41102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S41102: YES), the process proceeds to step S41103.

In step S41103, the variable time table for big hit stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S41107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S41102, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S41102: NO), the process proceeds to step S41104 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this processing (S41104) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S41102, in the step S41104, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S41104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S41105. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S41105, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S41107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S41104, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S41104: NO), the process proceeds to step S41106, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S41107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table indicates that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the greater the variable time. set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 140: S40707).

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S41201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S41201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S41201: NO), the flow advances to step S41202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when ending the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S41202 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S41202: NO), the flow advances to step S41203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S41203, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S41203: NO), the process proceeds to step S41204, timing at which the pattern fluctuation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b ends It is determined whether or not. In step S41204, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S41204: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S41204, if it is determined that it is the timing when the variable display ends (S41204: YES), the process proceeds to step S41205, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) changes to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S41205: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S41205, when it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S41205: YES), the process proceeds to step S41206, and the high probability mode Turn off the flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S41207.

In step S41207, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S41207, the process advances to step S41208.

In step S41208, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S40703 in the normal process (FIG. 140). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S41208, the process advances to step S41209 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S41203 that the opening period flag is ON (S41203: YES), the process proceeds to step S41210.

In step S41210, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S41210 that the opening period has ended (S41210: YES), the process advances to step S41211 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S41212.

In step S41212, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S41212, the process advances to step S41213.

In step S41213, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step S41213, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM64 is the 16R probability variable flag or 16R normal flag (S41213: YES), proceed to step S41214, provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened.

On the other hand, in step S41213, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM64 is the 8R probability variable flag or 8R normal flag (S41213: NO), proceed to step S41215, provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S41214 or step S41215, the process proceeds to step S41216.

In step S41216, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S41202, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S41202: YES), the process proceeds to step S41217 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driven state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit is operated under the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the number of opening limits has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S41217, the process advances to step S41218.

In step S41218, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S41219: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S41218: YES), the flow advances to step S41219 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step S41219, the process advances to step S41220.

In step S41220, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S41220, the process advances to step S41221.

In step S41221, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S41221, the process proceeds to step S41222.

In step S41222, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S40603 in the normal process (FIG. 140). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S41222, the process proceeds to step S41223.

In step S41223, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S41201 that the ending period flag is ON (S41201: YES), the process proceeds to step S41224.

In step S41224, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S41223), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S41224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S41224: YES), the process proceeds to step S41225.

In step S41225, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the flow advances to step S41226 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S41226, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S41224, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S41224: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (11217 in FIG. 145) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S41301, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step S41301 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S41301: NO), the process proceeds to step S41302 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S41302, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S41302: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S41302: NO), the process proceeds to step S41303.

In step S41303, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S41303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S41303: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S41303, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S41303: YES), the process proceeds to step S41304, in order to open the big winning opening 36a variable winning driving unit 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S41305.

In step S41305, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S41305, the process advances to step S41306.

In step S41306, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 140: step S40703). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S41301, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S41301: YES), the process proceeds to step S41307, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S41307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S41307: NO), the process proceeds to step S41308.

In step S41308, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S41308 that no prize has been won (S41308: NO), the main prize winning opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41308 that a prize has been won (S41308: YES), the process proceeds to step S41309, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter area PC. Thereafter, the process advances to step S41310.

In step S41310, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S41310 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S41310: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S41307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S41307: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S41310 (S41310: YES), the process proceeds to step S41311 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S41312.

In step S41312, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S41313 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S41313, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S41313: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S41313: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S41314, the flow advances to step S41315 to set the close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. 140 (step S40703 in FIG. 140), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to correspond to what you have done

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 145: S41226).

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S41401, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as a jackpot type flag is set to ON in the RAM 64 . That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S41401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S41401: YES), the process proceeds to step S41402 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S41402, the process advances to step S41403.

In step S41403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S41404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S41405.

In step S41405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S41406.

In step S41406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S41410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S41401: NO), the process advances to step S41407 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S41408.

In step S41408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process advances to step S41409 to set 100 to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. Thereafter, the process advances to step S41410.

In step S41410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 140: S40708).

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S41501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S41501 that the supported flag is not ON (S41501: NO), the process proceeds to step S41502.

In step S41502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S41502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S41502: NO), the process proceeds to step S41503.

In step S41503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S41503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41503: YES), the process proceeds to step S41504.

In step S41504, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish the variable display of symbols in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S41504 that it is time to end the variable display (S41504: YES), the process advances to step S41505 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S41504: NO), the process proceeds to step S41506.

In step S41506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S41506, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S41506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S41506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (S41506: YES), the process proceeds to step S41507.

In step S41507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S41508 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S41507 (S41507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S41508 (S41508: YES), the process advances to step S41509 to perform an electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery Winning (see FIG. 123(b)). Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S41510.

In step S41510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S41509 is support winning. In step S41510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S41510: YES), proceed to step S41511, turn on the support winning flag, and provide in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S41512. On the other hand, in step S41510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S41510: NO), the process proceeds to step S41512 without executing the processing of step S41511.

In step S41512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S41512 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S41512: YES), the process proceeds to step S41513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S41512: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S41513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S41513, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S41513: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S41514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S41515.

In step S41515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S41515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 140: step S40703) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S41507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S41507: YES), or if it is determined in step S41518 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S41508: NO), the process proceeds to step S41516, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S41517.

In step S41517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S41516 is support winning. In step S41517, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S41517: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S41517, if it is determined that the support is won (S41517: YES), the process advances to step S41518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S41502 that the support winning flag is ON (S41502: YES), the process advances to step S41519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S41519, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41519: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41519: YES), the process proceeds to step S41520.

In step S41520, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S41521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S41501, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (S41501: YES), the process advances to step S41522 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 148: S41522).

FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S41601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S41601: YES), the process proceeds to step S41602.

In step S41602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S41602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S41602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41602: YES), the process proceeds to step S41603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S41603, the process advances to step S41604.

In step S41604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S41605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S41605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S41605: NO), this electrical opening/closing control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S41605: YES), the process advances to step S41606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S41601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S41601: NO), the process advances to step S41607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S41607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S41607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S41607: YES), the process advances to step S41608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S41609.

In step S41609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S41609: NO), the process advances to step S41610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S41610 that the high-frequency support mode is on (S41610: YES), the flow advances to step S41611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41609 that the open/close execution mode is set (S41609: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S41610 (S41610: NO), the process proceeds to step S41612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

D5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 150 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

D6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S41701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S41701, the process advances to step S41702.

In step S41702, command handling processing is executed. Command correspondence processing is processing executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62 . The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S41702, the process advances to step S41703.

In step S41703, point giving effect execution processing is executed. The point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during execution of the game round. The details of the point giving effect execution process will be described later. After executing step S41703, the process advances to step S41704.

In step S41704, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command correspondence process of step S41702 and the point giving effect execution process of step S4703. After executing step S41704, the process advances to step S41705.

In step S41705, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S41702. After executing step S41705, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 151: S41702).

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. In step S41801, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S41801 that a pending command has been received (S41801: YES), the process proceeds to step S41802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41801 that the hold command has not been received (S41801: NO), the process proceeds to step S41806.

In step S41802, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the first starting port 33, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the second starting port 34, and these pending A process for enabling the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S41802 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first pending number", and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 It is also referred to as the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as the "total reserved number". After executing step S41802, the process advances to step S41803.

In step S41803, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first starting port 33 specified in step S41802, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 and Based on, the display mode of 1st reservation display area Ds1 and 2nd reservation display area Ds2 is controlled. After executing step S41803, the process advances to step S41804.

In step S41804, the content of the pending command is stored in the game cycle setting information storage area 94d. That is, the information acquired by the first determination processing executed by the main side MPU 62 is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 92 by the hold command, and the information of the ahead determination processing included in the transmitted hold command is stored in the game round setting information storage area. 94d.

FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the game cycle setting information storage area 94d. The game cycle setting information storage area 94d has a first start opening game cycle setting information storage area and a second start opening game cycle setting information storage area. FIG. 153(a) shows the game cycle setting information storage area for the first start opening, and FIG. 153(b) shows the game cycle setting information storage area for the second start opening. Since the configuration of the memory area for game round setting information for the first opening and the memory area for game round setting information for the second opening are the same, the game round setting information for the first opening shown in FIG. The information storage area will be explained, and the explanation of the game turn setting information storage area for the second start opening shown in FIG. 153(b) will be omitted.

As shown, the game cycle setting information storage area for the first starting opening is divided into a first determination information area and an effect information area. Further, each piece of information stored in the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port is stored for each reserved game round. The reserved game times (n=1 to 4) shown in the game time setting information storage area for the first start opening are from the reserved game times of the first start opening (n=1) to the reserved game times of the first start opening ( n=4), the reserved game times are executed in order.

Information (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as first determination information) is stored. The destination determination information is information acquired by the destination determination process executed by the main MPU 62, and is information transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound and light MPU 92 by the hold command. The sound and light side MPU 92 stores the information included in the hold command in the first determination information area of the game cycle setting information storage area for the first starting port.

The effect information area of the first starting opening game round setting information storage area is a storage area for storing information set by effect information setting processing described later based on the information stored in the first determination information area. The performance information area will be described later.

In the first determination information area of the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port, the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the occurrence of reach, and the provisional fluctuation time are stored for each reserved game round. As described above, the provisional variation time is the holding game round in the case where it is assumed that the first holding holding number RaN=0 and the second holding holding number RbN=0 at the point in time when the holding game round is executed as a game round. is the variation time of

The preceding judgment information stored in the preceding judgment information area and the performance information stored in the performance information area are linked to each reserved game round itself, and each time the game round is executed, the areas to be stored are adjacent to each other. to the storage area for the pending game rounds. For example, as shown in FIG. 153(a), when the game round is executed once, the ahead determination information and effect information stored in the storage area of the pending game round (n=2) are changed to the pending game round ( (n=1) storage area, and the preceding judgment information and performance information stored in the storage area for the pending game round (n=3) are shifted to the storage area for the pending game round (n=2) and are held. The preceding determination information and effect information stored in the storage area for the game round (n=4) are shifted to the storage area for the pending game round (n=3).

The description returns to FIG. After executing step S41804, the process advances to step S41805. In step S41805, effect information setting processing is executed. The performance information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area, and setting various items related to the performance to be executed in each game round. Details of the effect information setting process will be described later. After executing step S41805, the process advances to step S41806.

In step S41806, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S41806 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (S41806: YES), the process proceeds to step S41807.

In step S41807, effect setting processing is executed. The effect setting process is a process of setting the effect to be executed in the game round. The effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S41807, the process advances to step S41808.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S41806 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (S41806: NO), the process advances to step S41808 without executing step S41807.

In step S41808, processing for responding to other commands received from main MPU 62 is executed. After executing step S41808, this command handling process ends.

<Update processing at the time of winning>
Next, update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 152: S41802).

FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S41901, it is determined whether or not the pending command read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. In step S41901, if it is determined that the pending command that is read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S41901: YES), the process proceeds to step S41902, sound and light The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step S41902, the process advances to step S41904.

In step S41901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33 (S41901: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting port 34, the process advances to step S41903 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pending information items acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step S41903, the process advances to step S41904.

The reason why steps S41902 and S41903 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the hold information is not displayed in the main controller 60. While the information is held in memory, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step S41904, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total pending number counter area, the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step S41904, the update process at the time of the main winning is ended.

<Production information setting process>
Next, the effect information setting process will be described. The effect information setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 152: S41805).

As described above, the performance information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area, and setting various items relating to the performance to be executed in each game round. Various set items are stored in the effect information area of the game round setting information storage area. For convenience of explanation, first, the performance information area (see FIG. 153) of the game round setting information storage area (game round setting information storage area for the first start gate, game round setting information storage area for the second start gate) will be described. do. After that, the effect information setting process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 153(a), the effect information area of the first starting gate game cycle setting information storage area includes, for each reserved game cycle, a point grant effect flag, a continuous effect final game cycle flag, and a carryover game cycle flag. , the total number of points to be given, production scenario No., and point giving scenario No. are stored.

The point giving effect flag will be explained. The point giving effect flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game time is set to the game time for executing the point giving effect.

The continuous effect final game round flag will be described. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is a point-giving effect in which accumulated points are carried over across game rounds and accumulated points are used over a plurality of game rounds. And the last game round of the game rounds in which the continuous production is executed is also referred to as the continuous production final game round. The continuous effect final game round flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game time is set to the continuous effect final game round.

The carry-over game round flag will be explained. In the present embodiment, the carry-over game round is a game round that is executed before the final game round of the continuous production among the game rounds that execute the continuous production, that is, the game round in which accumulated points are carried over. The carry-over game round flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round is set as the carry-over game round.

Note that the above-mentioned point granting effect flag, continuous effect final game round flag, and carryover game round flag stored in the effect information area are set in the effect setting process described later. After that, it is turned OFF (reset) by updating the game cycle setting information storage area (FIG. 165: S42112).

More specifically, in the case of the point giving effect (case 2) shown in FIG. Since it is used in rounds, the point giving effect is a continuous effect executed over three game rounds. Since the game round U1 and the game round U2 are game rounds in which accumulated points are carried over, they are carried over game rounds. The game round U3 is the last game round of the game rounds in which the continuous production is executed, so it is the final game round of the continuous production. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the continuous effect is executed is referred to as the number of times Np of games performed. In the case of the point giving effect (case 2) in FIG. 129, Np=3 because the continuous effect is executed using three game rounds. The executed game count Np is used in the process (effect information setting process).

The production scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as production scenario number) will be explained. In the present embodiment, the production scenario refers to various effects related to the production to be executed in the processing target game round, such as the type of animation to be executed in the processing target game round, the timing of executing the animation, the timing of executing the point award production, and the like. It is a program in which the items are set. The sound and light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of production scenarios. The effect scenario number is a code assigned to each effect scenario, and is used to specify one effect scenario.

A point-giving scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as a point-giving scenario number) will be described. In this embodiment, the point-giving scenario is a program in which the number of points to be given in the point-giving effect set for each effect scenario is set. The sound and light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of point giving scenarios. The point giving scenario No. is a code attached corresponding to each point giving scenario, and is used to specify one point giving scenario. The effect information area of the game cycle setting information storage area has been described above.

Next, the effect information setting process will be explained. In the effect information setting process, the effect information stored in the effect information area corresponding to the pending game round to be processed (point grant effect flag, continuous effect final game round flag, carryover game round flag, total number of points to be given , production scenario No., and point-giving scenario No.).

FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing effect information setting processing. The processing executed in the effect information setting processing is roughly composed of three processing groups.

The processing group of steps S42003 to S42008 is a processing group for setting the effect information of the processing target game round when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game round is "jackpot" or "loss (reach occurrence)". be.

The processing group of steps S42011 to S42015 is the case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game round is "missing (reach does not occur)", and when the processing target game round is set as the continuous effect final game round. , a processing group for setting the effect information of the game round to be processed.

The process group of steps S42016 to S42018 is the case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "out (no reach)", and the game round to be processed has continuity with other game rounds. It is a process group for setting the effect information of the game round to be processed when the point giving effect not executed is executed (when the continuous effect is not executed) or when the point giving effect is not executed.

Details of the effect information setting process will be described below. , Steps S42016 to S42018 will be explained, then Steps S42003 to S42008 will be explained, and finally Steps S42011 to S42015 will be explained.

In step S42001, the information stored in the game cycle setting information storage area is read. When the game round to be processed is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, the information recorded in the game round setting information storage area for the first start hole is read, and the game round to be processed is the second start hole. If it is based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 34, the information recorded in the game round setting information storage area for the second starting hole is read. After executing step S42001, the process proceeds to step S42002.

In step S42002, based on the information in the first determination information area corresponding to the game round to be processed in the game round setting information storage area, the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round to be processed is "big win" or "missing (occurrence of reach)". Determine if there is In step S42002, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the game cycle to be processed is neither "jackpot" nor "loss (reaching occurrence)", that is, when it is determined to be "loss (reaching non-occurrence)" (S42002: NO), the process proceeds to step S42010.

In step S42010, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag of the reserved game round (preceding reserved game round) immediately before the game round to be processed is ON. By executing the processing, the continuous performance in which the pending game round (advance pending game round) before the processing target game round is set as the carryover game round and the processing target game round is set as the continuous production final game round is performed. Determine whether it is executable. In the present embodiment, when executing a continuous production in which the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "out (no reach)" is set as the final game round of the continuous production, the number of game rounds to execute the continuous production ( Since the execution game number Np) is set to 2, the preceding game round that is the target of determination as to whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag is ON is the preceding holding game that is one before the processing target game round. only times.

When the performance information setting process in the game round to be processed is executed, if it is set not to execute the point giving effect in the preceding suspended game round immediately before the game round to be processed, or the preceding suspended game round When it is set to execute the point giving effect (not to execute the continuous effect) at one time, the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round is set to OFF. It should be noted that, at the time when the performance information setting process in the game round to be processed is executed, there is no case where the preceding reserved game round immediately before the game round to be processed is set to the carryover game round in the continuous effect, and the game to be processed There is no case where the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round is set to OFF because the preceding reserved game round is the carry-over game round. The reason is explained below.

At the time of execution of the effect information setting process for the target game round, the effect information for the preceding reserved game round has already been set, but in the present embodiment, the effect information setting process for the target game round is executed. Along with this, there is a case where the effect information of the already set preceding reserved game times is corrected (reset). In the present embodiment, after the continuous effect final game time is set, the preceding reserved game time to be executed prior to the continuous effect final game time is set (reset) as the carryover game time according to the setting. . Therefore, at the time when the effect information setting process in the game round to be processed is executed (that is, at the time when the effect information for the game round to be processed has not yet been set), the preceding reserved game round one before the game round to be processed is It is not set to carry-over game times in continuous production. The case where the performance information of the already set preceding reserved game round is corrected (reset) will be described in detail when describing the processing group of steps S42003 to S42008 and the processing group of steps S42011 to S42015.

In step S42010, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round immediately before the game round to be processed is ON (S42010: YES), the process proceeds to step S42016. In other words, the process proceeds to the above-described processing group of steps S42016 to S42018. As described above, the processing group of steps S42016 to S42018 is the case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game round is "missing (reach does not occur)", and the processing target game round is different from other game rounds. This is a processing group for setting the performance information of the game round to be processed when executing a point giving effect without continuity (when not executing a continuous effect) or when not executing a point giving effect. In this embodiment, at the time of setting the effect of the game round to be processed, the setting of the continuous effect final game round is prioritized for the preceding hold game round that has already been set as the continuous effect final game round, and later It is not corrected (reset) to carry-over game times in continuous production. Therefore, in step S42010, when the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round immediately before the target game round is ON, the processing target game round does not have continuity with the preceding reserved game round. A processing group for setting effects (a processing group of steps S42016 to S42018) is executed.

In step S42016, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the point giving effect in the game round to be processed. The point-giving effect in the process is a point-giving effect that is executed in one game round to be processed without continuity with other game rounds. In this embodiment, the lottery in this process is executed using a predetermined random number, and the probability of the lottery result of executing the point giving effect is set to 50%. After executing step S42016, the process proceeds to step S42017.

In step S42017, the result of the lottery in step S42016 is determined, and when it is determined that the lottery result is to execute the point giving effect in the game round to be processed (S42017: YES), the process proceeds to step S42018.

In step S42018, the total number of points (total given points) to be given in the point giving effect executed in one game to be processed is determined. In this process, the total awarded points is determined by a predetermined lottery, and is set to be between 0 and 9 points. That is, it is set so that 10 points are accumulated and the button-pressing effect is not executed in the game round to be processed. This is to prevent giving unnecessary expectations to the player by executing a button pressing performance in a game cycle in which the result of the jackpot lottery is neither ``jackpot'' nor ``losing (generate reach)''. After executing step S42018, the process advances to step S42009.

On the other hand, in step S42017, the result of the lottery in step S42016 is determined, and when it is determined that the lottery result is that the point giving effect is not executed in the game round to be processed (S42017: NO), step S42018 is not executed. The process advances to step S42009.

In step S42009, the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S42016 to S42018 are recorded in the performance information area of the game cycle setting information recording area. For example, when it is determined to execute the point giving effect in one game round to be processed, the point giving effect flag is set to ON, the continuous effect final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points is set to the value of the total awarded points determined in step S42018. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are set to NULL. In the present embodiment, only in the game rounds in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, the effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game round is generated from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. The effect pattern table to be set in the case where the point giving effect is executed in one game to be processed will be described later.

Also, when it is determined not to execute the point giving effect in the game round to be processed, the point giving effect flag is set to OFF, the continuous effect final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total given points are NULL without being set. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are not set and are NULL.

In step S42009, after updating the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is terminated.

Next, the processing group of steps S42003 to S42008 will be described. As described above, the processing group of steps S42003 to S42008, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game round is "jackpot" or "loss (reach occurrence)", outputs the effect information of the processing target game round. This is the processing group to be set.

As described above, in step S42002, based on the information in the first determination information area corresponding to the target game round of the game round setting information storage area, the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is "big hit" or "loss ( Reach occurrence)” is determined. Then, in step S42002, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the game to be processed is "jackpot" or "loss (reach occurrence)" (S42002: YES), the process proceeds to step S42003.

In step S42003, the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round before the processing target game round in the game round setting information storage area is read, and the continuous effect final game round flag is continuously turned off when viewed from the processing target game round. Specify the number of preceding pending game times that is. In this processing, by specifying the number of preceding reserved game rounds in which the continuous effect final game round flag is continuously turned OFF when viewed from the game round to be processed, the number of preceding reserved game rounds before the game round to be processed is specified. is used as the carry-over game round, and it is determined whether or not the continuous performance using the processing target game round as the continuous performance final game round can be executed. Although the performance information of the preceding reserved game round before the game round to be processed has already been set, in the present embodiment, the flag of the continuous production final game round is continuously turned OFF as viewed from the game round to be processed. It is determined that the preceding reserved game rounds that are present are game rounds that can be reset as carry-over game rounds. Hereinafter, the number of preceding pending game rounds in which the continuous effect final game round flag is continuously turned OFF when viewed from the game round to be processed is also referred to as the resettable number of game rounds Fn.

For example, in the case of the game round setting information storage area for the first starting port shown in FIG. ), the continuous effect final game round flags of the suspended game round (n=3) and the suspended game round (n=2), which are consecutive game rounds, are continuously OFF, so in this case, the resettable game The number of times Fn=2. In addition, since the game round setting information storage area for the first start opening shown in FIG. The information in the effect information area of the pending game round (n=4) is not set. That is, the information of the effect information area is set by the effect information setting process.

In addition, if the number of preceding reserved game times in which the continuous effect final game time flag is continuously turned OFF as viewed from the game times to be processed is 0, the number of resettable game times Fn is set to 0. do.

After executing step S42003, the process proceeds to step S42004.

In step S42004, based on the resettable game number Fn specified in step S42003, the number of game times that can be used for continuous effect (hereinafter referred to as the number of executed games Np) is determined. In this embodiment, the number of times Np of games to be executed is determined by lottery using random numbers. As described above, the resettable number of games Fn is the number of games that can be used as the carry-over effect. It becomes the value which added 1 as a game round. Therefore, in step S42004, the number of times Np of executed games, which is equal to or less than Fn+1, is determined by a predetermined lottery. The random number used for the lottery may be obtained when the game ball is entered into the starting hole corresponding to the game round to be processed, or may be obtained when the lottery is executed. When resettable number of games Fn=0, the number of executed games Np is inevitably one. After executing step S42004, the process advances to step S42005.

In step S42005, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary fluctuation time of the game round to be processed. As described above, the production scenario includes various matters related to the production to be executed in the game round to be processed, such as the type of animation to be executed in the game round to be processed, the timing of executing the animation, the timing of executing the point awarding production, etc. is a set program. In this embodiment, the production scenario is determined by referring to the big win production scenario table or the ready-to-win production scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 . When the result of the jackpot lottery of the game to be processed is "jackpot", the production scenario is determined using the jackpot production scenario table, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is "loss (reach occurrence), the production scenario for reach. A production scenario is determined using a table.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big win effect scenario table. As shown, in the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one variable time period (provisional variable time period) that can be set for a game turn to be processed. FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ready-to-win effect scenario table. As with the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one variable time period (provisional variable time period) that can be set for a game turn to be processed.

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram for explaining, as an example, an effect scenario corresponding to the provisional change time T=t4 of the big win effect scenario table. FIG. 158(a) shows the production scenario for the big win (production scenario Esc(D1) to production scenario Esc(D4)) corresponding to the temporary fluctuation time T=t4. As shown in the figure, each of the four types of production scenarios is set corresponding to the length of the temporary variable time T=t4, and the type of production to be executed, the point-giving production and the button-pressing production are executed. Timing etc. are different for each. It should be noted that "pseudo-continuous" shown in the figure indicates a pseudo-continuous effect, "Bt" indicates a button-pressing effect, and "Pe" indicates a point-giving effect.

Further, the variation time of the game round differs depending on the number of reserved game rounds at the time when the game round corresponding to the effect scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the larger the number of pending game rounds, the shorter the variation time of the game rounds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each effect scenario is prepared for each number of pending games.

FIG. 158(b) explains that one type of production scenario (production scenario Esc (D1)) is prepared for each number of pending games (first start holding number RaN: 0 to 4). It is an explanatory diagram. As shown in the figure, each effect scenario has the same effect moving image to be executed, the number of executions of the point giving effect, etc., but the effect scenario adapted to the case where the number of pending games is large has a shorter execution time. is set to be

In step S42005 (FIG. 155), four kinds of production scenarios corresponding to the provisional fluctuation times of the game rounds to be processed are specified from the jackpot production scenario table (or ready-to-win production scenario table), and the specified four production scenarios are specified. One performance scenario is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. Incidentally, the process of selecting one of the five effect scenarios shown in FIG. 158(b) is selected according to the number of reserved game times immediately before the game time corresponding to the effect scenario is executed. After executing step S42005, the process advances to step S42006.

In step S42006, a point giving scenario corresponding to the number of times Np of played games is determined based on the determined effect scenario. The point giving scenario is a program in which the number of points to be given in the point giving effect set for each effect scenario is set. In this process, a point awarding scenario is determined based on the jackpot/reach point awarding scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot/reach point award scenario table. As shown, two point-giving scenarios are set corresponding to each effect scenario and each execution game count Np (1 to 4) determined in step S42004. In this process, two point-giving scenarios are specified based on the determined production scenario and the number of times Np of games to be played, and one point-giving scenario is selected from the two specified point-giving scenarios by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. decide. Actually, as shown in FIG. 159, in the jackpot/ready-to-win point award scenario table, two point award scenarios No. are set corresponding to each execution game number Np. When the point giving scenario number is determined, the point giving scenario corresponding to the point giving scenario number is read out from the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot/reach point award scenario. As shown in the figure, in each point grant scenario, the value of grant points suitable for the production scenario to be executed in the game round to be processed is set in the execution order of the point grant performance set in the production scenario, and the number of execution games is set. A total number of points to be given in each preceding game round is set corresponding to Np. For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the point awarding scenario Psc (A2g) is executed when the effect scenario set in the game round to be processed is Esc (A2) and the number of executed games Np=4. selected. As for Psc (A2g), the number of points to be awarded in the target game round is set for each point-giving effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160, in the game round to be processed, 1 point is given in the first point giving effect, 2 points in the second point giving effect, 3 points in the third point giving effect, and 3 points in the fourth point giving effect. 1 point and 2 points are given in the point giving effect of the fifth time and the point giving effect of the fifth time, respectively.

Also, in each point giving scenario, the total number of points to be given in the point giving effect executed in the preceding game rounds 1 to 3 is set. In addition, in FIG. 160, the game round executed immediately before the relevant game round (the game round to be processed) is referred to as the preceding game round 1, and the game round executed immediately before the preceding game round 1 Preceding game round 2 is written, and a game round executed one before preceding game round 2 is written as preceding game round 3. In the case of the point awarding scenario Psc (A2g) of FIG. The total given point number in the preceding game round 2 executed immediately before is 4 points, and the total given point number in the preceding game round 3 executed immediately before the preceding game round 2 is 1 point. The timing to execute the point grant effect in each preceding game round 1 to the preceding game round 3 and the number of points to be granted in one point grant effect are determined in the effect setting process described later. Determined based on numbers. After executing step S42006, the process proceeds to step S42007.

At step S42007, it is determined whether or not the number of times Np of executed games determined at step S42004 is 2 or more. That is, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance is executed in which the processing target game time is set to the continuous performance final game time and the preceding game time is set to the carry-over game time. More specifically, when a continuous effect is executed in which the preceding game round is set to the carry-over game round, it is necessary to reset (correct) the effect information of the preceding game round that has already been set. By determining whether or not the number Np of executed games is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not resetting is necessary. In step S42007, when it is determined that the number of times Np of executed games is 2 or more (S42007: YES), the process proceeds to step S42008.

In step S42008, the total given points of each preceding game round stored in the point giving scenario set as the game round to be processed is read. That is, the total given points in the point giving effect executed in each preceding game round are read. After executing step S42008, the process advances to step S42009.

On the other hand, in step S42007, when it is determined that the number of times Np of executed games is not 2 or more (S42007: NO), the process proceeds to step S42009 without executing step S42008.

In step S42009, the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S42003 to S42008 are recorded in the performance information area of the game cycle setting information recording area. For example, when it is determined to execute a continuous effect using the preceding reserved game time before the game time to be processed as the carry-over game time and the game time to be processed as the last game time of the continuous effect, it is used as the carry-over game time. The point giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the preceding game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game time flag is set to ON again. For the total given points, the total given points for each preceding game read in step S42008 are reset. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, only for a game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, an effect pattern to be executed in that game round is created from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. The effect pattern table prepared for the effect executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON will be described later.

Then, the point grant effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game time used as the continuous effect final game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to ON, and the carried over game time flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points is set to NULL. The total given point is a parameter used for determining the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. There is no need to set the total number of points to be awarded since the grant scenario is already set. The production scenario No. sets the production scenario No. corresponding to the production scenario determined in step S42005. The point grant scenario number sets the point grant scenario number corresponding to the point grant scenario determined in step S42006.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "jackpot" or "loss (reach generation)", the continuous effect final game when the game round executes the continuous effect When it is not set to the number of times, that is, even if the number of execution games Np = 1, it is considered that the continuous performance of the number of execution games Np = 1 is executed, and the game round is treated as the final game round of continuous performance. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "big hit" or "missing (occurrence of reach)", the continuous effect final game round flag in the effect information area corresponding to the game round is always turned ON. set. By doing so, when the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" or "missing (reach occurrence)" determines the effect information of the game round to be executed after the game round, the carryover game It avoids being reset as times. Therefore, in the present embodiment, accumulated points in game rounds in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "big win" or "lost (occurrence of reach)" are not carried over to game rounds to be executed later.

In step S42009, after updating the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is terminated.

Next, the processing group of steps S42011 to S42015 will be described. As described above, in the processing group of steps S42011 to S42015, the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "loss (no reach)", and the game round to be processed is continuously produced in the final game. It is a processing group for setting the performance information of the game round to be processed when the game round is set.

As described above, in step S42010, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag of the pending game round (advance pending game round) immediately before the game round to be processed is ON. Then, in step S42010, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding reserved game round immediately before the target game round is not ON (S42010: NO), the process proceeds to step S42011. That is, it is determined that continuous performance can be executed by setting the reserved game round (preceding reserved game round) immediately before the game round to be processed as the carry-over game round and setting the game round to be processed as the final game round of continuous production. If so, the process advances to step S42011.

It should be noted that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (reach does not occur)" when executing a continuous effect in which the game time is set as the final game time of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is performed. The number of games to be played (the number of games to be played Np) is set to 2. This is because the player does not have unnecessary expectations by reducing the number of game rounds in which the continuous performance is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "loss (no reach)". In addition, when the number of game rounds in which the continuous performance is executed reaches three times or more, the player recognizes that the result of the jackpot lottery in the last game round of the continuous performance is ``big hit'' or ``loss (occurrence of reach)''. It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of counting the number of times the continuous performance is executed, and increase the expectation of the player as the number of times the continuous performance is executed increases. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing a continuous production in which the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "out (no reach)" is set as the final game round of the continuous production, the number of game rounds for executing the continuous production is set. Although the configuration in which the number of times (executed game number Np) is set to 2 is adopted, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which the number of executed games Np is set to 3 or 4 may be adopted.

In step S42011, the game round to be processed is set to the previous reserved game round (preceding reserved game round) as the carry-over game round, and the continuous production in which the game round to be processed is set to the continuous production final game round, that is, the execution game. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous performance of the number of times Np=2. In this embodiment, it is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. In this embodiment, the setting is made so that the probability of the lottery result that the continuous effect is executed is 20%. In other words, the execution of continuous effects (carrying over of accumulated points) is executed with a high probability when the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot" or "loss (reach occurs)", and the result of the jackpot lottery is "loss (no reach)". )” is set to be executed with a low probability. By setting in this way, it is possible to impart a strong sense of anticipation to the player who recognizes that the accumulated points have been carried over during the execution of the game round. After executing step S42011, the process proceeds to step S42012.

In step S42012, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S42011 that continuous production (Np=2) is executed.

In step S42011, when it determines with not performing continuous production|presentation (Np=2) (S42012:NO), it progresses to step S42016. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "missing (non-reachable)", a point giving effect that does not have continuity with other game rounds in the game round to be processed is executed. Since this is the case where it is possible, the processing by the processing group of steps S42016 to S42018 is executed. Since the processing group of steps S42016 to S42018 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in step S42011, when it determines with performing continuous production|presentation (Np=2) (S42012:YES), it progresses to step S42013.

In step S42013, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary fluctuation time of the game round to be processed. In this embodiment, an effect scenario is determined by referring to a non-reach effect scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the non-ready effect scenario table. As shown, in the non-reach effect scenario table, two types of effect scenarios correspond to one variable time (temporary variable time) that can be set for the game turn to be processed.

FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram for explaining, as an example, an effect scenario corresponding to provisional change time T=t24 of the non-reach effect scenario table. As shown, each production scenario has a variable time set corresponding to T=t24, and the type of production to be executed, the timing of execution of the point giving production, and the like are different. In addition, no button pressing effect is set in the non-reach effect scenario. That is, the point giving scenario described later is set so that the points given by the point giving effect are not accumulated more than 10 points. In other words, accumulating 10 points or more is limited to cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" or "missing (occurrence of reach)". By doing so, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation when 10 points or more are accumulated.

Further, similar to the above-described big win production scenario and ready-to-win production scenario, the variation time of the game round differs depending on the number of pending game rounds at the time when the game round corresponding to the production scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the larger the number of pending game rounds, the shorter the variation time of the game rounds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each effect scenario is prepared for each number of pending games. After executing step S42013, the process proceeds to step S42014.

In step S42014, a point-giving scenario is determined based on the determined production scenario. In this process, a point giving scenario is determined based on the non-reach point giving scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a non-reach point awarding scenario table. As shown, one point-giving scenario is set for each effect scenario. Actually, as shown in FIG. 163, in the non-ready-to-win point giving scenario table, one point giving scenario number is set corresponding to each production scenario. A point-giving scenario corresponding to No is read from the sound and light side ROM 93 .

FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each point awarding scenario for non-reach. As shown in the figure, in each point grant scenario, the value of grant points suitable for the production scenario to be executed in the game round to be processed is set in the execution order of the point grant performance set in the production scenario, The total number of points to be given in the preceding game round executed is set.

After executing step S42014, the process proceeds to step S42015.

In step S42015, the total given points of the preceding game times stored in the point giving scenario set as the game time to be processed is read. That is, the total given points in the point giving effect executed in the preceding game round are read. After executing step S42015, the process advances to step S42009.

In step S42009, the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S42011 to S42015 are recorded in the performance information area of the game cycle setting information recording area. That is, since the preceding reserved game round one before the game round to be processed is used as the carryover game round, and the continuous production using the game round to be processed is used as the continuous production final game round, the preceding game used as the carryover game round is executed. The point giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the time is reset to ON, the continuous effect last game time flag is set to OFF, and the carried over game time flag is set to ON again. For the total given points, the total given points in the preceding game read read in step S42015 are reset. The production scenario No. and the point-giving scenario No. are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, only for a game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, an effect pattern to be executed in that game round is created from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON.

Then, the point grant effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game time used as the continuous effect final game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to ON, and the carried over game time flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points is set to NULL. As described above, the total given point is a parameter used to determine the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. There is no need to set the total points to be given because the production scenario and the point giving scenario are set in advance. The production scenario No. sets the production scenario No. corresponding to the production scenario determined in step S42013. The point grant scenario number sets the point grant scenario number corresponding to the point grant scenario determined in step S42014.

In step S42009, after updating the effect information area of the game cycle setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 152: S41807).

FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing. In step S42101, based on the game round setting information storage area (FIG. 153), it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game round flag of the game round to be processed in this process is ON. In step S42101, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S42101: YES), the process proceeds to step S42102.

In step S42102, based on the game round setting information storage area (FIG. 153), the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set for the game round to be processed are read. At this time, the effect scenario reads the effect scenario corresponding to the number of pending games during this process (see FIG. 158(b)). After executing step S42102, the process proceeds to step S42103.

In step S42103, an effect pattern is generated based on the effect scenario set for the game round to be processed and the point giving scenario.

FIG. 166 is an image diagram of an effect pattern generated based on the effect scenario set for the game turn to be processed and the point giving scenario. The production scenario records the timing at which each point-giving production is executed and the timing at which the button-pressing production is executed. In the point giving scenario, the number of points to be given for each point giving effect set in the effect scenario is recorded. The sound and light side MPU 92 generates an effect pattern by reading the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set for the game round to be processed, and sets it as the effect pattern for the game round to be processed. As described above, in the present embodiment, only for a game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, an effect pattern to be executed in that game round is generated from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. A predetermined effect pattern is read from a previously prepared effect pattern table and set for the effect to be executed in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON. After executing step S42103, the process advances to step S42107.

On the other hand, in step S42101, when it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S42101: NO), the process proceeds to step S42104.

In step S42104, based on the game round setting information storage area (FIG. 153), it is determined whether or not the point giving effect flag of the game round to be processed in this process is ON. In step S42104, when it is determined that the point giving effect flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S42104: YES), the process proceeds to step S42105. That is, when the game round to be processed is set to the carry-over game round in the case where the continuous performance is executed, or when it is set to execute the point giving performance in one of the game rounds to be processed. , the process proceeds to step S42105.

In step S42105, an effect pattern for the game round to be processed is determined based on the variation time of the game round to be processed and the total number of points to be provided. Specifically, the production pattern corresponding to the variable time and the total number of points to be given is specified from the production pattern table for point giving production stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 93, and is set as the production pattern for the game round to be processed. .

FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect pattern table for point giving effect. As shown, in the point-giving effect effect pattern table, one effect pattern (point-giving effect effect pattern) is stored corresponding to the variation time of the game cycle and the total given point.

FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point-giving effect effect pattern recorded in the point-giving effect effect pattern table. As shown in the figure, in addition to the timing at which the point giving effect is executed, the number of points to be given in each point giving effect is also set in the effect pattern recorded in the effect pattern table for the point giving effect. In the present embodiment, in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is ON, by generating an effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game round from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, in each point giving effect Although the number of points to be given is set, in the game round in which the continuous effect final game round flag is not ON, as shown in FIG. are provided.

In this way, when the game round to be processed is set to the carry-over game round in the case where the continuous production is executed, or when the game round to be processed is set to execute the point giving effect in one round of the game round to be processed Since the same effect pattern table can be used when there is, the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, when it is set to the carry-over game round in the case where the continuous effect is executed, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round, and the point giving effect is set to be executed in one of the game rounds to be processed. However, the display control when the accumulated points are carried over and the display control when the accumulated points are not carried over are determined by setting the carryover game round flag in the point accumulation processing described later. Since it is realized by using, in the case where it is set to the carryover game round in the case where the continuous production is executed, and in the case where it is set to execute the point giving production in one of the game rounds to be processed, The same production pattern can be applied. After executing step S42105 (FIG. 165), the process advances to step S42107.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S42104 that the point giving effect flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S42104: NO), the process proceeds to step S42106. That is, when the game round to be processed is a game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (non-reachable)" and the point giving effect is not executed, the process proceeds to step S42106.

In step S42106, an effect pattern is determined based on the variation time of the game round to be processed. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the variable time is specified from the normal effect effect pattern table stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 93, and is set as the effect pattern for the game round to be processed. One performance pattern is stored in the performance pattern table for normal performance corresponding to each variation time of the game round. After executing step S42016, the process advances to step S42107.

In step S42107, the process of setting the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the pattern setting process for the liquid crystal, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R variable probability jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L, and the result is a stop result in which the combination of the ready-to-win symbols does not materialize on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S42107, the process advances to step S42108.

In step S42108, a variable display pattern setting process is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol specified in step S42107 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S42108, the process advances to step S42109.

In step S42109, the production pattern set in the processing of steps S42103, S42105 and S42106, the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped, and the variable display pattern are set as production commands, and the process proceeds to step S42110.

In step S42110, the set effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S42111.

In step S42111, a hold information update process is performed. Specifically, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S42111, the process proceeds to step S42112.

In step S42112, update processing of the game cycle setting information storage area 94d (FIG. 153) is executed. If the game round to be processed is the game round triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting hole 33, the game round setting information stored in the first starting hole game round setting information storage area (first judgment information and effect information) is shifted to the storage area of the next reserved game cycle as shown in FIG. 153(a). If the game round to be processed is the game round triggered by the entry of the ball into the second starting hole 34, the game round setting information (first determination) stored in the second starting hole game round setting information storage area information and effect information) is shifted to the storage area of the next reserved game round as shown in FIG. 153(b). After executing step S42110, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Point giving effect execution processing>
Next, the point giving effect execution processing will be described. As described above, the point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during execution of the game round. The point giving effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 151: S41703).

FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the point giving effect execution process. In step S42201, point accumulation processing is executed. The point accumulation process is a process of controlling the start of execution of the point giving effect and the display control for displaying the points given in the point giving effect as a pearl image indicating the accumulated points on the stage St. be. Details of the point accumulation process will be described later. After executing step S42201, the process advances to step S42202.

In step S42202, control processing for point charging is executed. In the point filling time control process, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated (filled), it is determined whether to execute a standby production or a timer production with the filling as a trigger. It is a process of controlling to execute the production. The details of the point filling control process will be described later. After executing step S42202, step S42203 is executed.

In step S42203, button press effect processing is executed. The button pressing effect process is a process for controlling the execution of the button pressing effect. The details of the button press effect processing will be described later. After executing step S42203, the process advances to step S42204.

In step S42204, point reset processing is executed. The point reset process is a process of determining whether accumulated points are to be reset or carried over when a game round ends, and controlling execution of resetting of accumulated points. Details of the point reset process will be described later. After executing step S42204, the process advances to step S42205.

In step S42205, stage display control processing is executed. The stage display control process is a process of controlling the color of the stage St. Details of the stage display control processing will be described later. After executing step S42205, this point giving effect execution processing is ended.

<Point Accumulation Processing>
Next, point accumulation processing will be described. The point accumulation process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 169: S42201) of the point giving effect execution process.

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing point accumulation processing. In step S42301, it is determined whether or not the point giving effect flag is ON. The point giving performance flag is a flag which turns ON when the execution of one point giving performance is started during execution of a game, and turns OFF when the point giving performance ends. In step S42301, when it is determined that the point giving effect flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the point giving effect is not started (S42301: NO), the process proceeds to step S42302.

In step S42302, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the point giving effect, based on the effect pattern set for the game turn to be processed. In step S42302, when it is determined that it is time to start the point giving effect (S42302: YES), the process proceeds to step S42303. On the other hand, in step S42302, when it is determined that it is not the time to start the point giving effect (S42302: NO), this point accumulation processing ends.

In step S42303, the number of points to be given in the starting point giving effect is read from the effect pattern set for the game round to be processed. After executing step S42303, the process proceeds to step S42304.

In step S42304, a command to start displaying a moving image for point giving effect corresponding to the number of points to be given is transmitted to the display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying on the pattern display device 41 the effect moving image of the point-giving effect corresponding to the number of points to be given. After executing step S42304, the process advances to step S42305.

In step S42305, output of sound corresponding to the point-giving effect moving image corresponding to the number of points to be given is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point-giving effect moving image is started. . After executing step S42305, the process advances to step S42306.

In step S42306, the point giving effect execution flag is turned ON. After executing step S42306, this point accumulation processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S42301, when it is determined that the point giving effect flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the point giving effect is started (S42301: YES), the process proceeds to step S42307.

In step S42307, it is determined whether or not it is time to complete giving points in the started point giving effect. Specifically, in the point giving effect, after the pearl with the given number of points displayed is dropped by the turtle character (see FIG. 125), at the timing when the pearl with the given number of points displayed reaches the stage St Determine whether or not there is In step S42307, when it is determined that the point giving effect has not been completed (S42307: NO), this point accumulation process ends. On the other hand, in step S42307, when it is determined that it is time to complete giving points in the started point giving effect (S42307: YES), the process proceeds to step S42308.

In step S42308, the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is updated according to the number of assigned points. The accumulation point counter Cpnt is a counter for counting the value of accumulation points. In step S42308, when points are given in the point giving effect, a value corresponding to the number of points given is added to the accumulated point counter Cpnt. After executing step S42308, the process advances to step S42309.

In step S42309, it is determined whether or not the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 10 or more. That is, it is determined whether points are given by the point giving effect and the accumulated points are 10 points or more. If it is determined in step S42309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is less than 10 points (S42309: NO), the process proceeds to step S42310.

In step S42310, a point accumulation moving image display start command corresponding to the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is transmitted to the display side MPU . The point accumulation moving image is a moving image in which images of pearls corresponding in number to the accumulated points are displayed on the stage St. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point accumulation moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display an effect moving image in which the number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulation point counter Cpnt is displayed on the stage St. After executing step S42310, the process advances to step S42311.

In step S42311, output of sound corresponding to the point accumulation moving image is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point accumulation moving image is started. After executing step S42311, the process proceeds to step S42312.

In step S42312, the point giving effect execution flag is turned OFF. After that, the point accumulation processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 10 points or more (S42309: YES), the process proceeds to step S42313.

In step S42313, the value of the filled counter Cw is incremented by one. The filled counter Cw is a counter that is incremented by 1 every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated. After executing step S42313, the process proceeds to step S42314.

In step S42314, 10 is subtracted from the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt. After executing step S42314, the process advances to step S42315.

In step S42315, the unprocessed flag is turned ON. The unprocessed flag indicates that, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the process of determining whether to execute the waiting effect or the timer effect for the 10 accumulated points has not yet been performed. This flag is turned ON when there is no such flag, and is turned OFF when the determination process is completed. It should be noted that the process of determining whether to execute the standby effect or the timer effect for the accumulated points corresponding to the ten points is executed in the point charging time control process to be described later. After executing step S42315, the process proceeds to step S42309 again.

That is, the processing of steps S42313 to S42315 is repeated until the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt becomes less than ten. Then, the value of the filled counter Cw is increased by the number of times steps S42313 to S42315 are executed. In other words, when 10 accumulated points are regarded as one accumulated point group, the number of accumulated point groups included in the accumulated points after points are awarded by the point giving effect is counted, and the accumulated point group is counted. is added as a filled counter Cw (S42313), and accumulated points corresponding to the number of accumulated points added to the filled counter Cw are subtracted from the accumulated point counter Cpnt (S42314).

After executing the processing of steps S42313 to S42315, the process advances to step S42309 again, and when it is determined that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S42309: NO), the process advances to step S42310. Since the processing after step S42310 has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing during point filling>
Next, the point filling control process will be described. The point charging time control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 169: S42202).

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing control processing during point filling. In step S42401, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed flag is ON. As described above, the unprocessed flag determines whether, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, a waiting effect is to be executed or a timer effect is to be executed for the 10 accumulated points. This flag is turned ON when the process has not yet been performed, and is turned OFF when the determination process is completed.

If it is determined in step S42401 that the unprocessed flag is ON (S42401: YES), the process proceeds to step S42404. The processing of steps S42404 to S42411 is a process of determining whether to execute the standby production for the accumulated points of 10 points or to execute the timer production, and to control the execution of either production. be. Therefore, when it is determined that the unprocessed flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that 10 points have been accumulated, the processing of steps S42404 to S42411 is executed to accumulate 10 points. It is determined whether to execute a standby performance or a timer performance for a point, and the execution of any one of the performances is controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S42401: NO), the process proceeds to step S42402.

In step S42402, it is determined whether or not a variation command/type command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new game round. In step S42402, if it is determined that the variation command/type command has been received, that is, if it is determined that it is time to start a new game cycle (S42402: YES), the process proceeds to step S42403.

In step S42403, it is determined whether or not the filled counter Cw=0. If it is determined in step S42403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S42403: NO), the process proceeds to step S42404. That is, if there is one or more accumulated point groups equivalent to the above-mentioned 10 accumulated points, the process proceeds to step S42404.

Here, if it is determined in step S42402 that the variation command/type command has been received (S42402: YES), and if it is determined in step S42403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S42403: NO) , the reason for proceeding to step S42404.

In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing either the waiting effect or the timer effect is the timing at which a new game round is started in addition to the timing at which 10 points or more are accumulated. At the timing when the game round in which the waiting production is executed is completed and the next new game round is started, and when the new game round is the final game round of continuous production, the waiting production is performed. Instead, a timer effect is executed. 129, the standby effect started in the game round U2, which is the carry-over game round, is switched to the timer effect 1 at the timing when the game round U3, which is the final game round of the continuous effect, is started.

Therefore, even if it is determined that the unprocessed flag is not ON in step S42401 (S42401: NO), it is determined that it is time to start a new game round by executing step S42402 (S42402: YES), and if it is determined by executing step S42403 that there is one or more accumulation point groups (accumulation points for 10 points) (S42403: NO), the process proceeds to step S42404, and steps S42404 to S42411 By executing the process of 1), it is necessary to determine whether to execute the waiting effect or the timer effect for the accumulated points corresponding to 10 points. Therefore, if it is determined in step S42402 that the variation command/type command has been received (S42402: YES), and if it is determined in step S42403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S42403: NO) , the process proceeds to step S42404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42402 that the variation command/type command has not been received (S42402: NO), and if it is determined in step S42403 that the filled counter Cw=0 (S42403: YES ), the point filling time control process ends.

In step S42404, it is determined whether or not the carried over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON. In step S42404, when it is determined that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S42404: YES), the process proceeds to step S42405.

In step S42405, a command to start displaying a moving image for effect during standby corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw is transmitted to the display side MPU102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the standby effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the standby effect moving image corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw on the symbol display device 41 . For example, when the filled counter Cw=1, one image showing the waiting effect (see FIG. 131) is displayed. In the case of the filled counter Cw=2, two images showing the waiting effect are displayed. After executing step S42405, the process advances to step S42406.

In step S42406, output of sound corresponding to the animation for effect during standby is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the animation for effect during standby is started. After executing step S42406, the process advances to step S42411.

In step S42411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. After that, the point filling time control process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S42404 that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S42404: NO), the process proceeds to step S42407.

In step S42407, the time until the button effect is executed based on the effect pattern of the game round to be processed is acquired. For example, when one button-press effect is executed in the game round to be processed, the time until the button-press effect is executed is acquired, and two button-press effects are executed in the game round to be processed. , acquires the time until the two button pressing effects are executed. After executing step S42407, the process advances to step S42408.

In step S 42408 , a command for starting moving image display for timer effect corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect is transmitted to display side MPU 102 . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the timer effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the pattern display device 41 to display a timer effect moving image corresponding to the remaining time until each button pressing effect. For example, when one button-pressing effect is executed in the game round to be processed, a moving image for timer effect is displayed in which the time until the button-pressing effect is executed is counted down. When executing two button-pressing effects in the game round to be processed, a moving image for timer effect is displayed in which the time until the first button-pressing effect is executed is counted down, and the second button is displayed. A moving image for timer effect is displayed in which the time until the pressing effect is executed is counted down (see FIG. 133(a)). After executing step S42408, the process advances to step S42409.

In step S42409, output of sound corresponding to each timer effect moving image is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the timer effect moving image is started. After executing step S42409, the process advances to step S42410.

In step S42410, the value of the filled counter Cw is reset to zero. After executing step S42410, the process advances to step S42411.

As described above, in step S42411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. After that, the point filling time control process is ended.

<Button pressing effect processing>
Next, the button pressing effect processing will be described. The button pressing effect processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 169: S42203) of the point giving effect execution processing.

FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing button pressing effect processing. In step S42501, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the button pressing effect, based on the effect pattern set for the game turn to be processed. In step S42501, when it is determined that it is time to start the button pressing effect (S42501: YES), the process proceeds to step S42502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42501 that it is not the time to start the button pressing effect (S42501: NO), this button pressing effect processing ends.

In step S42502, a command to start displaying a moving image for button press effect is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the button-pressing effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the button-pressing effect moving image (see FIG. 128(b)) on the symbol display device 41 . After executing step S42502, the process advances to step S42503.

In step S42503, output of sound corresponding to the moving image for button pressing effect is started, and control for causing various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the moving image for button pressing effect is started. After executing step S42503, this button pressing effect processing is terminated.

<Point reset processing>
Next, point reset processing will be described. The point reset processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution processing (FIG. 169: S42204).

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing point reset processing. In step S42601, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game round based on the effect pattern set for the game round to be processed. In step S42601, when it is determined that it is time to end the game cycle (S42601: YES), the process proceeds to step S42602.

In step S42602, it is determined whether or not the carry-over game round flag is ON. In step S42602, when it is determined that the carry-over game round flag is not ON (S42602: NO), the process proceeds to step S42603.

In step S42603, the accumulation point counter Cpnt is reset (Cpnt←0). That is, since the accumulated points are not carried over in the game rounds other than the carry-over game rounds in which the accumulated points are carried over, the accumulated point counter Cpnt corresponding to the accumulated points in the relevant game round is set to 0 at the end of the relevant game round. After executing step S42603, this point reset process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42601 that it is not the game round end timing (S42601: NO), and if it is determined in step S42602 that the carryover game round flag is ON (S42602: YES), the accumulated point counter This point resetting process ends without resetting Cpnt.

<Stage display control processing>
Next, stage display control processing will be described. The stage display control process is a process of controlling the color of the stage St. The stage display control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 169: S42205).

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing stage display control processing. In step S42701, it is determined whether or not the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is zero. If it is determined in step S42701 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 0 (S42701: YES), the process proceeds to step S42702.

In step S42702, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to white is transmitted to the display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to white on the pattern display device 41 . In this embodiment, when the points are not accumulated, the stage St is set to white even if the game turn to be processed is the carryover game turn or the continuous effect final game turn. After executing step S42702, this stage display control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42701 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 0 (S42701: NO), the process proceeds to step S42703.

In step S42703, it is determined whether or not the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON. In step S42703, when it is determined that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S42703: YES), the process proceeds to step S42704.

In step S42704, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow is transmitted to the display side MPU . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow on the pattern display device 41 . As described above, in this embodiment, the color of the stage St is set to yellow when points are accumulated in the carry-over game round. After executing step S42704, this stage display control process ends.

In step S42703, when it is determined that the carry-over game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S42703: NO), the process proceeds to step S42705.

In step S42705, a stage moving image display start command with the color of the stage St set to orange is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to orange on the pattern display device 41 . As described above, in this embodiment, the color of the stage St is set to orange when points are accumulated in the final game round of the continuous effect. After executing step S42705, this stage display control process ends.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S42801, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S42802.

In step S42802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S42901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S43001, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 176) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S43001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the liquid crystal pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and to generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S43002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S43001), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S43003.

In step S43003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S43002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S43004.

In step S43004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S43003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S43005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot" or "loss (reaching occurs)", the effect scenario is set so that the button-pressing effect is executed. ing. Therefore, by executing the button-pressing effect, a player who recognizes that there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a ``big win'' or a ``loss (occurrence of reach)'' when the button-pressing effect is executed. In contrast, expectations can be given.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when execution of a button-pressing effect is set in the effect scenario, by executing the point-giving effect before the button-pressing effect is executed, the accumulated points are increased to 10 points. Points are given as described above. Therefore, by executing the point granting performance, the player who recognizes that the button pressing performance will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more is given a sense of expectation each time the point granting performance is executed. can be granted.

Further, in the present embodiment, accumulated points accumulated in a game round may be reset when the game round ends, or may be carried over to the next game round without being reset. The accumulated points may be reset at the end of the relevant game cycle, so that the player desires to accumulate 10 or more accumulated points by the end of the game cycle, and the player's expectations for the point giving performance. The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, a game round is started, and a player who recognizes that points have been accumulated by executing a point giving effect is made aware of the end time of the game round when the accumulated points may be reset, It is possible to draw attention to the mode of accumulating points, that is, the mode of execution of the point-giving effect.

In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game round, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate 10 points or more in the game round being executed, if the accumulated points are carried over to the next game round, the corresponding game round Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectations for not accumulating 10 points or more.

In this embodiment, the color of the stage St indicates to the player whether or not the accumulated points are carried over. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of accumulating points or more, and to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation in game rounds in which 10 points or more are not accumulated.

In this embodiment, a button-pressing effect is employed as the process executed when 10 points or more are accumulated. At the timing when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated and the player is given a sense of accomplishment, the player is actively involved in the game by further executing a button-pressing performance to make the player pay more attention to the game, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. can be further increased.

In this embodiment, since the accumulated points are suggested to the player as an image of the pearl on the stage St, the player can always be made aware of the accumulated points.

In this embodiment, since the timer effect is executed, during the period from when the timer effect is executed until when the button pressing effect is executed, the button is continuously executed after the time indicated by the timer effect has elapsed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the pressing effect. In addition, since the remaining time until the button pressing effect is counted down by the timer effect, the suggested remaining time decreases, and as the timing for executing the button pressing effect approaches, the player's sense of expectation can be increased. can.

In addition, even if 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the waiting effect may be started and the timer effect may not be executed immediately after 10 accumulated points are accumulated. By recognizing whether or not it will be executed, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the timing at which the button-pressing effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is executed in the game round in which the button pressing effect is executed. It can give you a feeling.

In the present embodiment, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated and the timer effect is executed in the next and subsequent game rounds, the waiting effect is executed prior to the execution of the timer effect. Therefore, even in the period from the time when 10 accumulated points are accumulated until the timer performance is executed, the execution of the standby performance makes the player aware that the timer performance will be executed in the next game cycle, and the timer performance is made aware of the performance. It is possible to sustain the player's sense of expectation for.

In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute a point giving effect in a predetermined game round, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect, whether or not to carry over accumulated points, whether or not to execute a waiting effect, whether or not to execute a timer effect, Each processing content in the relevant game round, such as in which game round the button-pressing effect is to be executed, is determined based on special information of the game round to be executed after the relevant game round (hereinafter also referred to as the subsequent game round). . More specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the later game round is "big win" or "lost (reach occurrence)", continuous production is executed with the latter game round set as the final game round of continuous production. In that case, the game round is set as the carried forward game round. That is, the processing content of the game round is determined based on the special information of the later game round. By doing so, whether or not to execute the point giving effect, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect, whether or not to carry over the accumulated points, whether or not to execute the waiting effect, whether to execute the timer effect, button pressing effect, etc. , can be associated with each other over a plurality of game rounds. By providing a relationship between the processing content of each game round and the processing content of another game round, for example, when a predetermined process is executed in the game round being executed, the predetermined processing and the game round In addition to making the player guess about the relevance to progress, the player is also made to guess about the relevance between the predetermined process and the progress of the subsequent game round. In other words, no matter how the game progresses in the game round being executed, various possibilities are left for the progress of subsequent game rounds, and the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of times the button-pressing effect is executed in the continuous effect, the more developed the effect executed after each button-pressing effect (the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery suggested by the effect) is increased), the player's expectation for the game can be increased every time the player presses the performance operation button 24 in the button pressing performance. Therefore, even if the execution period of the continuous performance is long, by increasing the number of button-pressing performances according to the length of the execution period of the continuous performance, the player's concentration is suppressed and the expectation is further enhanced. can be increased.

D7. Modification of the fourth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

D7-1. Variant 1:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which points are always given when a specific effect is executed. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

Specifically, after a predetermined effect (for example, a normal reach effect), a case where a point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 is executed, and a case where a point giving effect in which the given points are 0 are executed. and set to point award scenario. In this case, a case of executing a point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 and a case of executing a point giving effect in which the given points are 0 may be set as one production scenario and a point giving scenario. You may set to another production scenario and point provision scenario. Further, in place of the configuration in which the point imparting effect in which the given point is 0 is executed after the predetermined effect, a configuration in which the point imparting effect is not executed after the predetermined effect may be adopted, or both of them may be adopted. good too.

On the other hand, the production scenario and the point granting scenario are set so that the point granting performance in which the granting points are not 0 is always executed after a specific performance (for example, super ready-to-win performance). As the specific effect, a specific ready-to-reach effect, a specific cut-in effect may be adopted, or a dedicated effect for suggesting execution of a point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 may be adopted. good.

By doing so, when a specific effect is executed in a game cycle, points are always given in the game cycle, so that the execution of the specific effect is directed to the player who desires to give the points. It is possible to give a sense of expectation for the game and to draw attention to the game. In addition, when a specific effect is executed, it is possible to impart an uplifting feeling to the player who desires the award of points, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, when the accumulated points are 9 points, and if one more point is given, the accumulated points become 10 points or more and the button-pressing effect is executed, the player responds to the execution of the specific effect. can give a strong sense of expectation to In addition, in such a situation, when a specific effect is executed and points are awarded, a strong sense of accomplishment can be imparted to the player.

D7-2. Modification 2:
In the fourth embodiment, when accumulated points in a game round being executed are carried over to the next game round, a configuration may be adopted in which points are always awarded in a game round after the current game round. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

Specifically, a point giving effect in which the given point is always not 0 is set in the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set in the final game round of the continuous effect. Also, in the point granting scenario, the number of points that does not give a total of 0 points is set for the carryover game rounds after the carryover game round to be executed first among the carryover game rounds in the continuous performance.

By doing so, it is possible to give a player who desires to receive points a sense of anticipation that the accumulated points will be carried over with the completion of the game round as a trigger. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the game even at the end of the game cycle. In addition, when accumulated points are carried over at the end of a game round, it is expected that the points will be awarded to the player who desired to be given points in the game round executed after the game round. In addition to being able to impart a sense of excitement, it is also possible to impart an uplifting feeling, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

For example, when the player is aware that if the accumulated points are carried over, the points will be awarded in the next and subsequent game rounds, and the game round is likely to end even though the accumulated points are 9 points. In some cases, if the accumulated points are carried over, the points are always given in the subsequent game cycle and the button-pressing effect is executed, so that the player is given a strong sense of expectation for the accumulated points to be carried over. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game round being executed. In addition, in such a situation, when accumulated points are carried over, it is possible to impart a strong sense of achievement to the player.

In addition, when the accumulated points in the game round being executed are carried over to the next game round, the points are not necessarily awarded in the game round after the game round being executed. A configuration may be employed in which, when a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a blue crawfish character appears) is executed, points are always awarded in game rounds after the game round. By doing so, it is possible to impart a sense of anticipation to the next game round to the player who has executed the predetermined effect in the current game round.

D7-3. Variant 3:
In the fourth embodiment, in the point giving effect executed in a series of game rounds in which the continuous effect is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of times of executing the point giving effect with the given point of 0 is limited. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a limit is set on the number of times a point giving effect with zero points is executed in the point giving effect that is executed only once. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

A specific description will be given. As described above, the number of points to be given is set in the point giving scenario for each point giving effect executed in the final game round of the continuous effect. Therefore, there is a limit to the number of points to be set to "0" for each point-giving effect. For example, as the number of points to be given, the value of "0" is limited to three times or less.

In addition, in the production pattern used for the game round in which the point giving production is executed only in the carry-over game round and the game round only once, the value of the number of points to be set for each point giving production is set to "0". Set limits.

In this way, a player who recognizes that the number of executions of the point giving performance with the given point of 0 has reached the upper limit is given a strong sense of expectation for the execution of the point giving performance. can be done. This is because when the number of executions of the point giving effect with the given point of 0 reaches the upper limit, points are always given when the point giving effect is executed after that. Therefore, even when the point giving performance with the given point of 0 is executed, the player is given a feeling of expectation that the number of executions of the point giving performance with the given point of 0 reaches the upper limit. be able to.

That is, in the case where the point giving performance is executed, if the given points are not 0, the points are given, so that the player can be given a sense of exhilaration, and when the given points are 0 Even so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation (a feeling of expectation that the number of executions of the point giving effect with the given point of 0 reaches the upper limit). As a result, the expectation of the player is increased in either case of executing the point giving performance in which the given points are not 0 or in the case of executing the point giving performance in which the given points are 0.例文帳に追加can be done.

D7-4. Variant 4:
An effect executed when accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a predetermined game round (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled effect) may be configured to be executable in a game round. Further, the non-filling effect may be executed at a predetermined rate when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points.

Furthermore, when an unfilled effect is executed, the greater the number of accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect is executed, the more the expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round will be a "jackpot". may be configured to be higher.

Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is "big win" in the game round, the setting is made so that the performance scenario in which the unfilled effect is executed is likely to be selected. For example, when the production scenario is selected by a lottery using lottery random numbers and lottery table data, the lottery table is set so that an unfilled production is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot". Set data. Then, the lottery table data is set so that the probability of the production scenario being selected is low (for example, less than 30%) except when the result of the big win lottery is "big win". Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "big win", the point grant scenario applied to the production scenario has a relatively large number of accumulated points (for example, 8 points or 9 points) immediately before the unfilled production is executed. ) to apply the point award scenario set to be Conversely, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (reaching occurs)", the point grant scenario applied to the production scenario has a relatively small amount of accumulated points immediately before the unfilled production is executed (for example, 4 points or 5 points) is applied.

By doing so, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a predetermined game cycle and the button pressing effect is not executed, when the unfilled effect is executed, the more accumulated points, the more The degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a "jackpot" in the predetermined game round is high, and a sense of expectation can be imparted to the player. That is, when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a predetermined game cycle and the button pressing effect is not executed, and when the accumulated points are relatively large, the player expects that the uncharged effect will be executed. It can give you a feeling.

Further, the unfilled effect may employ a configuration in which the content of the effect differs depending on the amount of accumulated points before the unfilled effect is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the details of the non-charging effect regardless of the amount of accumulated points, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, an effect to be executed after the unfilled effect is executed (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled development effect) may be configured to be executable in the game round. In addition, the case where the accumulated points are less than 10 points and the uncharged development effect is executed after the uncharged effect is executed is more favorable than the case where the accumulated points are 10 points or more and the button pressing effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a “jackpot” is high. For example, when the production scenario is selected by lottery using random numbers and lottery table data, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot", the unfilled production and the unfilled development production are executed. Set lottery table data. Then, when the result of the big win lottery is other than "big win", the lottery table data is set so that the probability of the production scenario being selected is low (for example, less than 5%). Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is other than "big win", the lottery table data is set so that the probability of selecting the performance scenario is lower than the probability of selecting the performance scenario including the button pressing performance. By doing so, the configuration can be realized.

By doing so, the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round is a "big win" is higher when the unfilled development effect is executed than when the button pressing effect is executed. is a high configuration. Therefore, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game cycle and the button pressing effect is not executed, if the unfilled effect is executed, then the unfilled development effect is executed for the player. It can give a strong sense of expectation about what will be done. Furthermore, when the unfilled development effect is executed, the expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round is "jackpot" is higher than when the button pressing effect is executed, so the unfilled development effect is performed. A stronger sense of expectation can be imparted to the player who recognizes that the is executed. In summary, when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more, the button-pressing effect is executed. , giving the player a sense of expectation for the execution of the unfilled performance, and further giving the player a strong sense of expectation for the execution of the unfilled development performance when the unfilled performance is executed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of the situation of the game.

D7-5. Variant 5:
In the fourth embodiment, the first executed game times displayed in the first executed game times display area J1, the first reserved game times displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1, and the second executed game times displayed in the second executed game times display area J2 are displayed. The second execution game round display and the second reserved game round display shown in the second reserved display area Ds2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as game round display) are changed in display mode. may Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing of awarding points (that is, the timing of executing the point award effect) and the timing of changing the display mode of the game cycle display have a temporal correlation.

In this case, the display mode of the game round display may indicate the possibility (expectation) of winning the big win in the big win lottery related to the game round corresponding to each game round display.

In this way, the player's expectation can be synergistically increased by executing the change of the display mode of the game cycle display and the awarding of the points in such a manner that the timing is correlated.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the point giving effect is executed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after changing the display mode of the game round display during execution of the game round. In this case, the player who recognizes that the display mode of the game cycle display has changed and the sense of anticipation has increased is made to recognize that the point giving effect has been executed within a predetermined period of time, thereby making it even stronger. It can give a sense of anticipation and a sense of exhilaration. It should be noted that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is the game round that is being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and exhilaration.

Further, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the timing for changing the display mode of the game round display and the timing for executing the point giving effect are made at the same time during execution of the game round. In this case, the player's expectation can be synergistically increased by simultaneously making the player aware of the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the execution of the point giving effect. It should be noted that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is the game round that is being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and exhilaration.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game round display is changed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after the point giving effect is executed during the execution of the game round. In this case, by making the player, whose sense of anticipation has increased after recognizing that the point giving effect has been executed, recognize that the display mode of the game cycle display has changed within a predetermined period of time, the effect becomes even stronger. It can give a sense of anticipation and a sense of exhilaration. It should be noted that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is the game round that is being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and exhilaration.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode after the change of the game cycle display and the number of points to be given by the point giving effect are correlated. By doing so, when the display mode after the change of the game cycle display is a mode that meets the expectations of the player, that is, the display suggesting that the display mode after the change of the game cycle display has a high degree of expectation. When it is in the mode, and when the number of points given by the point giving effect is relatively large, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of superiority.

Furthermore, the higher the degree of expectation suggested by the display mode after the change of the game cycle display, the more points are given by the point granting effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game cycle display. configuration may be employed. That is, when the display mode after the change of the game cycle display is the first display mode, the number of points given by the point giving effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode is set to the first display mode. If the display mode after the change in the display of the game cycle is a second display mode that suggests a higher level of expectation than the first display mode, the change in the display mode and the time When the number of points given by the point giving effect executed with correlation is the second number of points, the average value of the second number of points is larger than the average value of the first number of points. You may

By doing so, when the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round is "big win" is high, the probability of changing the display mode of the game round display to the second display mode is high, and furthermore, When the game cycle display changes to the second display mode, points are awarded with a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game cycle display more than when the game cycle display changes to the first display mode. Since there are many cases where the number of points given by the performance is large, the change of the display mode of the game cycle display and the execution of the point giving performance are executed with the timing being correlated with each other, so that the result of the jackpot lottery is improved. The expectation of the player can be synergistically increased.

It should be noted that any of the above configurations can be realized by setting the display mode of game cycle display in the effect scenario. For example, by using an effect scenario in which the display mode of the game round display changes from white to red at the same time as the execution of the point giving effect, during the execution of the game round, which is one of the configurations described above, It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing for changing the display mode of the game cycle display and the timing for executing the point giving effect are made at the same time.

In addition, for a production scenario in which the display of game rounds is set to be changed to a display mode that suggests a high degree of expectation, a point that is executed with a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the display of the game rounds. By applying the point grant scenario in which the value of the number of points granted by the grant effect is set to a large value, the degree of expectation suggested by the display mode after the change in the display of the game cycle, which is one of the configurations described above, is increased. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the higher the value, the greater the number of points given by the point giving effect executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game cycle display. Shapes, patterns, colors, characters, and the like can be adopted as the display mode of the game cycle display.

Also, the effect having a temporal correlation with the timing of changing the display mode of the game cycle display is not limited to the configuration in which the point award effect is performed. A configuration having a temporal correlation with the timing at which a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) is executed may be employed. Even in this way, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation for the result of the big winning lottery.

D7-6. Modification 6:
In the fourth embodiment, in the point giving scenario (see FIG. 160), the number of points to be given is set in advance for each point giving effect executed in the final game round of the continuous effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given in each point giving effect is set in real time during execution. For example, in the point giving scenario, the number of executions of the point giving effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect and the total number of points to be given in the final game of the continuous effect are set as information, and the final game of the continuous effect is set. A lottery may be performed based on the information after the start of the round to determine the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to guess the pattern in which the points are awarded, and the player can be made to pay attention to the game.

D7-7. Variant 7:
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect for reducing accumulated points is executed. By doing so, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's sense of anticipation for the game. Further, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which a button-pressing effect is executed when the points are increased and reached 10 points. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect to be subtracted is executed, and the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number of points or less. For example, 10 points may be accumulated at the start of a game round, points are reduced as needed by the effect of subtracting points, and when reaching 0 points, a button pressing effect may be executed.

D7-8. Modification 8:
In the above-described embodiment, the timing for executing the point-giving effect has been set in advance in the effect scenario, but other structures may be used without being limited to such a structure. A detailed description will be given below.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, when setting the effect for the final game round of the continuous effect, a configuration using an effect scenario in which the timing of executing the point giving effect is preset is adopted, but in this modification, A configuration using a production scenario in which one or a plurality of timings (hereinafter, also referred to as candidate timings) are set as candidates for the timing at which the point giving performance can be executed, that is, the timing for executing the point giving performance is adopted. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when setting the effect of the game round in which the point giving effect is executed using only one game round, and when setting the effect of the carry-over game round, the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are set in advance. A configuration using a production scenario in which one or a plurality of candidate timings is set is adopted.

FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect scenario and the point award scenario of the final game round of the continuous effect in Modification 8. FIG. FIG. 178 shows, as an example, an effect scenario and a point award scenario of the carry-over game round and the last game round of the continuous effect, which are related to the continuous effect where the number of executed games (Np)=2. In this modified example, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the effect scenario for the final continuous effect game is set based on the provisional fluctuation time of the game cycle set for the final continuous effect game. As described above, in the production scenario in this modified example, the timing for executing the button-pressing production is set, but the timing for executing the point-giving production is not set. A plurality of candidate timings are set. In the rendering scenario of FIG. 178, the candidate timings are indicated by dashed arrows. The sound and light side MPU 92 selects one or a plurality of timings (hereinafter referred to as (also called execution timing).

In addition, in the above-described fourth embodiment, as shown in the jackpot/ready-to-win point award scenario table of FIG. 159, two points are awarded for each execution game count (Np) with respect to the point award scenario corresponding to each production scenario. Scenarios are set, and after determining the number of executions of continuous performance, one of two point-giving scenarios set corresponding to the number of executions is determined by lottery. On the other hand, in this modification, one point awarding scenario is set for each number of times of execution games (Np) with respect to the point awarding scenario corresponding to each production scenario. FIG. 178 shows a point awarding scenario in which the number of times of continuous performance execution is two (that is, the number of times of execution game Np=2). As shown in the figure, in the point giving scenario in this modified example, for the final game round of the continuous effect, the total number of points to be given for each period until each button pressing effect set in the effect scenario (hereinafter referred to as Also referred to as period total given points) is set, and for carry-over game rounds, the value of the total given points, which is the total number of points to be given in the game rounds, is set in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

The sound and light side MPU 92 determines the execution timing of the point giving effect and the execution timing of the point giving effect based on the period total giving points and the plurality of candidate timings up to the period of each button pressing effect set in the effect scenario for the last game round of the continuous effect. , and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 178, 13 points are set in the point grant scenario as the total points granted during the period from the start of the final game round of the continuous performance to the button pressing performance 1 (Bt1 in the figure). Ten timings are set in the production scenario. Therefore, for example, one or more execution timings are determined from 10 candidate timings, then the number of points to be given in the point giving effect to be executed at each determined execution timing is determined, and finally, each point to be given is determined. A configuration is adopted in which the number of points to be given in the performance is determined by lottery using random numbers.

In addition, various methods can be used to determine the execution timing of each point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. For example, an arbitrary value with an upper limit of 13 points, which is the total given points for the period from the start of the final game round of the continuous effect to the button pressing effect 1, is determined by lottery, and the determined value is used for the first point giving effect. Decide on the number of points to be given in Next, an arbitrary value is determined by lottery with the upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting the number of points to be granted in the first point grant performance from 13 points of the total grant points during the period, and the determined value is used in the second point grant performance. Determine the number of points to be awarded by In this way, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect is determined in order by lottery, the determined number of points is subtracted from the total given points of 13 points during the period, and finally the remaining number of points is 0. The lottery will be held until Since the number of candidate timings from the start of the final game round of the continuous effect to the button pressing effect 1 is 10, if the remaining given points are not 0 when the 9th lottery ends, the final The number of points to be given in the tenth point giving performance is automatically determined as the remaining number of points. After the number of executions of the point giving performance and the number of points to be given in each point giving performance are determined in this way, the execution timing corresponding to the number of times of execution of the point giving performance is selected from the candidate timings of the performance scenario. determined by

As in this modified example, by determining the timing of executing the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect by lottery, even in the same production scenario, the execution timing and the giving of the point giving effect can be achieved. Since the number of points awarded does not form a pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored, to make various guesses, and to give the player a sense of anticipation. For this reason, in this modified example, only one point award scenario is set for each number of times (Np) of games executed with respect to the point award scenario corresponding to each production scenario. That is, in the present modification, a plurality of point awarding patterns are set even if only one point awarding scenario is set for each execution game number (Np) with respect to the point awarding scenario corresponding to each production scenario. Is possible.

Also, in the above description, the method for determining the timing of executing the point grant effect in the final game round of continuous effect and the number of points to be given in each point grant effect was described, but the determination method is the carryover game in the continuous effect. It can also be used in times. In the fourth embodiment, the execution timing of the point giving effect in the case of executing the point giving effect in the carryover game round and in the case of executing the point giving effect in one game time is set in advance in the effect pattern. However, as in this modified example, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, first, the production scenario is determined based on the variation time of the carry-over game round. As shown in FIG. 178, in the effect scenario prepared for the carry-over game round, a plurality of candidate timings are set in the same way as the effect scenario in the last game round of the continuous effect. Then, based on the candidate timing set in the production pattern of the game round and the total given points set in the game round, the point giving effect is executed by lottery in the same way as the last game round of continuous production. The timing to do so and the number of points to be given in each point giving performance are determined. In the above-described fourth embodiment, an effect pattern is used in which the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are set in advance. , and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined by lottery, so that a plurality of candidates can be obtained in the same manner as in the final game round of continuous effect in this modification without using the effect pattern as in the fourth embodiment. A production scenario in which timing is set can be used. By doing so, even in the production scenario in which the same production is executed, the execution timing of the point giving production and the number of points to be given do not form a pattern, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored and the game is played. It is possible to make the person make various guesses, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the performance pattern of the carryover game round corresponds to the total given points set in the point grant scenario determined based on the final game round of continuous production and the variation time in the carryover game round. A performance pattern is determined by referring to a point-giving performance pattern table. On the other hand, in this modification, regardless of the total given points, the effect pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time in the carry-over game round, and the candidate timing set for the determined effect pattern and the total given points. Then, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a point giving performance pattern table corresponding to the variation time of the carry-over game round and the total given points, and it is possible to provide the point giving performance pattern table corresponding only to the variation time. In other words, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns that are suitable only for the variable time period without considering the total points to be given. Since the timing of awarding points for each performance pattern is determined by lottery, the performance pattern and the timing of awarding points do not become a pattern, and expectations can always be imparted to the player. .

D7-9. Modification 9:
In the eighth modification, the point grant scenario records the total grant points to be granted in the game round for the period corresponding to the carry-over game round, and for the final game round of continuous production, each button pressing effect is recorded. Although the total points given during the period until the execution is recorded, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the following configuration can be adopted, for example.

179 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modification 9. FIG. In this modification, in the point giving scenario, the total given points for the period corresponding to the carryover game round are not set, and are given from the start of the carryover game round to the most recently executed button-pressing effect. The number of points to be given or the number of points to be given from the button-pressing effect to the button-pressing effect to be executed next, that is, the total points to be given during the period is set. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 179, the total given points are set during the period from the start of the carry-over game round to the execution of the button pressing effect (Bt1) of the continuous effect final game round.

The configuration of the effect scenario is the same as that of the eighth modification. That is, one or a plurality of candidate timings are set in the effect scenario of the carry-over game round and the effect scenario of the final continuous effect game round. Then, the timing to execute the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are the number of points to be given until each button pressing effect set in the point giving scenario and each button set in the effect scenario Based on the candidate timing up to the pressing effect, it is determined by lottery as in the eighth modification. By doing so, the timing of executing the point granting performance across the carryover game round and the continuous performance final game round and the number of points to be granted in each point granting performance are determined by lottery. As a result, it is possible to further suppress patterning of the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given.

D7-10. Modification 10:
The point giving effect is not limited to the mode of effect shown in the fourth embodiment (the effect in which the turtle character gives points), and various modes can be adopted.

FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the point giving effect in Modification 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 180(a), for example, an image showing a roulette wheel for determining points to be awarded may be displayed on the display surface 41a. The roulette wheel displays numbers (eg, 0 to 19) corresponding to the number of points that can be awarded. After spinning the roulette, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the rotation of the roulette is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 180(c), points corresponding to the number indicated by the arrow stopped on the roulette are given. do. By setting the point giving effect in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the points to be given during the period when the roulette wheel is spinning. In addition, since roulette includes "0 (zero)" as the number of points to be given, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency in addition to expectations.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the point-giving effect straddles a plurality of game rounds. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation of the roulette is not stopped in the game round in which the rotation of the roulette is started, and the rotation of the roulette is stopped in the game round after the game round. In this way, by executing the point giving effect (hereinafter also referred to as carry-over point giving effect) across a plurality of game rounds, the expectation and sense of urgency for the points given to the player for a long period of time across the game rounds. can be given.

For example, when a game round is suspended, if it is decided to give points in the game round, in the game round executed prior to the game round (previous game round), the carryover point giving effect is performed. A process of setting the effect scenario of the preceding game round so that the shown roulette moving image is displayed on the display surface 41a is executed. When it is decided to give points in the reserved game round (holding game round), if the preceding game round has not yet been executed, the carrying over point giving effect is executed in the preceding game round. Set the production scenario. Also, at the time when it is decided to give points in the reserved game round (holding game round), if the preceding game round to be executed prior to the reserved game round has already been executed, at that point Then, in real time, display of a roulette moving image showing a carry-over point imparting effect is started in the preceding game in progress. By displaying the moving image layer of the roulette showing the carry-over point giving effect as a layer higher than the moving image layer of the effect in the preceding game time, the point giving effect can be started from the preceding game time. In this case, for example, by displaying the roulette animation showing the carry-over point giving effect at a position close to the periphery of the display surface 41a, it is possible to suppress the player's difficulty in visually recognizing the display of the effect animation in the preceding game round. can do.

Note that, in the carry-over point imparting effect of this modification, the first effect is the effect from when the roulette wheel is rotated until the rotation of the roulette wheel stops thereafter, that is, the effect suggesting that points are awarded. The rotation of stops and the points to be given are notified, and the image of the pearl indicating the accumulated points of the stage St changes and the accumulated points after the points are given are displayed. That is, the points are given. If the effect indicating that is the second effect, the first effect is started in the preceding game time, and the second effect is executed in the game time executed after the preceding game time, Various aspects can be adopted.

The following effects can be created by adopting a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game round and the second effect is executed in the game round executed after the preceding game round. The first effect can give the player a feeling of anticipation that points may be awarded. Since the second performance is a performance indicating that points are awarded, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the points have been awarded, and a sense of superiority and satisfaction is imparted. can be done. Further, by combining the configuration of the fourth embodiment and the configuration of this modified example, the following effects can be created. Assuming that the preceding game round is the first game round and the game round executed after the preceding game round is the second game round, the first effect corresponding to the points given in the second game round is the first game round. There are cases where it starts in a game round and cases where it starts in a second game round. In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined game round, points are awarded in the predetermined game round and in game rounds executed after the predetermined game round. A sense of anticipation can be given to the player who recognizes that the first effect has been executed, by making him/her guess which case it is.

It should be noted that, as a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game round and the second effect is executed in the game round executed after the preceding game round, the first game is performed from the start to the end of the first effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the second effect is executed in the second game round, and the second effect is executed in the second game time from the start to the end. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which an effect is started in a game round and the rotating roulette is stopped in the first effect, and the second effect is executed from the start to the end in the second game round. Also, any of these configurations may be adopted at the same time. When any of the configurations is adopted, and a configuration in which the point-giving effect does not extend over the game rounds is also combined, the player who recognizes that the first effect has started in a predetermined game round will first receive a roulette wheel. To provide a sense of enjoyment and anticipation to speculate whether or not the rotation of will stop in the relevant game round. If the roulette stops in the relevant game round, whether the points corresponding to the number of awarded points indicated by the stop of the roulette will be awarded in the relevant game round, or in the game round after the relevant game round Gives a sense of enjoyment and anticipation of guessing whether it will be given. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of enjoyment and anticipation in stages.

In addition, as described in the fourth embodiment, accumulated points may or may not be reset at the end of a game round. You can draw attention to the points. Furthermore, according to this modification, when the first effect is executed, points are awarded in the predetermined game round, and points are awarded in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. , allowing the player to pay attention to transitions between game rounds. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various expectations at the time of transition of the game cycle.

Note that the first effect and the second effect in this modified example are not limited to the configuration described in this modified example, and various effects can be adopted. For example, among the point-giving effects in the fourth embodiment, the effect until a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is dropped is adopted as the first effect. Then, a turtle character drops a pearl displaying the number of points to be given, the pearl reaches the stage St, the image of the pearl changes to correspond to the accumulated points, and the point giving effect is completed. You may employ|adopt as a 2nd production|presentation.

D7-11. Modification 11:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point giving effect differs depending on the magnitude of the number of points given in the point giving effect. For example, the color of the turtle shell, which is the character displayed in the point awarding effect, is displayed in white when the points to be awarded are 0 to 2 points, and is displayed in yellow when the points to be awarded are 3 to 6 points. If the points to be awarded are 7 to 9 points, it will be displayed in blue. If the points to be awarded are 10 to 15 points, it will be displayed in green. In some cases, it may be possible to employ a configuration that displays in red. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In step S42303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 170), after reading the number of given points, the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point giving effect is determined according to the size of the read given points. Then, in step S42304, a command for starting moving image display for point giving effect is transmitted to display side MPU 102 including information on the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point giving effect. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 reads the turtle shell color information included in the point-giving effect moving image display start command, and sets the shell color according to the information. A process for displaying the effect animation of the point giving effect in which the turtle is displayed on the pattern display device 41 is executed. By doing so, the present configuration can be realized. With such a configuration, in addition to displaying the number of points displayed in the point giving effect, the color of the turtle's shell can give the player a sense of expectation and superiority.

In addition, for example, in the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration was adopted in which the number of points given by the point giving effect is displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point giving effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the number is not displayed and the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle differs according to the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. Such a configuration can also be realized by the same process as the above-described process of displaying the color of the turtle's shell in different colors according to the number of points awarded in the point award effect. That is, in step S42303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 170), after reading the number of given points, the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point giving effect is determined according to the size of the read given points. Then, in step S42304, a command for starting moving image display for point giving effect is transmitted to display side MPU 102 including information on the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point giving effect. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 reads the pearl color information included in the point-giving effect moving image display start command, and displays pearls of a color corresponding to the information. A process for displaying the effect animation for the point giving effect on the pattern display device 41 is executed. In the case of this modification, since the number of points is not displayed on the pearls dropped by the turtle character in the point giving effect, the display-side MPU 102 does not display the number of points on the pearls dropped by the turtle character. A process for displaying the moving image on the pattern display device 41 is executed. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp the points to be awarded even if the execution of the point giving performance is started, so that the player is given a sense of expectation for the number of points to be given. be able to. Furthermore, since the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle differs depending on the number of points awarded, the player is given the pleasure of guessing the number of points awarded based on the color of the pearls. can be done.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which characters displayed in the point giving effect are different depending on the number of points awarded in the point giving effect. For example, the character to be displayed in the point giving effect is set to a turtle character when the points to be given are 0 to 2 points, and is set to an octopus character when the points to be given are 3 to 6 points. , when the points to be given are 7 to 9 points, it is set to a crab character, and when the points to be given are 10 to 15 points, it is set to a shark character, and the points to be given are 16 to 20 points. In the case of , a configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set. This configuration is also realized by the same processing as the configuration described above, that is, the configuration that changes the color of the turtle's shell and the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle according to the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect. be able to.

In addition, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, the aspect of the point giving effect to be executed is changed to the point giving effect to be executed in other cases. You may employ|adopt the structure which sets to a different aspect. For example, in a state where the accumulated points are 3 points, if a point giving effect in which 9 points are awarded is executed, the accumulated points exceed 10 points. A configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set in place of the turtle character displayed during the point giving effect. In addition, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) by executing the point granting effect and giving points, and the number of points granted by the point granting effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode different from the point giving effect to be executed in other cases is set. For example, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving points, and when the number of points given by the point giving effect is 8 points or more A configuration is adopted in which the character to be displayed in the point awarding effect is set to a crab character instead of a turtle character, and the crab character is set to drop a larger pearl than usual. good too.

Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 170), it is determined whether the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect executed before the button pressing effect based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, and the point giving effect is performed. It can be realized by determining whether or not the points given in the effect are equal to or greater than a predetermined size (for example, 8 points). That is, in the point accumulation process (FIG. 170), the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect executed before the button pressing effect based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, and in the point giving effect When it is determined that the points to be given are equal to or larger than a predetermined size (e.g., 8 points), display of a moving image for effecting point giving is started, in which the crab character is set to drop a larger pearl than usual. A command is sent to the display side MPU 102 . When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-giving effect animation display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying, on the pattern display device 41, a point-giving effect effect animation in which a crab character drops a larger pearl than usual. do. By doing so, the present configuration can be realized. By adopting such a configuration, when the crab character executes the point awarding effect in which the crab character drops larger pearls than in the normal case, it is more appealing to the player than when the normal point awarding effect is executed. It can give a sense of expectation and a sense of superiority. In addition, during the game, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the point giving effect will not be executed, and furthermore, it is possible to see if the point giving effect in which the crab character drops larger pearls than usual is executed. Such expectations can be given to the player.

In addition, the following configurations may be adopted. For example, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point granting effect and giving the points, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the button pressing effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point giving effect executed before the super ready-to-win effect is executed is set to a different aspect from the aspect of the point giving effect executed in other cases. . More specifically, in a state where the accumulated points are 5 points, a point giving effect of giving 9 points is executed, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points), and the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. When the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the button pressing effect executed by , the character displayed in the point giving effect executed before the super ready-to-win effect is executed is displayed during the normal point giving effect. A configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set instead of the turtle character. It should be noted that the normal ready-to-win effect is an effect to be executed when the symbol is in the ready-to-win state. The super ready-to-win effect is an effect to suggest to the player that the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. In addition, the special reach production described later has a higher expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery than when only the normal reach production is executed or when the super reach production is executed in addition to the normal reach production. This is an effect that suggests to the player.

In addition, the present configuration is executed after the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and after the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. Not only when the production is a super reach production, but when the production executed after the button pressing production executed by the accumulated points exceeding the threshold is a special reach production, or when the jackpot lottery is won It may be applied to the case of an immediate notification effect (hereinafter also referred to as a one-shot notification effect). That is, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and after the button pressing effect that is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value, the special ready-to-win effect is executed. or when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the mode of the point giving effect to be executed is set to a mode different from the mode of the point giving effect to be executed in other cases. do.

Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 170), it is determined whether the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect to be executed before the button pressing effect based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. Then, when it is determined that the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect to be executed before the button pressing effect, after the button pressing effect after the point giving effect is executed based on the effect scenario Determining the type of production, if it is determined that the production is a specific type of production such as normal reach production, super reach production, special reach production, and one-shot announcement production, depending on the type of each production Then, a point giving effect in a special mode different from the other cases is set as the point giving effect before the button pressing effect. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

In this way, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by executing the point giving effect and giving the points, and the effect is executed after the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. Depending on the type, points are given by adopting a configuration in which the aspect of the point giving effect executed before the effect is executed is different from the point giving effect executed in other cases. In addition to giving the player a feeling of expectation, it is possible to give the player another feeling of expectation and the enjoyment of speculating about the subsequent game. In addition, since there are a plurality of types of point-giving effects, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the point-giving effects that are executed each time.

That is, in this modification, the effect scenario set for the game round is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to the game round. Then, based on the performance scenario determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the ready-to-win random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS corresponding to the game round, a point granting scenario is determined, and the performance scenario and the points are determined. Based on the granting scenario, the mode of the point granting effect to be executed in the game round is determined.

D7-12. Variant 12:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of awarding points suggests the subsequent progress of the game. For example, the mode of awarding points, in which 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are awarded by each point awarding effect three times, suggests that the special ready-to-win effect will be executed after the button pressing effect that is executed thereafter. 7 points, 7 points, 7 points are given by each point giving effect three times. A configuration that suggests that Such a configuration can be realized, for example, as follows.

For point granting scenarios linked to production scenarios in which specific effects such as special reach effects and one-shot announcement effects are set to be executed, each point granting effect set in the point granting scenario This configuration can be realized by presetting the number of points to be given to 3, 4, and 1, for example. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of points given in each point giving effect. In addition, the player can make various guesses about the progress of the game after that based on the manner in which the points are awarded, and the player can be given a greater sense of expectation.

In addition, the content suggested by the mode of giving points is not limited to the performance to be executed after that. The result of the lottery may be suggested, or the carryover of accumulated points may be suggested.

D7-13. Variant 13:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which information relating to the mode of giving points that have already been given (hereinafter also referred to as point giving mode information) is displayed. For example, as the point awarding mode information, a history of points awarded may be displayed. Then, the history of the manner in which the points have been awarded may be displayed using colors, characters, or the like.

181 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modification 13. FIG. FIG. 181 shows how the image of the pearl indicating the points accumulated in the stage St in the point giving effect displays the history of how the points were given.

FIG. 181(a) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the first (first) point giving effect is executed and 4 points are given from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. rice field. In this modification, the accumulated points are displayed as a white pearl image on the stage St by executing the first point giving effect from the state where accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started.

FIG. 181(b) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the second point award effect is executed and 2 points are awarded from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. In this modified example, the accumulated points are displayed as a yellow pearl image on the stage St by executing the second point giving effect from the state where accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started.

FIG. 181(c) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the third point giving effect is executed and 3 points are given from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the third point-giving effect after the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started are displayed as yellow-green pearl images on the stage St. .

In this way, the points are awarded by distinguishing the image showing the points accumulated by executing each point giving effect by the color for each point giving effect that triggered the giving of the accumulated points. A history of aspects can be displayed. For example, when the player visually recognizes the image of the pearl indicating the accumulated points shown in the stage St of FIG. can recognize that

This modification is realized by, for example, providing the sound and light side RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 with a grant history storage area, which is a storage area for storing the history of points awarded by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. be able to.

182 and 183 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the grant history area. As shown in FIG. 182(a), in the granting history storage area, the number of points granted (the number of executions of the point granting effect) from the state in which accumulated points are reset and a new game cycle is started, and the number of times of granting The color (display food) for displaying the image of the pearl corresponding to the points accumulated by the point giving effect corresponding to is set in advance, and each time the point giving effect is actually executed, the storage area of the given points (hereinafter also referred to as a given point storage area) stores a value indicating the given points. In the case of the granting history area shown in FIG. 182(a), 4 points are given by the first point giving effect, 2 points are given by the second point giving effect, and 3 points are given by the third point giving effect. known to have been granted.

FIG. 182(b) shows the awarding history storage area when the point awarding effect is further executed once from the state of FIG. 182(a) and 6 points are awarded. In the grant history storage area of this modified example, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, a given point is stored in a storage area to the right of the given point storage area. Since 9 points have already been accumulated in the 1st to 3rd times of giving, as shown in FIG. The 1st to 3rd points are stored in the same column storage area, and the remaining 5 points are stored in the storage area on the right column. Then, when displaying the image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on the stage St, the display color corresponding to the given points in the rightmost column of the given point storage area and the number of times given is read, and the image of the pearl is displayed on the stage St. display. In this way, by dividing the storage area into units of 10 points, a timer effect (or waiting effect) is executed by accumulating 10 points, the accumulated points are subtracted by 10 points, and the stage St is newly entered. Even when the points are accumulated, the accumulated points are displayed on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points given actually executed from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game cycle is started. Images of pearls can be displayed. Also, the grant history storage area shown in this modified example can cope with a case where 10 or more points are granted in one point grant effect.

FIG. 183 shows the awarding history storage area when the point awarding effect is executed once from the state of FIG. 182(b) and 17 points are awarded. In this case, 5 points out of 17 points are stored in the second column of the given point storage area, resulting in 10 points in the second column storage area. Of the remaining 12 points, 10 points are stored in the third column of the given point storage area, and the remaining two points are stored in the fourth column of the given point storage area. In this way, even when 10 points or more are given in one point giving performance, the rightmost column of the given point storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of times of giving can be read. can display the image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points given actually executed from the state in which the accumulated points are reset and a new game cycle is started. .

Also, the timing for storing, reading, and resetting the points given to the given history storage area will be described. If the points to be awarded are stored in the grant history storage area, for example, in step S42302 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 170), when the number of granted points to be executed is read, the points to be granted are stored in the grant history storage area. A configuration of storing in an area can be adopted. At this time, as described above, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the given point is stored in the storage area to the right of the given point storage area.

Regarding reading of the given history storage area, for example, in step S42310 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 170), the given points in the rightmost column of the given point storage area in the given history storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of times given are displayed. A point accumulation moving image display start command for displaying a pearl image (point accumulation moving image) of a display color corresponding to the number of times points are given is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the point accumulation moving image display start command displays an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points given.

As for resetting the grant history storage area, for example, after resetting the accumulated point counter Cpnt in step S42603 of the point reset process (FIG. 173), the grant history storage area is reset. By executing such processing, the configuration in the modification can be realized.

By adopting the configuration of the modification, it is possible for the player to check the history of the manner in which points are given, such as the number of executions of the point giving performance and the number of points given in one point giving performance. In addition, the player who has confirmed the history of the manner in which the points have been awarded can be made to guess the number of point-giving effects to be executed thereafter, the number of points to be awarded, and the like, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation for the game. . In addition, as in Modification 12, when a configuration is adopted in which points are awarded to suggest the subsequent progress of the game, the history of the manner in which points are awarded can be sent to the player as in this Modification. By making it possible for the player to confirm, it is possible to further prompt the player to speculate about the subsequent progress of the game, to make the player pay attention to the game, and to give the player a sense of expectation. can do.

In this modified example, the history of points awarded is displayed in the color of the pearl image indicating accumulated points. Alternatively, they may be distinguished by a mark, pattern, or the like. Also, the points given for each point giving effect may be directly displayed in numbers. For example, when 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are given by each point giving effect three times, "3.4.1" is displayed on the display surface 41a. In this way, if the player can recognize the history of points awarded, various display modes can be employed.

Further, as the point awarding mode information, information may be displayed in which only the number of points awarded at the time of execution of the most recently executed point awarding effect is identifiable. For example, among the pearl images displayed as accumulated points on the stage St, only the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given at the time of execution of the most recently executed point giving effect is the same as the other pearl images. Configurations with different colors, patterns, shapes, and the like may be employed.

D7-14. Variant 14:
As the point giving effect in the fourth embodiment, a mode in which points are given a plurality of times in one point giving effect may be adopted. For example, among the point giving effects, the effect from when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a to when a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is displayed is called a point giving suggesting effect. When a turtle character drops a pearl displayed with , the pearl reaches the stage St, changes to a pearl image corresponding to the accumulated points, and the effect until the point giving effect ends is called a point giving effect. In the above, after the point giving suggestion performance is executed once, the point giving execution performance is executed twice.

FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point giving effect in the fourteenth modification. As illustrated, FIG. 184(a) shows a state in which the point giving suggestion effect is being executed among the point giving effects. In other words, it shows how an effect is executed from the appearance of a turtle character from the right end of the display screen 41a to the start of dropping pearls indicating the number of points to be awarded. FIG. 184(b) shows how the first point-giving execution effect is executed after the point-giving suggestion effect is executed. As illustrated, the point award execution effect is an effect indicating that 4 points are awarded. FIG. 184(c) shows how the second point-giving effect is executed after the first point-giving effect is executed. As illustrated, the point award execution effect is an effect indicating that 5 points are awarded. FIG. 184(d) shows a state in which the second point giving effect is finished and the point giving effect is finished.

By adopting such a configuration, the player who recognizes the point giving suggestion performance has an expectation of how many times the point giving execution performance will be executed after that, that is, how many times the points are given. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as whether. In addition, when the point granting suggestion performance is executed once and then the point granting execution performance is executed a plurality of times, it is recognized that the point granting suggestion performance has been executed, and then the point granting execution performance is executed once. Unexpectedness and surprise can be imparted to the player who has guessed that the game will be played.

In addition, in FIG. 184, an example in which two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect has been described. Integer) number of point award execution effects may be executed. Also, the value of N may be different for each point giving effect.

The point-giving effect in this modified example can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case where two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect, in the point giving scenario applied in the fourth embodiment, the points corresponding to one point giving effect are calculated. Divide the value (e.g. 9 points) into two (e.g. 4 points and 5 points), give one point (4 points) of the divided point value in the first point award execution effect, and execute the second point award This can be realized by giving the other point (5 points) of the point value divided by the effect. According to such a process, it is sufficient to obtain one point value set in the point giving scenario corresponding to the point giving suggestion effect to be executed. That is, even when the point giving execution effect is executed N times for one point giving suggesting effect, it is sufficient to acquire one point value set in the point giving scenario. Then, the acquired point value is divided by N and used for each point giving execution effect. Therefore, even if the point giving execution effect is executed N times in one point giving effect, the process from the point giving scenario to the process of acquiring the value of the points to be given is the same regardless of the value of N. Therefore, the processing can be simplified. Also, the value of points to be set in the point giving scenario in advance can be set regardless of the value of N, and the setting of the number of points to the point giving scenario can be simplified.

In addition, the point giving effect in this modified example can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case of executing two point-giving execution effects for one point-giving suggestion effect, in the point-giving scenario applied in the fourth embodiment, points corresponding to two point-giving effects are calculated. get the value. For example, if the number of points set for the first point-giving effect in the point-giving scenario is 4 points, and the number of points set for the second point-giving effect in the point-giving scenario is 5 points, , acquires the point value corresponding to the two point giving effects. Then, after executing one point giving suggestion effect, the first point giving execution effect is executed using 4 points set as the first point giving effect in the point giving scenario, and then , the second point giving execution performance is executed using 5 points, which is the number of points set as the second point giving performance in the point giving scenario. The above configuration can also be realized in this way. According to such a process, in the case where the point giving execution effect is executed N times for one point giving suggestion effect, the number of times (N times) of the point giving execution effect to be executed is determined from the point giving scenario. Since it is only necessary to acquire the corresponding number (N) of point values, there is no need to execute the process of dividing the point value corresponding to one point awarding effect by N, as in the above configuration. Processing can be simplified.

D7-15. Modification 15:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the mode of the point giving effect is a mode suggesting that the accumulated points already accumulated in the stage St will be added. For example, taking the point giving effect shown in FIG. 126 as an example, 4 points have already been accumulated in the stage St as accumulated points, and furthermore, when the point giving effect is executed, the pearl dropped by the turtle A point-giving effect is executed in a manner indicating that the number of points displayed (3 points) is added to the number of points already accumulated (4 points). As described above, the mode of the point awarding effect in the fourth embodiment is a mode suggesting that the points to be newly given are added to the accumulation points already accumulated in the stage St (hereinafter also referred to as the addition mode). called). Then, when the point giving effect of the addition mode is executed, the number of points obtained by adding the points given by the point giving effect of the addition mode to the points displayed as the accumulated points becomes the new accumulated points. displayed as However, the aspect of the point giving effect is not limited to the addition aspect, and other aspects may be employed. For example, it is possible to employ a point giving effect in a manner suggesting that the accumulated points already accumulated in the stage St will be multiplied (hereinafter also referred to as a multiplication manner).

FIG. 185 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the multiplication mode point giving effect. 185(a), after a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the turtle character drops a pearl as shown in FIG. 185(b). However, "x2" indicating multiplication processing is displayed on the pearl. Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), when the pearl displayed as "x2" reaches the stage St, the accumulated points corresponding to the "x2" displayed in the pearl have already reached the stage St. The number of points obtained by multiplying the displayed 4 points by 2 (8 points) is displayed as new accumulated points.

Such a configuration can be realized as follows. For example, in a point award scenario, the point value corresponding to the multiplication mode point award effect is set. At this time, let X be the value of accumulated points up to the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, let A be the value to be multiplied by the accumulated points in the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, and set the point giving effect of the multiplication mode to the point giving scenario. When the point value corresponding to is Y, the value of Y calculated as Y=XA-X is set in the point grant scenario as the point value corresponding to the point grant effect in the multiplication mode. In addition, the production scenario is set so that a multiplication mode point awarding production is executed. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player who recognizes the point giving effect of the multiplication mode a sense of expectation for the value to be multiplied by the accumulated points, and to play the game against the point giving effect of the multiplication mode. can draw people's attention. In addition, when the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is executed, the player who has recognized that the character of the turtle has appeared on the display surface 41a and guesses that the point giving effect of the adding mode will be executed. , can give surprise and greatly improve the sense of anticipation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the multiplication aspect of the point giving effect is controlled (changed) in accordance with the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the accumulated points. For example, depending on the value multiplied by the accumulated points, the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle differs, or the character that appears differs (for example, an octopus appears instead of the turtle). good too. By doing so, it is possible to further attract the player's attention to the multiplication mode point giving effect.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the multiplication mode point imparting effect is executed, the number of points larger than the number of points obtained by multiplying the accumulated points already accumulated is displayed as a new accumulated point. For example, when 4 points have already been accumulated, a multiplication mode point giving effect is executed. In the multiplication aspect of the point giving effect, the pearl dropped by the turtle is displayed with “×2” indicating multiplication processing. In this case, normally, 8 points (4 points x 2) are displayed as new accumulation points when "x2" indicating the multiplication process reaches stage St. , the number of accumulated points greater than 8 points (for example, 10 points) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes new accumulation points greater than the accumulated points obtained by multiplying the already accumulated accumulation points.

In addition, as the mode of the point granting effect, there are cases where the point granting effect of the addition mode is executed and the point granting effect of the multiplication mode is executed, so that the point granting effect of the addition mode is provided to the player. It is possible to impart a sense of urgency and tension as to whether the effect is to be executed or the multiplication mode point awarding effect is to be executed.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the point giving performance of the addition mode is executed, the number of points larger than the number of points added as a result of adding to the accumulated points already accumulated is displayed as new accumulated points. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes the new accumulated points that are greater than the accumulated points added to the already accumulated accumulated points.

Note that the mode of the point giving effect is not limited to the addition mode or the multiplication mode, and a configuration for executing point giving effects in various calculation modes, such as the point giving effect in the subtraction mode or the division mode, may be employed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the executed point-giving effect, and to add an intonation to the player's expectation.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point giving effect changes during execution of one point giving effect. For example, during the execution of one point giving effect, the addition mode is changed to the multiplication mode, or the multiplication mode is changed to the addition mode, or the point giving effect is changed during the execution of one point giving effect. A configuration in which the mode changes multiple times may be employed. In this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the calculation method executed by the point giving effect has changed, and to give the player unexpectedness. In addition, depending on the calculation method executed by the point giving effect, the value of the new accumulated points after the calculation processing may be greatly different, so by changing the mode of the point giving effect, In addition to imparting a sense of urgency, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectations.

FIG. 186 shows, as an example, an image of a pearl dropped by a turtle (hereinafter also simply referred to as an image of a pearl) when the mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point giving effect. is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of . FIG. 186(a) shows an image of a pearl when the mode of the point giving effect is the addition mode. The image of the pearl indicates that the point-giving effect is the addition mode by displaying "+", which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition. FIG. 186(b) shows an image of pearls in the case where the mode of the point giving effect is the multiplication mode. In the image of the pearl, an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication is displayed, suggesting that the point awarding effect is in the multiplication mode.

For example, if the mode is changed from the addition mode to the multiplication mode during execution of the point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 186(a) is rotated. 186(b) to change it to "x" which is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 186(b). Conversely, if the mode is changed from the multiplication mode to the addition mode during execution of the point-giving effect, rotate the arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 186(b). 186(a) to change it to "+" which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition displayed in the image of the pearl in FIG. 186(a). By adopting such a configuration, the processing of rotating symbols of almost the same line drawing, such as "+" and "x", can greatly change their meanings. In addition to imparting a great sense of urgency, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectations.

In addition, when the mode is changed multiple times between the addition mode and the multiplication mode during the execution of one point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol displayed in the image of the falling pearl dropped by the turtle is used. The "+" (or "x") may be continuously rotated. Then, the rotation of the arithmetic symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the pearl reaches the stage St). Corresponding points (images of pearls indicating accumulation points) are displayed on the stage St. By doing so, it is possible to further attract the player's attention to the point giving effect.

D7-16. Variant 16:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, as the display mode of accumulated points, one point is displayed as an image of one pearl on the stage St, but is not limited to such a configuration, and accumulated points It can be displayed in various ways.

FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a display mode of accumulated points. The display mode of the accumulated points shown in this modified example is a display mode in which the shape (image) becomes meaningful only when the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold value (10 points). Figures 187(a) to 187(j) show how points are accumulated from 1 point to 10 points. In the case of the display mode shown in FIG. 187, it is a display mode in which one pearl image is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to give the player an aspiration to form a single meaningful image from partial images, and to increase the accumulated points to 10 points. A sense of accomplishment can be imparted to the player when one meaningful image is formed by reaching the target.

In addition, in FIG. 187, the boundary line (outline) of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is displayed, but the pearl corresponding to one point is not limited to such a display mode. A display mode in which the boundary line of the partial image is not displayed may be adopted.

FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram for explaining, as a display mode of accumulated points, a display mode in which a boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed. As shown in the figure, since the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of accumulated points. Therefore, the accumulated points may reach the threshold without the player being aware of it, and the player can be surprised.

In addition, as a display mode of the accumulated points, as described with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188, a mode in which a meaningful shape (image) is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold value (10 points). However, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which a shape (image) that becomes meaningful only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold value (10 points) is changed at a predetermined timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 187, when the accumulated points reach 10 points, the accumulated points are displayed in a display mode in which one pearl image is displayed for the first time. image changes to a shell image showing a timer effect or a shell image showing a waiting effect, and the accumulation points on the stage St shift to 0 points again, and accumulation points are newly accumulated from the state of 0 points. In this case, as shown in FIG. 189, as a display mode of the new accumulated points, the accumulated points are displayed in a display form in which an image of one whale is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the accumulation points of the stage St. In addition, the player imagines what kind of shape (image) will be formed each time the shape (image) having one meaning is changed only after the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold value (10 points). It is possible to give the player a new sense of expectation.

Further, for example, a configuration may be employed in which the shape (image) formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation points differs depending on the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round. For example, when the one-shot announcement effect is executed after the accumulated points reach the threshold and the button-pressing effect is executed, the image of one sunfish is displayed as the shape that is formed in the process of accumulating the accumulated points. adopt. Then, for example, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value and the special reach effect is executed after the button-pressing effect is executed, the image of one shark is displayed as the shape formed in the process of accumulating the accumulated points. adopt. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the accumulated points of the stage St, and to increase the player's sense of expectation in the process of forming the image showing the accumulated points. can be made

D7-17. Variant 17:
In the fourth embodiment, a countable amount called "points" is used as a grant target, but an uncountable amount may be used. For example, instead of the point giving effect, a effect in which liquid is added to the container displayed on the stage St may be employed.

D7-18. Variant 18:
In the fourth embodiment, the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is set to 10 points. Any positive value can be adopted as the threshold of .

D7-19. Variant 19:
In the fourth embodiment, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value, a configuration is adopted in which a button-pressing effect is executed. . For example, when accumulated points reach a threshold value, a predetermined ready-to-win effect may be executed instead of the button-pressing effect. That is, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the game is always ready, so every time a point is awarded, the player can be given a sense of expectation for reach. Moreover, even if the accumulated points reach the threshold value, a configuration may be adopted in which specific processing such as a button pressing effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency by making the player guess whether or not a specific process such as a button pressing effect will be executed after the accumulated points reach the threshold value.

D7-20. Modification 20:
In the fourth embodiment, whether or not the accumulated points are carried over is indicated by changing the color of the stage St, but other methods such as lighting, blinking, or changing the shape of the stage St may be used. In addition, a dedicated lamp or the like may be provided to indicate whether or not accumulated points are to be carried over.

D7-21. Variant 21:
In the fourth embodiment, the effect operation button 24 is operated in accordance with the timing at which the player presses the effect operation button 24 during the period assigned to the button pressing effect (hereinafter also referred to as the button pressing effect period). It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the effect executed during the period from after the button pressing effect period to the end of the button pressing effect period is changed. The time from the start timing of the button-pressing effect period to the timing when the player presses the effect operation button 24 is measured, and the button-pressing effect period starts after the effect operation button 24 is operated according to the measured value. It can be realized by reading and executing the image data for the effect from the effect storage area in which the effect corresponding to the period until the end is recorded. By doing so, it is possible to suppress patterning of the button-pressing effect and make the player pay attention to the button-pressing effect.

D7-22. Variant 22:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the stage St displayed on the display surface 41a is the only position (image) that has the function of accumulating awarded points. A configuration in which a plurality of (images) are displayed (at a plurality of locations) on the display surface 41a may be employed.

FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in FIG. 190(a), a first stage St1, a second stage St2, and a third stage St3 are displayed on the display surface 41a as positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points. It is In this modified example, each stage St has different performance functions. Specifically, the effects that are executed when the number of points accumulated in each stage St reaches the threshold are different.

When the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or waiting effect) and a button pressing effect are executed. Then, after the button pressing effect is executed, the one-shot notification effect is executed. As described above, the one-shot notification effect is a effect of immediately notifying that the player has won the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the player recognizes that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold, the button-pressing effect is executed when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold. It is possible to recognize that the jackpot lottery is won in the game round.

When the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or waiting effect) and a button pressing effect are executed. After the button pressing effect is executed, the special ready-to-win effect is executed. As described above, in the special reach effect, the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the normal reach effect is executed and when the super reach effect is executed in addition to the normal reach effect. This is an effect that suggests to the player that it is expensive. Therefore, when the player recognizes that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold, the button-pressing effect is executed when the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reach the threshold. It can be recognized that the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round is high.

When the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or waiting effect) and a button pressing effect are executed. Then, after the button pressing effect is executed, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. The normal ready-to-win effect is an effect to suggest to the player that the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when the normal ready-to-win effect is not executed. Therefore, when the player recognizes that the points accumulated in the third stage St3 have reached the threshold, the button-pressing effect is executed when the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reach the threshold. It can be recognized that at least the normal ready-to-win effect is executed in the game round.

From such characteristics of each stage St, the player desires that the most points be accumulated in the first stage St1 among the three stages St, and then the third stage St. It is desired that points be accumulated in the second stage St2, and finally points are desired to be accumulated in the third stage St3.

In the point giving effect shown in FIG. 190, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the pearl image showing the number of points to be given is not displayed. The turtle character progresses from the right end to the left end on the display surface 41a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 190(b), when the turtle character passes over the target stage St for accumulating the points to be given in the point giving effect, the number of points to be given is displayed. Drop pearls. As shown in FIG. 190(c), the dropped pearl reaches the target stage St for accumulating the points to be given in the point giving effect, and then changes to an image of the pearl showing the accumulated points, and the stage St are accumulated as accumulation points.

Such an effect is a target stage St (first stage St1 , second stage St2, and third stage St3) can be realized by setting in advance.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the position (stage St) where the points are accumulated in the point giving effect, and to provide the player with new enjoyment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 190(a), in which stage St points are accumulated for the player who recognizes that the turtle character has appeared on the display surface 41a in the point giving effect. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as whether or not the player will be awarded, and to give a feeling of expectation about the number of points to be given. After that, as shown in FIG. 190(b), the player who recognizes that the turtle character is passing through the upper part of each stage St has an expectation about the position (stage St) where points are accumulated. A sense of urgency and urgency can be imparted, and a sense of expectation for the number of points awarded can also be imparted. Further, for example, when a pearl indicating the number of points given by a turtle character is dropped on the stage St (for example, the first stage St1) that the player expects, , can give a sense of superiority.

In addition, in the point giving effect described in FIG. 190, as shown in FIG. 190(a), when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the number of points to be given is displayed. Although the image is not displayed, for example, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, an image of a pearl showing the number of points to be given is displayed. A configuration that

FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the point giving effect in which the number of points to be given is displayed at the start. As shown in FIG. 191(a), in this point giving effect, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be given is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191(b), when the turtle character passes through the upper part of each stage St, the pearls displaying the number of points to be given are displayed in three stages St (first stage St1, 2nd stage St2 or 3rd stage St3). Then, as shown in FIG. 191(c), after the pearl whose number of points to be given is displayed reaches the target stage St for accumulating the points to be given in the point giving effect, an image of the pearl showing the accumulated points is displayed. , and accumulated as accumulation points in the stage St.

In such an effect, unlike the point giving effect shown in FIG. 190, the number of points to be given is displayed at the start of the point giving effect. In this case, the player who recognizes the number of given points does not necessarily want the points to be accumulated in the first stage St1. In some cases (eg, the second stage St2 shown in FIG. 191), it may be desired that points be accumulated in that stage St. In this way, in the case of the point giving effect shown in FIG. 191, the player determines which stage St has the highest degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery when the accumulated points reach the threshold value. In addition to the consideration, the current point accumulation status of each stage St is also considered to determine the stage St in which points are desired to be accumulated. Therefore, by executing such a point giving effect, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of grasping the state of the game from various angles.

In addition, in addition to the effect of awarding points (point-giving effect), a configuration may be adopted in which another effect related to points is executed. For example, an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a threshold reaching effect) may be executed in which the accumulated points in any one of the three stages St reach the threshold when executed.

FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a threshold reaching effect. As shown in FIG. 192(a), when the threshold reaching effect is started, the crab character holds the pearl and passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a. After that, as shown in FIG. 192(b), the crab character drops the pearl on the target stage St where the accumulated points reach the threshold. When the dropped pearl reaches the stage St, as shown in FIG. 192(c), the accumulated points of the stage St for which the accumulated points are to reach the threshold change to indicate that they have reached the threshold. After that, as shown in FIG. 192(d), a timer effect corresponding to the stage St that has reached the threshold is executed. In the example of FIG. 192, the accumulated points of the first stage St1 reach the threshold, and a timer effect image (a whale character and a timer image) prepared for the first stage St1 is displayed. As described above, when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, the timer effect (or waiting effect) and the button pressing effect are executed after that, and the button pressing effect is executed. After that, the one-shot announcement effect is executed.

Such a configuration can be realized by setting the threshold reaching effect in advance in the effect scenario and the point giving scenario that are set for the game times in which the threshold reaching effect is executed.

By adopting such a configuration, in addition to the point-giving effect, it is possible to give the player a new sense of expectation regarding the points. Specifically, the result of the game greatly differs depending on which stage St is the target stage St for which the executed threshold reaching effect reaches the threshold. be able to.

In the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3, effects that are executed when the points accumulated in the stage St reach a threshold value are respectively a one-shot announcement effect and a special reach effect. Although the effect and the normal reach effect have been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which other effects and processes are executed may be adopted.

Further, the points accumulated in each of the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3 may or may not be carried over across game rounds, as in the fourth embodiment. may be adopted. As in the fourth embodiment, since accumulated points may not be carried over, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation so that the accumulated points on each stage will reach the threshold value by the time the game is over. Also, the player who recognizes that accumulation of points has started in at least one of the stages is made conscious of the timing of the end of the game cycle and pays attention to the manner in which accumulated points are awarded on each stage. be able to. In addition, even if the accumulated points on at least one of the accumulated points on the three stages in the game round do not reach the threshold value due to the fact that the accumulated points may be carried over across the game rounds. , the accumulated points are maintained until the next game round without being reset at the end of the game round, and the player can be given an expectation that the threshold value may be reached in the next game round. That is, it is possible to give such a sense of expectation to each of the points accumulated on the three stages, and to increase the chances of giving the player a sense of expectation more than in the fourth embodiment. can be increased.

D7-23. Modification 23:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a carryover change effect) may be executed to make it appear that the game time being executed is changed from a game time that is not a carryover game time to a carryover game time.

FIG. 193 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of carryover change effect. In the game round shown in FIG. 193(a), the color of the stage St is orange, which indicates that the game round is not the carryover game round. When the carryover change effect is executed in the game cycle, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears from the right end of the display screen 41a. Incidentally, when a yellow stage is displayed at the position of the stage St on the display surface 41a, it indicates that the relevant game round is a carry-over game round.

After the octopus character on the yellow stage appears, the yellow stage drops at the timing when the yellow stage and the octopus character pass above the stage St, as shown in FIG. 193(b). After that, as shown in FIG. 193(c), the image of the yellow stage is superimposed on the orange stage St, and then the color of the stage St changes from orange to yellow. That is, by executing the carryover change effect, the color of the stage St changes from the color (orange) indicating that it is not a carryover game round to the color (yellow) indicating that it is a carryover game round.

By adopting such a configuration, the player who recognizes the execution of the carry-over change effect is made to recognize that the game round is changed from a game round that is not a carry-over game round to a carry-over game round, and as a result, the player will be surprised and will be surprised next time. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game round.

In addition, in this modification, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears in the same manner as in the carryover change effect, and the yellow stage and the octopus character pass through the upper part of the stage St, but the yellow stage does not fall. Instead, a dummy effect disguised as a carried over change effect is also executed in which the yellow stage and the octopus character simply pass from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a. By executing a dummy effect disguised as a carry-over change effect, the player who recognizes the appearance of the octopus character on the yellow stage guesses whether the image of the yellow stage will fall or not. By doing so, it is possible to guess whether the game round will change to the carry-over game round or not, and to impart a sense of urgency. Then, when the yellow stage falls, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and a feeling of anticipation.

In such a configuration, the carryover change effect is set in advance in the effect scenario and the point grant scenario set for the game round in which the carryover change effect is executed, and the carryover change effect is set in the stage display control process (FIG. 174). When the effect is executed, it can be realized by executing a process of setting the color of the stage St when accumulation of points is started to the color (orange) of the stage St when it is not a carry-over game turn. can.

D7-24. Variant 24:
In the fourth embodiment, an effect of extending the remaining time indicated by the timer effect (hereinafter also referred to as a timer time extension effect) may be executed.

FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer time extension effect. In the game round shown in FIG. 194(a), the timer effect is being executed. When the timer time extension effect is started, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a fish character with a timer (hereinafter also referred to as an extension timer) appears from the right end of the display screen 41a. Then, as shown in FIG. 194(b), when the fish character hanging the extension timer passes above the image of the shellfish and the timer showing the timer effect, the extension timer hanging by the fish character falls. and superimposed on the image of the timer showing the timer effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 194(c), the remaining time until the button pressing effect indicated by the image of the timer representing the timer effect is extended.

That is, in terms of processing, the remaining time until the button-press effect before being extended is a time set as a dummy remaining time (hereinafter also referred to as a dummy remaining time). Then, when the remaining time of the dummy remaining time approaches 0 (zero) or after it reaches 0 (zero), a timer time extension effect is executed, and the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer effect is changed to the true remaining time. update on time. By doing so, the configuration of this modified example can be realized.

In such a timer time extension effect, the remaining time indicated by the dummy remaining time indicates the intermediate part of the effect being executed or the time to the end part of the effect being executed, so that the dummy remaining time It is possible to give credibility to the dummy remaining time, and to make the player trust the dummy remaining time. By executing the timer time extension performance and updating the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer performance from the dummy remaining time to the true remaining time, it is possible to impart unexpectedness and expectation to the player.

In addition, in the present modification, a fish character with an extension timer hanging thereon appears in the same manner as in the timer time extension effect, and the fish character with the extension timer hanging thereupon passes through the upper part of the stage St. A dummy effect disguised as a timer time extension effect is also executed in which the fish character with the timer for extension is not dropped but passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a. By executing a dummy performance masquerading as a timer time extension performance, a timer performance is performed by making a player who recognizes the appearance of a fish character hanging a timer guess whether the timer will fall or not. It is possible to guess whether the remaining time indicated by is extended or not, and to give a sense of urgency. Then, when the extension timer falls, the player can be given a feeling of superiority and expectation.

D7-25. Variant 25:
In the fourth embodiment, the number of times the accumulated points are continuously carried over the game rounds, that is, the greater the number of times the carry-over game rounds are continuously executed, the greater the number of times the accumulated points are continuously carried over, in the jackpot lottery of the last game round of continuous effect executed thereafter. You may perform the control which raises the degree of expectation that the big hit is won. As a specific example, compared with the case where the continuous effect final game time is executed after one carryover game time is executed, the continuous effect final game time is obtained after three carryover game times are continuously executed. is executed, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the last game of the continuous presentation is higher.

For example, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game times by the previous determination process, the larger the number of game times (preceding game times) to be executed before the reserved game times, the more the previous To perform control so that a continuous performance is easily executed from a game round to be executed after it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a jackpot lottery of a reserved game round by determination processing to the reserved game round. Specifically, in the effect information setting process, when the number of executed games Np is determined by lottery based on the resettable number of games Fn, the case where the reserved game number (the game number to be processed) is a jackpot. , lottery table data for determining the number of executed games Np is set so that the probability that the number of executed games Np increases is higher than in the case of failure (occurrence of reach). In this manner, control is performed so that the greater the number of times the carry-over game round is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the last continuous performance game round to be executed thereafter. can do. By adopting such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be increased as the carry-over game rounds are continuously executed.

Further, the larger the number of times the accumulated points continuously carry over the game rounds while maintaining the state where the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value (10 points), the more the jackpot lottery is won in the jackpot lottery of the final game round of the continuous production executed thereafter. You may perform the control which raises the degree of expectation which has been carried out. For example, when it is determined by the previous determination process that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game, and in the effect information setting process, when determining the effect scenario and the point giving scenario corresponding to the number of times Np of the executed games. In addition, in the case where the reserved game round (game round to be processed) is a big hit, compared to the case of loss (reach occurrence), the accumulated points are the threshold from the carryover game round to the final game round of continuous production. Lottery table data for determining the performance scenario and the point granting scenario are set so that the probability of being determined to the performance scenario and the point granting scenario that do not reach (10 points) is high. By doing so, the greater the number of times the accumulated points are continuously carried over to the game rounds while maintaining the state where the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value (10 points), the greater the number of times the game rounds are carried over in succession. It is possible to execute control to increase the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the lottery.

By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who recognizes that the accumulated points are continuously carried over the game rounds while maintaining the state where the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value (10 points). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from declining when the accumulated points have not reached the threshold value.

D7-26. Variant 26:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is changed. Specifically, even though 10 points have been accumulated, the timer effect or the standby effect is not executed, the accumulated points exceed 10 points, and a predetermined number of points exceeding 10 points is accumulated. A configuration in which a timer effect, a standby effect, or a button-pressing effect is executed at the specified timing (for example, 15 points), and a timer effect, a standby effect, or a button-pressing effect, regardless of the state in which 10 accumulated points have not been accumulated. may be employed. Further, in this case, it is preferable to employ a configuration in which the player is not notified that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect has been changed. Such a configuration prepares in advance a production scenario and a point grant scenario specialized for processing with changed thresholds, and only when executing the processing, the value set as the threshold in various processing (usually "10") can be set to the changed threshold value (for example, "15") and executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute the button-pressing effect at a timing that the player does not expect, and as a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which such a process in which the threshold value is changed is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game round in which the process is executed is a big hit or a loss (reach occurrence). By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes that the threshold has been changed, that is, a player who recognizes that the accumulated points exceed 10 points, and a player who recognizes that the accumulated points exceed 10 points. Expectation can be imparted to the player who recognizes that the button-pressing performance has been executed in spite of the fact that it is not accumulated.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is notified by an effect that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is changed. For example, an effect suggesting that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button pressing effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points is executed. By doing so, the player can expect that the button-pressing effect will be executed more easily than when the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button-pressing effect is 10 points. Also, in a state in which a predetermined number of points have already been accumulated (for example, a state in which 6 points have been accumulated), the accumulated point threshold for executing the button-pressing effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points. When the effect suggesting that is executed, the number of points required for executing the button pressing effect has already been accumulated. In this case, the timer effect is executed prior to the button pressing effect immediately after the effect suggesting that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button pressing effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and anticipation. Such a configuration can be realized by presetting the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

D7-27. Variant 27:
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first executed game times displayed in the first executed game times display area J1, the first reserved game times displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1, and the second executed game times displayed in the second executed game times display area J2 In each game round, in association with each display (hereinafter collectively referred to as game round display) of the second execution game round display shown and the second pending game round display shown in the second pending display area Ds2 A configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given is displayed. More specifically, when points are awarded in a predetermined game round, the game round is displayed in the vicinity of the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round (for example, directly above the game round display) in the game round. A display corresponding to the number of points to be given (a display suggesting points to be given) may be displayed. In this case, the suggested point display may be displayed in response to all of the displayed game cycle displays, or the suggested point display may be displayed in response to some of the displayed game cycle displays. You may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player who recognizes the indication of the suggested points to be given, with various guesses and expectations for the game round corresponding to the indicated indication of the suggested points to be given. For example, when a suggested point display is displayed in association with a display of game rounds corresponding to the pending game round, various speculations about the pending game round are made to the player who recognizes the suggested point indication. and expectations can be given. In addition, for example, points are given in the range of less than 10 points in the game round that is being executed, and corresponding to the indication of the given points that is displayed corresponding to the game round display corresponding to the game round to be executed next. If the sum of the number of points to be given and the number of points currently given is 10 points or more, the display indicating the points to be given corresponding to the display of the game round corresponding to the game round to be executed next is not displayed. Compared with the case, it is possible to make the player yearn to carry over the points to the next game even more, and if the points are carried over, the player is given a great sense of expectation. can do.

In addition, after displaying the display suggesting the given points corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. You may employ|adopt the structure which attaches and displays. For example, immediately above the game round display corresponding to the pending game round (n=1) for the first start port, the image of the number displayed as the indication of the given point is displayed at a predetermined timing, the pending game round ( n=2) is moved directly above the display of the game cycle corresponding to n=2).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to overrule the player's guess based on the indication of the given points displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round. can be given a sense of surprise.

In such a configuration, after displaying the imparted point suggestion display corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. This can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point giving scenario so as to be displayed in association with the times display.

In addition, a configuration is adopted in which, after displaying a suggesting display of points to be given corresponding to a different number of points than the number of points to be given in a predetermined game round, a suggesting display of points to be given corresponding to the number of points to be given in a predetermined game round is displayed. You may For example, immediately above the display of the game round corresponding to the reserved game round (n=1) for the first starting port, the image of the number "5" displayed as the indication of the points to be awarded is displayed at a predetermined timing. Change to the image of "7".

It is possible to overturn the guess of the player based on the indication of the points to be given corresponding to the number of points to be given in a predetermined game cycle and to give the player a sense of surprise, Intonation can be imparted to the player's expectations.

Such a configuration can also be realized by presetting the production scenario and the point-giving scenario.

E. Fifth embodiment:
E1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 195 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") as one embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button for stopping shooting of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

196 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

197 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are both open upward, and arranged vertically so that the first starting port 33 is higher than the second starting port 34 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 uses the win as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize, and flows down to the second It is possible to win a prize to the starting port 34. - 特許庁In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big win lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can win and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 becomes possible. Similarly, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the jackpot lottery triggered by winning the first starting port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a changes the display mode until the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second result display unit 37b, when the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 34 is performed, changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory open lottery triggered by the winning of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. In addition, the special figure unit 37 and the general figure unit 38 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery process and lottery results.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is satisfied. 36b is a game that continues the open state. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated and a new game cycle is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first result display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the winning to the first start port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 198(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 198(a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1-8. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 198(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 198(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the first result display section 37a or the second result is displayed for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 198(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

E2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, the main control board 61, as various detection sensors 67a to 67e, is provided in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. connected to multiple detection sensors. The main side MPU 62 of the main control board 61 performs winning determination as to whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA during the game has entered each winning hole. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings to the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on winnings to the through gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45. display control.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the winning to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the winning to the first starting opening 33 is specified. When it does, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when the winning to the second start port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. A prize command is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls. A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 200 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types, such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for a ready-to-win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the pattern display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is composed of a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 sequentially, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning is chronologically stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. stored in

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start hole 33 or the second start hole . Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 as a success/failure table.

FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 201(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, and FIG. 201(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. As shown in FIG. 201(a), under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 201(b), under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to during the jackpot lottery, there are 20 random numbers for winning the jackpot. In addition, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types such as variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole . More specifically, it is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball has won the first start port 33, and the reservation information is stored at the timing when the game ball has won the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot types in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for big winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b. can be set to continue until there are 10.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a variable probability lottery mode for performing a jackpot lottery using a high probability win/fail table as a win/fail table, and a win/fail table as a win/fail table. A normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a success/failure table for low probability can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 201, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability success/failure table, the jackpot is won more than when the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode The number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role opening win is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time may be set longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start port 33 is higher than the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start port 34 is more likely than the first start port 33. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player should play the game while not reducing the number of balls he has. can be done.

In addition, the configuration in which the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning an open role is increased. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed, the high frequency support mode has a low frequency It may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured after one electric accessary item opening lottery is performed and the next electric accessary item opening lottery is performed is reduced. Shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the probability of winning, by applying any one or any combination of conditions, even if the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode is increased good.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In this embodiment, when a big win is won in a big win lottery, a plurality of types of big wins are sorted using a big win type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 202(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 202(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 202(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first start port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 202(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second start port 34 are the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot. is set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. corresponds to That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpots based on winnings to the second starting port 34 are variable probability jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot win based on the winning to the first start port 33 and the second jackpot win. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the starting port 34.例文帳に追加

In this way, the mode of distributing the jackpot types between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 has a clear difference in the advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 out of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 . In addition, when the win/loss lottery results in a failure, there is no transition to the open/close execution mode, and the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode do not change.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port . Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the timing when the game ball wins the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is checked against a table to determine whether or not to generate reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 decides whether to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 198(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming the reach line. , in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 performs a variable display of the symbol to achieve a reach. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. FIG. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 249, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be open, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be closed.

In addition, a combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra corresponds to the reservation information related to the first start port 33, and the second reservation area Rb A combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in corresponds to the hold information related to the second start port 34, and these hold information are the special information in the present invention Equivalent to.

E3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 203 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. In this description, the features of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, case a1 and case a2, as examples.

FIG. 203(a) shows, as a case a1, that the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round (hereinafter also simply referred to as "jackpot"), and the jackpot is won in the second game round executed after the first game round. It shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is lost. In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot lottery in the game round immediately before the first game round is lost and there is no other game round between the first game round and the second game round. give an explanation. It should be noted that another game round may exist between the first game round and the second game round. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. The notice effect is a effect that is executed immediately before or after the start of the pattern variation, and is a effect for suggesting to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. The ready-to-win effect is an effect to be executed after the ready-to-win effect, and is an effect to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result notification effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The special game state is a state in which a privilege is given to the player. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the opening/closing door 36b are repeated. During the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown in FIG. 203(a), in this description, the period for executing the ending effect is called the ending period.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. The suggestive effect is a effect that suggests reproducing the effect that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect is a effect suggesting reproduction of the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game cycle. Also, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the special game state.

FIG. 204 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect, which will be described later. FIG. 204(a) shows a suggested effect, FIG. 204(b) shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 204(c) shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in FIG. 204(a) is an effect suggesting that the female character reproduces the effect executed in the first game cycle, that is, the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect in the ending period, and then, as the special game state reproduction effect, the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round. run it again. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game round are reproduced. Only part of the announcement production may be reproduced. For example, when executing a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a result notification effect as special game state reproduction effects, the reach effect and the result notification effect are reproduced preferentially, and some or all of the notice effect is omitted and executed. good too. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are executed at a high frequency in normal times, and preferentially reproducing reach effects and result notification effects (jackpot notifications) that are executed only during reach or jackpot, players can A special game state reproduction performance can be executed by narrowing down to performances that are strongly desired to be reproduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game round. The content of the design is partly different.

After executing the special game state reproduction performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end performance. FIG. 204(b) shows an example of a specific end effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in this embodiment is a effect that suggests that the female character has finished the special game state reproduction effect.

The description returns to FIG. 203(a). The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state when the specific ending effect ends. After that, the second game round is executed. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect (also called a normal notice effect) for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notification effect (losing notice). Case a1 has been described above.

Next, case a2 will be described. FIG. 203(b) shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 as case a2 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. .

As shown in FIG. 203(b), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a big win is announced as a result announcement effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the opening/closing door 36b are repeated. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect during the ending period.

In the case of case a2, unlike case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. The content of the suggestive effect is the same as the content of the suggestive effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestive performance ends. That is, the ending period for case a2 is shorter than the ending period for case a1.

The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestive performance ends. After that, the second game round is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game round reproduction effect as an effect in the second game round. The game round reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the game round. In this embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced as the game round reproduction effect. That is, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect (jackpot notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, this result notification effect (jackpot notification) has a function as a part of the game round reproduction effect, and has a function as a result notification for the big win lottery in the second game round. Then, the second game round ends when the game round reproduction effect ends.

It should be noted that, although it will be described later using a flowchart, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. That is, in case a2, since both the first game round and the second game round are game rounds in which the jackpot lottery was won, the fluctuation time of the first game round and the fluctuation of the second game round time is the same. Therefore, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round can be executed as the game round reproduction effect in the second game round.

In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the fluctuation times of the game rounds in which the jackpot lottery is won are all constant. , the variation time of the game round at the time of the big win may be different each time. In this case, if the second game round is longer than the first game round, at the start of the second game round, the time difference between the fluctuation times of the second game round and the first game round (Surplus time) may be used to perform a suggestion effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of kinds of suggestive performances for each length of the surplus time, the suggestive performance can be executed at the start of the second game round even if the surplus time is different each time. The suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is executed after the suggestive effect executed in the special game state after the first game cycle. Therefore, the content of the suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is set such that the suggestive effect executed in the special game state and the suggestive effect executed using the surplus time have continuity. good too. By doing so, even when the second game round is longer than the first game round, the game round reproduction effect can be executed in the second game round without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, when the second game round is shorter than the first game round, only a part of the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round is executed as the game repeat reproduction effect. may be For example, when a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a result notification effect are executed as a game replay effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect are preferentially reproduced, and part or all of the notice effect is omitted to reproduce the game replay effect. may be executed. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are executed at a high frequency in normal times, and preferentially reproducing reach effects and result notification effects (jackpot notifications) that are executed only during reach or jackpot, players can It is possible to preferentially reproduce an effect that is strongly desired to be reproduced.

As shown in FIG. 203(b), after the second game cycle ends, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance in the opening performance of the special game state. The specific start performance is executed as the opening performance of the subsequent special game state when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is won and the game round reproduction performance is executed in the second game round.

FIG. 204(c) shows an example of a specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is a effect suggesting that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, and is in a special game state (open/close) due to the big win in the second game round. This is an effect suggesting that the execution mode) will start. The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect after executing the specific start effect. In this case, the effect and ending effect (normal ending effect) executed in the opening/closing execution mode are effects executed at the time of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect suggesting the end of the special game state.

The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using two cases, case a1 and case a2. As explained in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are executed in the first game cycle. The effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect, and the player also recognizes that the effect is for reproducing the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestive effect have already been executed in terms of effect. However, in reality, it is a game round reproduction effect executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. When the player has previously viewed the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player executes the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle of the case a2 in the first game cycle in the same manner as in the case a1. As well as recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the performance shown in the previous game, it is difficult to anticipate winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the announcement effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the second game round, when the player is informed that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round by the result notification effect. At that time, for the first time, the notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the time. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game cycle reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a sense of surprise, and at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is reproduced. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player for the performance to be performed. In addition, by making the second game round in case a2 develop unexpectedly by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, although the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, it suggests reproducing the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game round. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to anticipate winning the big winning lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

Also, as in case a2, if the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game round, the result notification effect in the second game round is executed. Even if the game is played, there is a possibility that the player will not notice that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, but after the second game round ends, the specific start effect is executed in the special game state. , the player can be made to recognize that he/she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game cycle at the time when the specific start performance is executed.

E4. Overview of processing in the waiting state:
Next, the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the standby state will be described. The standby state is a state after a game round has ended and neither the special game state nor the next game round has started.

FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in the standby state. FIG. 205 shows a state diagram showing whether or not the pattern displayed on the main display unit 45 is fluctuating, the display mode of the pattern display device 41, and the sound output from the sound emission control device 90. The content and the audio output level (volume) are shown. FIG. 205 also shows the ON/OFF state of the standby state flag in the main controller 60, the ON/OFF state of the transition condition fulfillment flag in the main controller 60, and the cue determination flag in the sound emission control device 90. ON and OFF states are shown. These flags are described later.

A number such as "01" described in the display mode of the pattern display device 41 indicates the temporal position of the moving image data, and "01" indicates the leading position of the moving image data. The temporal position of the video data is the position of the video data corresponding to each time of the video displayed with the time length. This is the position of the corresponding video data. For example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used as the temporal position of the moving image data. In this embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed up to the temporal position of "30", it returns to the temporal position of "01" and is displayed from the beginning.

A number such as "01" written in the output content of the voice indicates the temporal position of the music data, and "01" indicates the head position of the music data. The temporal position of music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music output with the time length, and the time position of the music when the music data is grasped by the time length. This is the position of the corresponding music data. For example, the time code recorded in the music data can be used as the temporal position of the music data. In this embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output to the temporal position of "30", it returns to the temporal position of "01" and is output from the beginning.

The display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display the background moving image in the game round in which the display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed, and also causes the pattern display device 41 to display the background moving image in the standby state after the game round ends. continue to be displayed. The background moving image is a moving image that is displayed on the background side of the pattern in the symbol display device 41. When images and moving images such as the above-described advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect are displayed, these images and moving images are displayed on the background side. Is displayed. The background video in this embodiment is a video in which characters are dancing to the rhythm of background music, which will be described later.

The sound emission control device 90 outputs background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the above-described background moving image from the speaker 46 during the game cycle, and also outputs the background music from the speaker 46 in the standby state after the game cycle ends. continue to be output. In this embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output in response to the background moving image, and has the same temporal length as the background moving image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, by outputting the background music at the temporal position "10" at the timing when the background moving image at the temporal position "10" is displayed, the background moving image and the rhythm of the background music are displayed. A performance corresponding to one-to-one correspondence is realized.

As shown in FIG. 205, main controller 60 sets the standby state flag to ON when the game round ends, that is, when the fluctuation of the symbols on main display portion 45 stops (time t1). Then, when 15 seconds have passed without starting the special game state or the next game round after the change of the symbols on the main display unit 45 has stopped and the main display unit 60 has entered the standby state, That is, when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON, it is determined that the transition condition has been established, and the transition condition establishment flag is turned ON and the standby state flag is turned OFF (time t2).

The transition condition is to shift the output mode of the sound from a mode in which the background music is output at a volume preset by the player to a mode in which the volume of the background music is zero (silent state), and the pattern display device 41 This is a condition for shifting the display mode from the mode in which the background moving image is displayed to the mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed. That is, when the transition condition is established, the sound output mode shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted, and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is interrupted. . The demonstration video (demonstration video) is a video different from the background video, and is a video for conveying the attractiveness of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demonstration video, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the game method of the pachinko machine 10 is explained, and characters and stories appearing in the pachinko machine 10 are explained. In addition, a demonstration video may be called an attract video.

As shown in FIG. 205, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the sound emission control device 90 changes the sound output mode to output background music at a volume preset by the player (time t2). from time t2 to time t3), through a mode in which the volume of the background music is reduced (fade out) with the lapse of time while the output of the background music is continued (mode from time t2 to time t3), and the volume of the background music is zero. Transition to a certain mode (mode after time t3). In this embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 continues outputting the background music until 5 seconds have passed since the volume of the background music became zero, and after the volume of the background music becomes zero, At the timing (time t4) after 5 seconds have passed, the output of the background music is stopped. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 205, the volume preset by the game ball is the maximum volume.

When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 shifts the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the mode in which the demonstration video is displayed 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero (time t4). The sound emission control device 90 turns on the cue determination flag at the timing when the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4). The cue determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to start displaying and outputting the background moving image and the background music from their temporal start position "01" when a return condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. be. In the present embodiment, the cue determination flag shifts the audio output mode to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted, and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is a mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is interrupted. is turned ON when it shifts to .

After the transition condition is established, the main controller 60 sets the return condition when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the game round (variation display of symbols) is started. When it is determined that the condition is established, the transition condition establishment flag is turned OFF. The return condition is to return the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and to return the sound output mode to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player. It is a condition.

As shown in FIG. 205, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video has started (time t5), the cue determination flag is ON, the display control device 100 and the sound emission control device 90 execute cue processing of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 100 causes the background moving image to start being displayed from the temporal head position "01" of the background moving image. The sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, the background music is output from the temporal start position "01". to start. Therefore, both the background moving image and the background music are started to be displayed and output from the temporal head position.

Note that the sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and cue processing for background music and background moving images (processing for starting output of music or display of moving images from the temporal head position “01”). ), the type of background music for which cue processing is to be executed is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 selects multiple types of background videos corresponding to multiple types of background music. A configuration may be adopted in which a background moving image that can be displayed and that corresponds to the selected background music is selected and cue processing is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to appreciate a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

FIG. 206 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started. As shown in FIG. 206, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4), the cue determination flag is OFF, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 returns the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. to run. In this way, the display mode and sound output mode of the pattern display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition was established.

FIG. 207 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is met while the volume of the background music is being reduced. As shown in FIG. 207, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), the cue determination flag is OFF. Continuing the mode of displaying the moving image, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. In this way, the display mode and sound output mode of the pattern display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition was established.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 205), , the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 100 causes the background moving image to start displaying from a predetermined temporal position. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from a predetermined temporal position of the background music Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position of starting the display of the background moving image varies according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background video is started changes according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration video is started, the demo video is displayed. A configuration in which the display of the background video is started from the temporal position of the background video that was displayed at the timing immediately before shifting to the display mode, or when the mode in which the demo video is displayed is returned to the mode in which the background video is displayed. , a configuration in which the temporal position of the background video at which display is started is determined based on the elapsed time after shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, and after the mode of displaying the background video is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration video. , the playback of the background video is continued as internal processing, and when returning from the mode of displaying the demonstration video to the mode of displaying the background video, the background video that is being played continues as internal processing, etc. is mentioned.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demonstration moving image is started and the return condition is satisfied (FIG. 205), the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to the player compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the background moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started at a position in the middle of the background moving image and output is started at the position in the middle of the background music, the player may, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background moving image and the background music are viewed from a position in the middle of time, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can appreciate the background moving image and the background music from the beginning position in terms of time. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that the background moving image and the background music can all be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started, if the return condition is met (FIG. 206), the display control The device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the state before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 207), the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image. , the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the game round is completed, it is determined that the transition condition has been established when 15 seconds have elapsed without starting any of the special game state and the next game round. It is possible to reduce the volume of the background music with the lapse of time in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game cycle is started in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition is established, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the sound is reproduced. Since the output mode returns to the mode of outputting the background music with the sound volume preset by the player, the sense of anticipation for the start of the game round can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

E5. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, a specific example of control for executing the processing shown in case a1 and case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game round, the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S50101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step S50102.

In step S50102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S50103.

In step S50103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S50104.

In step S50104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the start opening in step S50104 will be described later. After executing step S50104, the process advances to step S50105.

In step S50105, winning processing for through accompanying winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through prize winning process in step S50105 will be described later. After executing step S50105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. The prize winning process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 208: S50104).

FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the winning process for the starting gate. In step S50201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 33 (start winning). In step S50201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S50201: YES), the process proceeds to step S50202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S50203.

In step S50203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first starting hole 33. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S50204.

In step S50204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S50209.

In step S50201, if it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start hole 33 (S50201: NO), the process proceeds to step S50205, whether or not the game ball has won the second start hole 34 2 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34 .

In step S50205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S50205: YES), the process proceeds to step S50206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S50207. On the other hand, in step S50205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S50205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S50207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step S50208.

In step S50208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S50209.

In step S50209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S50204 or step S50208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S50209, when the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (S50209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S50209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (S50209: YES), the process proceeds to step S50210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S50211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S50212.

In step S50212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S50103 (FIG. 208) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S50210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S50103 (FIG. 208) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S50210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S50103 (Fig. 208) It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, ie, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S50210. After executing step S50212, the process advances to step S50213.

In step S50213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the reservation information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the big winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S50213, the process proceeds to step S50214.

In step S50214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The pending command indicates that the winning to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred and the result of the determination by the destination determination process based on the pending information acquired based on the winning, and the pending information is the main control device. This is a command to confirm with the sub-side control device before becoming an object of the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 212 : step S50503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S50214, the main MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the start opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 209: S50213) of the winning process for the starting gate.

FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is based on the reservation information, and the judgment results such as the judgment of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the judgment of the type of the jackpot, and the judgment of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S50301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by winning the starting opening in the starting opening winning process (FIG. 209) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S50302, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the winning prior to this winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot occurring before the jackpot lottery due to this winning. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the big win lottery due to the winning of this time is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S50302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round, (S50302: YES), the process proceeds to step S50303, and the success/failure table storage area The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S50305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S50302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round (S50302: NO), the process proceeds to step S50304, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S50305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S50305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S50305: YES), the process proceeds to step S50306, and is stored in the storage area due to the winning to the start gate this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S50307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the winning in the first start port 33, the distribution table for the first start port is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S50307, the process proceeds to step S50308.

In step S50308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S50308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S50308: YES), the process proceeds to step S50309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S50308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the probability variable jackpot (S50308: NO), the process proceeds to step S50310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S50305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S50305: NO), the process proceeds to step S50311, and is stored in the storage area by winning the starting port this time. read out the value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S50312 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S50313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S50313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S50313: YES), the process proceeds to step S50314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50313 that the reach generation is not supported (S50313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 208: S50105).

FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing winning processing for through. In step S50401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S50401, if it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S50401: YES), the process proceeds to step S50402, whether or not the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step S50401, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the through gate 35 (S50401: NO), this through winning process is terminated.

In step S50402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S50402: YES), the process proceeds to step S50403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S50404.

In step S50404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S50103 (FIG. 208) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the win-win process for through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S50402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (S50402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Winning processing for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S50501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S50502.

In step S50502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S50503.

In step S50503, output data such as the start-up command set in step S50502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S50503, the process advances to step S50504.

In step S50504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S50505.

In step S50505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S50506. In step S50506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S50506, the process advances to step S50507.

In step S50507, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S50508.

In step S50508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S50509.

In step S50509, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. Details of the standby process will be described later. Thereafter, the process advances to step S50510.

In step S50510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S50503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S50510, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S50510: NO), in steps S50511 and S50512, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S50511, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S50512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S50510: YES), the process returns to step S50503, and each process from step S50503 to step S50508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S50503 to step S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 212: S50506).

FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S50601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

In step S50601, when it is determined that any one of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag is ON (S50601: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and the processing after step S50602 is performed. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of them. That is, when the game is in the special game state, no game round is started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is won. On the other hand, in step S50601, when it determines that it is not in a special game state (S50601:NO), it progresses to step S50602.

In step S50602, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

In step S50602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S50602: NO), the process proceeds to the game cycle start processing of steps S50603 to S50605. In step S50603, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S50603, when it is determined that the total number of pending CRN is "0" (S50603: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S50603: NO), the process proceeds to step S50604.

In step S50604, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S50605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S50606.

At step S50606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S50606, the process advances to step S50607.

In step S50607, the standby state flag is turned OFF. The standby state flag is turned ON at the timing when the standby state is started, and is turned OFF at the timing when the variable display of the main display section 45 is started or when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state was started. be. After executing step S50607, the process advances to step S50608.

In step S50608, it is determined whether or not the transition condition fulfillment flag is ON. The transition condition establishment flag is a flag that is turned ON when 15 seconds have passed since the start of the standby state, and turned OFF when the variable display of the main display section 45 is started. If it is determined in step S50608 that the transition condition establishment flag is ON (S50608: YES), the process proceeds to step S50609. On the other hand, in step S50608, when it is determined that the transition condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S50608: NO), the game round control process is terminated.

In step S50609, a return condition establishment command is set. The return condition establishment command is a command for making each sub-side control device recognize that the variable display of the main display section 45 has started, that is, that the return condition has been established. After executing step S50609, the process advances to step S50610.

In step S50610, the transition condition fulfillment flag is turned off. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S50602 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S50602: YES), the process for progressing game rounds in steps S50611 to S50615 is executed.

In step S50611, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S50611, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 216) described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S50611 that the variable time has not elapsed (S50611: NO), the process advances to step S50612 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S50612, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S50611 that the variation time has elapsed (S50611: YES), the process advances to step S50613 to execute variation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the result display section so that the form of the symbol to be displayed on the result display section determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 215) described later is displayed on the result display section related to the current game round. display control. After executing step S50613, the process advances to step S50614.

In step S50614, the standby state flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S50615 to execute standby state time setting processing. Specifically, the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter area 64d is set to "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec). The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the standby state, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S50615, the game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 213: S50604).

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S50701, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for data setting processing is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 200). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 200) than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 200). When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S50701, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S50701, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S50701: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S50702 to S50707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S50701, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S50701: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S50708 to S50713 is executed.

In step S50702, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S50703 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S50704. In step S50704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S50705.

In step S50705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S50705, the process advances to step S50706.

In step S50706, if the second result display flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S50707.

In step S50707, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S50707 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S50503 of the normal process (FIG. 212). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S50701, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S50701: NO), The process advances to step S50708.

In step S50708, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S50709. In step S50709, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the flow advances to step S50710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S50711.

In step S50711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S50711, the process advances to step S50712.

In step S50712, if the second result display flag in the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S50713.

In step S50713, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S50713 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S50503 of the normal process (FIG. 212). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 213: S50605).

FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S50801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S50801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S50801:YES), it progresses to step S50802.

In step S50802, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S50804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S50801: NO), the process proceeds to step S50803.

In step S50803, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S50804.

At step S50804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) at step S50802 or step S50803 is a big hit. In step S50804, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S50804: YES), in steps S50805 to S50812, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S50805, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S50805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S50805: NO), the process advances to step S50806 to refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 202(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S50805: YES), the flow advances to step S50807 to enter the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 202(b)). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S50806 or step S50807. The process advances to step S50808.

In step S50808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S50806 or step S50807 is the variable probability jackpot. In step S50808, when it is determined that the game result is a probability variable jackpot (S50808: YES), the process proceeds to step S50809.

In step S50809, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S50806 or step S50807. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S50809, the process advances to step S50810.

In step S50810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S50806 or step S50807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S50814.

In step S50808, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S50806 or step S50807 is not a probability variable jackpot (S50808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, to step S50811 move on.

In step S50811, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S50806 or step S50807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S50811, the process proceeds to step S50812.

In step S50812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S50806 or step S50807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S50814.

At step S50804, if the result of the jackpot lottery at step S50802 or step S50803 is not jackpot winning (S50804: NO), the process proceeds to step S50813 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss is to end the variable display in a state in which either the stop result is displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn in which the result is a loss. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S50813, the process advances to step S50814.

In step S50814, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game turn in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S50814, the process advances to step S50815.

In step S50815, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S50815 that the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S50815: NO), the process advances to step S50816 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S50814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S50815 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S50815: YES), the flow advances to step S50817 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S50814. After executing step S50816 or step S50817, the process proceeds to step S50818.

In step S50818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S50816 to S50818 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S50503 in the normal process (FIG. 212). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S50818, the process proceeds to step S50819.

In step S50819, the result display portion corresponding to the current round of the game out of the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second result display section flag is ON, the second result display section 37b is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S50819, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 215: S50814).

FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing processing for setting a variable time. In step S50901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step S50902.

In step S50902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S50902: YES), the process proceeds to step S50903.

In step S50903, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. After that, in step S50904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S50902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not won (S50902: NO), the process proceeds to step S50905, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S50905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S50902, in the step S50905, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S50905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S50906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S50906, the fluctuation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, in step S50904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S50905, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S50905: NO), the process proceeds to step S50907, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, in step S50904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 212: S50507).

FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S51001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is, as described with reference to FIG. 203, a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S51001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S51001: NO), the flow advances to step S51002 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when ending the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S51002 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S51002: NO), the process advances to step S51003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S51003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S51003: NO), the process proceeds to step S51004, the timing at which the pattern variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b ends It is determined whether or not. In step S51004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S51004: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S51004, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the variable display ends (S51004: YES), the process proceeds to step S51005, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) changes to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S51005: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S51005, when it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S51005: YES), the process proceeds to step S51006, and the standby state flag is turned off, and the flow advances to step S51007 to turn off the high-probability mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S51008.

In step S51008, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S51008, the process advances to step S51009.

In step S51009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S50503 in the normal process (FIG. 212). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S51009, the process advances to step S51010 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51003 that the opening period flag is ON (S51003: YES), the process proceeds to step S51011.

In step S51011, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S51011 that the opening period has ended (S51011: YES), the process advances to step S51012 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S51013.

In step S51013, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S51013, the process advances to step S51014.

In step S51014, the number of rounds of the current opening/closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. In step S51014, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM64 is the 16R probability variable flag or 16R normal flag (S51014: YES), proceed to step S51015, provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened.

On the other hand, in step S51014, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM64 is the 8R probability variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S51014: NO), proceed to step S51016, provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S51015 or step S51016, the process advances to step S51017.

In step S51017, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S51002, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S51002: YES), the process proceeds to step S51018 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driven state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit is operated under the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the number of opening limits has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S51018, the process advances to step S51019.

In step S51019, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S51019: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S51019: YES), the flow advances to step S51020 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step S51020, the process advances to step S51021.

In step S51021, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S51021, the process proceeds to step S51022.

In step S51022, condition determination processing is executed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not case a2 shown in FIG. 203 is applicable. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery in the next game round, the suggestion production is executed in the ending period, and the production executed in this game round in the fluctuation time of the next game round (notice production, reach production and It is determined whether or not to execute the process of reproducing the result notification effect (jackpot notification). The condition determination processing will be described later. After executing step S51022, the process advances to step S51023.

In step S51023, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S51023, the process advances to step S51024.

In step S51024, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S50503 in the normal process (FIG. 212). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S51024, the process advances to step S51025.

In step S51025, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51001 that the ending period flag is ON (S51001: YES), the process proceeds to step S51026.

In step S51026, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S51023), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in the ending time setting process (FIG. 219) described later. If it is determined in step S51026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S51026: YES), the process proceeds to step S51027.

In step S51027, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S51028 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S51028, the process advances to step S51029.

In step S51029, the standby state flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step S51030 to execute standby state time setting processing. Specifically, the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter area 64d is set to "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec). After executing step S51030, this game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S51026, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S51026: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 217: S51017).

FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S51101, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step S51101 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S51101: NO), the process proceeds to step S51102 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S51102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S51102: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S51102: NO), the process proceeds to step S51103.

In step S51103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S51103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S51103: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S51103, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S51103: YES), the process proceeds to step S51104, in order to open the big winning opening 36a variable winning driving unit 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S51105.

In step S51105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S51105, the process advances to step S51106.

In step S51106, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 212: step S50503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S51101, when it is determined that the large winning opening 36a is open (step S51101: YES), the process proceeds to step S51107, in which it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S51107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S51107: NO), the process proceeds to step S51108.

In step S51108, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S51108 that no prize has been won (S51108: NO), the main prize winning opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51108 that a prize has been won (S51108: YES), the process proceeds to step S51109, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter area PC. Thereafter, the process advances to step S51110.

In step S51110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S51110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S51110: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S51107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S51107: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S51110 In (S51110: YES), the process proceeds to step S51111 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S51112.

In step S51112, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S51113 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S51113, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S51113: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S51113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S51114, the flow advances to step S51115 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. 212 : step S50503), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

<Condition judgment processing>
Next, condition determination processing will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 217: S51022).

As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not case a2 shown in FIG. 203 applies. The condition for enabling the processing of case a2 is to win the jackpot lottery in the first game round and win the jackpot lottery in the second game round. This condition determination process is executed immediately before the end of the opening/closing execution mode after winning the big win lottery in the game round, and is the process of determining whether or not the big win lottery will be won in the next game round.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing condition determination processing. In step S51201, it is determined whether or not the pending number CRN>0. By executing this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a game round immediately after the special game state when executing the special game state after the first game round. When the game round does not exist, the game round corresponding to the second game round in which the game round reproduction effect can be executed immediately after the suggestive effect does not exist, and the processing of case a2 cannot be executed. .

If it is determined in step S51201 that the number of reserved items CRN>0 (S51201: YES), the process proceeds to step S51202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51201 that the pending number CRN>0 is not true (S51201: NO), this condition determination process is terminated.

In step S51202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the next game round is read. Concretely, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read by the winning to the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 209). After that, the process proceeds to step S51203.

In step S51203, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the big winning lottery for the next game round is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

In step S51203, when it is determined that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S51203: YES), the process advances to step S51204 to refer to the low-probability mode success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S51206, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S51203, when it is determined that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S51203: NO), the process advances to step S51205 to refer to the high-probability mode success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a. . After that, the process proceeds to step S51206, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S51206, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S51206: YES), the process proceeds to step S51207.

In step S51207, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In the case of case a2 (FIG. 203), the effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces the game round reproduction effect executed in the second game round in the ending period of the special game state after the second game round. A flag used to prevent execution. In step S51207, when it is determined that the effect overlap avoidance flag is not ON (S51207: NO), the process proceeds to step S51208, and the condition establishment flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S51209.

In step S51209, a condition establishment command is set. The condition establishment command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side recognize that the condition establishment flag is ON. The condition establishment command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 212: step S50503) of the normal process. After that, the condition determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time in step S51206 does not correspond to the jackpot (S51206: NO), or if it is determined that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON in step S51207 (S51207: YES), this condition determination processing is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 217: S51023).

FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing the ending time setting process. In step S51301, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

In step S51301, when it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S51301: NO), the process proceeds to step S51302, and it is determined whether or not the condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S51302 that the condition establishment flag is ON (S51302: YES), the process proceeds to step S51303.

In step S51303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which is the ending time timer. The process of step S51303 is the process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game run in case a2 of FIG. In case a2, only the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, and the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 6 seconds are secured as the ending time required for execution of the suggestive effect. After executing step S51303, the process advances to step S51304 to turn off the condition establishment flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S51305.

In step S51305, the effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. After that, the ending time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51302 that the condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S51302: NO), the process proceeds to step S51306.

In step S51306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S51306 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. In the case of case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 30 seconds are secured as the ending time necessary for executing the suggestive effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In this embodiment, the time required for the suggestive effect is fixed at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is fixed at 24 seconds. After executing step S51303, the ending time setting process is terminated.

In step S51301, when it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON (S51301: YES), the process proceeds to step S51307 to set the effect duplication avoidance command. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 212: step S50503). After executing step S51307, the process advances to step S51308.

In step S51308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S51308 is the process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of FIG. In the case of case a2, a normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 8 seconds are secured as the ending time required for execution of the normal ending effect.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 217: S51028).

FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S51401, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as a jackpot type flag is turned on in the RAM 64 . That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S51401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S51401: YES), the process proceeds to step S51402 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S51402, the process advances to step S51403.

In step S51403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S51404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process advances to step S51405.

In step S51405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process advances to step S51406.

In step S51406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S51410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S51401: NO), the process advances to step S51407 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process advances to step S51408.

In step S51408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process advances to step S51409 to set 100 to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. Thereafter, the process advances to step S51410.

In step S51410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 212: S50508).

FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S51501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S51501 that the supported flag is not ON (S51501: NO), the process proceeds to step S51502.

In step S51502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S51502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S51502: NO), the process proceeds to step S51503.

In step S51503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S51503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51503: YES), the process proceeds to step S51504.

In step S51504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the normal unit 38 . If it is determined in step S51504 that it is time to end the variable display (S51504: YES), the process advances to step S51505 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S51504: NO), the process proceeds to step S51506.

In step S51506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S51506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S51506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S51506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S51506: YES), the process proceeds to step S51507.

In step S51507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S51508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S51507 (S51507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S51508 (S51508: YES), the process advances to step S51509 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S51510.

In step S51510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S51509 is support winning. In step S51510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S51510: YES), the process proceeds to step S51511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S51512. On the other hand, in step S51510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S51510: NO), the process proceeds to step S51512 without executing the processing of step S51511.

In step S51512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S51512 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S51512: YES), the process proceeds to step S51513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51512 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S51512: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S51513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S51513, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S51513: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S51514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S51515.

In step S51515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S51515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 212: step S50503) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S51507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S51507: YES), or if it is determined in step S51518 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S51508: NO), the process proceeds to step S51516, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S51517.

In step S51517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S51516 is support winning. In step S51517, if it is determined that support is not won (S51517: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S51517, if it is determined that support is won (S51517: YES), the process advances to step S51518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S51502 that the support winning flag is ON (S51502: YES), the process advances to step S51519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S51519, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51519: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the universal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51519: YES), the process proceeds to step S51520.

In step S51520, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S51521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S51501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S51501: YES), the process advances to step S51522 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 222: S51522).

FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S51601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S51601: YES), the process proceeds to step S51602.

In step S51602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S51602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S51602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51602: YES), the process proceeds to step S51603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S51603, the process advances to step S51604.

In step S51604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S51605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S51605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S51605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S51605: YES), the process advances to step S51606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S51601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S51601: NO), the process proceeds to step S51607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S51607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S51607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S51607: YES), the process advances to step S51608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S51609.

In step S51609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S51609: NO), the process advances to step S51610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S51610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S51610: YES), the flow advances to step S51611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51609 that the open/close execution mode is set (S51609: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S51610 (S51610: NO), the process proceeds to step S51612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<Standby processing>
Next, standby processing will be described. The standby process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 212: S50509).

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing standby processing. In step S51701, it is determined whether or not the standby state flag is ON. If it is determined in step S51701 that the standby state flag is ON (S51701: YES), the process proceeds to step S51702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S51701: NO), this standby process ends.

In step S51702, it is determined whether or not 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0. If the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON. I judge. If it is determined in step S51702 that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the process advances to step S51703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON, this standby processing is terminated.

In step S51703, the standby state flag is turned OFF, and the flow advances to step S51704 to turn ON the transition condition fulfillment flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S51705 to set a transition condition establishment command. The transition condition satisfaction command is a command for making each sub-side control device recognize that 15 seconds have passed since the start of the standby state, that is, that the transition condition has been satisfied. After executing step S51705, this standby process ends.

E6. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 225 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

E7. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S51801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S51801, the process advances to step S51802.

In step S51802, command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S51802, the process advances to step S51803.

In step S51803, standby state transition processing is executed to reduce the audio output level (sound volume) in the standby state or to start a demonstration moving image. Details of the standby state transition processing will be described later. After executing step S51803, the process advances to step S51804.

In step S51804, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S51802. After executing step S51804, the process advances to step S51805.

In step S51805, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S51802. After executing step S51805, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command correspondence processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 226: S51802).

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S51901, it is determined whether or not a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step S51901 that a start-up command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51901: YES), the process advances to step S51902 to execute start-up command handling processing. The details of the start-up command handling process will be described later. After executing step S51902, the process advances to step S51903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51901 that the startup command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S51901: NO), the process proceeds to step S51903 without executing step S51902.

In step S51903, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S51903 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51903: YES), the process advances to step S51904 to execute hold command handling processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S51904, the process advances to step S51905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51903 that no hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51903: NO), the process proceeds to step S51905 without executing step S51904.

In step S51905, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S51905 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (S51905: YES), the process proceeds to step S51906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51905 that the variation command and type command have not been received (S51905: NO), the process proceeds to step S51907.

At step S51906, effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, the advance notice effect to be executed in the current game round, the ready-to-win effect, the stop pattern, the variable display pattern, and the like are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S51906, the process advances to step S51907.

In step S51907, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S51907 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51907: YES), the process advances to step S51908 to execute opening effect setting processing. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot contained in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot are set, and the information corresponding to the content of the effect is set. An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. - 特許庁After that, the process advances to step S51909.

In step S51909, opening/closing execution mode effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds and the information on the jackpot type included in the opening command. After executing step S51909, the process advances to step S51910.

If it is determined in step S51907 that the opening command has not been received (S51907: NO), the process advances to step S51910 without executing steps S51908 and S51909.

In step S51910, it is determined whether or not a condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62 . In step S51910, if it is determined that the condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51910: YES), the process proceeds to step S51911. Turn ON the side condition satisfaction flag. After executing step S51911, the process advances to step S51912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51910 that the condition satisfaction command has not been received (S51910: NO), the process proceeds to step S51912 without executing step S51911.

In step S51912, it is determined whether or not an effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S51912, when it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance command is received from the main side MPU 62 (S51912: YES), the process proceeds to step S51913, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 The light side effect duplication flag is turned ON. After executing step S51913, the process advances to step S51914. On the other hand, in step S51912, when it determines with not having received the production duplication avoidance command (S51912:NO), it progresses to step S51914, without performing step S51913.

In step S51914, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received. In step S51914, when it determines with having received the ending command (S51914:YES), it progresses to step S51915 and performs an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the ending effect for the ending period is set based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON/OFF information of the sound and light side condition establishment flag. be. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S51915, the flow advances to step S51920.

If it is determined in step S51914 that no ending command has been received (S51914: NO), the process advances to step S51916 without executing step S51915.

In step S51916, it is determined whether or not a transition condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step S51916 that the transition condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51916: YES), the process proceeds to step S51917 to turn on the volume reduction flag. The volume reduction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, is turned ON at the timing of starting processing for reducing the audio output level (volume), and is turned ON at the timing when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. This is a flag that is turned off. After executing step S51917, the process advances to step S51918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51916 that the transition condition establishment command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S51916: NO), the process proceeds to step S51918 without executing step S51917.

In step S51918, it is determined whether or not a return condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If it is determined in step S51918 that a return condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S51918: YES), the process advances to step S51919 to turn ON the return condition establishment flag. The restoration condition satisfaction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is turned ON when starting the process of restoring the audio output level (volume) or the process of ending the demonstration video. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the volume is restored and the demonstration video ends. After executing step S51919, the process advances to step S51920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S51918 that the return condition fulfillment command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S51918: NO), the process proceeds to step S51920 without executing step S51919.

In step S51920, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, setting of effect contents corresponding to the high-frequency support mode command, the low-frequency support mode command, the open command, and the close command is performed. Also, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . After step S51920 is executed, this command handling process ends.

<Startup command response processing>
Next, the startup command handling process will be described. The startup command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 227: S51902).

FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the start-up command handling process. As described above, the start-up command response process is a process that is executed when a start-up command is received from the main MPU 62 . Processing of each step executed in the start-up command handling processing will be described below.

In step S52001, a demonstration moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The demonstration moving image start command is a command for causing the display-side MPU 102 to start displaying the demonstration moving image. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S52001, the process proceeds to step S52002.

In step S52002, the demonstration moving image displaying flag is turned ON. The demonstration moving image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration moving image is being displayed on the pattern display device 41, and is turned ON when the display of the demonstration moving image is started, and is turned OFF when the display of the demonstration moving image is finished. is a flag that is set to After executing step S52002, the process advances to step S52003.

In step S52003, the cue determination flag is turned ON. As described above, the cue determination flag starts outputting and displaying the background music and the background moving image from the temporal start position when the return condition is satisfied and the background music and the background moving image start to be displayed. This is a flag for determining whether or not If the cue determination flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is satisfied, when starting to output the background music and display the background video, the output and display of the background music and background video are started from the temporal start position. do. After executing step S52003, this start-up command handling process ends.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 227: S51904).

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62 . Processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step S52101, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the first starting port 33, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the second starting port 34, and these pending A process for enabling the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S52101 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first pending number", and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 It is also referred to as the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as the "total reserved number". After executing step S52101, the process proceeds to step S52102.

In step S52102, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first starting port 33 identified in step S52101, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 and Based on, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first reservation display portion 37c and the second reservation display portion 37d is controlled. After executing step S52102, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing at the time of winning>
Next, update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command handling process (FIG. 229: S52101).

FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S52201, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. In step S52201, if it is determined that the pending command that is read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S52201: YES), the process proceeds to step S52202, sound light The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step S52202, the process advances to step S52204.

In step S52201, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S52201: NO), that is, the pending command is the second start port 34, the process advances to step S52203 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pending information items acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step S52203, the process advances to step S52204.

The reason why steps S52202 and S52203 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the hold information is not displayed in the main controller 60. While the information is held in memory, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step S52204, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total pending number counter area, the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step S52204, the update process at the time of the main prize is ended.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of command handling process (FIG. 227: S51906).

FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the contents of the effect to be executed in the current game round. . Specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described below.

In step S52301, the variable command received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the information of the variable time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S52302.

In step S52302, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52302 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S52302: NO), the process proceeds to step S52303.

In step S52303, a setting process of the effect type is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S52303 is a process of setting the contents of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect in the game round. The effect type setting process will be described later. After executing step S52303, the process advances to step S52304.

In step S52304, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R variable variable jackpot, an 8R variable variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L, and the result is a stop result in which the combination of the ready-to-win symbols does not materialize on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S52304, the process advances to step S52305.

In step S52305, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol specified in step S52304 is obtained. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S52306.

In step S52306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the received variation command. In step S52306, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won (S52306: YES), the process proceeds to step S52307.

In step S52307, the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is stored. Specifically, the setting contents in the effect setting process of step S52303 are stored. This processing is performed to reproduce the effect in the game round in which the big winning lottery is won. After executing step S52307, the process advances to step S52312. On the other hand, in step S52306, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S52306: NO), the process proceeds to step S52312 without executing step S52307.

If it is determined in step S52302 that the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON (S52302: YES), the process proceeds to step S52308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to case a2 described in FIG. 203 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S52308.

In step S52308, the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern stored in step S52307 of the effect setting process related to the previous game round is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S52309.

In step S52309, the setting processing of the effect type is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern read out in step S52308. That is, the same effect as the effect executed in the previous game round is set. Thereafter, the process advances to step S52310.

In step S52310, a stop design setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop design, and the variable display pattern read out in step S52308. That is, the stop symbols having the same content as the stop symbols displayed in the previous game round are set. After that, the process proceeds to step S52311.

In step S52311, a variable display pattern setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern read out in step S52308. That is, a variable display pattern having the same contents as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game round is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S52312.

In step S52312, the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set to the effect command. After that, the flow advances to step S52313 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S52313, the process proceeds to step S52314, and after executing update processing at the start of fluctuation, the effect setting processing ends. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 231: S52314).

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step S52401, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S52401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (S52401: YES), the flow advances to step S52402 to count the first pending number counter stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. Subtract 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S52404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52401 that the command for variation received this time is not the first command for variation (S52401: NO), the process proceeds to step S52403, and the second pending number stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 Decrease the counter by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S52404.

In step S52404, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Opening effect setting processing>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 227: S51908).

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing opening effect setting processing. In step S52501, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52501 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S52501: NO), the process proceeds to step S52502.

In step S52502, the normal start effect is set as the opening effect. In this embodiment, as explained in case a2 of FIG. 203, as the opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect that is executed only in special cases like the specific start effect (see FIG. 204(c)) is prepared. are doing. In step S52502, a start effect (ordinary start effect) to be executed except for a special case such as case a2 is set as an opening effect. After executing step S52502, the process advances to step S52505.

If it is determined in step S52501 that the sound and light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S52501: YES), the process proceeds to step S52503. In step S52503, the specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S52503, the process advances to step S52504 to turn off the sound and light side condition establishment flag. After that, the process advances to step S52505.

In step S52505, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S52502 or step S52503. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received opening effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S52505, this opening effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending production setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 227: S51915).

FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S52601, it is determined whether or not the sound and light effect duplication flag is ON. In step S52601, when it is determined that the sound and light effect duplication flag is not ON (S52601: NO), the process proceeds to step S52602.

In step S52602, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52602 that the sound and light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S52602: NO), the process proceeds to step S52603. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (suggestive effect, special game state reproduction effect and specific end effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round of case a1 in FIG. move on.

At step S52603, the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern stored at step S52307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 231) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S52604.

In step S52604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read out in step S52603. After that, the process advances to step S52605 to set the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. 203 is set. After that, the process advances to step S52609.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52602 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is ON (S52602: YES), the process proceeds to step S52606. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (suggestive effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round of case a2 in FIG. 203, the process proceeds to step S52606.

In step S52606, the suggestive effect is set as the ending effect. After that, the process advances to step S52609.

In step S52601, when it is determined that the sound and light effect duplication flag is ON (S52601: YES), the process proceeds to step S52607. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the second game round of case a2 in FIG. 203, the process proceeds to step S52607.

In step S52607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is a effect suggesting the end of the special game state. Thereafter, the process advances to step S52608.

In step S52608, the sound and light effect duplication flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S52609.

In step S52609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S52605, step S52606 or step S52607 is transmitted to display side MPU 102 of display control device 100. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S52609, this ending effect setting process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, as shown in steps S52603 to S52605 and S52609, the effect type executed in the first game round, the stop pattern, and the variation display pattern are shown. When the information is stored by the sound emission control device 90 and the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the command indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round is part of the ending command. , the symbol display device 41 is caused to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives a command indicating the type of effect executed in the first game cycle, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern as part of the ending command from the sound emission control device 90, it receives The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern indicated by the given command is read out from the program ROM 103 and written in the work RAM 104 . The pattern data table is necessary to display an image of one frame at the timing of updating the image when a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current game round is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing of the effect for the current game cycle is defined.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the information group corresponding to each frame, and gives a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in order to display an image for one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 in accordance with the drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the pattern display device 41 to display the image. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially instructs the VDP 105 to draw the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, thereby displaying the effect type and stop pattern executed in the first game round. , the variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above processing. process may be adopted. For example, as in the present embodiment, the display from the sound emission control device 90 instead of the processing of storing the information indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round in the sound emission control device 90 A command is transmitted to the control device 100 to instruct to temporarily store a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the performance type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game cycle. According to the command, the display control device 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game cycle.

After that, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, a command is output from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 to instruct the VDP 105 to draw according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. . According to the command, the display control device 100 can execute a special game state reproduction effect by instructing the VDP 105 to draw according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the processing for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Waiting state transition processing>
Next, the standby state transition processing will be described. The standby state transition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 226: S51803).

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing standby state transition processing. In step S52701, it is determined whether or not the return condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52701 that the return condition establishment flag is not ON (S52701: NO), the process proceeds to step S52702.

In step S52702, it is determined whether or not the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52702 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S52702: NO), the process proceeds to step S52703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52702 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S52702: YES), this standby state transition processing ends.

In step S52703, it is determined whether or not the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. The demonstration moving image start waiting flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is a period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image, and is turned ON at the timing when the sound output level (volume) becomes zero. This flag is turned OFF when 5 seconds have passed without the return condition being satisfied after the voice output level (sound volume) became zero. If it is determined in step S52703 that the demonstration moving image start wait flag is not ON (S52703: NO), the process proceeds to step S52704.

In step S52704, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S52704: YES), the process proceeds to step S52705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S52704: NO), this standby state transition processing ends.

In step S52705, a process of reducing the output level (volume) of audio is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 steps, and the process of lowering the audio output level by one step is executed. In the present embodiment, the standby state transition processing is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, so the output level (sound volume) of the sound drops from the maximum value to zero in about 6 seconds. After executing step S52705, the process advances to step S52706.

In step S52706, it is determined whether or not the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S52706 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S52706: YES), the flow advances to step S52707 to turn off the volume reduction flag, and the flow advances to step S52708 to wait for the demonstration video to start. Turn on the flag. After that, the process advances to step S52709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52706 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S52706: NO), this standby state transition processing ends.

In step S52709, a demonstration moving image start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set to the timer counter Tx waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image stored in the various counter area 94b. The demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the sound output level (sound volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. be. After executing step S52709, this standby state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S52703 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON (S52703: YES), the process proceeds to step S52710.

In step S52710, it is determined whether or not the 5-second demonstration moving image start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter Tx waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image is 0. If the value of the timer counter Tx waiting to start the demonstration moving image is 0, the period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image of 5 seconds ends. It is determined that If it is determined in step S52710 that the demo moving image start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S52711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52710 that the waiting period for starting the demonstration moving image has not ended, this waiting state transition processing ends.

In step S52711, background music output stop processing is executed. After that, the flow advances to step S52712 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S52712, the process advances to step S52713.

In step S52713, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is turned off, and the flow advances to step S52714 to turn on the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the flow advances to step S52715 to turn on the cue determination flag and terminate this standby state transition processing.

If it is determined in step S52701 that the return condition fulfillment flag is ON (S52701: YES), the flow advances to step S52716 to determine whether or not the cue determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52716 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S52716: NO), the process proceeds to step S52717 to return the sound output level (volume) to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S52717, the process advances to step S52718.

In step S52718, it is determined whether or not the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S52718: YES), the flow advances to step S52719 to turn the volume reduction flag OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S52720. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S52718: NO), the process proceeds to step S52720 without executing step S52719.

In step S52720, it is determined whether or not the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S52720 that the demonstration moving image start wait is ON (S52720: YES), the process advances to step S52721 to turn the demonstration moving image start waiting flag OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S52722 to turn off the return condition establishment flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52720 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S52720: NO), the process proceeds to step S52722 without executing step S52721, and the return condition fulfillment flag is turned OFF. After executing step S52722, this standby state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S52716 that the cue determination flag is ON (S52716: YES), the flow advances to step S52723 to transmit a demonstration moving image end command to display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image end command executes processing for ending the display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S52723, the process advances to step S52724 to turn off the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S52725.

In step S52725, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process proceeds to step S52726.

In step S52726, the audio output level (volume) is returned to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S52726, the process advances to step S52727.

In step S52727, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cue determination flag is ON, output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the flow advances to step S52728 to turn off the cue determination flag. After that, the flow advances to step S52729 to turn off the return condition fulfillment flag and terminate this standby state transition processing.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S52801, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S52802.

In step S52802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S52901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S53001, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 237) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S53001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step S53002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S53001), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S53003.

In step S53003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S53002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S53004.

In step S53004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S53003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step S53005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command correspondence processing is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of V interrupt processing (FIG. 238: S53001).

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. In step S53101, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an effect command. If it is determined in step S53101 that the effect command is stored, the process advances to step S53102 to execute display start processing of the effect corresponding to the effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S53102, the process advances to step S53103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53101 that the effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53103 without executing step S53102.

In step S53103, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an opening effect command. When it is determined in step S53103 that the opening effect command is stored, the process advances to step S53104 to execute display start processing of the opening effect corresponding to the opening effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode designated by the opening effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Further, after the opening effect is completed, control of image drawing and display is started so that the opening/closing execution mode effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁After executing step S53104, the process advances to step S53105. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S53103 that the opening effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53105 without executing step S53104.

In step S53105, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an ending effect command. When it is determined in step S53105 that the ending effect command is stored, the process advances to step S53106 to execute display start processing of the ending effect corresponding to the ending effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode designated by the ending effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S53106, the process advances to step S53107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53105 that the ending effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53107 without executing step S53106.

In step S53107, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a demonstration moving image start command. If it is determined in step S53107 that a demonstration moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S53108 to execute demonstration moving image display start processing. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the demonstration animation specified by the demonstration animation start command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Note that, in the present embodiment, display of the demonstration moving image is repeated until a demonstration moving image end command, which will be described later, is received. After executing step S53108, the process advances to step S53109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53107 that the demonstration moving image start command is not stored, the process advances to step S53109 without executing step S53108.

In step S53109, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a demonstration moving image end command. If it is determined in step S53109 that the demonstration moving image end command is stored, the process advances to step S53110 to execute processing for ending display of the demonstration moving image. After that, the process proceeds to step S53111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53109 that the demonstration moving image end command is not stored, the process advances to step S53111 without executing step S53110.

In step S53111, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a background moving image start command. If it is determined in step S53111 that the background moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S53112 to execute processing for starting display of the background moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S53112, the process advances to step S53113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process advances to step S53113 without executing step S53112.

In step S53113, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the above-described effect operation command is stored, the processing in the case where the above-described effect operation command is stored is executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the case a1, when the big winning lottery related to the second game round is lost, the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed after the suggestion effect. And the result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect executed in the first game cycle, and the player also recognizes that the effect is for reproducing the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestive effect have already been executed in terms of effect. However, in reality, it is a game round reproduction effect executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. When the player has previously viewed the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player executes the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle of the case a2 in the first game cycle in the same manner as in the case a1. As well as recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the performance shown in the previous game, it is difficult to anticipate winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the announcement effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the second game round, when the player is informed that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round by the result notification effect. At that time, for the first time, the notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the time. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game cycle reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a sense of surprise, and at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is reproduced. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player for the performance to be performed. In addition, by making the second game round in case a2 develop unexpectedly by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, although the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, it suggests reproducing the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game round. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to anticipate winning the big winning lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

Further, in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the ready-to-win effect executed after the suggestive effect is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect in terms of the effect, but in reality. is executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, when it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, when it is executed as a reproduction of the effect that has already been executed, At least three cases are set such that the performance is executed as a reproduction of the performance that has already been executed, but in reality it is executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 205), the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the pattern display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 100 causes the background moving image to start displaying from a predetermined temporal position. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from a predetermined temporal position of the background music Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position of starting the display of the background moving image varies according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demonstration moving image is started and the return condition is satisfied (FIG. 205), the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to the player compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the background moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started at a position in the middle of the background moving image and output is started at the position in the middle of the background music, the player may, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background moving image and the background music are viewed from a position in the middle of time, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the player can appreciate the background moving image and the background music from the beginning position in terms of time. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that the background moving image and the background music can all be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started, if the return condition is met (FIG. 206), the display control The device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the state before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 207), the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to continue displaying the background moving image. , the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, so that the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the previous mode in a natural flow without discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the game round is completed, it is determined that the transition condition has been established when 15 seconds have elapsed without starting any of the special game state and the next game round. It is possible to reduce the volume of the background music with the lapse of time in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the game cycle is started in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition is established, and the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the background music is played. Since the output mode returns to the mode of outputting the background music with the sound volume preset by the player, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation for the start of the game round and improve the amusement of the game.

E8. Modification of the fifth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

E8-1. Variant 1:
FIG. 240 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. The difference between this modified example and the above-described fifth embodiment is that an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information is provided in the sound emission control device 90 . The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires the date information and time information output from the RTC 96, and executes the RTC presentation, which is a presentation based on the acquired date information and time information. In this modification, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. Start processing for execution. The RTC effect of this modification is composed of a 300-second RTC effect video and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect video, and is executed at 00 minutes past the hour.

FIG. 241 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The RTC effect in-progress flag shown in the drawing is a flag that is turned ON when the RTC effect start condition is established and the RTC effect is started, and is turned OFF when the RTC effect is finished.

When the pattern display device 41 displays the background moving image and the time reaches 00 minutes every hour and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the background video. A mode of displaying a moving image is shifted to a mode of displaying an RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, while maintaining the sound output level (volume) preset by the player, the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position "01".

When a predetermined display period (300 seconds in this modification) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to display the RTC effect moving image. The mode is shifted to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed. When the display control device 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the display control apparatus 100 starts the display from the temporal head position “01” of the background moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and While maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound produced, the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music.

Note that the sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music. , the type of background music for which cue processing is to be executed is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 can display a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to the plurality of types of background music. A configuration may also be adopted in which a background moving image corresponding to the background music is selected and cue processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to appreciate a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In FIG. 244, which will be described later, when the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform cueing processing of background music and background moving images, the background music and background moving images are similarly selected from a plurality of types. can be adopted.

FIG. 242 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the demonstration moving image.

When the time reaches 00 minutes while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the demonstration video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the demonstration video. is shifted from the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 changes the time of the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01" and the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the output level preset by the player.

When a predetermined display period (300 seconds in this modification) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to display the RTC effect moving image. The mode is shifted to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image. Then, the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal head position “01” of the demonstration moving image when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration video (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC production music, and the sound output level ( volume) to 0.

FIG. 243 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the transition condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the transition condition is to shift the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed, and to shift the sound output mode to the mode in which the volume is zero (silent state). It is a condition.

The display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the background video when the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1) while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the background video. is shifted from the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, while maintaining the sound output level (volume) preset by the player, the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position "01".

The display control device 100 stops changing the pattern on the main display unit 45 while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t2), and 15 seconds after the stop of the pattern changing, the transition condition is set. is established (time t3), after the predetermined display period (300 seconds in this modified example) of the RTC effect animation has ended, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the mode of displaying the demonstration animation. Transition (time t4). Then, the display control device 100 starts display from the temporal head position “01” of the demonstration moving image when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration video (time t4), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC production music, and the sound output level ( volume) to 0.

FIG. 244 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is met while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the return condition is that the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the sound output mode is set to output background music at a preset volume. This is a condition for returning to the mode.

When the time reaches 00 minutes while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the demonstration video and the RTC effect start condition is met (time t1), the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the pattern display device 41 to the demonstration video. is shifted from the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 changes the time of the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01" and the output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the output level preset by the player.

When the pattern display device 41 starts to change the pattern on the main display unit 45 while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed and the return condition is satisfied (time t2), the display control device 100 returns the RTC effect moving image to the predetermined RTC effect moving image. After the display period (300 seconds in this modified example) ends, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is restored to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3). Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the RTC effect music and While maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound produced, the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the fifth embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 226) executed in the sound and light side MPU of the fifth embodiment is that the standby state transition processing (step S51803) is executed after command response processing (step S51802) is executed. The only difference is that the RTC effect processing (step S51802a) is executed before performing the processing, and other processing is the same as in the fifth embodiment. In the RTC effect processing, a process for executing the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below.

FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the RTC rendering process executed in the sound/light side MPU 92 of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. In step S53401, it is determined whether or not the RTC rendering flag is ON. The RTC rendering flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC rendering is being executed. If it is determined in step S53401 that the RTC rendering flag is not ON (S53401: NO), the process proceeds to step S53402 and time information output from the RTC 96 is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S53403.

In step S53403, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect. In this modification, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches 00 minutes every hour. If it is determined in step S53403 that the read time information does not match the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S53403: NO), this RTC effect processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53403 that the read time information coincides with the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect (S53403: YES), the process proceeds to step S53404.

In step S53404, RTC presentation time setting processing is executed. Specifically, "150000" (that is, 5.0 min) is set in the RTC presentation time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter area 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S53404, the process advances to step S53405.

In step S53405, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S53405, the process advances to step S53406.

In step S53406, RTC effect music output start processing is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC production music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped, and the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S53407 to turn on the RTC rendering flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S53408.

In step S53408, it is determined whether or not any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. A situation in which any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON is a situation in which the transition condition described above is satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. means. If it is determined in step S53408 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S53408: YES), the process proceeds to step S53409.

In step S53409, the reduced output level (sound volume) of the sound is returned to the value preset by the player. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S53410 to turn on the post-RTC effect demonstration video start flag. The post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is a flag for starting the demonstration moving image after the RTC effect ends. is a flag that is turned ON when After executing step S53410, the flow advances to step S53411 to turn off the ON flags among the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S53412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53408 that all of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag are OFF (S53408: NO), the processing from step S53409 to step S53411 is executed. Without, the process proceeds to step S53412.

In step S53412, it is determined whether or not the return condition fulfillment flag is ON. In step S53412, if it is determined that the return condition establishment flag is ON (S53412: YES), the flow advances to step S53413 to turn OFF the demonstration video start flag after RTC effect, and the flow advances to step S53414 to establish return condition establishment. Turn off the flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53412 that the return condition fulfillment flag is not ON (S53412: NO), this RTC effect processing ends without executing the processing in steps S53413 and S53414.

In step S53401, if it is determined that the RTC rendering flag is ON (S53401: YES), that is, if the RTC rendering is being executed, the process proceeds to step S53415.

In step S53415, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC presentation time timer counter Tr set in step S53403 is zero. If it is determined in step S53415 that it is time to end the RTC effect (S53415: YES), the process advances to step S53416 to proceed to processing when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S53415 that it is not the timing for ending the RTC effect (S53415: NO), the process proceeds from step S53408 to step S53414. The reason for this is that there is a possibility that the transition condition and the return condition are met even during the period when the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S53408 to step S53414.

In step S53416, the RTC rendering flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S53417 to execute RTC effect music output stop processing. Thereafter, the process advances to step S53418.

In step S53418, it is determined whether or not the post-RTC effect demonstration video start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S53418 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is not ON (S53418: NO), the process advances to step S53419 to transmit a background moving image start command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S53420 to execute background music output start processing. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S53418 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is ON (S53418: YES), the process advances to step S53421 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to display side MPU . The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 from the temporal head position. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S53422 to turn off the demonstration moving image displaying flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S53423.

In step S53423, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because, in this modified example, no music is set to be output together with the demonstration video. After executing step S53423, the flow advances to step S53424 to turn on the cue determination flag. Through this processing, the cue determination flag can be turned ON during display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S53424, the process advances to step S53425 to turn off the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag. After that, the present RTC effect processing is terminated.

FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing standby state transition processing executed in the sound/light side MPU 92 of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (FIG. 235) executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 of the fifth embodiment is that the , the process of determining whether or not the RTC effecting flag is ON (step S52700), and other processes are the same as those of the fifth embodiment.

In step S52700, it is determined whether or not the RTC effecting flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RTC effecting flag is ON (S52700: YES), this standby state transition processing ends. That is, it is configured so as not to shift to the standby state during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52700 that the RTC rendering flag is not ON (S52700: NO), the process proceeds to step S52701 to determine whether or not the return condition fulfillment flag is ON. Since the subsequent processing is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, the description is omitted.

FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the display-side MPU 102 of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment. The difference from the command response processing (FIG. 239) executed in the display-side MPU 102 of the fifth embodiment is that after the processing for starting the display of the background moving image (step S53112) is executed, other processing (step S53113) is executed. ) is executed, the processing of steps S53112a and S53112b, which will be described later, is executed, and other processing is the same as in the fifth embodiment.

In step S53112a, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores an RTC effect moving image start command. If it is determined in step S53112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S53112b to execute processing for starting display of the RTC effect moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S53112b, the process advances to step S53113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S53112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S53113 without executing step S53112b. Since the subsequent processing is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, the description is omitted.

As described above, according to the present modification, as shown in FIG. 241, the mode of displaying the background moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and then the predetermined display of the RTC effect moving image is performed. When the period has expired, the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the background moving image is shifted from the predetermined temporal position. Start display. Therefore, control can be simplified compared to the configuration in which the temporal position at which the background moving image is started to be displayed varies when transitioning to the mode of displaying the background moving image. As a configuration in which the time position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes when transitioning to the mode of displaying the background moving image, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the RTC effect A configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started from the temporal position of the background moving image that was being displayed at the timing immediately before transitioning to the mode of displaying the moving image, or the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the background moving image. When the RTC effect moving image is displayed, the temporal position of the background moving image to start displaying is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode of displaying the background moving image. Even after shifting to the mode, the background moving image continues to be played as internal processing, and when the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image is shifted to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the background that is continuously played back as internal processing. A configuration for displaying a moving image on the pattern display device 41 may be used.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 242, the mode of displaying the demonstration video is shifted to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video, and then the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video ends. In this case, the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, and when the mode is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the demonstration video. . Therefore, control can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which display of the demonstration moving image is started varies when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. It should be noted that, as a configuration in which the display of the demonstration video is started to change when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect video ends, the RTC effect A configuration in which the display of the demonstration video is started from the temporal position of the demonstration video that was being displayed at the timing immediately before transitioning to the mode of displaying the video, or the mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed is shifted to the mode in which the demonstration video is displayed. When the RTC effect video is displayed, the temporal position of the demonstration video to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after shifting to the mode of displaying the RTC effect video, and the RTC effect video is displayed from the mode of displaying the demonstration video. Even after the transition to the mode, the demo video continues to be played as internal processing, and when the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is changed to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, the demo that is continuously played as internal processing. A configuration for displaying a moving image on the pattern display device 41 may be used.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 243, even if the transition condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image is not interrupted during the predetermined display period. However, after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image is over, the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, so that the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 244, even if the return condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image is not interrupted during the predetermined display period. However, since the mode of displaying the background moving image is restored after the end of the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this modification are installed, as shown in FIGS. As the background moving image is displayed, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined temporal position when displaying the background moving image. Background videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this modified example are installed witnesses a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed in each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10 .

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 241 and 244, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporal starting position of the background moving image Since the display starts from , it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player compared to the configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the time of the background moving image when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image. . For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display of the background moving image is started from a position in the middle of time when the background moving image is displayed, the player can watch the background moving image from the middle position in time. Therefore, there is a possibility that you may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there are parts of the background video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to this modified example, the player can be allowed to watch the background moving image from the temporal start position, so that the player can be less uncomfortable, and the background moving image can be viewed from the beginning. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modification, as shown in FIGS. 241 and 244, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, Since the output of the background music is started, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, compared to a configuration in which the temporal position of starting the output of the background music varies. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music is started fluctuates, for example, in FIG. The output of the background music is started from the temporal position of the background music that was output at the timing immediately before the background music is output, or the output is started when the mode of outputting the RTC production music is changed to the mode of outputting the background music. A configuration for determining the temporal position of the background music to be played based on the elapsed time after shifting to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music, even after the mode of outputting the background music is shifted to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music. In addition to continuing the reproduction of the background music as an internal process, when the mode of outputting the RTC effect music is shifted to the mode of outputting the background music, the background music that is being reproduced is continuously output as an internal process. mentioned.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 241 and 244, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporal starting position of the background music Since the output is started from , it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player compared to the configuration in which the output is started from a position in the middle of the background music. For example, if a configuration were adopted in which the output of the background music is started from a position in the middle of time, the player would be able to appreciate the background music from the position in the middle of time. You may feel unsatisfactory that there are parts of the background music that you have not listened to. On the other hand, according to the present modification, the player can be made to listen to the background music from the beginning position in terms of time. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this modified example are installed, as shown in FIGS. As the demonstration moving image is displayed, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the demonstration moving image from a predetermined temporal position when displaying the demonstration moving image. Demo videos can be synced. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demonstration moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this modified example are installed witnesses a spectacular situation in which demonstration moving images displayed in each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10 .

Furthermore, according to this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the transition is made to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the temporal leading position of the demonstration moving image Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the display is started from a temporally middle position of the demonstration video when shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration video and displaying the demonstration video, it gives the player a sense of discomfort. can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a position in the temporal middle of the demo video when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video and displaying the demo video, the player will not be able to view the demo video temporally. Since you will be watching from a certain position in the middle, you may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfied that there are parts of the demo video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to this modified example, the player can be allowed to watch the demo video from the temporal start position. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she can appreciate everything from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

E8-2. Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment and the above-described modified example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the output mode of the sound is changed to the mode in which the output of the background music is continued and the volume of the background music is reduced with the passage of time. Although the configuration is such that the volume is shifted to zero, instead of this, when the transition condition is satisfied, the output mode of the sound is changed to continue outputting the background music while increasing the volume of the background music with the lapse of time. A configuration may be adopted in which the volume of the background music is shifted to zero without going through the mode of decreasing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the above-described modification, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is changed to the mode in which the demonstration video is displayed 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero. Instead of this configuration, the display mode of the pattern display device 41 may be configured to shift to a mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modified example, the output of the background music continues until 5 seconds have passed since the volume of the background music became zero, and the output of the background music is stopped after 5 seconds have passed. However, instead of this configuration, the output of the background music may be stopped at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

E8-3. Variant 3:
In the above-described embodiment and modification, when the return condition is met after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 205), the background video is restored. The display is started from the temporal start position “01” and the output of the background music is started from the temporal start position “01”. It is not limited to the configuration for starting output. For example, the background moving image and the background music may be displayed and output starting from a predetermined temporal position where they are most exciting (so-called chorus start position). That is, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the background moving image, and output is started from a temporal position corresponding to the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image that is the predetermined temporal position of the background music. It may be configured to start. Even with such a configuration, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized compared to the configuration in which the temporal position at which the background moving image is started to be displayed varies according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

E8-4. Variant 4:
In the above-described embodiment and modified example, the volume of the background music is set to zero when the transition condition is satisfied. For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music may be set to a level below which the player cannot recognize. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition has been established.

Further, the output mode of the sound before the transition condition is satisfied is set to output the background music at the volume of the first volume, and the output mode of the sound after the transition condition is satisfied is set to output the background music at the first level. Alternatively, the sound may be output at a volume of a second magnitude, which is smaller than the volume of the first magnitude. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition has been established.

E8-5. Variant 5:
In the above-described embodiment and modified example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is configured to shift from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image when the transition condition is satisfied. The display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 after the transition condition is satisfied are not limited to the background moving image display mode and the demonstration moving image display mode. For example, if the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode of displaying a predetermined moving image, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that transitions after the transition condition is satisfied A mode in which an image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped may be used. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that transitions after the transition condition is established includes a mode in which a moving image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed, a mode in which at least part of the predetermined moving image is stopped and displayed, and a mode in which at least part of the predetermined moving image is displayed. , a mode in which a still image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed, or a mode in which both the moving image and the still image are hidden.

E8-6. Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment and modification, a detection sensor is provided to detect that a game ball has been ejected onto the game board 30, and when the game ball is not detected by the detection sensor for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the transition condition is It is good also as a structure which judges with having been materialized. In this way, if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, the transition condition is not established, so the player is in an uncomfortable situation in which the transition condition is established even though the player is playing the game. can reduce the occurrence of

Further, it may be determined that the return condition is established when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor after the transition condition is established. In this way, even after the transition condition is satisfied, if the game ball is ejected onto the game board 30, the return condition is satisfied. is not established for a long period of time (for example, one minute).

E8-7. Variant 7:
In the above-described embodiment and modification, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected depending on whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the player's selection.

E8-8. Modification 8:
The times, numerical values, etc. that are specifically set in the above-described embodiment and modification are merely examples, and other times, numerical values, etc., can be set as appropriate. For example, the time from when the pattern stops changing until the transition condition is satisfied may be set to something other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of the background music becomes zero to when the demonstration video starts is It may be set to other than 5 seconds.

E8-9. Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment and modified example, when the display mode of the pattern display device 41 is the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the sound output mode is configured so that the volume is zero without outputting music. Alternatively, if the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is to display a demonstration moving image, the player presets demo music corresponding to the demo moving image as the audio output mode. It may be configured to output at the set output level (volume).

In such a configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the display transitions to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the output of the demo music may be started from a predetermined temporal position. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the demonstration moving image and the output of the demonstration music, compared to a configuration in which the time position at which the output of the demonstration music is started fluctuates. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, a predetermined temporal position of the demo music may be set as the temporal head position of the demo music. According to such a configuration, compared to a configuration in which output is started from a position in the middle of the demo music in terms of time, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player.

E8-10. Modification 10:
In the first modification, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires time information, which is information about time, from the RTC 96, and determines whether the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. If it is determined that they match, the sound emission control device 90 starts the processing for executing the RTC effect. Elapsed time from the start of the RTC effect is measured, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has passed since the previous RTC effect was started, and it is determined that the predetermined time has passed. In this case, the configuration may be such that the processing for executing the RTC effect is started.

E8-11. Modification 11:
In the first modification, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to output the RTC effect music at an output level (volume) preset by the player. The RTC effect music may be output at the maximum output level (volume) regardless of the preset output level (volume). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the intensity and the degree of attention of the RTC presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

E8-12. Variant 12:
In addition to adopting the configuration of Modified Example 11, when the RTC production music output at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output, the maximum output level (volume) may be maintained. good. Effects of such a configuration will be described. A player who appreciates the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) is fascinated by the impact of the effect executed at the maximum output level (volume). There may be a desire to continue the game at the output level (volume) of . Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (sound volume) even after the RTC effect is finished.

Further, in addition to adopting the configuration of Modified Example 11, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) ends and the background music is output, the output level (volume) preset by the player is ) may be used. According to such a configuration, the special feeling of the RTC effect that has been executed can be further emphasized, so that the expectation for the next RTC effect can be further improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

In addition, after adopting the configuration of Modification 11, when outputting the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) ends and outputting the background music, the player can adjust the output level (volume) of the sound. A volume setting screen for setting may be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the background music may be output at the audio output level (volume) specified by the player. Effects of such a configuration will be described. A player who listens to the RTC performance music output at the maximum output level (volume) gets used to the high sound volume, so that the desired output level (volume) may change from before listening to the RTC performance music. For this reason, after the RTC effect is completed, there is a demand that the output level (sound volume) of the sound should be reset to a desired output level. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to reset the output level (sound volume) of the sound to a desired output level at the timing after the RTC effect is completed.

F. Sixth embodiment:
F1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 249 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

250 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, entry of a game ball into the general winning hole 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 is also expressed as winning.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 251 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 251(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A symbol for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 251(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 251(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 251(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big win lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 251(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and regarding special information acquired based on winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It refers to a game round that has not started to be displayed. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning to the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, it is possible to display suspension displays corresponding to four suspension game rounds in the first suspension display area Ds1. Also, the number of pending games that can be held based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs the blinking display and the lighting display synchronized with the second design variable display and stop display displayed on the second design display unit 37b of the special design unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal normal map display area NA, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which the surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

F2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 252 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entrances and through gates such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , an opening/closing door driving portion 48b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display portion 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 253 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode.

FIG. 254 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 254(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 254(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 254(a), in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 255 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 255(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 255(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the big win lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 255(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 255(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 256 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 256(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 256(a), in the electric accessary item open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessary item open counter C4 for winning the electric accession election. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 256(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 256(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

F3. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

A sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92 that is a computing device that controls the entire sound emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 based on the generated sound signal. and an audio data ROM 98, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to a sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to start reproducing as instructed by the reproduction start command, and converts the sound data corresponding to the identified sound into the sound data format. Read from the ROM 98 to generate the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 97 then outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . When the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound whose reproduction is to be ended according to the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, generates up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46 . In addition, the sound output LSI 97 can mute the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel according to instructions from the MPU 92, and cancel the mute setting. The sound output LSI 97 reads corresponding audio data for the audio channel set to mute to generate sound to be reproduced. By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel to be silenced to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel to be silenced is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46 .

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 , and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

FIG. 258 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in the audio data ROM. The audio data ROM 98 of the present embodiment includes an audio data storage area 98a for storing audio data corresponding to the contents of various effects, sound effects, dialogues of various characters, etc. A BGM music data storage area 98b is provided for storing BGM music data to be reproduced as BGM (Background Music).

In this embodiment, the audio data ROM 98 stores audio data in MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) format. However, any format can be adopted as the voice data. That is, the audio data may be in a data format in which a sound waveform is sampled by a linear pulse code variation method, or may be data compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). good too. Also, a MIDI file conforming to the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for producing various sounds may be stored in the sound data ROM 98 as sound data. In this case, the sound output LSI 97 has a MIDI sound source, reads a MIDI file for reproducing the type of sound instructed to start reproduction from the MPU 92 from the sound data ROM 98, and makes the MIDI sound source sound according to the read MIDI file. By doing so, the sound may be reproduced. Hereinafter, the description will return to the present embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 258, the BGM music data storage area stores audio data groups constituting 15 types of BGM music M1 to M15. In this embodiment, one BGM piece of music is divided and stored into an introductory portion corresponding to the introductory portion of the BGM piece and a main portion corresponding to the main melody following the introductory portion. Further, the prelude part constituting the BGM music is divided into a plurality of pieces of audio data and stored, and the main part is also divided into a plurality of pieces of audio data and stored.

For example, as shown in FIG. 258, the prelude of the BGM music M1 is divided into two pieces of audio data (first prelude audio data and second prelude audio data) and stored. The main part of M1 is divided into four pieces of audio data (first main part audio data, second main part audio data, third main part audio data, fourth main part audio data) and stored. The reproduction time of each of the six pieces of audio data forming the BGM music piece M1 is 16 seconds. In other words, the BGM music piece M1 is a piece of music with a total reproduction time of 96 seconds (=16 seconds x 6), with the prelude having a reproduction time of 32 seconds and the main part, which is the main melody, having a reproduction time of 64 seconds. It is

Here, the temporal length of one measure of the BGM music M1 is two seconds. Therefore, the reproduction time of each audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1 is eight bars long. In other words, the temporal head position of each audio data constituting the BGM music M1 coincides with the bar break of the BGM music M1. Generally, a piece of music is composed of 8 bars or 16 bars as one section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player is unlikely to feel a sense of incongruity no matter which audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is started to be reproduced. Specifically, for example, even if reproduction is started from the second main part audio data forming part of the BGM music M1, the vocal singing voice is not reproduced from the middle. The effect of dividing one BGM piece of music into a plurality of audio data in such a way that the player does not feel uncomfortable will be described later.

It should be noted that the reproduction time and the number of divisions of each audio data constituting the BGM music M1 shown in FIG. As long as it is divided so as not to give a sense of discomfort, it can be arbitrarily set according to the time length and content of the measure of the BGM music. Further, each piece of audio data constituting one BGM music piece may be divided so that the reproduction times thereof are different from each other, and furthermore, the number of divisions of the introductory part and the main part may be arbitrarily set.

As will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets one BGM song out of a plurality of BGM songs to be played, and when playback of the set BGM song is started, the BGM song is played first. The audio data composing the prelude part of the music is sequentially reproduced, and then the audio data composing the main part is sequentially reproduced. After the last audio data constituting the main part (the fourth main part audio data in the case of the BGM music M1) has been reproduced, the first audio data constituting the main part of the BGM music is reproduced. Playback is started from (first main part audio data). That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment repeatedly reproduces the main part corresponding to the main melody when repeatedly reproducing the music for BGM. Therefore, when the BGM music is repeatedly reproduced, the introductory part of the BGM music is not reproduced every time the BGM music is repeated. It is possible to prevent the mood from being lowered due to the replay of the introductory part. In the example shown in FIG. 258, the introductory part of the BGM music piece M1 is composed of two prelude audio data, and the main part is composed of four main audio data. Each part may be composed of one piece of audio data.

F4. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 259 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. FIG. 259 shows the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 1, the mute setting state on the audio channel 1, and the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 2. FIG.

The sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets one BGM song from among a plurality of BGM songs as a reproduction target on the audio channel 1, and outputs audio data constituting the set BGM song. , sequentially read from the BGM music data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98 and reproduced. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 reads the sound data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the sound channel 2 from the effect sound data storage area 98a of the sound data ROM 98 and reproduces it. That is, in this embodiment, audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and audio channel 2 is used for presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 259, the sound emission control device 90 sets the BGM music M1 as the reproduction target of the audio channel 1, and sequentially reads the audio data constituting the BGM music M1 on the audio channel 1. is playing.

As shown in FIG. 259, the sound emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing to execute the notice effect Y1 during the reproduction of the first prelude sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1 on the sound channel 1. , the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 on the audio channel 2 is started. However, in this case, unlike the case of executing a ready-to-win effect R1, which will be described later, the audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the speaker 46 outputs both the sound corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 and the sound of the BGM music M1 after being synthesized.

After that, while the second introductory part audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1, the audio emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing of executing the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2. Reproduction of audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 is started. In this case, audio channel 1 is set to mute, unlike the case where the above-described advance notice effect Y1 is executed. Therefore, the BGM music M1 is not output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1.

After that, when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2 ends, the audio emission control device 90 reproduces the second main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1 being reproduced on the audio channel 1. Reproduction of the third main part audio data, which is the next audio data, is started, and the mute setting of channel 1 is canceled. That is, the audio light emission control device 90 of the present embodiment is triggered by the completion of the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect on the audio channel 2. Playback of the next audio data in the data group is started, and the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled.

However, at the timing when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled (timing when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect on audio channel 2 ends), if there is no audio data following the audio data being reproduced (BGM If the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being reproduced), the first audio data (the first main part audio data of the BGM music M1) constituting the main part of the BGM music M1 is reproduced. is configured to start

In addition, as shown in FIG. 259, after the playback of the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is completed on the audio channel 1, the sound emission control device 90 reproduces the first main part audio data of the BGM music M1. Start playback from data. That is, the sound emission control device 90 of the present embodiment, after finishing the reproduction of the last sound data (the fourth main part sound data of the BGM music M1) constituting the set BGM music, Instead of starting the reproduction from the beginning audio data of the music (first prelude audio data of the BGM music), the first audio data constituting the main part of the BGM music (the first main part of the BGM music M1) is reproduced. It is configured to start playback from (partial audio data).

Although not shown in FIG. 259, in audio channels other than audio channels 1 and 2, short audio data such as sound effects and characters' lines are reproduced according to the contents of the presentation, and are output from the speaker 46. output. In this embodiment, even if audio data such as sound effects are being reproduced in audio channels other than audio channels 1 and 2, audio channel 1 is not set to mute. etc. are output from the speaker 46 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the BGM music is also output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the advance notice effect, but the BGM music is output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the reach effect. Since the sound is not output from 46, the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect can be emphasized, and the player can pay more attention to the ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect ends and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the reproduction of the audio data constituting the BGM music starts from the beginning. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is unlikely to feel a sense of incongruity no matter which audio data constituting the BGM music is started to be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to restore the BGM music while reducing the sense of discomfort given to the player when the ready-to-win effect ends.

Here, if the control of the present embodiment is not executed, that is, when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the audio data constituting the BGM music does not start playing from the beginning, When the audio data being reproduced on the audio channel 1 is continued to be reproduced even when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the player can When listening to the BGM music in the middle of the audio data constituting the BGM music (for example, in the middle of the vocal singing voice included in the BGM music), the user may feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled, reproduction is started from the beginning of the audio data constituting the BGM music. It is possible to prevent the BGM music from being played back in the middle of vocals included in the music, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, reproduction of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced belongs is started. Since the reproduction of the BGM music is resumed from a time position close to the case where is continuously reproduced from the start to the end of execution of the ready-to-win effect, the music for BGM is continued even after the start to end of the execution of the ready-to-win effect. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player who has imagined that the is continuously reproduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the BGM music is repeatedly reproduced (repeat reproduction), the introductory portion of the BGM music is not repeatedly reproduced. It is possible to prevent the player's mood from being lowered due to the replay of the prelude part of the BGM music.

F5. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game round, the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S60101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step S60102.

In step S60102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S60103.

In step S60103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S60104.

In step S60104, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step S60104 will be described later. After executing step S60104, the process advances to step S60105.

In step S60105, ball entry processing for the through gate accompanying the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the ball entry processing for the through gate in step S60105 will be described later. After executing step S60105, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 260: S60104).

FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step S60201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step S60201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S60201: YES), the process proceeds to step S60202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S60203.

In step S60203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S60204.

In step S60204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S60209.

In step S60201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S60201: NO), the process proceeds to step S60205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S60205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S60205: YES), the process proceeds to step S60206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S60207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S60205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S60205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S60207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step S60208.

In step S60208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S60209.

In step S60209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S60204 or step S60208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S60209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S60209: NO), that is, if the start suspension number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S60209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S60209: YES), the process proceeds to step S60210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S60211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S60212.

In step S60212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S60103 (FIG. 260) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S60210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S60103 (Fig. 260) The value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S60210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S60103 (Fig. 260) It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S60210. After executing step S60212, the process advances to step S60213.

In step S60213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the reservation information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the big winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S60213, the process proceeds to step S60214.

In step S60214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred, and the determination result by the previous determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 264: step S60503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to an increase in the number of pending items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S60214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 261: S60213) of the winning process for the starter.

FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process is based on the reservation information, and the judgment results such as the judgment of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the judgment of the type of the jackpot, and the judgment of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S60301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read by entering the game ball into the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 261). After that, the process advances to step S60302 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the first judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the jackpot lottery due to the ball entry this time. is determined, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S60302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (S60302: YES), the process proceeds to step S60303 to store the success/failure table. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S60305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S60302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (S60302: NO), the process proceeds to step S60304, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S60305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S60305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S60305: YES), the process proceeds to step S60306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S60307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table , and if it is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34, the distribution table for the second starting hole is referred to. After executing step S60307, the process advances to step S60308.

In step S60308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S60308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S60308: YES), the process proceeds to step S60309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S60308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the probability variable jackpot (S60308: NO), the process proceeds to step S60310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S60305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S60305: NO), the process proceeds to step S60311, and the entry into the starting port this time causes the storage area to Read out the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S60312 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S60313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S60313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S60313: YES), the process proceeds to step S60314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S60313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Ball entry processing for through gate>
Next, the ball entry processing for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 260: S60105).

FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a through gate. In step S60401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 or not. In step S60401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S60401: YES), the process proceeds to step S60402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S60401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step S60402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S60402: YES), the process proceeds to step S60403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S60404.

In step S60404, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S60103 (FIG. 260) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S60402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (S60402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the through ball entry processing is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S60501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S60502.

In step S60502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S60503.

In step S60503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step S60502 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S60503, the process advances to step S60504.

In step S60504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S60505.

In step S60505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S60506. In step S60506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S60506, the process advances to step S60507.

In step S60507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S60508.

In step S60508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S60509.

In step S60509, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the process advances to step S60510.

In step S60510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S60503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S60510, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S60510: NO), in steps S60511 and S60512, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S60511, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S60512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing this time (S60510: YES), the process returns to step S60503, and each process from step S60503 to step S60508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S60503 to step S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 264: S60506).

FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S60601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S60601, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S60601: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and the present game round is executed without executing any of the processes after step S60602. End the control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S60601: NO), the process proceeds to step S60602.

In step S60602, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S60602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S60602: NO), the process advances to the game cycle start processing of steps S60603 to S60605. In step S60603, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S60603, when it is determined that the total number of reserved coins CRN is "0" (S60603: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S60603: NO), the process proceeds to step S60604.

In step S60604, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S60605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S60605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S60606.

In step S60606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S60606, the process advances to step S60607.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60602 that the main display section 45 is performing variable display (S60602: YES), the process proceeds to step S60607.

In step S60607, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S60607, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 268) described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S60607 that the variable time has not elapsed (S60607: NO), the process advances to step S60608 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S60608, this game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S60607 that the variation time has elapsed (S60607: YES), the process advances to step S60609 to execute variation end processing. In the fluctuation end process, the stop symbol determined in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 267), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step S60609, the process advances to step S60610.

In step S60610, it is determined whether or not any of the big hit flags stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the variation start process (FIG. 267) to be described later. In step S60610, when it is determined that any of the jackpot flags are ON (S60610: YES), the process proceeds to step S60611, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S60610, when it is determined that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S60610: NO), the process proceeds to step S60612.

In step S60612, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". In step S60612, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (S60612: YES), the process proceeds to step S60613 to set a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game round) ends. is a command that contains information about The customer waiting command set in step S60613 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S60503 in the normal process (FIG. 264). On the other hand, in step S60612, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (S60612: NO), this game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting processing>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 265: S60604).

FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S60701, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored pending information (stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb) among the pending information stored chronologically in the second pending area Rb (Fig. 253). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 253) than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 253) When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S60701, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S60701, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S60701: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S60702 to S60707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S60701, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S60701: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S60708 to S60713 is executed.

In step S60702, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S60703 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S60704. In step S60704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S60705.

In step S60705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S60705, the process advances to step S60706.

In step S60706, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S60707.

In step S60707, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S60707 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S60503 of the normal process (FIG. 264). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S60701, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S60701: NO), The process advances to step S60708.

In step S60708, 1 is subtracted from the second start reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S60709. In step S60709, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the flow advances to step S60710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S60711.

In step S60711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S60711, the process proceeds to step S60712.

In step S60712, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S60713.

In step S60713, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step S60713 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S60503 of the normal process (FIG. 264). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 265: S60605).

FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step S60801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S60801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S60801:YES), it progresses to step S60802.

In step S60802, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 254(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S60804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S60801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S60801: NO), the process proceeds to step S60803.

In step S60803, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 254(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S60804.

At step S60804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (big hit lottery) at step S60802 or step S60803 is a big hit. In step S60804, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S60804: YES), in steps S60805 to S60812, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S60805, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S60805, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S60805: NO), proceed to step S60806 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 255(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step S60805, if it is determined that the second pattern display unit flag is ON (S60805: YES), the process proceeds to step S60807, the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 255 (b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S60806 or step S60807. The process advances to step S60808.

In step S60808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S60806 or step S60807 is the variable probability jackpot. In step S60808, when it is determined that the game result is a probability variable jackpot (S60808: YES), the process proceeds to step S60809.

In step S60809, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is changed in a state where any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S60806 or step S60807. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S60809, the process advances to step S60810.

In step S60810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S60806 or step S60807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S60814.

In step S60808, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S60806 or step S60807 is not a probability variable jackpot (S60808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, to step S60811 move on.

In step S60811, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S60806 or step S60807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S60811, the process advances to step S60812.

In step S60812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S60806 or step S60807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S60814.

In step S60804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S60802 or step S60803 is not jackpot winning (S60804: NO), the process proceeds to step S60813 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the change display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S60813, the process advances to step S60814.

In step S60814, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S60814, the process advances to step S60815.

In step S60815, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S60815, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S60815: NO), the process proceeds to step S60816 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S60814. On the other hand, in step S60815, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S60815: YES), the process proceeds to step S60817 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S60814. After executing step S60816 or step S60817, the process proceeds to step S60818.

In step S60818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S60816 to S60818 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S60503 in the normal process (FIG. 264). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S60818, the process advances to step S60819.

In step S60819, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game turn, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S60819, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 267: S60814).

FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing processing for setting variable time. In step S60901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process advances to step S60902.

In step S60902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S60902: YES), the process proceeds to step S60903.

In step S60903, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. After that, in step S60904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S60902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not won (S60902: NO), the process proceeds to step S60905, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this processing (S60905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S60902, in the step S60905, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S60905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S60906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S60906, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, in step S60904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S60905, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S60905: NO), the process proceeds to step S60907, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, in step S60904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 264: S60507).

FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S61001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the start of the ending period and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S61001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S61001: NO), the process advances to step S61002 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing process period, and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing process period.

If it is determined in step S61002 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (S61002: NO), the flow advances to step S61003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S61003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S61003: NO), the process proceeds to step S61004, timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b ends It is determined whether or not. In step S61004, when it is determined that it is not the timing at which the variable display ends (S61004: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S61004, if it is determined that the time has come to end the variable display (S61004: YES), the process proceeds to step S61005, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether or not there is Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S61005: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S61005, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S61005: YES), the process proceeds to step S61006, and the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S61007. If the high-probability mode flag is OFF in step S61006, the process proceeds directly to step S61007.

In step S61007, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S61007, the process advances to step S61008.

In step S61008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S60503 in the normal process (FIG. 264). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute an opening effect and a right-handed informing effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step S61008, the process advances to step S61009 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61003 that the opening period flag is ON (S61003: YES), the process proceeds to step S61010.

In step S61010, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S61010 that the opening period has ended (S61010: YES), the process advances to step S61011 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S61012.

In step S61012, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S61012, the process advances to step S61013.

In step S61013, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is set. Specifically, while checking the jackpot type flag (16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64, the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in . The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened. After executing step 13913, the process advances to step S61014.

In step S61014, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the flow advances to step S61015 to set an opening start command. The set open start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 at step S60503 in the normal process (FIG. 264). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the set content of the round effect is executed. Start. After executing step S61015, this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S61002, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S61002: YES), the process proceeds to step S61016 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driven state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 36a or that the game balls of the opening limit number have entered. The driving state of the variable winning drive section 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S61016, the process advances to step S61017.

In step S61017, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S61016: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S61017: YES), the process advances to step S61018 to turn off the open/close processing period flag. After executing step S61018, the process advances to step S61019.

In step S61019, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S61019, the process advances to step S61020.

In step S61020, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S61020, the process advances to step S61021.

In step S61021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S60503 in the normal process (FIG. 264). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step S61021, the process proceeds to step S61022.

In step S61022, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61001 that the ending period flag is ON (S61001: YES), the process proceeds to step S61023.

In step S61023, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S61019), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step S61023, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S61023: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S61023: YES), the process proceeds to step S61024.

In step S61024, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S61025 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S61025, the process advances to step S61026 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S61027.

In step S61027, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". If it is determined in step S61027 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (S61027: YES), the process advances to step S61028 to set a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b when the opening/closing execution mode ends. is a command. The customer waiting command set in step S61028 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S60503 in the normal process (FIG. 264). On the other hand, in step S61027, when it is determined that the total number of pending CRN is not "0" (S61028: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 269: S61007).

FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step S61101, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S61101, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered (S61101: NO ), the process advances to step S61102 to set (set) a value of "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and terminate this opening time setting process.

On the other hand, in step S61101, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, if the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode (S61101 : YES), the process advances to step S61103 to set (set) a value of "3500" corresponding to 7 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and this opening time setting process ends.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 269: S61016).

FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S61201, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step S61201 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S61201: NO), the process proceeds to step S61202 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S61202, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S61202: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S61202: NO), the process proceeds to step S61203.

In step S61203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S61203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S61203: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S61203, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S61203: YES), the process proceeds to step S61204, in order to open the big winning opening 36a variable winning driving section 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S61205.

In step S61205, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S61205, the process advances to step S61206.

In step S61206, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 264: step S60503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Also, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S61201, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S61201: YES), the process proceeds to step S61207, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S61207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S61207: NO), the process proceeds to step S61208.

In step S61208, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S61208 that no ball has entered (S61208: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61208 that a ball has entered (S61208: YES), the process proceeds to step S61209, and 1 is subtracted from the winning counter area PC. Thereafter, the process advances to step S61210.

In step S61210, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S61210 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S61210: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S61207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S61207: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S61210 In (S61210: YES), the process proceeds to step S61211 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S61212.

In step S61212, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S61213 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S61213, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S61213: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S61213: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S61214, the flow advances to step S61215 to set the close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. command output processing (FIG. 264: step S60503), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 269: S61024).

FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S61301, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S61301, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S61301: YES), the process proceeds to step S61302 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S61302, the process advances to step S61303.

In step S61303, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S61304 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S61305.

In step S61305, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S61310, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61301 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S61301: NO), the process advances to step S61306 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S61307.

At step S61307, after turning ON the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S61308, and 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S61309.

In step S61309, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S61310.

In step S61310, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 264: S60508).

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S61401, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S61401 that the supported flag is not ON (S61401: NO), the process proceeds to step S61402.

In step S61402, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S61402 that the support winning flag is not ON (S61402: NO), the process proceeds to step S61403.

In step S61403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S61403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61403: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61403: YES), the process proceeds to step S61404.

In step S61404, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S61404 that it is time to end the variable display (S61404: YES), the flow advances to step S61405 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S61404: NO), the process proceeds to step S61406.

In step S61406, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S61406, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S61406: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S61406 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S61406: YES), the process proceeds to step S61407.

In step S61407, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S61408 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S61407 (S61407: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S61408 (S61408: YES), the process advances to step S61409 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S61410.

In step S61410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S61409 is support winning. In step S61410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S61410: YES), the process proceeds to step S61411, and the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S61412. On the other hand, in step S61410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S61410: NO), the process proceeds to step S61412 without executing the processing of step S61411.

In step S61412, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S61412 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S61412: YES), the process proceeds to step S61413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61412 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S61412: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S61413, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S61413, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S61413: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61413 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S61414 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S61415.

In step S61415, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S61415 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 264: step S60503). Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S61407 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S61407: YES), or if it is determined in step S61418 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S61408: NO), the process proceeds to step S61416, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S61417.

In step S61417, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S61416 is support winning. In step S61417, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S61417: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S61417, if it is determined that support is won (S61417: YES), the process advances to step S61418 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S61402 that the support winning flag is ON (S61402: YES), the process advances to step S61419 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S61419, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61419: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61419: YES), the process proceeds to step S61420.

In step S61420, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S61421 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S61401, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S61401: YES), the process advances to step S61422 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 273: S61422).

FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S61501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S61501: YES), the process proceeds to step S61502.

In step S61502, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S61502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61502: NO), the electric opening/closing control process ends. In other words, when the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is ended.

In step S61502, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61502: YES), the process proceeds to step S61503 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S61503, the process advances to step S61504.

In step S61504, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S61505 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S61505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S61505: NO), this electrical opening/closing control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S61505: YES), the process advances to step S61506 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S61501, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S61501: NO), the process proceeds to step S61507 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S61507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S61507: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S61507: YES), the process advances to step S61508 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S61509.

In step S61509, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S61509: NO), the flow advances to step S61510 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S61510 that the high-frequency support mode is on (S61510: YES), the flow advances to step S61511 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S61509 that the open/close execution mode is set (S61509: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S61510 (S61510: NO), the process proceeds to step S61512, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated.

F6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S63101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S63101, the process advances to step S63102.

In step S63102, BGM processing is executed. In the BGM processing, processing such as setting and reproduction of music for BGM is performed. Details of the BGM processing will be described later. After executing step S63102, the process advances to step S63103.

In step S63103, a game round effect process is executed. In the game round effect processing, a process related to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is performed. Details of the game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step S63103, the process advances to step S63104.

In step S63104, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, the effect in the opening period, the effect in the opening/closing process period, and the effect in the ending period are performed. The details of the opening/closing execution mode effect processing will be described later. After executing step S63104, the process advances to step S63105.

In step S63105, a customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process for displaying a demonstration moving image on the pattern display device 41 is executed when the game round has not been executed for a predetermined time. Details of the customer waiting process will be described later. After executing step S63105, the process advances to step S63106.

In step S63106, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-described performance processes. After executing step S63106, the process advances to step S63107.

In step S63107, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step S63107, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for BGM>
Next, BGM processing will be described. The BGM processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 275: S63102).

FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing BGM processing. In step S63201, BGM initialization processing is executed. In the BGM initial setting process, the BGM music M1 is set as the object to be reproduced in the audio channel 1 at the timing when the first game cycle is started after the pachinko machine 10 is activated, and the sound output LSI 97 starts the reproduction of the BGM music M1. Execute the process to make it possible. Details of the BGM initial setting process will be described later. After executing step S63201, the process advances to step S63202.

In step S63202, BGM change processing is executed. In the BGM change process, the BGM to be played back on the audio channel 1 is changed at the timing when the lottery mode or the support mode is changed, such as when the open/close execution mode ends or when the game is executed 100 times during the high-frequency support mode. Execute the process of changing the music for use. Details of the BGM change processing will be described later. After executing step S63202, the process advances to step S63203.

In step S63203, BGM continuous reproduction processing is executed. In the BGM continuous reproduction process, when the reproduction of the audio data constituting the BGM music set to be reproduced is completed, the sound output LSI 97 is instructed to start reproducing the next audio data constituting the BGM music. Execute the process. Details of the BGM continuous reproduction process will be described later. After executing step S63203, the process advances to step S63204.

In step S63204, BGM mute processing is executed. In the BGM mute processing, the sound channel 1 is set to mute at the timing when the ready-to-win performance is started, and processing for canceling the mute setting of the voice channel 1 is executed at the timing when the ready-to-win performance ends. The details of the BGM muting process will be described later. After step S63204 is executed, this BGM processing ends.

<BGM initial setting process>
Next, BGM initial setting processing will be described. The BGM initial setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63201).

FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing BGM initial setting processing. In step S63301, it is determined whether or not the BGM initialization completion flag is ON. The BGM initial setting completion flag is OFF immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned ON when the BGM music M1 is initialized as the first BGM music to be played after the power is turned on, as will be described later. is a flag that If it is determined in step S63301 that the BGM initial setting completion flag is ON (S63301: YES), that is, if the initial setting of the BGM music to be played has already been completed, this BGM initial setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63301 that the BGM initialization completion flag is not ON (S63301: NO), the process proceeds to step S63302.

In step S63302, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S63302 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S63302: YES), the flow advances to step S63303 to set the BGM music piece M1 as an object to be reproduced on audio channel 1. FIG. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S63304 to execute processing for causing the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music piece M1 set as a reproduction target. After that, the flow advances to step S63305 to turn on the BGM initialization completion flag and terminate the BGM initialization processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63302 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (S63302: NO), this BGM initial setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the reproduction of the BGM music M1 is started at the timing when the pattern variation (game cycle) is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. However, the BGM initial setting process can employ other processing aspects as a modification. For example, a configuration for setting a BGM song other than the BGM song M1 as the BGM song to be played first after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or a BGM song to be played first after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. is set at random, and an image for selecting one BGM song from a plurality of BGM songs is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the first BGM to be reproduced after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the player selects the music for the game. In addition, in the present embodiment, the playback of the BGM music M1 is started at the timing when the pattern variation (game round) is started for the first time after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. After the BGM music to be reproduced first after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is set, the set BGM music is played at a predetermined volume or less without waiting for the start of the first pattern variation (game cycle). It may be configured to start playing music.

<BGM change processing>
Next, BGM change processing will be described. The BGM change process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63202).

FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing BGM change processing. In step S63401, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode command has been received. The high-probability mode command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode ends, when the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-probability mode. If it is determined in step S63401 that the high-probability mode command has been received (S63401: YES), the flow advances to step S63402 to execute BGM setting random number acquisition processing. Specifically, the value of the random number counter for setting the music for BGM is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S63403 to refer to the high-probability mode BGM selection table and set the BGM music piece corresponding to the obtained random number counter value as a reproduction target. In the high-probability mode BGM selection table, the values of the random number counter and the BGM songs M6 to M10 are set in association with each other. That is, in the present embodiment, one of the BGM songs M6 to M10 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 during the high-probability mode. After executing step S63403, the process advances to step S63404 to execute processing for causing the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set to be reproduced. After that, the BGM change processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S63401 that the high-probability mode command has not been received (S63401: NO), the flow advances to step S63405 to determine whether or not the low-probability mode command has been received. The low-probability mode command is a command sent from the main MPU 62 at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode ends, when the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the normal jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot, the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. means that the lottery mode after the end of is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In step S63405, if it is determined that the low-probability mode command has been received (S63405: YES), that is, if the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode advances to step S63406 to execute BGM setting random number acquisition processing. Specifically, the value of the random number counter for setting the music for BGM is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S63407 to refer to the BGM selection table for the high-frequency support mode and set the BGM music corresponding to the acquired random number counter value as the object to be reproduced. In the high-frequency support mode BGM selection table, the values of the random number counter and the BGM songs M11 to M15 are set in correspondence. That is, in this embodiment, one of the BGM songs M11 to M15 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S63407, the flow advances to step S63404 described above to execute processing for causing the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set to be reproduced. After that, the BGM change processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S63405 that the low-probability mode command has not been received (S63405: NO), the flow advances to step S63408 to determine whether or not the low-frequency support mode command has been received. The low-frequency support mode command is that the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. This command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 when executed (see step S61415 in FIG. 273). Therefore, receiving the low-frequency support mode command means that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the normal mode, which is the low-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S63408 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (S63408: YES), the flow advances to step S63409 to execute BGM setting random number acquisition processing. Specifically, the value of the random number counter for setting the music for BGM is obtained. After that, the flow advances to step S63410 to refer to the normal mode BGM selection table and set the BGM music piece corresponding to the acquired random number counter value as a reproduction target. In the normal mode BGM selection table, the values of the random number counter and the BGM songs M1 to M5 are set correspondingly. That is, in the present embodiment, one of the BGM songs M1 to M5 is reproduced on the audio channel 1 during the normal mode in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S63410, the flow advances to step S63404 to execute processing for causing the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set to be reproduced. After that, the BGM change processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63408 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S63408: NO), this BGM change processing ends.

In this embodiment, the BGM music to be played is changed when the lottery mode or the support mode is switched. However, as a modification, the BGM music to be played is changed at another timing. may be configured. For example, the configuration may be such that the BGM music to be played back is changed upon execution of a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) of pattern variations (game times).

<BGM continuous playback processing>
Next, BGM continuous reproduction processing will be described. The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63203).

FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing BGM continuous reproduction processing. In step S63501, it is determined whether or not the reproduction of audio data on audio channel 1 has ended. If it is determined in step S63501 that the reproduction of audio data has ended in audio channel 1 (S63501: YES), the process proceeds to step S63502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63501 that the reproduction of audio data has not ended in audio channel 1 (S63501: NO), this BGM continuous reproduction processing ends. Various methods can be adopted as a method of determining whether or not the reproduction of the audio data in the audio channel 1 has ended. For example, the sound output LSI 97 may be configured to transmit a signal indicating that the reproduction of the audio data is finished to the sound/light side MPU 92 at the timing when the reproduction of each audio data is finished. As another example, the sound and light side ROM 93 stores information about the data structure of the sound data group that constitutes each BGM song, and the sound and light side MPU 92, when starting to reproduce the sound data, The reproduction time of the audio data is obtained based on the information on the audio channel 1, and the reproduction time is set in the timer counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it has been performed.

In step S63502, it is determined whether or not audio data following the audio data whose reproduction has ended exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, when the BGM music M1 is set as the reproduction target, when the reproduction of the second introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1 is completed, the BGM music M1 has the second prelude part audio data. Since the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the introductory part audio data, it is determined that the audio data following the reproduced audio data exists. On the other hand, when the reproduction of the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is completed, the audio data following the fourth main part audio data does not exist in the BGM music M1. It is determined that the next audio data does not exist. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as a method of determining whether or not the sound data next to the sound data whose reproduction has been completed exists in the BGM music. For example, the last audio data of the audio data group that constitutes the BGM music includes information indicating that the audio data is the last audio data in the audio data group that constitutes the BGM music. When the output LSI 97 transmits a signal indicating that the reproduction of the audio data is completed to the sound and light side MPU 92 at the timing when the reproduction of the last audio data is completed, the audio data whose reproduction has been completed is Information indicating that it is the last audio data in the audio data group constituting the BGM music is included in the signal, and the sound and light side MPU 92 analyzes the signal to identify the audio data that has been reproduced. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the next audio data exists in the BGM music. As another example, the sound and light side ROM 93 stores information about the data structure of the audio data group that constitutes each BGM music piece, and the sound and light side MPU 92 determines whether or not the reproduction is possible based on the information about the data structure. It may be configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not there is audio data next to the finished audio data in the BGM music. As another example, information about the data structure of the audio data group constituting each BGM music piece is stored in the audio data ROM 98, and the sound and light side MPU 92 can access the audio data ROM 98. configuration and based on information about the data configuration stored in the audio data ROM 98, it is determined whether or not the audio data next to the audio data that has been reproduced exists in the BGM music piece. It is good also as a possible structure.

If it is determined in step S63502 that there is audio data next to the audio data whose reproduction has been completed (S63502: YES), the process advances to step S63503 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to reproduce the next audio data in audio channel 1. to start. After that, the present BGM continuous reproduction processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63502 that there is no audio data next to the audio data whose reproduction has been completed (S63502: NO), the flow advances to step S63504, and the BGM set as the reproduction target in audio channel 1 It causes the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first main part audio data of the original music. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main part of the BGM music is repeatedly reproduced after the introductory part is completely reproduced. After step S63504 is executed, this BGM continuous reproduction process ends.

<BGM muting processing>
Next, BGM muting processing will be described. The BGM mute process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63204).

FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing. In step S63601, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute start flag is ON. As will be described later, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON at the timing at which the ready-to-win effect is started and at the timing after two minutes have elapsed without execution of the symbol variation (game round) during the period when the open/close execution mode is not executed. This flag is turned OFF when channel 1 is set to mute. That is, the BGM mute start flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing at which the audio channel 1 is set to mute.

If it is determined in step S63601 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S63601: YES), the flow advances to step S63602 to set audio channel 1 to mute. After that, the flow advances to step S63603 to turn off the BGM mute start flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S63604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63601 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S63601: NO), the processing proceeds to step S63604 without executing the processing of steps S63602 and S63603.

In step S63604, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute end flag is ON. As will be described later, the BGM mute end flag is set at the timing at which the ready-to-win effect ends and the timing at which the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 during the period during which the demonstration video described later is displayed (the pattern variation has started). timing), and is turned OFF when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled. That is, the BGM mute end flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing of canceling mute setting of audio channel 1 .

If it is determined in step S63604 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S63604: NO), this BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63604 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S63604: YES), the flow advances to step S63605 to determine whether or not the cue flag is ON. As will be described later, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing when the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 (the timing when the pattern variation starts) during the period when the demonstration moving image is displayed. , is a flag for determining whether or not the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled and the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the beginning (first prelude audio data).

If it is determined in step S63605 that the cue flag is not ON (S63605: NO), the flow advances to step S63606, and the audio data next to the audio data being reproduced on audio channel 1 is present in the BGM music. Determine whether or not Specifically, for example, when the BGM music M1 is set as the reproduction target, if the second introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being reproduced, the BGM music M1 has the second prelude part audio data. Since the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the introductory part audio data, it is determined that the audio data following the audio data being reproduced exists. On the other hand, when the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being reproduced, the BGM music M1 does not have audio data following the fourth main part audio data. It is determined that the next audio data does not exist.

If it is determined in step S63606 that there is audio data next to the audio data being reproduced (S63606: YES), the process advances to step S63607 to instruct the sound output LSI 97 to reproduce the next audio data in audio channel 1. let it start. After that, the flow advances to step S63608 to cancel the mute setting of audio channel 1. FIG. That is, at the timing when the ready-to-win effect ends and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the reproduction of the audio data constituting the BGM music starts from the beginning. After that, the flow advances to step S63609 to turn off the BGM mute end flag and end the BGM mute processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63606 that there is no audio data next to the audio data being reproduced (S63606: NO), the process proceeds to step S63610, and in audio channel 1, the BGM set as the reproduction target The sound output LSI 97 is caused to start reproducing the first main part audio data of the music. Thereafter, the process advances to step S63608 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. That is, at the timing when the ready-to-win effect ends and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, there is no audio data next to the audio data being reproduced, so the reproduction of the BGM music set to be reproduced is repeated. However, the audio data constituting the prelude part of the BGM music is not reproduced, and the reproduction is started from the beginning of the first main part audio data constituting the main part of the BGM music. After that, the flow advances to step S63609 to turn off the BGM mute end flag and end the BGM mute process.

If it is determined in step S63605 that the cue flag is ON (S63605: YES), the flow advances to step S63611 to turn off the cue flag. After that, the flow advances to step S63612 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set to be reproduced on the audio channel 1 . That is, in the present embodiment, when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled after returning from the demonstration video, the reproduction is started from the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set as the reproduction object. It will be. Thereafter, the process advances to step S63608 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the flow advances to step S63609 to turn off the BGM mute end flag and end the BGM mute process.

<Processing for game round production>
Next, the game cycle effect processing will be described. The game round effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 275: S63103).

FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing processing for game round effect. In step S63701, a game round effect setting process is executed. The game round effect setting process is a process executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process of setting an effect to be executed in the game round when the game round is started. be. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S63701, the process advances to step S63702.

In step S63702, a game round effect execution process is executed. The game round effect execution process is a process executed when the game round effect (notice effect and ready-to-win effect) is set to be executed in the game round effect setting process. The details of the game round effect execution process will be described later. After executing step S63702, the process for this game round effect is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect process (FIG. 281: S63701).

FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step S63801, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step S63801, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (S63801: NO), this game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S63801 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (S63801: YES), the process proceeds to step S63802.

In step S63802, the command for variation received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the information of the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S63803.

In step S63803, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (the content and execution timing of the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S63803, the process advances to step S63804.

In step S63804, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, on the effective line L of the pattern display device 41 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game time is the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game round is the result of losing, the presence or absence of the occurrence of ready-to-win is determined from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L is not established, and the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S63804, the process advances to step S63805.

In step S63805, processing for setting the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step S63804 is performed. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting a variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S63806.

In step S63806, the information of the production pattern, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the production command. After that, the flow advances to step S63807 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S63807, the flow advances to step S63808 to execute update processing at the start of fluctuation. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the reserved display in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. FIG. After executing step S63808, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 282: S63803) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step S63901, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, a effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process advances to step S63902.

In step S63902, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (big hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. In step S63902, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (S63902: YES), the process proceeds to step S63903, refers to the jackpot effect pattern table, and determines the variation time and effect pattern in this game round. A performance pattern corresponding to a random number is selected. After that, the process proceeds to step S63907, and the selected effect pattern is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In step S63902, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not a big hit (S63902: NO), the process proceeds to step S63904, and whether the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach occurrence determine whether or not In step S63904, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach occurrence (S63904: YES), the process proceeds to step S63905, the reach production pattern table is referred to, and the fluctuation in the current game round A performance pattern corresponding to time and a random number for performance pattern is selected. After that, the process proceeds to step S63907, and the selected effect pattern is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round.

In step S63904, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not the occurrence of reach (S63904: NO), the process proceeds to step S63906, the performance pattern table for loss is referred to, and the fluctuation in the current game round A performance pattern corresponding to time and a random number for performance pattern is selected. After that, the process proceeds to step S63907, and the selected effect pattern is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step S63907, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Processing for execution of game round effect>
Next, the processing for executing the game round effect will be described. The game round effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect process (FIG. 281: S63702).

FIG. 284 is a flow chart showing processing for executing a game round effect. In step S64001, it is determined whether or not there is an effect pattern set in the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 283) described above. In step S64001, when it is determined that the set effect pattern does not exist (S64001: NO), the process for executing this game round effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in step S64001, when it is determined that the set effect pattern exists (S64001: YES), the process proceeds to step S64002.

In step S64002, the set effect pattern is referred to, and then the process advances to step S64003 to determine whether or not it is time to start the game round effect (notice effect, ready-to-win effect). As described above, the effect pattern stores the content and timing of the effect to be executed in the game round.

In step S64003, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the game round effect (notice effect, ready-to-win effect) (S64003: NO), the process proceeds to step S64012 which will be described later. On the other hand, in step S64003, if it is determined that it is time to start the game round effect (notice effect, ready-to-win effect) (S64003: YES), the process proceeds to step S64004, and it is determined whether or not it is time to start the notice effect. do.

In step S64004, if it is determined that it is time to start the notice effect (S64004: YES), the process proceeds to step S64005, and the display control device 100 issues a moving image display start command corresponding to the content of the notice effect set in the effect pattern. Send to After that, the process advances to step S64006 to start light emission control processing of various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the notice effect set in the effect pattern. After that, the flow advances to step S64007 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data corresponding to the content of the advance notice effect set in the effect pattern in the sound channel 2. FIG. After that, the process for executing this game round effect is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S64004, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the announcement effect (S64004: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect, the process proceeds to step S64008, and the BGM mute start flag is turned ON. to Thus, in this embodiment, the sound channel 1 is not set to mute during the execution of the advance notice effect, while the sound channel 1 is set to mute during the execution of the ready-to-win effect. After executing step S64008, the process advances to step S64009 to transmit a moving image display start command corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect set in the effect pattern to the display control device 100. FIG. After that, the process advances to step S64010 to start light emission control processing of various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect set in the effect pattern. After that, the process proceeds to step S64011, and in the audio channel 2, the sound output LSI 97 is caused to start reproducing the audio data corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect set in the effect pattern. After that, the process for executing this game round effect is terminated.

As described above, in step S64003, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the game round effect (notice effect, ready-to-win effect) (S64003: NO), the process proceeds to step S64012. In step S64012, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the ready-to-win effect. In step S64012, when it is determined that it is time to end the ready-to-win effect (S64012: YES), the process proceeds to step S64013 to turn on the BGM mute end flag. As a result, the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled at the end timing of the ready-to-win effect. After executing step S64013, the process for executing this game round effect is terminated. On the other hand, in step S64012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ready-to-win effect (S64012: NO), the process for executing this game round effect is terminated without executing the process of step S64013.

<Processing for opening/closing execution mode effect>
Next, the opening/closing execution mode effect processing will be described. The open/close execution mode rendering process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 275: S63104).

FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing processing for opening/closing execution mode effect. In step S64101, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received. If it is determined in step S64101 that an opening command has been received (S64101: YES), the process advances to step S64102 to stop the reproduction of the audio data being reproduced on audio channel 1. FIG. After that, the flow advances to step S64103 to transmit a moving image display start command corresponding to the opening effect to the display control device 100. FIG. When the display control device 100 receives the moving image display start command corresponding to the opening effect, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to start displaying the moving image corresponding to the opening effect. After executing step S64103, the process advances to step S64104 to start light emission control processing of various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the opening effect. After that, the flow advances to step S64105 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing audio data corresponding to the content of the opening effect on the audio channel 2 . After that, the process proceeds to step S64106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64101 that the opening command has not been received (S64101: NO), the process proceeds to step S64106 without executing the processes from step S64102 to step S64105 described above.

In step S64106, it is determined whether or not an opening start command has been received. If it is determined in step S64106 that the opening start command has been received (S64106: YES), the process advances to step S64107 to transmit a moving image display start command corresponding to the round effect to the display control device 100. When the display control device 100 receives the moving image display start command corresponding to the round effect, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to start displaying the moving image corresponding to the round effect. After executing step S64107, the process advances to step S64108 to start light emission control processing of various lamps 47 corresponding to the contents of the round effect. After that, the flow advances to step S64109 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the sound data corresponding to the content of the round effect on the sound channel 2 . Thereafter, the process advances to step S64110. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64106 that the opening start command has not been received (S64106: NO), the process proceeds to step S64110 without executing the above-described steps S64107 to S64109.

In step S64110, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S64110 that an ending command has been received (S64110: YES), the process advances to step S64111 to transmit a moving image display start command corresponding to the ending effect to the display control device 100. When the display control device 100 receives the moving image display start command corresponding to the ending effect, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to start displaying the moving image corresponding to the ending effect. After executing step S64111, the process advances to step S64112 to start light emission control processing of various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the ending effect. After that, the flow advances to step S64113 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data corresponding to the content of the ending effect on the audio channel 2 . After that, the main opening/closing execution mode effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64110 that the ending command has not been received (S64110: NO), the present opening/closing execution mode effect processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S64111 to S64113 described above. .

<Customer waiting process>
Next, the customer waiting process will be described. The customer waiting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 275: S63105).

FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing processing for customer waiting. In step S64201, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting command has been received. As described above, the customer waiting command is suspended when no suspension information is stored in the suspension information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game round) ends, and when the open/close execution mode ends. This command is sent from the main controller 60 when no pending information is stored in the information storage area 64b. If it is determined in step S64201 that a customer waiting command has been received (S64201: YES), the flow advances to step S64202 to turn on the customer waiting flag. The customer waiting flag is a flag for determining whether or not a period in which no pattern variation (game cycle) is executed continues for two minutes in a state other than the open/close execution mode, and the above-described customer waiting command is received. is turned ON when a command is received, and is turned OFF when a variation command and a type command are received as will be described later. After executing step S64202, the process advances to step S64203. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64201 that the customer waiting command has not been received (S64201: NO), the process proceeds to step S64203 without executing the process of step S64202.

In step S64203, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S64203 that the customer waiting flag is ON (S64203: YES), the process advances to step S64204 to determine whether two minutes have passed since the customer waiting flag was turned ON. . If it is determined in step S64204 that two minutes have elapsed since the customer waiting flag was turned ON (S64204: YES), the process proceeds to step S64205.

In step S64205, the customer waiting flag is turned off. After that, the flow advances to step S64206 to turn on the BGM mute start flag. After that, the flow advances to step S 64207 to transmit a demonstration moving image display start command to the display control device 100 . When the display control device 100 receives the demonstration moving image display start command, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to start displaying the demonstration moving image. After that, the flow advances to step S64208 to turn on the demonstration moving image displaying flag. The demonstration moving image display flag is a flag for determining whether or not a demonstration moving image is being displayed. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets the sound channel 1 to mute when the period in which the pattern variation (game round) is not executed continues for two minutes in the state where the open/close execution mode is not executed. , to start displaying the demo video. After executing step S64208, the process advances to step S64209.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64203 that the customer waiting flag is not ON (S64203: NO), and in step S64204 it is determined that two minutes have not passed since the customer waiting flag was turned ON. In that case (S64204: NO), the process proceeds to step S64209 without executing the processes from step S64205 to step S64208 described above.

In step S64209, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S64209 that the variation command and type command have not been received (S64209: NO), the customer waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64209 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S64209: YES), the flow advances to step S64210 to determine whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S64210 that the customer waiting flag is ON (S64210: YES), the process proceeds to step S64211 to turn off the customer waiting flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S64212. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64210 that the customer waiting flag is not ON (S64210: NO), the process proceeds to step S64212 without executing the process of step S64211.

In step S64212, it is determined whether or not the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S64212 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S64212: YES), the process advances to step S64213 to transmit a demonstration moving image display end command to the display control device 100. FIG. When the display control device 100 receives the demonstration moving image display end command, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to end the display of the demonstration moving image. After that, the flow advances to step S64214 to turn off the demonstration moving image displaying flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S64215 to turn on the BGM mute end flag. After that, the process advances to step S64216 to turn on the cue flag and terminate the customer waiting process. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment ends the display of the demonstration moving image, turns on the BGM mute end flag, and performs voice Cancel the mute setting for channel 1. Then, by turning on the cue flag, in the audio channel 1, reproduction is started from the beginning of the BGM music set to be reproduced (first prelude audio data).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64212 that the demonstration video display flag is not ON (S64212: NO), the process for waiting for the customer ends without executing the processes from step S64213 to step S64216 described above. .

By executing the customer waiting process of FIG. 286 described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment continues for 2 minutes while the pattern variation (game round) is not executed in the state not in the open/close execution mode. In this case, by turning ON the BGM mute start flag, audio channel 1 is set to mute, and display of the demonstration moving image is started. Then, when the pattern variation (game cycle) is started during the display of the demonstration moving image, the display of the demonstration moving image is ended, and the BGM mute end flag is turned ON to release the mute setting of the audio channel 1.例文帳に追加Then, by turning on the cue flag, in the audio channel 1, reproduction is started from the beginning of the BGM music set to be reproduced (first prelude audio data).

However, the processing mode of the customer waiting process is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 286, and other modes can be adopted as modifications.

For example, as a modification, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the open/close execution mode and the period in which the pattern variation (game cycle) is not executed continues for one minute, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON to make a sound. Set channel 1 to mute. However, display of the demo video does not start. Then, when one minute has passed since the audio channel 1 was set to mute while the symbol variation (game cycle) was not started, the display of the demonstration moving image may be started. That is, after a period of one minute in which no pattern variation (game cycle) is executed in the state where the open/close execution mode is not executed, the display of the demonstration video is not started, but the audio channel 1 is set to mute. The state will continue for 1 minute. Then, in this configuration, when the pattern variation (game cycle) starts during the period from when the audio channel 1 is set to mute to when the demonstration video starts to be displayed, the cue flag is turned ON. First, in the same way as when the ready-to-win effect ends, the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced in the audio channel 1 belongs is started, and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled. . The reason for this is that there is a high possibility that the same player continues to play games on the pachinko machine even though the pattern variation has not started for one minute or longer. On the other hand, when the pattern variation (game cycle) starts during the display of the demo video, the display of the demo video is terminated and the cue flag is set to ON, thereby setting the game to be played back on audio channel 1. A configuration may be adopted in which reproduction is started from the beginning (first prelude audio data) of the selected BGM music, and the mute setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled. The reason for this is that the variation of the symbols has not started for two minutes or more, and there is a high possibility that another new player has started a game on the pachinko machine.

Thus, in the above-described modified example, the reproduction start position of the BGM music at the timing when the mute setting is canceled is determined according to the length of the period during which the sound channel 1 is set to mute. there is That is, in the same way as when the ready-to-win effect ends, reproduction of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music piece to which the audio data being reproduced in the audio channel 1 belongs is started, and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled. or to start playback from the beginning of the BGM music set for playback on audio channel 1 (first prelude audio data) and cancel the mute setting for audio channel 1. It is configured to be determined according to the length of the period set to mute.

Further, as another modification, the pachinko machine 10 increases the volume of the audio channel 1 for 5 seconds when the period in which the pattern variation (game round) is not executed continues for 1 minute while the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect. fade out. After the fade-audio period of 5 seconds has elapsed, audio channel 1 is set to mute by turning on the BGM mute start flag. However, display of the demo video does not start. Then, when one minute has passed since the audio channel 1 was set to mute while the symbol variation (game cycle) was not started, the display of the demonstration moving image may be started. In this configuration, when the pattern variation (game round) is started during the fade-out period of 5 seconds, the volume of the audio channel 1 is restored to the volume before the start of fade-out processing. Also, when the pattern variation (game round) starts during the period from when the sound channel 1 is set to mute to when 30 seconds have passed, the cue flag is not turned ON, and the ready-to-win effect ends. Similarly, the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced in audio channel 1 belongs is started to be reproduced, and the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled. On the other hand, if the pattern change (game round) starts after 30 seconds have passed since the audio channel 1 was set to mute (including the period during which the demo video is being displayed), the demo video is being displayed. If so, the display of the demo video is terminated, and by turning on the cue flag, playback is started from the beginning of the BGM song set as the playback target on audio channel 1 (first prelude audio data). It may be configured to start and cancel the mute setting of the audio channel 1 . That is, cueing processing for starting reproduction from the beginning of the BGM music piece (first prelude audio data) is performed before the display of the demonstration video is started during the period in which the audio channel 1 is set to mute. It may be configured to be executed even when the pattern variation (game cycle) is started at the timing of .

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S64301, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S64302.

In step S64302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

288 is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S64401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

289 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S64501, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 288) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a moving image display start command corresponding to the advance notice performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the notice performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加When a moving image display start command corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加When a moving image display start command corresponding to the opening performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the opening performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加When a moving image display start command corresponding to the round performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the round performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加Also, when a moving image display start command corresponding to the ending performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the ending performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加Further, when the demonstration moving image display start command is stored, the image drawing and display control is started so that the demonstration moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

In the command processing (S64501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image corresponding to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step S64502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S64501), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S64503.

In step S64503, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S64502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S64504.

In step S64504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S64503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step S64505, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the temporal start position of the entire BGM music set to be reproduced (in FIG. 259, the temporal start position of the first introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1). After reproducing to the last position (temporally last position of the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1), the BGM music is not the temporally leading position of the introductory part of the BGM music, but the BGM music. (In FIG. 259, the temporal start position of the first main part audio data of the BGM music M1) corresponding to the main melody of the BGM music. It is possible to prevent the player's mood, which has been excited by listening to the main part, from being lowered by the replay of the prelude part.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the BGM music is recorded at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions (at the beginning of the time of the audio recorded in each audio data constituting the BGM music (part of the BGM music)). position). The temporal head position of the audio recorded in each audio data constituting one BGM music (part of the BGM music) coincides with the break of the bar of the BGM music. Therefore, since the reproduction can be started from the bar break of the BGM music, the player can start the reproduction from a temporal position different from the temporal head position of the entire BGM music without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Reproduction of the BGM music can be started.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the BGM music includes a vocal voice, but the audio recorded in each audio data constituting one BGM music (a part of the BGM music) is temporally different. Since the head position is set to a temporal position in a period during which the vocalist's voice is not included in the playback time of the BGM music, each audio data that constitutes one BGM music is timed. Even if playback is started from the beginning position, the vocal voice will not be played from the middle. Therefore, the BGM song containing the vocal voice can be played at a time other than the beginning position of the entire BGM song without giving the player a sense of incongruity or discomfort that the vocal voice is reproduced from the middle. It becomes possible to start playback from the position.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the BGM music is being reproduced at the time when the mute state of the audio channel 1 starts, the reproduction of the BGM music continues even after the mute state starts. Then, with the termination of the mute state as a trigger, a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music (in FIG. 259), the temporal playback position of the BGM song being played at the time when the mute state ends (recorded in the second main part audio data of the BGM song M1 in FIG. 259). 259 (in FIG. 259, the beginning of the audio recorded in the third main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1) position).

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the BGM music is continuously reproduced even during the mute state of the audio channel 1, and the reproduction of the BGM music continues even after the mute state ends. Imagining the time position of the BGM music after the end of the mute state by the expected player, and the time position of the BGM music whose reproduction was actually started upon the end of the mute state. It is possible to start the reproduction of the BGM music from a predetermined temporal position while suppressing the deviation of the time. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music are set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the reproduction of the BGM music is started from those temporal positions. Therefore, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the BGM music can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect on the audio channel 2, the BGM music being reproduced on the audio channel 1 is in a mute state in which the speaker 46 does not output, so that the ready-to-win effect is supported. The sound can be made more conspicuous, and the player's attention can be focused on the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when returning from the state in which the demonstration video is displayed and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set to be reproduced is Playback starts from The reason for this will be explained. A state in which a demonstration moving image is displayed on the pachinko machine 10 is often a state in which there is no player in front of the pachinko machine 10 . Then, the player newly sits down in front of the pachinko machine 10, starts the game, and the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the pattern variation (game cycle) is started. Then, the display of the demonstration moving image ends, the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, and the reproduction of the prelude of the BGM music starts from the beginning. That is, a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 10 and starts a new game can listen to the BGM music from the beginning of the BGM music without omission, and the player is ready for the game to start from now on. You can raise your expectations even further.

F7. Modification of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

F7-1. Variant 1:
FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from the sixth embodiment described above is that the method of setting audio data for starting reproduction when canceling the mute setting of audio channel 1 is different. FIG. 290 shows the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 1, the mute setting state on the audio channel 1, and the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 2. FIG.

The sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM piece of music out of a plurality of BGM pieces of music to be played back on the audio channel 1, and reproduces the audio data constituting the set BGM piece of music. , sequentially read from the BGM music data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98 and reproduced. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 reads the sound data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the sound channel 2 from the effect sound data storage area 98a of the sound data ROM 98 and reproduces it. That is, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment, the audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and the audio channel 2 is used for presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 290, the sound emission control device 90 sets the BGM music M1 as the reproduction target of the audio channel 1, and sequentially reads the audio data constituting the BGM music M1 on the audio channel 1. is playing.

As shown in FIG. 290, the sound emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing of executing the notice effect Y1 during the reproduction of the first introductory part sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1 on the sound channel 1. , the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 on the audio channel 2 is started. However, in this case, unlike the case of executing a ready-to-win effect R1, which will be described later, the audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the speaker 46 outputs both the sound corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 and the sound of the BGM music M1 after being synthesized.

After that, while the second introductory part audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1, the audio emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing of executing the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2. Reproduction of audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 is started. In this case, audio channel 1 is set to mute, unlike the case where the above-described advance notice effect Y1 is executed. Therefore, the BGM music M1 is not output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1.

After that, when the reproduction of the second introductory part audio data is completed during the period in which the audio channel 1 is set to mute, the audio emission control device 90 starts reproducing the next audio data, the first main part audio data. At the same time, the first main part audio data whose reproduction is started is set as return audio data. That is, the audio light emission control device 90 of the present modification first ends the reproduction of the audio data after the audio channel 1 is set to mute. When the reproduction of the next audio data is started, the audio data whose reproduction is started is set as the audio data for recovery. After that, when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2 ends, the audio emission control device 90 reproduces the first main part audio data, which is the audio data set for return. Start and cancel the mute setting of audio channel 1.

However, if the return audio data is not set at the timing when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled (the timing when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect on audio channel 2 ends), that is, audio channel 1 is set to muted, and if no new audio data is reproduced and no recovery audio data is set, audio channel 1 is set to muted, as in the sixth embodiment. is configured to start the reproduction of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced belongs in the period of . Furthermore, when there is no audio data following the audio data being played during the period when the audio channel 1 is set to mute (when the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being played) , the reproduction is started from the first audio data constituting the main part of the BGM music (the first main part audio data of the BGM music M1). However, as a modification, when there is no audio data following the audio data being played during the period when the audio channel 1 is set to mute (the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1 was being played case), the reproduction may be started from the audio data at the beginning of the BGM music (the first prelude audio data of the BGM music M1).

Thus, in this modification, the BGM music is also output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the advance notice effect, but the BGM music is output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the reach effect. Since the sound is not output, the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect can be emphasized, and the player can pay more attention to the ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, according to this modification, when the ready-to-win effect ends and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the audio data constituting the BGM music starts to be reproduced from the beginning. As described above, in this modified example, the player is unlikely to feel a sense of incongruity no matter which audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is started to be reproduced. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect ends, the BGM music can be restored while reducing the sense of discomfort given to the player.

Furthermore, in this modified example, compared to the sixth embodiment described above, the audio data of the BGM music played during the period in which the audio channel 1 is set to mute and could not be listened to by the player is eliminated. can be reduced in number. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 259 of the sixth embodiment described above, the player hears the first main part of the BGM music piece M1 reproduced during the period when the audio channel 1 is set to mute. Although the sound recorded in the sound data and the second main part sound data cannot be heard, in the example shown in FIG. It is possible to listen to the sounds recorded in the first main part audio data and the second main part audio data of the recorded BGM music M1 after canceling the mute setting. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction that he could not listen to a part of the BGM music due to the silence of the audio channel 1 due to the execution of the ready-to-win effect.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device of Modification 1>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 1 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the sixth embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
The BGM continuous reproduction process in Modification 1 will be described. The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63203).

291 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous reproduction process in Modification 1. FIG. In step S64601, it is determined whether or not the reproduction of audio data on audio channel 1 has ended. If it is determined in step S64601 that the reproduction of audio data has ended in audio channel 1 (S64601: YES), the process proceeds to step S64602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64601 that the reproduction of audio data has not ended in audio channel 1 (S64601: NO), this BGM continuous reproduction processing ends.

In step S64602, it is determined whether or not audio data following the audio data whose reproduction has ended exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, when the BGM music M1 is set as the reproduction target, when the reproduction of the second introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1 is completed, the BGM music M1 has the second prelude part audio data. Since the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the introductory part audio data, it is determined that the next audio data exists. On the other hand, when the reproduction of the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is finished, the next audio data exists because the BGM music M1 does not have the next audio data after the fourth main part audio data. Decide not to.

If it is determined in step S64602 that the next audio data exists (S64602: YES), the process advances to step S64603 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the next audio data in audio channel 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S64605, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64602 that the next audio data does not exist (S64602: NO), the process proceeds to step S64604, and in audio channel 1, the first main part of the BGM music set as the reproduction target is It causes the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data. Therefore, in this modified example, the main part of the BGM music is repeatedly reproduced after the introductory part is completely reproduced. After executing step S64604, the process advances to step S64605.

In step S64605, it is determined whether or not the return setting flag is ON. As will be described later, the return setting flag is turned ON when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is started (see step S64704 in FIG. 292), and when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled, the audio data ( This is a flag that turns OFF when voice data for recovery) is set. That is, when the return setting flag is ON, it means that the audio channel 1 is set to mute and that the return audio data should be set. Further, if the return setting flag is not ON, it means that the sound channel 1 is not set to mute, or that the sound data for return has already been set. That is, when the recovery setting flag is not ON, it means that the recovery audio data should not be set.

If it is determined in step S64605 that the return setting flag is not ON (S64605: NO), it is not a state in which the sound data for return should be set, so this BGM continuous reproduction processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64605 that the return setting flag is ON (S64605: YES), it is in a state where the voice data for return should be set, so the process proceeds to step S64606 and either step S64603 or step S64604. The audio data whose reproduction is started in is set as audio data for return. After that, the flow advances to step S64607 to turn off the return setting flag and terminate the present BGM continuous reproduction processing.

<BGM muting processing>
Next, BGM muting processing in Modification 1 will be described. The BGM mute process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63204).

292 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing according to Modification 1. FIG. In step S64701, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON at the timing at which the ready-to-win effect is started and at the timing after two minutes have elapsed without execution of the symbol variation (game cycle) during the period when the open/close execution mode is not executed. This flag is turned OFF when channel 1 is set to mute. That is, the BGM mute start flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing at which the audio channel 1 is set to mute.

If it is determined in step S64701 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S64701: YES), the flow advances to step S64702 to set audio channel 1 to mute. After that, the flow advances to step S64703 to turn off the BGM mute start flag. After that, the flow advances to step S64704 to turn on the return setting flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S64705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64701 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S64701: NO), the process proceeds to step S64705 without executing the processes from step S64702 to step S64704.

In step S64705, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute end flag is the timing at which the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 during the period when the ready-to-win effect ends and the demonstration video is displayed (timing at which the pattern variation starts). , and is turned OFF when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled. That is, the BGM mute end flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing of canceling mute setting of audio channel 1 .

If it is determined in step S64705 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S64705: NO), this BGM mute process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64705 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S64705: YES), the flow advances to step S64706 to determine whether or not the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing when the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 (the timing when the pattern variation starts) during the period when the demonstration moving image is displayed. , is a flag for determining whether or not the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled and the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the beginning (first prelude audio data).

If it is determined in step S64706 that the cue flag is not ON (S64706: NO), the flow advances to step S64707 to determine whether or not the return setting flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S64707 that the return setting flag is not ON (S64707: NO), that is, if the return audio data has already been set, the process advances to step S64708, and in audio channel 1, return is performed. causes the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data set for use. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S64709 to cancel the mute setting for audio channel 1. After that, the process advances to step S64710 to turn off the BGM mute end flag, and the present BGM mute process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64707 that the return setting flag is ON (S64707: YES), that is, the audio data being reproduced at the start of the mute setting of audio channel 1 will be restored by the time the mute setting is released. Since it did not end, the processes of steps S64605 to S64607 are not executed in the BGM continuous reproduction process (FIG. 291), and if the sound data for return is not set, the flow advances to step S64711 to set the return setting flag. to OFF. After that, the flow advances to step S64712 to determine whether or not the audio data next to the audio data being reproduced on the audio channel 1 exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, when the BGM music M1 is set as a reproduction target, if the second introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being reproduced, the BGM music M1 has the second prelude part audio data. Since the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the introductory part audio data, it is determined that the audio data following the audio data being reproduced exists. On the other hand, when the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being reproduced, there is no audio data following the fourth main part audio data in the BGM music M1. It is determined that the next audio data does not exist.

If it is determined in step S64712 that there is audio data next to the audio data being reproduced (S64712: YES), the process advances to step S64713 to instruct the sound output LSI 97 to reproduce the next audio data in audio channel 1. let it start. Thereafter, the process advances to step S64709 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the process advances to step S64710 to turn off the BGM mute end flag, and the present BGM mute process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64712 that there is no audio data next to the audio data being reproduced (S64712: NO), the process proceeds to step S64714, and in audio channel 1, the BGM set as the reproduction target is selected. The sound output LSI 97 is caused to start reproducing the first main part audio data of the music. Thereafter, the process advances to step S64709 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the process advances to step S64710 to turn off the BGM mute end flag, and the present BGM mute process ends.

If it is determined in step S64706 that the cue flag is ON (S64706: YES), the flow advances to step S64715 to turn off the cue flag. After that, the flow advances to step S64716 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set to be reproduced on the audio channel 1 . That is, in this modification, when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled after returning from the demonstration video, the reproduction is started from the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set as the reproduction target. It will be. Thereafter, the process advances to step S64709 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the flow advances to step S64710 to turn off the BGM mute end flag and end the BGM mute process.

As described above, according to this modified example, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment described above.

In this modification, if the BGM music is being reproduced at the time when the mute state of the audio channel 1 starts, the reproduction of the BGM music continues even after the mute state starts. Then, a predetermined temporal position of the BGM music played first during the mute state (in FIG. ) is stored, and when the mute state ends, reproduction of the BGM music piece is started from the stored temporal position.

Therefore, according to the present modification, the temporal position of the BGM music whose reproduction is started when the mute state ends is the predetermined temporal position of the BGM music first reproduced during the mute state. To prevent the length of time of BGM music that a player cannot listen to without being output from an output means during a period from the start of a mute state to the end of the mute state from becoming longer. can be done. As a result, the BGM music is reproduced from a predetermined time position while suppressing the player's dissatisfaction that the part of the BGM music that he wants to listen to has ended and he could not listen to it during the mute state. can be started. Also in this modification, a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music are set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even when the BGM music is started from the relevant temporal positions. Therefore, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the BGM music can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 290, even after the first main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is set as the return audio data, the first main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is The playback is continued, and then the playback of the second main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1 is started. The reproduction of the audio data on the audio channel 1 may be stopped until the reproduction of the audio channel 1 is started. By doing so, the processing load on the sound output LSI 97 can be reduced.

F7-2. Modification 2:
FIG. 293 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from the sixth embodiment described above is that the method of setting audio data for starting reproduction when canceling the mute setting of audio channel 1 is different. FIG. 293 shows the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 1, the mute setting state on the audio channel 1, and the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 2. FIG.

The sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM song out of a plurality of BGM songs to be played on the audio channel 1, and outputs audio data constituting the set BGM song. , sequentially read from the BGM music data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98 and reproduced. Further, the sound emission control device 90 reads the sound data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the sound channel 2 from the effect sound data storage area 98a of the sound data ROM 98 and reproduces it. That is, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment, the audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and the audio channel 2 is used for presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 293, the sound emission control device 90 sets the BGM music M1 as the reproduction target of the audio channel 1, and sequentially reads the audio data constituting the BGM music M1 on the audio channel 1. is playing.

As shown in FIG. 293, the sound emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing of executing the notice effect Y1 during the reproduction of the first prelude sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1 on the sound channel 1. , the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 on the audio channel 2 is started. However, in this case, unlike the case of executing a ready-to-win effect R1, which will be described later, the audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the speaker 46 outputs both the sound corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 and the sound of the BGM music M1 after being synthesized.

After that, while the second introductory part audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1, the audio light emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing to execute the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2. Reproduction of audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 is started. In this case, audio channel 1 is set to mute, unlike the case where the above-described advance notice effect Y1 is executed. Therefore, the BGM music M1 is not output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1.

After that, when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2 ends, the audio emission control device 90 changes the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced on the audio channel 1 belongs. One audio data is randomly selected from among them, reproduction of the selected audio data is started, and mute setting of channel 1 is released. In FIG. 293, the fourth main part audio data is selected from the audio data group of the BGM music piece M1 to which the audio data being reproduced on the audio channel 1 belongs, and the reproduction of the fourth main part audio data is started. An example is given.

Thus, in this modification, the BGM music is also output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the advance notice effect, but the BGM music is output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the reach effect. Since it is not output, the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect can be emphasized, and the player can be more focused on the ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, according to this modification, when the ready-to-win effect ends and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the reproduction of the audio data constituting the BGM music starts from the beginning. As described above, in this modified example, the player is unlikely to feel a sense of incongruity no matter which audio data constituting the BGM music M1 is started to be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to restore the BGM music while reducing the sense of discomfort given to the player when the ready-to-win effect ends.

Furthermore, in this modification, since the audio data of the BGM music that starts playing when the ready-to-win effect ends and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled. In some cases, the flow of music in one BGM music may change greatly when the music is played. In that case, the player's mood is renewed, and the player can start the game in a new mood after the end of the ready-to-win effect. The BGM music can be restored while reducing the sense of discomfort given to the player when the game ends.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device of modification 2>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 2 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the sixth embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM muting processing>
The BGM muting process in Modification 2 will be described. The BGM mute process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63204).

294 is a flowchart showing BGM mute processing according to modification 2. FIG. In step S64801, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON at the timing at which the ready-to-win effect is started and at the timing after two minutes have passed without the symbol variation (game round) being executed in the period other than the open/close execution mode. This flag is turned OFF when channel 1 is set to mute. That is, the BGM mute start flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing at which the audio channel 1 is set to mute.

If it is determined in step S64801 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S64801: YES), the flow advances to step S64802 to set audio channel 1 to mute. After that, the flow advances to step S64803 to turn off the BGM mute start flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S64804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64801 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S64801: NO), the processing proceeds to step S64804 without executing the processing of steps S64802 and S64803.

In step S64804, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute end flag is the timing at which the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 during the period when the ready-to-win effect ends and the demonstration video is displayed (timing at which the pattern variation starts). , and is turned OFF when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled. That is, the BGM mute end flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing of canceling mute setting of audio channel 1 .

If it is determined in step S64804 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S64804: NO), this BGM mute process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64804 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S64804: YES), the flow advances to step S64805 to determine whether or not the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing when the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 (the timing when the pattern variation starts) during the period when the demonstration moving image is displayed. , is a flag for determining whether or not the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled and the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the beginning (first prelude audio data).

If it is determined in step S64805 that the cue flag is not ON (S64805: NO), the flow advances to step S64806 to acquire a BGM restoration random number from the BGM restoration random number counter. After that, the flow advances to step S64807 to refer to the BGM restoration table corresponding to the BGM music being reproduced, and cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data corresponding to the acquired BGM restoration random number. That is, one audio data is randomly selected from among a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece set as a reproduction target, and the sound output LSI 97 starts reproducing the selected audio data in the audio channel 1. Let After that, the process proceeds to step S64808.

In step S64808, the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the flow advances to step S64809 to turn off the BGM mute end flag and end the BGM mute processing.

If it is determined in step S64805 that the cue flag is ON (S64805: YES), the flow advances to step S64810 to turn off the cue flag. After that, the flow advances to step S64811 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set to be reproduced on the audio channel 1 . That is, in this modification, when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled after returning from the demonstration video, the reproduction is started from the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set as the reproduction object. It will be. Thereafter, the process advances to step S64808 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the flow advances to step S64809 to turn off the BGM mute end flag and end the BGM mute process.

As described above, according to this modified example, in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and the modified example described above, the following effects can be obtained.

In this modification, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the BGM music is recorded at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions (sounds recorded in each audio data constituting the BGM music (sounds of the BGM music). It is possible to start playback from the position of the beginning of time) of the part). In this modified example, when the BGM music is being reproduced at the time when the mute state of the audio channel 1 starts, a plurality of predetermined times of the BGM music are reproduced when the mute state ends. One temporal position randomly (randomly) selected from the typical positions (in FIG. 293, the temporally leading position of the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1 set at random) , playback of the BGM music is started.

Therefore, according to the present modification, the player can determine whether the BGM music being played at the start of the mute state of the audio channel 1 will reach the predetermined time of the BGM music at the end of the mute state. It is not possible to predict whether playback will start from the target position. Therefore, it is possible to give unexpectedness and surprise to the player, to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to start the reproduction of the BGM music from a predetermined time position. . As described above, in the present modification as well, the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music is such that even if the reproduction of the BGM music is started from those temporal positions, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the BGM music can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 293, even after the audio channel 1 is set to mute, the reproduction of the second prelude audio data of the BGM music piece M1 is continued, and then the BGM music piece M1 is played back. , and the second main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1. The reproduction of the audio data in the audio channel 1 may be stopped until the reproduction of the received audio data is started. By doing so, the processing load on the sound output LSI 97 can be reduced.

F7-3. Variant 3:
FIG. 295 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from Modification 1 described above is that the method of setting audio data for starting reproduction when canceling the mute setting of audio channel 1 is different. FIG. 295 shows the content of audio data reproduced on audio channel 1, the state of mute setting on audio channel 1, and the content of audio data reproduced on audio channel 2. FIG.

The sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM song out of a plurality of BGM songs to be played on the audio channel 1, and outputs audio data constituting the set BGM song. , sequentially read from the BGM music data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98 and reproduced. Further, the sound emission control device 90 reads the sound data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the sound channel 2 from the effect sound data storage area 98a of the sound data ROM 98 and reproduces it. That is, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment, the audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and the audio channel 2 is used for presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 295, the sound emission control device 90 sets the BGM music M1 as the reproduction target of the audio channel 1, and sequentially reads the audio data constituting the BGM music M1 on the audio channel 1. is playing.

As shown in FIG. 295, the sound emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing of executing the notice effect Y1 during the reproduction of the first introductory part sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1 on the sound channel 1. , the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 on the audio channel 2 is started. However, in this case, unlike the case of executing a ready-to-win effect R1, which will be described later, the audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the speaker 46 outputs both the sound corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 and the sound of the BGM music M1 after being synthesized.

After that, while the second introductory part audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1, the audio light emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing to execute the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2. Reproduction of audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 is started. In this case, audio channel 1 is set to mute, unlike the case where the above-described advance notice effect Y1 is executed. Therefore, the BGM music M1 is not output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1.

After that, when the reproduction of the second introductory part audio data is completed during the period in which the audio channel 1 is set to mute, the audio emission control device 90 starts reproducing the next audio data, the first main part audio data. At the same time, the first main part audio data whose reproduction is started is set as return audio data. After that, when the reproduction of the first main part audio data is completed during the period in which the audio channel 1 is set to mute, the reproduction of the second main part audio data, which is the next audio data, is started, and the reproduction is started. The second main part audio data is reset as recovery audio data. That is, if the recovery audio data has already been set, the audio data for which reproduction is newly started is overwritten as the recovery audio data and set again. In this way, the audio light emission control device 90 of this modified example finishes the reproduction of the audio data during the period when the audio channel 1 is set to mute, and the audio data of the BGM music piece to which the audio data whose reproduction has finished belongs. Each time the reproduction of the next audio data in the group is started, the audio data whose reproduction is started is set as the return audio data. After that, when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2 ends, the audio emission control device 90 reproduces the second main part audio data, which is the audio data set for return. Start and cancel the mute setting of audio channel 1.

However, if the return audio data is not set at the timing when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled (the timing when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect on audio channel 2 ends), that is, audio channel 1 is set to mute, and if no new audio data is reproduced and no return audio data is set, as in the sixth embodiment, audio channel 1 is set to mute. is configured to start the reproduction of the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced belongs in the period of . Furthermore, when there is no audio data following the audio data being played during the period when the audio channel 1 is set to mute (when the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1 is being played) , reproduction is started from the first audio data constituting the main part of the BGM music (first main part audio data of the BGM music M1).

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device of Modification 3>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 3 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the sixth embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
BGM continuous reproduction processing in Modification 3 will be described. The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63203).

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous reproduction process in Modification 3. FIG. In step S64901, it is determined whether or not the reproduction of audio data on audio channel 1 has ended. If it is determined in step S64901 that the reproduction of audio data has ended in audio channel 1 (S64901: YES), the process proceeds to step S64902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64901 that the reproduction of audio data has not ended in audio channel 1 (S64901: NO), this BGM continuous reproduction processing ends.

In step S64902, it is determined whether or not audio data following the audio data whose reproduction has ended exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, when the BGM music M1 is set as the reproduction target, when the reproduction of the second introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1 is completed, the BGM music M1 has the second prelude part audio data. Since the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the introductory part audio data, it is determined that the next audio data exists. On the other hand, when the reproduction of the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is finished, the next audio data exists because the BGM music M1 does not have the next audio data after the fourth main part audio data. Decide not to.

If it is determined in step S64902 that the next audio data exists (S64902: YES), the process advances to step S64903 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the next audio data in audio channel 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S64905, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64902 that the next audio data does not exist (S64902: NO), the process proceeds to step S64904, and in audio channel 1, the first main part of the BGM music set as the reproduction target is It causes the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data. Therefore, in this modified example, the main part of the BGM music is repeatedly reproduced after the introductory part is completely reproduced. After executing step S64904, the process advances to step S64905.

In step S64905, it is determined whether or not the return setting flag is ON. As will be described later, the return setting flag turns ON when mute setting for audio channel 1 is started (see step S65004 in FIG. 297), and turns OFF when mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. is. When the return setting flag is ON, it means that the audio channel 1 is set to mute and that the return audio data should be set.

If it is determined in step S64905 that the return setting flag is not ON (S64905: NO), it is not a state in which the sound data for return should be set, so this BGM continuous reproduction processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S64905 that the return setting flag is ON (S64905: YES), it is in a state where the voice data for return should be set, so the process advances to step S64906 to step S64903 or step S64904. The audio data whose reproduction is started in is set as audio data for return. Note that, in this modification, the return setting flag is not turned OFF even when the return audio data is set. overwrite and reset. After that, the flow advances to step S64907 to turn on the return setting completion flag and terminate the present BGM continuous reproduction processing.

<BGM muting processing>
Next, BGM muting processing in Modification 3 will be described. The BGM mute process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63204).

FIG. XF20 is a flow chart showing BGM mute processing in Modification 3. FIG. In step S65001, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON at the timing at which the ready-to-win effect is started and at the timing after two minutes have elapsed without execution of the symbol variation (game cycle) during the period when the open/close execution mode is not executed. This flag is turned OFF when channel 1 is set to mute. That is, the BGM mute start flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing at which the audio channel 1 is set to mute.

If it is determined in step S65001 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S65001: YES), the flow advances to step S65002 to set audio channel 1 to mute. After that, the flow advances to step S65003 to turn off the BGM mute start flag. After that, the flow advances to step S65004 to turn on the return setting flag described above. After that, the process proceeds to step S65005. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65001 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S65001: NO), the process advances to step S65005 without executing the processes from step S65002 to step S65004.

In step S65005, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute end flag is the timing at which the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 during the period when the ready-to-win effect ends and the demonstration video is displayed (timing at which the pattern variation starts). , and is turned OFF when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled. That is, the BGM mute end flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing of canceling mute setting of audio channel 1 .

If it is determined in step S65005 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S65005: NO), this BGM mute process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65005 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S65005: YES), the flow advances to step S65006 to determine whether or not the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing when the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 (the timing when the pattern variation starts) during the period when the demonstration moving image is displayed. , is a flag for determining whether or not the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled and the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the beginning (first prelude audio data).

If it is determined in step S65006 that the cue flag is not ON (S65006: NO), the process advances to step S65007 to determine whether or not the return setting completion flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S65007 that the return setting completion flag is ON (S65007: YES), that is, if the audio data for return has already been set, the process advances to step S65008, and in audio channel 1, return is performed. causes the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data set for use. After that, the flow advances to step S65909 to turn off the return setting completion flag and the return setting flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S65010 to cancel the mute setting for audio channel 1. FIG. After that, the flow advances to step S65011 to turn off the BGM mute end flag, and the present BGM mute processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65007 that the return setting completion flag is not ON (S65007: NO), that is, the audio data that was being reproduced when the mute setting of audio channel 1 was started will be restored by the time the mute setting is released. Since it did not end, the processes of steps S64905 to S64907 are not executed in the BGM continuous reproduction process (FIG. 296), and if the sound data for return is not set, the flow advances to step S65012 to set the return setting flag. to OFF. After that, the flow advances to step S65013 to determine whether or not the audio data next to the audio data being reproduced on the audio channel 1 exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, when the BGM music M1 is set as a reproduction target, if the second introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being reproduced, the BGM music M1 has the second prelude part audio data. Since the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the introductory part audio data, it is determined that the audio data following the audio data being reproduced exists. On the other hand, when the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is being reproduced, there is no audio data following the fourth main part audio data in the BGM music M1. It is determined that the next audio data does not exist.

If it is determined in step S65013 that there is audio data next to the audio data being reproduced (S65013: YES), the process advances to step S65014 to instruct the sound output LSI 97 to reproduce the next audio data in audio channel 1. let it start. Thereafter, the process advances to step S65010 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the flow advances to step S65011 to turn off the BGM mute end flag, and the present BGM mute process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65013 that there is no audio data next to the audio data being reproduced (S65013: NO), the process advances to step S65015, and in audio channel 1, the BGM The sound output LSI 97 is caused to start reproducing the first main part audio data of the music. Thereafter, the process advances to step S65010 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the flow advances to step S65011 to turn off the BGM mute end flag, and the present BGM mute process ends.

If it is determined in step S65006 that the cue flag is ON (S65006: YES), the flow advances to step S65016 to turn off the cue flag. After that, the flow advances to step S65017 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set as the reproduction target on the audio channel 1 . That is, in this modification, when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled after returning from the demonstration video, the reproduction is started from the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set as the reproduction object. It will be. Thereafter, the process advances to step S65010 described above, and the mute setting for audio channel 1 is canceled. After that, the flow advances to step S65011 to turn off the BGM mute end flag, and the present BGM mute process ends.

As described above, according to this modified example, in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and each modified example described above, the following effects can be obtained.

According to this modification, the temporal position of the BGM music whose reproduction is started when the mute state ends is the predetermined temporal position of the BGM music that was last reproduced during the mute state. Therefore, the BGM music is continuously reproduced even during the mute state of the audio channel 1, and the player expects that the BGM music continues to be reproduced even after the mute state ends. While suppressing the deviation between the imagination of the temporal position of the BGM music after the end of the mute state by , it is possible to start playing back the BGM music from a predetermined time position. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music is set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the BGM music is started from the relevant temporal positions. Therefore, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the BGM music can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

F7-4. Variant 4:
FIG. 298 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 4 of the sixth embodiment. The main difference from the sixth embodiment described above is that the timing of canceling the mute setting for audio channel 1 is after the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is completed, and when new audio data is generated in audio channel 1 The point is that the timing is adjusted to the timing when the playback of . FIG. 298 shows the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 1, the mute setting state on the audio channel 1, and the contents of the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 2. FIG.

The sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example sets one BGM piece of music out of a plurality of BGM pieces of music to be played back on the audio channel 1, and reproduces the audio data constituting the set BGM piece of music. , sequentially read from the BGM music data storage area 98b of the audio data ROM 98 and reproduced. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 reads the sound data corresponding to the content of the effect to be executed in the sound channel 2 from the effect sound data storage area 98a of the sound data ROM 98 and reproduces it. That is, in this modified example, as in the sixth embodiment, the audio channel 1 is used for BGM, and the audio channel 2 is used for presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 298, the sound emission control device 90 sets the BGM music M1 as the reproduction target of the audio channel 1, and sequentially reads the audio data constituting the BGM music M1 on the audio channel 1. is playing.

As shown in FIG. 298, the sound emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing of executing the notice effect Y1 during the reproduction of the first introductory part sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1 on the sound channel 1. , the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 on the audio channel 2 is started. However, in this case, unlike the case of executing a ready-to-win effect R1, which will be described later, the audio channel 1 is not set to mute. Therefore, the speaker 46 outputs both the sound corresponding to the announcement effect Y1 and the sound of the BGM music M1 after being synthesized.

After that, while the second introductory part audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1 is being reproduced on the audio channel 1, the audio emission control device 90 is triggered by the timing of executing the ready-to-win effect R1 on the audio channel 2. Reproduction of audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 is started. In this case, audio channel 1 is set to mute, unlike the case where the above-described advance notice effect Y1 is executed. Therefore, the BGM music M1 is not output from the speaker 46 during the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1.

After that, when the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1 in the audio channel 2 is completed, the audio emission control device 90 enters a mute setting cancellation waiting state for waiting for the cancellation of the mute setting of the audio channel 1. - 特許庁When the reproduction of the second main part audio data ends during the period in which the sound emission control device 90 is in the mute setting release waiting state, the sound emission control device 90 starts reproducing the third main part audio data, which is the next audio data. , the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled at the timing of the start of reproduction of the audio data.

That is, when the sound emission control device 90 of the present modification completes the reproduction of the sound data (the sound data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect R1) on the sound channel 2 that triggered the start of the mute setting of the sound channel 1, the sound channel When the reproduction of the audio data is completed in step 2, the audio channel 1 enters a mute setting release waiting state for waiting for the mute setting of the audio channel 1 to be released. Then, when the reproduction of the audio data on the audio channel 1 is completed during the period in which the audio emission control device 90 is in the mute setting cancellation standby state, the audio data group of the BGM music piece to which the audio data whose reproduction has been completed belongs belongs to the next audio data group. At the same time as the reproduction of the audio data is started, the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled at the timing of the start of the reproduction of the audio data.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device of Modification 4>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 4 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the sixth embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
BGM continuous reproduction processing in Modification 4 will be described. The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63203).

FIG. XF21 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous reproduction process in Modification 4. FIG. In step S65101, it is determined whether or not the reproduction of audio data in audio channel 1 has ended. If it is determined in step S65101 that the reproduction of audio data has ended in audio channel 1 (S65101: YES), the process proceeds to step S65102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65101 that the reproduction of audio data has not ended in audio channel 1 (S65101: NO), this BGM continuous reproduction processing ends.

In step S65102, it is determined whether or not audio data following the audio data whose reproduction has ended exists in the BGM music. Specifically, for example, when the BGM music M1 is set as the reproduction target, when the reproduction of the second introductory part audio data of the BGM music M1 is completed, the BGM music M1 has the second prelude part audio data. Since the first main part audio data exists as the audio data following the introductory part audio data, it is determined that the next audio data exists. On the other hand, when the reproduction of the fourth main part audio data of the BGM music M1 is finished, the next audio data exists because the BGM music M1 does not have the next audio data after the fourth main part audio data. Decide not to.

If it is determined in step S65102 that the next audio data exists (S65102: YES), the process advances to step S65103 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the next audio data in audio channel 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S65105, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65102 that the next audio data does not exist (S65102: NO), the process proceeds to step S65104, and in audio channel 1, the first main part of the BGM music set to be reproduced is It causes the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the audio data. Therefore, in this modified example, the main part of the BGM music is repeatedly reproduced after the introductory part is completely reproduced. After executing step S65104, the process advances to step S65105.

In step S65105, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute standby flag is ON. As will be described later, the BGM mute standby flag is a flag that is turned ON when the BGM mute end flag is turned ON (see step S65206 in FIG. 300). This flag indicates that

If it is determined in step S65105 that the BGM mute standby flag is not ON (S65105: NO), the BGM continuous reproduction process is terminated because the mute setting release standby state is not in effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65105 that the BGM mute standby flag is ON (S65105: YES), it is in mute setting release standby state. After that, the flow advances to step S65107 to turn off the BGM mute standby flag, and the present BGM continuous reproduction processing ends.

<BGM muting processing>
The BGM muting process in Modification 4 will be described. The BGM mute process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 276: S63204).

FIG. 300 is a flow chart showing BGM mute processing in Modification 4. FIG. In step S65201, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute start flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute start flag is turned ON at the timing at which the ready-to-win effect is started and at the timing after two minutes have passed without the symbol variation (game round) being executed in the period other than the open/close execution mode. This flag is turned OFF when channel 1 is set to mute. That is, the BGM mute start flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing at which the audio channel 1 is set to mute.

If it is determined in step S65201 that the BGM mute start flag is ON (S65201: YES), the flow advances to step S65202 to set audio channel 1 to mute. After that, the flow advances to step S65203 to turn off the BGM mute start flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S65204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65201 that the BGM mute start flag is not ON (S65201: NO), the processing proceeds to step S65204 without executing the processing of steps S65202 and S65203.

In step S65204, it is determined whether or not the BGM mute end flag is ON. As described above, the BGM mute end flag is the timing at which the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 during the period when the ready-to-win effect ends and the demonstration video is displayed (timing at which the pattern variation starts). , and is turned OFF when the mute setting of audio channel 1 is cancelled. That is, the BGM mute end flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing of canceling mute setting of audio channel 1 .

If it is determined in step S65204 that the BGM mute end flag is not ON (S65204: NO), this BGM mute processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65204 that the BGM mute end flag is ON (S65204: YES), the process advances to step S65205 to determine whether or not the cue flag is ON. As described above, the cue flag is a flag that is turned ON at the timing when the variation command and the type command are received from the main side MPU 62 (the timing when the pattern variation starts) during the period when the demonstration moving image is displayed. , is a flag for determining whether or not the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled and the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the beginning (first prelude audio data).

If it is determined in step S65205 that the cue flag is not ON (S65205: NO), the flow advances to step S65206 to turn on the BGM mute standby flag. After that, the flow advances to step S65207 to turn off the BGM mute end flag. After that, the BGM muting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S65205 that the cue flag is ON (S65205: YES), the process advances to step S65208 to turn off the cue flag. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S65209 to cause the sound output LSI 97 to start reproducing the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set as the reproduction target on the audio channel 1 . That is, in this modification, when the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled after returning from the demonstration video, the reproduction is started from the first prelude audio data of the BGM music set as the reproduction target. It will be. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S65210 to cancel the mute setting for audio channel 1. FIG. After that, the flow advances to step S65207 described above, the BGM mute end flag is turned OFF, and this BGM mute process ends.

As described above, according to this modified example, in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and each modified example described above, the following effects can be obtained.

According to this modification, while the audio channel 1 is in the mute state, the playback position of the BGM music is set at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music (for each audio data constituting the BGM music). One temporal position (in FIG. 298, the position of the audio recorded in the third main part audio data of the BGM music M1) The mute state of the audio channel 1 is ended at the timing when it reaches the temporal head position). That is, when the mute state of the audio channel 1 ends, the output of the BGM music starts from the predetermined temporal position of the BGM music. Therefore, the mute state of the BGM music can be ended and the output of the BGM music can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Further, according to this modification, the mute state of the BGM music can be ended without controlling the time position at which the reproduction of the BGM music is started at the timing of ending the mute state of the BGM music. By only pressing the button, it is possible to start outputting the BGM music from a predetermined temporal position of the BGM music.

Furthermore, according to this modification, while the audio channel 1 is in the mute state, the reproduction position of the BGM music is the predetermined temporal position of the BGM music, and the reproduction of the audio corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is performed. (in FIG. 298, the temporal start position of the audio recorded in the third main part audio data of the BGM music M1) after the timing of the end of the audio channel 1 end the mute state. Therefore, according to this modification, while the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is being reproduced on the audio channel 1, the BGM music is in a mute state in which the speaker 46 does not output the sound, so that the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is further emphasized. The player's attention can be focused on the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to this modification, depending on the playback position of the BGM music at the timing when the playback of the audio corresponding to the ready-to-win effect ends, the playback position reaches the predetermined temporal position of the BGM music. It may take some time until In other words, a period in which neither the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect nor the BGM music is output is interposed between the end timing of reproduction of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect and the end timing of the mute state of the BGM music. can be done. Here, if the two sounds are played continuously without a silent period, it may be difficult to hear the start part of the latter one of the two sounds accurately. Therefore, according to this modification, during the period from the timing when the reproduction of the audio corresponding to the reach effect ends to the timing when the mute state of the BGM music ends, both the sound corresponding to the reach effect and the BGM music are output to the speaker. Since a period during which no output is made from 46 can be interposed, the player can accurately listen to the portion immediately after the mute state of the BGM music ends (the output start portion of the BGM music), and the reach effect is achieved. After the reproduction of the sound corresponding to , it is possible to direct the player's attention to the BGM music.

Furthermore, according to this modification, since the reproduction of the BGM music continues even after the mute state of the audio channel 1 is started, the BGM music continues even after the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started and ended. Output of the BGM music piece is resumed from the same time position as when the music piece was output as the BGM. Therefore, the game does not give a sense of incongruity to the player who imagines that the BGM music is continuously reproduced even after the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started and ended. That is, according to this modification, the output of the BGM music can be restarted after the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is completed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

However, in this modification, both the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect and the BGM music are output between the end timing of the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect and the end timing of the mute state of the BGM music. The length of the period may vary depending on the reproduction position of the BGM music at the end timing of the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, a configuration capable of setting the length of the period during which neither the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect nor the BGM music is output to a fixed length will be described in Modified Example 5 below.

F7-5. Variant 5:
In the sixth embodiment and modifications 1 to 3 described above, as shown in FIGS. , the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled, but instead of this, at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed from the timing of the end of the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the reach effect on the audio channel 2 , the mute setting of the audio channel 1 may be canceled. That is, a predetermined silent period (for example, 1 second) occurs between the end of the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect and the start (resume) of the reproduction of the BGM music.

Specifically, when this modification is applied to the above-described sixth embodiment (FIG. 259), the sound emission control device 90 controls the sound emission control device 90 for a predetermined time from the timing when the reproduction of the sound data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect on the sound channel 2 ends. When (for example, one second) has elapsed, the next audio data in the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced in audio channel 1 belongs is started to be reproduced, and the mute setting of audio channel 1 is canceled. Configuration.

In addition, when this modification is applied to the above-described modification 1 (FIG. 290), the sound emission control device 90 starts a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the reproduction of the audio data set for recovery is started, and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled.

Further, when this modification is applied to the above-described modification 2 (FIG. 293), the audio light emission control device 90 starts a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, one audio data is randomly selected from the audio data group of the BGM music to which the audio data being reproduced on the audio channel 1 belongs, and reproduction of the selected audio data is started. , the mute setting of channel 1 is cancelled.

In addition, when this modification is applied to the above-described modification 3 (FIG. 295), the sound emission control device 90 starts a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the reproduction of the audio data set for recovery is started, and the mute setting of the audio channel 1 is canceled.

As described above, according to this modified example, in addition to the effects of the sixth embodiment and the modified example described above, the following effects can be obtained.

According to this modification, a predetermined silent period (for example, 1 second) can be interposed between the end of the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect and the start (resume) of the reproduction of the BGM music. . Here, if the two sounds are played continuously without a silent period, it may be difficult to hear the start part of the latter one of the two sounds accurately. Therefore, according to this modification, a predetermined silent period (for example, 1 second) is inserted between the end of the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect and the start (resume) of the reproduction of the BGM music. Therefore, the player can accurately listen to the beginning of the BGM music, and the player's attention can be directed to the BGM music.

It should be noted that the control of this modification, for example, in step S64012 in FIG. If it is determined that there is, the flow advances to step S64013 to execute processing for turning ON the BGM mute end flag.

F7-6. Modification 6:
In the sixth embodiment and modifications 1 to 5 described above, as shown in FIG. 258, one BGM song is divided into a plurality of audio data and recorded, and any of the audio data constituting the BGM song is recorded. By designating data and starting reproduction, it is possible to start reproduction of the BGM music from a plurality of predetermined temporal positions. 6, recording one BGM song in single audio data, setting a plurality of playback start positions for the BGM song recorded in the single audio data, and selecting from among the plurality of playback start positions By designating one reproduction start position and starting reproduction of the single audio data, it is possible to start reproduction of the BGM music from a plurality of predetermined temporal positions. good. An example in which a plurality of reproduction start positions are set for the BGM music piece M1 will be described below.

FIG. 301 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of data stored in the audio data ROM in Modification 6. FIG. FIG. 301 shows an example in which the BGM music M1 shown in FIG. 258 is recorded in the BGM music M1 audio data, which is single audio data. In this modification, a single piece of BGM music M1 audio data is set with reproduction start positions, which are a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the BGM music M1.

In the example shown in FIG. 301, the temporal start position of the BGM music piece M1 is set as the first introductory part reproduction start position. is set as the second introductory part reproduction start position, and the position 32 seconds after the temporal head position of the BGM music M1 is set as the first main part reproduction start position. The position 48 seconds after the temporal start position of BGM music M1 is set as the second main part reproduction start position, and the position 64 seconds after the temporal start position of BGM music M1 is set as the third main part reproduction start position A position 80 seconds after the temporal start position of the BGM music piece M1 is set as the fourth main part reproduction start position.

258 corresponds to the first introductory part reproduction start position shown in FIG. The temporal head position of the second prelude audio data of the BGM music M1 corresponds to the second prelude reproduction start position shown in FIG. The temporal head position of the main part audio data corresponds to the first main part reproduction start position shown in FIG. corresponds to the second main part reproduction start position shown in FIG. 301 corresponds to the playback start position of the third main part shown in FIG. It corresponds to the partial playback start position.

As in Modification 6, one BGM piece of music is recorded in a single piece of audio data, and a plurality of reproduction start positions are set for the BGM piece of music recorded in the single piece of audio data. The same control can be executed as in the sixth embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5, and the same effects can be obtained.

For example, from the temporal start position (first prelude part reproduction start position of BGM music M1 audio data) to the temporal end position (BGM music M1 audio data) of the entire BGM music set as a reproduction target After playback to the temporal end position of the BGM composition), the temporal start position of the main part corresponding to the main melody of the BGM composition is not the temporal start position of the introductory part of the BGM composition. The configuration is such that reproduction is started from (the first main part reproduction start position of the BGM music piece M1 audio data). According to such a configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, the player's mood, which has been excited by listening to the main part of the BGM music, is lowered when the prelude part is reproduced again. can be suppressed.

Further, for example, when the BGM music is being reproduced at the time when the mute state of the audio channel 1 starts, the BGM music is continued to be reproduced even after the mute state is started, and the end of the mute state is determined. As a trigger, the BGM music is reproduced from a reproduction start position immediately after the time position of the BGM music being reproduced at the time when the mute state ends, among a plurality of reproduction start positions of the BGM music. is configured to start According to such a configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, the BGM music is continuously reproduced even during the mute state of the audio channel 1, and the BGM music continues to be reproduced even after the mute state ends. Imagining the temporal position of the BGM music after the end of the mute state by the player who expects the reproduction to continue, and the BGM actually started to be played back upon the end of the mute state. It is possible to start the reproduction of the BGM music from a predetermined temporal position while suppressing the deviation from the time position of the BGM music. Also in this modified example, a plurality of reproduction start positions of the BGM music are set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the reproduction start position. , the reproduction of the BGM music can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, for example, when the BGM music is being reproduced at the time when the mute state of the audio channel 1 starts, the BGM music may continue to be reproduced even after the mute state is started. The reproduction start position of the reproduced BGM music is stored in the BGM, and when the silence state ends, the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the stored reproduction start position. According to such a configuration, as in Modification 1, the temporal position of the BGM song whose playback is started when the mute state ends is the BGM song that was played first during the mute state. Therefore, the time length of the BGM music that the player cannot listen to because it is not output from the output means during the period from the start of the mute state to the end of the mute state will be long. can be suppressed. As a result, the BGM music is reproduced from a predetermined time position while suppressing the player's dissatisfaction that the part of the BGM music that he wants to listen to has ended and he could not listen to it during the mute state. can be started. Also in this modified example, a plurality of reproduction start positions of the BGM music are set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the reproduction start positions. , the reproduction of the BGM music can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, for example, when the BGM music is being reproduced at the start of the mute state of the audio channel 1, when the mute state ends, the BGM music is randomly selected from among a plurality of reproduction start positions of the BGM music. The reproduction of the BGM music is started from one reproduction start position selected (randomly). According to such a configuration, as in the second modified example, the player can reproduce the BGM music that was being played at the start of the mute state of the audio channel 1 when the mute state ends. It is not possible to predict from which playback start position playback will start. Therefore, it is possible to give unexpectedness and surprise to the player, to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to start the reproduction of the BGM music from a predetermined time position. . Also in this modified example, a plurality of reproduction start positions of the BGM music are set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the reproduction of the BGM music is started from the reproduction start positions. , the reproduction of the BGM music can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, if the playback start position of the audio data is specified and playback cannot be started from that playback start position (for example, if the audio data is data that cannot format), as shown in the sixth embodiment and modified examples 1 to 6, a configuration in which one BGM song is divided into a plurality of pieces of audio data and recorded is adopted. This makes it possible to start playing the BGM music from a plurality of predetermined temporal positions.

F7-7. Variant 7:
In the sixth embodiment and each modification described above, when setting the audio channel 1 to mute, a fade-out process may be executed to gradually decrease the volume to shift to mute. Further, when canceling the mute setting of the audio channel 1, a fade-in process may be executed to gradually increase the volume and return it to a predetermined volume. With such a configuration, it is possible to further reduce discomfort when the BGM music shifts to the mute state and when it returns from the mute state.

F7-8. Modification 8:
The configuration and control described in the sixth embodiment and each modification can be applied not only to the configuration for reproducing the audio data constituting the BGM music, but also to the configuration for reproducing various audio data. For example, the above-described configuration and control can be applied to a configuration that reproduces audio data corresponding to the round effect played during the opening/closing processing period of the opening/closing execution mode, audio data corresponding to the RTC effect, and the like. . Also, the audio data in audio channel 2 that causes the mute setting of audio channel 1 to start is not limited to audio data corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, and various audio data can be employed. For example, various audio data can be used, such as audio data corresponding to advance notice effects, audio data corresponding to character lines and sound effects, audio data constituting BGM music corresponding to specific game states, and the like. .

F7-9. Modification 9:
In the sixth embodiment and each of the modifications described above, even when the sound channel 1 is in the mute state, the BGM music is continued to be played back on the sound channel 1. If it is possible to execute a process that can specify the temporal playback position of the BGM song when it is assumed that the BGM song continues to be played, then during the mute state of the audio channel 1 A configuration may be adopted in which the reproduction of the BGM music is not continued immediately.

G. Seventh embodiment:
G1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 302 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, winning a big win, generating a ready-to-win game, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the drive of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the game ball shooting by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

303 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 , a type determining gate 202 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a V winning mechanism 210 . Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable prize winning device 36 includes a first big prize winning port 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and a first open/close door 36b for opening and closing the first big prize winning port 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big winning hole 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of winning lottery, when a big win or a small win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode for executing opening/closing processing of the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 and the second opening/closing door 213 provided in the V winning mechanism 210, which will be described later. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied, it transitions again to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The type determination gate 202 is an entrance used to determine the type of the jackpot when the jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery. Specifically, a big win is won in a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round ends. When the opening/closing execution mode is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an effect (right-handed suggesting effect) for guiding the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 . The player operates the operation handle 25 according to the right-handed suggestive effect to shoot a game ball to the right side of the game board 30, and when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the entry of the game ball triggers a big hit. A type determination process for determining the type of is executed by main controller 60 . Then, the type of jackpot is determined by the type determining process. The type determination process executed by the main controller 60 and the jackpot type set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display portion 37a is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is also called a first starting hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display part 37b causes the segment display device to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a winning lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is also called a second starting hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first design display section 37a and the second design display section 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter also referred to as round lamps) are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or display accordingly. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is satisfied. It is a game in which the first open/close door 36b or the second open/close door 213 is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 corresponds to the determined jackpot type when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the game ball enters the type determination gate 202. The display of the number of round games played is started, and is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode is completed. In other words, even if the opening and closing execution mode is started, during the period in which the game ball is not entering the type determination gate 202 after the start of the opening and closing execution mode, the type determination process is not started, and the jackpot type ( (including the number of round games) is not determined, the number of round games is not displayed on the round display section 39.例文帳に追加After that, when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is started, and the jackpot type (including the number of round games) is determined, so the number of round games is displayed on the round display section 39. Is displayed.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol according to the variable display or the lottery result. Predetermined display based on advance notice etc. is performed. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 304(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A pattern for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 304(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 304(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 304(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 304(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first suspension display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of suspension games based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is displayed. The reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and for the special information acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery. It means a game round in which the variable display has not started. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the ball entering the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game round display). In addition, the number of pending game times that can be held based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display the pending display corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as the second pending game round display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 304(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs the blinking display and the lighting display synchronized with the second design variable display and stop display displayed on the second design display unit 37b of the special design unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the second reserved display area Ds2, the first synchronized display area Sync1, and the second synchronized display area Sync2. However, a configuration in which the display surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays may be adopted.

FIG. 305 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the V winning mechanism 210. FIG. As shown in FIG. 305( a ), the V winning mechanism 210 includes a rune 220 , a flow path 211 for circulating game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to the rune 220 , and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 30 . A second open/close door 213 that opens and closes a second large prize winning port 212 for the ball to flow into the flow path 211, a detection sensor 214 that detects that the game ball has flowed in from the second large prize winning port 212, and a game area. A discharge port 215 communicating with the back side of the , a storage valve 216 that temporarily stores the game ball that has flowed in from the second big winning port 212 in the storage portion 218 of the flow path 211, and a storage valve that drives the storage valve 216 and a drive mechanism 217 . In addition, the crew 220 has one V winning opening 222 and five non-V winning openings 224 . The V winning hole 222 is a winning hole that becomes a big hit when a game ball enters. The non-V winning opening 224 does not give a big hit even if a game ball enters, and discharges the game ball from the game area.

Next, the operation of the V winning mechanism 210 will be described. When a specific type of jackpot or small win is won in the winning lottery in the game round, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game round ends, the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is established. The second opening/closing door 213 is opened as shown in 305(a).

When the player operates the operation handle 25 to shoot a game ball to the right side of the game board 30, and the game ball circulates in the vicinity of the second opening/closing door 213 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, FIG. As shown in b), the game ball is guided by the opened second opening/closing door 213 and flows into the flow path 211 from the second big winning hole 212 . The game ball that first flows into the flow path 211 after the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is stored in the storage portion 218 by the closed storage valve 216 . Further, in this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage section 218 is one. In addition, as a modification, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage unit 218 may be employed.

As shown in FIG. 305(c), in a state in which one game ball is stored in the storage section 218, when the game ball flows in from the second big winning hole 212, the game ball is first stored in the storage section. The game balls stored in 218 are prevented from flowing to the storage part 218, flow in the direction of the discharge port 215 in the channel 211, and are discharged from the discharge port 215 to the back side of the game area.

As shown in FIG. 305(d), when the conditions for closing the second door 213 are satisfied, the second door 213 is closed. Details of the closing conditions will be described later. After that, as shown in FIG. 305 (e), the storage valve drive mechanism 217 drives the storage valve 216 in the opening direction, and the game ball stored in the storage portion 218 circulates in the direction of the croon 220 in the flow path 211. do. The game ball discharged from the flow path 211 circulates on the upper surface of the croon 220 and then enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 . As described above, when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222, it becomes a big hit, and when a game ball enters the non-V winning hole 224, it does not become a big win and is ejected from the game area.

In addition, in this embodiment, every time one game ball enters (flows into) the second big winning hole 212 of the V winning mechanism 210, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls. A detection sensor 214 detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 212 .

In addition, as described above, as a modification, when a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage portion 218, the storage valve 216 is opened so that the plurality of game balls are placed on the upper surface of the croon 220. , it is possible to improve the probability that the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and to improve the expectation of the player. In this case, even if two game balls enter the V winning hole 222, only the game ball that enters the V winning hole 222 first is treated as a big hit, and the ball enters the V winning hole 222. The entry of the second game ball is not treated as a big hit, and is discharged to the back of the game area in the same manner as the entry of the game ball into the non-V winning opening 224.例文帳に追加

G2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 306 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entrances and through gates such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a first opening/closing door drive section 36c that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. The driving unit 34b, the second opening/closing door driving unit 213b that opens and closes the second opening/closing door 213, the storage valve driving mechanism 217 that drives the storage valve 216, and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 drives and controls the first opening/closing door driving section 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, and the second opening/closing door drive section 36c is driven so that the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed. It drives and controls the opening/closing door drive unit 213b. In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by a specific big hit and small hit, the MPU 62 drives and controls the storage valve driving mechanism 217 so that the storage valve 216 is opened and closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 307 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, sorting the jackpot types, setting the display of the main display section 45, setting the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b, a determination process execution area 64c, and a type determination process execution area 64i. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball is the first hold in the hold information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in area Ra. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. stored chronologically.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is determined by By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the timing when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode or the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. It is stored in the pending information storage area 64d.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 to determine the display mode of the segment display which is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination. Further, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i is acquired when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 after the start of the opening/closing execution mode. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the counter C2. The jackpot type (the number of times the round game is executed) determined by the type determination process is displayed on the round display section 39 .

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. is used to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33. and a success/failure table for collating with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 308 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. As shown in the figure, five values from 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the first starting port as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Among the values 0 to 1199, 5 values 5 to 9 are set as small wins (losses). A small hit (off) will be described later. And the values (10-1199) other than 10 values from 0-9 are normal outliers.

FIG. 309 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the second start port. As shown in the figure, five values from 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Of the values 0 to 1199, values (5 to 1199) other than the five values 0 to 4 are small hits (outliers).

Here, the small hit (loss) is a trigger to shift to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 36b or the second opening and closing door 213 is executed, but for the support mode, the success or failure result that does not trigger the transition is. On the other hand, normal deviation is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the support mode. In the following description, a small win (loss) is also simply called a "small win", and a normal loss is also simply called a "loss".

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times of opening/closing the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the above-described (2) opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are controlled from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the occurrence frequency of game balls entering the door 213 (winning a prize) is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be set to On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened once in the opening/closing execution mode until 1.6 seconds elapse or until the number of balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be set as

The opening limit time for one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, if the frequency of balls entering the V winning mechanism 210 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 is arbitrary. be. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening and closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration is such that substantially no balls enter the variable winning device 36 and the V winning mechanism 210. good too.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during an open/close execution mode which is executed as a result of a winning lottery resulting in a big win, or when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 In this case, the jackpot types are sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 310 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 310(a) shows the sorting table for the first starting port (at the time of winning the jackpot). The distribution table is referred to when a big win is won in a winning lottery in a game round triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting hole.

FIG. 310(b) shows a sorting table at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole. The sorting table becomes a small win in the game cycle executed with the ball entering the first starting hole as a trigger, and enters the V winning hole 222 during the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger and becomes a big win. It is referred when it becomes.

FIG. 310(c) shows a distribution table for the second starting hole (at the time of winning the jackpot and at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the second starting hole). The sorting table is used when a big win is won in a winning lottery in a game round triggered by a ball entering the second starting hole, and in a game round triggered by a ball entering the second starting hole. It is referred to when a ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the open/close execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger and a big win occurs.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start opening in FIG. 310(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a jackpot lottery is won in a winning lottery in a game cycle that is triggered by a ball entering the first start opening. 5R first-class jackpots, 5R second-class jackpots, and 10R normal jackpots are set as jackpot types in the case of winning.

The 5R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed five times during the opening/closing execution mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, the first type jackpot in this embodiment is limited to 90 times in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, after 90 games have been played in the high-frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode.

The 5R type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of executions of the round game executed during the opening/closing execution mode is 5 times, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency support mode. However, for the second type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to five. That is, after five games are played in the high-frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode.

The 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of executions of the round game executed during the opening/closing execution mode is 10 times, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 44" correspond to the 5R first type jackpot, and "45 to 60" are 5R It corresponds to the second type jackpot, and "61 to 99" corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole in FIG. 310(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, A small win is made in the executed game round, and the jackpot types when the ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger and becomes a big win are 5R first class jackpot and 10R normal. A jackpot is set.

Since the 5R first class jackpot and the 10R normal jackpot have been described in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 310(a), description thereof will be omitted.

In the distribution table at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting port, "0 to 64" of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99" corresponds to the 5R first type jackpot. , and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. In the case of winning, and in the game cycle executed triggered by the entry of the ball into the second starting hole, a small win occurs, and the ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the open/close execution mode executed with the small win, and the big win is made. A 15R first-class jackpot, a 4R first-class jackpot, and a 4R second-class jackpot are set as jackpot types in the case of becoming.

The 15R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of executions of the round game executed during the opening/closing execution mode is 15 times, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the first type jackpot in this embodiment is limited to 90 times in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, after 90 games have been played in the high-frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode.

The 4R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of executions of the round game executed during the opening/closing execution mode is four and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency support mode. However, the first type jackpot in this embodiment is limited to 90 times in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, after 90 games have been played in the high-frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode.

The 4R type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of executions of the round game executed during the opening/closing execution mode is four and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-frequency support mode. However, for the second type jackpot in this embodiment, the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to five. That is, after five games are played in the high-frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49" corresponds to the 15R first type jackpot, and "50 to 57" corresponds to the 4R. It corresponds to the 1st kind jackpot, and "58 to 99" corresponds to the 4R 2nd kind jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of distributing the jackpot type when a jackpot is won is that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round that is executed with the entry of the ball into the first start hole as a trigger. In the case where the ball enters the first starting hole, a small win occurs in the game cycle executed with the ball entering the first starting hole as a trigger, and the ball enters the V winning hole 222 during the open/close execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger, resulting in a big win. If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round triggered by the ball entering the second starting port, and if you win a small win in the game round triggered by the ball entering the second starting port It is different from the case where the ball enters the V winning port 222 during the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small win as a trigger and the big win, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player. ing.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the big winning type counter C2 stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i. In addition, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 to determine the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. At the same time, the display mode of the round display section 39 is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to when determining the display mode of the segment displays to be stopped and displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, the shooting of game balls continues in the same mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric role product 34a occurs multiple times in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 311 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 311(a) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 311(a), in the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode), there are two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 311(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 311(b), in the success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 for the electric accessary item open counter C4 for winning the electric accession win. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

G3. Game flow:
Next, an outline of the game flow of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

When the player starts the game, he/she operates the operation handle 25 to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30.例文帳に追加Hereinafter, shooting a game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 is also referred to as "left hitting", and shooting a game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 is also referred to as "right hitting".

When the player starts hitting to the left and enters the game ball into the first starting hole 33, a game round for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting hole 33 starts. be done. When a big win is won in the winning lottery, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the game cycle ends. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the type of jackpot (see FIG. 310) is not determined at the time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined in an open/close execution mode executed after the end of the game round in which the winning lottery was won.

When the game round in which the jackpot is won is completed, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When the opening/closing execution mode is started, an effect suggesting that the game ball is shot toward the right side of the game board 30 (right hitting effect) is executed. When the player recognizes the right-handed suggestive effect, shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and enters (passes) the type determination gate 202, the type is determined after the start of the opening/closing execution mode. When the game ball first enters (passes through) the gate 202, the type determination process is executed. The type determination process is a process for determining the jackpot type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

When the jackpot type is determined by executing the type determination process, a round game is started in which the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 perform opening/closing operations based on the opening/closing scenario set for each jackpot type. be. The opening/closing scenario is a program that defines patterns of opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in advance. The details of the opening/closing scenario will be described later.

When the game ball hit by the player to the right during the period during which the round game is being executed (hereinafter also referred to as the opening/closing processing period) enters the first big winning hole 36a or the second big winning hole 212, each big winning hole A set number of game balls are given to the player as a privilege (prize ball).

In this embodiment, an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is set only in a specific case, and a game ball can enter the second big winning hole 212 . Then, as described in FIG. 305, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 212, one of the game balls entering the second big winning hole 212 is stored in the storage part 218. After that, after the storage valve 216 is opened, it flows from the channel 211 to the clone 220 (see FIG. 305(e)). Then, when the game ball circulating through the croon 220 enters the V winning hole 222, a new big hit is determined. When a new jackpot is determined with the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 222, the open/close execution mode being executed is interrupted, and new opening/closing execution is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222.例文帳に追加mode is started. In addition, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33, during the opening and closing execution mode after the game round in which the jackpot was won However, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the V winning port 222 and the jackpot is achieved, , the type of the jackpot is determined together with the confirmation of the jackpot.

As described in FIG. 310, the jackpot type distribution (FIG. 305 (a)) in the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33, and the entry to the first start port triggered It is different from the distribution of the jackpot type in the jackpot at the time of V winning (Fig. 305(b)). In the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that more benefits will be given to the player by sorting the jackpot by jackpot type at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole. Therefore, even if the big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is confirmed, the player can place the game ball in the second position when the second open/close door 213 is opened during the round game. The player wants the game ball to enter the 2nd prize winning opening 212 and further enter the game ball to the V winning opening 222.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation even during the round game.

Temporarily, even though the second open/close door 213 is opened and the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 212, the game ball cannot enter the V winning hole 222. , the round game based on the big win triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is continued.

When the round game ends and the opening/closing execution mode ends after that, if the high-frequency support mode is set for the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, it is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The support mode in the game round is the high frequency support mode. In this case, the player hits to the right to allow the game ball to enter the through gate 35 and execute the electric accessory opening lottery. When the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second start port 34, and as a result, the game ball enters the second start port 34. A winning lottery will be executed.

The winning lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a big win or a small win. When a big win is won, it is executed after the game round in which the big win is won is completed in the same way as when the big win is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33.例文帳に追加The type of jackpot is determined by entering a game ball into the type determination gate 202 during the open/close execution mode. Then, a round game set for the determined jackpot type is executed.

On the other hand, when a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the second open/close door 213 is opened once after the game round in which the small win is won is completed. The open/close execution mode is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the second big prize opening 212 while the second open/close door 213 is open, and then the game ball enters the V prize opening 222, a big hit is confirmed, and the big hit is made. The open/close execution mode triggered by this is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, a privilege is given to the player by executing the round game set for the type of the jackpot.

Next, the player starts the game and makes the game ball enter the first starting port 33 by hitting left, and wins a small win in a winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33. A case will be explained.

When a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened once after the game round in which the small win is won is completed. Run mode is executed. After the start of the opening/closing execution mode, a right-hand hitting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the player to hit right. The player executes a right-handed stroke according to the right-handed stroke suggestion performance, enters the game ball into the second big prize-winning port 212 while the second open/close door 213 is open, and then enters the game ball into the V prize-winning port 222. When the ball is hit, the big win is decided, and the opening/closing execution mode is started with the big win as a trigger. In the opening/closing execution mode, a privilege is given to the player by executing the round game set for the type of the jackpot. The general flow of the game of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has been described above.

G4. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 312 is a time chart for explaining a case 1, in which a big win is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33. FIG. In addition, the outline of the process described below is not executed in all cases where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33, but only in a specific case. executed.

When the player hits left and the game ball enters the first start hole 33 to start the game round U1, the symbols on the first symbol display portion 37a start to change. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round U1. After that, the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a stops. At this time, the first symbol display portion 37a displays a pattern of symbols indicating a big win, but there is no effect to clearly suggest that the big win has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. It is not executed, and an effect is executed in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether he has won a big win or won a small win. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by the display of the image on the pattern display device 41 or the output of the voice can recognize that he or she has won a big win in the winning lottery corresponding to the game round U1. can't

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery is won is completed, the opening/closing execution mode is started. As described above, when a big win is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start hole 33, the type of the big win is not determined at the time of winning the big win in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 after execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, even when the winning lottery game round ends, the round display section 39 does not display the number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the period from when the opening/closing execution mode is started until the type of the jackpot is determined is also called a "waiting period".

After the game round U1 in which the winning lottery is won is completed, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and at the same time, an effect suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting suggestion effect) is executed, and a privilege can be given to the player. A production that indicates that there is a possibility, more specifically, a production that suggests that two opportunities (chances) for winning the jackpot are prepared (hereinafter also referred to as "double chance production") is executed. .

When the player recognizes that the right-handed suggesting effect and the double-chance effect have been executed executes the right-handed stroke and the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is executed and the jackpot type is determined. . When the jackpot type is determined, the waiting period ends and the opening period starts. The right-handed suggestion effect is executed also during the opening period. After the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period starts. During the opening/closing processing period, the round game is executed the number of times corresponding to the determined jackpot type. At this time, the round game in which the second open/close door 213 is opened is executed in the first round game (1Rth) of the round game of the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type. In addition, when the opening and closing processing period starts, a production that suggests that the first of the two prepared opportunities (chances) to win the jackpot has started (hereinafter referred to as the first chance production) call) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance effect, the player is urged to hit to the right, the game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 212, and furthermore, the game ball is entered into the V winning hole 222 to hit the jackpot. is executed.

A player recognizes the first chance performance to be executed and hits to the right, and at the timing when the second open/close door 213 is open, the game ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 212 and stored. When the game ball can be stored in the part 218 (see FIG. 305) (proceed to [store in the storage part] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening and closing door 213 is closed. Execute once. At this time, one game ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the flow path 211 and flows into the crew 220 .

A game ball that circulates through the croon 220 enters a V winning opening 222 or a non-V winning opening 224 . When the game ball circulating through the croon 220 enters the V winning hole 222 (proceeds to [Enter the V winning hole] shown in the time chart), a new jackpot is determined. When a new jackpot is determined with the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 222, the open/close execution mode being executed is interrupted, and new opening/closing execution is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222.例文帳に追加mode is started. In addition, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33, during the opening and closing execution mode after the game round in which the jackpot was won However, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the V winning port 222 and the jackpot is achieved, , the type of the jackpot is determined together with the confirmation of the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the game ball circulating through the crew 220 enters the non-V winning hole 224 (proceeds to [no ball enters the V winning hole] shown in the time chart), the two prepared jackpots are won. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second chance effect) is executed to suggest that the second of the chances for the game has started. The second chance effect is a effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. At the given timing, an effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed is executed. Further, when the player does not operate the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the performance prompting the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has passed. Execute a production that indicates It should be noted that the determination of the big win suggested in the second chance presentation is content suggesting that the big win has been won (or has been won) in the winning lottery in the game round U1.

After the second chance performance is executed, the 1st round of the round game which is being executed ignited by winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1 is ended, and the second round (2nd round) is started.

Next, despite the fact that the player recognizes the first chance presentation and hits to the right, the game ball is made to enter the second big winning hole 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. A case where the game balls could not be stored in the storage unit 218 (proceed to [not stored in storage unit] shown in the time chart) will be described. In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance effect in this case is also an effect that urges the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect is executed to indicate that the big win is confirmed. Further, when the player does not operate the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the performance prompting the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the predetermined period has passed. Execute a production that indicates

After the second chance performance is executed, the 1st round of the round game which is being executed ignited by winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1 is ended, and the second round (2nd round) is started. Case 1 has been described above.

FIG. 313 is a time chart for explaining a case 2 in which a small winning is won in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33. FIG. In this embodiment, in all the cases where a small winning is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, the processing described below is executed.

When the player hits left and the game ball enters the first start hole 33, the game round U2 is started, and the symbols on the first symbol display portion 37a start to change. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round U2. After that, the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a stops. At this time, although the pattern of the pattern indicating the small win is displayed on the first pattern display section 37a, the display of the image on the pattern display device 41 and the output of the sound clearly suggest that the small win has been won. No performance is executed, and a performance is executed in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the player has won a big win or won a small win. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by the display of the image on the pattern display device 41 or the output of the voice recognizes that the small winning lottery has been won in the winning lottery corresponding to the game round U1. I can't.

After the game round U2 in which a small win is won is completed, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When a small win is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33, the opening/closing execution mode is started. In the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the right-handed suggesting effect is executed, and the effect indicating that the player may be awarded a privilege, more specifically, an opportunity to win the jackpot. An effect suggesting that two (chances) are prepared (hereinafter also referred to as "W chance effect") is executed.

Then, after the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period is started. During the opening/closing process period, a round game is executed in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened only once. In addition, when the opening and closing processing period starts, a production that suggests that the first of the two prepared opportunities (chances) to win the jackpot has started (hereinafter referred to as the first chance production) call) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance effect, the player is urged to hit to the right, the game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 212, and furthermore, the game ball is entered into the V winning hole 222 to hit the jackpot. is executed.

A player recognizes the first chance performance to be executed and hits to the right, and at the timing when the second open/close door 213 is open, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 212, When the game ball can be stored in the storage unit 218 (see FIG. 305) (proceed to [Store in the storage unit] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. is executed once. At this time, one game ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the flow path 211 and flows into the crew 220 .

A game ball that circulates through the croon 220 enters a V winning opening 222 or a non-V winning opening 224 . When the game ball circulating through the croon 220 enters the V winning hole 222 (proceeds to [Ball entering the V winning hole] shown in the time chart), the jackpot is confirmed. When a big hit is confirmed with the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 222, the opening/closing execution mode being executed is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started. be started. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 and results in a big win, the kind of the big win is determined together with the confirmation of the big win.

On the other hand, when the game ball circulating through the crew 220 enters the non-V winning hole 224 (proceeds to [no ball enters the V winning hole] shown in the time chart), the two prepared jackpots are won. An effect (hereinafter also referred to as a second chance effect) is executed to suggest that the second of the chances for the game has started. The second chance effect is a effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. At the given timing, an effect is executed to indicate that the deviation is confirmed. Further, when the player does not operate the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the performance prompting the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the failure is confirmed after the predetermined period. Execute a production that indicates It should be noted that the confirmation of the loss suggested in the second chance effect is a content suggesting that the winning lottery in the game round U2 was a loss (or that it was a loss).

After executing the second chance presentation, the round game being executed with the winning of a small prize in the winning lottery in the game round U2 is ended, and then the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Then, an effect to urge the player to hit left (left-hand hitting suggestion effect) is executed. The player hits to the left and attempts to enter the game ball into the first start hole 33 again.

Next, despite the fact that the player recognizes the first chance presentation and hits to the right, the game ball is made to enter the second big winning hole 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is open. A case where the game balls could not be stored in the storage unit 218 (proceed to [not stored in storage unit] shown in the time chart) will be described. In this case, the second chance effect is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance effect in this case is also an effect that urges the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and if the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect is executed to indicate that the deviation is confirmed. Further, when the player does not operate the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the performance prompting the player to operate the performance operation button 24, the failure is confirmed after the predetermined period. Execute a production that indicates

After executing the second chance presentation, the round game being executed with the winning of a small prize in the winning lottery in the game round U2 is ended, and then the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Then, an effect to urge the player to hit left (left-hand hitting suggestion effect) is executed. The player hits to the left and attempts to enter the game ball into the first start hole 33 again.

As described above, in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, the jackpot is won (case 1), and the small win is won (case 2). ), the first pattern display unit 37a also displays a pattern of symbols indicating the result of the winning lottery. The effect to do so will not be executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by the display of the image on the pattern display device 41 or the output of the voice cannot recognize the lottery result in the game round when the game round ends. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that he or she might have won a big prize even if he had won a small prize.

Further, after the game round is over, the right-handed hitting suggesting performance and the W chance suggesting performance are executed in both case 1 and case 2, so during the period when the performance is being executed after the game round is over. Also, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a big win is won instead of a small win in the winning lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a ball entering the first start hole 33, the type of jackpot is determined at the time the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, it is determined by a game ball entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the jackpot type is determined, the round lamp of the round display unit 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of round game executions corresponding to the jackpot type. On the other hand, when winning a small prize, the round lamp does not light up. That is, the round lamp does not turn on immediately after the end of the game cycle, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or the small win is won. Based on this, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating whether he or she has won a big win or a small win in the game round.

As a result, the player is not made to recognize the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game round. On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the player will win a big prize instead of a small prize for a relatively long period of time. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time even after the game cycle is over and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win or the small win is started. can draw attention. In addition, when determining the type of jackpot, the player is made to hit to the right and the game ball is entered into the type determination gate 202, so that the player is actively involved in determining the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to attract more attention to the game during the period of the open/close execution mode.

G5. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S70101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (entering ball detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S70102.

In step S70102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S70103.

In step S70103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S70104. It should be noted that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 323) described later.

In step S70104, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step S70104 will be described later. After executing step S70104, the process advances to step S70105.

In step S70105, the through ball entering process accompanying the entering ball (passing) of the game ball to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry processing in step S70105 will be described later. After executing step S70105, the process advances to step S70106.

In step S70106, ball entry processing for the type determination gate accompanying the entry of the game ball to the type determination gate is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the type determination gate in step S70106 will be described later. After executing step S70106, the process advances to step S70107.

In step S70107, a ball entry process for the big winning hole is executed when the game ball enters the big winning hole. The details of the ball entering process for the big winning hole in step S70107 will be described later. After executing step S70107, the process advances to step S70108.

In step S70108, a ball entry process for the crew is executed as the gaming ball enters the crew. The details of the entering ball processing for the crew in step S70108 will be described later. After executing step S70108, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 314: S70104).

FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step S70201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 (start winning). In step S70201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 (S70201: YES), the process proceeds to step S70202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S70203.

In step S70203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S70204.

In step S70204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S70209.

In step S70201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S70201: NO), the process proceeds to step S70205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S70205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S70205: YES), the process proceeds to step S70206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S70207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S70205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S70205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S70207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S70208.

In step S70208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S70209.

In step S70209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S70204 or step S70208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S70209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S70209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S70209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S70209: YES), the process proceeds to step S70210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S70211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S70212.

In step S70212, hit random number counter C1 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S70103 (Figure 314), and each value of the variation type counter CS updated in normal processing (Figure 323) of the corresponding reservation area It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the pending number obtained by adding 1 in step S70210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in step S70103 (FIG. 314) Each value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S70210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S70103 (Fig. 314) , in the first memory area of the free memory areas of the second reserve area Rb, that is, in the memory area corresponding to the second start reserve number RbN to which 1 is added in step S70210. After executing step S70212, the process proceeds to step S70213.

In step S70213, a first determination process is executed. In the first determination process, based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS, the winning lottery winning determination result (lottery result), the big winning type, presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, variation time of game times, etc. are executed before the holding information becomes a target of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S70213, the process proceeds to step S70214.

In step S70214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, hit random number counter C1, reach random number counter C3, and the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the variation type counter CS (prior determination information) as a pending command set.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is displayed on hold. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S70214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 315: S70213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 316 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines the success or failure of the winning lottery, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether or not reach occurs, determines the variation time of the game round, etc. The pending information is the main This process is executed before the winning lottery by the control device 60 is made.

In step S70301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of a big win, and determining whether or not a ready-to-win event occurs. The details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S70301, the process proceeds to step S70302.

In step S70302, variation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the variation time of game rounds. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

After step S70302 is executed, this ahead determination processing ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 316: S70301).

FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. In step S70401, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 315) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S70402.

In step S70402, it is determined whether or not the read value of the winning random number counter C1 is based on the first reservation area Ra. That is, the hold information to be subjected to the first determination process is either information acquired with the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 as a trigger, or the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 as a trigger. It is determined whether the information was acquired as In step S70402, when it is determined that the read reservation area is based on the first reservation area Ra (S70402: YES), the process proceeds to step S70403 and refers to the validity table for the first start port. After that, the process proceeds to step S70405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70402 that the read reservation area is not based on the first reservation area Ra, that is, if the read reservation area is based on the second reservation area Rb (S70402: NO) , the process advances to step S70404 to refer to the success/failure table for the first start port. After that, the process proceeds to step S70405.

In step S70405, it is determined whether or not the read value of the winning random number counter C1 indicates that a big win has been won in the winning lottery. In step S70405, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 indicates that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery (S70405: YES), the process proceeds to step S70406.

In step S70406, the jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S70405, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 does not win the big win in the winning lottery (S70405: NO), the process proceeds to step S70407.

In step S70407, it is determined whether or not the value of the read winning random number counter C1 indicates that a small winning has been won in the winning lottery. In step S70407, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 has won a small winning in the winning lottery (S70407: YES), the process proceeds to step S70408.

In step S70408, the small winning information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S70407, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 does not win the small winning in the winning lottery (S70407: NO), the process proceeds to step S70409.

In step S70409, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. After that, the process advances to step S70410 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S70411, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S70411, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S70411: YES), the process proceeds to step S70412, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S70411, when it is determined that it does not correspond to reach occurrence (S70411: NO), the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is terminated as it is.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the preceding determination process (Fig. 316: S70302).

FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. In step S70501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 315) is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S70502.

In step S70502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery for the current game round is won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the big win/reach information acquisition process, and if the big win is made (S70502: YES), the process proceeds to step S70503.

In step S70503, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S70503, the process advances to step S70509.

In step S70509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S70502, if it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big hit (step S70502: NO), the process proceeds to step S70504, and it is determined whether or not a small hit has been won in the winning lottery related to this game round. judge. In step S70504, when it is determined that the small hit is won (S70504: YES), the process proceeds to step S70505.

In step S70505, with reference to the small winning variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S70505, the process advances to step S70509.

In step S70509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S70504, when it is determined that the small winning has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round (S70504: NO), the process proceeds to step S70506, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. If it is determined in step S70506 that reach occurs (S70506: YES), the process proceeds to step S70507.

In step S70507, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S70509 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In step S70506, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step S70506: NO), the process proceeds to step S70508, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is stored. By referring to it, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After that, the flow advances to step S70509 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 314: step S70105).

FIG. 319 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step S70601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step S70601, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S70601: YES), proceed to step S70602, whether the number SN of the reserved accessory is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S70601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S70601: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step S70602, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S70602: YES), the process proceeds to step S70603, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S70604.

In step S70604, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S70103 (FIG. 314) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S70602, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S70602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is the upper limit, The through-ball entry processing is terminated without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Entering ball processing for type determination gate>
Next, the ball entry processing for the type determination gate will be described. The ball entry process for the type determination gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 314: step S70106).

FIG. 320 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the type determination gate. In step S70701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the type determination gate 202. FIG. In step S70701, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the type determination gate 202 (S70701: YES), the process proceeds to step S70702. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S70701 that the game ball has not entered the type determination gate 202 (S70701: NO), the ball entry processing for the type determination gate is ended.

In step S70702, it is determined whether or not the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process (see FIG. 330) is executed when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the ball entry process for this type determination gate is executed. , the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area and then turned OFF (S70705).

If it is determined in step S70702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (S70702: YES), the process proceeds to step S70703. If it is determined in step S70702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (S70702: NO), the ball entry processing for the type determination gate ends.

In step S70703, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). After that, the process proceeds to step S70704.

In step S70704, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination processing (see FIG. 330) described later. be made. After executing step S70704, the process advances to step S70705.

In step S70705, the type determination permission flag is turned OFF. After that, the ball entry processing for the type determination gate ends.

<Entering ball processing for the big winning hole>
Next, the ball entry process for the big winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the big winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 314: step S70107).

FIG. 321 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a big winning hole. In step S70801, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a. In step S70801, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a (S70801: YES), the process proceeds to step S70802. On the other hand, in step S70801, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first big winning hole 36a (S70801: NO), the process proceeds to step S70804.

In step S70802, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set based on the balls entering the first big prize winning opening 36a. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the first big winning hole 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step S70802, the process advances to step S70803.

In step S70803, the first big winning hole entering ball command is set. The first big winning hole entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36a. The first big winning hole entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process to be described later. After executing step S70803, the process advances to step S70804.

In step S70804, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 212. In step S70804, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 212 (S70804: YES), the process proceeds to step S70805. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S70804 that the game ball has not entered the second big winning hole 212 (S70804: NO), the ball entering process for the big winning hole ends.

In step S70805, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the second big prize hole 212 is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second big winning hole 212, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step S70805, the process advances to step S70806.

In step S70806, a second big winning hole entering ball command is set. The second big winning hole entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 212 . The second big winning hole entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process to be described later. After step S70806 is executed, the ball entry process for the big winning hole ends.

<Incoming ball processing for croon>
Next, the ball entry process for the crew will be described. The ball entry process for the crew is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 314: step S70108).

FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for Kroon. In step S70901, it is determined whether or not the crew entry permission flag is ON. The crew entry permission flag is turned ON when the reservoir valve 216 is opened in the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 333), and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the crew 220. is turned OFF (Fig. 322: S70908). By doing so, although the storage valve 216 does not perform the opening operation, due to the damage or abnormality of the storage valve drive mechanism 217 or the storage valve 216, the game ball unintentionally flows into the crew, V It is possible to avoid a big hit by entering the winning hole 222.例文帳に追加If it is determined in step S70901 that the crew entry permission flag is ON (S70901: YES), the process proceeds to step S70902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S70901 that the crew entry permission flag is not ON (S70901: NO), the crew entry process is terminated.

In step S70902, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222. In step S70902, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 (S70902: YES), the process proceeds to step S70903.

In step S70903, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the opening and closing execution mode is executed. Triggered by the game ball entering the type determination gate 202 during execution, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i) in the ball entry process for the type determination gate. However, in the case of a jackpot triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the V winning opening 222, the entry of the gaming ball into the V winning opening 222 changes the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to the corresponding storage area (type determination It is stored in the processing execution area 64i). After executing step S70903, the process advances to step S70904.

In step S70904, the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON. The V winning big hit flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and is turned OFF after the opening time setting of the opening/closing execution mode by the V winning big win is completed (Fig. 333: S71910). . After executing step S70904, the process advances to step S70905.

In step S70905, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 . The V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process, which will be described later. After executing step S70905, the process advances to step S70908.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S70902 that the game ball has not entered the V winning hole 222 (S70902: NO), the process proceeds to step S70906.

In step S70906, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the non-V winning hole 224. In step S70906, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the non-V winning hole 224 (S70906: YES), the process proceeds to step S70907. On the other hand, in step S70906, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the non-V winning hole 224 (S70906: NO), the entering process for the crew ends as it is.

In step S70907, a non-V winning command is set. The non-V winning command is a command for making the sub side control device recognize that the game ball has entered the non-V winning hole 224 . The non-V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process to be described later. After executing step S70907, the process advances to step S70908.

In step S70908, the crew entry permission flag is turned OFF. After that, the process of entering the ball for the crew ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S71001, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S71002.

In step S71002, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S71003.

In step S71003, the output data such as the start-up command set in step S71002 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a variation type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S71003, the process advances to step S71004.

In step S71004, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S71005.

In step S71005, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S71006. In step S71006, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S71006, the process advances to step S71007.

In step S71007, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S71008.

In step S71008, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S71009.

In step S71009, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S71003). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S71009, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S71009: NO), in steps S71010 and S71011, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S71010, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S71011, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (S71009: YES), the process returns to step S71003, and each process from step S71003 to step S71008 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S71003 to step S71008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 323: S71006).

FIG. 324 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S71101, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the pattern variation in the game round in which a big win or a small win is won in the winning lottery ends (S71112), and the opening/closing execution mode is switched in the game state transition processing (FIG. 329). It is turned OFF when ending (Fig. 329: S71631).

When it is determined that the open/close execution mode flag is ON in step S71101 (S71101: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special game state, and this game round control is performed without executing any of the processes after step S71102. End the process. That is, when the game is in the special game state, regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the game cycle is not started. On the other hand, in step S71101, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the game is not in the special game state (S71101: NO), the process proceeds to step S71102.

In step S71102, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S71102, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S71102: NO), the process proceeds to steps S71103 to S71107 for game round start processing. In step S71103, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S71103, when it is determined that the total number of pending CRN is "0" (S71103: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71103 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S71103: NO), the process proceeds to step S71104.

In step S71104, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S71105. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S71105, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S71106.

In step S71106, it is determined whether or not the PNC count flag is ON. The PNC count flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode executed with the high-frequency support mode set as a trigger for the jackpot ends (see FIG. 335), and turned OFF when the high-frequency support mode ends. (See Figure 336). The PNC count flag is set for confirming the timing to start counting the number of game rounds executed during the high-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S71106 that the PNC count flag is ON (S71106: YES), the process proceeds to step S71107.

At step S71107, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S71107, this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S71106, when it is determined that the PNC count flag is not ON (S71106: NO), the game round control processing is terminated as it is.

In step S71102, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S71102: YES), processing for progressing game rounds in steps S71108 to S71113 is executed.

In step S71108, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S71108, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 328) described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S71108 that the variable time has not elapsed (S71108: NO), the process advances to step S71109 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step S71109, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71108 that the variation time has elapsed (S71108: YES), the flow advances to step S71110 to execute variation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the pattern display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 326) described later is displayed on the symbol display section related to the current game turn. display control. After executing step S71110, the process advances to step S71111.

In step S71111, it is determined whether or not either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON. The big win flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big win in the variation start process (FIG. 326) to be described later. The small hit flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 326) to be described later. Also, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are turned off in the flag erasing process in the transition process (FIG. 335) at the end of the ending period, which will be described later.

In step S71111, when it is determined that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (S71111: YES), the process proceeds to step S71112, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the flow advances to step S71113 to set an opening/closing execution mode start command. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is to be started. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process, which will be described later. After executing step S71113, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S71111, when it is determined that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not ON (S71111: NO), the game round control processing is terminated as it is.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Fig. 324: S71104).

FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S71201, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (Fig. 307). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S71201, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S71201, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S71201: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S71202 to S71207 is executed. On the other hand, in step S71201, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S71201: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S71208 to S71213 is executed.

In step S71202, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the flow advances to step S71203 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S71204. In step S71204, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S71205.

In step S71205, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S71205, the process advances to step S71206.

In step S71206, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S71207.

In step S71207, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S71207 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S71003 of the normal process (FIG. 323). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S71201, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S71201: NO), The process advances to step S71208.

In step S71208, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S71209. In step S71209, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the flow advances to step S71210 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S71211.

In step S71211, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S71211, the process proceeds to step S71212.

In step S71212, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S71213.

In step S71213, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S71213 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S71003 of the normal process (FIG. 323). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 324: S71105).

FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step S71301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 315) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S71302.

In step S71302, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag is ON. That is, the value of the hit random number counter C1 to be processed is either information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 as a trigger, or the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. Determine whether the information was acquired as a trigger.

If it is determined in step S71302 that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S71302: NO), the process proceeds to step S71303. In step S71303, the success/failure table for the first start port is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step S71305.

In step S71302, when it determines with the 2nd design display part flag being ON (S71302:YES), it progresses to step S71304. In step S71304, the success/failure table for the second start port is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step S71305.

In step S71305, it is determined whether or not the value of the read winning random number counter C1 indicates that a big win has been won in the winning lottery. In step S71305, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 indicates that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery (S71305: YES), the process proceeds to step S71306.

In step S71306, a stop result setting process for big hits is executed. The stop result setting process for the big win means that in the current game round in which the big win is won, the variable display is performed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in a state in which either stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to terminate. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the big win stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the big win is acquired, and the address information is transferred to the stop result address of the RAM 64. Store in the storage area. After executing step S71306, the process advances to step S71307.

In step S71307, the jackpot flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S71308 to execute specific process execution determination processing. The specific processing execution determination processing determines whether or not to execute the processing described with reference to FIG. This is a process for Details of the specific process execution determination process will be described later. After executing step S71308, the process advances to step S71315.

On the other hand, in step S71305, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 does not win the big win in the winning lottery (S71305: NO), the process proceeds to step S71309.

In step S71309, it is determined whether or not the value of the read winning random number counter C1 indicates that a small winning has been won in the winning lottery. In step S71309, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 has won a small winning in the winning lottery (S71309: YES), the process proceeds to step S71310.

In step S71310, stop result setting processing for a small hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the small hit means that in the current game round in which the small win is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. After executing step S71310, the process advances to step S71311.

In step S71311, the small hit flag is turned ON. After executing step S71311, the process advances to step S71315.

In step S71309, when it is determined that the value of the read winning random number counter C1 does not win the small winning in the winning lottery (S71309: NO), the process proceeds to step S71312.

In step S71312, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round to be executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole this time is read. Then, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S71312, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round to be executed (S71312: YES), the process proceeds to step S71313.

In step S71313, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. Specifically, in the current game round which is the stop result for ready-to-win, it is set to end the variable display in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. Execute the process for More specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S71313, the process advances to step S71315.

In step S71312, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game cycle to be executed (S71312: NO), the process proceeds to step S71314.

In step S71314, stop result setting processing for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for loss is a state in which the change display is to be ended in which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game turn that results in a failure. This is a process for setting Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S71314, the process advances to step S71315.

In step S71315, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S71315, the process advances to step S71316.

In step S71316, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S71316, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S71316: NO), the process proceeds to step S71317 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first start hole 33, and the occurrence of reach. Information on presence/absence and information on the variable time set in step S71315 are included.

On the other hand, in step S71316, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S71316: YES), the process proceeds to step S71318 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the second start hole 34, and the occurrence of reach. Information on presence/absence and information on the variable time set in step S71315 are included. After executing step S71317 or step S71318, the process proceeds to step S71319.

In step S71319, a variation type command is set. The variation type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the presence or absence of execution of specific processing.

The variation command and variation type command set in steps S71317 to S71319 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S71003 in the normal process (FIG. 323). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the variation type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S71319, the process advances to step S71320.

In step S71320, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S71320, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Specific process execution determination process>
Next, the specific process execution determination process will be described. The specific process execution determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 326: S71308). Here, the specific process means a series of processes described with reference to FIG. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining (judging) whether or not to execute the specific process.

FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing specific process execution determination processing. In step S71401, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag is ON. As described above, the process described with reference to FIG. 312 is executed when a big win is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 in the game round. Therefore, it is determined whether the game turn to be processed is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 as the trigger, or with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 as the trigger. To do so, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S71401 that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S71401: NO), the process proceeds to step S71402. On the other hand, in step S71401, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is ON (S71401: YES), the specific process execution determination process is terminated.

In step S71402, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the relevant game round in which a big win is won in the winning lottery is a predetermined specific value. As explained in FIG. 312, the process shown in FIG. 312 is executed in all cases where a big win is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. Run only in specific cases instead of Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game round is a predetermined specific value, and if it is a specific value, execution of specific processing is determined. In the present embodiment, the specific values are two values "0, 1" out of the values "0 to 4" of the winning random number counter C1 that are the big wins in the success/failure table for the first starting port shown in FIG. is set to Therefore, in step S71402, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the relevant game round in which a big win is won in the winning lottery is "0" or "1". If it is determined in step S71402 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is a specific value (S71402: YES), the process proceeds to step S71403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71402 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not a specific value (S71402: NO), the specific process execution determination process is terminated.

In step S71403, the specific processing flag is turned ON. In the process described with reference to FIG. 312, it is necessary to set an opening/closing scenario (opening pattern) in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened during the opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode. The specific process flag is provided to identify whether or not the specific process is executed in the process of determining the opening/closing scenario (FIG. 331: opening/closing scenario setting process). After executing step S71403, the process proceeds to step S71404.

In step S71404, a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the specific processing is to be executed. The specific process command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (step S71003 in FIG. 323), which will be described later. After executing step S71404, the specific process execution determination process ends.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 326: S71015).

FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing processing for setting a variable time. In step S71501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S71502.

In step S71502, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in the winning lottery relating to the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (S71502: YES), the process proceeds to step S71503.

In step S71503, the variable time table for big hit stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S71509 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S71502, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round (S71502: NO), the process proceeds to step S71504, and the small winning lottery has been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round. Determine whether or not Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and when the small hit flag is ON (S71504: YES), the process proceeds to step S71505.

In step S71505, with reference to the small winning variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S71509 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S71504, when it is determined that the small winning has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game round (S71504: NO), the process proceeds to step S71506.

In step S71506, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game cycle. Since this processing (S71506) is executed when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery related to this game round in the above step S71502 and when the small winning is not won, in step S71506, the jackpot in the winning lottery And it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which a reach occurs among the game rounds in which a small hit is not won. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S71506: YES), and the process proceeds to step S71507. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S71507, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S71509 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S71506, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (S71506: NO), the process proceeds to step S71508, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S71509 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table indicates that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the greater the variable time. set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the hit is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 323: S71007).

FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S71601, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the special game state, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S71601 that the ending period flag is not ON (S71601: NO), the process advances to step S71602 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71602 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (S71602: NO), the flow advances to step S71603 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S71603, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S71603: NO), the process proceeds to step S71604, timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b ends It is determined whether or not. In step S71604, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S71604: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S71604 that it is time to end the variable display (S71604: YES), the flow advances to step S71605 to determine whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game cycle that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode ends (Fig. 324: S71112), and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends (Fig. 329: S71631).

If it is determined in step S71605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S71605: YES), the process proceeds to step S71606. On the other hand, in step S71605, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S71605: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S71606, it is determined whether or not the game result (hit lottery result) of the current game round is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. In step S71606, when it is determined that the game result (hit lottery result) of the current game round is not a small hit (S71606: NO), the process proceeds to step S71607.

In step S71607, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In step S71606, since it is determined that the game result of the current game round (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small win, the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big win. A high-frequency support mode flag is turned off in order to change the support mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S71607, the process advances to step S71608.

In step S71608, it is determined whether or not the type determination completion flag is ON. The type determination completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot type is determined, and is turned ON when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process for determining the jackpot type (Fig. 330: S71709), It is turned OFF immediately before the opening/closing scenario setting process is executed (S71610). If it is determined in step S71608 that the type determination completion flag is not ON (S71608: NO), the process proceeds to step S71609.

In step S71609, type determination processing is executed. The type determination process will be described later.

If it is determined in step S71608 that the type determination completion flag is ON (S71608: YES), the process advances to step S71610 to turn the type determination completion flag OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S71611.

Further, in step S71606, even when it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of winning lottery) is a small winning (S71606: YES), the process proceeds to step S71611.

In step S71611, open/close scenario setting processing is executed. As described above, the opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which opening patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the round game are set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step S71611, the process advances to step S71612.

In step S71612, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S71612, the process advances to step S71613.

In step S71613, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S71003 in the normal process (FIG. 323). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of big win, and information on the big win or small win that triggered execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The information about the big win or the small win is whether the big win or the small win is won by the winning lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, or whether the big win or the small win is won. A new jackpot is won by entering a game ball into a V winning hole 222 during the executed round game, or a jackpot is won by a winning lottery executed by entering a game ball into a second starting hole 34.例文帳に追加or whether a small win has been won, or whether a new jackpot has been won by entering a game ball into the V winning port 222 during the round game executed by the relevant big win or small win. is. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S71613, the process advances to step S71614 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71603 that the opening period flag is ON (S71603: YES), the process proceeds to step S71615.

In step S71615, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S71615 that the opening period has ended (S71615: YES), the process advances to step S71616 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S71617.

In step S71617, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, when the jackpot type is determined by the type determination process, the round display unit 39 displays a display indicating the number of executions of the round game set for the determined jackpot type, and the V winning opening 222 When the big win is determined by the entry of the game ball, the round display part 39 is caused to display the number of execution times of the round game set to the big win type determined by the determination of the big win. After executing step S71617, the process advances to step S71618.

In step S71618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S71602, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S71602: YES), the process proceeds to step S71619 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S71619, the process advances to step S71620.

In step S71620, it is determined whether or not the V winning big hit flag is ON. The V winning big hit flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and is turned OFF after the opening time setting of the opening/closing execution mode by the V winning big win is completed (Fig. 333: S71910). .

In step S71620, when it is determined that the V winning big hit flag is ON (S71620: YES), the process proceeds to step S71621 to execute V winning processing. The V winning process will be described later.

In step S71621, after the V winning process is executed, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S71620 that the V winning big hit flag is not ON (S71620: NO), the process proceeds to step S71622.

In step S71622, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (S71622: YES), the process proceeds to step S71623. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S71622 that the large winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (S71622: NO), the large winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step S71623, the open/close processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S71624.

In step S71624, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S71624, the process advances to step S71625.

In step S71625, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. After executing step S71625, the process advances to step S71626.

In step S71626, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S71003 in the normal process (FIG. 323). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period. After executing step S71626, the process advances to step S71627.

In step S71627, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71601 that the ending period flag is ON (S71601: YES), the process proceeds to step S71628.

In step S71628, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S71625), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S71628 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S71628: YES), the process proceeds to step S71629.

In step S71629, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S71630 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S71630, the process advances to step S71631 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S71628, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S71628: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Type determination processing>
Next, the type determination processing will be described. The type determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 329: S71609).

FIG. 330 is a flow chart showing the type determination process. In step S71701, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned ON when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i, and turned OFF when the jackpot type is determined.

In step S71701, when it is determined that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is not ON (S71701: NO), the process proceeds to step S71702.

In step S71702, it is determined whether or not the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process is executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. After the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area, it is turned OFF (Fig. 320: S70705).

If it is determined in step S71702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (S71702: NO), the process advances to step S71703 to turn the type determination permission flag ON, and then the type determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (S71702: YES), the type determination processing ends.

In step S71701, when it is determined that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON (S71701: YES), the process proceeds to step S71704.

In step S71704, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag is ON.

In step S71704, if it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S71704: NO), proceed to step S71705, refer to the distribution table for the first start port, and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 Identify the jackpot type (distribution result) corresponding to the value. After that, the process advances to step S71707.

In step S71704, if it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S71704: YES), proceed to step S71706, refer to the distribution table for the second start port, the acquired jackpot type counter C2 Identify the jackpot type (distribution result) corresponding to the value. After that, the process advances to step S71707.

In step S71707, the jackpot type identified in step S71705 or step S71706 is set as the jackpot type in this jackpot. After executing step S71707, the process advances to step S71708.

In step S71708, the type determination completion flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S71709. In step S71709, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned OFF. After that, the type determination process is terminated.

<Opening/closing scenario setting processing>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 329: S71611) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 331 is a flowchart showing open/close scenario setting processing. In step S71801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. In step S71801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (S71801: YES), the process proceeds to step S71802.

In step S71802, it is determined whether or not the specific process flag is ON. If it is determined in step SS71802 that the specific process flag is not ON (S71802: NO), the process proceeds to step S71803.

In step S71803, a jackpot opening/closing scenario is set for a normal case (when specific processing is not executed) according to the jackpot type.

FIG. 332 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing scenario in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the opening/closing scenarios are roughly classified into three types.

The first is a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 332(a). The normal jackpot opening/closing scenario is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are set in the opening/closing execution mode in which the specific process is not executed when the jackpot is won. As shown in the figure, an open/close scenario is set for each round game execution count (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 36b opens/closes is set as a round game in each opening/closing scenario set as a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario.

The second is a jackpot opening/closing scenario when specific processing is executed, as shown in FIG. 332(b). A jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are set in the opening/closing execution mode in which the specific process is performed when the jackpot is won. It's a scenario. As shown in the figure, an open/close scenario is set for each round game execution count (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, in each opening/closing scenario set as a jackpot opening/closing scenario when a specific process is executed, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed once in the first round (1Rth) as a round game. In subsequent round games, an opening/closing pattern is set in which only the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. More specifically, in the first round, the operations of the second opening/closing door 213 and the storage valve 216 described with reference to FIG. 305 are performed.

The third is a small win opening and closing scenario shown in FIG. 332(c). In the present embodiment, the opening/closing scenario for a small win is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a small win is set. In the present embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as a small winning opening/closing scenario is set with an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door is opened/closed only once in the first round (1Rth) as a round game. .

Returning to FIG. In step S71803, when a normal jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 332(a)) corresponding to the jackpot type is set, then the opening/closing scenario setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71802 that the specific process flag is ON (S71802: YES), the process proceeds to step S71804.

In step S71804, a jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 332(b)) is set when specific processing corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. After that, the opening/closing scenario setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S71801 that the jackpot flag is not ON (S71801: NO), the process proceeds to step S71805.

In step S71805, the opening/closing scenario (FIG. 332(c)) in the case of a small hit is set. After that, the opening/closing scenario setting process is terminated.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 329: S71612).

FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step S71901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. In step S71901, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (S71901: YES), the process proceeds to step S71902.

In step S71902, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag is ON. When it is determined in step S71902 that the second pattern display flag is not ON (S71902: NO), the process proceeds to step S71903.

In step S71903, it is determined whether or not the specific process flag is ON. If it is determined in step S71903 that the specific process flag is ON (S71903: YES), the process proceeds to step S71904.

In step S71904, the opening time corresponding to the specific process is set. Specifically, the time corresponding to the opening period in the specific processing described with reference to FIG. 312 is set. During the opening period, as described with reference to FIG. 312, the effect suggesting hitting to the right is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hand hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step S71904, the process advances to step S71905 to turn off the specific processing flag. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S71903 that the specific process flag is not ON (S71903: NO), the process proceeds to step S71906.

In step S71906, the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the first starting port is set. During the opening period, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hand hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is ended.

In step S71902, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S71902: YES), the process proceeds to step S71907.

In step S71907, the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the second starting port is set. During the opening period, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-hand hitting suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S71901 that the jackpot flag is not ON (S71901: NO), the process proceeds to step S71908.

In step S71908, it is determined whether or not the V winning big hit flag is ON. In step S71908, when it is determined that the V winning big hit flag is ON (S71908: YES), the process proceeds to step S71909.

In step S71909, the opening time corresponding to the V prize jackpot is set. During the opening period, an effect (V winning notification effect) suggesting that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 and has resulted in a big hit, and a hitting to the right suggesting effect are executed. Therefore, the opening time is set to the time during which the V winning notification effect and the right-hand hitting suggestive effect can be executed. After executing step S71909, the process advances to step S71910 to turn off the V winning jackpot flag. After that, the opening time setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S71908 that the V winning big hit flag is not ON (S71908: NO), the process proceeds to step S71911.

In step S71911, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag is ON. In step S71911, when it determines with the 2nd design display part flag not being ON (S71911:NO), it progresses to step S71912.

In step S71912, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the first starting port is set. In the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 as a trigger, when a small win is won, the processing explained in FIG. 313 is executed. As shown in FIG. 313, during the opening period, a right-handed hitting suggesting effect and a double chance suggesting effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed hitting suggestive effect and the double chance suggestive effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is ended.

In step S71911, when it determines with the 2nd design display part flag being ON (S71911:YES), it progresses to step S71913.

In step S71913, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the second starting port is set. During the opening period, an effect suggesting hitting to the right and an effect prompting a game ball to enter the V winning hole 222 are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggesting effect and the effect prompting the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 can be executed is set as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is ended.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 329: S71619).

FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. The main prize winning opening opening/closing process is roughly composed of three control processes. Specifically, steps S72001 to S72007 are for controlling the opening and closing of the first door 36b, steps S72008 to S72014 are for controlling the opening and closing of the second door 213, and steps S72015 to S72022 are for controlling the opening and closing of the storage valve 216. is.

In step S72001, it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step S72001 that the first door 36b is not open (S72001: NO), the process proceeds to step S72002.

In step S72002, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the first opening/closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the first opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step S72002 that the condition for opening the first door 36b is met (S72002: YES), the process proceeds to step S72003.

In step S72003, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step S72004.

In step S72004, a first open/close door open command is set. The first opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The first opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process. After executing step S72004, the process advances to step S72008.

If it is determined in step S72002 that the condition for opening the first door 36b is not met (S72002: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S72008.

If it is determined in step S72001 that the first door 36b is open (S72001: YES), the process proceeds to step S72005.

In step S72005, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. The closing condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the first opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number of Established when it is detected that a game ball has entered. If it is determined in step S72005 that the condition for closing the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (S72005: YES), the process proceeds to step S72006.

In step S72006, the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step S72007.

In step S72007, a first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first open/close door 36b is closed. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process. After executing step S72007, the process advances to step S72008.

If it is determined in step S72005 that the condition for closing the first door 36b is not satisfied (S72005: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S72008.

In step S72008, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing door 213 is open. If it is determined in step S72008 that the second door 213 is not open (S72008: NO), the process proceeds to step S72009.

In step S72009, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the second opening/closing door 213 are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second opening/closing door 213 . If it is determined in step S72009 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (S72009: YES), the process proceeds to step S72010.

In step S72010, the second door 213 is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step S72011.

In step S72011, a second opening/closing door open command is set. The second opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 has been opened. The second opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process. After executing step S72011, the process advances to step S72015.

If it is determined in step S72009 that the condition for opening the second opening/closing door 213 is not established (S72009: NO), the process proceeds to step S72015.

If it is determined in step S72008 that the second door 213 is open (S72008: YES), the process proceeds to step S72012.

In step S72012, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied. The closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the second opening/closing door 213 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or a predetermined number It is established when it is detected that the game ball has entered. If it is determined in step S72012 that the condition for closing the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (S72012: YES), the process proceeds to step S72013.

In step S72013, the second door 213 is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step S72014.

In step S72014, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 has closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process. After executing step S72014, the process advances to step S72015.

If it is determined in step S72012 that the condition for closing the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (S72012: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S72015.

In step S72015, it is determined whether or not the storage valve 216 is open. If it is determined in step S72015 that the storage valve 216 is not open (S72015: NO), the process proceeds to step S72016.

In step S72016, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the storage valve 216 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the storage valve 216 . If it is determined in step S72016 that the condition for opening the storage valve 216 is satisfied (S72016: YES), the process proceeds to step S72017.

In step S72017, the reservoir valve 216 is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step S72018.

In step S72018, the crew entry permission flag is turned ON. The crew entry ball permission flag is set when the structure of the reservoir valve 216 is defective or abnormal, and the game ball unintentionally flows from the reservoir 218 to the crew 220 through the flow path 211 and enters the V winning opening 222. This is a flag provided to prevent a big hit from the V prize even if there is. The crew entry ball permission flag is turned ON when the storage valve 216 is opened in the large winning opening opening/closing process, and is turned OFF when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the crew 220. be done. After executing step S72018, the process advances to step S72019.

In step S72019, a storage valve open command is set. The storage valve open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the storage valve 216 has been opened. The storage valve open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process. After executing step S72019, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step S72016, when it is determined that the condition for opening the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (S72016: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S72015 that the storage valve 216 is open (S72015: YES), the process proceeds to step S72020.

In step S72020, it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the storage valve 216 are satisfied. The condition for closing the storage valve 216 is established when it is detected that the continuous opening time (for example, 2 seconds) of the storage valve 216 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed. If it is determined in step S72020 that the condition for closing the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (S72020: YES), the process proceeds to step S72021.

In step S72021, the reservoir valve 216 is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step S72022.

In step S72022, a storage valve closing command is set. The storage valve closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the storage valve 216 has closed. The storage valve closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process. After executing step S72022, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S72020, when it is determined that the closing condition of the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (S72020: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<V winning process>
Next, the V winning process will be described. The V winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 329: S71621). As shown in FIG. 329, the V winning process is performed when it is detected that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 in the ball entering process for the crew (FIG. 322) and the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON. (Fig. 322: S70904), it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Fig. 329: S71620: YES), and executed.

FIG. 335 is a flow chart showing the V winning process. In step S72101, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag is ON. In step S72101, when it determines with the 2nd design display part flag not being ON (S72101:NO), it progresses to step S72102.

In step S72102, with reference to the distribution table (Fig. 310 (b)) at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole, the jackpot type counter stored in the ball entering process for the crew (Fig. 322) Based on the value of C2, the jackpot type in the V prize jackpot is specified. After executing step S72102, the process advances to step S72104.

On the other hand, in step S72101, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S72101: YES), the process proceeds to step S72103.

In step S72103, with reference to the distribution table for the second starting port (Fig. 310(c)), based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the entry process for the crew (Fig. 322), the V winning jackpot Identify the jackpot type. After executing step S72103, the process advances to step S72104.

As can be seen from steps S72102 and S72103, even if the game ball enters the same V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning big hit, the small hit is caused by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33. As a result, when the second open/close door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning big hit, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, a small winning occurs, As a result, when the second open/close door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 to result in a V winning jackpot, the sorting table to be referred to is different.

In step S72104, the jackpot type specified in step S72102 or step S72103 is set as the jackpot type in the V prize jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S72105.

In step S72105, the type determination completion flag is turned ON. After that, the flow advances to step S72106 to turn off the opening/closing processing period flag. As can be seen from step S71602 in FIG. 329, by turning OFF the opening/closing processing period flag, the opening/closing execution mode that was being executed can be ended, and a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by the V winning jackpot can be started. can. After executing step S72106, the V winning process is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Fig. 329: S71630).

FIG. 336 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S72201, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot with a high frequency support mode. In step S72201, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a jackpot with a high frequency support mode (S72201: YES), the process proceeds to step S72202.

In step S72202, the value of the number-of-games counter PNC corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In other words, the number of games that can be executed in the high-frequency support is set in the game number counter PNC. The number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support is set for each jackpot type. Since the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support set for each jackpot type has been explained in FIG. 310, the explanation is omitted here.

After executing step S72202, the process advances to step S72203 to turn on the PNC count flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S72204.

In step S72204, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize information regarding the number of games that can be executed in the high-frequency support. The high-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 323: step S71003) of normal processing. After executing step S72204, the process advances to step S72205.

In step S72205, a flag clearing process is executed. Specifically, the big win flag, the V prize big win flag, and the second symbol display portion flag are turned off. After executing step S72205, the process advances to step S72206.

In step S72206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, in step S72201, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot with the high-frequency support mode (S72201: NO), the process proceeds to step S72207.

In step S72207, a flag clearing process is executed. Specifically, the big win flag, the V prize big win flag, and the second symbol display portion flag are turned off. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 323: S71008).

FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S72301, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S72301 that the supported flag is not ON (S72301: NO), the process proceeds to step S72302.

In step S72302, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S72302 that the support winning flag is not ON (S72302: NO), the process proceeds to step S72303.

In step S72303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S72303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72303: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72303: YES), the process proceeds to step S72304.

In step S72304, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish the variable display of symbols in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S72304 that it is time to end the variable display (S72304: YES), the process advances to step S72305 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S72304: NO), the process proceeds to step S72306.

In step S72306, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S72306, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S72306: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S72306 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S72306: YES), the process proceeds to step S72307.

In step S72307, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S72307 that the high-frequency support mode is on (S72307: YES), the process proceeds to step S72308.

In step S72308, an electric accessory open lottery is performed. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery Winning (see FIG. 311(b)). Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S72309.

In step S72309, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S72308 is support winning. In step S72309, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S72309: YES), proceed to step S72310, turn on the support winning flag, and provide in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S72311.

On the other hand, in step S72309, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S72309: NO), the process proceeds to step S72311 without executing the processing of step S72310.

In step S72311, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the high-frequency support mode. In step S72311, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S72311: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S72311 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S72312 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step S72312, the process advances to step S72313.

In step S72313, the PNC count flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S72314.

In step S72314, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S72314 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 323: step S71003) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S72307 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S72307: NO), the process advances to step S72315 to perform an electric accessory open lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S72316.

In step S72316, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S72315 is support winning. In step S72316, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S72316: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S72316, if it is determined that support is won (S72316: YES), the process advances to step S72317 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S72302 that the support winning flag is ON (S72302: YES), the process proceeds to step S72318 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S72318, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72318: NO), since the pattern is being displayed in a variable display in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72318: YES), the process proceeds to step S72319.

In step S72319, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the winning display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S72320 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S72301, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S72301: YES), the process advances to step S72321 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a. The electrical opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing step S72321, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 337: S72321).

FIG. 338 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S72401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S72401: YES), the process proceeds to step S72402.

In step S72402, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S72402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72402: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S72402, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72402: YES), the process advances to step S72403 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S72403, the process advances to step S72404.

In step S72404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S72405 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S72405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S72405: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S72405: YES), the process advances to step S72406 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S72401, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S72401: NO), the process advances to step S72407 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S72407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S72407: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S71507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S72407: YES), the process advances to step S72408 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S72409.

In step S72409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S72409: NO), the process advances to step S72410 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. do.

If it is determined in step S72410 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S72410: YES), the flow advances to step S72411 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72409 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S72409: YES), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step S72410 (S72410: NO), the process proceeds to step S72412. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

G6. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 339 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

G7. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S74101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S74101, the process advances to step S74102.

In step S74102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command handling process, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that a pending command has been received, a process corresponding to the pending command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S74102, the process advances to step S74103.

In step S74103, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a variation type command are received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that these commands are received, the effect to be executed in the game round is determined. The content (type) is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed in the game round. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74103, the process advances to step S74104.

In step S74104, a waiting period effect setting process is executed. In the standby period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the standby period described above is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed in the standby period. The details of the waiting period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74104, the process advances to step S74105.

In step S74105, an opening period effect setting process is executed. In the opening period effect setting process, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an opening command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the opening period is determined. , the determined effect is set to be executed in the opening period. The details of the opening period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74105, the process advances to step S74106.

In step S74106, opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing processing period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed during the opening/closing processing period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed during the opening/closing processing period. The details of the opening/closing processing period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74106, the process advances to step S74107.

In step S74107, ending period effect setting processing is executed. In the ending period effect setting process, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62, and if it is determined that an ending command has been received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the ending period is determined. , the determined effect is set to be executed during the ending period. Details of the ending period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74107, the process advances to step S74108.

In step S74108, command transmission processing is executed. In the command transmission process, various effect commands for displaying moving images corresponding to the effects set in the above-described various effect setting processes are transmitted to the display control device 100 . After executing step S74108, the process advances to step S74109.

In step S74109, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes of steps S74102 to S74107. That is, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps S74102 to S74107. After executing step S74109, the process advances to step S74110.

In step S74110, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read out in the processes of steps S74102 to S74107. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps S74102 to S74107 is output. After executing step S74110, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 340: S74102).

FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step S74201, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S74201 that the hold command has been received (S74201: YES), the process proceeds to step S74202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74201 that no hold command has been received (S74201: NO), this hold command handling process ends.

In step S74202, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the number of pieces of the reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 Processing is executed to allow the sound and light side MPU 92 to identify the number of pieces of on-hold information and the total number of these pieces of on-hold information. The details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step S74202 will be described later. Below, the number of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is also referred to as the "first holding number", and based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 The number of acquired pending information items is also called "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also called "total pending number". After executing step S74202, the process advances to step S74203.

In step S74203, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 specified in step S74202, and the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 The display modes of the first pending display area Ds1 and the second pending display area Ds2 are controlled based on the acquired number of pieces of pending information. After executing step S74203, this pending command handling process ends.

<Update process at the time of ball entry>
Next, update processing at the time of ball entry will be described. The update process at the time of ball entry is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command handling process (FIG. 341: S74202).

FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of ball entry. In step S74301, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out in this timer interrupt process is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. In step S74301, when it is determined that the pending command read out in this timer interrupt process is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 (S74301: YES) , the process advances to step S74302 to execute update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the updating process of the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read out in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step S74302, the process advances to step S74304, which will be described later.

In step S74301, when it is determined that the pending command read out in this timer interrupt process is not transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 (S74301: NO), that is, If it is determined that the pending command has been transmitted based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34, the process proceeds to step S74303, and the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 Update processing of the second reserved number counter area is executed. The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the second pending number counter area, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information contained in the command read out in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step S74303, the process advances to step S74304.

The reason why steps S74302 and S74303 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the holding information related to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 , the hold information is stored and held, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the hold information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step S74304, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the pending information acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 34. is a counter area for specifying the sum with the number of . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step S74304, the update process at the time of the main ball entry is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 340: S74103).

FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step S74401, it is determined whether or not a command for variation and a command for variation type have been received from the main MPU62. In step S74401, when it is determined that the command for variation and the command for variation type have not been received (S74401: NO), this game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74401 that the command for variation and the command for variation type have been received (S74401: YES), the process proceeds to step S74402.

In step S74402, information contained in the received variation command and variation type command is read and stored. Specifically, whether the game round to be started is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the game Whether or not there is a big win, whether or not there is a small win, whether or not there is a ready-to-win occurrence, and the variation time in the relevant game round, which are the results of the winning lottery in the round, are read out and stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S74403.

In step S74403, it is determined whether or not a specific process command has been received from the main MPU62. As described above, the specific process command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a big win and it is determined to execute the specific process shown in case 1 above. . In step S74403, if it is determined that a specific process command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74403: YES), the process proceeds to step S74404, corresponding to the game cycle in which the specific process (the process shown in case 1) is executed. The resulting effect pattern is set to be executed in the game round. After that, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74403 that the specific process command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74403: NO), the process proceeds to step S74405, and the result of the winning lottery for this game round is the first start port 33. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit based on the entry of the game ball into. In this embodiment, the small hit won based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 is also called "special 1 small hit", and the winning based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 The small hit is also called "special 2 small hit".

In step S74405, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the current game round is a special 1 small hit (S74405: YES), the process proceeds to step S74406, and the production pattern corresponding to the special 1 small hit is displayed in the game round set to run at Incidentally, the effect pattern corresponding to the special 1 small win is a effect pattern including the effect executed in the game round shown in case 2 described above. After that, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S74405, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for this game round is not a special 1 small winning (S74405: NO), the process proceeds to step S74407, and other results of the winning lottery (execute specific processing A performance pattern corresponding to a big win that does not win, a small win that is not a special 1 small win, a loss, etc.) is set to be executed in the game round. After that, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Waiting period effect setting process>
Next, the waiting period effect setting process will be described. The waiting period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 340: S74104).

FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing waiting period effect setting processing. In step S74501, it is determined whether or not a specific process command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S74501 that a specific process command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74501: YES), the flow advances to step S74502 to turn ON the sound/light specific process flag. The sound and light specific processing flag is a flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94, and the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to the above-described specific processing (case 1) in the opening/closing execution mode. This is a flag for determination. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is started with the sound/light specific processing flag ON, an effect corresponding to the above-described specific processing (case 1) is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S74502, the process advances to step S74503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74501 that the specific process command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74501: NO), the process proceeds to step S74503 without executing step S74502.

In step S74503, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU62. In step S74503, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74503: NO), this waiting period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74503 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74503: YES), the process advances to step S74504 to determine whether the sound and light specific processing flag is ON. determine whether or not

In step S74504, if it is determined that the sound and light specific processing flag is ON, that is, if it corresponds to the above-described case 1 (S74504: YES), the process proceeds to step S74505, and It is set so as to execute the W-chance suggesting effect. After that, the standby period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74504 that the sound/light specific processing flag is not ON (S74504: NO), the process proceeds to step S74506, and setting is made to execute a right-handed hitting effect during the standby period. After that, the standby period effect setting process is terminated.

<Opening period effect setting processing>
Next, the opening period effect setting process will be described. The opening period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 340: S74105).

FIG. 345 is a flow chart showing the opening period effect setting process. In step S74601, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU62. In the present embodiment, as described above, the opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). ing. Therefore, based on the information included in the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (start of the opening period). ) can be grasped. If it is determined in step S74601 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74601: NO), this opening period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74601 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74601: YES), the process proceeds to step S74602.

In step S74602, based on the information included in the received opening command, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big win. In step S74602, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big win (S74602: YES), the process proceeds to step S74603, and an opening effect corresponding to the type of big win. to run during the opening period. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is set such that the right-handed suggestive effect is executed during the opening period. After that, the present opening period effect setting processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S74602, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big win (S74602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered this time. If the winning lottery result is a small winning, the process proceeds to step S74604.

In step S74604, it is determined whether or not the result of the win lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the special 1 small win. In step S74604, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the special 1 small win (S74604: YES), the process proceeds to step S74605, and the special 1 small win The corresponding opening performance is set to be executed in the opening period. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in case 1 described above, the right-handed hitting suggestive effect and the double chance suggestive effect are set to be executed in the opening period. After that, the present opening period effect setting processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S74604, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is not a special 1 small winning (S74604: NO), that is, the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time If the result of the winning lottery that triggered is the special 2nd small win, the process proceeds to step S74606, and the opening effect corresponding to the special 2nd small win is set to be executed in the opening period. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is set such that the right-handed suggestive effect is executed during the opening period. After that, the present opening period effect setting processing is ended.

<Opening/closing processing period effect setting processing>
Next, the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be described. The opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 340: S74106).

FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing period effect setting process. In step S74701, first chance effect setting processing is executed. In the first chance effect setting process, the process relating to the setting of the first chance effect in case 1 and case 2 described above is executed. The details of the first chance effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74701, the process advances to step S74702.

In step S74702, non-storing second chance effect setting processing is executed. In the non-storage second chance effect setting process, it is determined whether or not game balls are stored in the storage section 218 in the above-described cases 1 and 2, and if the game balls are not stored in the storage section 218, 2 Set so as to execute the second chance presentation. The details of the non-storage second chance effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74702, the process advances to step S74703.

In step S74703, a V winning effect setting process is executed. In the V winning effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is stored in the V winning hole 222, and when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, the V winning effect is set to be executed. The details of the V winning effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S74703, the process advances to step S74704.

In step S74704, second chance effect setting processing is executed when V is not won. In the V non-winning second chance effect setting process, the game ball was stored in the storage unit 218 in the above-described case 1 and case 2, but the game ball did not enter the V winning opening 222, and the non-V winning opening 224 It is set so that the second chance performance is executed when a game ball enters the game ball. The details of the second chance effect setting process for V non-winning will be described later. After executing step S74704, the process advances to step S74705.

In step S74705, it is set to execute the effect for the opening/closing processing period corresponding to other jackpot types. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot type in which an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 is not opened is selected, opening/closing of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. Set the effect to be executed during the processing period. After executing step S74705, the present opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is terminated.

<First chance production setting process>
Next, the first chance effect setting process will be described. The first chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 346: S74701).

FIG. 347 is a flow chart showing the first chance effect setting process. In step S74801, it is determined whether or not a command for opening the second opening/closing door has been received from the main MPU62. In the present embodiment, the second open/close door 213 is opened in the winning lottery when a big win for which a specific process is executed is won and when a small win is won. The second opening/closing door open command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231 . Therefore, the sound emission control device 90 grasps the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231 based on the information included in the received second opening/closing door open command. can do. If it is determined in step S74801 that the second opening/closing door open command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74801: NO), this first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74801 that the second opening/closing door open command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74801: YES), the process proceeds to step S74802.

In step S74802, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big win. In step S74802, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big win (S74802: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 If the result is a jackpot for executing the specific process, the process advances to step S74803 to set to execute the first chance effect in case 1 described above. After executing step S74803, the first chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S74802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big win (S74802: NO), the process proceeds to step S74804.

In step S74804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second open/close door 213 is the special 1 small winning. In step S74804, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win (S74804: YES), the process proceeds to step S74805, and 1 in case 2 described above Set so as to execute the second chance production. After executing step S74805, the first chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S74804, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not the special 1 small win (S74804: NO), the first chance effect setting process is performed as it is. finish.

<Second chance effect setting processing when not stored>
Next, the non-storage second chance effect setting process will be described. The non-storage second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 346: S74702).

FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing non-storage second chance effect setting processing. In step S74901, it is determined whether or not a command for entering the second big winning hole is received from the main side MPU62. When it is determined in step S74901 that the second big winning hole entry command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74901: NO), the process proceeds to step S74904, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S74901 that the second big winning hole entry command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74901: YES), the process proceeds to step S74902, where the second big winning hole entry ball for sound and light Determine whether the flag is ON. The second big winning hole entrance flag for sound and light is a flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94, and indicates whether or not the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 212, that is, whether the game ball has entered the storage portion. 218 is stored in the sound emission control device 90.

If it is determined in step S74902 that the sound and light second large winning opening ball flag is not ON (S74902: NO), the process proceeds to step S74903 to turn on the sound and light second large winning opening ball flag. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S74904. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S74902 that the second big winning hole entry flag for sound and light is ON (S74902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S74904. That is, only when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 212 and the sound and light second big winning hole entry flag is not ON, the sound and light second big winning hole Turn on the ball entry flag.

In step S74904, it is determined whether or not the second open/close door closing command has been received from the main MPU 62 . When it is determined in step S74904 that the second opening/closing door closing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S74904: NO), this non-storage time second chance effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S74904 that the second opening/closing door closing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S74904: YES), the process proceeds to step S74905.

In step S74905, it is determined whether or not the second big winning hole entry flag for sound and light is ON, that is, whether or not the game ball entered the second big winning hole 212 and was stored in the storage section 218. do. In step S74905, when it is determined that the second big winning hole entry flag for sound and light is ON (S74905: YES), this second chance effect setting processing at non-storage ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S74905 that the second big winning hole entry flag for sound and light is not ON (S74905: NO), the process proceeds to step S74906.

In step S74906, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big win. In step S74906, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big win (S74906: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 If the result is a jackpot that executes a specific process, the process advances to step S74907 to set the second chance effect and the jackpot notification effect in the above-described case 1 to be executed before the 2nd R-th opening/closing process period starts. do. After that, the process advances to step S74908 to set an effect to be executed in the opening/closing processing period after the 2Rth. After that, the non-storing second chance effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S74906 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big win (S74906: NO), the process proceeds to step S74909, and the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is triggered. It is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a special 1 small winning. In step S74909, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special 1 small win (S74909: YES), the process proceeds to step S74910, and 2 in case 2 described above. It is set to execute the second chance effect and the loss notification effect. After that, the non-storing second chance effect setting process is terminated.

<V prize effect setting process>
Next, the V winning effect setting process will be described. The V winning effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 346: S74703).

FIG. 349 is a flow chart showing V winning effect setting processing. In step S75001, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main MPU62. The V winning command is a command transmitted from the main side MPU 62 when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 . If it is determined in step S75001 that the V winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S75001: NO), this V winning effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S75001, if it is determined that the V winning command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (S75001: YES), the process proceeds to step S75002, and an effect indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 222 is set to execute the V winning effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S75003, and the above-described second big winning hole entry flag for sound and light is turned OFF. After that, this V winning effect setting process is terminated.

<Second Chance Effect Setting Processing When V Not Winning>
Next, the second chance effect setting processing for V non-winning will be described. The V non-winning second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period effect setting process (FIG. 346: S74704).

FIG. 350 is a flow chart showing second chance effect setting processing for V non-winning. In step S75101, it is determined whether or not a V non-winning command has been received from the main MPU62. The V non-winning command is a command transmitted from the main side MPU 62 when the game ball enters the non-V winning port 224 . In step S75101, when it is determined that the V non-winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S75101: NO), this second chance effect setting processing for V non-winning is ended. On the other hand, in step S75101, when it is determined that the V non-winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S75101: YES), the process proceeds to step S75102.

In step S75102, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big win. In step S75102, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big win (S75102: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 If the result of (2) is a jackpot for which specific processing is executed, the process advances to step S75103 to set to execute the second chance effect and the jackpot notification effect in case 1 described above. After executing step S75103, the process advances to step S75104 to turn off the above-described second big winning hole entry flag for sound and light. After that, the second chance effect setting processing at the time of V non-winning is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S75102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big win (S75102: NO), the process proceeds to step S75105.

In step S75105, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small win. In step S75105, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special 1 small winning (S75105: YES), the process proceeds to step S75106, and 2 in case 2 described above. It is set to execute the second chance effect and the loss notification effect. After that, the process proceeds to the above-described step S74804, and the second big winning hole entry flag for sound and light is turned OFF. After that, the second chance effect setting processing at the time of V non-winning is ended. On the other hand, in step S75105, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening and closing door 213 is not the special 1 small winning (S75105: NO), the process proceeds to step S74804 described above, sound and light Turn off the 2nd big winning hole entrance ball flag. After that, the second chance effect setting processing at the time of V non-winning is ended.

<Ending period effect setting process>
Next, the ending period effect setting process will be described. The ending period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 340: S74107).

FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing ending period effect setting processing. In step S75201, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU62. In this embodiment, the ending command includes the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (the start of the ending period). Therefore, based on the information included in the received ending command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, etc.) that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending period). ) can be grasped. When it is determined in step S75201 that no ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S75201: NO), this ending period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S75201 that an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S75201: YES), the process proceeds to step S75202.

In step S75202, based on the information included in the received ending command, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big win. In step S75202, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big win (S75202: YES), the process proceeds to step S75203, and an ending effect corresponding to the type of big win. to run in the ending period. After that, this ending period effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S75202, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big win (S75202: NO), that is, if it is determined that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered this time. When the winning lottery result is a small winning, the ending period effect setting processing is terminated as it is.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S75301, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S75302.

In step S75302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

353 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S75401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

354 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S75501, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 353) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S75501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the liquid crystal pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and to generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S75502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S75501), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S75503.

In step S75503, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S75502), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S75504.

In step S75504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S75503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step S75505, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, the jackpot is won (case 1), and the small win is won (case 2). ), the first pattern display unit 37a also displays a pattern of symbols indicating the result of the winning lottery. The effect to do so will not be executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by the display of the image on the pattern display device 41 or the output of the voice cannot recognize the lottery result in the game round when the game round ends. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that he or she might have won a big prize even if he had won a small prize.

Further, after the game round is over, the right-handed hitting suggesting performance and the W chance suggesting performance are executed in both case 1 and case 2, so during the period when the performance is being executed after the game round is over. Also, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a big win is won instead of a small win in the winning lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery triggered by a ball entering the first start hole 33, the type of jackpot is determined at the time the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, it is determined by a game ball entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the jackpot type is determined, the round lamp of the round display unit 39 lights up with a display corresponding to the number of round game executions corresponding to the jackpot type. On the other hand, when winning a small prize, the round lamp does not light up. That is, the round lamp does not turn on immediately after the end of the game cycle, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or the small win is won. Based on this, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating whether he or she has won a big win or a small win in the game round.

As a result, the player is not made to recognize the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player hits to the right and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game round. On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the player will win a big prize instead of a small prize for a relatively long period of time. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time even after the game cycle is over and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win or the small win is started. can draw attention. In addition, when determining the type of jackpot, the player is made to hit to the right and the game ball is entered into the type determination gate 202, so that the player is actively involved in determining the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to attract more attention to the game during the period of the open/close execution mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 and a big hit is confirmed, the game ball enters the V winning hole 222. , determines the type of jackpot triggered by the entry of the ball into the V winning hole 222.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to impart a sense of speed to the player regarding the progress of the game when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, when a big win is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, the game ball is entered into the type determination gate 202 to determine the big win type. , There is relatively no sense of speed with respect to the progress of the game until the start of the round game. As a result, when a big win is won in a winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, the big win is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the speed of the progress of the game, to give the player's expectation for the game a sense of inflection, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, during the round game that is executed in response to winning a jackpot in the winning lottery that is performed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, When a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 and a new big win is determined, the big win is won in a winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 33. The round game being executed is stopped, but a new round game is started triggered by a big win caused by the game ball entering the V winning hole 222, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the new round game. can be given to

Also, in this case, the number of game balls in the V winning opening 222 is higher than the jackpot type that was distributed when the jackpot was won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball entered the first start opening 33. It is assumed that the player has anxiety that the type of jackpot to be distributed when a new jackpot is confirmed by entering the ball will be disadvantageous.

However, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Distribution (Fig. 310 (a)) and distribution of the jackpot type when the jackpot is confirmed by the game ball entering the V winning port 222 triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33 (Fig. 310: When (b)) is compared, the probability of being distributed to the 5R type 1 jackpot, which is the distribution result in which the most advantageous privilege is given to the player, is the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. When a game ball is entered into the V winning hole 222 triggered by , the jackpot is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety as described above, and to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a V winning port 222 is arranged downstream of the type determination gate 202 with respect to the direction in which game balls circulate on the game board 30 . Furthermore, a V winning opening 222 is arranged downstream of the second big winning opening 212 . Therefore, in case 1 above, when the player shoots the game ball toward the type determination gate 202, the jackpot type is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, and during the opening/closing processing period. When the second open/close door 213 is opened by entering, the game ball launched toward the type determination gate 202 is likely to enter the V winning opening 222 . Therefore, when a big win is won in the winning lottery executed when the ball enters the first starting hole 33, after the round game starts, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 212 in a natural flow. After that, the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and the game ball enters the V winning hole 222, and the round game can be started. Therefore, the progress of the game can be progressed smoothly. As a result, the game ball is entered into the V winning opening 222 and new than the jackpot classification that has been distributed in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery executed with the entry of the ball into the first start opening 33. It is possible to prevent the player from having anxiety that the type of jackpot to be distributed when a big win is confirmed will be disadvantageous, or to reduce such anxiety of the player. . Further, it is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big win is won in a winning lottery executed when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, execution of a specific process is executed by a specific process execution determination process. The presence or absence is determined, and then the number of executions of the round game corresponding to the jackpot is determined. That is, since whether or not to open and close the second opening/closing door 213 as a round game and the number of executions of the round game are determined separately, the combination of the opening/closing of the second opening/closing door 213 and the number of executions of the round game makes it possible to make a round. Various operation modes of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the game can be realized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

G8. Modification of the seventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

G8-1. Variant 1:
In the seventh embodiment, the effect executed in the game round executed in case 1, that is, the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and, in the specific process execution determination process, the effect to be executed in the game round when it is decided to execute the specific process, and the effect to be executed in the game round executed in the case of the above case 2, that is, A configuration in which the performance to be executed in the game round when a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 is set to the same performance pattern. may be By setting the same performance pattern in case 1 and case 2, it becomes more difficult for the player to judge whether the case is case 1 or case 2, and the game round is a winning lottery. It is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation that he or she may have won the prize.

In addition, a performance pattern table is provided in which a plurality of dedicated performance patterns used in case 1 and case 2 are set corresponding to the variation time of the game cycle, and the performance pattern table is set according to the variation time of the game cycle. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a different effect pattern is selected. By selecting a performance pattern from the same performance pattern table in case 1 and case 2, it is made difficult for the player to judge whether the case is case 1 or case 2, and the game round is made difficult. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that he or she will win the winning lottery.

G8-2. Modification 2:
In the seventh embodiment described above, when the jackpot is determined when the game ball enters the V winning port 222, the type of jackpot triggered when the game ball enters the V winning port 222 However, when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 in the same way as in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round. A configuration may be adopted in which the type of jackpot is determined by entering a game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the jackpot is determined by entering the game. By doing so, when the game ball enters the first start hole 33 and the game ball enters the second start hole 34 when the big win is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed. The type of the jackpot is determined in three cases, that is, the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round executed as a result of the event, and the case of the game ball entering the V prize opening 222 and the jackpot being confirmed. The processing to be performed can be unified, and the processing can be simplified.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated ball entry section (V winning jackpot type determination gate) for determining the jackpot type triggered by the entry of a game ball into the V winning port 222 is provided. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning jackpot type determining gate is disposed downstream from the V winning opening 222 in the direction of circulation of the game balls. In this case, the determination of the jackpot type, which is executed when the game ball enters the V-winning jackpot type determination gate, is performed using the same processing as the type determination processing in the seventh embodiment. Simplification can be realized.

In addition, a configuration may be employed in which the V winning jackpot type determination gate is arranged at a position not downstream of the V winning opening 222 in the direction of circulation of the game balls. For example, when a game ball enters a V winning hole 222 and a big win is determined, the V winning big win classification determining gate is arranged at a position where the ball does not enter unless the shooting mode of the game ball is changed. In this way, the player can play the game by changing the operating mode of the operating handle 25 in various ways, and the flow of the game can be changed frequently, thereby encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. Engagement can be encouraged and inflections can be added to the player's sense of anticipation.

G8-3. Variant 3:
In the above seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed with the game ball entering the first start hole 33, the game ball is placed after the end of the game round. Although the type determination process is executed when the ball is entered into the type determination gate 202 to determine the jackpot type, another configuration can be used. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the jackpot type is determined in the fluctuation start processing in the game round. That is, the jackpot type is determined before the game cycle ends. Then, when the game round is a jackpot, when the game round ends, the round lamp is lit in a display mode corresponding to the determined jackpot type. Set the end point (immediately before the start of the opening/closing processing period) and the opening period to be longer than usual. By doing so, the player is not made to recognize the lottery result of the winning lottery until the round lamp lights up, and the player has an expectation that he or she will win a big prize for a relatively long period of time. can be given. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a relatively long period of time even after the game cycle is over and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win or the small win is started. can draw attention. In the above seventh embodiment, the round lamp is turned on at the end of the opening period, but it may be turned on at the start of the opening period.

G8-4. Variant 4:
In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the opening/closing process executed in case 1 and case 2, the opening/closing scenario is set in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed only once. may adopt an opening/closing scenario in which the is opened/closed multiple times. By doing so, the probability of the game ball entering the V winning hole 222 is improved, and the player's expectation can be improved.

G8-5. Variant 5:
In the above seventh embodiment, the specific process execution determination process is performed when the game round starts to change when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, more specifically, the change start process (Fig. 326), it may be executed at other timings until the game cycle ends and the standby period starts. For example, it may be executed in the game state transition process. By doing so, for example, an effect is executed in which the player operates the effect operation button 24 during the game turn executed by the game ball entering the first start hole 33, and the effect is executed. Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which specific processing execution determination processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute a specific processing based on whether or not the player has operated the effect operation button 24 . Further, for example, whether or not to execute a specific process based on whether or not a game ball enters a specific ball entrance during a game turn executed by the game ball entering the first start hole 33 You may employ|adopt the structure which performs the specific process execution determination process which determines. That is, when a big hit is won in a winning lottery in a game round that is triggered by the game ball entering the first start hole 33, depending on the progress of the game during the game round, It is also possible to employ a configuration that determines the mode of processing in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed after the end of the game cycle. By adopting such a configuration, when a big win is won, the player can concentrate on the game even in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game round.

G8-6. Modification 6:
In the seventh embodiment, the lottery result of the winning lottery in the reserved game round is determined by the previous determination process, and as a result of the previous determination process, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery of the reserved game round, A specific process execution determination process is executed as a process in the preceding determination process, and it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process shown in case 1 before the reserved game round is executed as a game round. good too. Then, in a game round executed before the reserved game round is executed as a game round, an effect suggesting that the specific process will be executed later (specific process execution suggesting effect) may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the pending game round to be executed later. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not case 2 is applicable in the reserved game round by the preceding determination processing, and execute the specific processing execution suggestion effect in the same way. By doing so, the player can widen the range of speculation about the outcome when the reserved game round is executed as the game round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

G8-7. Variant 7:
In the above seventh embodiment, it is executed in the standby period (see FIG. 312) which is the period from the end of the game round in which the big win is won in the winning lottery and the big win in the winning lottery to the start of the opening period. A configuration may be adopted in which the right-handed suggestion effect is changed step by step with the passage of time in the standby period. The waiting period is continued until a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 from the point of time when the game round in which a big win is won in the winning lottery ends. In other words, the opening period does not start until the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 . If the player does not recognize that he/she must hit the right hand and hits the left hand, the game will not progress as intended, and the player's sense of expectation will be lowered.

Therefore, it is possible to employ a configuration in which the suggestion to the player to hit to the right is strengthened step by step as the time of the waiting period from the end of the game round in which the big win is won in the winning lottery elapses. For example, compared to the right-handed suggestive effect executed when the waiting period has elapsed from 0 to 5 seconds, the player prefers the right-handed player suggested effect performed from 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the standby period has elapsed. In addition, compared to the right-handed hitting effect that is executed when the waiting period has elapsed from 5 to 10 seconds, the waiting period has elapsed from 10 to 15 seconds. A configuration may be employed in which the right-handed hitting suggestion effect to be executed immediately prompts the player to strongly hit right-handed.

As a right-handing suggestion effect to be executed during the waiting period, for example, the sound suggesting right-handing is gradually increased (or decreased) as the waiting period elapses to urge the player to hit right. The mode may be strengthened step by step, or the size of the image indicating right hitting (for example, the image of the arrow pointing to the right) may be increased step by step as the waiting period elapses. The aspect of prompting right-handed hitting may be stepwise strengthened, or the brightness, brightness, color, etc. of the image showing right-handed hitting may be changed stepwise (for example, increased or decreased) as the waiting period elapses. By doing so, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of urging the player to hit to the right is strengthened step by step, or the tone of the voice guidance for guiding the player to hit to the right may be gradually increased as the waiting period elapses. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the mode of urging the player to hit to the right is strengthened step by step by increasing the strength to the right.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that he/she is going to hit to the right during the waiting period, and it is possible to encourage the smooth progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

G8-8. Modification 8:
In the above-described seventh embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include one type determination gate, but may employ a configuration including a plurality of type determination gates. For example, a type determination gate (hereinafter also referred to as a left side type determination gate) is provided at a position (for example, the left side of the game board 30) where the game ball is likely to enter when hitting left, and the player hits right. A configuration may be adopted in which one type determination gate (hereinafter referred to as a right type determination gate) is provided at a position (for example, the right side of the game board 30) where the game ball is likely to enter when there is. Then, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 set so as to win the jackpot in the success/failure table for the first start port (see FIG. 308), after winning the jackpot, the left side type determination gate or the right side type It is set in advance whether a big hit type is determined by entering a game ball into any of the type determination gates of the determination gates. Then, after the end of the game round in which the big win is won, an effect suggesting a left-handed shot (left-handed suggestion performance) is executed according to the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win, or a right-handed suggestion presentation is executed. It determines whether to execute or not, and executes a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination. By doing so, it is necessary for the player to decide how to operate the operating handle 25 after the end of the game round in which the player wins the big win, and the player can be actively involved in the game, resulting in a positive result. , can draw the player's attention to the game.

In addition, for each value of the winning random number counter C1 set so as to win the big win in the success/failure table for the first starting port (see FIG. 308), the game ball enters the left type determination gate to win the big win. A value that determines the type, a value that determines the jackpot type by entering the game ball into the right type determination gate, and a value that determines the jackpot type by entering either the left type determination gate or the right type determination gate. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a value to be set is set.

G8-9. Modification 9:
In the seventh embodiment, the waiting period in Case 1 and the opening period in Case 2 are each provided with two chances to win the jackpot (a double chance production). ), but it is also possible to employ a configuration for executing a performance (single chance performance) suggesting that one chance is prepared for winning a big prize. In this case, since the second chance effect can be omitted in each case, the processing necessary for executing the second chance effect can be omitted and the processing can be simplified.

Further, in case 1 and case 2, a configuration may be adopted in which the case of executing the double chance production and the case of executing the single chance production are combined. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even more during the period after the game cycle is over.

G8-10. Modification 10:
In the above seventh embodiment, when a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 during a round game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, the round game is interrupted, Although the configuration for executing the round game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 has been adopted, another configuration may be adopted.

For example, if a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during a round game that is executed after winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 A configuration may be adopted in which the progress of the game does not change, and the round game being executed triggered by winning a big win in the winning lottery is executed to the end. In this case, the round game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning hole 222 is not executed. In other words, the entry of the ball into the V winning port 222 during the open/close execution mode, which is executed when the big win is won in the winning lottery, is substantially invalid, and when the small win is won in the winning lottery, the ball enters the V winning port 222 in the open/close execution mode. Only entering the V winning opening 222 during the open/close execution mode being executed is substantially effective.

By adopting such a configuration, even if a game ball enters the V winning hole 222 during a round game that is executed when a big win is won in a winning lottery, the game progresses. state can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the process of interrupting the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot, thereby simplifying the process.

Furthermore, the entry of the ball into the V winning port 222 during the open/close execution mode, which is executed when the big win is won in the winning lottery, is substantially invalid, and when the small win is won in the winning lottery. In the configuration in which only the ball entering the V winning opening 222 during the opening and closing execution mode being executed is substantially effective, the V winning opening is opened only during the opening and closing execution mode which is executed when a big win is won in the winning lottery. A configuration including an operation mechanism (hereinafter also referred to as a V winning assist mechanism) that assists the entry of game balls into 222 may be employed.

As the V winning auxiliary mechanism, for example, of the V winning opening 222 and the non-V winning opening 224 provided in the crew 220, a mechanism that temporarily closes only the non-V winning opening 224 (hereinafter also referred to as a non-V winning opening closing mechanism ) may be adopted. In this case, the non-V winning opening closing mechanism will be closed only when the ball entering the V winning opening 222 is substantially invalid during the opening/closing execution mode which is executed in response to winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Since the entry of the game ball into the winning opening 222 is assisted, the operation of the non-V winning opening closing mechanism does not substantially affect the progress of the game.

However, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is assisted by the operation of the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, and the player's expectation that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 is increased. can be improved. That is, by operating the non-V winning hole closing mechanism, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation without substantially affecting the progress of the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the control of the operation of the V prize assisting mechanism is executed by control means other than the main control device 60 (for example, the sound emission control device 90). For example, in the case 1, the sound emission control device 90 receives a specific processing command, determines to operate the V winning auxiliary mechanism, and controls the operation of the V winning auxiliary mechanism at the start of the opening/closing processing period. Alternatively, when the game ball is stored in the storage portion 218, the non-V winning opening 224 is closed at the timing of opening the storage valve 216. configuration may be employed. By adopting such a configuration, the operation of the V winning assist mechanism is controlled by control means other than the main controller 60, so that the processing load of the main controller 60 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the V winning assist mechanism is not limited to the non-V winning opening closing mechanism described above, and any other mechanism may be employed as long as it assists the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222. may For example, a mechanism for moving the flow path 211 may be employed so that the outflow port of the flow path 211 through which the game ball flows out to the croon 220 is positioned right above the V winning opening 222 . Also, a mechanism for temporarily arranging a magnet in the vicinity of the V winning opening 222 may be adopted.

H. Applies to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

I. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for nonvolatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means, while being stored inside the housing of the game machine main body. )and,
a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the process execution means includes information storage means for non-volatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature A1, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the information storage means of the process execution means stored inside the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since game machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases in which they are not connected to hall computers. Can not. The game machine of feature A1 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the information storage means of the process execution means stored inside the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine functions as a hall computer. Even if the game machine is not connected, the detection information can be obtained from the game machine main body. That is, the gaming machine of feature A1 is in a state in which the gaming machine and the detection information are always linked on a one-to-one basis, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (the state of being installed in a gaming hall or the state of circulation). It is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game is provided,
A gaming machine, wherein the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means.

According to feature A2, the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means. Even if a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or a problem occurs in the processing of the hall computer, as long as power is supplied to the gaming machine. , detection information can be obtained. If the control means and the process execution means are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the process execution means, the detection information is acquired even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that it is not possible. On the other hand, according to feature A2, since the control means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source, the detection information can be acquired whenever the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of detection information can be improved.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a prescribed number (500) of game balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (ejection path detection sensor 44h).

According to feature A3, the detection information for each period until the specified number of game balls are detected by the predetermined detection means is stored, so the time until the specified number of game balls are detected by each gaming machine varies. Even if there is, it is possible to acquire the detection information that does not affect the variation of the time. That is, even if there is a height difference in the frequency with which game balls are shot, it is possible to acquire highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected by the difference.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The game machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour).

According to feature A4, the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period, so statistical processing using the concept of time can be performed using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine is started until the power is cut off.

According to feature A5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from the start of power supply to the game machine until the power supply is interrupted. When installed, it is possible to acquire detection information for each business day of the game hall.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
with
The processing execution means is
Number-of-balls information for acquiring number-of-balls information (number-of-balls data) that is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) put out from the payout means as the number of prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means acquisition means;
A calculation executing means (CPU 308) for executing a predetermined calculation based on the detection information and the information on the number of winning balls;
with
The game machine, wherein the information storage means stores calculation result information that is information relating to calculation results (role product ratio, etc.) by the calculation execution means.

According to feature A6, the process execution means stores the calculation result information. Since the calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the information on the number of prize balls, the information on the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine is reflected. Therefore, according to feature A6, it is possible to acquire the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the paid-out prize balls. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the paid-out prize balls.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling execution of games;
Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for executing calculation processing based on the first information obtained based on the executed game and the preset second information and obtaining the third information;
Information storage means (computation result storage memory 309) for storing the third information in a non-volatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature B1, the first information is information obtained based on the played game, and the third information is information obtained based on the first information. Therefore, the third information contains information about the played game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including the information about the played game, the third information stored in the information storage means can be used to obtain the information about the game played in the past. can be obtained. Therefore, by using the third information, it becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine. Since the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired if power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem in the power supply of the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means, the game is executed by the gaming machine. In spite of this, there arises a problem that the third information cannot be obtained. On the other hand, according to feature B2, since the arithmetic execution means, the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power source, the third information is always acquired if the game is executable. be able to. Therefore, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
A game machine, comprising a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

According to feature B2, since the transmission means is provided for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine, the third information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine used.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
with
The first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection means,
The second information is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as the prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means,
A gaming machine, wherein the third information is information relating to the number of winning balls put out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to feature B3, the third information is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, using the third information stored in the information storage means, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine relating to the actually paid out prize balls.

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling execution of games;
information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for nonvolatilely storing first information acquired based on the executed game;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is altered through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Become. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the first information can be prevented. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the first information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to use the first information to manage and inspect the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the characteristic C1, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the first information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature C2, since the information storage means operates with the same power source as the control means, the first information can be acquired if power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply to the information storage means, the first information is not displayed even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that the can not be obtained. On the other hand, according to feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power supply, the first information can always be acquired if the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of the first information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A game machine, comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

According to feature C3, since the transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the game machine is provided, the first information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine used.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
A first prize ball number information storage for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. means (main-side ROM 63);
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
a winning ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the winning ball number information stored in the first winning ball number storage means;
a second prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
By executing calculation based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means, the game is played. Calculation executing means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information about the history of
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The information on the number of winning balls set in the gaming machine is generally set to a different value for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to feature D1, the process execution means acquires the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls storage means, so that different number of prize balls information is set for each type (model) of the gaming machine. However, the process executing means can calculate correct game history information using the information on the number of winning balls set for each type of gaming machine.

If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, by checking the game history information, the inspector of the gaming machine can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
a winning ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the winning ball number information stored in the first winning ball number information storage means to the processing execution means;
The gaming machine, wherein the acquisition means acquires the number of prize balls information by receiving the signal transmitted from the number of prize balls information transmission means.

According to feature D2, since a signal including the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls information storage means is transmitted to the processing execution means, the processing execution means accesses the first number of prize balls storage means. Even if the processing execution means cannot grasp the storage position (memory address) of the prize number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the process execution means can acquire the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls storage means.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to feature D3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature D4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
The shooting means is configured so as not to be able to shoot game balls until the processing execution means completes the storage of the number of prize balls information in the second number of prize ball information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature D5, the game ball is not shot until the storage of the number of prize balls information in the second number of prize ball information storage means is completed. can be suppressed.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Every time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means (discharge passage passage number N _OUT ) reaches a specified value (500), the Information on the game history is obtained by performing calculation based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the information on the number of prize balls stored in the number information storage means. Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio etc.)
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, since the game history information is calculated each time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detecting means reaches the specified value, the number of game balls detected by each gaming machine reaches the specified value. Even if there is a variation in the time, it is possible to calculate the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency with which game balls are detected, it is possible to calculate highly accurate game history information that is less affected by the difference. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm highly accurate gaming history information, and can appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified or not. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
First calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63 ),
The processing execution means is
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means;
a second computation execution condition storage means (computation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired computation execution condition;
with
The game machine, wherein the calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

If the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the game machine as the calculation execution condition.

According to feature E2, the processing execution means acquires the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, so that the operation execution condition set for each type (model) of the game machine is established. Operations can be performed when

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine, comprising erasing means for erasing information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means after the arithmetic execution means executes the arithmetic operation.

According to feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes the calculation, the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is erased, so the information on the number of game balls is stored again in the number information storage means. It becomes possible to Therefore, the storage capacity required for the number information storage means can be reduced.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature E4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature E5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Every time a predetermined time (one hour) elapses, based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize balls information storage means. Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history, by executing calculations with
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, since game history information is calculated each time a predetermined time elapses, an inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information calculated by statistical processing using the concept of time. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A first calculation execution condition storage means (main-side ROM 63) for storing information about a time interval for executing the calculation as a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation,
The processing execution means is
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage means;
a second computation execution condition storage means (computation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired computation execution condition;
with
The game machine, wherein the calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

If the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the game machine as the calculation execution condition.

According to feature F2, the processing execution means acquires the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, so that the operation execution condition set for each type (model) of the game machine is established. Operations can be performed when

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the calculation was performed;
a determination means for determining whether or not a game is being played by a player;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the measurement means suspends measurement of the elapsed time during a period in which the determination means determines that no game is played.

According to the feature F3, the measurement of the elapsed time from the execution of the calculation is interrupted during the period during which it is determined that no game is being played. Historical information can be calculated.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature F4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature F5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group G>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
a monitoring means (blackout monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of power interruption;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
When the monitoring means detects that the power supply has been interrupted, the information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize ball information storage means Calculation executing means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history, by executing calculations based on
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, since the game history information is calculated when the occurrence of power cutoff is detected, it is detected during the period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the power cutoff occurs. The game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start of the operation of the game hall to the end of the operation, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the game machine can easily grasp whether or not there is a change in the characteristics of the game history information over the business days of the game hall, so that the game machine is not illicitly modified. It is possible to appropriately determine whether As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
A gaming machine comprising supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the arithmetic execution means even after the interruption of the power supply has occurred.

According to the feature G2, since the supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after the power is cut off is provided, the game history information is calculated by the calculation execution means and the game history information storage means for the game history information. can be reliably completed.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to feature G3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature G4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
an informing means for informing in a predetermined case;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Game history information, which is information about a game history, based on the information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number information storage means. Calculation means (CPU 308) for calculating (accessory ratio, etc.);
game history information storage means (computation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the notifying means notifies when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature H1, when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer within a predetermined range. machine.

According to the feature H2, when the specific value included in the game history information is out of the predetermined range, notification is given. A game machine that is no longer included in the list can be easily found. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature H3, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how the specific value included in the game history information falls within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a degree of deviation.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic H4, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the game history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature H5, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature H6, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Ball entry information storage means (ball entry information storage memory 309b) for sequentially storing ball entry information, which is information indicating that a game ball has been detected by the detection means, each time a game ball is detected by the detection means. and,
For a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine, the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage means and the prize balls stored in the prize number information storage means a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting number information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I1, since the information on the number of winning balls and the information on the number of winning balls are transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device is information related to the game history based on the information on the number of winning balls and the information on the number of winning balls. Game history information can be calculated within an arbitrary range. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated within an arbitrary range by using a predetermined device, and can appropriately check whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. It becomes possible to judge As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
Date and time information acquisition means (RTC 96) for acquiring date and time information that is information about date and time,
The game machine, wherein the entering ball information storage means adds and stores the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the game ball was detected by the detecting means when storing the entering ball information.

According to feature I2, the predetermined device that receives the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added can specify the date and time range and calculate the game history information. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range. Further, if a predetermined device displays ball entry information to which date and time information is added, the inspector of the gaming machine can also grasp the date and time when the game ball was detected by each detection means. .

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage means.

According to feature I3, since the ball entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the ball entry information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the ball entry information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Prize ball number information storage means (mainly side ROM 63),
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, award ball payout process, pattern display on the main display section 45), which is a process for progressing a game based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.), and detection information of game balls detected by the detection means and the prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means. a process executing means (main side CPU 62x) for executing a process of calculating game history information (character product ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history by executing calculations based on numerical information;
game history information storage means (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x) for storing the game history information calculated by the process execution means while being stored in the housing of the game machine main body;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J1, the game history information storage means for storing the game history information is provided. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the game history information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the game history information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature J1, the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine of feature J1 stores the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine is connected to the hall computer. Even in a state in which the game machine main body is not in a state where the game history information is not installed, the game history information can be obtained from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature J1, it is possible to link the game machine and the game history information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature J1, since a single process execution means executes the game progress process and the process of calculating the game history information, it is not necessary to provide a separate calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation process. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second mode, the game progress processing is not executed even when a game ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, so it is not preferable to execute the game progress processing in parallel. In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the feature J2, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program for the process to be executed in the second mode, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take countermeasures into consideration, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the second mode can be significantly improved.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the game history information.

The game history information is information whose content changes when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, the game progress can be made while the inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the game history information. The content of the game history information may change from time to time as the process is executed, making it difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature J3, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the game history information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the game history information from changing while the game history information is being played. As a result, the game machine inspector can smoothly perform the inspection.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button). When the operation of doing is executed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes), the timing when the second condition is established (the symbol variation display process ends) The timing at which the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as the timing at which the game progress processing is completed, and the timing at which all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the transition from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to feature J4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is configured to shift to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second mode is more effective than the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met regardless of whether the second condition is met, the first If the first condition that a predetermined operation has been executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is being executed in the mode of (2), the second condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display. mode, it becomes difficult to control the timing of symbol stoppage and the control of the symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, according to feature J4, for example, the first condition is that a predetermined operation is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being performed in the first mode. If it is satisfied, the transition to the second mode is made at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variable display process is not executed is satisfied, that is, at the timing after the symbols being displayed in the variable display are stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the third condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode), an operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode (the operation of pressing the mode switching button, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the transition from the second mode to the first mode is not performed. A game machine characterized by being configured to shift to a mode.

According to feature J5, when the third condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode is not executed, Since it is configured so as to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent returning to the first mode without executing the transition operation. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute the transition operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to feature J5,
The gaming machine, wherein the third condition is that a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined time (10 minutes have passed since the game was switched to the inspection mode).

According to feature J6, if a predetermined time has elapsed since a predetermined point in time during the second mode, it means that the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. However, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably prevent a return to the first mode without executing the transition operation. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to execute the transition operation after the transition to the second mode, after a predetermined time has passed since the predetermined time, the first mode will be activated. Since the game machine returns to the mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play a game with the game machine.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6,
a game progress processing information storage means (main side RAM 64) stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and storing information related to the game progress processing;
Based on the execution of an erasing operation (operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button), which is an operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means, the game erasing means for erasing information stored in the progress processing information storage means;
with
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
In the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (state during inspection mode, state in which the power supply is turned off as it is after shifting to inspection mode), the erasing means: A gaming machine characterized in that the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not deleted even when the deletion operation is executed.

According to the feature J7, in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode, an erasing operation is executed to erase the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means. Even in this case, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased. Even if an erase operation is mistakenly executed in an attempt to migrate the information, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, an erasing operation for erasing information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button. In a configuration in which the operation for shifting the mode between the Although the user intends to press the power button while pressing , there is a risk of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasure is erroneously executed. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progressing process that has been executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progressing process is stored in the game progress processing information storage means after returning to the second mode, the transition button is pressed to return from the second mode to the first mode. If the user intends to press the power button while pressing it, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the button for erasing, the information for restarting the game progress process is erased. After returning to mode 1, the game progress processing cannot be restarted, and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to feature J7, in the state after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, the erase button is erroneously pressed in an attempt to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while playing the game, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being erroneously erased, thus giving a disadvantage to the player. can be suppressed.

[Feature J8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information.

According to feature J8, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

[Feature J9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8,
A gaming machine, wherein the game history information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) capable of retaining data even if power supply is interrupted.

According to the feature J9, since the game history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine). However, the game machine and the game history information can always be linked on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the game machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9,
A game machine, wherein the game history information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is attached) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the characteristic J10, the game history information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the game history information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is altered through physical contact with the game history information storage means, it is possible to ascertain the alteration from the traces on the housing. becomes possible. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the game history information can be prevented. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. Even in a situation where game machines are distributed from time to time, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of game history information by someone. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the games that have been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the game history information. Therefore, according to the feature J10, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10,
A game machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the characteristic J11, when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J12]
The gaming machine according to feature J11,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer within a predetermined range. machine.

According to the feature J12, when the specific value included in the game history information is outside the predetermined range, notification is given. A game machine that is no longer included in the list can be easily found. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J13]
The gaming machine according to feature J12,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature J13, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how the specific value included in the game history information falls within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a degree of deviation.

[Feature J14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J11 to J13,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic J14, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the game history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group K>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, award ball payout process, pattern display on the main display section 45), which is a process for progressing a game based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is met (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), a second mode (inspection mode) that is executed;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second mode, the game progress processing is not executed even when a game ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature K1, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, so it is not preferable to execute the game progress processing in parallel. In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the characteristic K1, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program for the process to be executed in the second mode, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take countermeasures into consideration, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the second mode can be significantly improved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the characteristic K2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature K2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. Since the gaming machine of feature K2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature K2, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, the detection information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the process of outputting the detection information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress process may be executed while the inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the detection information. The content of the detection information may change at any time after execution, making it difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the characteristic K2, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the detection information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the detection information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the detection information from changing in between. As a result, the game machine inspector can smoothly perform the inspection.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature K3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, winning ball number storing memory 309a, winning ball information storing memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to the feature K4, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is housed inside a housing (board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature K5, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K5,
A game machine, comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature K6, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given, so the inspector of the game machine can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K7]
The gaming machine according to feature K6,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature K7, when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the notification is given, so the inspector of the gaming machine can check whether the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K8]
The gaming machine according to feature K7,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature K8, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of divergence of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature K9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K6 to K8,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature K9, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, award ball payout process, pattern display on the main display section 45), which is a process for progressing a game based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button). When the operation of doing is executed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes), the timing when the second condition is established (the symbol variation display process ends) The timing at which the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as the timing at which the game progress processing is completed, and the timing at which all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the transition from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to feature L1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is changed to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second mode is more effective than the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met regardless of whether the second condition is met, the first If the first condition that a predetermined operation has been executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is being executed in the mode of (2), the second condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display. mode, it becomes difficult to control the timing of symbol stoppage and the control of the symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, according to the feature L1, for example, the first condition is that a predetermined operation is performed while the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being performed in the first mode. If it is satisfied, the transition to the second mode is made at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variable display process is not executed is satisfied, that is, at the timing after the symbols being displayed in the variable display are stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the characteristic L2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature L2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature L2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature L2, it is possible to link the game machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to feature L2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature L3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, winning ball number storing memory 309a, winning ball information storing memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to feature L4, even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is housed inside a housing (board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature L5, the game machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5,
A game machine, comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature L6, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, notification is given, so the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L7]
The gaming machine according to feature L6,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature L7, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, a notification is given, so the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm that the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L8]
The gaming machine according to feature L7,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature L8, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature L9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic L9, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group M>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, award ball payout process, pattern display on the main display section 45), which is a process for progressing a game based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the second condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode), a predetermined amount of time is required to shift from the second mode to the first mode. (the operation of pressing the mode switching button, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not performed, the mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode. A game machine characterized by being configured to shift.

According to feature M1, when the second condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. , the second mode is changed to the first mode, it is possible to prevent a return to the first mode without executing a predetermined operation. For example, after shifting to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
The gaming machine, wherein the second condition is that a predetermined period of time has passed since a predetermined point in time (10 minutes have passed since the mode was shifted to the inspection mode).

According to feature M2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time point during the second mode, a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. Even if there is, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably prevent the return to the first mode without executing the predetermined operation. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to perform the predetermined operation after the transition to the second mode, the first mode will be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point in time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine from returning to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play with the game machine.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature M3, it is possible to store the detection information and output the detection information in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature M3, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature M3 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the characteristic M3, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature M3, after the inspector of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the detection information output in the second mode, the operator forgets to execute a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine fails to operate. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game on the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which progress processing can be executed.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to feature M3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature M4, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, winning ball number storing memory 309a, winning ball information storing memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to the feature M5, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is housed inside a housing (board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature M6, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M6,
A game machine, comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature M7, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, notification is given, so the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M8]
The gaming machine according to feature M7,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature M8, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the game machine inspector can check whether the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to feature M8,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature M9, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M9,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature M10, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic N group>
The N groups of features are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, award ball payout process, pattern display on the main display section 45), which is a process for progressing a game based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and storing information related to the game progress process;
erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means based on execution of a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a RAM clear button);
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is met (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), a second mode (inspection mode) that is executed;
is executable and
In the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (state during inspection mode, state in which the power supply is turned off as it is after shifting to inspection mode), the erasing means: A gaming machine, wherein the information stored in the storage means is not deleted even when the predetermined operation is executed.

According to feature N1, in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode, even if a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is executed. Even if there is, the information stored in the storage means is not erased. is performed, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, the predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasing. In a configuration in which the operation for mode transition is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is pressed to transition from the second mode to the first mode. Although the user intends to press the power button while pressing the erase button, there is a risk of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature N1, in the state after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasing is performed by mistake. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progressing process that has been executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progressing process is stored in the storage means for resuming after returning to the second mode, the power supply is pressed while the transition button is pressed to return from the second mode to the first mode. If the user accidentally presses the power button while pressing the button for erasing, the information for resuming the game progress process is erased, and the second mode is entered. The game progress processing cannot be resumed after returning, and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to feature N1, after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, the user accidentally presses the erase button to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while holding the power button, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the storage means from being erroneously erased, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged. can be suppressed.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) is provided with detection information storage means for storing
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (game history information including information on the number of balls entered, information on the number of balls entered, ratio of accessories, etc.).

According to the characteristic N2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature N2, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the detection information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature N2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the detection information detection information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine is connected to the hall computer. Even if the game machine is not in the state, the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature N2, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature N3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3,
A gaming machine, wherein the detection information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is attached) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the detection information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is altered through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the traces on the housing. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. Even in a situation where machines are distributed from time to time, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of detection information by someone. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to feature N4, it is possible to appropriately manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4,
A game machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature N5, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given, so the inspector of the game machine can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine according to feature N5,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is no longer included in a predetermined range.

According to the feature N6, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the game machine inspector can confirm that the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine according to feature N6,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines the mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature N7, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of divergence of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature N8, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

The inventions of the feature group A to feature group N solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games.

In addition to making games more interesting, various technical improvements have also been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modification of gaming machines.

For example, if a player commits an illegal act (so-called goto act), or if the nail provided on the game board of a pachinko machine is illegally bent and modified, each entry such as the general winning opening and the starting opening may be damaged. In some cases, the percentage of game balls entering the ball opening differs from what was originally assumed, and the performance and playability assumed for the pachinko game machine are sometimes impaired. However, it has been very difficult to detect such fraud.

Such cheating may be committed by a player during the hours of operation of the gaming hall. In addition, there are cases in which unauthorized modifications are made by someone after the business hours of the game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where a game machine is illegally modified while being transported before it is installed in a game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where the game machine is illegally modified before it is shipped to the game hall. Also, there is a possibility that unauthorized modifications will be made before that.

In light of this situation, the purpose is to detect fraudulent acts and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines, and to improve the soundness of games.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature group O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A gaming machine comprising a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) for starting execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (an interval of 4 msec),
The process execution means is capable of executing a specific process (arithmetic process for calculating gaming history information) as one process included in the predetermined process,
The specific process is composed of a plurality of processing stages (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29),
The processing execution means is
one of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing can be executed in one execution of the predetermined processing;
A gaming machine characterized by executing all of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing by executing the predetermined processing multiple times.

According to feature O1, one processing step out of a plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing can be executed in one execution of the predetermined processing, and by executing the predetermined processing multiple times, Since all of the plurality of processing stages that constitute the specific process are executed, the performance of the predetermined process is faster than a configuration that executes all of the plurality of processing stages that constitute the specific process in one execution of the predetermined process. The time required for one execution can be shortened. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
The specific process is composed of a series of processes whose execution order is determined,
The plurality of processing stages are obtained by dividing the series of processes constituting the specific process,
After executing one processing step (task 1 in FIG. 29) of the plurality of processing steps, the processing execution means executes the processing step (task 2 in FIG. 29) next to the one processing step. A gaming machine characterized by specifying

According to feature O2, a series of processes whose order of execution is determined is divided, and in one execution of a predetermined process, one of a plurality of process steps is executed, and then the one process step is executed. Since the processing stage to be executed next to the processing stage is specified, even if it is a series of processes in which the time required to execute the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval when incorporated into the predetermined process , can be executed by being incorporated into a predetermined process executed at predetermined intervals.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O2,
The process execution means is capable of executing a game progress process, which is a process related to progress of a game, as a process included in the predetermined process,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process is a process (arithmetic process) different from the game progress process.

According to feature O3, when a process different from the game progress process (process other than the game progress process) is incorporated into the predetermined process, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Even in a gaming machine having a configuration such that the game progresses, a process different from the game progress process can be incorporated into a predetermined process that is executed at predetermined intervals. In addition, the processing different from the game progress processing does not affect the progress of the game even if all the processing steps are not executed in one execution of the predetermined processing, so the time required for one execution of the predetermined processing can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved. As the processing different from the game progress processing, various arbitrary processing can be adopted. It is possible to adopt transmission processing or the like of transmitting information regarding the game situation to the hall computer in which the player is present at a predetermined timing.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to feature O3,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific process is a calculation process (arithmetic process) that is a process of calculating game history information, which is information about a game history.

According to the feature O4, when the calculation process for calculating the game history information is incorporated into the predetermined process, the game is configured such that the time required for executing the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Also in the machine, the calculation process can be incorporated into a predetermined process executed at predetermined intervals. In addition, the calculation process for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all the processing steps are not executed in one execution of the predetermined process. Time can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A gaming machine comprising a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) for starting execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (an interval of 4 msec),
The processing execution means is
As one process included in the predetermined process, it is possible to execute a specific process (prize tally process),
In one execution of the predetermined processing, a part of the processing target candidates (2 bits) from among the plurality of processing target candidates (8 bits of the buffer area) is selected for the specific processing (prize ball tabulation processing), and the specific processing can be executed for the set processing target,
A gaming machine characterized by executing the specific process for all of the plurality of candidates for processing by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times.

According to the feature P1, in one execution of the predetermined process, some of the plurality of process target candidates are set as the process target of a specific process, and the set process target is A specific process can be executed by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times, thereby executing the specific process for all of the plurality of processing target candidates. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for executing the predetermined process once, compared to a configuration in which a specific process is executed for all of the plurality of processing target candidates in one execution of the predetermined process. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance.

According to feature P2, since the plurality of candidates to be processed are fixed in advance, there is no need to execute processing for selecting a plurality of candidates to be processed, and the processing can be simplified. can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting a plurality of candidates for processing.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The processing target setting means sets the partial processing target candidates among the plurality of processing target candidates as processing targets for the specific processing in a predetermined order. game machine.

According to feature P3, when setting some processing target candidates among a plurality of processing target candidates as processing targets for a specific process, setting is performed in a predetermined order. It is possible to simplify the process without executing the process of determining which processing target candidate to set, and as a result, it is possible to improve the processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for executing the determination process.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
Equipped with multiple entrance ball parts where game balls can enter,
Each of the plurality of processing target candidates corresponds to each of the plurality of ball-entering sections,
Each candidate to be processed is information (ball entry detection information stored in each bit of the buffer area) that is updated based on detection of entry of a game ball into each ball entry portion,
The processing execution means performs the predetermined processing a plurality of times ( 4), it is possible to execute the specific processing for all of the processing target candidates by executing the processing 4 times).

According to the feature P4, the time required to execute a specific process for all candidates to be processed is the shortest time required to detect two game balls continuously entering one ball entering portion. , the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry part can be set to the detection of the entry of a single game ball. can be stored as information that is updated based on Specifically, when two game balls enter the ball entering portion in succession, the update is performed based on detection of the entry of the first game ball in the ball entering portion. Even if the information obtained is set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, and then the remaining other processing target candidates are set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, the next second game All these specific processes can be completed before the ball entry is detected at the ball entry section. That is, at the time when the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the second game ball in the entry section is set as the processing target and the specific process is executed, one ball is already Specific processing for the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the second game ball in the relevant ball entry section is completed, and the entry of the second game ball is detected in the relevant ball entry section. The information updated based on the fact that the ball is entered can be handled as information updated based on the detection of the entry of the new first game ball in the ball entry section. Therefore, the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry part is stored as the information updated based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. be able to. As a result, for example, it is possible to store information updated based on detection of a game ball entering each ball entering portion as binary information indicating the presence or absence of an entering ball. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry section, and to improve the processing speed of specific processing. be able to.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing specific processes (game history processes) and processes other than the specific processes (processes related to game progress);
A storage area (main side RAM 64) in which information can be written,
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means comprises holding means (registers) for holding information (register information) for execution of processing,
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for execution of the other process into the storage area;
a second process (restore process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q1, the specific process includes the first process of writing information held by the holding means and for executing other processes into the storage area. At the start, if the holding means holds information for execution of other processing that was being executed immediately before the start of the specific processing, information for execution of the other processing that was held by the holding means Information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to a storage area. Therefore, it is possible to erase the information for executing the other process held in the holding means, and cause the holding means to hold the information for executing the specific process when the process executing means executes the specific process. can. Further, the specific process includes the second process of causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process. The information can be held again in the holding means, and another process that was being executed before the start of the specific process can be restarted from the state immediately before the start of the specific process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted, other processes than the specific process can be executed without problems. machine can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without altering the program for executing other processes than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new game machine that does not execute a specific process based on the game machine, design changes can be minimized. It becomes possible to

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The processing execution means is
In the first process included in the specific process, information for executing the other process is written in a predetermined specific area (second area) of the storage area, and A gaming machine characterized in that information is written in a specific process only to the specific area (second area) of the storage area.

According to feature Q2, in the first process included in the specific process, the process execution means writes information for executing other processes into a predetermined specific area of the storage area, and , information written in a specific process is executed only in a specific area of the storage area. can be suppressed from being overwritten by the execution of Therefore, when the process using the other area is executed by the process executing means, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting the process.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the writing of information in the other process is executed only in another area (first area) of the storage area other than the specific area.

According to the feature Q3, information written in other processing is executed only to other areas other than the specific area of the storage area. can be suppressed from being rewritten by execution of other processing. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process executing means using a specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3,
The specific process is a process different from the game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of the game,
A gaming machine, wherein the other process is the game progress process.

According to the characteristic Q4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress process can be executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process is deleted. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process. As a result, for example, when the gaming machine is improved so as not to execute processing different from the game progress processing, or when developing a new gaming machine which does not execute processing different from the game progress processing, design changes are minimized. It is possible to limit As the processing different from the game progress processing, various arbitrary processing can be adopted. It is possible to adopt transmission processing or the like for transmitting information regarding the state of the game to the installed hall computer at a predetermined timing.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to feature Q4,
The specific processing is game history information related processing (game history processing) that is processing for calculating and displaying game history information (character product ratio, continuous character product ratio) that is information related to game history. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature Q5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress process can be executed without problems even if only the program for executing the game history information related process is deleted. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history information related process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so as not to execute the game history information related process, or when developing a new game machine which does not execute the game history information related process, design changes can be minimized. becomes possible.

<Characteristic group R>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
a process execution means (main side CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of processes including a specific process (game history process);
A storage area (main side RAM 64) in which information can be written,
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the writing of information in the specific processing is executed only in a predetermined specific area (second area) of the storage areas.

According to feature R1, the process execution means writes information in a specific process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area. It is possible to prevent the information written in the area from being rewritten by execution of a specific process. Therefore, when a process using an area other than the specific area in the storage area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to suppress the influence of the specific process on the process. can.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to feature R1,
The processing execution means is
The writing of information in other processes (processes related to progress of the game) other than the specific process is executed only in another area (first area) of the storage area other than the specific area. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature R2, the process execution means writes information in processes other than the specific process only to areas other than the specific area of the storage area. It is possible to prevent the information written in the specific area from being rewritten due to the execution of the other process. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process executing means using a specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The processing execution means is
comprising holding means (registers) for holding information (register information) for execution of processing, and exclusively executing the specific processing and the other processing;
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for execution of the other process to the specific area;
a second process (restore process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the specific area in the first process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature R3, since the specific process includes the first process, when the process execution means starts the specific process, the holding means executes another process just before the specific process starts. is held, the information held by the holding means for execution of other processing can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it in a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to erase the information for executing the other process held in the holding means, and cause the holding means to hold the information for executing the specific process when the process executing means executes the specific process. can. Further, since the specific process includes the second process, when the specific process ends, the information for executing the other process is retained again in the holding means, and the information to be executed before the start of the specific process is obtained. Other processes can be re-executed from the state just before the start of a particular process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted, other processes than the specific process can be executed without problems. machine can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without altering the program for executing other processes than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the game machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new game machine that does not execute a specific process based on the game machine, design changes can be minimized. It becomes possible to

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The specific process is a process different from the game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of the game,
A gaming machine, wherein the process other than the specific process is the game progress process.

According to the feature R4, the process executing means writes information in a process different from the game progress process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, so that the game progress process can be processed. When executed by means, it is possible to suppress the game progress processing from being affected by processing different from the game progress processing.

[Feature R5]
The gaming machine according to feature R4,
The specific processing is game history information related processing (game history processing) that is processing for calculating and displaying game history information (character product ratio, continuous character product ratio) that is information related to game history. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature R5, the process execution means writes information in the game history information related process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area. When executed, it is possible to prevent the game history information related process from influencing the game progress process.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
ball entry detection means (ball entry detection sensor) for detecting entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion;
Parameter storage means (prize ball tally buffer) for storing a predetermined parameter (prize ball tally value);
A gaming machine comprising: a processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) for starting execution of predetermined processing (timer interrupt processing) at predetermined intervals (intervals of 4 msec),
The processing execution means is
As the predetermined processing,
a parameter update process (prize ball tally process) for updating the predetermined parameter stored in the parameter storage means upon entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Calculation processing (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating game history information, which is information about game history, based on the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that the calculation process is not executed when the parameter update process is executed in one time of the predetermined process.

According to the feature S1, the calculation process is not executed when the parameter update process is executed in one predetermined process. That is, since both the parameter updating process and the calculation process are not executed in one predetermined process, the time required for executing the predetermined process once can be shortened. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process once becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed. Furthermore, according to the feature S1, the parameter update processing in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are correlated is executed with priority over the calculation processing in which the game ball entry state and the processing load are not correlated. To suppress an increase in the execution interval of parameter update processing, and as a result, it becomes impossible for the processing result (prize ball total value) of the parameter update processing to accurately reflect the state of entry of game balls. can be suppressed.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
Determining means for determining whether to execute the calculation process (processing of step S10810 in FIG. 29),
The processing execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines to execute the calculation process, the calculation process is executed.

According to the feature S2, the calculation process is executed when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines to execute the calculation process. Therefore, neither the parameter update process nor the calculation process is executed in the predetermined process. In this situation, instead of the parameter update process and the calculation process, other processes independent of these processes (for example, the updated parameters, the process of determining the validity of the calculation result of the calculation process, etc.) can be executed. Furthermore, if either the parameter update process or the calculation process is executed in one predetermined process, if the time required for executing the predetermined process once is shorter than the predetermined interval, the situation To reliably suppress the time required for one execution of a predetermined process from becoming longer than a predetermined interval by executing a process whose processing time is shorter than that of a parameter update process and a calculation process in can be done.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
Although the process execution means can calculate a plurality of types of game history information (character material ratio, continuous character material ratio) in the calculation process, in the calculation process in one time of the predetermined process executes a process (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating one type of game history information.

According to the feature S3, in spite of the fact that it is possible to calculate a plurality of types of game history information in the calculation process, in the calculation process in one predetermined process, only one type of game history information is calculated. is executed, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process is reduced compared to the configuration in which the process for calculating the gaming history information of a plurality of types is executed in the calculation process in one predetermined process. be able to. As a result, the time required to execute the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. can be suppressed. Also, the storage capacity for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine according to feature S3,
The processing execution means is
The game history information of the one type is calculated by executing the process (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating the game history information of the one type over a plurality of times of the predetermined process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature S4, by executing the process for calculating the game history information of one type over a plurality of predetermined processes, the game history information of the one type is calculated. It is possible to reduce the time required to execute one predetermined process, as compared with the configuration in which the calculation of one type of game history information is completed in the calculation process in the predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required to execute the predetermined process from exceeding the execution interval of the predetermined process.

The inventions of the above feature group O to feature S solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, various improvements in structure, control, presentation, etc. are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desirable to further improve the technology for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more sound games. It is rare.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 38 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of a game;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the operation means receives the predetermined operation;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the operating means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a sealing seal is attached).

According to feature T1, since the operation means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine is in an open state and the operation means is operated, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. That is, based on whether or not the space of the gaming machine remains open, there is a possibility that the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means has been erased. It is possible to grasp whether or not

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the game machine and operate the operation means. If this is the case, traces of opening will remain in the space of the game machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal modifications made to the gaming machine, and in turn, it is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of the game. can be made

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, if only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for justifiable reasons create a distribution system that can erase the traces of the opening of the space, the soundness of the game will be improved. It is possible to promote the smooth distribution of game machines while ensuring the reliability.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even when power supply is cut off.

According to feature T2, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the executed game. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature T3, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using the information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature T4, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group U>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 39 of the first embodiment) for controlling game execution;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device (inspection machine 320),
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receiving a predetermined signal (erase command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature U1, the erasing means comprises means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of a prescribed signal from a prescribed device connected to the connecting means. can erase the information stored in the information storage means. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the prescribed device.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device connectable to the connection means of the game machine is required. By limiting who can own the device, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person. It is possible to suppress the generation of the motivation to modify the game, and to improve the soundness of the game.

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is constructed in which only those who want to delete the information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for a legitimate reason can own a predetermined device, the soundness of the game will be improved. It is possible to promote the smooth distribution of game machines while ensuring the availability.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to feature U1,
transmission for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to characteristic U2, the transmission means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the person who has the predetermined device, the information is erased from the information storage means. The information can be verified by the predetermined device.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even when power supply is cut off.

According to feature U3, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the game that has been executed. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature U4, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information about the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature U5, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group V>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 40 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of a game;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device (inspection machine 320),
operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The operation means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside the board box with a sealing seal attached),
The erasing means receives the predetermined operation from the operating means and receives a predetermined signal (delete command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connecting means. A game machine characterized by comprising means for erasing the information stored in the game machine.

According to feature V1, since the operation means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, is in an open state and the operation means is operated, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the erasing means has means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of the prescribed signal from the prescribed device connected to the connecting means, a person who has the prescribed device can , the information stored in the information storage means can be erased. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information stored in the information storage means has been erased by opening the space of the game machine based on whether or not the space of the game machine remains open. In addition, it is possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the prescribed device.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device connectable to the connection means of the game machine is required. By restricting the persons who can own the predetermined device, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person possesses the predetermined device, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the game machine must be opened and operated. It is necessary to operate the means. If this is the case, traces of opening will remain in the space of the game machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the unauthorized modifications made to the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the generation of the motivation to illegally modify the game machine, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for justifiable reasons can own the specified device and erase the traces of the opening of the space. If a distribution system capable of achieving this is established, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of games.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
transmission for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to feature V2, the transmission means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the person who has the predetermined device, the information is erased from the information storage means. The information can be verified by the predetermined device.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even when power supply is cut off.

According to feature V3, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the game that has been executed. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature V4, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature V5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature V5, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group W>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 46 of the first embodiment) for controlling the execution of the game;
Based on the first information (information used for game progress processing stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) that is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing acquired second information (game history information such as winning ball tally stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, character ratio, etc., information on the number of balls entered, etc.) (main side RAM 64);
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means when erasing the second information stored in the information storage means. game machine.

According to feature W1, since the erasing means has means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, the second information acquired based on the executed game is erased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, is not erased and is maintained as it is even though it has been erased.

Specifically, for example, the second information, which is the information acquired based on the game played on the gaming machine, is collateral information for judging the fairness of the game played on the gaming machine. When the second information is erased, the first information (for example, information about the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the game state) used for controlling the execution of the game in the gaming machine is deleted. It is preferable to erase and initialize the gaming state of the gaming machine. According to this feature, the erasing means has means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, so that the second information, which serves as collateral for judging the fairness of the game, is erased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained as it is because the first information is not erased even though the first information has been deleted.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to feature W1,
The game machine, wherein the erasing means has means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information among the information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature W2, since the erasing means has means for erasing the first information among the information stored in the information storage means and not erasing the second information, It is possible to erase the first information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, while leaving the second information, which is the information that has been written.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or at the start or end of the operation of the game hall, the first information, which is the information used for the control of the execution of the game, is erased. There is a desire to initialize the control of the game machine by pressing the button, but not to erase the second information obtained based on the executed game. According to this feature, while leaving the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game, the first information, which is the information used for controlling the execution of the game, is erased, and the game machine is operated. Control initialization can be performed.

<Characteristic group X>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 42 of the first embodiment) for controlling the execution of the game;
Based on the first information (information used for game progress processing stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) that is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing acquired second information (game history information such as winning ball tally stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, character ratio, etc., information on the number of balls entered, etc.) (main side RAM 64);
First operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) for receiving a first operation (an operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed);
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means erases the first information among the information stored in the information storage means based on the acceptance of the first operation by the first operating means, and erases the second information. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for not erasing the information.

According to the feature X1, the erasing means erases the first information out of the information stored in the information storage means based on the reception of the first operation by the first operating means, and erases the second information. Since means for not erasing the information is provided, the first information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, can be erased while leaving the second information, which is the information obtained based on the executed game. becomes possible.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of the execution of the game, or at the start or end of the operation of the game hall, the first information, which is the information used for the control of the execution of the game, is erased. There is a desire to initialize the control of the game machine by pressing the button, but not to erase the second information obtained based on the executed game. According to this feature, by operating the first operating means, the second information, which is the information used to control the execution of the game, is left while the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game, is retained. 1 information can be erased to initialize the control of the gaming machine.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
A second operation means (second RAM clear button) for accepting a second operation (operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on),
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the second operation means accepts the second operation. game machine.

According to the feature X2, the erasing means has means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of the second operation by the second operating means. The second information, which cannot be erased by operating the operating means, can be erased by operating the second operating means.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to feature X2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second operation means (second RAM clear button) is stored inside a space (inside a board box to which a seal is attached) in which a trace of opening remains.

According to feature X3, the second operation means is stored inside the space where traces of opening remain. Therefore, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, When the space of the game machine is opened and the second operation means is operated, the space of the game machine is left with a trace of opening. In other words, it is possible that the second information stored in the information storage means has been erased by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the second stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine information may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the game machine and operate the second operation means. If this is the case, a trace of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the second information stored in the information storage means is erased, there is a possibility that the information was erased for fraudulent concealment. There will be traces left behind. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal modifications made to the gaming machine, and in turn, it is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of the game. can be made

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to circulate the second information after erasing it. Therefore, if only those who have a desire to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the game machine for a legitimate reason can erase the traces of the opening of the space, It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring soundness of games.

<Characteristic group Y>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspects 43 and 44 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of games;
Based on the first information (information used for game progress processing stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) that is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing acquired second information (game history information such as winning ball tally stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, character ratio, etc., information on the number of balls entered, etc.) (main side RAM 64);
operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) for receiving a predetermined operation;
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means is
The operation means performs the first operation (turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and entering a state in which the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) erasing the first information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of the operation of
A second operation in which the operation means is different from the first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined period of time). A game machine characterized by comprising means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of the second information.

According to feature Y1, the erasing means erases the first information stored in the information storage means when the operating means receives the first operation, and the operating means receives the first operation. is provided with means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on acceptance of a different second operation, by executing a different operation on the operation means, the information storage means It is possible to select the information to be erased from among the information stored in the . That is, the information to be erased can be selected without providing other operation means for selecting the information to be erased, so that the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in the control of game execution or at the start or end of business of the game hall, the first information, which is information used to control the execution of the game, is erased. When it is desired to initialize the control of the gaming machine, the first operation is executed, and on the other hand, the second information, which is the information obtained based on the executed game, is erased, and the gaming machine is newly operated. If you want to circulate it to the public, you just need to execute the second operation. In this way, by performing different operations on the operation means, it is possible to select information to be erased from among the information stored in the information storage means.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The erasing means accepts the second operation (the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing the state of pressing the RAM clear button for a predetermined period of time). A gaming machine comprising means for erasing said first information in addition to erasing said second information stored in said information storage means, based on said information storage means.

According to the feature Y2, the erasing means erases the second information stored in the information storage means and also erases the first information based on the operation means accepting the second operation. Since means for erasing information is provided, both the first information and the second information can be erased by executing the second operation on the operating means.

<Feature Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x of aspect 41 of the first embodiment) for controlling execution of a game;
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as total value of winning balls, role ratio, etc., information on the number of entered balls, etc.);
erasing means (an erasing IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
Receiving means for receiving authentication information (password);
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine, wherein the erasing means has means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfies a predetermined condition.

According to feature Z1, the erasing means has means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the authentication information received by the receiving means satisfies a predetermined condition. A person who has the authentication information that satisfies the requirements can erase the information stored in the information storage means. That is, it becomes possible to restrict erasure of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition.

Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the effect of the illegal modification appears in the executed game, and furthermore, the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine The effects of such unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a game is being played normally by the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") confirms the information stored in the information storage means, thereby confirming the information provided to the gaming machine. Unauthorized modifications can be discovered. For this reason, there are persons (hereinafter also referred to as "illegal persons") who desire to prevent inspectors from discovering that the gaming machine has been modified illegally by erasing the relevant information. there's a possibility that.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition. If a person who can have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition is restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being deleted by an unauthorized person, which in turn leads to a game. It is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to illegally modify the machine, and improve the soundness of the game.

It should be noted that game machines may be circulated from one transaction to another. In some cases, there is a legitimate desire to erase the information that has been stored before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is constructed in which only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for legitimate reasons can have the authentication information that satisfies the predetermined conditions, It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring soundness of games.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining memory even when power supply is cut off.

According to feature Z2, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is possible to retain the information acquired based on the game that has been executed. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a game is being played normally in the gaming machine.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information acquired based on the executed game includes information (total value of prize balls) regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

According to feature Z3, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box to which a seal is attached).

According to feature Z4, the information storage means is stored inside a space where traces of openness remain. The space of the gaming machine is put into an open state, and a trace of the opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the information stored in the information storage means is illegally altered by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not there remains a trace of the opening of the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether there is a possibility or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal illegal alterations made to the information stored in the information storage means, and furthermore, it is possible to generate motivation to illegally alter the information stored in the information storage means. can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

The inventions of the features T to Z described above solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines are designed to improve the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and simplify the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and providing more sound games. Improvements in technology are desired.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
first processing execution means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting first information (opening command) and second information (opening start command);
a second process execution means (sound emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first process execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second processing execution means is
When the first information is received, a plurality of processes (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) are set to be sequentially executed, and the set plurality of processes are sequentially executed,
When the second information is received during the sequential execution of the set plurality of processes due to the reception of the first information, the process being executed is terminated and a specific process (round effect) is performed. A gaming machine characterized by executing

In a normal game machine that does not have the feature αA1, when the second process execution means is caused to sequentially execute a plurality of processes, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute each process. information to the second process execution means. When causing the second process execution means to execute a specific process, the first process execution means sends information for causing the second process execution means to execute the specific process to the second process execution means. Send to That is, the number of times the first process execution means transmits information to the second process execution means increases as the number of processes to be executed by the second process execution means increases.

Specifically, for example, after causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed, and then a specific process (round effect), the first process executing means transmits information (opening command) for causing the second process executing means to execute the first process (opening effect), and then executes the second process. Information (right hitting notification command) for executing processing (right hitting notification effect) is transmitted, and information (opening start command) for executing specific processing (round effect) is transmitted. In this case, the first process execution means will transmit the information (command) to the second process execution means three times. Also, after causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), when executing a specific process (round effect) without executing the second process (right-handed notification effect) , the first process executing means transmits information (opening command) for causing the second process executing means to execute the first process (opening effect), and then executes the second process (right-handed notification effect). Information (right-handed notification command) for executing is not transmitted, but information (open start command) for executing specific processing (round effect) is transmitted. In this case, the first process execution means transmits the information (command) twice to the second process execution means. That is, in a normal game machine, when the second process execution means is not caused to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the first process execution means sends information (command ) may be transmitted twice, but when the second process execution means is caused to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the first process execution means sends information to the second process execution means (command) will be sent three times.

On the other hand, according to the feature αA1, when the second process executing means receives the second information while sequentially executing a plurality of processes set by receiving the first information, Since the process being executed is terminated and the specific process is executed, even if the second process executing means is caused to execute the specific process after executing all the processes among the plurality of processes, , even if the second process execution means is caused to execute a specific process without executing unexecuted processes among the plurality of processes, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to perform What is necessary is just to transmit 1st information and 2nd information. That is, in either case, the first process execution means may transmit the information twice to the second process execution means.

Specifically, for example, when the second process execution means is set to sequentially execute a first process (opening effect) and a second process (right-handed notification effect) as a plurality of processes, Even if the second process executing means is caused to execute a specific process (round effect) after executing the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect), Even if the second process execution means is caused to execute a specific process (round effect) without executing the second process (right-handed notification effect) after executing the first process (opening effect), The first process executing means may transmit the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command) to the second process executing means. That is, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute the second process (right hitting notification effect) or not to execute the second process execution means. It suffices to send the information (command) twice. Therefore, according to feature αA1, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means, and reduce the processing load on the first process execution means.

Furthermore, according to the feature αA1, the number of processes (the number of effects) actually executed among the plurality of set processes by changing the timing at which the second process execution means receives the second information. will change. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the first process execution means transmits the second information, the number of processes to be executed by the second process execution means can be changed.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1,
The second processing execution means is
When the first information is received, as the plurality of processes, the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect) are set to be sequentially executed,
After receiving the first information, when the second information is received before executing the second process, the second process set to be executed after the first process is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing (round effect) is executed without executing the processing of .

According to the feature αA2, after executing the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect), the second process executing means is caused to execute the specific process (round effect). Even if there is, after the first processing (opening performance) is executed, the second processing (right-handed notification performance) is not executed, and the specific processing (round performance) is executed by the second processing execution means. Even in the case of opening, the first process executing means may transmit the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command) to the second process executing means. That is, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute the second process (right hitting notification effect) or not to execute the second process execution means. It suffices to send the information (command) twice. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission of the first process execution means, and reduce the processing load of the first process execution means.

[Feature αA3]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
The first process execution means executes a process related to progress of the game,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process executing means executes a process related to game presentation.

According to feature αA3, in a gaming machine in which the first process execution means executes processes related to progress of a game, the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αA4]
A gaming machine according to feature αA3 subordinate to feature αA2,
The first processing execution means is
A privilege granting process (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is a process of granting a privilege to a player, can be executed,
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege grant start effect (opening effect) is executed, which is a representation suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process will start,
As the second processing, a shooting mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player the shooting mode of the game ball that is recommended during the execution of the privilege granting process,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the specific process, an effect during awarding of a privilege (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to a player that the privilege imparting process is being executed, is executed.

According to feature αA4, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first process executing means in a gaming machine that executes the privilege giving start effect, the firing mode suggesting effect, and the privilege giving effect.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
first processing execution means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting first information (opening command) and second information (opening start command);
a second process execution means (sound emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first process execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
When the first process execution means transmits the first information and then transmits the second information, the transmission interval is different,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second process executing means is configured to execute different processes.

In a normal gaming machine that does not have the feature αB1, the first process execution means transmits information of various contents to the second process execution means. The second process execution means then executes a process corresponding to the content of the information received from the first process execution means. That is, in an ordinary game machine, the first process execution means transmits information of various contents to the second process execution means in order to cause the second process execution means to execute various kinds of processes.

On the other hand, according to the feature αB1, the interval between the transmissions when the first processing execution means transmits the first information and then the second information is transmitted is different, so that the second processing execution means are configured to execute different processing modes, the first processing execution means transmits various content information to the second processing execution device in order to cause the second processing execution device to execute various content processing. The processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced compared to the configuration of transmitting to the execution means.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine according to feature αB1,
The first processing execution means is
A first transmission mode in which second information (opening start command) is transmitted after a first period (opening period of 10 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the first information (opening command);
A second transmission mode in which the second information (opening start command) is transmitted after a second period (opening period of 7 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the first information (opening command);
is executable and
The second processing execution means is
When the first process execution means executes the first transmission mode, the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed,
When the first process execution means executes the second transmission mode, the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αB2, even when the second process execution means is caused to execute the first process (opening effect) and then execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the second process execution means Even if the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after causing the process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), the first process execution means executes the first information (opening effect). command) is transmitted, then the second information (opening start command) may be transmitted. Information for executing the second process (right hitting notification command) when transmitting and executing the second process (right hitting notification effect) after executing the first process (opening effect) is transmitted, and if the second process (right hitting notification effect) is not executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed, information for executing the second process (right hitting notification command) is not transmitted (comparative example), the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αB3]
The gaming machine according to feature αB2,
The second processing execution means is
When the first process execution means executes the first transmission mode, the third process (round production) becomes a processing mode to execute,
When the first process execution means executes the second transmission mode, after executing the first process (opening effect), without executing the second process (right hitting notification effect) A gaming machine characterized by a processing mode in which the third processing (round effect) is executed.

According to the feature αB3, the second process executing means is caused to execute the first process (opening effect), then the second process (right-handed notification effect), and then the third process (round effect). is executed, the third process is executed without causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect) and then the second process (right-handed notification effect). (round effect), the first process execution means may transmit the second information (opening start command) after transmitting the first information (opening command). , transmits information (opening command) for causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), and executes the first process (opening effect) and then executes the second process (right In the case of executing the hitting notification effect), information (right hitting notification command) for executing the second process is transmitted, and after executing the first process (opening effect), the second process (right If the hitting notification effect) is not to be executed, the information for executing the second process (right hitting notification command) is not transmitted, and the first process (opening effect) or the second process (right hitting notification effect ) is executed, and then information (opening start command) for executing the third process is transmitted when the third process (round effect) is executed (comparative example). By comparison, the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αB4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB3,
The first process execution means executes a process related to progress of the game,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process executing means executes a process related to game presentation.

According to feature αB4, in a gaming machine in which the first process execution means executes processes related to progress of a game, the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αB5]
A gaming machine according to feature αB4 subordinate to feature αB3,
The first processing execution means is
A privilege granting process (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is a process of granting a privilege to a player, can be executed,
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege grant start effect (opening effect) is executed, which is a representation suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process will start,
As the second processing, a shooting mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player the shooting mode of the game ball that is recommended during the execution of the privilege granting process,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the third process, a privilege-giving effect (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to a player that the privilege-giving process is being executed, is executed.

According to feature αB5, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first process executing means in a gaming machine that executes the privilege giving start effect, the firing mode suggesting effect, and the privilege giving effect.

[Feature αB6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB5,
The first process execution means is game progress process execution means (main controller 60) for executing processes related to progress of the game,
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A lottery process executing means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
Transmission means for sequentially transmitting a plurality of predetermined pieces of information (opening command and opening start command) when the result of the predetermined lottery process results in a predetermined result (jackpot);
An interval between transmissions when the transmission means sequentially transmits the plurality of predetermined information based on the game state (support mode state) when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed a transmission interval determining means for determining
A game machine with

According to the feature αB6, based on the game state when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed, the interval of transmission when the predetermined plurality of pieces of information are sequentially transmitted is determined. The device that has received the plurality of predetermined information performs processing corresponding to the game state when the lottery processing with the predetermined result is executed, based on the fact that the intervals at which the plurality of predetermined information are received are different. can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the game progress processing executing means, compared to a configuration in which various information with different contents are transmitted to another device in order to cause another device to execute processing corresponding to the game state.

[Feature αB7]
The gaming machine according to feature αB6,
The second process execution means is effect process execution means (sound emission control device 90) for executing processes related to game effects,
The effect processing execution means receives the predetermined plurality of information transmitted by the transmission means, and executes a mode corresponding to the game state based on the fact that the intervals of the reception are different (low frequency The opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed corresponding to the support mode, and only the opening effect is executed corresponding to the high-frequency support mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αB7, the effect processing execution means receives a plurality of predetermined information transmitted by the transmission means of the game progress processing execution means, and based on the fact that the intervals of the reception are different, the mode corresponding to the game state Therefore, compared with the configuration in which various information with different contents are sent to the effect processing execution means in order to cause the effect processing execution means to execute the processing corresponding to the game state, the game progress processing execution means Processing load can be reduced.

[Feature αB8]
A gaming machine according to feature αB6 or feature αB7,
The game progress processing executing means executes privilege giving processing (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is processing for giving a privilege to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery processing is the predetermined result. provided with privilege grant processing execution means for
The shooting mode of the game ball recommended in the first gaming state (during the low-frequency support mode) is the first shooting mode (left-handed),
The shooting mode of the game ball recommended in the second game state (during the high-frequency support mode) is the second shooting mode (right hitting),
The shooting mode of the game ball recommended during execution of the privilege granting process is the second shooting mode (right-handed),
The transmission interval determination means,
When the game state when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed is the first game state, the predetermined plurality of pieces of information are transmitted at the first transmission interval (10 second interval). decide to send
When the game state when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed is the second game state, the plurality of predetermined information is transmitted at the second transmission interval (7-second interval). decide to send
The effect processing execution means is
This is an effect suggesting to the player that the shooting of the game ball in the second shooting mode is recommended when the predetermined plurality of information transmitted at the first transmission interval are received. Execute the firing mode suggestion production (right-handed notification production),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined plurality of information transmitted at the second transmission interval are received, the shooting mode suggesting effect (right-handed informing effect) is not executed.

According to the feature αB8, when the recommended shooting mode of the game ball changes from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode by executing the privilege giving process, the shooting mode suggesting effect recommending the second shooting mode. is executed, and if the recommended shooting mode of the game ball does not change to the second shooting mode even after the execution of the privilege giving process, the shooting mode suggesting effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the game progress processing executing means and to execute an appropriate mode of presentation corresponding to the game state when the predetermined lottery processing is executed.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
Game progress processing execution means (main controller 60) for executing processing related to game progress;
Effect processing execution means (audio light emission control device 90) for executing processing related to game effects,
A gaming machine comprising
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A lottery process executing means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
a game round process execution means for executing a game round process (variation display and stop display of symbols), which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery process;
privilege granting process execution means for executing privilege granting processing (opening/closing processing period in opening/closing execution mode), which is processing for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery processing results in a predetermined result (big win); ,
The length of the waiting period (opening period), which is the period from the end of the game cycle process that has resulted in the predetermined result to the start of the privilege giving process, is determined based on the game state (support mode state). a waiting period determining means for
with
Although the effect processing executing means executes the same processing (processing for setting to execute an opening effect and a hitting to the right notification effect) regardless of the game state at the start of the waiting period, A gaming machine characterized in that, during the standby period, different effects are executed according to the game state.

According to the feature αC1, although the effect processing execution means executes the same processing regardless of the gaming state at the start of the waiting period, during the waiting period, different contents are performed according to the gaming state. Since the performance is executed, it is possible to execute the performance suitable for the waiting period whose length changes according to the game state without executing different processing according to the game state at the start of the waiting period. . That is, the effect processing executing means grasps the game state at the start of the waiting period and responds to the game state in order to execute the effect suitable for the waiting period whose length changes according to the game state. you don't have to do something different with it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect processing executing means.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
The game progress processing execution means transmits first information (opening command) at the start of the waiting period, transmits second information (open start command) at the start of the privilege granting process,
The effect processing execution means is
When the first information is received, regardless of the game state, a process of setting a plurality of effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) to be sequentially executed is executed,
When the second information is received during the sequential execution of the set plurality of processes due to the reception of the first information, the performance being executed is ended and a specific performance (round performance) is performed. A gaming machine characterized by executing

According to the feature αC2, the interval from when the effect processing execution means receives the first information until it receives the second information varies depending on the game state, so the first information is received. Of the plurality of effects set by the above, the number of effects that are actually executed decreases as the interval becomes shorter, and increases as the interval becomes longer. That is, according to the feature αC2, when the effect processing execution means receives the first information, the standby period It is possible to make the content of the effect executed in , differ according to the game state.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC2,
The effect processing execution means is
When the first information is received, regardless of the game state, as the plurality of effects, a first effect (opening effect) and a second effect (right-handed notification effect) are sequentially executed. set to
After receiving the first information, when the second information is received before executing the second effect, the second effect set to be executed after the first effect A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed without executing the effect.

According to the feature αC3, the interval from when the effect processing executing means receives the first information to when it receives the second information varies depending on the game state, so that the second effect is executed. There are cases where it is not. Therefore, according to the feature αC3, simple processing is performed such that when the effect processing executing means receives the first information, the first effect and the second effect are set to be sequentially executed regardless of the game state. By executing it, it becomes possible to vary whether or not the second effect is executed in the waiting period according to the game state.

[Feature αC4]
A gaming machine according to feature αC3,
The effect processing execution means is
As the first effect, a privilege giving start effect (opening effect), which is a effect suggesting to the player that the privilege giving process is to be started, is executed;
As the second effect, a shooting mode suggesting effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player the shooting mode of the game ball that is recommended during the execution of the privilege giving process,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the specific effect, a effect during awarding of a privilege (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to a player that the privilege imparting process is being executed, is executed.

According to the feature αC4, when the effect processing executing means receives the first information, the simple process of setting to sequentially execute the privilege giving start effect and the firing mode suggesting effect is executed regardless of the game state. Thus, whether or not the firing mode suggesting effect is executed in the standby period before the effect during privilege application is started can be made different according to the game state.

<Characteristic αD group>
The feature αD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 1 of the second embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
a first process executing means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting predetermined information (opening command);
a second process execution means (audio emission control device 90) capable of receiving the predetermined information transmitted by the first process execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second processing execution means is
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first process execution means,
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the control state is the first state (low-frequency support mode), a first process (opening effect) is executed,
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the control state is the second state (high-frequency support mode), processing different from the first processing (short opening effect) A gaming machine characterized by executing

According to the feature αD1, even when the second process execution means is caused to execute the first process, and even when the second process execution means is caused to execute a process different from the first process, Even if there is, the first process execution means only needs to transmit predetermined information (information of the same content). Information for executing the first process is transmitted to the second process executing means, and when the second process executing means is caused to execute a process different from the first process, the different process is executed. The processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the information for executing the process is transmitted to the second process execution means.

[Feature αD2]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1,
The second processing execution means is
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the state of the control is the first state (low-frequency support mode), the first processing (opening effect) is executed and then the second A game machine characterized by executing the processing of (right-handed notification effect).

According to feature αD2, when the second process execution means receives predetermined information (opening command) when the control state of the first process execution means is the first state (low-frequency support mode) , the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. Configuration for transmitting information (opening command) for executing processing (opening effect), and further transmitting information (right hitting notification command) for executing second processing (right hitting notification effect) (comparative example) , the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced, and the processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αD3]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
The first process execution means transmits state information (high-frequency support mode command, low-frequency support mode command) that is information about the state of the control when the state of the control changes,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process execution means grasps the control state of the first process execution means based on the state information received from the first process execution means.

According to feature αD3, the first process execution means transmits state information that is information about the state of control when the state of control changes, and the second process execution means performs the second process based on the state information. Since the state of control of one process execution means is grasped, the first process execution means does not need to include information about the control state of the first process execution means in the predetermined information and transmit it. It is possible to reduce the processing load when the first processing executing means transmits predetermined information.

[Feature αD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3,
The first process execution means executes a process related to progress of the game,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process executing means executes a process related to game presentation.

According to the feature αD4, in a gaming machine in which the first process execution means executes processes related to progress of a game, the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αD5]
A gaming machine according to feature αD4 subordinate to feature αD2,
The first processing execution means is
A privilege granting process (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is a process of granting a privilege to a player, can be executed,
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege grant start effect (opening effect) is executed, which is a representation suggesting to the player that the privilege grant process will start,
As the second process, a shooting mode suggesting effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player a recommended shooting mode of the game ball during execution of the privilege giving process. game machine.

According to the feature αD5, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first process executing means in a gaming machine that executes the privilege giving start effect and the firing mode suggesting effect.

<Characteristic αE group>
The feature αE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 1 of the second embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
A gaming machine comprising game progress processing execution means (main controller 60) for executing processing related to progress of a game,
The game progress processing execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a first game mode (low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second game mode (high frequency support mode, high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game mode. can be,
A lottery process executing means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
a game round process execution means for executing a game round process (variation display and stop display of symbols), which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery process;
privilege granting process execution means for executing privilege granting processing (opening/closing processing period in opening/closing execution mode), which is processing for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery processing results in a predetermined result (big win); ,
with
The privilege provision processing execution means is
If the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined result during the first game mode, the first period (10 seconds) after the game round process with the predetermined result is completed After the opening period) has passed, the privilege granting process is started,
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined result during the second game mode, the time period is longer than the first period after the game round process with the predetermined result is completed. A gaming machine, wherein the privilege giving process is started after a relatively short second period (opening period of 4 seconds) has elapsed.

According to the feature αE1, when the result of a predetermined lottery process during the first game mode is a predetermined result, the game progress processing execution means terminates the game round process that has the predetermined result. After the lapse of the first period, the privilege granting process is started, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined result during the second game mode, the game round process that has the predetermined result Since the privilege giving process is started after the lapse of the second period shorter than the first period after the end of the second game mode, a sense of speed can be given to the game in the second game mode, and the game is completed. Interest can be improved.

Specifically, for example, during the second game mode, which is advantageous to the player, the expectation that the privilege granting process will start is high. Also, they are playing the game expecting that the privilege giving process will be started early. That is, during the second game mode, the player seeks a sense of speed in the game. According to the feature αE1, during the second game mode, compared to during the first game mode, the privilege is given in a shorter time after the game round process in which the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined result is completed. Since the process is started, a sense of speed can be imparted to the game during the second game mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature αE2]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1,
Equipped with an effect processing execution means (audio emission control device 90) that executes processing related to game effects,
The game progress processing execution means includes:
Predetermined information (opening command) is transmitted when the game cycle process in which the result of the lottery process is the predetermined result is completed, and second information (opening start command) is transmitted when the privilege granting process is started. ) is provided with information transmission means for transmitting
The effect processing execution means is
a first privilege granting start rendering (opening rendering), which is a rendering suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process will start;
a second privilege giving start effect (short opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege giving process is to be started and which is temporally shorter than the first privilege giving start effect (short opening effect);
is executable and
It is possible to grasp the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means,
When the predetermined information is received during the first game mode, the first privilege giving start effect is executed in the first period,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined information is received during the second game mode, the second bonus giving start effect is executed during the second period.

According to the feature αE2, the effect processing execution means can grasp the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means, and when predetermined information is received during the first game mode, in the first period When the first privilege giving start effect is executed and predetermined information is received during the second game mode, the second privilege giving start effect is executed in the second period, so the first period or It is possible to execute a privilege giving start effect respectively suitable for the length of time of the second period. Furthermore, according to the feature αE2, even if the effect processing executing means is caused to execute the first privilege provision start effect or even if it is caused to execute the second privilege provision start effect, the game progress processing is performed. Since the execution means may transmit predetermined information (information of the same content), for example, when causing the effect processing execution means to execute the first privilege provision start effect, the first privilege provision start effect is executed. Information for execution is transmitted to the performance processing executing means, and information for executing the second privilege provision start performance is transmitted to the performance processing execution means when the second privilege provision start performance is to be executed. , the processing load on the game progress processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αE3]
A gaming machine according to feature αE2,
The effect processing execution means is
A firing mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect), which is a performance that suggests to the player a recommended shooting mode of the game ball during execution of the privilege granting process, is possible,
When the predetermined information is received during the first game mode, the firing mode suggesting effect is executed after the first privilege giving start effect is executed in the first period. game machine.

According to the feature αE3, the effect processing executing means, when receiving the predetermined information during the first game mode, executes the first privilege giving start effect in the first period, and then performs the firing mode suggesting effect. Therefore, before the privilege imparting process is executed, it is possible to suggest the game ball shooting mode recommended during the execution of the privilege imparting process to the player. To reduce the frequency of information transmission by the information transmission means of the game progress processing execution means, compared with the configuration in which the information transmission means separately transmits information for executing the firing mode suggesting performance to the performance processing execution means. can be done.

[Feature αE4]
A gaming machine according to feature αE2 or feature αE3,
The game progress processing execution means transmits type information (high frequency support mode command, low frequency support mode command) that is information regarding the type of the game mode when the game mode changes,
The game machine, wherein the effect process execution means grasps the type of the game mode of the game progress process execution means based on the type information received from the game progress process execution means.

According to the feature αE4, the game progress processing execution means transmits type information that is information relating to the type of the game mode when the game mode changes, and the effect processing execution means receives the type received from the game progress process execution means. Since the type of game mode of the game progress process execution means is grasped based on the information, the game progress process execution means does not transmit the information on the game mode type of the game progress process execution means including the information in the predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the game progress processing executing means transmits the predetermined information.

<Characteristic αF group>
The feature αF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 2 and modification 3 of the second embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
a first process executing means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting second information (opening start command) after transmitting first information (opening command);
a second processing execution means (audio emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information;
A gaming machine comprising
The second processing execution means is
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first process execution means,
Based on the control state, the content of processing (contents of presentation) to be executed during a period (opening period) from when the first information is received until when the second information is received is determined. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αF1, the second process execution means can grasp the control state of the first process execution means, and based on the control state of the first process execution means, the first process execution means Since the content of the process to be executed is determined in the period from the reception of the information to the reception of the second information, the first process execution means can receive the first information and the second information according to its own control state. It is possible to transmit the first information and the second information in the same transmission mode every time without changing the mode of transmitting the information. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control necessary for the first process executing means to change the transmission mode for transmitting the first information and the second information according to its own control state. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the processing execution means of the above. Further, according to the feature αF1, the first process execution means receives various contents of information in order to cause the second process execution means to execute various contents of processes according to the state of control of the first process execution means. to the second process execution means, the processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature αF2]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1,
The gaming machine, wherein the first process executing means transmits the first information and the second information at the same interval even if the control states are different.

According to the feature αF2, the first process execution means transmits the first information and the second information at the same interval even if the control states of the first process execution means are different. It is possible to omit the control required to change the interval of transmitting the first information and the second information according to the control state of the device itself, and reduce the processing load of the first processing execution means. be able to.

[Feature αF3]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
The second processing execution means is
When the control state is the first state, in a first partial period included in a period (opening period) from when the first information is received until when the second information is received, the first a partial period included in the period from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information and after the first partial period In the second partial period of the production including the second content (right hitting notification production) is executed,
When the control state is the second state, an effect including the first content (a portion of the long opening effect from 0 seconds to 7 seconds) is executed in the first partial period, and the second effect is executed. A game machine characterized by executing an effect including a third content (the part from 7 seconds to 10 seconds of the long opening effect in the modified example 2, and the round effect in the modified example 3) during the partial period of .

According to the feature αF3, during the first partial period, an effect including the same content is executed regardless of the control state of the first process executing means, and during the second partial period, the first process executing means is controlled. Since a performance including different contents is executed according to the state of control, the player is given an expectation of how the contents of the performance will change from the first partial period to the second partial period. be able to. Further, according to the feature αF3, it is possible to execute an effect including contents suitable for the state of control of the first process executing means in the second partial period.

[Feature αF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3,
The first process execution means transmits state information (high-frequency support mode command, low-frequency support mode command) that is information about the state of the control when the state of the control changes,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process execution means grasps the control state of the first process execution means based on the state information received from the first process execution means.

According to the feature αF4, the first process execution means transmits state information that is information about the state of control when the state of control changes, and the second process execution means performs the second process based on the state information. Since the state of control of the first process execution means is grasped, the first process execution means does not need to include information about the state of control of the first process execution means in the first information and transmit it. , the processing load when the first processing executing means transmits the first information can be reduced.

The inventions of the above features αA group to αF group solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements are being made.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

<Characteristic αG group>
The feature αG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
A first ball entry area (non-V winning area FNV in the third embodiment) provided on the flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry area (V prize winning area) is provided on the downstream side of the flow path relative to the first ball entry area with respect to the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path. region FV); and
A mechanism that contributes to the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, the state transition means ( second opening and closing door),
with
The state transition means is
In the first state, the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area are set to a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state, the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area are brought into a state in which a game ball can be entered or easily entered.

According to the feature αG1, the state transition means can control the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state, thereby controlling the ball-entering area into which the game ball is entered.

[Feature αG2]
A gaming machine according to feature αG1,
The state transition means is
The first flow path area (area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door), which is an area on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entering area (non-V winning area FNV), is a game ball. by making a transition from the first state to the second state during the period in which the is circulating, the game ball circulating on the flow path can enter the first ball entry area;
While maintaining the first state during the period in which the game ball circulates in the first flow path area, the game ball passes through the first flow path area and enters the second ball entry area (V winning area FV), which is the area on the flow path corresponding to the first state to the second , thereby enabling or facilitating entry of a game ball circulating on the flow path into the second ball entry area.

According to the feature αG2, the state transition means controls the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state, so that the game ball flowing through the flow path enters the first ball entry area. It is possible to variously control the ball entry area into which the game ball is entered, such as allowing the game ball circulating in the flow path to enter the second ball entry area. In other words, one state transition means can control the ball entry area into which the game ball is entered for the two ball entry areas.

[Feature αG3]
A gaming machine according to feature αG1 or feature αG2,
The state transition means is
an operation mode (opening/closing execution mode) in which state transitions between the first state and the second state are performed a plurality of times;
A region on the channel corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as a first channel region,
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path area is defined as the first flow path area passage time,
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as a first state duration,
The operation mode includes a first operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first-class jackpot) including a predetermined operation pattern in which the duration of the first state is longer than the passage time of the first channel region. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature αG3, when the time interval at which the game ball periodically reaches the first flow path area and the game ball reaches the first flow path area is shorter than the first flow path area passage time By executing the first operation mode by the state transition means, at least one game ball that periodically reaches the first flow path area can enter the second ball entry area.

[Feature αG4]
A gaming machine according to feature αG3,
defining a region on the channel corresponding to the second ball entry region as a second channel region,
When the time required for a game ball to enter the first flow path area and exit the second flow path area is defined as the ball entry area passage time,
A game characterized in that, in the predetermined operation pattern included in the first operation mode, the first state duration is longer than the first passage area passage time and shorter than the ball entering area passage time. machine.

According to the characteristic αG4, during the execution of the predetermined operation pattern, at least one of the game balls that periodically reach the first flow path area can enter the second ball entry area, and the second Almost all game balls reaching one channel area can enter either the first ball entering area or the second ball entering area.

[Feature αG5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to 4,
The state transition means is
An operation mode in which state transitions between the first state and the second state are performed a plurality of times,
A region on the channel corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as a first channel region,
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path area is defined as the first flow path area passage time,
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as a first state duration,
A gaming machine comprising, as the operation mode, a second operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second jackpot) in which all of the first state durations are shorter than the first passage area passing time.

According to the feature αG5, while executing the second operation mode, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entering area, and almost all of the balls reaching the first flow path area A game ball can enter the first ball entering area.

[Feature αG6]
A gaming machine according to feature αG5,
A third ball entry area (first big prize opening) is provided on the upstream side of the flow path from the first ball entry area, and a game ball can enter,
The third ball entry area is capable of transitioning between a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball and a state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball,
A region on the channel corresponding to the third ball entry region is defined as a third channel region,
When the time required for the game ball to enter the third flow path area and exit the first flow path area is defined as the second ball entry area entry time,
The state transition means is
When the second operation mode is executed, the point in time when the third ball-entering area transitions from a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter to a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter As a criterion, the first state transition from the first state to the second state in the second operation mode is started before the second ball entry area entry time elapses;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αG6, it is possible to suppress the game balls from circulating on the second flow path area when the execution of the second operation mode is started. As a result, when the state transition means transitions from the first state to the second state with the start of the second operation mode, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entry area. . Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entry area while the second operation mode is being executed.

<Characteristic αH group>
The feature αH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
Based on the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path, the upstream side ball entry section (the first large winning opening in the third embodiment) and the downstream side ball entry section ( 2nd big prize mouth) and
The state of the upstream ball-entering section is divided into a non-enterable state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an entering state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. Upstream state transition means for transitioning between available state (open state);
downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream side entrance section between the non-enterable state and the enterable state;
Control means for controlling the upstream state transition means and the downstream state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising
The downstream ball-entering portion is divided into a first ball-entering area (non-V winning area FNV) and a second ball-entering area (V winning area FV) in order from the upstream side of the flow path,
an operation of the upstream side state transition means for transitioning the upstream side entering portion in the non-enterable state to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state; and the downstream state transition means. defined as a unit motion an operation of transitioning the downstream ball-entering portion in the non-enterable state to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
A gaming machine, wherein unit actions by the upstream state transition means and unit actions by the downstream state transition means are executed exclusively.

According to the feature αH1, the control means controls the timing of executing the unit action by the upstream side state transition means and the unit action by the downstream side state transition means, so that the game ball flowing through the flow path is entered into the upstream side. The ball is entered only in the part, the ball is entered only in the first ball entry area of the downstream side entrance part, or the ball is entered in the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area of the downstream side entrance part. It is possible to control the ball entry part or the ball entry area where the game ball is entered.

[Feature αH2]
A gaming machine according to feature αH1,
The control means is
When a predetermined game state is started, prior to execution of the unit action by the downstream state transition means, the unit action is executed by the upstream state transition means,
The time from the end of the unit action by the upstream state transition means to the start of the unit action by the downstream state transition means is set so that the game ball is in the upstream ball entering portion in the non-enterable state. After entering the upstream channel region, which is the corresponding region on the channel, the first ball-entering region, which is the region on the channel corresponding to the first ball-entering region of the downstream-side ball-entering portion in the non-enterable state A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed in a time shorter than the time required to advance through one channel region.

According to the feature αH2, at the start of the unit action by the downstream side state transition means, the game ball exists in the downstream flow path area, which is the area on the flow path corresponding to the downstream ball entering portion in the non-enterable state. It is possible to suppress the game ball from unintentionally entering the downstream side ball entering portion along with the start of the unit action by the side state transition means. For example, by controlling the timing of executing the unit action by the upstream side state transition means and the unit action by the downstream side state transition means, the game ball circulating in the flow path is controlled to enter only the upstream ball entering portion. In this case, if the unit action by the downstream side state transition means is started first, a game ball exists in the downstream flow path area, and the game ball is placed in the downstream ball entering portion when the unit action is started by the downstream side state transition means. There is a risk of unintentionally entering the ball. On the other hand, by controlling as in this feature, it is possible to roughly control the timing at which the game ball circulates in the upstream channel region and the downstream channel region, and control the ball entry part or the ball entry region where the game ball is entered. can be made easier.

[Feature αH3]
A gaming machine according to feature αH1 or feature αH2,
The control means, when a first game state (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second type jackpot) is started, a first game state that continuously executes the unit action by the downstream side state transition means a plurality of times. While executing the operation pattern of
The time from the end of one unit action in the plurality of continuous unit actions by the downstream state transition means for the first action pattern to the start of the next unit action is From entering the first flow path area, which is the area on the flow path corresponding to the first ball-entering area of the downstream-side ball-entering portion in a non-enterable state, to exiting the first flow path area A gaming machine characterized by being shorter than the time required for

According to the feature αH3, almost all game balls that have reached the downstream channel area can enter the first ball entering area of the downstream side ball entering section while the first operation pattern is being executed.

[Features αH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αH1 to αH3,
The control means, when a second game state (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot) is started, a second game state for continuously executing the unit action by the downstream side state transition means a plurality of times. While executing the operation pattern of
During the time from the end of one unit action in the plurality of continuous unit actions by the downstream side state transition means for the second action pattern to the start of the next unit action, the game ball is A gaming machine comprising a case where the time from entering the first flow path area to exiting the first flow path area is longer than the time required.

According to the feature αH4, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry area of the downstream side ball entry section while executing the second operation pattern.

[Feature αH5]
A gaming machine according to feature αH4,
The time from the end of one unit action in the plurality of continuous unit actions by the downstream state transition means for the second action pattern to the start of the next unit action is It is longer than the time required from entering the first flow path area to advancing out of the first flow path area, and the game ball corresponds to the downstream ball entry part in the non-enterable state A gaming machine characterized by being shorter than the time required from entering a downstream channel area, which is an area on a channel, to exiting the downstream channel area.

According to the feature αH5, while executing the second operation pattern, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entry area of the downstream side ball entry section, and furthermore, during the execution of the second operation pattern, Almost all game balls that have reached the downstream flow path area can be entered into the downstream ball entry section.

<Characteristic αI group>
The feature αI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αI1]
a plurality of ball entry areas into which game balls can enter;
a control means for controlling the states of the plurality of ball entry areas;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means synchronously executes the state transitions of the plurality of ball-entering areas (third embodiment and modification 4 of the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature αI1, the gaming machine synchronously executes state transitions of a plurality of ball-entering areas, thereby simplifying control compared to controlling state transitions for each ball-entering area. be able to.

[Feature αI2]
The gaming machine according to feature αI1,
Equipped with a flow path through which game balls circulate,
Based on the circulation direction of the game ball circulating in the flow path,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of ball-entering areas are arranged adjacently from upstream to downstream of the flow path.

According to the feature αI2, the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged adjacently from upstream to downstream of the flow path, so that the control means controls the plurality of entry areas corresponding to the behavior of the game ball flowing through the flow path. When executing the state transition of the ball area synchronously, it becomes possible to execute control corresponding to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order for the control means to synchronously execute the transition of the states of a plurality of ball-entering areas in response to the behavior of the game ball circulating through the flow path, the surrounding area of each ball-entering area must be circulated. It is necessary to grasp the behavior of the playing ball. For example, as a comparative example, when a plurality of ball entry areas are arranged at separate positions, the control means synchronizes the state transition of the plurality of ball entry areas in correspondence with the behavior of the circulating game balls. In order to execute it, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to the behavior of the game balls that circulate in the peripheral areas of the respective ball entry areas that are located away from each other, which complicates the control. That is, the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry area is relatively large, and the number of game balls circulating in the entire area is relatively large, so the number of game balls whose behavior is to be grasped is large. The number increases and the control becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the plurality of ball entry areas in this feature are arranged adjacently, the overall area including the peripheral areas of each ball entry area is smaller than the above comparative example, and the game that circulates in the entire area Since the number of balls is also reduced, the number of game balls whose behavior is to be grasped is reduced, and the control can be simplified. Furthermore, according to this feature, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, it is easy to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and the control is simpler. can be Specifically, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, the direction of the game ball reaching each ball entry area is somewhat constant, and each ball entry area Variation in the behavior of each game ball reaching each ball entry area can be reduced, such as small variations in the speed of each game ball reaching the . As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and the control can be further simplified.

[Feature αI3]
A gaming machine according to feature αI1 or feature αI2,
The control means divides the plurality of ball-entering areas into a non-enterable state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an enterable state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. synchronously transition between states,
A unit operation is defined as an operation in which the control means transitions the plurality of ball-entering areas in the non-enterable state to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
When the time required for the game ball to pass through the area corresponding to each ball entering area in the non-enterable state is defined as the entering area passage time,
A non-ball-enterable state maintenance time, which is the time from the unit action to the next unit action executed by the control means, is set based on the ball-entering area passing time of each of the plurality of ball-entering areas. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature αI3, the ball non-enterable state maintenance time is set based on the ball-entering area passage times of the plurality of ball-entering areas. Since it is possible to grasp the respective entering ball area passage times of a plurality of entering ball areas, it is possible to easily determine and set the non-entering ball possible state maintenance time and to simplify the control.

[Feature αI4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αI1 to αI3,
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a game ball enters each of the plurality of ball entry areas;
At least one of the plurality of ball entry areas (V winning area FV in the third embodiment) is provided with a privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means when the game ball enters the plurality of ball entry areas. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball entry area is different from other ball entry areas.

According to feature αI4, since the privilege granted to the player has a ball-entering area different from other ball-entering areas, the control means controls the mode of state transition of a plurality of ball-entering areas that are executed in synchronization. By doing so, it is possible to control the privilege given to the player.

<Characteristic αJ group>
The feature αJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αJ1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
a first ball entry area provided on the flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
The state of the first ball-entering area is divided into a non-enterable state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an enterable state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. a state transition means for transitioning between
When the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state by the state transition means, the first ball-entering channel area, which is the area on the channel corresponding to the first ball-entering area, is changed to a game ball. First entering ball passage area passage time adjustment means for adjusting the first ball entering passage area passing time, which is the time required for the ball to pass through (the convex portion provided on the second opening and closing door in the third embodiment or , the magnetic member provided on the second opening/closing door in Modification 2 of the third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αJ1, the state transition means controls the timing of the state transition of the first ball-entering area and adjusts the passage time of the first ball-entering flow path area, thereby allowing the player to enter the first ball-entering area. You can control the ease of ball entry.

[Feature αJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature αJ1,
When the unit motion is defined as an operation in which the state transition means transitions the first ball-entering area, which is in the non-enterable state, to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
The state transition means is in an operation mode in which unit operations are executed a plurality of times, and the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation is the passage of the first ball entering flow path region. A gaming machine comprising a first operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second type jackpot) which is an operation mode shorter than time.

According to the feature αJ2, while the state transition means is executing the first operation mode, almost all game balls that have reached the first ball entering area can enter the first ball entering area.

[Feature αJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature αJ1 or feature αJ2,
When the unit motion is defined as an operation in which the state transition means transitions the first ball-entering area, which is in the non-enterable state, to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
The state transition means is in an operation mode in which unit operations are executed a plurality of times, and the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation is the passage of the first ball entering flow path region. A game machine characterized by comprising a second operation mode (an opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first-class jackpot) which is an operation mode longer than time.

According to the feature αJ3, while the state transition means is executing the second operation mode, it is possible to reduce the proportion of game balls entering the first ball entry area compared to the first operation mode. . In other words, the game balls that have reached the first ball-entering area can pass through without entering the first ball-entering area at a predetermined rate.

[Feature αJ4]
A gaming machine according to feature αJ3,
A second ball entry area is provided downstream of the first ball entry area on the flow path with respect to the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path, and the game ball can enter the second ball entry area;
The state transition means transitions the first ball-entering area to the non-enterable state, simultaneously transitions the second ball-entering area to the non-enterable state, and shifts the first ball-entering area to the non-enterable state. to the enterable state and at the same time transitioning the second ball enterable area to the enterable state,
A region on the channel corresponding to the second ball entry region is defined as a second ball entry channel region,
When the time required for the game ball to enter the first ball-entering channel region and exit the second ball-entering channel region is defined as the total ball-entering channel region passing time,
In the second operation mode provided by the state transition means, the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation is longer than the first entering passage region passage time. A gaming machine characterized in that the passing time is shorter than the passing time of the incoming ball passage area.

According to feature αJ4, the state transition means can cause almost all gaming balls that have passed through the first ball-entering area without entering the first ball-entering area when the second operation mode is executed to enter the second ball-entering area. .

[Feature αJ5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ4,
The state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes the opening of the first ball entry area,
The first ball-entering passage area passage time adjusting means is a convex member arranged on a circulation surface through which a game ball circulates in the opening/closing member when the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic αJ5, it is possible to easily adjust the passage time of the first ball entering flow path region by adjusting the number of convex members arranged on the flow surface of the opening/closing member.

[Feature αJ6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ5,
The state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes the opening of the first ball entry area,
The first ball-entering passage area passage time adjusting means is a magnetic material arranged on a circulation surface through which a game ball circulates in the opening/closing member when the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state. A gaming machine characterized by being a member.

According to the feature αJ6, the action of the magnetic force exerted on the game ball by the magnetic member makes the game ball circulating on the circulating surface move in a unique manner, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature αJ7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ6,
The state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes the opening of the first ball entry area,
wherein the first ball-entering passage area passage time adjusting means is an inclination of a flow surface through which a game ball circulates in the opening/closing member when the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature αJ7, it is possible to easily adjust the passage time of the first ball entering flow path region by adjusting the inclination angle of the flow surface.

<Characteristic αK group>
The feature αK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αK1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
Based on the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path, the upstream side ball entry section (the first large winning opening in the third embodiment) and the downstream side ball entry section ( 2nd big prize mouth) and
The state of the upstream ball-entering section is divided into a non-enterable state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an entering state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. Upstream state transition means for transitioning between available state (open state);
downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream side entrance section between the non-enterable state and the enterable state;
A gaming machine comprising
The downstream ball entry portion is
It has a specific region (V winning region FV), which is a region set as one of the conditions for the entry of a game ball to change the game state to a specific state, and the specific region upstream from the specific region. A gaming machine characterized by having a predetermined area (non-V winning area FNV) that is different from the area.

According to the feature αK1, since the downstream side entry area has a predetermined area upstream of the specific ball entry area, the downstream side state transition means controls the timing for transitioning the state of the downstream side entry area. It is possible to control whether or not the game ball entering the side ball entering portion is made easier to enter the specific area. In the case of a general gaming machine, when one ball-entering section has two areas, a game controller is installed inside the ball-entering section to control which of the two areas a game ball is to enter. It has an induction mechanism that guides the ball. In the case of such a game machine, it is necessary to control the operation of the above-described guide mechanism separately from the operation control of the state transition means for controlling the state of the ball-entering section between the non-ball-enterable state and the ball-enterable state. Therefore, the control becomes complicated, and it is necessary to secure a storage area for storing the program for executing the control. On the other hand, in the gaming machine having this feature, it is possible to control the operation of the downstream side state transition means to control whether the game ball is to enter the predetermined area or the specific area provided in the downstream side ball entering section. , the control can be simplified and the storage area required for storing the program can be reduced as compared with the general gaming machine described above.

[Feature αK2]
A gaming machine according to feature αK1,
When the downstream ball-entering portion is in the non-enterable state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter,
A gaming machine, wherein when the downstream ball-entering section is in the ball-enterable state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where a game ball can be entered or easily entered.

According to the feature αK2, by controlling the timing at which the downstream side state transition means changes the state of the downstream side ball entering section, the downstream side ball entering section is actually made at a timing at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area. Even if the state of is changed to a ball-enterable state, when the downstream ball-entering section is in a ball-enterable state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where game balls can be entered or easily entered. Therefore, the player can expect the game ball to enter the specific area. More specifically, even if the state of the downstream side ball entry section is changed to a state where it is possible to enter the game ball at a timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area, the game ball does not enter the specific area. Even if the state of the downstream ball-entering unit is changed to the ball-enterable state at an easy timing, when the downstream ball-entering unit is in the ball-enterable state in both cases, the predetermined area and the specific area are both Since it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, the player can expect that the game ball will enter the specific area.

[Feature αK3]
A gaming machine according to feature αK1 or feature αK2,
a downstream ball-entrance opening, which is an opening of the downstream-side ball-entrance part, faces the flow path surface,
The downstream-side state transition means changes the state of the downstream-side ball-entering portion to a non-enterable state by closing the downstream-side ball-entering portion opening, and closes the downstream-side ball-entering portion opening. transitioning the state of the downstream ball-entering portion to a ball-enterable state by opening the state;
When the downstream ball entry portion is in the non-enterable state, there are a specific region opening that is an opening through which a game ball enters the specific region, and an opening through which a game ball enters the predetermined region. The predetermined area openings are all in a closed state,
A gaming machine, wherein when the downstream side ball-entering portion is in the ball-enterable state, both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are in an open state.

According to the feature αK3, when the downstream side ball entrance opening is in the closed state, both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are in the closed state, and when the downstream side ball entrance opening is in the open state, Since both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are in an open state, either the specific area and the predetermined area are in a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, or both are It is possible to make it easy for the player to visually determine whether it is possible or easy to enter a ball. In addition, by controlling the timing at which the downstream side state transition means changes the state of the downstream side ball entrance opening, in fact, the downstream side ball entrance opening at the timing at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area to the open state, the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening are both in the open state when the downstream ball entry opening is in the open state. It is possible to expect that the game ball will enter the specific area by pressing. More specifically, even if the state of the downstream side ball entry opening is changed to the open state at a timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area, the game ball does not enter the specific area. Even if the state of the downstream side ball entrance opening is changed to the open state at an easy timing, in both cases, when the downstream side ball entrance opening is in the open state, the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening Since all the parts are in the open state, the player can expect the game ball to enter the specific area.

[Feature αK4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK3,
The downstream ball-entering portion opening, which is the opening of the downstream-side ball-entering portion, faces the channel surface of the channel and is a specific region opening, which is an opening through which a game ball enters the specific region. and a predetermined area opening that is an opening through which a game ball enters the predetermined area,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined area opening faces the upstream side of the flow path surface with respect to the specific area opening.

According to the feature αK4, the downstream side ball entrance opening is divided into a specific area opening and a predetermined area opening, and the predetermined area opening faces the upstream side of the flow channel surface rather than the specific area opening. there is Therefore, the downstream side state transition means controls the timing of transitioning the state of the downstream side ball-entering section in response to the behavior of the game ball flowing through the flow path surface, whereby the game ball entering the downstream side ball-entering section is controlled. can be controlled whether or not to make it easier to enter the ball into a specific area.

<Characteristic αL group>
The feature αL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αL1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
The state of the ball-entering section is divided into a non-enterable state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an enterable state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. (Open state) state transition means for transitioning between,
a discharge means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion;
a control means for controlling the state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising
A ball-enterable state transition condition is set in the control means, which is a condition for the state transition means to transition the ball-enterable portion from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state,
The absence of a game ball in the ball entry section is included as the ball entry possible state transition condition,
The game machine further comprises discharge delay means (discharge delay means in Modification 5 of the third embodiment) for delaying discharge by the discharge means of the game ball that has entered the ball entering portion. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αL1, the non-existence of the game ball in the ball-entering portion is included as the ball-enterable state transition condition, and the discharge delay means for delaying the discharge by the discharge means of the game ball that has entered the ball-entering portion. Prepare. Therefore, depending on the degree of time the ejection delaying means delays the ejection of the game ball, the time until the ball-enterable state transition condition is established differs. The time it takes to transition to the possible state is different. In other words, the time required for the state transition means to transition the ball-entering section from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state can be made irregular. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ejection delaying means and to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature αL2]
A gaming machine according to feature αL1,
It is characterized in that the passage of a preset predetermined time after the state transition means transitions the ball-entering section to the non-ball-enterable state is included as the ball-enterable state transition condition. game machine.

According to the feature αL2, the passage of a preset predetermined time after the state transition means transitions the ball-entering section to the non-enterable state is included as the enterable-state transition condition. Therefore, from the time from when the ball-entering portion transitions to the non-enterable state to when all the game balls existing in the ball-entering portion are discharged by the discharging means and the game balls are no longer present in the ball-entering portion, the non-entering state is reduced. If the time from the transition to the ball-allowable state to the elapse of the predetermined time set in advance is longer, the time from the ball-entering portion transitioning from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state is predetermined. It's time. On the other hand, due to the function of the ejection delay means, after the ball-entering section transitions to the non-enterable state, all the game balls existing in the ball-entering section are ejected by the ejection means, and there are no game balls in the ball-entering section. is longer than the time from the transition to the non-enterable state to the elapse of a predetermined time, the ball-entering section changes from the non-enterable state to the enterable state. The time until transition depends on the degree of time the discharge delay means delays the discharge of the game ball. Therefore, the time required for the state transition means to transition the ball-entering section from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state can be made more irregular, and the state transition of the ball-entering section can be performed by simple control. can be complicated. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ball-entering section and to enhance the interest in the game.

[Feature αL3]
A gaming machine according to feature αL1 or feature αL2,
Equipped with a flow path through which game balls circulate,
The ball entry section includes a first ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, and a downstream side of the flow path relative to the first ball entry area with respect to the direction in which the game ball circulates in the flow path. and a second ball entry area (V winning area FV) in which a game ball can enter.

According to the feature αL3, the ball-entering portion includes the first ball-entering region and the second ball-entering region downstream of the first ball-entering region, so that the ball-entering portion can enter from a non-enterable state. Depending on the timing of transition to the ball-enabled state, the game ball entering the ball-entering portion may enter either the first ball-entering area or the second ball-entering area. Since the time required for the state transition means to transition the ball-entering section from the non-enterable state to the ball-enterable state is irregular, the player will not be able to determine whether the game ball that entered the ball-entering section is the first ball-entering state. It is difficult to predict whether the ball will enter the area or the second ball entering area, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the ball entering portion and the player can be given a sense of urgency.

[Feature αL4]
The gaming machine according to feature αL3,
The control unit
Triggered by the lapse of a predetermined time set in advance after the state transition means transitions the ball-entering section to the non-enterable state, the ball-entering section is changed from the non-enterable state to the ball-enterable state. A gaming machine characterized by controlling entry of a game ball into the second ball entry area by transitioning to a possible state.

According to the feature αL4, the predetermined time is set so that the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball-entering area, or the predetermined time is set so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball-entering area. be able to. On the other hand, when the discharge delaying means functions, all the game balls existing in the ball-entering part are discharged by the discharge means after the ball-entering part transitions to the non-enterable state by the function of the discharge delaying means. If the time until the game ball no longer exists in the ball-entering section is longer than the time from the transition to the non-ball-enterable state to the elapse of a preset predetermined time, the ball-entering section The time required for the transition from the ball non-enterable state to the ball enterable state depends on the degree of time the ejection delay means delays the ejection of the game ball. That is, there are cases where the control unit can control the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area and cases where it is not possible. As a result, for example, even if the predetermined time is set so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering area, the discharge delay means functions to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entering area. The ball-entering portion may transition from a non-enterable state to a ball-enterable state at a timing when it is easy for the ball to enter the ball area, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension.

[Feature αL5]
A gaming machine according to feature αL3 or feature αL4,
The second ball entry area is an area set as one of the conditions for changing the game state to a specific state by the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry area. game machine.

According to the feature αL5, it is possible to give the player even more expectations and a sense of urgency regarding whether or not the game ball will enter the second ball entry area.

<Characteristic αM group>
The feature αM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αM1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
A ball entry area provided on the flow path and capable of entering a game ball;
The state of the ball entry area is divided between a non-ball entry possible state in which entry of a game ball is impossible or difficult, and a ball entry possible state in which entry of a game ball is possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning;
Passage suppressing means (plate-shaped member MD1 in Modification 1 of the third embodiment, magnetic a body member MD2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic αM1, since the passage suppressing means is provided, it is suppressed that the game ball passes through without entering the ball-entering area even though the ball-entering area is in the enterable state. If a game ball passes through the ball-entering area without entering the ball-entering area, the player is not given a legitimate privilege, and the player's expectation for the game is lowered. Let me. This feature can suppress such a phenomenon, properly grant the privilege to be granted to the player, and provide the player with a sense of expectation as well as a sense of security.

[Feature αM2]
A gaming machine according to feature αM1,
The passage suppressing means is a traveling direction correction member (third embodiment) that corrects the traveling direction of the game ball traveling in the direction of passing through the ball entering area to the direction of traveling toward the ball entering area (third embodiment). A gaming machine comprising the plate-shaped member MD1) according to Modified Example 1 of the form.

According to the feature αM2, since the passing suppression means includes the advancing direction correcting means, for example, a game ball that has bounced in a direction different from the ball entry area due to an external dynamic factor given to the game ball It is possible to correct the direction of travel and allow the game ball to enter the ball entry area.

[Feature αM3]
A gaming machine according to feature αM2,
A gaming machine, wherein the advancing direction correcting member is a member provided above a region on the flow path corresponding to the ball entering region.

According to the feature αM3, it is possible to prevent a phenomenon in which a game ball traveling along the flow path floats from the flow path due to some factor and passes through the ball entry area in a floating state. That is, even if the game ball floats in the ball-entering area, the traveling direction of the game ball is changed downward by hitting a member provided in the upper part of the area corresponding to the ball-entering area on the flow path. A game ball can enter the ball entering area.

[Feature αM4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM3,
A gaming machine, wherein the passage suppressing means includes a magnetic member provided on the upstream side of the ball entry area in the flow path.

According to the feature αM4, even if a game ball traveling along the flow path receives a force in the direction of floating from the flow path due to some factor, the magnetic material provided on the flow path surface exerts the force on the game ball. Due to the magnetic force, a force acts on the game ball in the direction toward the flow channel surface, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from floating from the flow channel. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entering area.

[Feature αM5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM4,
A gaming machine, wherein the passage suppressing means includes a cushioning member that is provided upstream of the ball entry area in the flow path and that buffers an impact between the game ball and the flow path.

According to the characteristic αM5, even if a force acting in a direction to lift the game ball from the flow path is applied for some reason to the game ball traveling along the flow path, the buffer member buffers the force in the direction to lift the ball from the flow path, It is possible to suppress floating of the game ball from the channel. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entering area.

The inventions of the features αG to αM solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements are being made.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

<Characteristic αN group>
The feature αN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αN1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so as to reach a preset threshold value (10 points).

According to the feature αN1, since the change control means is provided to change the predetermined amount so as to reach the preset threshold value in the game cycle, the player can control the change of the predetermined amount until the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value. can be brought to attention. Also, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the game after the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value.

[Feature αN2]
A gaming machine according to feature αN1,
Provided with specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment),
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The change control means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold value (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the

According to the characteristic αN2, the specific processing is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the change control means changes the predetermined amount to reach the preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. A sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player each time the predetermined amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step by changing a predetermined amount and executing a specific process.

[Feature αN3]
A gaming machine according to feature αN1 or feature αN2,
A reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value upon completion of the game round. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic αN3, since the reset means for executing the reset process of returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the preset initial value with the end of the game round as a trigger, until the game round ends, The player can be given a sense of anticipation such that a predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold. In addition, it is possible to make the player, who recognizes that the game round has started and the predetermined amount has started to change, be conscious of the time when the game round ends and pay attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature αN4]
A gaming machine according to feature αN3,
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount (accumulated points) changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case, (When the game round is a carry-over game round), the predetermined amount (accumulated points) changed in the game round is not returned to the initial value (carried over the accumulated points) upon completion of the game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αN4, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, so even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round To give a player a sense of expectation that a predetermined amount is maintained until the next game round without returning to an initial value at the end of the relevant game round, and that the predetermined amount may reach a threshold value in the next game round. can be done. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

[Feature αN5]
A gaming machine according to feature αN3 or feature αN4,
The reset means is
Reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. A gaming machine comprising control means.

According to the feature αN5, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, the manner in which the predetermined amount is returned to the initial value or maintained can be made relevant over a plurality of game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature αN6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αN3 to αN5,
Reset processing execution suggesting means (stage a function to execute display control processing).

According to the feature αN6, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round is suggested in the predetermined game round. For the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round as a result of the suggestion by the process execution suggesting means, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value reaches the threshold in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Characteristic αO group>
The feature αO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αO1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to an initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to the feature αO1, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, so the player is made to pay attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. In addition, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round. It can give the player a sense of anticipation that the amount may reach a threshold. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

[Feature αO2]
The gaming machine according to feature αO1,
The reset means is
Reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Provide control means (effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αO2, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. As such, it is possible to make the manner in which the predetermined amount changes relevant over multiple game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature αO3]
A gaming machine according to feature αO1 or feature αO2,
When the predetermined game round in which the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold value (10 points) is the third game round,
The specific process executing means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round executed after the third game round, the specific processing (button pressing effect) is executed in the third game round or the third game round is executed. Provided with specific processing execution control means for determining whether or not to be executed in a game round to be executed after the game round (effect information setting processing in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αO3, based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round to be executed after the third game round, the specific process is executed in the third game round or after the third game round. Since it is determined whether or not to be executed in the game round to be executed, it is possible to give relevance over a plurality of game rounds with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing at which the specific process is executed, the player can make various guesses about the special information corresponding to the third game round and the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed after the third game round. can let For example, even if a specific process is not executed in a game round, there is a possibility that a specific process will not be executed in the next game round because the specific process will be executed in the next game round. It is possible to make the player guess and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature αO4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO3,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button pressing effect) as the specific process.

According to the feature αO4, since a specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Also, the player can be given a sense of anticipation by executing a specific effect.

[Feature αO5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO4,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature αO5, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature αO6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO5,
A gaming machine comprising: predetermined amount display means (function for executing point accumulation processing/function for displaying an image of a pearl on a stage) for displaying a corresponding amount of the predetermined amount (accumulated points).

According to the characteristic αO6, since the predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount is provided, the player can always be made aware of the predetermined amount and can be made to pay attention to the game.

[Feature αO7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αO1 to αO6,
A reset processing execution suggesting means for suggesting, in a predetermined game round, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to an initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round. (Effect information setting processing in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the feature αO7, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round is suggested in the predetermined game round. For the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round as a result of the suggestion by the process execution suggesting means, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value reaches the threshold in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Characteristic αP group>
The feature αP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αP1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment);
with
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process (button depression effect), the predetermined amount is changed to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A gaming machine comprising change control means.

According to the feature αP1, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature αP2]
A gaming machine according to feature αP1,
The changing means includes change amount determining means for determining the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round based on special information corresponding to a second game round executed after the first game round. Provided (effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αP2, the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. The variable predetermined amount can be made relevant over multiple game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature αP3]
A gaming machine according to feature αP1 or feature αP2,
The changing means includes change timing determining means for determining the timing for changing the predetermined amount in a game round based on special information corresponding to the game round (effect information setting processing and effect setting in the fourth embodiment). process)
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the feature αP3, the timing for changing the predetermined amount in the game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round. The predetermined amount can be varied with timing adapted to the various factors to be determined.

[Feature αP4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP3,
A reset means for executing reset processing (point reset processing in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value when the game round ends,
The reset means is
means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon completion of the first game round, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round to be executed after the first game round. Provided (effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αP4, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round to be executed after the first game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process when the first game round ends. Therefore, the manner in which the predetermined amount is returned to the initial value or maintained can be made relevant over a plurality of game rounds. That is, the player who recognizes the change of the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round, but also the expectation in the second game round. It is possible to create new playability.

[Feature αP5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP4,
A reset means for executing a reset process for returning the predetermined amount changed in a game round to a preset initial value upon completion of the game round,
The reset means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the game round, there is provided means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process when the game round ends (effect information setting process in the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αP5, based on the special information corresponding to the game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process when the game round ends. It is possible to decide whether or not to return the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value by considering various factors determined by other special information.

[Feature αP6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP5,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button pressing effect) as the specific process.

According to the feature αP6, a specific effect is executed as the specific process, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Also, the player can be given a sense of anticipation by executing a specific effect.

[Feature αP7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP1 to αP6,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to the feature αP7, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic αQ group>
The feature αQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αQ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) when the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches a preset threshold value (10 points) as a result of the change by the changing means;
When the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, time suggesting means (point filling time control) for executing a time suggesting process (timer effect) that suggests the time until the specific process (button press effect) is executed function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic αQ1, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the specific processing is executed because the time suggesting means is provided for executing the time suggesting processing that suggests the time until the specific processing is executed. During the period from the suggestion of the time until the execution of the specific process, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation for the specific process to be executed after the implied time elapses. can. In addition, since the time suggesting means suggests that the time until the specific process is executed becomes shorter with the lapse of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

[Feature αQ2]
The gaming machine according to feature αQ1,
When the game round in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is the first game round,
The time suggesting means (function for executing control processing during point filling)
In the first case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is started in the first game round,
In the second case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is not started in the first game round, and in the second game round which is the game round executed after the first game round A gaming machine comprising means for starting execution of the time suggesting process.

According to the feature αQ2, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value in the first game round, the execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game round and executed after the first game round. Since there is a case where it is executed in a second game round which is a game round in which the A player can be given the pleasure of guessing when a particular action will be performed.

[Feature αQ3]
The gaming machine according to feature αQ2,
The first case is a case where the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button pressing effect) in the first game round,
In the second case, the specific process executing means executes the specific process (button depression effect) in a game cycle executed after the first game cycle.

According to the feature αQ3, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and the execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game round, the player is given It is possible to make the player aware that a specific process will be executed, and to give the player a sense of expectation for the first game round. Further, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and the execution of the time suggesting process is not started in the first game round, the player is instructed to play a game after the first game round. It is possible to make the player recognize that a specific process will be executed in the game round, and to give the player a sense of expectation for the subsequent game round.

[Feature αQ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ3,
When the game round in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is the third game round,
The specific process executing means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round to be executed after the third game round, the specific process is executed in the third game round or executed after the third game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute the specific process in a game turn.

According to the characteristic αQ4, it is possible to give a relationship over a plurality of game rounds regarding the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing at which the time suggesting process that suggests the time until the execution of a specific process is executed, it is possible for the player to guess which game round he or she can expect, thereby providing new game characteristics. can be created.

[Feature αQ5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ4,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button pressing effect) as the specific process.

According to the characteristic αQ5, a specific effect is executed as the specific process, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Also, the player can be given a sense of anticipation by executing a specific effect.

[Feature αQ6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αQ1 to αQ5,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to the feature αQ6, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic αR group>
The feature αR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αR1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a first process executing means for executing a first process (waiting effect) when a specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated in the fourth embodiment);
a second process executing means for executing a second process (timer effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated);
with
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round,
The first processing execution means is
When the second process executing means executes the second process (timer effect) in the second game round executed after the first game round, the first game round is executed in the first game round. Execute the process (waiting effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second process executing means executes the second process (timer effect) in the first game cycle, the first process (waiting effect) is not executed. .

According to the feature αR1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the second process is executed in the second game round, after the specific condition is met A period of time occurs before the second process is performed. In such a case, since the first process executing means executes the first process in the first game cycle, even during the period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the second process is executed, , the player can be made aware that the second process will be executed later, and the expectation for the second process can be maintained.

[Feature αR2]
A gaming machine according to feature αR1,
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button pressing effect) is executed in the first game round, the second game round is executed in the first game round. Processing (timer effect) is executed,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button pressing effect) is executed in the second game round, the second game round is executed in the second game round. A game machine characterized by executing processing (timer effect).

According to the feature αR2, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game round, the player recognizes in which game round the second process is executed, thereby executing the specific process. Since it is possible to guess the game turn to be executed, the player can be made to concentrate on the timing of execution of the second process, and the player who recognizes the execution of the second process can expect it. It can give you a feeling.

[Feature αR3]
A gaming machine according to feature αR2,
The specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button pressing effect) in the first game round or the above-mentioned A game machine comprising specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute a specific process (button depression effect).

According to feature αR3, specific processing is executed in the first game round or executed in the second game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, it is possible to give a relationship over a plurality of game rounds with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, it is possible for the player who recognizes the execution of the second process to guess the timing at which the specific process will be executed, and based on the estimated timing at which the specific process will be executed, the special information for each game round can be made. satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the player can guess whether or not the special information in each game round satisfies a predetermined condition by various factors, and the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

[Feature αR4]
A gaming machine according to feature αR2 or feature αR3,
The second process (timer effect) is performed until the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 points or more are accumulated). A gaming machine characterized by a process suggesting time.

According to the feature αR4, during the period from when the execution of the second process indicates the time until the specific process is executed until when the specific process is executed, it is executed after the suggested time elapses. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the particular process to be performed. In addition, since it is suggested that the time until the specific process is executed becomes shorter with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature αR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αR1 to αR4,
A gaming machine, wherein the first process (waiting effect) is a process suggesting execution of the second process (timer effect).

According to the feature αR5, the first process is a process that suggests the execution of the second process. It is possible to give a feeling of anticipation about the execution of processing.

<Characteristic αS group>
The feature αS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αS1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means is
When the first process (predetermined effect in the first modification of the fourth embodiment) is executed in the game round, after the first process of the game round is executed, the predetermined amount is There are cases where the predetermined amount is changed and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed,
When the second process (specific effect in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment) is executed in the game round, after the second process in the game round is executed, the predetermined amount is A gaming machine characterized by constant change.

According to the feature αS1, when the second process is executed in a game round, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the execution of the processing of (1) and to draw attention to the game. Further, when the second process is executed, it is possible to impart an uplifting feeling to the player who desires a change of a predetermined amount, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Feature αS2]
The gaming machine according to feature αS1,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) is provided,
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process (button pressing effect), the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is reduced to a preset threshold value (10 A game machine characterized by comprising a change control means for changing so as to reach a point).

According to the feature αS2, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach the preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. Further, when the second process is executed, the predetermined amount is always changed in the game round, so that the player who recognizes that the second process has been executed is instructed to perform the specific process. A sense of anticipation about execution can be imparted.

[Feature αS3]
The gaming machine according to feature αS2,
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process (in the game round) is more likely than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button pressing effect) is executed.

According to the feature αS3, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing a specific process. Therefore, the second process, the change in the predetermined amount, and the execution of the specific process can give the player a sense of anticipation step by step.

[Feature αS4]
The gaming machine according to feature αS3,
The first process is a predetermined effect (predetermined effect in modification 1 of the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine, wherein the second process is a preset specific effect (a specific effect in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature αS4, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed in the game round. Then, when a specific effect is executed, it is possible to impart a great sense of anticipation and excitement to the player.

[Feature αS5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αS2 to αS4,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature αS5, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic αT group>
The feature αT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αT1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
Predetermined processing execution means (function for executing point grant effect) for executing a predetermined processing (point granting in the fourth embodiment) in the game round,
The predetermined process execution means is
When the mode of the game round is the first mode, there are cases where the predetermined process is executed and cases where the predetermined process is not executed in the game round executed after the game round,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined processing is always executed in the game round executed after the game round.

According to the feature αT1, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in the game round executed after the game round. , it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the aspect of the game cycle and to make the player pay attention to the game in the game cycle. Further, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is executed in the game round to be executed after the game round for the player who desired the execution of the predetermined process. It is possible to provide a sense of anticipation and an uplifting feeling about this, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature αT2]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1,
The predetermined process execution means is
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means (the function of executing the point giving effect in Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment) is
When the mode of the game round is the first mode, there are cases where the predetermined amount is changed and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed in the game round executed after the game round,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount is always changed in the game round executed after the game round.

According to the feature αT2, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, in the game round executed after the game round, the predetermined amount always changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the mode of the game round, and to make them pay attention to the game in the game round. Further, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount will change in the game round executed after the game round for the player who desired the change of the predetermined amount. A sense of anticipation can be imparted, and a sense of exhilaration can be imparted, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Feature αT3]
A gaming machine according to feature αT2,
A reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value,
The first mode of the game cycle is a mode in which the reset means resets the predetermined amount to an initial value upon completion of the game cycle,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode of the game cycle is a mode in which the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value when the game cycle ends.

According to the feature αT3, if the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value at the end of the game round, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round executed after the game round. , a player who desires a change in a predetermined amount can be given a sense of expectation that the predetermined amount will not return to the initial value when the game round ends. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the game even at the end of the game cycle. Further, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, the player who desired to change the predetermined amount will receive the predetermined amount in the game round executed after the game round. It is possible to provide a sense of anticipation about the change in the amount, and to provide a sense of elation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Feature αT4]
A gaming machine according to feature αT2 or feature αT3,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) is provided,
The changing means is
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, change control means for changing the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αT4, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. Further, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value with the end of the game round as a trigger, the predetermined amount will always change in the game round executed after the game round. , the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount has not returned to the initial value can be given a sense of expectation for execution of a specific process.

[Feature αT5]
A gaming machine according to feature αT4,
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process (in the game round) is more likely than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button pressing effect) is executed.

According to the feature αT5, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing a specific process. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the reset process, the change of the predetermined amount, and the execution of the specific process, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step.

[Feature αT6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αT3 to αT5,
Reset processing execution suggesting means (stage a function to execute display control processing).

According to the feature αT6, whether or not the reset means resets the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round is suggested in the predetermined game round. According to the suggestion by the process execution suggesting means, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round after the predetermined game round for the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round. It is possible to impart a sense of expectation such that the amount will not return to the initial value and a sense of expectation that there is a possibility that the predetermined amount that has not returned to the initial value will reach the threshold value in the game rounds after the predetermined game round.

[Feature αT7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αT4 to αT6,
Equipped with an operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature αT7, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation. Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game and further increase the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic αU group>
The feature αU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αU1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a predetermined process executing means for executing a predetermined process in the game round;
Predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (point giving effect) prior to the predetermined process executing means executing the predetermined process;
with
The predetermined process execution means is
A non-execution means for executing a non-execution process (a point giving effect in which the given point is 0) in which the predetermined process is not executed even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αU1, the predetermined process execution means includes a non-execution means for executing a non-execution process that does not execute the predetermined process even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. It is possible to make the player who recognizes that the non-execution process is not executed. In addition, when the non-execution process is not executed, the player can be given an uplifting feeling, and when the non-execution process is executed, the player is discouraged. That is, depending on whether or not the non-execution process is executed, the expectation of the player can be given an intonation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Feature αU2]
A gaming machine according to feature αU1,
The predetermined process execution means is
As the predetermined process, changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round,
The non-executing means is
A no-change means for executing a no-change process (a point giving effect in which the given point is 0) that does not change the predetermined amount even though the predetermined effect executing means has executed the predetermined effect. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αU2, even though the predetermined effect executing means has executed the predetermined effect, the no-change means for executing the non-change processing that does not change the predetermined amount, so that the execution of the predetermined effect can be detected. The recognized player can be made to expect that the non-change process will not be executed. Also, if the no-change process is not executed, the player can be given a sense of exhilaration, and if the no-change process is executed, the player is discouraged. In other words, depending on whether or not the non-change process is executed, the expectation of the player can be given an intonation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Feature αU3]
A gaming machine according to feature αU2,
A reset means for executing reset processing (point reset processing in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value when the game round ends,
An upper limit is provided to the number of times the no-change means executes the no-change processing (point giving effect in which the given points are 0) during a period from the start of the game cycle until the resetting means executes the reset processing. (Modification 3 in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αU3, the number of times the no-change means executes the no-change process during the period from the start of the game cycle until the reset means executes the reset process is limited. A player who recognizes that the number of times of execution has reached the upper limit can be given a strong sense of expectation for execution of a predetermined effect. This is because when the number of executions of the non-change processing reaches the upper limit, the predetermined amount is always changed when the predetermined effect is executed after that. Therefore, even when the no-change process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of executions will reach the upper limit. That is, when a predetermined effect is executed, if the no-change process is not executed, the predetermined amount changes, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration, and the no-change process is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation (a sense of expectation that the number of executions will reach the upper limit). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation in both cases in which no-change processing is executed and in which no-change processing is executed.

[Feature αU4]
A gaming machine according to feature αU2 or feature αU3,
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process;
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The changing means is
change control means for changing the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed by the specific process execution means when the specific process execution means executes the specific process; A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αU4, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. Since the change control means is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation each time the change means changes the predetermined amount. Also, by executing a specific process, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a sense of expectation step by step through a predetermined effect, presence or absence of non-change processing, the number of executions of non-change processing, a predetermined amount of change, and execution of specific processing. can.

[Feature αU5]
A gaming machine according to feature αU3 or feature αU4,
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to an initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to the feature αU5, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, so even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round , the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the relevant game round but is maintained until the next game round, and the player can expect that the predetermined amount will reach the threshold value in the next game round. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

<Characteristic αV group>
The feature αV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αV1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
a first specific process executing means for executing a first specific process (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means; ,
a second specific process executing means for executing a second specific process (non-filling effect in modification 4 of the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold;
with
When the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, the amount of change (accumulated points) from the initial value of the predetermined amount before the second specific process is executed is The special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition more when the second amount of change is greater than the first amount of change than when the amount of change is the first amount of change. Amusement machines characterized by high expectations.

According to the feature αV1, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, if the second specific process is executed, the predetermined amount The larger the amount of change from the initial value of , the higher the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the player can be given a sense of expectation. That is, when the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, and when the amount of change from the initial value of the predetermined amount is relatively large, the second specific process is performed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the process of is executed.

[Feature αV2]
A gaming machine according to feature αV1,
In the first specific process (button depression effect), the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized in that the probability of execution is higher in case.

According to the feature αV2, it is possible to give the player who recognizes that the first specific process has been executed a strong sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game cycle will satisfy a predetermined condition. can. Also, since the first specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation each time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature αV3]
A gaming machine according to feature αV1 or feature αV2,
The content of the second specific process (unfilled effect) differs depending on the predetermined amount (accumulated points) before the second specific process is executed (the Modification 4)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αV3, the content of the processing differs depending on the predetermined amount before the execution of the second specific processing. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the content and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature αV4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV3,
A third specific process executing means for executing a third specific process (unfilled development effect in Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment) after the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed. ,
In the game round, the case where the third specific process (unfilled development effect) is executed is more likely than the case where the first specific process (button pressing effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a high degree of expectation that the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature αV4, the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition more when the third specific process is executed than when the first specific process is executed. Expectations are high. Therefore, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, if the second specific process is executed, the player is notified that , a strong expectation that the third specific process will be executed. Furthermore, when the third specific process is executed, the degree of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game cycle satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the first specific process is executed. A stronger sense of expectation can be imparted to the player who recognizes that the third specific process has been executed. In summary, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the first specific process is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation, and when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value. Even if the second specific process is executed, the player is expected to perform the second specific process, and when the second specific process is executed, the third specific process is executed. It is possible to impart a strong sense of expectation to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of the situation of the game.

<Characteristic αW group>
The feature αW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αW1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
game round display means for displaying a game round display that is a display showing one game round being held or being executed;
display mode changing means for executing a display mode changing process for changing the display mode of the game cycle display being displayed (a function of executing the process of changing the display mode of the game cycle display in the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment); ,
Predetermined processing executing means (function for executing point giving effect) for executing predetermined processing (giving points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
with
A gaming machine, wherein a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the predetermined process executing means executes the predetermined process have a temporal correlation.

According to the feature αW1, the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the execution of the predetermined process are executed with the timing correlated, thereby synergistically increasing the player's sense of expectation. can.

[Feature αW2]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1,
The predetermined process execution means is
provided with changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in game rounds (modification 5 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine, wherein the timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing means changes the predetermined amount have a temporal correlation.

According to the feature αW2, the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the change in the predetermined amount are executed with the timing correlated, thereby synergistically increasing the player's expectation. can.

[Feature αW3]
The gaming machine according to feature αW2,
The changing means is
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined amount is changed within a predetermined time after the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process.

According to the feature αW3, the player, who has increased his sense of anticipation after recognizing that the display mode of the game cycle display has changed, is further made to recognize that a predetermined amount has changed within a predetermined period of time. It is possible to impart a stronger sense of expectation and excitement.

[Feature αW4]
The gaming machine according to feature αW2,
A gaming machine, wherein the timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing means changes the predetermined amount are the same.

According to the feature αW4, by allowing the player to simultaneously recognize the change in the display mode of the game cycle display and the change by a predetermined amount, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature αW5]
The gaming machine according to feature αW2,
The game machine, wherein the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process within a predetermined time after the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

According to the feature αW5, the player, who recognizes that the predetermined amount has changed and has an increased sense of anticipation, is further made to recognize that the display mode of the game cycle display has changed within a predetermined period of time. It is possible to impart a stronger sense of expectation and excitement.

[Feature αW6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αW2 to αW5,
The display mode of the game cycle display after being changed by the display mode changing means and the predetermined amount of change changed by the changing means have a correlation (Modification 5 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αW6, the display mode of the game cycle display after being changed by the display mode changing means and the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means are correlated with each other. If the display mode of the game cycle display after the change is in line with the player's expectations, and if the amount of change in the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is large, the player A stronger sense of expectation and superiority can be imparted.

[Feature αW7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αW2 to αW6,
The display mode changing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game cycle satisfies the predetermined condition, the display mode of the game cycle display is changed to the second display mode rather than changing the display mode of the game cycle display to the first display mode. The probability of changing the display mode is high,
The amount of change of the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means when the display mode changing means changes the game round display to the first display mode is defined as a first change amount,
When the change amount of the predetermined amount that the change means changes when the display mode change means changes the game cycle display to the second display mode is the second change amount,
The average value of the second amount of change is greater than the average value of the first amount of change (modification 5 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic αW7, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the probability that the display mode of the game cycle display is changed to the second display mode is high, and further, the display mode changing means changes the game cycle display from the second display mode to the second display mode. When the display mode is changed to the first display mode, the amount of change in the predetermined amount is often larger than when the display mode is changed to the first display mode. By executing the change of and the timing with correlation, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic αX group>
The feature αX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
Change mode information display means for displaying change mode information that is information about the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed (in the thirteenth modification of the fourth embodiment, an image of a pearl on the stage St indicating accumulation points is displayed); function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αX1, since the change mode information display means for displaying the change mode information, which is information about the change mode of the predetermined amount that has already been changed, the player can see how the predetermined amount has changed. It is possible to easily comprehend, prompt the player to make various guesses based on the change mode information, and give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature αX2]
A gaming machine according to feature αX1,
The changing means comprises means for changing a predetermined amount at a plurality of timings,
The change mode information display means is
Means for displaying the change state information in a manner in which the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed at each of the timings by the change means can be identified (on the stage St indicating accumulated points in Modification Example 13 of the fourth embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of displaying an image of a pearl of the same name.

According to the feature αX2, the change mode information is displayed in such a manner that the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means at each timing can be identified. , prompting to find regularity in the amount of change of a predetermined amount that has changed at each timing up to now, or to guess the amount of change of a predetermined amount at the next and subsequent timings. It is possible to provide the player with a new enjoyment based on the change mode information.

[Feature αX3]
A gaming machine according to feature αX1 or feature αX2,
The changing means is
Means for determining the mode of change of the predetermined amount based on the special information corresponding to the game round (function for determining the point award scenario based on the production scenario in Modification 12 of the fourth embodiment). A game machine characterized by

According to the feature αX3, since the mode of change of the predetermined amount is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, the change mode information, which is information on the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed, is recognized. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the special information corresponding to the game round.

[Features αX4]
A gaming machine according to feature αX3,
Based on the special information corresponding to the game round, an effect determination means for determining the effect to be executed in the game round,
The changing means is
means for determining a mode of change of the predetermined amount (a point-giving scenario in Modification 12 of the fourth embodiment) based on the determined production (production scenario in Modification 12 of the fourth embodiment); A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αX4, the effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, and the mode of change of the predetermined amount is determined based on the determined effect. A player who recognizes the change mode information, which is information about the change mode of a predetermined amount, is made to make various guesses about the content of the performance to be executed later in the game cycle, and gives a sense of expectation based on the change mode information. can be granted.

<Characteristic αY group>
The feature αY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αY1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
a first effect executing means for executing a first effect (a point giving suggesting effect in Modification 14 of the fourth embodiment) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed;
Execution of a second effect for executing a second effect (a point-giving execution effect in the modification 14 of the fourth embodiment) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed after the first effect is executed. means and
with
The second production execution means is
In the first case, the second effect is executed once after the first effect is executed once, and in the second case, after the first effect is executed once. , means for executing the second effect N (integer of N≧2) times.

According to the feature αY1, the first effect is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, so there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will change for the player who recognizes the first effect. It can give you a sense of expectation. Since the second performance is a performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. Therefore, when the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, the player receives a predetermined amount of N times after the first effect is executed once. You can recognize that you have changed. As a result, it is possible to give the player who recognizes the first effect a feeling of anticipation as to how many times the predetermined amount will change after that. When the second performance is executed N times after the first performance is executed once, the execution of the first performance is recognized, and then the second performance is executed once. Unexpectedness and surprise can be imparted to the player who has guessed that the game will be played.

[Feature αY2]
A gaming machine according to feature αY1,
The changing means includes change amount information acquisition means for acquiring change amount information that is information corresponding to the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed,
The second production execution means is
In the first case, after the first effect is executed once, the second effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by a change amount corresponding to the change amount information is executed once. death,
In the second case, the amount of change corresponding to the amount of change information is divided into N pieces, and after the first effect is executed once, the amount of change divided into the N pieces is one each. (Modification 14 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αY2, in both the first case and the second case, it is sufficient to acquire the change amount information corresponding to the first effect to be executed. Even in the case of executing it twice, the process up to the process of acquiring the change amount information is the same as in the first case, and the process can be simplified. In addition, the change amount information can be set without distinguishing between the case where the information is used in the first case and the case where the information is used in the second case, and the setting of the change amount information can be simplified. can.

[Feature αY3]
A gaming machine according to feature αY1,
The changing means acquires second effect change amount information that is information corresponding to a predetermined amount of change indicating that the second effect is to be changed for one time. with
The second production execution means is
In the first case, one piece of the second effect change amount information is acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, a change corresponding to the acquired second effect change amount information Execute once the second effect indicating that the predetermined amount for the amount is changed,
In the second case, N pieces of the second effect change amount information are acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information are The second effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the corresponding amount of change is executed N times corresponding to the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information (fourth embodiment). Modification 14)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αY3, in the second case, it is sufficient to acquire the second effect change amount information in a number corresponding to the number of times the second effect is executed. It is not necessary to divide the change amount corresponding to the usage change amount information into N parts according to the number of times of the second effect to be executed, and the process can be simplified.

[Feature αY4]
A gaming machine according to feature αY1 or feature αY2,
Provided with specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment),
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is reduced to a preset threshold value (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. ), characterized in that it comprises a means for changing so as to reach

According to the feature αY4, the specific processing is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player each time the amount is changed. That is, every time the second effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation. Therefore, by changing a predetermined amount (execution of the second effect) and executing specific processing, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step.

<Characteristic αZ group>
The feature αZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature αZ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
a first effect executing means for executing a first effect (first effect in modification 10 of the fourth embodiment) that is a effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed;
Execution of a second effect for executing a second effect (a second effect in the tenth modification of the fourth embodiment) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed after the first effect is executed. means and
with
The first production execution means is
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in a second game round which is a game round executed after the first game round,
means for starting, in the first game round, the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
means for starting, in the second game round, the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αZ1, since the first effect is a effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will change for the player who recognizes the first effect. It can give you a sense of expectation. Since the second performance is a performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. In addition, the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round may be started in the first game round or may be executed in the second game round. . In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined game round, the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game round and in the game rounds executed after the predetermined game round. The player who recognizes that the first effect has been executed can be made to guess which case it is, and a sense of anticipation can be imparted.

[Feature αZ2]
The gaming machine according to feature αZ1,
The first production execution means is
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in the second game round,
means for notifying, in the first game round, the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means in the second game round;
means for notifying, in the second game round, the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means in the second game round;
(Modification 10 of the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature αZ2, when the predetermined amount is changed in the second game round, the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed in the second game round is notified in the first game round, and the second game round There is a case where the amount of change of the predetermined amount to be changed in the game round is reported in the second game round. In other words, in a predetermined game round, when a predetermined amount of change is notified, in the predetermined game round, when the predetermined amount corresponding to the notified amount of change changes, In the game round executed after the game round, the predetermined amount corresponding to the notified amount of change may change, and for the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount of change has been notified, A sense of expectation can be imparted by allowing the user to speculate as to which of these cases is the case.

[Feature αZ3]
A gaming machine according to feature αZ1 or feature αZ2,
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to an initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to the feature αZ3, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, so the player is made to pay attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. In addition, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round. It can give the player a sense of anticipation that the amount may reach a threshold. Therefore, due to the feature αZ1, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined amount may change in the predetermined game round, or may change in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. Further, when the predetermined amount changes due to the characteristic αZ3, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value upon completion of the game cycle. A sense of expectation can be given to the player.

<Characteristic βA group>
The feature βA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βA1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round,
The effect execution means comprises change effect execution means for executing a change effect (point giving effect) that is a effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes when the change means changes the predetermined amount,
The change effect execution means performs the change effect (the point giving effect in Modification 11 of the fourth embodiment) based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the change means changes the predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining

According to the feature βA1, since the changing effect execution means determines the mode of the changing effect based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the changing means changes the predetermined amount, the game can draw people's attention. In addition, it is possible to give the player who recognizes that the change effect has been executed a sense of expectation for the game round in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature βA2]
A gaming machine according to feature βA1,
The production executing means is
A game round effect determining means for determining a game round effect (a effect scenario in Modification 11 of the fourth embodiment), which is an effect to be executed in the game round, based on the special information corresponding to the game round,
The change effect execution means changes the aspect of the change effect (the point giving effect in the eleventh modification of the fourth embodiment) based on the content of the game round effect (the effect scenario in the eleventh modification of the fourth embodiment). A game machine characterized by comprising means for determining.

According to the feature βA2, the changing effect executing means determines the aspect of the changing effect based on the content of the game round effect, so that the player who recognizes that the changing effect has been executed is notified of the changing effect. Based on the mode, it is possible to make the player guess about the contents of the game round presentation to be executed thereafter, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature βA3]
A gaming machine according to feature βA2,
The change effect execution means is
When the game round effect includes a specific effect and the changing means changes the predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed, the predetermined amount is changed. (Modification 11 of the fourth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the feature βA3, when the game round effect includes a specific effect and the change means changes a predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed, , since a change effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed is executed in a specific mode, the relationship between the mode of each change effect to be executed and the content of the game cycle effect to be executed after that is given to the player. Each time a change performance is executed, the content of the game round performance to be executed thereafter is made to be guessed. Furthermore, based on the content of the game round effect that has been inferred, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for the special information corresponding to the game round.

<Characteristic βB group>
The feature βB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βB1]
a predetermined amount display means for displaying a predetermined amount;
a calculation suggestion effect execution means for executing a calculation suggestion effect that is a mode effect suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be subjected to a calculation process;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation suggestion effect executing means,
As the one-time operation suggesting effect, a mode suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be added or a mode suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be multiplied. from any one of the modes to indicate that the displayed predetermined amount is subjected to addition processing or that the displayed predetermined amount is subjected to multiplication processing Equipped with an arithmetic processing mode change effect execution means for executing an arithmetic processing mode change effect that is an effect of changing to one of the suggested modes to the other mode (Modification 15 in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βB1, by changing the aspect of the calculation suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the calculation method executed for the displayed predetermined amount has changed, and to add unexpectedness. . In addition, since the new predetermined amount after the execution of the calculation processing may differ greatly depending on the calculation method executed for the predetermined amount, by changing the aspect of the calculation suggestion effect, the player can In addition to imparting a sense of urgency to the game, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectation.

[Feature βB2]
A gaming machine according to feature βB1,
The aspect that suggests that addition processing is performed on the displayed predetermined amount is an addition symbol indication aspect that is an aspect of displaying an arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition,
The mode of indicating that the displayed predetermined amount will be multiplied is a multiplication symbol display mode, which is a mode of displaying an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication,
The arithmetic processing mode change effect execution means is
As the arithmetic processing mode change effect, either the displayed arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition or the arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication is rotated to display an arithmetic symbol indicating addition. Equipped with means for executing an effect to change the display to the other of a certain "+" or an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication (Modification 15 of the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βB2, by executing a process of rotating symbols of almost the same line drawing such as "+" and "x", the meaning can be greatly changed. In addition to imparting a great sense of urgency to the game, it is possible to impart an intonation to the player's expectation.

[Feature βB3]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature βB1 and feature βB2,
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
a specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment);
with
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The changing means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is reduced to a preset threshold value (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. ), characterized in that it comprises a means for changing so as to reach

According to the characteristic βB3, the specific processing is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the changing means changes the predetermined amount to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player each time the amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of urgency with respect to the change in the mode of the computational suggestion performance, and to greatly inflate the player's sense of expectation for the game when the mode of the computational suggestion performance is changed. can be granted.

<Characteristic βC group>
The feature βC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βC1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
a predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount;
multiplication mode effect execution means for executing a multiplication mode effect, which is a mode effect suggesting that the displayed predetermined amount will be multiplied, prior to the change of the predetermined amount;
(Modification 15 in the fourth embodiment),
The predetermined amount display means is
means for displaying a multiplication result amount, which is an amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount when the multiplication mode effect executing means executes the multiplication mode effect. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature βC1, since the multiplication mode performance executing means for executing the multiplication mode performance is provided, the player who recognizes the execution of the multiplication mode performance is given a sense of expectation for the value to be multiplied by the predetermined amount. It is possible to draw attention to the multiplication mode effect.

[Feature βC2]
A gaming machine according to feature βC1,
The multiplication mode effect execution means is
Means for controlling the aspect of the multiplication aspect effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount (Modification 15 of the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by

According to the feature βC2, the multiplication mode effect executing means controls the mode of the multiplication mode effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount. can be made

[Feature βC3]
A gaming machine according to feature βC1 or feature βC2,
The predetermined amount display means is
Means for displaying, as a new predetermined amount, an amount larger than a multiplication result amount, which is an amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, when the multiplication mode effect executing means executes the multiplication mode effect. (Modification 15 in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βC3, when the multiplication mode effect executing means executes the multiplication mode effect, an amount larger than the multiplication result amount, which is the result of multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to impart surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes a new predetermined amount greater than the multiplication result amount.

[Feature βC4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features βC1 to βC3, suggesting that addition processing is performed to the displayed predetermined amount prior to changing the predetermined amount. An addition mode effect executing means for executing an addition mode effect that is a mode effect,
The predetermined amount display means is
means for displaying, when the addition mode effect executing means executes the addition mode effect, an addition result amount, which is an amount obtained by adding the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount ( 4th embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βC4, since the addition mode effect executing means is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and tension as to whether the addition mode effect is to be executed or the multiplication mode effect is to be executed.

[Feature βC5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βC1 to βC4,
An addition mode effect executing means for executing an addition mode effect, which is a mode effect suggesting that addition processing is performed to the displayed predetermined amount, prior to the change of the predetermined amount. ,
The predetermined amount display means is
When the addition mode effect executing means executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than the addition result amount, which is the amount obtained by adding the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Provided with means (modification 15 in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βC5, when the addition mode effect executing means executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than the addition result amount, which is the amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to impart surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes a new predetermined amount that is greater than the addition result amount.

<Characteristic βD group>
The feature βD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βD1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a first changing means for changing the first amount in the game round (a function of giving points in the modification 22 of the fourth embodiment);
a second changing means for changing the second amount in the game round (a function of giving points in the modification 22 of the fourth embodiment);
a first specific process executing means for executing a first specific process;
a second specific process executing means for executing a second specific process;
with
The first changing means is
When the first specific process executing means executes the first specific process, the first amount is reduced to a preset first threshold value ( 10 points),
The second changing means is
When the second specific process executing means executes the second specific process, the second amount is reduced to a preset second threshold value ( 10 points).

According to the feature βD1, when the first specific process executing means executes the first specific process, the first changing means changes the first amount in advance before the first specific process is executed. change so as to reach the set first threshold, and the second changing means, when the second specific process executing means executes the second specific process, until the second specific process is executed In addition, since the second amount is changed to reach the preset second threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the first amount changes, and furthermore, the second amount changes, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In other words, it is possible to make the player pay attention to changes in at least two amounts in the game round, and to give the player a sense of anticipation.

[Feature βD2]
A gaming machine according to feature βD1,
The degree of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round in which the first specific process is performed satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than the game round in which the first specific process is not performed. A gaming machine characterized by a high

According to the feature βD2, the player who recognizes that the first specific process has been executed in the game round is given a sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition. be able to.

[Feature βD3]
A gaming machine according to feature βD1 or feature βD2,
Reset processing for returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount that have changed in a game round to a preset initial value upon completion of the game round (point reset processing in the fourth embodiment) A game machine characterized by comprising a reset means for executing

According to the characteristic βD3, since the resetting means is provided, at least one of the first amount and the second amount is set to the threshold value (first threshold value, second threshold value) corresponding to each amount by the time the game cycle ends. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player so that the Further, the player who recognizes that the game round has started and at least one of the first amount and the second amount has started to change is made aware of the time when the game round ends, and the first amount and the second amount are changed. Attention can be drawn to the changing manner of the second quantity.

[Feature βD4]
A gaming machine according to feature βD3,
The reset means is
In the first case, at least one of the first amount and the second amount that changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is carried over means for not returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game round to the initial value (carrying over accumulated points) upon completion of the game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βD4, at least one of the first amount and the second amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game round. Even if at least one of the second amounts does not reach the threshold value corresponding to each amount, the amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round, and is maintained until the next game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that there is a possibility that the number of rounds will reach the threshold. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game cycle.

<Characteristic βE group>
The feature βE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βE1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the fourth embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not the carry-over game round), the predetermined amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is not carried over). in the case of a carry-over game round), means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value upon completion of the game round,
The reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value with the end of the game round as a trigger. The degree of expectation is high that the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed later satisfies the predetermined condition (Modification 25 of the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βE1, the reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value when the game round ends, and the more the number of triggers for the end of the game round, the more the predetermined value. Since the expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round executed after the game round satisfies the predetermined condition is high, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value when the game round ends. continues, the greater expectation can be imparted to the player.

[Feature βE2]
A gaming machine according to feature βE1,
When the special information in the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies a predetermined condition,
The reset means is
means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the first game round to the initial value until the second game round;
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising means for limiting the amount of change in the predetermined amount so that the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value from the first game round to the second game round.

According to the feature βE2, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game cycle. , can give a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from decreasing when the predetermined amount has not reached the threshold value.

<Characteristic βF group>
The feature βF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βF1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point-giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) from a preset initial value in the game round;
specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing means;
threshold changing means for executing a threshold changing process for changing the value of the threshold (Modification 26 of the fourth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βF1, a predetermined amount is changed in a game cycle, and a specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value. can be made Further, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and a specific process is executed, the player can be given a feeling of superiority or expectation. Furthermore, since the threshold may be changed, it is difficult for the player to guess the timing at which the specific process will be executed, and the specific process can be executed at a timing unexpected by the player. As a result, it is possible to impart surprise to the player.

[Feature βF2]
The gaming machine according to feature βF1,
The threshold changing means is
A gaming machine comprising threshold change processing determination means for determining whether or not to execute the threshold change processing in a game round based on the special information corresponding to the game round.

According to the feature βF2, it is determined whether or not the threshold change process is to be executed in the game round based on the special information corresponding to the game round. To give a player, who recognizes that a threshold has been changed when a specific process is executed, a sense of expectation as to whether or not special information corresponding to the game cycle satisfies a predetermined condition. can be done.

[Feature βF3]
A gaming machine according to feature βF1 or feature βF2,
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of execution.

According to the feature βF3, a specific process is executed in a game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. Since there is a high probability that a specific process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, since a specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the predetermined amount changes.

<Characteristic βG group>
The feature βG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature βG1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where one game round is defined as the end of the game round operation after the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
changing means (function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the fourth embodiment) in the game round;
Before the predetermined amount is changed, a change amount display (an imparted point suggestive display in Modification 27 of the fourth embodiment) showing information regarding the amount of change in the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means is displayed. change amount display means;
A game machine with

According to the feature βG1, before the predetermined amount is changed, the change amount display showing information about the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed by the changing means is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide various guesses and expectations for the game round corresponding to the change amount display.

[Feature βG2]
A gaming machine according to feature βG1,
game round display means for displaying a game round display that is a display showing one game round being held or being executed;
The change amount display means is
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round.

According to the feature βG2, the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game round display is displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round display. The recognized player can be given various guesses and expectations for the game round corresponding to the displayed variation display. For example, when the change amount display is displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the pending game round, various speculations and expectations for the pending game round are given to the player who recognizes the change amount display. It can give you a feeling.

[Feature βG3]
A gaming machine according to feature βG2,
The change amount display means is
After displaying the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for displaying in association with.

According to the feature βG3, after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, the game round corresponding to the predetermined game round is displayed. Since it is displayed in association with the display, it is possible to overturn the guess of the player based on the change amount display displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round. can add surprise.
[Feature βG4]
A gaming machine according to feature βG2 or feature βG3,
The change amount display means is
After displaying a change amount display corresponding to a change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round, a change corresponding to the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round A gaming machine characterized by displaying a quantity display.

According to the feature βG4, after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round, the change corresponding to the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round is displayed. Since the amount display is displayed, the guess of the player based on the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round can be overturned, and the player is given an unexpected result. It is possible to impart a sense of anticipation to the player, as well as impart an intonation.

[Feature βG5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βG1 to βG4,
Provided with specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (button pressing effect in the fourth embodiment),
The changing means is
A change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) to reach a preset threshold value (10 points),
The specific process executing means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing is performed in the game round more than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. more likely to execute
The change control means is
When the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold value (10 points) by the time the specific process (button depression effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for changing the

According to the feature βG5, the specific process is executed in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not meet the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation by executing the specific process. Further, when the specific process executing means executes the specific process, the change control means changes the predetermined amount to reach the preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. A sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player each time the predetermined amount is changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of anticipation step by step by changing a predetermined amount and executing a specific process.

The inventions of the features αN group to feature βG group solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, various improvements in structure, control, presentation, etc. are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desirable to further improve the technology for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more sound games. It is rare.

<Characteristic βH group>
The feature βH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature βH1]
acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
sound output means for outputting moving image corresponding sound (background music), which is sound corresponding to the first moving image, in a first output mode (mode of outputting background music at a predetermined volume);
The image display means is shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode (the mode for displaying the demonstration moving image), and the sound output means is changed from the first output mode to the second output mode (for background music). a transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for transitioning to the mode in which the output is stopped), is satisfied;
return condition determination means for determining whether a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and returning the sound output means to the first output mode, is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode,
the sound output means transitions from the first output mode to the second output mode;
When the return condition is met after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display means returns to the first display mode and, when displaying the first moving image as the first display mode, displays the first moving image from a predetermined temporal position. and start
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the sound corresponding to the moving picture from a predetermined temporal position when outputting the sound corresponding to the moving picture in the first output mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βH1, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode, the image display means When returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, and the sound output means is in the first output mode. , outputting the moving image corresponding sound is started from a predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image display means is switched to the second output mode according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. Compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of one moving image is started varies, the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image can be easily synchronized. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first moving image changes according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied, for example, after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the return is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the first moving image is displayed from the temporal position of the first moving image that was displayed immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means is the first moving image. When returning from the display mode of 2 to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image to start displaying is determined based on the elapsed time after shifting to the second display mode. Even after the display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as internal processing, and when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, may be a configuration for displaying the first moving image that is continuously reproduced as internal processing.

[Feature βH2]
A gaming machine according to feature βH1,
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means transitions from the first output mode to the second output mode through a reduction mode in which the volume of the moving picture corresponding sound is reduced over time while continuing to output the moving picture corresponding sound. death,
the image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode after the timing at which the sound output means transitions to the second output mode;
When the return condition is satisfied during the period in which the sound output means is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume of the first output mode.

According to the feature βH2, when the return condition is satisfied during the period of the reduction mode, the image display means continues the first display mode, and the sound output means restores the volume of the sound corresponding to the moving image to return to the first display mode. Since the output mode is restored, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image.

[Feature βH3]
A gaming machine according to feature βH1 or feature βH2,
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means converts the moving image corresponding sound from the first output mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a first volume to a second volume smaller than the first volume. transition to the second output mode of outputting at a volume of
The image display means shifts to the second display mode after a predetermined time has elapsed after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode,
After the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and before the image display means shifts to the second display mode, if the return condition is satisfied,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sound output means restores the first output mode by returning the sound volume of the motion picture corresponding sound to the first sound volume.

According to the feature βH3, if the return condition is met after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and before the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image is displayed. The means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means restores the first output mode by returning the volume of the sound corresponding to the moving image to the volume of the first volume. Therefore, while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image, it is possible to return to the state before the transition condition is established in a natural flow without discomfort.

[Feature βH4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βH1 to βH3,
the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal head position of the first moving image;
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the moving image corresponding sound.

According to feature βH4, after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the return condition is satisfied, and the first display mode and When returning to the first output mode, display is started from the temporal head position of the first moving image, and output is started from the temporal head position of the sound corresponding to the moving image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the first moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the sound corresponding to the moving image. can be done. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the first moving image and output is started from a temporally middle position of the sound corresponding to the moving image, the player will not be able to satisfy the return condition. After that, the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image are viewed from a position in the middle of time. may feel ugly. On the other hand, according to the feature βH4, the player can appreciate the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image from the temporal head position, so that it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player. At the same time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image can all be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature βH5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βH1 to βH4,
The second display mode includes a mode in which a second moving picture different from the first moving picture is displayed, a mode in which at least part of the first moving picture is stopped and displayed, and a mode in which the first moving picture is not displayed. A mode in which a still image different from the first moving image is displayed, or a mode in which the moving image and the still image are hidden,
The first output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a volume of a first volume,
The second output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a volume of a second volume smaller than the volume of the first volume, or a mode in which the output of the moving image corresponding sound is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βH5, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition has been satisfied and the image display means and the sound output means have transitioned to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature βH6]
A gaming machine according to feature βH5,
A gaming machine, wherein the volume of the second magnitude is equal to or less than a volume that cannot be recognized by the player.

According to the feature βH6, when the sound output means shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the sound corresponding to moving images becomes equal to or less than the volume that the player cannot recognize, so the transition condition is satisfied and the sound is output. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the means has already transitioned to the second output mode.

[Feature βH7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βH1 to βH6,
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
After the game cycle in which the display corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means is completed, the transition condition determination means determines that a predetermined time has elapsed without starting either the special game state or the next game cycle. A game machine characterized by determining that the transition condition is satisfied when the transition condition is satisfied.

If a predetermined period of time elapses after the game round ends without starting either the special game state or the next game round, there is a high possibility that the player has not played a game in the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the feature βH7, the transition condition can be established in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

[Feature βH8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βH1 to βH7,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that a game ball has been ejected onto the game board,
The game machine, wherein the transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition is established when the game ball is not detected by the detection means for a predetermined period of time.

According to the feature βH8, since the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected onto the game board, the player is in an uncomfortable situation in which the transition condition is satisfied even though the player is playing the game. Occurrence can be reduced.

[Feature βH9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βH1 to βH8,
The game machine, wherein the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the acquisition means acquires the special information after the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature βH9, when the special information is acquired, the image display means returns to the first display mode and the sound output means returns to the first output mode. can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature βH10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βH1 to βH9,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that a game ball has been ejected onto the game board,
The game machine, wherein the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection means after the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature βH10, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected onto the game board. It is possible to reduce the unpleasant situation for the player that the game does not hold for a long time (for example, 1 minute).

<Characteristic βI group>
The feature βI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature βI1]
Image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
As a first output mode, sound output means for outputting moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level;
a command receiving means for receiving a command;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means is in another display mode (a mode for displaying a demonstration video) in which continuity with the predetermined moving picture is cut off, and the sound output means is in a state where continuity with the sound corresponding to the moving picture is cut off. identification information storage means for storing identification information (cue determination flag) that can identify a specific mode, which is another output mode (a mode in which output of background music is stopped);
Judgment means for judging whether or not the specific mode is achieved based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means when the command receiving means receives a specific command (return condition satisfaction command). and,
with
When the command receiving means receives the specific command, and the determining means determines that it is in the specific mode based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 200) teeth,
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts displaying the predetermined moving image from a predetermined temporal position (Fig. 200),
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound from a predetermined temporal position (Fig. 200).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βI1, when the image display means is restored to the first display mode and the sound output means is restored to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display means starts displaying. Since the time positions at which the sound output means and the sound output means start outputting the sound corresponding to the moving picture are respectively predetermined, synchronization between the predetermined moving picture and the sound corresponding to the moving picture can be easily performed.

[Feature βI2]
A gaming machine according to feature βI1,
A case where the command receiving means receives the specific command and the determining means determines that the specific mode is not the specific mode based on the identification information, and the image displaying means has no continuity with the predetermined moving image. In the case of the maintained display mode (the mode from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 200),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in the mode in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 201 and 202),
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image whose continuity is maintained (FIGS. 201 and 202).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βI2, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the display mode in which the continuity with the predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display means is returned to the first display mode. continues to display a predetermined moving image in a manner in which continuity is maintained, and the sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the moving image corresponding to the predetermined moving image in which continuity is maintained, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. , the image display means can be returned to the first display mode, and the sound output means can be returned to the first output mode.

[Feature βI3]
A gaming machine according to feature βI1 or feature βI2,
the predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image is a temporal head position of the predetermined moving image;
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature βI3, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display means starts displaying. Since the temporal position at which the sound output means and the sound output means start outputting the sound corresponding to the moving image is the temporal head position respectively, the display starts in the middle of the predetermined moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image starts in the middle. As compared with the case where the image display means and the sound output means execute the processing, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player.

[Feature βI4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βI1 to βI3,
The gaming machine, wherein the other display mode is a mode in which the image display means displays an image different from the predetermined moving image, or a mode in which image display is stopped.

According to feature βI4, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode from the specific mode, another display mode as the specific mode before returning to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image. Since it is a mode in which an image is displayed or a mode in which the display of an image is stopped, it is possible to return to the first display mode and start displaying a predetermined moving image from a predetermined temporal position. , the discomfort given to the player can be reduced. Note that images include moving images and still images.

[Feature βI5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βI1 to βI4,
The other output mode includes a mode in which the sound output means outputs a sound different from the sound corresponding to the moving image, and a mode in which the sound output means outputs the moving image corresponding or the other sound at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player. or a mode in which the sound output means stops outputting.

According to feature βI5, when the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the other output mode as the specific mode before returning to the first output mode is different from the moving image corresponding sound. Since it is a mode in which other sounds are being output, a mode in which moving images or other sounds are being output at an output level unrecognizable by the player, or a mode in which output is stopped, the first output mode is selected. Even if the output of moving image corresponding sound corresponding to a predetermined moving image whose display is started from a predetermined time position is resumed and output is started, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

<Characteristic βJ group>
The feature βJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature βJ1]
acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Elapsed time determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed;
image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 236, demo moving image in the example shown in FIG. 237) as a first display mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means is
When the elapsed time determination means determines that the predetermined time has passed, the first display mode is shifted to the second display mode (the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image) (Figs. 236 and 237). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode has ended, the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, and the first display mode is changed to the first display mode. When displaying one moving image, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image (FIGS. 236 and 237).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βJ1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode is over, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the first display mode and returned to the first display mode. When displaying the first moving image, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Therefore, control can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started varies when the first moving image is displayed after transitioning to the first display mode. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which display of the first moving image is started when shifting to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image is changed, for example, the predetermined display mode of the second display mode can be used. When the display period ends, the display of the first moving image is started from the temporal position of the first moving image that was displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means A configuration that determines the temporal position of the first moving image at which display is started when the transition from the second display mode to the first display mode is based on the elapsed time after the transition to the second display mode and even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as internal processing, and the display mode is shifted from the second display mode to the first display mode. In some cases, a configuration for displaying the first moving image that is continuously reproduced as internal processing may be used.

Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the feature βJ1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially simultaneously in each gaming machine and the display mode shifts to the first display mode. When the game machine shifts to the first display mode and displays the first moving image, the display starts from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving images displayed in each game machine are synchronized, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature βJ2]
The gaming machine according to feature βJ1,
transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for transitioning the image display means to a third display mode (mode for displaying a demonstration video), is established;
The image display means is
When the transition condition is satisfied during the first display mode (during the mode of displaying the background moving image), the satisfaction of the transition condition triggers a shift to the third display mode (Fig. 200),
When the transition condition is established during the second display mode (while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed), the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends. Transition to the third display mode (Fig. 238),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when shifting to the third display mode and displaying a third moving image (demonstration moving image), display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the third moving image.

According to the feature βJ2, even if the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted during the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is displayed in advance. Since the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player and improve the interest in the game.

Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the feature βJ2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially at the same time in each gaming machine and shifts to the third display mode. When the game machine shifts to the third display mode and displays the third moving image, it starts displaying the third moving image from a predetermined temporal position. videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the third moving images displayed on each gaming machine are synchronized, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Feature βJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature βJ2,
Return condition determination means for determining whether or not a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode (a mode for displaying a background moving image), is satisfied;
The image display means is
When the return condition is satisfied during the third display mode (during the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image), the satisfaction of the return condition triggers the return to the first display mode (Fig. 200),
When the return condition is established during the second display mode (during the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image), the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends. Returning to the first display mode (Fig. 239),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, display of the first moving image is started from the predetermined temporal position.

According to the feature βJ3, even if the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is displayed in advance. Triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, the display mode is returned to the first display mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature βJ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βJ1 to βJ3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal head position of the first moving image.

According to the feature βJ4, compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the first moving image when shifting to or returning to the first display mode to display the first moving image, the It is possible to reduce discomfort given to the person. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a position in the temporal middle of the first moving image when shifting to or returning to the first display mode to display the first moving image, the player may Since the first moving image is to be viewed from a position in the middle of the time, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the first moving image that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature βJ4, the player can be made to watch the first moving image from the temporal start position. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the moving images from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature βJ5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βJ1 to βJ4,
A sound output means for outputting a sound corresponding to a moving image, which is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means,
The sound output means outputs a first moving image corresponding sound (background A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined temporal position of music).

According to the feature βJ5, the display of the first moving image and the output of the first sound corresponding to the moving image are easily synchronized compared to the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the sound corresponding to the first moving image is started varies. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the output of the sound corresponding to the first moving image is started to change, for example, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the image display means changes the output of the first moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the image display means shifts from the temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode to the first position. The configuration for starting the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image and the temporal position of the first sound corresponding to the moving image at which the output is started when shifting to the mode of outputting the first sound corresponding to the moving image is displayed by the image display means as a second display. A configuration determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode, and the reproduction of the first moving image corresponding sound is continued as internal processing even after the image display means transitions from the first display mode to the second display mode. In addition, when the image display means shifts or returns from the second display mode to the first display mode, there is a configuration for outputting the first moving image corresponding sound that is continuously reproduced as an internal process. .

[Feature βJ6]
A gaming machine according to feature βJ5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the first moving image corresponding sound.

According to feature βJ6, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player, compared to a configuration in which output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started at a position in the middle of time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output of the first moving image-related sound is started from a position in the middle of time, the player will be able to appreciate the first sound corresponding to the moving image from a position in the middle of time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or may feel unsatisfactory that there is a part of the first moving image corresponding sound that has not been appreciated. On the other hand, according to the feature βJ6, the player can appreciate the first motion picture corresponding sound from the temporal head position, so that the player can be less uncomfortable. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the first motion picture corresponding sound from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature βJ7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βJ2 to βJ3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal head position of the third moving image.

According to the feature βJ7, when the third moving image is displayed after shifting to the third display mode, the display is started from the position in the middle of the third moving image in terms of time. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a temporally middle position of the third moving image when shifting to the third display mode and displaying the third moving image, the player will not be able to display the third moving image. Since the video is to be viewed from a position in the middle of the time, the user may feel a sense of incongruity or feel unsatisfied that there is a portion of the third video that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature βJ7, the player can be allowed to watch the third moving image from the temporal start position. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the moving images from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature βJ8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βJ2 to βJ4,
A sound output means for outputting a sound corresponding to a moving image, which is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display means,
When the image display means starts displaying the third moving image from the predetermined temporal position, the sound output means outputs a third moving image corresponding sound (demo A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined temporal position of music).

According to the feature βJ8, the display of the third moving image and the output of the third moving image corresponding sound can be easily synchronized compared to the configuration in which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started to change in time. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the output of the sound corresponding to the third moving image is started to change, for example, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the image display means displays the third moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the image display means shifts from the temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode to the third position. The configuration for starting the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image and the temporal position of the third sound corresponding to the moving image at which the output is started when the output of the third sound corresponding to the moving image is shifted to the second display by the image display means. A configuration determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode, and even after the image display means transitions from the third display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the third moving image corresponding sound is continued as internal processing In addition, when the image display means shifts from the second display mode to the third display mode, a configuration for outputting the third moving image corresponding sound that is continuously reproduced as internal processing may be used.

[Feature βJ9]
The gaming machine according to feature βJ8,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound is a temporal head position of the third moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature βJ9, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player, compared to the configuration in which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started at a position in the middle of time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started at a position in the middle of time, the player will be able to appreciate the third sound corresponding to the moving image from the middle position in time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity, or may feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the third moving image corresponding sound that has not been appreciated. On the other hand, according to the feature βJ9, the player can be made to appreciate the third moving image corresponding sound from the temporal head position, so that the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he/she can appreciate all of the third motion picture corresponding sound from the temporal head position. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The inventions of the feature βH group, the feature βI group, and the feature βJ group solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed for the purpose of improving the interest of games. For example, there is known a game machine that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, there is a demand for further improvement in technology for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic βK group>
The feature βK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βK1]
Sound (BGM music M1) is recorded based on sound data (multiple audio data constituting BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, single BGM music M1 audio data in FIG. 301). a reproducing means (reproducing function in audio channel 1) for reproducing the
an output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the sound reproduced by the reproduction means;
A gaming machine comprising
The reproducing means is
After the sound recorded in the sound data is reproduced from the temporal start position to the temporal end position, a predetermined position after the temporal start position of the sound recorded in the sound data is reproduced. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for starting reproduction of the sound recorded in the sound data from the recorded time position.

According to the feature βK1, after the sound recorded in the sound data is reproduced from the temporal start position to the temporal end position, the sound recorded in the sound data after the temporal start position To suppress the deterioration of a player's mood due to the repeated reproduction of the entire sound recorded in the sound data, since the reproduction of the sound recorded in the sound data is started from a predetermined time position. can be done.

Specifically, for example, the sound recorded in the sound data is a piece of music, and the predetermined temporal positions of the piece of music correspond to the prelude part corresponding to the prelude of the piece of music and the main melody of the piece of music. By adopting a configuration that is set at a break with the main part, after the introductory part and the main part of the song are played back, the main part of the song will be played back. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player, who has been excited by listening to the main part of the music, from being in a bad mood due to the replay of the prelude part.

[Feature βK2]
A gaming machine according to feature βK1,
The sound data is data in which music is recorded,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the music recorded in the sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βK2, after the music is reproduced to the temporal end position, the reproduction is started from the break of the measure of the music. It is possible to start playing the song from a different time position.

[Feature βK3]
A gaming machine according to feature βK1 or feature 2,
The sound data is data in which sound including voice is recorded,
The predetermined temporal position of the sound including the voice recorded in the sound data is a temporal position in a period during which the voice is not included in the reproduction time of the sound including the voice. A gaming machine characterized by being a position.

According to the feature βK3, after the sound recorded in the sound data is reproduced to the final position in terms of time, the voice is not reproduced from the middle, so the sound recorded in the sound data is reproduced to the final position in terms of time. After the voice is played, the reproduction of the sound including the voice can be started without giving the player a sense of incongruity or discomfort that the voice is reproduced from the middle.

[Feature βK4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βK1 to βK3,
The sound data is composed of at least first divided sound data (audio data forming the prelude part of the BGM music M1) and second divided sound data (audio data forming the main part of the BGM music). is composed of
The reproducing means comprises means for reproducing the sound recorded in the second divided sound data after reproducing the sound recorded in the first divided sound data,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the sound recorded in the sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in the second divided sound data.

According to feature βK4, even in a configuration in which sound is recorded in data in a format that makes it impossible or difficult to specify the temporal position of the recorded sound and start playback, It is possible to start reproducing the recorded sound from a predetermined time position.

<Characteristic βL group>
The feature βL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βL1]
The first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, the single BGM music M1 audio data in FIG. ) for reproducing the first sound (reproducing function in audio channel 1);
output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
mute state starting means for starting a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
mute state termination means for terminating the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising
The first reproducing means is
The first sound recorded in the first sound data is recorded at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions (the temporal head position of the sound recorded in each sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1, It is possible to start playback from a plurality of playback start positions set in the BGM music M1 audio data,
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the time when the mute state starts, the first sound recorded in the first sound data even after the mute state starts means for executing a process capable of specifying a reproduction position during a mute state, which is a temporal reproduction position of the first sound when the reproduction of the first sound continues or is assumed to continue;
Triggered by the termination of the mute state, the mute state at a point in time when the mute state ends, among the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data. 259, the predetermined temporal position (the BGM means for starting the reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from the time position of the beginning of the sound recorded in the third main part sound data of the musical composition M1;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βL1, the first sound is continuously reproduced even during the mute state, and the game expects that the reproduction of the first sound continues even after the mute state ends. The difference between the person's imagination of the temporal position of the first sound after the end of the mute state and the temporal position of the first sound that actually started playing when the mute state ended It is possible to start playing the first sound from a predetermined temporal position while suppressing it. As a result, for example, even if a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data start reproducing the first sound from the relevant temporal positions, the player can If it is set so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player, the reproduction of the first sound can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βL2]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1,
Second reproducing means (voice playback function on channel 2),
The output means is capable of outputting the second sound reproduced by the second reproduction means,
The mute state starting means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the second reproduction means starts reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data. comprising means for initiating
The mute state termination means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data by the second reproduction means ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for terminating the.

According to the feature βL2, while the second sound is being reproduced by the second reproducing means, the first sound is in a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means. The player's attention can be focused on the second sound.

[Feature βL3]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1 or feature βL2,
The first sound data is data in which music is recorded,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βL3, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music piece is started from the bar break, so that when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music piece can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable. can.

[Feature βL4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βL1 to βL3,
The first sound data is data in which sound including voice is recorded,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the sound containing the voice recorded in the first sound data does not contain the voice within the reproduction time of the sound containing the voice. A gaming machine characterized by being a temporal position within a period.

According to the feature βL4, since the voice is not reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends, the player can enjoy the voice without feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable that the voice is reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends. can start playing a sound containing

[Feature βL5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βL1 to βL4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1),
The first reproducing means comprises means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βL5, even in a configuration in which sound is recorded in data in a format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify the temporal position of the recorded sound and start playback, It is possible to start reproducing the recorded sound from a predetermined time position.

<Characteristic βM group>
The feature βM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from modification 1 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βM1]
The first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, the single BGM music M1 audio data in FIG. ) for reproducing the first sound (reproducing function in audio channel 1);
output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
mute state starting means for starting a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
mute state termination means for terminating the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising
The first reproducing means is
The first sound recorded in the first sound data is recorded at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions (the temporal head position of the sound recorded in each sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1, It is possible to start playback from a plurality of playback start positions set in the BGM music M1 audio data,
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the time when the mute state starts, the first sound recorded in the first sound data even after the mute state starts means for executing a process capable of specifying a reproduction position during a mute state, which is a temporal reproduction position of the first sound when the reproduction of the first sound continues or is assumed to continue;
A temporal position, among the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data, reached first by the reproduction position during the mute state after the start of the mute state. means for storing information capable of specifying (in FIG. 290, the temporal head position of the audio recorded in the first main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1);
means for starting reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from the predetermined temporal position specified from the stored information, triggered by the termination of the mute state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βM1, the temporal position of the first sound whose reproduction is started when the mute state ends is predetermined for the first sound at which the mute state reproduction position first reaches during the mute state. Therefore, the temporal length of the first sound, which is not output from the output means and cannot be heard by the player during the period from the start of the mute state to the end of the mute state, is lengthened. It can be suppressed. Therefore, while suppressing the player's dissatisfaction that the desired part of the first sound could not be heard during the mute state, the first sound can be played from a predetermined time position. Playback can be started. As a result, for example, even if a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data start reproducing the first sound from the relevant temporal positions, the player can If it is set so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player, the reproduction of the first sound can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βM2]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1,
Second reproducing means (voice playback function on channel 2),
The output means is capable of outputting the second sound reproduced by the second reproduction means,
The mute state starting means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the second reproduction means starts reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data. comprising means for initiating
The mute state termination means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data by the second reproduction means ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for terminating the.

According to the feature βM2, while the second sound is being reproduced by the second reproducing means, the first sound is not output from the output means and is in a mute state. The player's attention can be focused on the second sound.

[Feature βM3]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1 or feature βM2,
The first sound data is data in which music is recorded,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βM3, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music is started from the break of the bar of the music. can.

[Feature βM4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βM1 to βM3,
The first sound data is data in which sound including voice is recorded,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the sound containing the voice recorded in the first sound data does not contain the voice within the reproduction time of the sound containing the voice. A gaming machine characterized by being a temporal position within a period.

According to feature βM4, since the voice is not reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends, the player can enjoy the voice without giving the player the sense of discomfort or discomfort caused by the voice being reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends. can start playing a sound containing

[Feature βM5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βM1 to βM4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1),
The first reproducing means comprises means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βM5, even in a configuration in which sound is recorded in data in a format in which it is impossible or difficult to specify the temporal position of the recorded sound and start playback, It is possible to start reproducing the recorded sound from a predetermined time position.

<Characteristic βN group>
The feature βN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, mainly from modification 2 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βN1]
The first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, the single BGM music M1 audio data in FIG. ) for reproducing the first sound (reproducing function in audio channel 1);
output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
mute state starting means for starting a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
mute state termination means for terminating the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising
The first reproducing means is
The first sound recorded in the first sound data is recorded at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions (the temporal head position of the sound recorded in each sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1, It is possible to start playback from a plurality of playback start positions set in the BGM music M1 audio data,
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the start of the mute state,
Triggered by the termination of the mute state, one temporal position of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is selected and set from among the plurality of predetermined temporal positions. A game machine characterized by comprising means for starting reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from the first sound data.

According to the feature βN1, the player can determine from which predetermined temporal position the first sound being reproduced at the start of the mute state will be reproduced at the end of the mute state. It is not possible to predict when it will start. Therefore, it is possible to give unexpectedness and surprise to the player, prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and start playing the first sound from a predetermined time position. Become. As a result, for example, even if a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data start reproducing the first sound from the relevant temporal positions, the player can If it is set so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player, the reproduction of the first sound can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βN2]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1,
Second reproducing means (voice playback function on channel 2),
The output means is capable of outputting the second sound reproduced by the second reproduction means,
The mute state starting means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the second reproduction means starts reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data. comprising means for initiating
The mute state termination means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data by the second reproduction means ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for terminating the.

According to the feature βN2, while the second sound is being reproduced by the second reproducing means, the first sound is not output from the output means, so that the second sound can be further emphasized. The player's attention can be focused on the second sound.

[Feature βN3]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1 or feature βN2,
The first sound data is data in which music is recorded,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βN3, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music piece is started from the bar break, so that when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music piece can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable. can.

[Feature βN4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN3,
The first sound data is data in which sound including voice is recorded,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the sound containing the voice recorded in the first sound data does not contain the voice within the reproduction time of the sound containing the voice. A gaming machine characterized by being a temporal position within a period.

According to the feature βN4, since the voice is not reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends, the voice can be reproduced without causing the player to feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable that the voice is reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends. can start playing a sound containing

[Feature βN5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βN1 to βN4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1),
The first reproducing means comprises means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βN5, even in a configuration in which sound is recorded in data in a format that makes it impossible or difficult to specify the temporal position of the recorded sound and start playback, It is possible to start reproducing the recorded sound from a predetermined time position.

<Characteristic βO group>
The feature βO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 3 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βO1]
The first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, the single BGM music M1 audio data in FIG. ) for reproducing the first sound (reproducing function in audio channel 1);
output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
mute state starting means for starting a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
mute state termination means for terminating the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising
The first reproducing means is
The first sound recorded in the first sound data is recorded at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions (the temporal head position of the sound recorded in each sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1, It is possible to start playback from a plurality of playback start positions set in the BGM music M1 audio data,
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the time when the mute state starts, the first sound recorded in the first sound data even after the mute state starts means for executing a process capable of specifying a reproduction position during a mute state, which is a temporal reproduction position of the first sound when the reproduction of the first sound continues or is assumed to continue;
Among the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data, the reproduction position during the mute state last reaches before the end of the mute state. means for storing information capable of specifying a position (in FIG. 295, the position of the beginning of the audio recorded in the second main part audio data of the BGM music piece M1);
means for starting reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from the predetermined temporal position specified from the stored information, triggered by the termination of the mute state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βO1, the temporal position of the first sound whose reproduction is started when the mute state ends is predetermined for the first sound at which the mute state reproduction position reached last during the mute state. Therefore, it is expected that the first sound continues to be reproduced even during the mute state, and that the reproduction of the first sound continues even after the mute state ends. The player's imagination of the temporal position of the first sound after the mute state ends, and the temporal position of the first sound that actually started to be played when the mute state ended It is possible to start the reproduction of the first sound from a predetermined temporal position while suppressing the deviation from the first sound. As a result, for example, even if a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data start reproducing the first sound from the relevant temporal positions, the player can If it is set so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player, the reproduction of the first sound can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βO2]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1,
Second reproducing means (voice playback function on channel 2),
The output means is capable of outputting the second sound reproduced by the second reproduction means,
The mute state starting means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the second reproduction means starts reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data. comprising means for initiating
The mute state termination means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data by the second reproduction means ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for terminating the.

According to the characteristic βO2, while the second sound is being reproduced by the second reproducing means, the first sound is not output from the output means, so that the second sound can be further emphasized. The player's attention can be focused on the second sound.

[Feature βO3]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1 or feature βO2,
The first sound data is data in which music is recorded,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βO3, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music is started from the break of the bar of the music. can.

[Feature βO4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βO1 to βO3,
The first sound data is data in which sound including voice is recorded,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the sound containing the voice recorded in the first sound data does not contain the voice within the reproduction time of the sound containing the voice. A gaming machine characterized by being a temporal position within a period.

According to the feature βO4, since the voice is not reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends, the voice can be reproduced without causing the player to feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable that the voice is reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends. can start playing a sound containing

[Feature βO5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βO1 to βO4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1),
The first reproducing means comprises means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βO5, even in a configuration in which sound is recorded in data in a format that makes it impossible or difficult to specify the temporal position of the recorded sound and start playback, It is possible to start reproducing the recorded sound from a predetermined time position.

<Characteristic βP group>
The feature βP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 4 of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βP1]
The first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, the single BGM music M1 audio data in FIG. ) for reproducing the first sound (reproducing function in audio channel 1);
output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
mute state starting means for starting a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
mute state termination means for terminating the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising
The first reproducing means is
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the time when the mute state starts, the first sound recorded in the first sound data even after the mute state starts means for executing processing capable of specifying a reproduction position during a mute state, which is a temporal reproduction position of the first sound when the reproduction of the first sound continues or is assumed to continue ,
The mute state ending means
A plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data (temporal head positions of the sounds recorded in each sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1, one of the plurality of reproduction start positions set in the BGM music M1 audio data) (in FIG. 298, the temporal head of the audio recorded in the third main part audio data of the BGM music M1); position), and means for terminating the mute state at the timing when the reproduction position during the mute state reaches the position of the mute state.

According to the feature βP1, during the mute state, the mute state ends at the timing when the reproduction position during the mute state reaches one temporal position among a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound. Therefore, for example, even if a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data start outputting the first sound from the relevant temporal positions, the player If it is set so as not to cause discomfort to the player, the muted state of the first sound can be terminated and the output of the first sound can be started without giving discomfort to the player. Further, if the configuration is such that the reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is continued even after the mute state is started, the first sound is reproduced at the timing of ending the mute state of the first sound. only by terminating the mute state of the first sound without controlling the temporal position at which reproduction of the sound is started, from the predetermined temporal position of the first sound to the first can start outputting sound.

[Feature βP2]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1,
Second reproducing means (voice playback function on channel 2),
The output means is capable of outputting the second sound reproduced by the second reproduction means,
The mute state starting means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the second reproduction means starts reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data. comprising means for initiating
The mute state ending means
of the predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data, at the most recent temporal position after the timing of ending the reproduction of the second sound. A gaming machine comprising means for terminating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means at the timing when the reproduction position during the mute state is reached.

According to the feature βP2, while the second sound is being reproduced by the second reproducing means, the first sound is not output from the output means, so that the second sound can be further emphasized. The player's attention can be focused on the second sound. Furthermore, depending on the mute state reproduction position of the first sound at the timing of the end of the reproduction of the second sound, the time required until the mute state reproduction position reaches the predetermined temporal position of the first sound It may take some time in between. That is, a period in which neither the second sound nor the first sound is output can be interposed between the timing of ending the reproduction of the second sound and the timing of ending the mute state of the first sound. Here, if two sounds are played continuously without a silent period, it may be difficult to accurately hear the starting portion of the latter one of the two sounds. Therefore, according to this feature, the period during which neither the second sound nor the first sound is output from the timing when reproduction of the second sound ends to the timing when the mute state of the first sound ends can be sandwiched, the player can accurately listen to the portion (output start portion) immediately after the end of the mute state of the first sound, and after the end of the reproduction of the second sound, the player can attention to the first sound. Furthermore, if the reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is continued even after the start of the mute state, the first sound is reproduced after the start and end of the reproduction of the second sound. Since the output of the first sound is restarted from the same time position as when the second sound is continuously output, the first sound is continuously reproduced from the start to the end of the reproduction of the second sound. It does not give a sense of incongruity to the player who has imagined the state of being. That is, according to this feature, the output of the first sound can be restarted after the reproduction of the second sound is finished without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Feature βP3]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1 or feature βP2,
The first sound data is data in which music is recorded,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βP3, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music piece is started from the bar break, so that when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music piece can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable. can.

[Feature βP4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βP1 to βP3,
The first sound data is data in which sound including voice is recorded,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the sound containing the voice recorded in the first sound data does not contain the voice within the reproduction time of the sound containing the voice. A gaming machine characterized by being a temporal position within a period.

According to the feature βP4, since the voice is not reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends, the player can enjoy the voice without giving the player the sense of discomfort or discomfort caused by the voice being reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends. can start playing a sound containing

[Feature βP5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βP1 to βP4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1),
The first reproducing means comprises means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data. A gaming machine characterized by:

<Characteristic βQ group>
The feature βQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βQ1]
The first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, the single BGM music M1 audio data in FIG. ) for reproducing the first sound (reproducing function in audio channel 1);
output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the first sound reproduced by the first reproduction means;
mute state starting means for starting a mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means;
mute state termination means for terminating the mute state;
A gaming machine comprising
The mute state ending means
The mute state is terminated based on a first mute end trigger (end of reproduction of audio corresponding to reach effect R1, start of pattern variation in mute state while demo video is not displayed), which is a trigger for ending the mute state. a first mute state termination means for termination;
a second mute state termination means for terminating the mute state based on a second mute termination trigger (start of pattern fluctuation in the mute state during display of the demonstration video) that is a trigger for terminating the mute state;
with
The first reproducing means is
The first sound recorded in the first sound data is recorded at a plurality of predetermined temporal positions (the temporal head position of the sound recorded in each sound data constituting the BGM music piece M1, It is possible to start playback from a plurality of playback start positions set in the BGM music M1 audio data,
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the start of the mute state, the end of the mute state based on the first mute end trigger triggers the end of the mute state. the first sound recorded in the first sound data from any one of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data; means for initiating playback of a sound of 1;
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the start of the mute state, the end of the mute state based on the second mute end trigger triggers the end of the mute state. means for starting reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from a temporal head position of the first sound recorded in the first sound data;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βQ1, when ending the mute state, it is possible to start the reproduction of the first sound from an appropriate temporal position according to the type of trigger for ending the mute state. Specifically, according to this feature, from any one temporal position of a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound according to the type of the trigger for ending the mute state There are cases where the reproduction of the first sound is started and cases where the reproduction of the first sound is started from the temporal head position of the first sound.

For example, in the case where the first silence end opportunity is an opportunity that occurs while the player is playing a game in the gaming machine, the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound are If it is set so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the reproduction of the first sound is started from the time position, the first sound does not give the player a sense of discomfort when the mute state ends. can start playing the sound of

Further, for example, in the case where the second mute ending trigger is a trigger that occurs based on the fact that a new player has started playing a game in the gaming machine, when the mute state ends, the first sound is played. Since the reproduction of the first sound is started from the temporal head position, the player who newly started the game listens to the first sound completely from the temporal head position of the first sound. This makes it possible to further heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game that is about to start.

Therefore, according to this feature, when terminating the mute state, it is possible to start the reproduction of the first sound from an appropriate temporal position according to the type of trigger for terminating the mute state.

[Feature βQ2]
The gaming machine according to feature βQ1,
Second reproducing means (voice playback function on channel 2),
The output means is capable of outputting the second sound reproduced by the second reproduction means,
The mute state starting means is the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means when the second reproduction means starts reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data. comprising means for initiating
The first mute state ending means uses the end of reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data by the second reproducing means as the first mute end trigger to reproduce the first sound. A gaming machine comprising means for terminating the mute state in which no sound is output from the output means.

According to the feature βQ2, while the second sound is being reproduced by the second reproducing means, the first sound is not output from the output means, so that the second sound can be further emphasized. The player's attention can be focused on the second sound. Then, when the reproduction of the second sound ends, the mute state is terminated, and the first sound is shifted from any one temporal position of a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound. Since, for example, a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data start reproduction of the first sound from the temporal positions of If the setting is made so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even when the first sound is started, the reproduction of the first sound can be started without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling when the mute state ends.

[Feature βQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1 or βF2,
a pattern display means for displaying a pattern;
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
a symbol variation starting means for starting variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering portion;
with
The mute state starting means comprises means for starting the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, triggered by the fact that the pattern variation has not started for a predetermined period of time,
The second mute state termination means includes means for terminating the mute state in which the first sound is not output from the output means, using the start of the pattern variation as the second mute end trigger. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature βQ2, the first sound is not output from the output means in a situation where the symbol variation has not started for a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the player is likely not playing a game in the gaming machine. State can be initiated. Then, in a situation where the symbol variation has started, that is, in a situation where there is a high possibility that a new player has started playing a game in the gaming machine, the mute state is ended and the temporal head of the first sound is played. Since the reproduction of the first sound is started from the position, the player who newly started the game can listen to the first sound without omission from the temporal head position of the first sound, It is possible to further heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game to be started from now on.

[Feature βQ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βQ1 to βF3,
The first reproducing means is
When the first sound recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the time when the mute state starts, the first sound recorded in the first sound data even after the mute state starts means for executing a process capable of specifying a reproduction position during a mute state, which is a temporal reproduction position of the first sound when the reproduction of the first sound continues or is assumed to continue;
Triggered by the end of the muted state based on the first muted end trigger, the muted sound is selected from among the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data. The predetermined position immediately after the mute state reproduction position at the end of the state (in FIG. 259, the position in the middle of the time of the sound recorded in the second main part sound data of the BGM music piece M1). Reproduction of the first sound recorded in the first sound data from the temporal position (in FIG. 259, the temporal head position of the sound recorded in the third main part audio data of the music piece M1 for BGM). a means for initiating
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βQ4, the first sound is continuously reproduced even during the mute state, and the game expects that the reproduction of the first sound continues even after the mute state ends. The difference between the person's imagination of the temporal position of the first sound after the end of the mute state and the temporal position of the first sound that actually started playing when the mute state ended It is possible to start playing the first sound from a predetermined temporal position while suppressing it. As a result, for example, even if a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data start reproducing the first sound from the relevant temporal positions, the player can If it is set so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player, the reproduction of the first sound can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort when the mute state ends.

[Feature βQ5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βQ1 to βQ4,
The first sound data is data in which music is recorded,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the characteristic βQ5, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music piece is started from the break of the measure, so that the music piece can be started to be played without making the player feel uncomfortable when the mute state ends. can.

[Feature βQ6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βQ1 to βQ5,
The first sound data is data in which sound including voice is recorded,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the sound containing the voice recorded in the first sound data does not contain the voice within the reproduction time of the sound containing the voice. A gaming machine characterized by being a temporal position within a period.

According to the feature βQ6, since the voice is not reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends, the player can enjoy the voice without giving the player a sense of discomfort or discomfort that the voice is reproduced from the middle when the mute state ends. can start playing a sound containing

[Feature βQ7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βQ1 to βQ6,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1),
The first reproducing means comprises means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the first sound recorded in the first sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature βQ7, even in a configuration in which sound is recorded in data in a format that makes it impossible or difficult to specify the temporal position of the recorded sound and start playback, It is possible to start reproducing the recorded sound from a predetermined time position.

<Characteristic βR group>
The feature βR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature βR1]
The first sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music M1 in FIG. 258, the single BGM music M1 in FIG. a first reproducing means (reproducing function in audio channel 1) for reproducing the music based on audio data);
Output means (speaker 46) capable of outputting the music being reproduced by the first reproduction means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first reproducing means can start reproducing the music from a predetermined temporal position after the temporal head position of the music recorded in the first sound data. can be,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βR1, the predetermined temporal position of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with the breaks in bars of the music. To prevent a player from feeling a sense of incongruity even when reproduction is started from a position. Therefore, it is possible to start playing the music recorded in the first sound data from a predetermined time position without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature βR2]
A gaming machine according to feature βR1,
The first reproduction means is capable of starting reproduction of the music from a plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data,
A gaming machine, wherein each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music.

According to the feature βR2, each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the first sound data coincides with a bar break of the music. To prevent a player from feeling a sense of incongruity even if the reproduction of the music is started from any temporal position among a plurality of temporal positions. Therefore, it is possible to start playing the music recorded in the first sound data from various temporal positions without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature βR3]
A gaming machine according to feature βR2,
mute state starting means for starting a mute state in which the music is not output from the output means;
mute state termination means for terminating the mute state;
with
When the music recorded in the first sound data is being reproduced at the time of the start of the mute state, the first reproduction means, triggered by the end of the mute state, reproduces the first music. A gaming machine characterized in that reproduction of the music recorded in the first sound data is started from one of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the music recorded in the sound data. .

According to the feature βR1, when the mute state ends, the reproduction of the music recorded in the first sound data can be started without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature βR4]
A gaming machine according to feature βR3,
Second reproducing means (voice playback function on channel 2),
The output means is capable of outputting the second sound reproduced by the second reproduction means,
The mute state starting means starts the mute state in which the music is not output from the output means when the second reproduction means starts reproducing the second sound based on the second sound data. have the means to
The mute state terminating means terminates the mute state in which the music is not output from the output means when the reproduction of the second sound based on the second sound data by the second reproduction means ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to the feature βR4, while the second sound is being reproduced by the second reproduction means, the music is in a mute state in which the music is not output from the output means. Attention can be focused on the second sound.

[Feature βR5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βR2 to βR4,
The first sound data is composed of a plurality of divided sound data (a plurality of audio data constituting the BGM music piece M1),
The first reproducing means comprises means for sequentially reproducing the plurality of divided sound data,
Each of the plurality of predetermined temporal positions of the piece of music recorded in the first sound data is a temporal head position of the sound recorded in each of the divided sound data. Amusement machine.

According to feature βR5, even in a configuration in which sound is recorded in data in a format that makes it impossible or difficult to specify the temporal position of the recorded sound and start playback, It is possible to start reproducing the recorded sound from a predetermined time position.

The inventions of the features βK group to feature βR group solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements are being made.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

<Characteristic βS group>
The feature βS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βS1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
In the first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (when a big hit is achieved based on the entry of the ball into the starting port), the game ball is played in a predetermined manner. means for executing an effect prompting the player to shoot (a right-handed hitting effect) during a period after the game round execution means ends the game round;
In a second case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the judging means has judged that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small win) means for executing an effect (right-handed suggestive effect) to prompt the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner during a period after the game round execution means finishes the game round;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βS1, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes an effect to prompt the shooting of the game ball in a predetermined manner. is executed, the player who is judging whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on the effect, based on the first case It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed.

[Feature βS2]
A gaming machine according to feature βS1,
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player after the game round is completed when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the one type of privilege determined by the type determination means;
with
The type determination means includes means (function for executing type determination processing) for determining the one type of privilege to be given to the player after the game cycle in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature βS2, the type determining means determines a type of privilege to be given to the player after the game rounds in which the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. delaying the timing at which the privilege type display means displays information on the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, compared with the gaming machine that determines the one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of can be done. Therefore, when an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner is executed after the end of the game round, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition is determined based on the effect. It is possible to give the player who is judging a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case, and furthermore, display the information about the privilege on the privilege type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to a player before the end, a period that can give a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case. can be lengthened.

[Feature βS3]
A gaming machine according to feature βS2,
Equipped with a type-determining ball-entering portion (type-determining gate 202) that is a ball-entering portion into which a game ball can enter,
The type determining means gives the one type of privilege to the player when the game ball enters the type determining ball entering section after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining

According to the feature βS3, after the game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition has ended, and furthermore, after the player has entered the game ball into the type-determining ball entry section, the privilege type display means displays the type Since the information about the one type of privilege determined by the determining means is displayed, the timing of displaying the information about the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means by the privilege type display means can be further delayed. Therefore, when an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner is executed after the end of the game round, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition is determined based on the effect. It is possible to give the player who is judging a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case, and furthermore, display the information about the privilege on the privilege type display means. A player puts a game ball into the type determining ball entry section after the game round ends, at which time it can be determined whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not the game round is completed. can be delayed until later than the time of entering the ball, and the special information determines the privilege of one type to be given to the player before the end of the game round that satisfies the predetermined condition. It is possible to further lengthen the period during which the expectation that the effect has been executed can be given based on the case of .

[Feature βS4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βS1 to βS3,
After the game round corresponding to the first case is finished, a specific process executing means for executing a specific process including causing the effect executing means to execute a effect for prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner;
specific processing execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing;
with
The type determining means is
Based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the specific process (process of case 1 in FIG. 313) by the specific process execution determination means, given to the player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining one type of privilege to be played.

According to the feature βS4, the type determination means can determine a type of benefit according to whether or not specific processing is to be executed, among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits. In other words, the mode of granting the privilege of the type determined by the type determining means and the mode of execution of the specific process by the specific process executing means can be associated with each other.

<Characteristic βT group>
The feature βT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βT1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player after the game round is completed when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning opening 222) during the period in which the privilege of the one type determined by the type determination means is granted, the privilege granting means A gaming machine comprising means for terminating the granting of a privilege of one type even though the granting of the privilege of the type has not been completed.

According to the feature βT1, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the period of granting the privilege of one type determined by the type determining means, the granting of the privilege of one type is completed. However, since the granting of the one type of privilege is terminated, when executing a new process triggered by the passage of the game ball through a specific area, the one type of privilege is granted It is possible to avoid conflicts between the processes and the processes executed along with the . In other words, during the period of granting the privilege of one type determined by the type determination means, as a process to be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area, along with the granting of the privilege of the one type It can enable the execution of the same processing that is performed with

[Feature βT2]
A gaming machine according to feature βT1,
When the game ball passes through a specific area during the period of granting the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, the privilege granting means grants the one type of privilege. Means (game state in the seventh embodiment) for ending the awarding of the privilege of the one type and starting the awarding of a new privilege based on the game ball passing through a specific area even though it has not been completed A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing transition processing/S72106) in V winning processing.

According to the feature βT2, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the period of granting the privilege of one type determined by the type determining means, the granting of the privilege of one type is completed. Although the provision of the privilege of the one type is terminated even though there is no such type, the provision of a new privilege based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area is started, so the expectation for the provision of the new privilege can be given to the player.

[Feature βT3]
A gaming machine according to feature βT1 or feature βT2,
Equipped with a type-determining ball-entering portion (type-determining gate 202) that is a ball-entering portion into which a game ball can enter,
The type determining means gives the one type of privilege to the player when the game ball enters the type determining ball entering section after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for determining (a function of executing a type determination process).

According to the feature βT3, the special information determines the privilege of one type to be given to the player when the game ball enters the type determining ball entry section after the end of the game round where the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. , the player will be actively involved in determining the type of privilege to be granted, and can make the player pay attention to the game even after the end of the game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, It is possible to heighten expectations for the type of privilege to be determined.

[Feature βT4]
A gaming machine according to feature βT2 or feature βT3,
The type determination means determines the type of privilege given when the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning opening 222), triggered by the game ball passing through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βT4, the type determination means determines the type of privilege to be granted when the game ball passes through a specific area, triggered by the game ball passing through the specific area. By entering the game ball into the type determination ball entry part, there is no need to let the type determination means determine the privilege of one type, and the specific area is determined in a series of flows from the passage of the game ball in the specific area. It is possible to start giving a new privilege based on the passage of the game ball, and to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball passes through a specific area.

<Characteristic βU group>
The feature βU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βU1]
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player (function for executing the opening/closing execution mode);
A ball entry area (first start opening 33, second start opening 34, V winning opening 222) into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of privilege grant opportunity ball entry areas that serve as a trigger for granting the privilege;
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
A gaming machine comprising
The type determining means is
When the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry area (first start port 33, second start aperture 34), the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry region. A first privilege that determines the type of the privilege to be granted based on the fact that the game ball enters a ball entry area (type determination gate 202) different from the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry area. a type determining means;
When the game ball enters the second privilege giving opportunity ball entry area (V winning opening 222), it is awarded based on the game ball entering the second privilege giving opportunity ball entry area. second privilege type determining means for determining the type of privilege when a game ball enters the second privilege granting opportunity ball entry area (V winning opening 222);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βU1, the method of determining the type by the type determining means is the case where the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry area and the case where the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity ball entry area. Since it differs depending on whether or not the game is played, when the type of privilege is determined, it is possible to create a variety of playability, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature βU2]
A gaming machine according to feature βU1,
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
with
The acquisition condition is established by the game ball entering the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry area,
The first privilege type determining means,
What is the first privilege giving opportunity ball-entering area in the period after the game round executed by the game round execution means triggered by the game ball entering the first privilege giving opportunity ball-entering area? A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining the type of privilege to be given when a game ball enters a different ball entry area.

According to the feature βU2, during the period after the game round executed by the game round execution means triggered by the game ball entering the first privilege giving opportunity ball entry area, the player determines the type of privilege. Since the player is actively involved in the game, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even during the period after the end of the game round.

[Feature βU3]
A gaming machine according to feature βU1 or feature βU2,
When the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity entering ball area,
The gaming machine, wherein the privilege granting means includes means for deciding to grant the privilege.

According to the feature βU3, when the game ball enters the second privilege giving opportunity ball entry area, the privilege giving means decides to give the privilege. Further, according to the feature βU1, the second privilege type determination means determines that, when the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity ball entry area, the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity ball entry area. The type of privilege given based on the hitting of the ball is determined with the entry of the game ball into the second privilege giving opportunity ball entry area. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second privilege giving opportunity ball entry area, it is confirmed that the privilege is given, and the type of privilege to be given is also determined. As a result, it is possible to impart a sense of speed to the player regarding the progress of the game when the game ball enters the second privilege giving opportunity ball entry area, and to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the above feature βU2, when the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry area, it is triggered by the game ball entering the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry area. A game round is executed, and in the period after the end of the game round, the type of privilege to be granted is determined when the game ball enters a ball entry area different from the first privilege grant opportunity ball entry area. A decision is made and then rewards are awarded. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity ball entering area, compared with the case where the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity ball entering area, until the privilege is granted There is no sense of speed. As a result, the progress of the game is slowed down depending on whether the game ball enters the first privilege giving opportunity ball entry area or the game ball enters the second privilege giving opportunity ball entry area. It is possible to impart an intonation to the player's sense of anticipation for the game, and to improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic βV group>
The feature βV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βV1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player after the game round is completed when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
A first prize winning port that is a ball entry part that triggers awarding a prize ball, which is a game ball as a privilege, to a player;
a second winning hole that is a ball-entering part that serves as a trigger for awarding a prize ball, which is a game ball as a privilege, to a player and is a ball-entering part that is different from the first winning hole;
A game ball can enter the first prize hole or can be easily entered, and a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter as compared with the entered state. A first winning opening state transition means (first opening/closing door 36b) for transitioning between a certain non-ball entering state;
A ball entry state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered into the second winning hole, and a state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter as compared with the above entry state. A second winning opening state transition means (second opening and closing door 213) for transitioning between a certain non-entering state,
State transition means operation control means for controlling the operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising
The state transition means operation control means,
When the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means has the predetermined condition, the second winning opening state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) is set to the state after the end of the game round. A second prize winning port state transition determining means for determining whether or not to operate during the period for granting the privilege;
operation frequency determining means for determining the number of operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means;
A game machine with

According to the feature βV1, when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies a predetermined condition, the second prize winning opening state transition means provides the privilege after the game round ends. Since the process of determining whether or not to operate during the period and the process of determining the number of operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means are executed separately, when awarding a privilege, The first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition are determined depending on whether or not the second winning hole state transition means is operated and the combination of the number of operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means. It becomes possible to realize various operation modes of the means, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature βV2]
A gaming machine according to feature βV1,
The operation count determination means includes:
After the second winning hole state transition determination means determines whether or not to operate the second winning hole state transition means during the period for awarding the privilege after the end of the game cycle, the first winning hole state transition means and means for determining the number of operations of the second winning hole state transition means.

According to the feature βV2, the number of operations of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means is determined after determining whether or not to operate the second winning hole state transition means. During the period from determining whether or not to operate the winning opening state transition means to determining the number of operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means, the second winning opening state transition means is activated. It is possible to execute processing based on the determination result of whether or not to operate. For example, if the result of determination is to operate the second winning opening state transition means, after determining whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means, the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening are determined. During the period until the number of times of operation of the state transition means is determined, execution of an effect suggesting that the second winning hole state transition means is operated can be started, and after the start of the effect, the first winning hole state transition is performed. It is possible to determine the number of operations of the means and the second winning hole state transition means.

[Feature βV3]
A gaming machine according to feature βV1 or feature βV2,
In the first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (jackpot), in the period after the game round execution means ends the game round, the second Means for executing an effect that encourages the entry of a game ball into a winning opening, and a case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (small win ) and the second case determined by the determining means, in a period after the game round executing means ends the game round, means for executing an effect to prompt the game ball to enter the second winning hole. a production execution means comprising
After the game round corresponding to the first case is finished, the specific processing execution means for executing specific processing including causing the production execution means to execute a production for prompting the game ball to enter the second winning hole. and,
specific processing execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing;
with
The second winning opening state transition determining means comprises means for determining whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means based on the result of determination by the specific process determining means. game machine.

According to the feature βV3, the second winning opening state transition determination means determines whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means based on the result of the determination by the specific processing determination means. The mode of execution of the process and the mode of operation of the first winning hole state transition means and the second winning hole state transition means can be associated with each other.

<Characteristic βW group>
The feature βW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βW1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player;
a prize winning opening which is a ball entry part into which a game ball can enter and which gives a player a prize ball which is a game ball as a privilege when a game ball enters the ball entry part; ,
The winning hole is divided into a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the above state. Winning hole state transition means (function for executing big winning hole opening/closing processing) for state transition between the ball entering state and
State transition mode determination means (type determination process) for determining a state transition mode in which the winning hole state transition means changes the state of the winning hole;
production execution means for executing production;
with
The winning entrance state transition means
In a first case (in the case of a jackpot) in which the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, after the game round ends, the state of the winning hole is changed to the non-entering state. to the ball entering state from
When the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and in the second case (in the case of a small hit) when the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the game means for transitioning the state of the winning hole from the non-ball-entering state to the ball-entering state after the end of the inning;
The performance execution means is
In the first case, the state transition mode determination means determines the state transition mode from the point in time when the game round in the first case is completed, with an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined mode. a means for executing during a period (waiting period) until the time of
In the second case, the state transition mode determining means determines the state transition mode at the point in time when the game round in the second case is completed, and the effect prompting the shooting of the game ball in a predetermined mode is performed. means for executing during a period (opening period) from the point after the determination until the state of the winning hole is first transitioned from the non-ball-entering state to the ball-entering state by the winning hole state transition means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βW1, although the first case and the second case are different processing periods, in both cases, an effect is executed to prompt the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner. do. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect for prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner is executed in different periods in the first case and the second case. As a result, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, it is judged based on the effect whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the effect has been executed based on the first case.

[Feature βW2]
A gaming machine according to feature βW1,
The effect of prompting the game ball to be shot in the predetermined manner is an effect to prompt the game ball to be shot in a manner in which the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning opening 222),
A gaming machine, wherein the specific area is an area through which only a game ball that has entered the winning hole can pass.

According to the feature βW2, the specific area is an area through which only game balls that enter the winning opening can pass. According to the above feature βW1, in both the first case and the second case, after executing an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a manner in which the game ball passes through a specific area, the winning opening state is executed. The transition means first transitions the state of the winning hole from the non-ball-entered state to the ball-entered state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who has progressed the game according to the effect to enter the game ball into the winning opening, and to make it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area. .

[Feature βW3]
A gaming machine according to feature βW1 or feature βW2,
Equipped with a state transition mode determination ball entry section (type determination gate 202) that is a ball entry section into which a game ball can be entered,
In the first case, the state transition mode determination means is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the game round corresponding to the first case ends, A gaming machine comprising means for determining the state transition mode.

Generally, in the first case, the gaming machine displays information regarding the determined state transition mode.
According to the feature βW3, in the first case, the state transition mode determination means is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the game round corresponding to the first case is completed. Since the state transition mode is determined as above, the information regarding the state transition mode is not displayed at least until the game ball enters the state transition mode determining ball entry portion. The period until the player recognizes whether it is the first case or the second case can be extended. Therefore, even if the performance is executed based on the second case, the player is given a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case. You can extend the period you can do it.

In the first case, the state transition mode is determined with the entry of the game ball into the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the game round corresponding to the first case ends. Thus, the player is actively involved in the determination of the state transition mode, and the player can pay attention to the game even after the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. It is possible to increase expectations for the state transition mode.

[Feature βW4]
The gaming machine according to feature βW3,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific area is arranged downstream of the state transition mode determining ball entry section in a direction in which game balls circulate.

According to the feature βW4, the specific area is arranged downstream of the state transition mode determining ball entry portion in the direction in which the game ball circulates. Therefore, in the first case, when an effect is executed to prompt the game ball to be shot in a manner in which the game ball passes through a specific area, and the player progresses the game according to the effect, the player A game ball can be entered into the state transition mode determination ball entry part without being conscious of it, the state transition mode can be smoothly determined, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

<Characteristic βX group>
The feature βX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βX1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
In the first case where the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition (jackpot by entering the starting hole), after the game round ends, the player a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player in the second case (V winning jackpot), which is a case where the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning opening);
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits in the first case and the second case;
A gaming machine comprising
The specific area (V winning opening) is
During the period when the privilege granting means grants the privilege, the game ball can pass through,
The privilege granting means is
During the period in which the privilege corresponding to the first case is granted, when the game ball passes through the specific area and the second case occurs, the privilege corresponding to the first case is granted. means for stopping and starting giving the privilege corresponding to the second case;
The type determining means is
In the second case, compared to the first case, the one type of privilege to be given to the player is the most advantageous type of privilege for the player among the plurality of predetermined types of privileges. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of making a decision.

According to the feature βX1, the specific area allows passage of the game ball during the period when the privilege granting means grants the privilege, and the privilege granting means grants the privilege corresponding to the first case. When the game ball passes through the specific area during the period of time and the second case occurs, the granting of the privilege corresponding to the first case is stopped, and the granting of the privilege corresponding to the second case is started. , it is possible to avoid competition in the processing related to awarding of benefits. In addition, during the period in which the privilege corresponding to the first case is granted, the game ball passes through a specific area and the second case occurs, and the granting of the privilege corresponding to the first case stops and the second case occurs. When the provision of the privilege corresponding to the case 2 is started, the player is worried that the type of privilege corresponding to the first case that has been previously granted may become more disadvantageous. is assumed. However, in this gaming machine, the type determination means determines the type of benefit that is most advantageous to the player in the second case than in the first case, out of a plurality of predetermined types of benefits. Since the probability is high, such anxiety of the player can be reduced, and a greater sense of expectation can be imparted to the player.

[Feature βX2]
A gaming machine according to feature βX1,
Equipped with a type-determining ball-entering portion (type-determining gate 202) that is a ball-entering portion into which a game ball can enter,
In the first case, the type determination means, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the type determination ball entry section after the game round corresponding to the first case is completed, determines the first means for determining the one type of privilege to be given to the player according to the case;
A gaming machine, wherein the specific area is arranged downstream of the type-determining ball entry section in a direction in which game balls circulate.

According to the feature βX2, the type determining means, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the type determining ball entry section after the game round corresponding to the first case, plays the game corresponding to the first case. Since one type of privilege to be granted to the player is determined, the type of privilege to be granted is not determined at the time when the game round corresponding to the first case is completed, and the player can select the first type. It is not possible to recognize the degree of advantage of the privilege corresponding to the case. Then, the player circulates the game ball toward the type determination ball entry section in order to determine the type of privilege to be given. At this time, since the specific area is arranged downstream of the type determination ball entry part in the direction in which the game ball circulates, the game ball circulating toward the type determination ball entry part does not pass through the specific area. Cheap. Therefore, after the privilege to be provided corresponding to the first case is determined and the awarding of the privilege is started, it is easy to shift to the awarding of the privilege corresponding to the second case in a natural flow, and the game proceeds smoothly. can be made Furthermore, since the granting of the privilege corresponding to the first case shifts to the granting of the privilege corresponding to the second case in a natural flow, the granting of the privilege corresponding to the first case corresponds to the second case. To prevent a player from having anxiety that the type of privilege corresponding to the previously granted first case may become more disadvantageous when transitioning to granting of the privilege, or Such player's anxiety can be reduced. Further, it is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of expectation.

[Feature βX3]
A gaming machine according to feature βX1 or feature βX2,
In the second case, the type determining means selects the privilege of the one type to be given to the player in response to the second case, triggered by the passage of the game ball through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining.

According to the feature βX3, in the second case, the type determination means gives a privilege of one type to the player corresponding to the second case, triggered by the game ball passing through the specific area. to decide. Therefore, in the second case, the player does not need to let the type determination means determine the privilege of one type by entering the game ball into the type determining ball entry section, and the game ball passes through the specific area. , the type of privilege corresponding to the second case is determined in a series of flows from (1) to (1), and provision of a new privilege is started. Therefore, it is possible to impart a sense of speed to the player regarding the progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area.

<Characteristic βY group>
The feature βY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βY1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing the game round when one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judgment means to the end of the game round operation; a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a specific area that can trigger a change in the progress of the game due to the passage of the game ball;
Between a passing state in which a game ball can pass or easily pass through the specific area and a non-passing state in which a game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through compared to the passing state Specific area state transition means (second opening and closing door 213) for transitioning with
A gaming machine comprising
The specific area state transition means is
In the first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the tenth modification of the seventh embodiment, in the case of a big hit based on the ball entering the starting port, ), means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state;
In the second case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (Modification 10 of the seventh embodiment) means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state;
with
The control means is
Means that does not change the state of progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area that is in the passing state in the first case;
means for changing the state of progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the passing state in the second case;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βY1, the specific area state transition means causes the specific area to transition from the non-passing state to the passing state in both the first and second cases. It does not let the player discern whether it is the case or the second case. Therefore, when the specific area is changed from the non-passing state to the passing state, the player can guess whether it is the first case or the second case. can improve the feeling. Further, in the first case, the control means does not change the state of progress of the game even when the game ball passes through the specific region that is in the passing state. can be maintained.

[Feature βY2]
A gaming machine according to feature βY1,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The production executing means is
means for executing, in the first case, an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner (right-handed hitting effect) during a period after the game round execution means ends the game round;
means for executing, in the second case, an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner (a right-handed hitting effect) during a period after the game round execution means ends the game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βY2, in both the first case and the second case, the effect executing means executes an effect for prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner. is executed, the player who is judging whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on the effect, based on the first case It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed.

[Feature βY3]
A gaming machine according to feature βY1 or feature βY2,
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player after the game round is completed when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the one type of privilege determined by the type determination means;
with
The type determination means includes means (function for executing type determination processing) for determining the one type of privilege to be given to the player after the game cycle in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature βY3, the type determination means determines a type of privilege to be given to the player after the game rounds in which the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions is completed. delaying the timing at which the privilege type display means displays information on the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, compared with the gaming machine that determines the one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of can be done. Therefore, when an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner is executed after the end of the game round, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition is determined based on the effect. It is possible to give the player who is judging a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case, and furthermore, display the information about the privilege on the privilege type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to a player before the end, a period that can give a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case. can be lengthened.

<Characteristic βZ group>
The feature βZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature βZ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a game round execution means for executing the game round when one game round is defined as a period from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judgment means to the end of the game round operation; A first control means (main control device 60) which is a control means provided and controls the progress state of the game;
A specific area (V winning opening 222), which is an area that can be an opportunity to change the progress state of the game by the passage of the game ball,
A second control means (sound light emission control device 90, display control device 100) that is a control means different from the first control means and controls processing that does not affect the progress of the game;
an operation mechanism (V winning auxiliary mechanism) that executes an operation that may affect the behavior of circulating game balls;
A gaming machine comprising
The first control means is
In the first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition (in the tenth modification of the seventh embodiment, in the case of a big hit based on the ball entering the starting port, ), means for not changing the state of progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area;
In the second case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (Modification 10 of the seventh embodiment) means for changing the state of progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area when a small hit is achieved in
specific information transmitting means for transmitting specific information to the second control means in the first case and not transmitting the specific information to the second control means in the second case;
with
The second control means is
The operating mechanism is divided into a first state in which the circulating game balls can pass through the specific area, and a second state in which the circulating game balls are more likely to pass through the specific area than in the first state. a means for transitioning between states;
means for transitioning the operating mechanism from the first state to the second state when the specific information is received from the specific information transmitting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βZ1, the state transition of the operating mechanism is controlled by the second control means, so the processing by the first control means can be reduced. Also, the second control means shifts the operation mechanism from the first state to the second state when the specific information is received in the first case, and does not receive the specific information in the second case. Do not transition the operating mechanism from the first state to the second state. Furthermore, in the first case, the first control means does not change the state of progress of the game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being affected by the control of the state transition of the operation mechanism by the second control means.

[Feature βZ2]
The gaming machine according to βZ1,
It is arranged upstream of the operating mechanism in the direction in which the game ball circulates, and the specific area is divided into a passing state in which the game ball can pass or easily passes through the specific area, and a passing state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area. A specific area state transition means (second opening and closing door 213) for transitioning between a non-passing state in which a game ball cannot pass or a state in which it is difficult to pass compared to the passing state,
The specific area state transition means is
means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state in the first case (when a big win is achieved based on the ball entering the starting hole);
means for transitioning the specific area from the non-passing state to the passing state in the second case (when a small win is made);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βZ2, the specific area state transition means causes the specific area to transition from the non-passing state to the passing state in both the first and second cases. It does not let the player discern whether it is the case or the second case. Therefore, when the specific area is changed from the non-passing state to the passing state, the player can guess whether it is the first case or the second case. can improve the feeling. Further, in the first case, the first control means does not change the state of progress of the game even when the game ball passes through the specific area that is in the passing state, so the game based on the first case progress can be maintained.

[Feature βZ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βZ1 or feature βZ2,
The second control means comprises production execution means for executing production,
The production executing means is
means for executing, in the first case, an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner (right-handed hitting effect) during a period after the game round execution means ends the game round;
means for executing, in the second case, an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner (a right-handed hitting effect) during a period after the game round execution means ends the game round;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature βZ3, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes an effect to prompt the shooting of the game ball in a predetermined manner. is executed, the player who is judging whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on the effect, based on the first case It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the performance has been executed.

[Feature βZ4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features βZ1 to βZ3,
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player after the game round is completed when the special information corresponding to the game round executed by the game round executing means satisfies the predetermined condition;
a type determination means for determining one type of benefit to be granted to a player among a plurality of predetermined types of benefits;
privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information about the one type of privilege determined by the type determination means;
with
The type determination means includes means (function for executing type determination processing) for determining the one type of privilege to be given to the player after the game cycle in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature βZ4, the type determination means determines a type of privilege to be given to the player after the game rounds in which the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. delaying the timing at which the privilege type display means displays information on the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, compared with the gaming machine that determines the one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of can be done. Therefore, when an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined manner is executed after the end of the game round, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition is determined based on the effect. It is possible to give the player who is judging a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case, and furthermore, display the information about the privilege on the privilege type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to a player before the end, a period that can give a sense of expectation that the performance is executed based on the first case. can be lengthened.

The inventions of the features βS group to feature βZ group solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines are designed to improve the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and simplify the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and providing more sound games. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the above feature group A to feature βZ may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature described above can be applied or to which each feature is applied will be described below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part; and an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means. machine.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the summary column of the invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 25a... Touch sensor 25b... Weight button 25c... Variable resistor 26... Game ball launch button 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32 ...General winning opening 32a...First winning opening 32b...Second winning opening 32c...Third winning opening 33...First starting opening 34...Second starting opening 34a... Electric Accessory 34b...Electric Accessory Drive Unit 35...Through Gate 36...Variable Winning Device 36a...Big Winning Port 36b...Open/Close Door 36c...Variable Winning Drive Unit 37... Special figure unit 37a...First symbol display part 37b...Second symbol display part 37c...First reservation display part 37d...Second reservation display part 38...General figure unit 39... Round display section 40 Variable display unit 41 Pattern display device 41a Display surface 41aL Display area 41aS Display area 42 Nail 43 Out port 44j Stage 44j2...Stage 44k...Rising part 44l...Left drop part 44m...Right drop part 44n...Center entrance 44o...Center exit 44p...Center drop 45 ...Main display section 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 48...V prize opening 48a...Open/close door 48b...Open/close door driving section 51...First control unit 52... Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56...Case rail 57...First variable winning device 57a...First big winning opening 57b.. 1st opening/closing door 57c...First variable prize winning drive unit 57d...First ball entry prevention member 58...Second variable prize winning device 58a...Big prize opening 58a...Second big prize winning opening 58b... Second opening/closing door 58c... Second variable winning driving unit 58d... Second ball entry preventing member 59... Convex part 59a... Magnetic member 60... Main controller 61. ..Main control board 62...Main side MPU
62x...Main side CPU
63... Main side ROM
64...Main side RAM
64x... flash memory 63a... success/failure table storage area 63b... distribution table storage area 63c... reach determination table storage area 63d... fluctuation time table storage area 63e... stop result table storage Area 63f... Command information storage area 64a... Lottery counter buffer 64b... Pending information storage area 64c... Electrician pending area 64d... Various counter areas 64e... Various flag storage areas 64f. .. First determination processing result storage area 67a... Various detection sensors 70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81... Game ball launching mechanism 85... Power supply device 86 ...Power failure monitoring circuit 90...Sound light emission control device 91...Sound light emission control board 92...Sound and light side MPU
93...Sound and light side ROM
93a... Production pattern table storage area 93b... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94... Sound and light side RAM
94a... Various flag storage areas 94b... Various counter areas 94c... Lottery counter areas 96... RTC
97...Sound output LSI 97
98...ROM for voice data
100... Display control device 101... Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104...Work RAM
106...Character ROM
107...Video RAM
300... Game history management chip 302... Buffer 304... Register 306... Memory for storing prize ball number data 307... Memory for storing calculation execution conditions 307a... Memory for storing execution conditions 308 ...CPU
309... Memory for storing computation results 309a... Memory for storing number of entered balls 309b... Memory for storing entered ball information 320... Inspection machine 321... CPU
328... Display unit 329... Connection cable PA... Game area PC... Winning counter area AE... Execution area Ra... First reservation area Rb... Second reservation area Dm11 to Dm14 , Dm21 to Dm24... Hold display Sync1... First synchronous display area Sync2... Second synchronous display area MA... Main display area SA1... First sub-display area SA2... Second sub-area Display area Ds1... First reserved display area Ds2... Second reserved display area

Claims (4)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round executing means for executing the game round when a game round is defined as one game round from the start of the game round operation for informing the result of the determination by the judging unit to the end of the game round operation. and,
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player;
a prize winning opening which is a ball entry part into which a game ball can enter and which gives a player a prize ball which is a game ball as a privilege when a game ball enters the ball entry part; ,
The winning hole is divided into a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the above state. Winning hole state transition means for making a state transition between a ball entering state and
State transition mode determining means for determining a state transition mode in which the winning hole state transition means causes the state transition of the winning hole;
production execution means for executing production;
with
The winning entrance state transition means
In a first case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the state of the winning hole is changed from the non-ball entering state to the ball entering state after the game round ends. transition to
In the second case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, after the game round ends, the above-mentioned comprising means for transitioning the state of the winning hole from the non-ball-entering state to the ball-entering state;
The performance execution means is
In the first case, the state transition mode determination means determines the state transition mode from the point in time when the game round in the first case is completed, with an effect prompting the game ball to be shot in a predetermined mode. a means for performing a period up to the point in time
In the second case, the state transition mode determining means determines the state transition mode at the point in time when the game round in the second case is completed, and the effect prompting the shooting of the game ball in a predetermined mode is performed. means for executing from the time point after the determination to the time when the winning hole state transition means first transitions the state of the winning hole from the non-ball-entering state to the ball-entering state;
A game machine characterized by comprising: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The effect that prompts the game ball to be shot in the predetermined manner is a performance that prompts the game ball to be shot in a manner in which the game ball passes through a specific area,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific area is an area through which only a game ball that has entered the winning hole can pass. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
A ball-entering unit for determining state transition mode, which is a ball-entering unit into which a game ball can be entered;
In the first case, the state transition mode determination means is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the state transition mode determination ball entry section after the game round corresponding to the first case ends, A gaming machine comprising means for determining the state transition mode. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific region is arranged downstream of the state transition mode determining ball entry portion in a direction in which game balls circulate.

Images